4 eeceseto T492T £

IUUQUMTANO

3937109 S.13VHSIN “LS 40 ALISHSAINN

* + i

Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from Microsoft Corporation

https://archive.org/details/greekgrammarforsOOhadluoft

18 AND OOLLEGES

BY

NEW YORK: oLETON AND COMPANY. 443 & 445 BROADWAY. °

ai MRR peels aise

ou

PGWBED, ia OO cs NE rN:

PREFACE.

THE grammar which is here submitted to the public, is founded on the. Griechische Schulgrammatik of Guora Curtis, Professor in the University of Kiel. The work of Professor Curtius was first published in 1852, and was re- ceived in Germany with marked favor: a second edition was called for in 1855, a thi. & in 1857, and a fourth in 1859. Having been led, soon after it ap- pearod, to study it with some care, I became satisfied that it possessed impor- tent advantages of plan and execution; and I was therefore easily induced, mor than three years ago, to undertake the task of bringing it before the Amexican-publie. My first thought went no further than to reproduce it in an English version, with only such changes as might seem necessary to adapt it to the wants and habits of instructors in our country. But in carrying out this ‘purpose, it happened, by what is probably a common experience in such cases,

. that one change led on to another, until at length the alterations had assumed an extent out of all proportion to the original design. To give the book, as it stands here, the name of Curtius, would be to make him responsible in appear- ance for many things which he has not said, and might perhaps fgjl to approve.

_ Under these circumstances, it has seemed to be the only proper course, that I should assume the responsibility of the work, while making, as I cheerfully do, the fullest acknowledgments of obligation to the German scholar. Should this volume prove to be of service in the work of classical instruction, the result will be perhaps mainly due to his broad and thoughtful scholarship, and his sound, practical judgment.

It may be proper for me here to follow the example of Professor Curtius, by calling attention, at the outset, to some features in the plan and arrange- ment of this Grammar. ye

It is a fact generally understood, that the Greek, in common with the other Indo-European languages, has of late received, and is still receiving, much light from the scientific comparative study of the whole class to which it be-

“> ° ; *,

ly 7 PREFACE.

longs. The new views of Greek etymology and structure, developed and es

tablished by that study, have been made the object of special attention in the ©

preparation of this work; and have been taken up into it, as far as seemed to be consistent with the practical ends which must always be paramount in an elementary grammar.

The multiplicity of forms presented | “he different Greek dialects is the oceasion of considerable embarrassme .to the grammarian. Scattered

thr rough the sections which describe the Aitic language, they interfere seri- ~ ously with the unity of exhibition and impression which it is important to secure: but when thrown together by themselves at the end of the book, they | lose in clearness and significance, by being severed from those cormon facts — and principles with which they are naturally associated. In this Grammar, will be found a sort of compromise between the opposite difficulties. The peculiarities of euphony and inflection which belong to the other dialects, are given in smaller type at the foot of each page, under the corresponding Attic forms, so as to be kept clearly distinct from the latter, while yet presented with them in the same view.

It is hardly necessary to say that a complete exhibition of the dialects is not attempted in these pages. The multitude of forms which appear only i in lyric fragments, or in ancient inscriptions, or in the writings of grammarians, . are passed over without notice. The object has been simply to supply what is necessary in this respect for a proper reading of the classic author#? and particularly Homer, Herodotus, Pindar, and Theocritus. For the language of - Homer, I have derived much assistance from the Homeric Grammar of Ahrens (Griechische Formenlehre des Homerischen und Attischen Dialektes : Gottingen, 1852); and for that of Herodotus, from the careful and thorough investiga- tions of Bredow (Quaestiones Criticae de Dialecto Herodotea: Lipsiae, 1846).

In the sections on the verb, the forms of voice, mode, and tense are re- duced to a small number of groups, called “tense-systems.” Under this ar- rangement, which is similar to those already adopted by Ahrens and Curtius, the inflection of the verb is represented as the inflection of a few tense-stems, which are formed, each in its own way, from the common verb-stem. It is hoped that the arrangement may commend itself in use, not only as consistent with the obvious analogies of verb-formation, but also as calculated to mak the structure of the verb simpler and more intelligible to the learner.

with that of the verb, or varies f “meit by different changes. tee y special formation of partigwiar verbs—“ anomalous” formation, a8 it has been generally, but to a great extent inappropriately, termed—is exhibite de with considerable fulness, and according to a uniform method, intended to assist the apprehension and memory of the learner.

In the Syntax, the leading aim has been—not to construct a philosophical system of human expression, with Greek sentences for illustrations—but to represent, as fully and clearly as possible within the prescribed limits, the ac- tual usage and idiom of the Greek language. It has also been an object to accompany the full statement of rules and. principles with brief phrases, de-

scribing their substance, and convenient for use in the recitation-room.

In regard to the examples by which the Syntax is illustrated, it has not been thought necessary to give for each one the name of the author from whom it is cited. Only those taken from non-Attic sources, as Homer and Herodotus, are. credited. to their authors: those which come from Attic poets are marked simply as poetic: while those which come from Attic prose-writers, and zonstitute perhaps nine-tenths of the whole number, are given without

"any indication of ‘their source. The examples are translated throughout, un-

translated examples being (if I may trust my own observation) of but little use, in general, even to the better class of students. Regarded as illustrations, they are imperfect, since it is only with difficulty, and perhaps with uncertain- ty, that the learner recognizes their relation to the rule or principle to be illus-

trated. And if we view them as exercises in-translation, it may be questioned,

whether detached sentences, torn from the connections in which they stood, and involving often peculiar difficulties of language and construction, are best suited for this purpose. A similar rule has been followed even in the earlier

portions of the Grammar; except, indeed, in the first part (Orthography and

Euphony), where it could hardly be carried out with convenience: but in the second and third parts, which treat of Inflection and Formation, the Greek words introduced are accompanied regularly by a statement of their significa-

V1 PREFACE.

e has been adopted, partly, from the feeling that a student rbe expected to take much interest in words that have no meaning 3 and partly, in the belief that it is possible for a student, in this way, -- goes through his grammar, to acquire, with little trouble, a useful vocabulary of Greek expression.

In preparing this division of the work, I have made frequent. use of the Syntax der Griechischen Sprache (Braunschweig, 1846), by the late Professor ~ Madvig of Copenhagen. But my obligations are much greater—not for the Syntax only, but for almost every part of the book—to K. W. Kriiger, whose Greek Grammar (like that of Buttmann before it) marks a new epoch in the scientific treatment of its subject. Important aid has been received also from the school-grammars of Buttmann and Kihner, which are familiar to American students in the skilful translations of Dr. Robinson and Dr. Taylor. Nor must I omit to acknowledge myself indebted, for many valuable suggestions, to the excellent grammars produced in our own country by Professor Sophocles and Professor Crosby.

In the appended chapter on Versification, I have relied, partly on Munk’s Metres of the Greeks and Romans (translated by Professors Beck and Felton, Cambridge, 1844), but still more on the able treatises of Rossbach and West~ phal (Griechische Rhythmik, Leipzig, 1854; and Griechische Metrik, Leip- zig, 1856).

INTRODUCTION. Greek Language and Dialects,

PART FIRST.

CONTENTS.

eo. CONTENTS. %

ye Adjectives. . » 207

$1 Comparison of Adjectives . "290

ORTHOGRAPHY AND EUPHONY.

Vowels . . , 2 :

Diphthongs 7 ‘ ‘

Breathings . . ‘ .

Consonants F : ;

Luphony of Vowels . ‘ Vowels Interchanged . Vowels Lengthened . . Vowels Contracted . ; Vowels Omitted .

Euphony of Consonants . Consonants Doubled . Consonant-Changes .

ey of Final Sounds é

Crasis . ++ : : Elision . ‘ . Final Consonants ‘ . ‘Movable Consonants . °

“Syllables ‘ . ; ° Quantity . ° . : - Accent . , ,

Punctuation ‘ , ° °

’

PART SECOND. _ INFLECTION.

Nouns.

Virst Declension ‘(A-Decl. ) Second Declension (0-Decl. Mee Attic Second Decl. . Third Declension (Cons.-Decl. )

‘Lebial and Palatal Stems .

Lingual Stems

Liquid Stems

Stems in s . °

Stems inzandv. :

Diphthong Stems . f

Stems in GO. s ° . 4 Irregular Declension . - Local Endings Sop ny

Alphabet . : ; ; 7

Form. and Compar. of Adverbs 225 Pronouns ‘ . pe P 230 Numerals . ‘ ; : . 258 VERBS . ‘ ? 260

5|Paradigms of Verbs . ‘ - 269 yiElements of the Verb. : 306

Augment ‘ . 4 . 807

14} Reduplication . 318 16| Stem and Changes of Stem . 824 94\ Classes of Verbs. : 325 25| Passive-Sign . \ ; - 848

98| Tense-Signs ‘ 344 32| Connecting Vowels, Mode- Signs 346 3g| Endings . : 354

40 Accent of the Verb ‘ - 365 40|\Formation of Tense-Systems . 369 44| Present and Imperfect . - 369

Future Active and Middle . 372

68| First Aorist Act. and Mid. . 3880 4o| Second Aorist Act. and Mid. 383 h4| Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 3885 yg| Perf., Pluperf., Fut. Perf., Middle 388 91| Aorist and Future Passive . 395

86| Verbal Adjectives. : 398 g9| Systems of the w-form . . 899 113|Enumeration of y-forms : 403

Verbs in mw: of Eighth Class . 403 Verbs in mw of First Class . 404 Verbs in wu of Fifth Class - 407 Second Aorists of wi-form . 408

114} Second Perfects of wi-form . 409 123|Dialectic Formations . ° 410 138|Irregularities of Meaning . . 412 146|Special Formation . ‘ : 418 151} First Class (Stem-Class) . . 419 163| Second (Protracted) Class . 425 165| Third Class (Tau-Class) . . 427 172| Fourth Class (Iota-Class) . 428 176| Fifth (Nasal) Class . ° - 485 185! Sixth (Inceptive) Class ‘ 444 189} Seventh Class (Epsilon-Class). 448

193| Eighth (Reduplicating) Class 449 450

197} Ninth (Mixed) Class suis 203'Index of Verbs. F 3 451

facrox OF WORDS,

Formation of Simple eee Substantives Adj ectives : . Denominative Verbs . Composition of Words

Form of Compound Words. Meaning of Compound Words.

PART FOURTH. SYNTAX.

Definitions . ‘ : Agreement (general rules)

Omitted Subject, Predicate, and

Object . Number and Gender 5 The Article ‘O in the Dialects : 4 ‘O as a Demonstrative. ‘oasan Article . The Cases * ‘ 3

Nominative ; . ne Vocative “ ‘ A A Accusative . ‘

Two Accus. with one verb: Genitive .

with Substantives

with Verbs .

with Adjectives and Adverbs _

in looser Relations . ‘ ‘ Dative P

of Influence

of Interest .

of Association and Likeness of Instrument, Means, Manner,

Catise . ‘ . ;

of Place and Time Prepositions with Cases

with Accusative only .

with Genitive only .

with Dative only.

with Acc. and Gen.

with Acc. and Dat. .

with Acc., Gen., and Dat.

Adjectives .

Degrees of Comparison , Pronouns ; = P The Voices > ; ‘

Active - . e

CONTENTS. Middle . . 4 ; 687 Passive . 5 : ° 698 452 The Tenses . * 695 457| Tenses of the Indicative | 9 = ee 468| ‘Tenses in other Modes .« 714 472 The Modes . . . e 719 473\Finite Modes

473| in Simple Sentences . Fe 719 4g80| in Compound Sentences . 724 Indirect . : . 733 Final . ‘ : . 739 Conditional . . 744 485 Relative . < . 755 491 Infinitive 762 Dependence of the Infin. 763 504 Snbject and Predicate . « Cee B11 Infin. with Neuter Article 7718 504 Infin. with@y . : : 783 504 Infin. for Imperative . 784 B95 Participle ° 785 596 Attributive Participle | * 785 539 Predicate-Participle ‘ 787 839 Circumstantial Participle. 788 M Part. with Case Absolute 790 ce * Adjuncts of the Participle 795 553 Supplementary Participle . 796 554 Participle with é . > 803 BE Verbal Adjectives in réas 804 fH Relative Sentences 807 570! Attraction, Incorporation ‘ 807 ee Other Peculiarities. . 818 of Interrogative Sentences . ‘ 824 Negative Sentences . : 832 595 particles . 849 0? Conjunctions : 853 weds Figures of Syntax . 880

606 APPENDIX. ne VERSIFICATION . ; ; 887 62 Trochaic Rhythms . 5 899 693 Iambic Rhythms ‘ ‘ 903 697 Dactylic Rhythms . . : 908 829 Anapaestic Rhythms . ° 912 635 Logaoedic Rhythms . 916 637 Oretic Rhythms . ° ‘ 922 658 Choriambic Rhythms . . 924 65 Ionic Rhythms . 925 667 Dochmiac and Bacchic Rhythms 928 684/GreeK INDEX. ‘ - page 333 ‘684\BNGuiso INDEX. . . page 356

r INTRODUCTION. : Greek Language and Dialects.

1. The inhabitants of ancient Greece called themselves Hellénes

(CEAAnves), and their country Hellas (‘E\Ads). The name “ Hellenes ”

was applied also to the members of the same race, dispersed by coloniza- tion over the islands and coasts of the Mediterranean. By the Romans

they were called Grecians (Graeci). Their language—the Greek—is con-

nected with the languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, the Slavonic, Germanic, and Celtic nations. These are all kindred languages, and to-

_ gether form the Indo-European family of languages.

2. The Hellenes referred themselves for the most part to three prin- cipal divisions,—Aecolians, Dorians, and Ionians. To these belonged three principal dialects: the Aeolic, spoken in Aedlis, Boeotia, and Thessaly ;

_ ———the Doric, in Peloponnésus, Isthmus, and north-western Greece,—

also in Crete and Caria, Sicily and southern Italy: the Ionic, in Ionia and Attica, and in most of the Aegéan islands. LKach of them was early used in poetry,—for a long time the only species of literature. They were spoken under many different forms—secondary dialects—in different times and places. But as regards the written works which have come down to us, it is enough to specify the following forms:

3.a. The Aeolic - Lesbos), found in the lyric fragments of Alcaeus and the poetess Sappho (600 s. c.).

b. The Doric, found in the lyric poetry of Pindar (470 B. c.) and the bucolic ( pastoral) poetry of Theocritus (2708. c.). Even the Attic dramas in their lyric parts contain some Doric forms. The language of Pindar has some peculiarities derived from the Acolic, and still more from the Epic.

ce. The Jonic, including

_ 1) The Old Ionic, or Epic, found in the poetry of Homer (before 800 ». c.) and Hesiod (before 700 8. c.). In all the poetry of later times (though least of all in the dramatic dialogue) we find more or less ad- mixture of Epic words and forms.

2) The New Jonic, the language of Ionia about 400 8. c., found in

the ‘history of Herodotus and the medical writings of Hippocrites.

1D. In Homer, Hellas is only-a district in northern Greece, the Hellenes its inhabitants. For the Greeks at large, he uses the names ’Axauol, ’Apyetot, Aavaol, which, strictly taken, belong only to a part of the whole people.

2D. The division into Aeolians, Dorians, Ionians, is unknown to Homes

‘i 3

2 _ GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS. [3

Zz . The following dialect, though in strictness the Ionic of Attica, and closely related to the two preceding, is always distinguished as

d. The Attic, the language of Athens in her flourishing period (from 490 z. c.), found in many works of poetry and prose, especially the tra- gedies of Aeschylus, Sophécles, and Euripides, the comedies of Aristo- phines, the histories of Thucydides and Xendphon, the philosophical writ- ings of Plato, and the orations of Lysias, Isocrites, Aeschines, and De- mosthénes. The political importance of Athens and the superiority of her literature gave a great ascendancy to her dialect, which at length banished the others from literary use; though the Doric and the Old Tonic were still retained, the latter for epic, the former for lyric and bu- colic poetry. The Attic thus became the common language of all culti- vated Greeks; but at the same time began to lose its earlier purity. In this state, commencing about the time of Alexander (who died 323 8. c.), it is called -

e. The Common dialect () cow diddrextos), in distinction from the purer Attic. On the border between the two, stands the great philo- sopher Aristotle, with his pupil Theophrastus. Among later authors, the - most important are the historians Polybius (140 s. c.), Plutarch (100 a. p.), Arrian (150 a. p.), and Dio Cassius (200 a. p.), the geographer Strabo (1 a. p.), and the rhetoricians Dionysius of Halicarnassus (30 8. c.), and Lucian (170 4. p.).

Remark. There is a noticeable difference between the earlier and later Attic. The first is seen in the tragic poets and Thucydides; the last, in most other Attic writers. The language of Plato has an inter- mediate character. The tragic language is further marked by many pe- culiarities of its own.

4. For completeness, we may add

f, The Hellenistic, a variety of the Common dialect, found in the New Test., and in the LXX., or Septuagint version of the Old Test. The name comes from the term Hellenist (E\Anuorns from é\Anvite), applied to Hebrews, or others of foreign birth, who used the Greek language.

g. The Modern Greek, or popular language for the last thousand years, found in written works since about 1150 a. p. It is also called » fomaic from ‘Papato. (Romans), the name assumed in place of “EAAnves- by the Greeks of the middle ages.

_ Nors. Through the first two Parts of the Grammar, the forms of Attic Greek, especially the Attic prose, are described in the body of the text; while the peculiarities of other dialects (particularly those of Homer and Herodotus) are added in smaller type at the foot of each page.

Hm. stands for Homer, and Hd. for Herodotus ;—cf. is used for Lat. vonfer (compare),—sc. for scilicet (to wit),—ib. for ibidem (in the same place),—#. ¢. for ad est (that is)—e. g. for evempli gratia (for example), —xrX. for kal ra Nowra (Lat. et cetera). Other abbreviations will explain themselves, |

<—* i

a8 wg V4 as My i Sy

ritten with twenty-four letters, viz. — "A\¢a Alpha : | Beta | Gamma - Aédra Delta "E piddv Epsilon Zijra. Zeta

*Hra, “Eta

a= oy g

#f ON oan oe :

$ 8 © =

&

DA SOMYE KAT SIN MOR

.

3 ° | ed Som ores eR Boe

OF

=

4 ¢ VOWELS. . [s REMARK. a. Sigma has the form o in the beginning and middle of a word, s at the end of a word: ordows faction.

The final s is retained by some editors, even when it is brought by composition into the middle of a word: thus the compound word made up of dus ili (never used separately), mpds to, and 686s way, is written by some dusmpdsodos, by others dvampdcodos, difficult of access.

“Rem. b. Abbreviations. For many combinations of two or three letters, and for many short words in frequent use, the manuscripts and old edi- tions have peculiar forms, connected and abridged. Two of these are still occasionally used: 2 for ov, and s (named ovi or oriyya) for or.

6. Rem. c. The term alphabet is formed from the names of the first two letters. The Greek alphabet is not essentially different from the Roman, and from those of modern Europe. They are all derived from the alphabet of the Phoenicians.

Nore. d. Various other signs, beside the letters of the alphabet, are used in writing Greek. Such are the breathings (14), the coronis (68) and the apostrophe (70), the accents (89) and the marks of punctuation (113).

>

Vowels. 7. The vowels are A, €, 7, lb, O, Wy V. Of these, E, 0, are always short, Y always long,

ee ee Sy short in some words, long in others, and hence called doubtful vowels.

8. The short sounds of a, 1, v, are indicated in the grammar by 4, %, 0; the long sounds, by a, i, «. We have then

the short vowels, fhe | tbe a and. the long vowels, Oy Se, eas

9. The long vowels were sounded as a, ¢, 7, 0, u, in the English words par, prey, caprice, prone, prune, slowly and fully uttered. The short yowels had the same sounds, only less prolonged in utterance,—a little different, therefore, from the English short sounds in the words pat, pet, pit, pot, put.

10. The vowels (sounded as above) are close or open. The most open vowel is a; less open are «¢, yn, 0, o; the close vowels are t,v. Thus we have

the open short vowels, & «€ 0, the open long vowels, 4G 7, ©, the close vowels, bh wv.

sme DIPHTHONGS. 5 ae; Diphthongs. 11. The diphthongs (dipJoyyo. double-sounds) combine two

_ yowels—an open and a close vowel—in one syllable. They are Gl, El, Oly av, €U, Ov, '’

Mer. x Os also nv, wv, and w: ~~ but in w, both the vowels are close. %

Of these, ¢, », », are called ¢mproper diphthongs. Their ~ second vowel is called dota subscript (written below the first). But when the first vowel is a capital letter, « stands upon the line ; QIAHI = ’0.57 = 687.

Rem. a. In the diphthongs, as at first pronounced, each vowel receiv- ed its proper sound, while the two, being uttered without break, coales- ced in one syllable. Thus a, pronounced ah-ee, giving the sound of Eng. ay affirmative: av, ah-oo, like Eng. ow in our: ev, ot, vt, not quite like ew in feud, ot in foil, wi in quit: et, ov, still further from e in height, ou in youth ; though ov afterwards assumed the latter sound (12 b).

Rem. b. In a, 7, », the second vowel was at first written on the line and sounded, as in other diphthongs. But it early ceased to be pro- nounced, being swallowed up by the long a, n, , before it. For a long time it was generally omitted in writing, and, when afterwards restored, ' was placed as a silent letter under the line. Hence a, , », were called improper diphthongs, their second vowel having no effect upon the sound. The same name’ has sometimes been extended to include nu, wv, and uz, which are distinguished from the other diphthongs by special peculiarities. Thus nv is always the result of augment (310) or of crasis (68), wv of crasis only ; vz is composed of two close vowels, and is never followed by a consonant in the same word.

12. In Roman letters the diphthongs were represented, at, él, Ol, av; €v, OV, vy a, 7, @®, by ae, 60ri, oc, au, eu, @ yl & & 6.

Exe. a. For az, ot, in a few proper names, we have Roman a, oz; Maia Maia, Tpoia Troia or Troja, Aias Ajax. For », in a few compounds of adn song, we have 0¢: rpay@dds tragoedus.

Rem. b. From the representation of Greek words by Roman letters, it appears that at an early time (as early as 100 B. c.) several of the diphthongs had beeome simple sounds. Thus ev had assumed the sound

11 D.b. The Tonic has jv also in ynds (Hm. Hd.) Att. vais ship, and ypnis (Hm.) Att. ypats old woman. wu is scarcely Attic. The New Ionic has it in witds, TwiTd, etc., by crasis for 6 ards, 7d aird (68 D) ;—also in reflexive pro- nouns, as éwvrod (235 D), which seems to have arisen by crasis from €o abdrod; —further in Swiua Att. Satua wonder, and words derived from it; thougb here some deny the diphthong and write Sdéiua or Sépa.

6 BREATHINGS. ,12

of Eng. e7 in rein or in scize—most commonly the latter; ov that of ow in your. For a, 7, », see 11 b.

Rem. ¢. It appears also that, prior to the same time, v had taken the sound of French w, or German ii, intermediate between Eng. 00 and ee— which the Romans, not having this sound, represented (as they did the sound of ¢) by using the Greek letter for the purpose (y=v). The diphthong vu: underwent a corresponding change. But v at the end cf a diphthong retained its earlier sound.

13. Diaeresis. Sometimes two vowels, which might coalesce as a diphthong, are separated in pronunciation. A mark of diaeresis (separation) is then placed over the second vowel: pailovrwy, mpoitapyw, Bdrpvi. .

- Rem. a. The diaeresis is sometimes omitted, when it is evident from a breathing (14), or an accent (89), or from « written on the line (11), that the two vowels do not unite as a diphthong. Thus in durn, iySvs, Anifd- pevos, the vowels are evidently separate (= dirn, ix3vi, Anifouevos), while in airy, iySvi, Anpevos, they unite as diphthongs.

Breathings.

14, The weak sound A, at the beginning of a word, was in- dicated by the mark * placed over the initial vowel, and called the rough breathing (spiritus asper) : thus teva: (pronounced Ai- é-nat) to send.

The absence of this sound was also indicated by a mark * placed over the initial vowel, and called the smooth breathing (spiritus lenis): thus iéva: (pronounced 7-é-nai) to go.

Words beginning with a diphthong take the breathings over the second vowel: atrod of himself, airod of him. But in the improper diphthongs, « never takes the breathings, even when it stands upon the line: ‘Qud7 = od) song.

15. All words which begin with v have the rough breathing. Further, the initial consonant p always has the rough breathing (thus 6, Roman rh): pirwp rhetor orator. pp appears in most editions as pp (Roman rrh): Ivppos Pyrrhus ; though some write ILvppos. 2

Rem. a. Except in 6, the breathings belong only to initial letters ; if brought into the middle of a word by composition, they disappear: mpo- vevat (from mpd+-ievac and from mpdé+ievac) ; though the Roman form in some such cases shows an 1; évvdpis enhydris roAviorwp Polyhistor.

15D. The Epic pronouns dupes, tuys, Bupe (233 D) have the smooth breathing, The Aeolic dialect had other exceptions.

CONSONANTS. SEMIVOWELS.

Consonants.

_ 16. The consonants were sounded, for the most part, as we

Roman letters used to represent them (5). Toc, 9, s, ¢, wegive of sounds: the corresponding Greek letters k, y, o, 7, had only sounds which are heard in Eng. coo, go, so, to: thus in Avia Lycia, ‘Bpv- yla Phrygia, Muoia Mysia, Bowwtia Bocotia. But . ‘e

Gamma (y) before x, y, x, or & had the sound of » in anger, anxious, and was represented by a Roman n+ dyxipu Lat. an- cora anchor, é\eyxos elenchus proof. :

17. The letters p 3, x, Seem to have had at first the sounds of ph, th, ch, in Eng. uphill, hothouse, blockhead. But afterwards they came to sound as in Eng. graphic, pathos, and German machen (the last being a rough palatal sound no longer heard in English).

Rem. a. Every consonant was sounded: thus « was heard in xvi to . scratch, krijpa possession, and ¢ in picts phthisis consumption. Similarly

Eévos stranger, ye sand, were pronounced ksénos, psammos, with k and p distinctly heard.

Among consonants, we distinguish semivowels, mutes, and double consonants. -18. The sEMIvowELs are X, p, v, p, 73 of which, « is called a sibilant, from its hissing sound, A, Ps Vs Ps liquids, from their flowing sound, fs Vs nasals, being sounded with the nose. To the semivowels must be added also y nasal, that is, y be- fore x, y, x, € (16).

19. The murs are

7-mutes T B p or labial mutes, T-mutes T ) J lingual mutes, k-mutes K y x palatal mutes.

Those in the same horizontal line are said to be cognate, ot mutes of the same organ.

20. According to another division, the mutes are smooth mutes cy T K (tenues), middiemutes B 8 y (mediae), . roughmutes. 6 + x _ (aspiratae). Those in the same horizontal line are said to be co-ordinate, or mutes of the same order. Rem. a. The middle mutes 8, 5, y, are so named from the place given them in the arrangement. They are also called sonant (sounding with toyud voice), in distinction from 7, 1, x, p, %, x, Which are surd (hushed

DOUBLE CONSONANTS. DIGAMMA. ) [20

Of the latter, @, 3, x, are called rough, aspiratae, on ac- 2 (rough breathing, spiritus asper) contained in them (17); while , 7, x, which have no A, are called smooth.

21. The pouste consonants are % §& w; of which, yw is written for zo, and € for xo.

Bem. a. Zeta (¢) is not written for ro, a combination of sounds re- jected by the Greek ear as offensive. But it has in prosody the force of two consonants,—placed after a short vowel, it makes a syllable long by position (86). Many scholars pronounce it as dz; but it is at least very doubtful whether it ever had that sound.

22. The relations of the consonants may be seen from the following table:

Semivowels. Mutes, Double - ns ~ a A—— ~ Conso- Sibilant. Liquids. Smooth. Middle. Rough. _ nants. : ‘ Nasals. Labials pe T Linguals o the Re T ) o c Palatals (y) sock Spcuh Sigy é

Rem. a o, , &, are surd like the smooth and rough mutes; the other consonants and all the vowels are sonant (20a). — .

23 D. Dicgamma. The oldest Greek had another consonant sound, repre- sented by the sixth letter of the primitive alphabet. This was the semivowel F, named Fat Vau,—named also from its form Digamma (Siyaupa i. e. double gamma, one placed upon another), It corresponds in place and form to Lat. Be x2 in power to Lat. w consonant (v), being sounded probably much like

ng. w. Thus ofs sheep was originally ors Lat. ovis. It is sometimes called Aeolie digamma, having been retained by the Aecolians and Dorians long after it was lost by the Ionians: thus éros year Acol. Feros, {10s own Dor. Fidios. It must have existed, however, in the old Ionic of Homer, although not written in the text of his poems. Thus it must have been sounded by Hm., more or less constantly, at the beginning of these words:

&yvupt to break, GrAts in numbers, enough, &rtexoua to be taken, tivat lord, dvdoow to be lord, avddvw to please, &pads slender, tory city, Zap (ver) spring, Edvoy bride-gift, EXvos host, people, elxoor twenty (Dor. Fixari, Lat. viginti), ee to yield, eirw to press, Exntt by will of, éxvpds father-in-law, éxdy willing, trmo- uat to hope, the pronoun-stem é€ (€0 sui), eros word (elroy I said), pyor work, ' (3 to do), Epyw to shut in or out, &ppw to go to harm, épiw to draw, éo&hs dress, eiua vest (root Fes, Lat. ves-tis), €omepos (vesper) evening, rns clansman, dvs pleasant, idxw to ery, root 15 (ideiy videre, oi5a I know), root uc (veAos and elxedos like, €ouxa I am like, seem), *IAvos Troy, toos equal, otxos house, olvos (vinum) wine, és, , dy suus, -a, -um,

Rem. a, At the beginning of some words, Hm. has ¢ at times in place of an original r:\éé him, éefxoor twenty, éton fem. of Taos equal. 3

For effects of the digamma in Hm., see 67 Da, 86 D, 87 D.

’

_ alone, otvoua for dvoua name.

7 rl ‘a

VOWELS INTERCHANGED.

EUPHONY OF VOWELS. Vowels Interchanged.

25. The open short vowels (4, «, 0) are often interchanged in

the inflection and formation of words: rpé-w to nourish, é-rpad ©

nv was nourished, ré-rpop-a have nourished ; yévos (for yeves) race, Gen. yéveos for yeveo-os ; AvKe (for Aveo) from AvKo-s wolf.

In_like manner, « (when made by lengthening %, 30) is inter changed with ou: Aciz-w (stem Aim) to leave, Aé-Aour-a. have left, how ads left——-And 7 is sometimes interchanged with o: épiy-o to help, apwy-ds helper.

26. do, aw, interchange with «w: vads and veds temple, peré

wpos (for peraopos) raised aloft, teIveds (for teIvnus, earlier form teIvaws) dead.

27. A close and open vowel are much less often interchanged: éori is, tom. be thou ; xo, poet. ikaw, am come ; dvoya Name, dvoavupos nameless ;

_ 24D. Diversrry or VoweEts 1n THE Diatects. The other dialects, in many words and forms, have different vowels from the Attic. The most important differences are these : :

a. The Ionic (Epic and New Ionic) has y for Attic @: Ion. venuims for Att. veivias young man, Sdpné for Sdépaé breast-plate: so also yeveh for yeved to birth, vnds for vats ship. But not so, when @ arises by contraction, or yuen @ is lengthened on account of y omitted after it (48, 49): Ion. and Att. tiua (for. tiua-e) honor thou, ved (for vixd-er) he conquers, péras (for weAay-s) black. (Conversely, Hd. in a few instances has a for 4: peoapBpln for peo- nuBpla mid-day, south.)

b. The Doric, on the other hand, has @ for Attic 7: Dor. dauos for Att. Siuos people, warnp (Lat. mater) for u#rnp mother, *ASava (found also in Trag.) for *ASnva the goddess Athena ; so Motcg for Movcy to a Muse. But not so, when 7 arises from a lengthening of e: Dor. and Att. riSnus (stem de) to put, Auhv (Gen. Amév-os) harbor. /

The Attic dramatists in lyric passages use the Dor. a for » (3 b).

c. The Ion. often lengthens ¢ to «1, and o to ov: feivos for tévos stranger, guest, eivera (found also in later Att.) for évexa on account of, wodvos for pdvos Hm. sometimes lengthens o to 0: jyvolnoe for qyvénoe from ayvoéw to be ignorant of ; and & to a: mwapat for apd by, near.

- d. The Dor. sometimes has w for Att. ov: Maca for Modca (Acolic Motea, usual in Pindar and Theocritus), 5@A0s (Theoc.) for SodA0s slave. So dy Dor. (and Hd.) fow ody therefore.

25 D. A similar variation of ev to ov is seen in eiAfAovSa (Hm.) for éajavsa Ihave come (stem cdvs, lengthened edevs, 30). Even in the Attic, we find

gmovdh haste from ometdw to hasten.

26 D. So Ion. *Arpeldew, originally "Arpefdco, Att. "Arpel8ou of Atrides;

Ion. mvAdwy, orig. muvAdwy, Att. muddy of gates; Ion. Mocedéwy, orig. Mover

Bdwv, Att. Mocridav the god Poseidon, * 1*

10 i VOWELS LENGTHENED. ya?

poetic papos blame, dutipev blameless, illustrious; mébdu-s city, maxu-s cubit, Gen. mdde-as, mxe-@s; dvivnut (for ov-ovnus) to benefit ; poetic itird\Aw (for ar-arahd\w) to foster.

Vowels Lengthened.

28. Lengthening of Vowels (Protraction) is A. Formative, when it is used as a means for the inflection and formation of words.

By this, a, é, % 0, v, become y or Ga, Ns ly w, v.

Thus the verbs tipda, Piro, Prive, dno, gia (v), make the futures riysnowo, iaAnoo, Pico, Syrdoca, ico.

29. After «, 1, p, the lengthened form of & is &, not 7: thus the verbs ééo to permit, idopar to heal, zepdw to pass through, make the futures éacw, iacopat, wepace.

Rem. a. In general, the use of 7 was avoided in the Attic after «, 1, p, and @ was used instead.

30. The close vowels (1, v) are sometimes lengthened by a prefixed ¢, giving «1, ev, instead of t, 1. Thus from the stems Nir, py, are formed Acizw to leave, pevyw to flee.

31. B. Vicarious, when it takes the place of an omitted consonant.

By this, a, €, t, 0; v, become a, eee ov, vz

Thus for dza-vt-o1, ome-vd-cw, yi-y-vopat, Avo-v-o1, emAtv-c-a, we have draco, oTEeioo, yivouat, Avovot, emAdva.

For an exception in which a becomes n, see 337: for one in which e, 0, become n, , see 156.

28 D. Hm. lengthens a short vowel in many words which would otherwise be excluded from his verse, or could only come in by crasis (68) or elision (7 0). This occurs chiefly under the rhythmic accent (in arsis, 894), and most requently in the first syllable of a word. Thus, where otherwise three short» syllables would stand in succession: jvopén (for avopen) from *avhp man, eiapivds from gap spring, obAduevos for dAdmuevos destroying, otpeos, ovpea, from dpos (never odpos) mountain, iyiwérnaos from méradoy leaf, Twhuevos for TiSEuevos putting, dusahev for dusaéay from dusahs ill-blowing.—— Also, where two long syllables would stand between two short ones: OdAvumoio (for "OAduro10) of Olympus, eiAhAovsa (for eAndouvsa) I have come.

29 D. In the Ionic (Old and New), the combinations ey, m, py, are not avoided: iréy for iréa willow, inrpéds for iarpdés phisician, weiphoouas for weipa- conan I shall try.

The Doric, on the other hand, uniformly lengthens & to a@: rimaod for riywhow I shall honor (24 D b).

Concurrent vowels are is short and open (4, «, 0). An open short vowel (a, «,0),

VOWELS CONTRACTED.

Vowels Contracted.

32, Contraction unites concurrent vowels of different syl. lables into one long vowel or diphthong.

se

erally contracte

1}

d, when the first

: a. before a close vowel (1, v), forms a diphthong with it ; 3 b. before a, «, y, goes into the open long; c. before o, wv, gives a.

d. But ce gives «3; «0, o¢, 00 give ov.

: &.€-t «6 mdde-t monet C. a-o @ Tipd-opev Tipaper i O-L OusretSd-t = gretSot a-@ @ Tipd-@pey Tiaper : bea-a @ yépaa yépa eo @ gidé-aor girtaat a-e G@ Tiyid-ere Tiare o-@ @ Onddé-wot dyndraor ; a-n G@ Tid-nre Tipare d. ee ec pide-e pirer J ea n_ Teixe-a telyn €-0 ov yéve-os yevous ; en 7 idre-nre dirnre o-e ov Ondro-e dnAov : o-a @ aidd-a aldo 0-0 ov mAd-os mous o-n -@ Ondd-nre OndGre .

Rem. e. & before « gives a: ynpa-i, yjpa (but see 183).

33. Concurrent vowels are not generally contracted, when the first is either Jong or close. But sometimes,

a, €, t, after a close or long vowel, are absorbed.- t. when

it is thus absorbed in an open long vowel, becomes « subscript.

0 ZIVES w. & ‘

>. ’ >’ a , a“ t4 ixSu-as = ix yn-oOvvos vaduvos 7po-a pe

ial , ~ od a pd-twvy paer TILN-EVTE = TLV E Ao-ioros Agaros

$2 D. The dialects differ widely in respect to the contraction of vowels, Thus

e. The Ionic (Old and New) has wncontracted forms in very many cases, where the Attic contracts: vdos for vots mind, relxea for relxyn walls, piréns "for piafs thou mayst love, &éxwy for &xwy unwilling, &oidh for gdh song. Tn a few instances, however, these dialects have contracted forms, where the Attic does not contract: Ion. ‘pds-(and iepés) Att. fepds sacred, Bécoua for

Bohoouc from Bodw to cry.

f. The Ionic (especially the New Ionic) contracts eo, cov, into ev (instead of ov): moeDuer, woredor, (from toré-ouey, mor€é-ovor,) for Att. moroduey we do, motover they do. This contraction is found also in the Doric.

g. The Doric often contracts ae, ae, to 4, n: Spy, dpfhs, (from Spare, bpd-eis,) for Att. Spa see thou, Spgs thou seest.

__h, The Dorie sometimes contracts ao, aw, toa: *Arpelda, orig. ’Arpeldaa, Att. *ArpelSov; TMocedav (or Moredav), Hm. Moceddwy, Att. Movedav; Seay, orig. Sedov dearum, Att. Sedr.

,

12 di VOWELS CONTRACTED. [34 x” :

34, A simple vowel before a diphthong is often contracted with its first vowel; the dast vowel is then rejected, unless it can be written as - subscript.

Exe. a. cor and oo give ou.

a-eu a Tiyd-er 8 Tia n-ai =~ AU-at vn an G Tydy | Tepe nee Tey-ets TUS a-0l @ Tid-oL = TL@ n-Ol «6©@) MEMYN-OlwnY peuv@pn? a-ov @ Tid-ov TLUL® n-ov @ pi ovv pav eat on Ave-ae ~— o-e6 ov__olvd-eus oivovs e-ex ct = pite-eu Ss pu et o-ov ov Ondd-ov dnAov en nn ire-n gpidy e-ot = oS tN - 08 rdot e-ov ov gidc-ov gidod o-or ot dndd-ot dndot

35. In a few exceptional cases, the contraction is made with the last

vowel of the diphthong. Thus,

a. aec Sometimes gives au instead of a: aikns unseemly from dens, aipw to take up from deipa.

b. eat in the second person singular of verbs gives both y and e? Avy Or Aves from Aveat.

c. ort and on, in the second and third persons of verbs in da, give ou: dndois from dyAders and dnAdzps.

36. Important cases of irregular contraction depend upon the follow- ing rules:

a. In contracts of the vowel-declension (Decl. I. and II.), a short vowel followed by a, or by any long vowel-sound, is absorbed: doré-a, dora (not orn) ; dpyupe-av, dpyupav; dmdd-n, ary (not dao) ; dirdd- ats, SuAais. Only in the singular, ea, after any consonant but p, is contracted to n: ypuae-a, xpuo7.

b. In the consonant-declension (Decl. III.), the contracted accusa- tive plural takes the form of the contracted nominative plural: thus Nom. Pl. evyevé-es, evyeveis, Acc. Pl. evyeye-as, evyeveis (not evyevns) 5 Nom. Pl. peiCoves [peso-es] peifous, Acc. Pl. peigovas [perfo-as] peigous (not perfas). :

Other cases of irregular contraction will be noticed as they occur.

37. Synizzesis. Sometimes two vowels, which could not form a diphthong, were yet so far united in pronunciation, as to pass for one syllable: thus Seds god, used in poetry fur one syllable. This is called synizésis (settling together). It is not indicated in. the writing, and therefore appears only in poetry, where it is detected by the measure of the verse.

* D, Synizesis is very frequent in Hm., especially after ¢: Supéwy of doors, fois golden, arhvea breasts, wéAtas cities, dydoos eighth, all used as words «i two syllables,

pier Vowels Omitted.

VOWELS OMITTED. CONSONANTS DOUBLED. __ 1é

28. A short vowel between two consonants is sometimes drop- ed (syncope): zarpéds (for warépos) from raryp father, 7AJoy (for - nA‘Sov) from. epxopat to come. ™ 39. v at the end of a stem is often dropped between two vowels: BacA<-wy (for BaoAcv-wy) from Bacred-s king, axo-7 (for — axov-7) hearing from dxov-w to hear. In this case, v was first changed to the cognate semivowel, the di- gamma (SacieF@y, axoFy), which afterwards went out of use (23 D).

_ Rem. a. Similarly, « is sometimes dropped between two vowels: kd-« for xai-w to burn, mdé-wv for mAci-wy more,

EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. Consonants Doubled. -

40. The semivowels are often found doubled; less often, the smooth and rough mutes; the middle mutes and double consonants, never. Thus Baio to throw, yyappos sand, evvea nine, xdppn temple, rdccw = tdtTw to arrange, inmos horse, kixkvé cuckoo.

Rem. a. Double gamma (yy=ng) is not an exception; the two letters, though alike in form, are different.in sound.

Rem. b. When the rough mutes are doubled (which occurs mostly in roper names), the first goes into the cognate smooth, making mq, 73, Kx, instead of hd, 33, xx: thus Sama, ’ArSis, Bdakyos.

41. Double tau (rr) occurs mostly as the later Attic form, for oo in the earlier Attic and the other dialects: rdrrw fo ar- range, kpeittwv stronger, later Attic for raccw, kpeioowv.

42. Double sigma (oo) is sometimes produced by composition of words: avaaitos messmate from civ with and ciros food (52). But usu-

ally it is the result of euphonic changes described in 58-60, Only in the

latter case does it become rr in the later Attic.

38 D. Syncope is frequent in Hm.: rimre for rimore wherefore, éxéxdAero for e-Ke-KeA-ero he cried.

40 D. Hm. in many words doubles a consonant which is single in the com- mon form, espec. a semivowel: drraBe for 2-AaBe he took, prroumerdhs for pidro- peidhs fond of smiles, éivyntos for et-yynros well-spun, boooy for dco quantum, émricow for étiow backward ; less often a mute; Samws for 8rws as, brri for rt that, €8ee for eee he feared. In some words he has both a single and a double form: *AxiAAevs, *Odveceds, less often ’AxiAeds, "OSuceds.

For some cases in Hm. (xaddica:, SBBdAAE, etc.), in which a middle mute is found doubled, see 78 D.

a

14 | MUTES BEFORE MUTES OR LIQUIDS. [43

J ; 43. Rho (p) at the beginning of a word is doubled, when, by formation or by composition, a simple vowel is brought before it: pew to flow, &ppea was flowing, xaro-ppéw flowing down. After a diphthong, p remains single: «v-poos fairflowing. Rem. a. In other cases, ff is the later Attic form, for po in the earlier Attic and the other dialects: «dfpn temple, Jappos cours ‘age, for Képon, Idpoos.

Consonant- Changes. Mores BeForE Murss.

44, Before a r-mute, a z- or «x-mute becomes co-ordinate. Thus,

Br and dr become ar yr and. yr become xr BO GO BS RR Ee ae rs a] BS 66 pe KS 6h y3 6c x3 - rerpintat for rerpiB-rar AeAexrae for eAey-rat yéypamra yeypap-rac— * «Oedexrar dedex-Tat ypaBonv ypap-dnv _—s-_ trey Ov mAex-Ony eeihSnv eXewr-Snv emex qv emAek-Snv erpipsnv erpiB-Inv ehéxSnv eAey-Snv

Rem. a. The combinations allowed by this rule (ar, xr, 85, yd, 2, x3) and the double mutes in 40 (az, rq, tr, 73, Kx, Kx), are the only combi nations of mutes with mutes, which occur in Greek.

45. A r-mute before another t-mute is changed to o.

tore for 16d-re mémevorat for emmerS-rat toSe 10-Be- erreloSnv emetS-Snv But rr and 73 stand without change, when both letters belong to the stem: rdarre, ArSis.

MurTes BEFORE Liguins. 46. Before p, a 7-mute becomes p;

axmute ‘ Y3

at-mute “ co. AcAecppar for Nedewr-par SéSeypar for dedex-pac Térptpipjar rerptB-yae mTéTac pat TeTaT-[Lat yéypappat yeypap-pat eWevopat eWrevd-pat memeypat TeTAEK-pLal Teme pat TemetS-pat

J

43 D. In Hm., psometimes remains single, even after a simple vowel: 2-pegfe from pé¢w to do, at-poos swift-flowing.

46 D. In Hm., a final «mute or r-mute in the stem often remains un changed before mw in the ending : tk-wevos favoring (stem ix: ixdvw to come), &xax-névos sharpened (stem ax or ax:, Lat. acuo), 0d-uh Att. douh smell (stem 05: &¢@ to smell, Lat. odor), 18-wev Att. towev we know (stem 15: ofda), Kexopud uévos equipped (stem Kopy®: Koptocw). ‘

N AND 3 BEFOR@ OThER CONSUNANT!

Rem. a. This rule-seldom fails, when a final mute in the stem is fol . lowed by » in the ending: dx-py aeme. In other cases it is not much

observed: xé-kuy-xka am wearied out, e-run-nv was cut, pu-Snds rhythm . LaSuds isthmus. i ---—sRem. b. Before the other liquids, A, p, v, the mutes remain unchang- ed. Yet we find ceprds revered for oeB-vos (o€B-opa to revere), and

- épepvds murky for epeB-vos (€peBos thick darkness).

MUuTES BEFORE >. 47, Before o, a 7-mute forms f (= zo) ; a x-mute forms € (= xc) ; a t-mute is dropped without further change.

eto for Aewz-cw Képaé for Kopak-s copaot for copat-ct Tpipo TpiB-ow PrsE - droy-s eArriot eAmtd-ot yodwe ypap-ow — Bné Bnx-s dpyice opuid-oe

Rem. a. The preposition ¢£ (= exs) in composition drops s before any consonant (54), but undergoes no further change: éx-Gaivw to go out, not eyBawa, éx-orparevo to march out, not eErparevo.

N AND > BEFORE OTHER CONSONANTS.

48. N before a labial becomes p ; > before a palatal becomes y (nasal) ; before A, p, is assimilated ; before o is dropped, und the preceding vowel is leng- thened (31). |

¢umas for ev-mas avykaiw for ovy-kaiw €dAelr@ for ev-Aetro euBaive ev-Bawe ovyyerns ovryerns ouppéw ovy=pEew eupavns ev-pavns ovyxéew ouy-xeo — pees peAav-s éuwrvxyos = ev-"puxos eySew ev-Eeo KTels KTEV-§

eupevan €V-[LEVO Avovet Avov-ot

49. So also v7, vd, vd, are dropped before o (47), and the preceding vowel is lengthened (31).

Sovs for dovr-s oneiow for onevd-ow meicopat for mevS-copat

50. Before ov of the dative plural, the vowel remains un- changed, when v alone is dropped: péAdor, Ampéct, daipoo1, for pedav-ot, Apev-or, Saywov-or. But when vr is dropped, the vowel is lengthened ; wact, Setar, ANovor, for ravt-c1, Jevt-o1, AvovT-ct.

Exc. a. Adjectives (not participles) in -ecs make -eou, instead of -evon, in the dative plural: yapieo: for yapievr-ox from yapiers pleasing.

51. a. Before » in the endings of the perfect middle, v is commonly changed to o: meacpa: for redar-par.

. _ 47D. In Hm., a 7-mute is sometimes assimilated to a following o: oo-o Fi for mod-o1 Att. moat to feet.

; - ; 16 CONSONANTS AND VOWELS TRANSPOSED. [53 b. Before o in the endings of the perfect middle, » retains its place. repav-oa. Similarly we find vs in the nominatives éhpivs worm, Tiprys Tiryns, for édpwv3-s, Tipyv3-s (47). 52. In composition, ev before p, o, retains v: €v-puSpos, év-oTdla. wav, madwv, before a, retain v: mdv-codos 5 or change v to 7: maXio-curos. ovv, before ¢ with a vowel, becomes ovo-: guo-cittor ; before o with a cons., or ¢, becomes ov-: ov-ornya, cv-Cvyos.

53. N, brought by syncope before p, is strengthened by an inserted 6: this happens in the declension of dvnp man: avdpds for avpos for avépos. Similarly, » before p is strengthened by an inserted 8, in peonpBpia mid- day, south, for peonu(e)pia from pécos and jpyeépa.

54. Sigma (c) between two consonants is dropped: yeypa¢d- Jat for yeypadotat, éxBaivw for e€-Bguvw (47 a). ay

Not so, however, when initial o is brought by composition between two consonants: ¢v-crd¢w not ev-ralo.

55. When two sigmas are brought together by inflection, one of them is dropped: reixyeou for retyeo-o1, €omacat for eomac-cat.

56. The combination od, in some adverbs of place (204), passes into €: Svpa¢e out for Svpac-de.

For o omitted, in the nom. sing. 3d decl., see 156; in the 1 Aor. of liquid verbs, see 382; in the verbs «iui to be and jar to sit, see 406.

CoNSONANTS AND Vowerts TRANSPOSED (Metathesis). 57. The liquids (especially p, X) are subject to this change: Jépoos (48 a) courage, also Ipdcos; thus, too, aorist €-Sop-ov, present Spa-cxnw; present Bdd-Ao, perfect Bé-BAn-Ka 5 « @-Sdv-ov, “ = Syn-oK@3 : reu-vo, “* Té-TuN-Ka. In the last four examples the vowel is also lengthened.

58 D. In a few Epic words, yu before p or A is strengthened by an inserted B: wé-uBAw-ra have gone (from stem joa, by transposition wAo, mAw, 57). At the beginning of a word, u before p or A becomes B: BAdcxw to go, from stem poa (cf. Sodcxw from stem Sop, 57); Bpotés mortal, from stem pop, po (57), Lat. mor-ier, mor-tuus.

55 D. In Hm., both sigmas are often retained: émreo-o1 Att. recor to words, éo-ot Att. ef thou art.

56 D. The Aeolic nas o3 for ¢in the middle of a word; this is often found ‘n Theocritus: pealodw Att. werl(w to make melody.

57 D. Metathesis is very frequent in Hm.: xaprepdés and xparepds powerful, Kdprioros = Att. xpdrioros most powerful, best, from xpdros power; a&rapmds Att. arpamds path, tpawelouey for tapreiopey (stem repr: réomw to delight): similarly, 2paxoy from dépr-ouat to see, Expasov from wépd-w to destroy.

| 88. The close vowel y ihowks a consonant, gives eis various changes. Thus, frequently, | 4

1. Lota, after v and p, passes over to the power aaa and unites with it by contraction.

xelpav for yxep-.wy reivw for rev-io Odretpa dorep-1a Kplvo Kply-t paivopat pedty-topat gTup® avp-L@

Rem. a. In like manner we have -eis, originally -eo., in the second person singular of verbs: Avers for Av-ect. 59. 2. Iota, after A, is assimilated. padAov for par-toy G@Xos for ad-tos Lat. alius, — oreo ored-Lo @ ona — dA-topat Lat. salio. 60. 3. Iota, after «-mutes (less often after 7, 3), forms with them oo (later Attic tr, 41).

jooev for 7K-wy eAdoowy for eday-1ey Opacca Opak sa Kpjoca Kpnrt-ta

Taoo@ Tay-lw Kopvco@ Kopus-@

For réoow to cook from stem vem, see 429. to

61. 4. Iota, after 5 (sometimes after y), forms with it ¢. éArife for edmid-.o peiCay for pey-tov

For vite to wash from stem 8, see 429.

62. 5. Tau, before +, often passes into oc.

didecr, originally diderr mAovotos for mAovutios from mdodros Avover for Avovar, Orig. Avovre ordois for oraris Lat. statio.

Rem. a. The same change occurs, though rarely, before other vowels: ov, coi, cé, originally rv, roi, ré, onpepov to-day for rnpepov.

= with VowELS.

63. Sigma, when not supported by a consonant before or after it, often disappears. Thus, in many cases,

1. Initial sigma, followed by a vowel, goes into the rough breathing: ts for ots Lat. sus, tornus for cvcrynpt Lat. sisto.

64. 2. Sigma between two vowels is dropped:

Thus din contracted from Avear for Avera, Avoato for Avoaoo, yévous osntracted from yéveos for yeveoos Lat. generis.

Rem. a. Similarly, »y in some forms of the comparative is dropped between two vowels: pei¢w contracted from pecCoa for peifova.

62 D. The Doric often retains the original +r: dfSwr1, Advoyri, Td, Tol, re Even the older Attic retains it in rhuepoy and a few other words.

at AL & . '

18 - ASPIRATION REJECTED OR TRANSFUREED. [65

ASPIRATION REJECTED OR TRANSFERRED.

65. To avoid the harshness felt when two successive syllables begin with rough sounds, a change was often made in one of them. Thus,

a. Reduplications change a rough mute to the cognate smooth: wé-v-xe for de-du-Ka, ti-Sy-pe for Si-In-pu, €-Ke-xvd-pqv for «-xe-yu-pyv, Hm, dx-dxn-por for ax-axy-por.

b. The imperative ending 3. becomes te after 7 in the first aorist passive: Av-In-71 for Av-Py-du

c. The stems Se, 3u, of tinue to put, Sd to offer, become re, tv, be- fore Sy in the first aorist passive: é-ré-Syv, é-rv-Snv.

d. Single instances are duréya, dumioya, to clothe, for aud., exexerpia truce for exé-yxerpia (from éyw and yelp), and a few other words.

e. To the same rule we may refer ¢yw to have, hold, for é-yw (future e£@) originally cexw (424, 11), and icyxe for icy orig. c1-a(€)x-o.

66. Transfer of aspiration is found in a few stems which begin with

r and end with ¢ or y. When, for any cause, the rough sound is lost at the end of the stem, it appears in the first letter, changing r to. This occurs

a. In the substantive-stem rprx hair (gen. sing. rpexds, nom. plur. rpixes, but) nom. sing. Spié, dat. plur. spuéi.

b. In the adjective rayus swift, superlative rdyvoros, but comparative Sdoowv (Sdrrev) for raxrwv (222).

c. In the verb-stems, tped, pres. tpepw to nourish, fut. Spero, subst. Spéupa nursling ;

6

rag, Sarre to bury, “ Sao, “ ragos tomb ; tpex, ‘“ tTpéxw to run, “ SpeEouat, tpup, “ punta to weaken, “ Spiro; “ — rpudn delicacy ;

trup, “ rude to smoke, perf. ré-Suppa.

Rem. d. We find éSpéfny in the aorist passive, reSpapSax in the per- fect middle infinitive. In these forms, 3 was used as the first letter of the stem, because the last letter was supposed to be properly a a, but changed to ¢ by 44. The same remark applies to the other stems in c.

For the aspiration of a smooth or middle mute in the formation of the second perfect active, see 341, cf. 392. 7

65 D. Hm. often has a smooth breathing, where the Attic has the rough: *Aldns (from a privative and iSezy to sce) Att. “Ardns the god Hades, tuata Att. duata wagon, Hédwos Att. HAs sun, Ads (so Hd.) Att. ws dawn, Ypnt (so Hd., ef. 32 De) Att. iépat hawk. Cf. Hd. odpos Att. dpos boundary. A smooth mute used instead of a rough, is seen in adris (Hm. Hd.) Att. addis again, obxt (Hm. Hd.) Att. odxf not, Sérouor (Hd.) Att. déxouau to receive.

66 D. Hd, shows a transfer of aspiration in nSdv Att. xirdéy tunic, and én Sadra there, évSedrev thence, Att. évravda, évTevver.

/

—

. 67. Hiatus. When a word ending with a vowel and another be- ginning with a vowel are pronounced in immediate succession, the result is a hiatus. This, though not agreeable to the Attic ear, was often en- dured in prose: often, however, it was obviated by crasis or elision or the addition of a movable consonant. Crasis and elision occur especially when the first of the two words is short and unimportant, or when the two words are often used together.

Crasis.

68. Crasis (mingling) is a contraction of the final and initial vowels in two successive words. The two words are then written as one, with a cordnis (hook) * over the vowel in which they join. Thus rovvavriov for 76 évavriov, Joiudériov (72) for 7d iudriov, mpovp- you for mpd epyov, eyaté for & dyaté.

Crasis is used chiefly after forms of the article, the relative pronouns 6, ad, the preposition mpd, the conjunction «ai, and the interjection d. It follows, generally, the rules already given for contraction.

Rem. a. If the first word ends in a diphthong, its last vowel disap- pears in crasis; if the second word begins with a diphthong, its last yowel remains (as « subscript or v): xdy for kal év, kav for kai a or kai edy, kata for Kal eira, xadry for cai adrn (ya, xd, poetic for Kal 6, Kai oi), éy@pat for éyd oipa..

67 D. Hrarus 1n Epic Porrry, In Epic poetry, the hiatus is allowed in many cases; the most important are the following:

a. when the second word begins with digamma: kar& olxoy = kara Fotkoy in the house. Here the hiatus is only apparent.

b. when the first word ends in a close vowel (1, v) and seldom or never suffers elision: madi dracce he bestowed on his son.

c. when the two words are separated by a mark of punctuation: xdSyoo, cue F émmeideo pidy sit down, and comply with my saying.

d. when the vowels, which make hiatus, are the two short syllables of the third foot: ray of | & éyé- | vovro é- | vk peyd- | port ye- | védAn. The two words are then separated by the feminine caesura of the third foot (910).

e. when a long vowel or diphthong at the end of the first word gives up a part of its quantity, and becomes short before the following initial vowel: "Arpeidai re Kal BAAor evKvhwides ’Axaol (-- tvy Luv t—4uv+-). This

_ is regarded as a weak (improper) hiatus, being relieved by the sacrifice of

quantity.

68 D. Crasis is rare in Hm. ; in Hd., it is not frequent. It is most exten- sively used in Attic poetry. In cases where a short initial vowel is swallowed up by a final long vowel or diphthong, the two words are sometimes written separately, with an apostrophe in place of the initial vowel: ph *yé for uh eye,

48 kepxerau for Hon eképxerau.

20 4 ELISION. [68

Rem. b. The rough breathing of the article or relative pronoun, if these stand first, is retained, and takes the place of a coronis: dy for a a (ovK, ovmi, poetic for 6 ex, 6 emi, ovvexa poetic for od évexa).

Rem. c. In crasis of the article, its final vowel or diphthong, when fol- lowed by initial a, disappears in it: dvjp (@) for 6 dynp(a), rardpi for r@ avOpi, tavTd, TavTda, Tavrov, for rd ad’Td, Ta aitad, Tod avTrod. The particle roi in this respect follows the article: pevray for pévror dy.

“Erepos other enters into crasis under the form drepos (a): thus drepos (a) for 6 érepos, Sdrepoy, Sdrépov, for rd Erepov, Tov Erépov.

69. Synizxsis (37). Sometimes the final and initial vowels, though not contracted by crasis, were so far united in pronunciation, as to serve in poetry for one syllable. This occurs only after a long vowel or diph- thong; especially after the conjunctions ézei since, 7 07, 4 interrogative, un not, and the pronoun éy# J; thus éel od, as two syllables; and so pz Got, eye ov.

LElision. :

70. Elision is the cutting off of a final short vowel before a following initial vowel. The place of the elided vowel is marked by an apostrophe’. Thus ér airé for émi air.

The following words are generally subject to elision :

a. Words of one syllable in e, as yé, dé, ré. b. Prepositions and conjunctions of two syllables; except epi, dypi, péxpt, Ort. c. Some adverbs in common use, such as éri, da, efra, dda, Taxa. Exempt from elision are —d. The vowel v. e. Final a, 1, o, in words of one syllable. f. Final a in the nominative of the first declension, and . in the da~- tive of the third.

Rem. g. Forms, which can take v movable (79), are not affected by elision in prose, except only éori is.

Remark c is nearly confined to the Attic. Hm. has &pioros, words (with coronis in place of the rough breathing) for 6 &pioros, 6 airéds. Hd. has dyhp for 6 dvhp, THAndés for 7d GAndSEs, SvSpwror for of %vSpwror (yet ravSpdrov for TOU GvSpétov), witds, witol, Twirod (cf. 11 D), for 6 ards, of adrol, Tod abrod, rovrepoy for Td Erepov. |

70 D. Elision is less frequent in Hd. than in Attic prose. It is most exten- sively used in poetry, even in Epic poetry, being applied not only to short vowels, but even to the diphthongs a: and o: in the verb-endings pou, oot, Tal, oat, and in the forms pol, rol.

“Ori is subject to elision in Hm., never in Attic poetry. The same is true of « in the dative (sing. and plur.) of the third declension. Many forms, which might take y movable, suffer elision in poetry: and so, further, the particle fd (only used in Epic, cf. 865), the possessive pronoun od, and the nom, sing. in @ of the first declension.

r “ah J e~ rt > ee od rn ca a et ae | eo Pr CrP ho e . gitess . The eee ete C

21

rds, aro dor,

-- APOCOPE. FINAL CONSONANTS.

* “!

41, Elision occurs also in the formation of compound but then without the apostrophe to mark it: da:réw from da

and airéw, ovdeis from ovdé and «is, dueBadoy from dia and Baro

dwaréxo (cf. 65 d) from audi and exo. ;

V

_ 72. A smooth mute and rough breathing, brought together by elision, give the cognate rough mute : - af éarias for dn() éorias, ka® 7¢pay for xar(a) nuépar, ndixnx buds for ndixnk(a) buds, vixS ddnv for vdKr(a) dAny (44). So also in compound words: | adatpéw from aro and aipéa, kaSinus from kara and ins, - Sexnpepos from deca and jyepa, éSpepos from éxra and jpépa. The same effect is seen also in crasis: Sdrepov for 76 érepoy (poet. xa for kal 6, 6%0tvexa for drov évexa).

Rem. a. The same change of mute takes place, notwithstanding an in- tervening p, in dpovdos (from mpd and 6dds), ppovpds (from mpé and épde), TéSpimmos (from rérrapa and inzos).

Final Consonants.

14, At the end of a Greek word, a, the only consonants allowed to stand are y, p, s; b. the only combinations of consonants are w (zs), & (xs), and yé (nx). Exc. ¢. “Ex from (80c) and otk, ovy not (80a) have no accent of _ their own, and were hardly felt to be separate words. Exe. d. Final Xs, vs, are found only in the nominatives dds salt, sea Ehpivs Worm and Tipyys Tiryns (51).

72 D. In the New Ionic (Hd.), the smooth mute remains unchanged before the rough breathing: am ob for a&@’ 06, odk oftws for obx obtws, karinut for kadtnut, Tobrepoy for rd Erepor.

43D. Arocorr. Similar to elision, but confined to poetry, is apocdpe, the cutting off of a final short vowel before an initial consonant. In Hm., this is seen in the conjunction &p for apa, the prepositions av, ndr, wdp, for dvd, xard, wapd (and rarely in dm, iw for ard, id). The apocopate forms are used both as separate words and in composition. The vy of &y issubject to the rules in 48. The c of xdr is assimilated to the following consonant; but before two consonants it is dropped. - Thus ris 7 dp raév, wapuévere for mapapévere, du medloy for dvd medlov, dAAdw for dvaddw, Kap pdov for Kata fpdov, KaK Kopuphy for kaT& Kopuphy, nay yévu (pronounced kag gonu) for card ydvu, a5 dé for

«kare 8€, Kaddt0u for ckaradica, nam dddapa (40 b) for nard pdrapa, katSavety for karasavety, cdnrave for karéxrave (ammeupe: for &romweuper, SBBdAAew for _ broBdddew). Compare kdéupopos (Hmm.) ill-fated for rax-uopos for Kato-mopos _ —Here belongs also Dor. wér (only before the article) for wori = Att. mpds

_ thus rdr ray (or rorrdy) pardpa.

%4 D. For some apparent exceptions (& medfov, ny ydvu, ete.), see 73 D.

22 va MOVABLE CONSONANTS. [78

45, Other consonants at the end of a word are dropped: capa body, for copar, genitive cdpar-os,

pers honey, pedir, = peALT~os, dra milk, yaXaxr, Fe yaXakt-os, noav Were, noavr, cf. Lat. erant, mat O boy, nad, genitive mazd-ds, yuva. O woman, -yuvatk, Xs yuvatk-ds.

76. A final r-mute is also changed to s: répas prodigy, for repar, genitive répar-os, apos to, mpot, from pori (Hm.), dds give, ~ 603, from’ 680%. 77. A final » is changed to », but after a it is often dropped: erisnv I placed, originally eri3np, present riSnps,

pido apple, ” pndon, cf. Lat. malum, vixra night, ‘5 vuxtrap, cf. Lat. noctem, édvoa I loosed, 43 eAvoap.

Movable Consonants.

78. N Movaste. Some words ending in a vowel annex y, a. before a word beginning with a vowel, and b. at the end of a sentence. ,

Thus, a. maow edaxa, b. eSoxa wacw, I gave to all: but, before a consonant, maou Sida L give to all.

Rem. c. This v is also called ehedxvorixdv (dragging after): in the . first case (a), it obviates hiatus: in the second (b), it gives a fuller close. The poets, for the latter reason, use it generally at the end of a line or verse. Often, also, they use it before a consonant, thus making a final short syllable long by position (86), Even in prose, it would seem, from

many inscriptions and old manuscripts, that » movable was often used before a consonant.

79. N movable is added, a. after « in the third person singular: éwxe(v) he gave. b. after ot in all words, viz. (a) in the third person singular and plural: didecr(v) he gives, d:- ddacr(v) they give. So, also, éori(v) is.

78 D. In the New Ionic (Hd.), which does not avoid a concurrence of vow- els, v movable is not used.

79 D. In Hm., the pronoun éyé(v), and the plural datives (233 D) dupi(r), duu(v), opt(v), have y movable. So also forms with the suffix ¢: (206 D): Se é¢u(v) to gods, Likewise most adverbs of place in Sev (203): dvevSe(v) away from, without, mdpowse(v) before (in place or time). Further vée@iv) apart, and the enclitic particles xé(v) = Att. ay, and vi(v) now.

In Hd., some adverbs in dey reject v: so mpéode before, triode behind, Yrepse above, Evepde below.

_ SYLLABLES.

n me a plural: saou(y) to all. n bs of place: °ASjynox(v) at Athens. i. ‘in elkoox twenty, mépucr last year, mavramact altogether,

“80. a. The adverls ov not before a vowel, becomes ovk, but before the

rough breathing, ovx (cf. 72): ov eyo, ovk adrds, ovx oUTas. b. My not follows the analogy of od, only in the compound pyxers, —

like odkéri, no longer.

c. *EE (exs) Jrom and otras thus drop ¢ before consonants : €& dkpo»

_ wédews, but ex Tis méAews (cf. 47 a); ovtTws dweBn, but odra Seuvds.

SYLLABLES.

81, Every single vowel or diphthong, whether with or without con- sonants before or after it, makes a distinct syllable. Thus tyiera has four syllables.

| 82. In the division of syllables,

. a. Consonants at the beginning of a word connect themselves with the following vowel; at the end of a word, with the preceding vowel: mpo-edpet-ar, orpo-pi-duy£ (Hm. ).

b. Consonants in the middle of a word, between two vowels, are assigned to the following vowel. ‘This is always the case with one con- sonant, even if it be a double consonant : i-xa-vés, d-yvo-pa. It is the case also with most combinations of two or more consonants: é-cyor, i-oSpds, €-xSpds, pd-Bdos, d-pvds.

83. But in a combination of two or more consonants, the first con- nects itself with the preceding vowel,

a. when it is a liguid or a nasal: dp-pa, éd-mis, €v-ddy, kay-xdfo. Only py go together: kd-pve.

b. when the same consonant is doubled: Sdo-cwv, im-mros: so too Zan-o, *Ar-Sis, Bax-xos (40 b).

_ 84. Further, in the division of syllables,

a. Words connected by elision are treated as a single word: dA-v av-3 6-rov. Soin composition : €~7ra-va-yeww from é emt, avd, aye.

b. Compounds formed without elision are treated as if their elements were separate words: mpos-ex-riva, nOt mpo-se-KTiva.

85. a. Pure Vowels and Syllables. When two successive vowels of a word belong to different syllables, the second vowel and syllable are said to be pure (not mixed with a preceding consonant) : tapi-as, Bovdcdi-w.

80 D, A movable s is found, though used with little reference to euphony, in the following adverbs : dug about, Hm. also éudis; &yvrixpus right opposite, ain, only dirruxpd; arpépa and anpéuas quietly, mostly poet. ; &xpt, mexpt, until, _ farely &xpis, wexpis; evdd (Hd. i8d) straight towards, evdvs (Hd. idds) straight- way, but in Hm. only isds straight towards ; aes ‘and peanyts between (Hm. wera. ds ; WoAAdis often, Ton. also woAAdKt (Hm, Hd.).

24 QUANTITY. [85

b. Ultima, Penult, Aniepenult. The last syllable of a word is called the wltima ; the one next to the last, penwlt (penultima) ; the one before the penult, antepenult (antepenultima).

Quantity.

86. A syllable is long by natwre, when it has a long vowel or diphthong: «pi-voi-pyv.

A syllable is long by position, when its vowel is followed by two consonants or by a double consonant: dpu-daé.

The consonants, which make a jinal syllable long by position, may be partly or wholly in the following word: thus the second syllable in Gos rémos, and in d\Ao ordua, is long by position.

Rem. a. In a syllable long by position, the vowel was sounded long or short, according to its natural quantity, without reference to the fol- lowing consonants. Thus the first vowel was sounded short in A\ééa, Kd\Xos, winte, long in An€e, paddor, pimte, though the first sydlab/e in all these words was long.

87. When a vowel naturally short is followed by a mute and liquid, the syllable is common, that is, it may be used as long or short, at pleasure: thus in réxvov, tuddds, tt Spas, the first syl- lable is common, But,

a. The mute and liquid must be in the same word. Hence the pre- position 逫 before a liquid always (even in composition) makes a long syllable: ék ve@v, éxdeyeuv.

b. The rule applies to middle mutes (8, 5, y) only before p; before A, #, v, they always make a long syllable: thus in BiPdos, raypa, edva, the first syllable is always long. .

86 D. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a word makes a short syllable, when the next word begins with a vowel: ef 5) éuod (—vv—), Kat por Buoooov (—vv—v), see 67 De. This rule is observed in epic poetry, and in the choruses of the dramatic poets. But the long vowel or diphthong re- mains long: (1) when the rhythmic accent falls upon it (in arsis, 894): év pee ydhy adity (Lvv tev); (2) when the next word began with the digamma: éxardy kal efxoor (vy-+—+vv); (3) when it is followed by a pause in the sense, A long vowel or diphthong is rarely made short before a vowel in the same word: Hm. ofos (vv), BéBAnat ob? (—v v—).

One of the consonants, which make position, may be the (unwritten) di- gamma: totdy of rip = roidy For wip (+—+-).

87 D. In Hm., a short vowel-before a mute and liquid, generally makes a syllable long by position: réxvoy, rl kaalers (+-+—+), bavos mavdaudrop Even before a simple liquid at the beginning of a word, a final short vowel often makes a long syllable: nadhy re weydany re (L—Lvvty So too before a digamma: am €o = dd Féo (vtvv). So also before 6 in the stem de: (409 D, 5) and in d4v long. In such cases, the liquid or digamma was perhaps doubled in pronouncing: de and d4v seem to have begun with 8r.

4—tvv-),

Foe a a diphtho are arate nae Ne Le , before a ong, single consonant, are short 1S o, before two cons. or a double cons., are long.

a, t, v, before two cons. or a double cons., are long.

¢ and d are liable to the exception in 87. There re-

1en, subject to uncertainty, only the syllables with a, », v, ‘a vowel or single consonant. Even these are long, = ghen they have the circumflex accent: xpive. i £ when they arise from a contraction : “dxwv from "tééxwv.

g. when y or v7 is dropped after the vowel: AcAvcaéou for iM AeAvKaver, Secxvis for Sexvevrs: but see 50. a ‘Rom. h. The quantity of a, 1, v, so far as it is connected with inflec- _ tion, will be noticed in the course of the grammar. In other cases, it | ma, may be learned by consulting the lexicons, or by observing the usage of Greek poets.

4 Nit: * Bolt? 4 Accent.

89. The accent of a word is indicated by a mark placed over - the oual of the accented syllable. The marks used for this purpose are themselves called accents; they are the acute ’, the Sing and the grave ‘: tow, Nicov, NeAvKas.

In ease of a diphthong, the accent stands over the second vowel; but over the Jjirst vowel of an improper diphthong ee 14): avTOUs, AUTOIS, avTO.

| The .accent _Sollows the breathing, when both belong to the same

i D soael: Odos, aipw; but the circumflex is placed above the breathing : nye

_ otros. When they belong to a capital letter, they are placed before it:

J "EAny, "Aros. When a vowel, which has the diaeresis, is accented, the acute and 1 grave are placed between the points, the circumflex above them:

: He ouad Bot; mpabvat.

90. To the Latin terms accent, acute, circumflex, grave, correspond : his Greek révos tone (straining or raising of the voice), dévs sharp, rept- grapevos twisted round (in reference to the Jorm of the circumflex _ accent), and Bapis heavy, fiat. From these words, together with the prepositions mapa near and mpé before, are derived the names in the fol-

‘<

ng an

D. The quantity of a, 1, v, varies in many words, especially in Hm.; en become long under the rhythmic accent (in arsis, see 894), when they would be short: *fouey or *iwpey let us go, thes, “Apes, Boord-

yuu),

26° oa ACCENT AFFECTED BY QUANTITY. [91 91. The acute can stand only on one of the last three syl- lables of a word, the circumflex on one of the last two. A word which has the acute

on the ultima is called oxytone: Pacrreits.

on the penult - paroxytone: Bactrctwv.

on the antepenult “ proparoxytone : BactAvovtos. A word which has the circumflex

on the ultima is called perispomenon: ayayeiv.

on the penult “ properispomenon : ayaryotoo..

A word which has no accent on the ultima is called barytone. This name, of course, belongs alike to paroxytones, proparoxy- tones, and properispomena.

92. The acute over a vowel shows that it was uttered on a higher (sharper) key than other vowels. The circumflex (made up of the acute and grave ‘*”) shows that the vowel commenced upon a higher key, but ended on the general pitch. The grave (flat) belonged in theory to every vowel that did not rise above the general pitch, i. e. to every vowel that | had not the acute or circumflex. It was, therefore, the negation of an accent, and in general was not written; not even over the last vowel of a barytone, although that name implies a grave accent on the ultima: thus avSporos, not GvSpamos. In actual use, it occurs only as a substitute for the acute, when the last vowel of an oxytone, in close connection with following words, sinks from its proper key (101).

ACCENT AS AFFECTED BY QUANTITY.

93. a. The acute stands on long and short syllables alike, the circumflex only on syllables long by nature. b. If the ultima is long by nature, the acute cannot stand on the antepenult, nor the circumflex on the penult. c. Final € and y, after a short vowel, exclude the acute from the ante-

penult, but not the circumflex from the penult: thus we have #\.é, but vuxropuaAaé instead of vuxrédudaé.

94. Using now the words long and short to denote natural quantity

(of vowel-sounds) without regard to position, we have the following rules.

A word with short ultima, if accented a. on the antepenult, has the acute: Avdpeda, Avérwoav. b. on a short penult, has the acute: <AvKoros. c. on a long penult, has the circumflex: dedv«viav. d. on the ultima, has the acute: Nedv«éds. A word with long ultima, if accented e. on the penult, has the acute: A«AuKdrwv, AeAvKviats. f. on the ultima, has either the acute or the circumflex: AcAvKas, AcAvKVLOY.

BY _-VOWEL-CHANGES. ©

x fet . Th he - foregoi in ¢ rules include every admissible variety of accen 5 Bat an atte on the ultima may become grave (see 101); and a word, in

A addition its proper accent, may receivé another (see 107). a

95. It is important to observe, that

a, Final a and o have the effect of short vowels on the - accent of the penult and antepenult: Avovrar, Avdpevoe (94 a), rogodrot, Toradra: (94 c).

; b. Not so, however, in the optatwe mode: madevar, madepoa (94 e) ; and the adverb otko. at home.

96. Hauceptions to 93 b. Some words which have lengthened from _o, in the ultima, with ¢ in the penult, are accented on the antepenult: avayewr, Toews, SUsepos. ' SHexceptions to 94c. Some apparent exceptions (such as dsre, #de, etc.) are explained by the rules for enclitics (110). Rem. a. The preceding rules enable us often to determine the quan-. ° tity of vowels from the accent. Thus the ultima must be short in wéhe- _ “kis, rpaéis (93 b), and long in drépa (94 c): the penult must be short in tives, for, if long, it would be written rives (94 c).

97. The accent of words must be learned, to a great extent, from the lexicons, or by observation in reading. In the majority of words, it re- cedes as far from the end as the foregoing rules allow ; when thus placed,

_ it may be called recessive accent. It is the accent of verbs, almost uni-

formly, in their personal forms (that is, a// forms except infinitives and

participles). It is also the accent of most compound substantives and jectives.

ACCENT AS AFFECTED BY VOWEL-CHANGES.

98. Contraction. If either of the syllables contracted had an accent, the contract syllable receives one. For a contract penult or antepenult, the accent is determined by the rules in 94, A contract ultima receives the acute, if the ultima had it before contraction ; otherwise, it takes the circumflex.

Tip@pevos from tipa-dpuevos Tia from ripd-et

ireioSat piré-eoSat 60T@ daTe-@ , la e 5 ¢ 4

dndovesa dndo-€o3@ é€oTws égTa-@s

If neither of the syllables contracted had an accent, the contract syl- lable receives none: riva from ripa-e.

99. Crasis. In crasis, the accent of the first word disappears; that of the last remains unchanged : rdya3a from ra dya%d.

But the lengthening of an accented penult by crasis may require a _ change from acute to circumflex (94 c): ra\Aa from ra aAAa.

97 D. The Aeolic dialect has recessive accent in all words : rérapos, TOTAMLOUs | Tpaxus, AcAcipSau, for worauds, worapnod, Tpaxds, AcAcipda:. But in the accent _of prepositions and conjunctions, it agrees with the other dialects: zepf, ardp.

3

28. GRAVE ACCENT FOR ACUTE. #ROCLITICS. [100 5 4 s *- # . . Ad s

100. Z£ilision. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent ; other oxytone words throw it back on the penult: én’ airé (€mi on), ovS eduvapny (ovdé neither), ctw "Odvaeds (cipi L am), ent joa (€mrd seven).

ACCENT AS AFFECTED BY CONNECTION IN DiscouRsE.

101. Change of Acute to Grave. The acute, standing on an oxytone followed by other words in close connection with it, changes to the grave: ‘éré from, but dé totrov from this, Bact Ae’s king, but Bacrreds éyévero he became king.

Rem. a. The proper accent of an oxytone appears only when it stands before a pause in the discourse, or is used as an unconnected word. -

102. Anastrophe. Oxytone prepositions of two syllables sometimes shift their accent from the ultima to the penult. This is called anastréphe (retraction of the accent). It occurs,

a. when such a preposition takes the place of a verb (éori being

omitted): dpa for rapeors it is permitted (as prep. mapa); eu for éveore

at is possible (as prep. evi poetic for ev). b. when zepi follows the genitive which it belongs to: rovray wépe instead of wepi rovrar.

103. Proctitics. A few words of one syllable attach them- selves so closely to a following word as not to have a separate accent. They are called proclitics (leaning: forward) ; also aténa (unaccented words). They are

a. The forms 6, , oi, ai, of the article. b. The prepositions ev in, eis (or és) into, é& (ex) from. c. The conjunctions «i 77, as as, that (also as prepos. to). d. The adverb od (ovx, ody, 80) not. Rem. e. Ovyi, a more emphatic ov, is always accented.

104. Proclitics take an accent,

a. when there is no following word to which they can attach them- selyes: thus at the end of a sentence, as dis 7) ot sayest thou so, or not? —or when placed after the words which they belong to, as xaxév 2& (Hm.) out of evils, 3eds Ss (Hm.) as a god.

b. when the following word is an enclitic (107 c).

100 D. The preposition with elided vowel loses its accent, even when it follows the word which it belongs to: rijot wap’ eivderes for that mépa (102) with them.

102 D. a. In poetry, we have wdpa for wdépeior, and even for other forms of the compound verb: thus éy& mdpa (for dpe) Tam gresent. Hm. has alse % for Zveio,.

b. In poetry, all oxytone prepositions of two syllables (except aul, avr, évd, 3i¢) suffer anastrophe, when placed after their cases; and (in Hm.) when placed after verbs, to which they belong in composition: éAécas do for &ma- \éoas.——dvd suffers anastrophe in the form &va up! arise! (= avdornS:).

>

105. Encrrrics. Some words of one or two syllables attach themselves so closely to a preceding word, as to give up their _ separate accent. They are called enclitics (leaning on another - word). They are -

a, The pronouns of the first person, pod, pot, we; of the second, coi, ool, vé; Of the third, od, of, 2, and odicu. _ ___b. The indefinite pronoun ris, ri, in all its forms (including roi, 74, _ for rwés, revi); and the indefinite adverbs wov (or wo3i), my, wot, oer, _ moré, ro, ras. Used as interrogatives, these words are orthotone (erect _ in accent, not enclitic): ris, ri, rod (ad31), m7, moi, wéSev, mére, Tas.

i c. The present indicative of ciui to be and dnpi to say, except the _ second person singular, ¢7, dis.

_ d. The particles yé, ré, roi, wép, and the inseparable de (not the con-

_ junction dé but, and). ie 106. The usual effect of an enclitic on the word preceding it was this, that, in uttering its ultima, the voice was raised above the general pitch. _ Hence we find on that syllable either the acute accent or the circumflex ; _ —the latter, only when the word was usually perispomenon. But a _ paroxytone was not required to sustain the acute or higher pitch through two successive syllables: its ultima, therefore, was not affected by a fol- ' lowing enclitic: in this case, indeed, the enclitic, if of two syllables, re- _ tained its separate accent. Hence we have the following rules:

107. 1. The word before an enclitic a, preserves its proper accent, and never changes an acute to grave: dyaddv 71, ards pyot. b. if proparoxytone or properispomenon, adds an acute on the ultima: dyIpwrds tis, tatdés Twes. e. if proclitic, takes an acute: «i tis, ov dyou.

atc “ee

108. 2. The enelitic loses its own accent; except an enclitic of two syllables after a paroxytone: Adyos tis, Adyou Twés.

Rem. a. A properispomenon ending in & or w is treated like a par- oxytone: doimé ris, potwé ori. i

109. 3. Of several enclitics in succession, each one takes an acute from the succeeding, only the last appearing without accent: ci ris pol noi more. :

110. In some cases, a word is combined sq often with a following en-

_ clitic, that the two are regarded as one word: dsre for & re, etre, unre, " oldsre, dstis, ijrot, kairot. The enclitic d¢ is always treated thus: dd¢, rovsde, oixade. So zép, in prose, almost always: deep. Most of these _ are apparent exceptions to 94 c.

__ Rem. a. Eide, vaiyt from ci, vai, are accented as if Se and yz were en- clitic particles.

- _ 105D. The personal pronouns uly, viv, oof, and opé are enclitic. So too _ the Ionic eis and Epic écct thou art. To enclitic particles belong the poetic | vo or viv, and Epic «é or xy, Shy, and pd (for ka).

% 30 PUNCTUATION. [111

111. The enclitics in some cases retain their accent (are orthotone)

a. when there is no preceding word to which they can attach them. selves, as at the opening of a sentence: ruvés Aéeyovor some say. This, however, is not often the case.

b. when there is an emphasis on the enclitic: dAd\a oé héyo but thee I mean (no other). For the personal pronouns, cf. 282; for €or: as orthotone, 406, 1 b. ;

c. after elision, when the vowel to be affected by the enclitic is cut off: ratréori Wevdy for ratra éore.

d. enclitics of two syllables after a paroxytone; see 108.

112. The following particles are distinguished by the accent: dva preposition over, from poetic dva up! (102 Db); apa therefore, from apa interrogative ; 7 or, than, from 7 truly, and 7 interrogative; viv now, at present, from poetic vv(v), enclitic, now (inferential conjunction) ; ovxcovy not therefore, from ovxovy therefore ; mepi round, about, from poetic répu eaceedingly ; as relative as, that, from 4s demonstrative thus.

PUNCTUATION.

113. The comma, period, and mark of exclamation, are the same as in English; but the last is rarely used. The colon, a point above the line, takes the place alike of the colon and semicolon: éomwépa jv: rére nASEV éyyedos it was evening : then came a messenger. The mark_of interroga- tion is like the English semicolon: ri ciras ; what saidst thou?

Rem. a. The Diastile or Hypodiastéle, though it has the form of a comma, is not a mark of punctuation. It is placed between the parts of certain compound pronouns, merely to distinguish them from particles of the same sound: thus 6,7. and 6,re which; but dri that, because, ore when. At present, however, this mark is generally omitted, a space be- ing left instead: 6 rs and 6 re. .

Pe he Er en oS a

PART SECOND. INFLECTION.

NOUNS.

114. Inflection belongs to nowns (both substantive and ad. jective), pronouns, and verbs. It gives to the same word differ-

~ ent forms according to its different relations in the sentence. These forms have a common stem followed by different endings.

The inflection of nouns and pronouns is called declension. Their endings are called declension-endings, or more commonly

- ease-endings, since they mark the different cases.

115. The Greek distinguishes in its declension,

a. three GENDERS: masculine, feminine, and neuter.

b. three NumBERS: the singular in reference to one object, the plural to more than one, the dual to two only.

c. five CASES: nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative. In the singular, the vocative is often like the nomi- native; in the plural, it is always so. In neuter words, the nominative and vocative are always like the accusative, and in the plural always endin a, The dual has but two forms, one for the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for the genitive and dative.

116. The nominative singular is not to be confounded with the stem. Often they are alike: thus ypa land is at once the stem and the nomi- native singular. But oftener they are different: thus d3paros man is the nominative singular of the stem av3pazo.

In distinction from the nominative and vocative (casus recti), the other cases are termed oblique (casus obliqui).

117. Genprr. Words which designate males are, of course, masculine ; those which designate females, feminine. Further, a. Masculine are names of winds (like 6 dveyos the wind), of rivers (6 morapuds the river), and of months (6 nv the month). b. Feminine are names of trees (7 Spis the oak), lands (4 yi the land), islands (14 vicos the island), and most cities (4 médus the ditty), Also, most abstract words are feminine; that is, words which express quality, state, or action (bodily or mental): thus rayurns swiftness, dixat- oavvn justice, emis hope, vixn victory.

bts

32" GENDER. ARTICLE. ACCENT. jil?

ce. Neuter are many names of fruits (rd vixov the fig); also, most diminutives, even when designating males or females: 76 yepdyrcoy dim, of 6 yépwr the old man, rb yivatov dim. of 4 yuvn the woman. The names of the detters are neuter: rd Ada, 7rd olypa.

Any word may be neuter, when the object to be thought of is the word itself, rather than the thing which it signifies: rd dvZpezos the name man, ro dixacocvyn the term justice.

vag The gender may often be known by the final letter of the stem: see 152. a

118. Common Gender. Some nouns are either masculine or feminine, according as they designate males or females: 6, 7) Seds the divinity, god or goddess, 6, avSparos the human being, manor woman. These are said to be of common gender.

Epicoene. In many names of animals, the same word with the same gender is used for both sexes: 7 ddwmné the fox, male or female. These are said to be epicoene.

119. Artictr. Forms of the article 6, }, 7d, the, are often used with nouns in the grammar to mark the genders and cases, We therefore give here the inflection of the article.

Sing. Masc. Fem. Neut.| Dual. Masc. Fem. Neut.| Plur. Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. 6 7 76 |N.A. td rd to |Nom. oi ai ta Gen. rot ris rod | G.D. roy raiv row | Gen. ray trav rav Dat. 76 TH TO Dat. trois rais rots Acc. rév thy 6 Acc. tovs tas Ta

Rem. a. In the dual feminine, roiy is often used for raiv, and ro almost always for ra (cf. 521).

Rem. b. The interjection 4 is commonly used with the vocative: & yova. O woman (cf. 543 a). :

120. Accent. The accent of a noun remains, in all the forms,

on the same syllable as in the nominative singular, or as near

that syllable as the general laws of accent allow: dvJpwros man, acc. sing. advJpwrorv, nom. pl. dvIpwro.; but gen. sing, dvJpamou (93 b), dat. pl. dvIpdrois: dvowa name, gen. sing. éyduaros (91), gen, pl. dvondrwv (98 b).

121. An accented ultima, in general, takes the acute: but In the genitive and dative of all numbers, a long ultima, if

accented, takes the circumflex: worapés river, gen. sing. toTapod, Tyun honor, dat. sing. tiny, wovs foot, gen. pl. rodav, wyv month, gen. and dat. dual pyvoiv.

Rem. a. The nominative and accusative have a circumflex on the ultima, only in contracted forms, as dcrodv bone for dcréov, pl. dora for éoréa; and in some words of one syllable, as pis mouse, ace. piv.

119 D, For dialectic forms of the article, see 239 D.

a ae ere

- FIRST DECLENSION. "FEMININE JINES.

opagts 199, Fee Geese: Nouns dueeaentaeat in two }wincip ways which, however, were originally one. , These are q . . The Consonant-Declension, for stems ending in a conso-

ey or close vowel. _ 2. The Vowel-Declension, for stems ending in an open vowel.

4 The vowel-declension divides itself into two forms, according : as the stem, ends in o (w) ora. Hence we have LL. The Vowel-Declension, including The A-Declension, commonly called First Decl. (a), and The O-Declension, commonly called Second Decl. (b). IL. The Consonant-Decl., commonly called Third Decl. (c). Rem. d. These three correspond to the jirst, second, and third declen- sions in Latin. The Latin fourth and jisth declensions are only modifica- tions of the third and jirst eee

,. _ First Dectension (A-Declension).

128. To this declension belong all stems (both masculine and feminine) that endina. The gender may be known from the nominative singular, where the masc. takes a case-ending s, which is wanting in the fem. ‘Thus the nom. sing. of feminines ends in a or 4; of masculines, in as or ys.

124. | J. Femrmtnes. Example. 9 xepa land |nyA@ooatongue| 7 tiun honor Stem. xXopa yoooa tina Sing. Nom. a) xopa yhoood Tin Gen. THs xepas yAooons Tins Dat. TH Xope . yAooon TULy Ace. . TH Xopa-y yaood-v Tin-v Voc. ® xopa yAoood TLLH Du. N. A. V. | ta xX@opa yroood Tima G. D. | raity | yapaw yAoocaty Tipaty Plur. Nom. at x@pat yAeooat Tipai Gen. | Trav | xwpav yNoooay TLLOY Dat. Tais | xe@pats yoocats Tiats Acc.’ Tas xXopas yAooods Tias Voce, ® xXapat yrA@ooat Tipat

Other examples: Bia force, cxia shadow, jucpa day,—§—d6d£a opinion, dkavSa thorn;——nvhn gate, yvaun judgment, Sva3nxn testament.

4 125. A or H IN THE stncuLaR. In the singular, the final a of the q stem is often changed toy. In reference to this, we have the following rules (125-7). ;

s

34 FIRST DECLENSION. FEMININES. $125

In the Nominative Singular,

a. after <, t, p, the a is retained (29 a); so also b. after o (& W, oo or 77), G AA, aw; but ce. after other letters, a is changed to 7.

Thus, a. yeved generation, piria friendship, sipa door ;——-b. Modca Muse, pata wagon, diva thirst, 3ddacca, later Attic Sadarra (41), sea, pita Toot, dura contest, héarva lioness ;——c. Bon cry, Urn, wood, Som pleasure, apern virtue.

Exc. d. The prinoipal exceptions are, to a. xdpn maiden, d€épy neck ; to b. épan dew, xépon (later Attic néppn, 43 a) temple ;——to c. orod pillar-hall, xpéa color, rédpa courage, Siarra mode of living.

126. The Genitive and Dative Singular have a, when the nominative has a pure (85 a) or pa (125 a); otherwise, they have n: nom. yeved, gen. yeveds, dat. yeved; 80 oTod, oTOGS, TTOG ; JvpA, Jvpas, Ivpa; but nom. Moitea, gen. Movons, dat. Movon; dioura, Siairns, Siairy.

Exc. a. A few proper names with long a are exceptions: Anda, gen. Anéas, dat. Anda.

127. The Accusative and Vocative Singular have the same vowel as the nominative: thus acc. xopay, yAdooar, tysjv, from nom. xwpa, yAdovo., TYAH.

128. The Genitive Plural has the ending oy, which with a of the stem makes awv, contracted wy. Hence it comes, that im all words of this declension the Genitive Plural is perispomenon. Thus xa@pa, gen. pl. (yopdwv, 93 b) ywpav (98). For exceptions, see 137 and 207 b.

129. The Dative Plural had at first the ending o1, before which an x - was added to the a of the stem, making aor. This was shortened to as; yet aov is often found in Attic poetry, rarely in Attic prose. Cf. 143.

125-7 D. 1. In the Doric, @ remains unchanged: tipa, rimas, Tima, Tyme. 2. In the Ionic, a is changed to 7 in all cases of the sing.: -yeven, piAiny, BaoiAeins, wolpn.——Short a generally remains unchanged: BactAed, woipar. But abstract words in ed, om change it to n: GAndeln Att. dAnd,Ea truth, evrAoln favorable voyage; the same change occurs also in kvicon smoke of

burnt fat, and in SxvAAn.——Hm. retains @ in Sea goddess and a few proper names. 8. From viugon maiden, bride, Hm. has Voce. Sing. vduga.

128 D. In the Genitive Plural, Hm. has a, -dwy, the original form: KxAroidwy of tents. b. -éwyv, the Ionic form (26 D): awvAdwy of gates. This -éwyein Hm. is usu- ally sounded as one syllable, by synizesis (37). . c. -av, the Attic form, mostly after vowels: mape:dyv of checks. The Doric form -ay, a contraction of -dwv (32 D h), is used also in the dra- matic choruses: Seay of goddesses.

129 D. In the Dat. Pl., Hm, has-—(a) the Ion. form -yoi(v): kAsotyor; —(b) also often -ys: wérpys to rocks ; ——(c) rarely the Att. -as: Seats.

«

eS je ay, 7 aF : ; ; . a gase] = FIRST DECLENSION. MASCULINES. eee Ske ty

ed va

es ee

' ‘Exe. c. The only exceptions to b are a few proper names, as Anda. To a, the principal exceptions are,——1. Female designations in rpva and

eat Bacithed queen (but Baotreia kingdom)——2. Most compounds in eva, and ova: d-AnSerd truth, ev-vod good-will. 3. Most words in pa

after o or a diphthong: ayxipd anchor, poipa fate.

es Rem. d. The quantity of a pure and pa may always be known by the

é accent, it being true for these, that

i” In oxytones and paroxytones, « is long ; while in proparoxy-

tones and properispomena, it is of course short (93 b).

131. In the Accusative and Vocative Singular, a has the same quantity as in the Nominative; in the other cases (gen. sing., ace. pl., nom., ace., voc., dual), it is always long.

132. Contract Substantives and Adjectives. These follow the rule in 36 a: thus pva, pras, pra, pvay (for pva-a, etc.) mina, yn, vis, yn». yav (for ye-a or ya-a) land. See “Epps (183), Boppas (136 d), and ef. 208.

133. | II. Mascunrss. Example. | 6 veavias young man |6 roXirns citizen|6 “Epuns Hermes Stem. veavia moNtra ‘Epua (for “Eppea) Sing. Nom. | 6 f veavid-s mudirn-s Eppij-s en. | Tov veaviov MoXtTov « Eppov Dat. -| ré veavia mohiry Eppy Acc. | rov veavid-v moNirn-v Eppijev Voc. | 6 veavia ToNird “Eppn Du. N. A. V.| ro veavia moNira “Eppa images G.D. | rotv | veaviav qoXiraty ‘Eppaiv = [of & Plur. Nom. | of veaviat moNtrat “Eppat Gen. | rav | veanav ToNr@y “Eppav Dat. | rots | veavias moXirats ‘Eppais Ace. | rods | veavias moXirds ‘Eppas Vow {| ~ | veavia moXirat ‘Eppat

So rapias steward, Nixias, TpiBns gymnastic-master,

Kpitns judge, orpariatns soldier, matdo- adoreayns prater, “AdkiBiddns.

134. In the Singular of masculines, a is retained after a vowel or p; and is always long (but see 135). After other letters, it is changed to ».

y 132 D. The Ion, generally has the wncontracted forms. Hd. uses yj (Hm. ts yaia or ala); but has wyéa for pra.

134 D. The Ion, has » for @ through the Sing. (125 D, 2), The Dor. has @ for; and, in the Gen. Sing., has -@ (contr. from -a0, 832 D h) for -ov: *Arpelda.

*

ws ¥y ,

a

36.08" FIRST DECLENSION. MASCULINES. [138

135. The Vocative Singular takes a short, when the nomi- mative ends in trys: thus woAtra (nom. wodirns citizen).

So, too, in names of nations and compound words, which make the nom. in ns: Hepod (nom. Iépons Persian), yeo-werpa (NOM. yew-éTpys land-measurer). Other words in ns have n in the voc.: Kpovidn (nom. Kpovtdns son of Cronus).

Rem. a. Aéomora, voc. of deamérns master, has irregular accent (120).

_186, The declension of masculines differs in only two points from that of feminines : a. The Nom. Sing. takes the case-ending s. b. The Gen. Sing. ends in ov.

Rem. c. In the Gen. Sing. of masculines, the proper ending is 0, which with a of the stem gives ao (as in Homer); from this, by weakening a to ¢ (25), and then contracting (32 d), comes ov the common form: zodi- ta-o (moAtTeo) moXirov. .

Rem. d. In the Gen. Sing. of Boppas (contracted from Bopéas north wind), the original ao has the Doric contraction to @: Boppa. This oc- curs also in some Doric and Roman proper names, and in a few other words: SvAdas Sulla, épuSo%npas bird-catcher, G. S. SvAAG, dpuBoBpa.

137. Two masculines have an irregular accent in the Gen. Pl. (128): xpnorns usurer, G. P. xpnoray (but xpnorav G. P. of the adj. ypnords

good), and ernoia annual winds, G. P. ernoiwv. So also the fem. apin anchovy, G. P. apiav (but ddvav G. P. of the adj. a@uns dull).

Sxeconp Deciension (O-Declension).

138. To this declension belong stems that end ino. They are chiefly masculine and neuter, with a few feminines.

The masculines and feminines have os in the Nom. Sing., the neuters ov. ‘The feminines are declined like the masculines: the neuters differ from them in two respects:

a. The Nom. and Voce. Sing. take v, the accusative-ending. b. The Nom., Acc., and Voc. Plur. end in 4.

136 D. a. In some masculine words, Hm. has a Nom. Sing. in va for rns: imméra, for imrdrns horseman, aixunrd for aixunrhs spearmun, etc.: also, with accent thrown back, pytiera counsellor, axdxenra favorer. So too ebptowa far. sounding. Of. Lat. poeta, scriba.

b. In the Gen. Sing., Hm. has

1. -do, the original form: *Arpeldao.

2. -ew, the Ionic form (26D): *Azpeldew. This -ew in Hm. is always sound ed as one syllable (37). The accent remains as in the original form (96).

8. -w, a contraction of do, used after vowels: ‘Epuweiw (nom. ‘Epyelas Att, Epis), Bopéw (nom. Bopéas, 136 a).

_ 0 Of tlie stem is combined with an earlier ending 10: avSpéraio. _ (but not Pindar) has sometimes w for ov (24 D d).

lees Fi ie

y At be aC ON) Dp N. ‘fae eee: 3.

“| 6 Gv3paros man 9 606s Way Td Odpov gift | avSparro 650 Sapo ” 6 avSpemo-s | 1 6d0-s [7d | da@po-v | Tov | av3pa@rou | tis 6000 Tov | d@pov T | av¥poar@ | TH 660 To | dapm Tov | avBpwmo-v | Thy | ddd-v © To | d@po-v ray M3pore. | 60€ ® d@po-v TO avSpere@ | Ta 60a Ta | dopo Tow | avSpemov | taivy | ddoiv roiv | Sapo oi aSpwmo. | at 6doi ta | dapa Tav | avYparev | tav | ddr trav | doapwv Tois | avSpwmois | tais | ddvis Trois | Sopors Tovs | dvSpamous | Tas 6dovs ta | O@pa ® @Spero | o@ 6doi @ dpa

So vopuos law, xivddvos danger, radpos bull, rotauds river, révos labor,

Bios life, Savaros death, 3eds god (141),——~vijoos (fem.) island,——

TvKo fig, wEeTpov Measure, indriov outer garment.

139. The jfeminines may be known, in part, by the general rules tine Ye n pnyds kind of oak, 7 cymedos vine, 7 #retpos mainland, 4 Sduos the island) Samos, 4 Képwos (the city) Corinth. Of the remaining feminines, the most important are a. Several names of mineral or earthy substances: Wdappos sand yowos chalk, mrivsos brick, arodds ashes, kimpos dung, \ijos pebble, Baca-

vos touch-stone.

b. Several words that denote something hollow: yndds coffer, yvd- Sos Jaw, KiBards chest, copds coffin, Anvés wine-press, kdpdoros kneading- trough, xapivos oven. ‘So radpos trench.

c. Several words for way : dds, nehevSos ; drparrds foot-path, duakerds wagon-road ; but 6 otevards narrow passage.

d. Several adjectives used as substantives: 7 Sudperpos (sc. ypappny Vine) diameter, cvykdnros (sc. Bovdy council) legislative assembly.

e. Further, SiS8ros book, paBdos staff, Siddexros dialect, vdcos disease, Spgaos dew, Soxds beam.

140. In the Genitive Singular, the proper ending is 0, which, by con- traction with o of the stem, gives ov: av3pwro-o, avSpamov.

141. In the Vocative Singular of masculines and feminines, o of the stem becomes « (25). But the Nominative is often used in place of the Vocative; in Seds god, it is always so: & eds (Lat. deus).

_ Rem. a. The yocative singular of ddeAdds brother is adeAde, with ir- regular accent (120).

140 D. In the Gen. Sing., Hm. has two forms, -ov and -o10; in the latter The Dorie

Other peculiarities of dialect are the following: a. In the Gen. Dat. Du., Hm. has ouy for ow: Suouv from duos shoulder.

38 .# SECOND DECLENSION. CONTRACT worps. = [142

142. In the Genitive Plural, o of the stem is always lost in the end- ing wy: but this ending does not therefore (as in the A-Declension, 128) require the accent: avSpwro-wy, dvSparer.

143. The Dative Plural (formed as in the A-Declension, 129) ended at first in ovor; and this ending is found, not only in the other dialects, but often in Attic poetry, rarely in Attic prose.

144. Contract Substantives and Adjectives. Words whick have stems in «o, oo, suffer contraction. This takes place ac- cording to the rules in 32 and 36 a.

Example. 6 vovs mind TO oarouv bone Stem. voo ooTeo Sing. Nom. vdo-¢) vou-s (dcréo-v) darod-v Gen. oe vou daréov) darod Dat. (v6) ve doTe@ d0T@ Ace. (vdo-v) ~*~ vov-v doTeo-v) daTod-r Voce. (vée) vod (d0r€o-v) daTod-v Du. N. A. V. (vse) vo daTéw) 60T@ G, D. (véowv) voiv daréow) daroi Plur. Nom. (véor) vot doTéa) éoTa Gen. (véor) vav dotéav) doTav Dat. véots) vois (d0réos) darots Acc. eae voos — doTa Voc. (vdor) vot doTéa éoTa

So wAois (from mddos) sailing, repimdous (mepimAoos) circumnavigation, pods (pdos) stream, xavovv (from kdveor, cf. 145 ¢) basket (of cane).

145. The accent of the contract forms is, in some points, inconsistent with the rules in 98:

a. The Nominative Dual, when accented on the ultima, is oxytone: dorm (from éoréw) instead of écrd.

b. Compounds keep the accent on the same syllable as in the con- tract Nominative Singular: zepimAovus (from wepimAoos), dat. sing. mepimd@ (from mepizAd@) instead of mepiurd@.

c. Contracts are made in ois from barytone adjectives of material in eos, and oxytone names of kindred in eds: dpyuvpovs (not dpytpous, from dpyvpeos) of silver, ddeddidois (not -cdovs, from -vdeds) brother's son.

Attic Second Declension.

146. The O-Declension includes a few stems ending in o,

This » appears in all the cases; but takes « subscript where the et

b. In the Dat. Pl., Hm. usually has oo1, Hd. always so. c. In the Acc. Pl., the Doric (not Pindar) has ws or os for ovs: AvKws Of atxos for Adious wolves.

144 D. The Ionic generally has the wncontracted forms.

a

—

P|.) ATTIC SECOND DECLENSIUA. «88

common ending has «. This form of the O-Decl., though not con fined to Attic writers, is known as the Attic Second Declension,

b 6 vew-s temple To avoyew-v hall agi Sing. Du, Plur. > Sing. Du. Plur. Nom. Voce. vEew-$ ve@ dvayew-v avayew

Gen. veo vey dvaryew dvayewv ’ Dat. veo — ve@s dvarye@ dvayeos Acc. vea@-v veos avayeo-v dvaryew ; N. A. V. vEe@ avayeo G. D. ve@y dvayeav

So Aews people, cadws cable.

147. Some of these words are produced by contraction: dynpas, ayn- pov free from old age (from dynpaos, -aov). Some appear under a double form with do and ew (26): veas and vads, Neds and Adds.

148. Some words have » or wy in the Accusative Singular: Aayds hare, ace. sing. Aayo or Aayov. So the proper names ”ASws, Kas, Mivas. “Eos dawn has only éa.

149. The accent of these words is peculiar in two respects : a. The’ long » in the ultima does not exclude the accent from the antepenult (96): dvayewv, MeveAews (= Mevedaos) Menelaus. b. The Gen. and Dat., when accented on the ultima, are oxytone (cf. 121); yet most editions give the circumflex, except in the gen. sing.

150. Comparison oF First AnD Sreconp Deciensions, The A- and O-Declensions, the two branches of the Vowel-Declension (122), have the following points in common:

Sing. Nom. Masculines take the ending s. Gen. Masculines take the ending o. Dat. All genders have a long vowel with z subscript. Acc. All genders take the ending ».

Du. N. A. VY. All genders end in the stem-vowel (lengthened, if short). G.D. All genders add wy to the stem-vowel.

*Plur. Gen. All genders end in ov.

Dat. All genders take ox or s, with preceding «. Nom. Masculines and feminines add x to the stem-vowel. Acc. Masculines and feminines take s (originally vs), and

lengthen a preceding short vowel on account of the omitted v (48).

On the other hand, the two declensions differ from each other in the formation of the nominative and genitive singular of feminines, and in the accent of the genitive plural.

146 D. In the other dialects, this variety of declension is little used, except in proper names. For veds, Aeds, ndAws, Aaydés, Hm. has ynds, Aads, xdAos, Aaywds; Hd. vnds, Aads (or Ands), KdAos, Aayds. For “Adws, Kés, yéAws, Hm, has °"ASdéws, Kéws, yaddws. For é€ws, both Hm. and Hd. have jds (182).

The orig. ending -o of the Gen. is seen in Tlered-o Hm., Nom, Mered-s.

40 THIRD DECLENSION. GENDER. [151

-_

Tarrp Dectenston (Consonant-Declension).

151. To this declension belong, not only stems ending in a consonant, but also those which end in a close vowel (1, v) 3 to- gether with a few in o.

Rem. a. In this declension, the form of the nominative singular is not sufficient to determine the other cases. It is often necessary to have also either the stem of the word, or the genitive singular, from which the stem may generally be found by dropping os the ending.

152. GmnpER. The gender may be known in many cases by the last letters of the stem.

The following rules relate only to substantive stems; and, where a stem is contracted, they apply to the primitive or wncontracted form.

Neuter are stems ending in a. ar: as Képas (kepar) horn, vdep (idar) water. b. ap: as vexrap nectar. C. as, est aS yéevos (yeves) Tace, ynpas Old age. d. 1, v, if s is not added in the nom.: dorv city. Feminine are those ending in TT: aS tayuTns (rayuryt) swiftness. 8, 3: as dois (aomd) shield, poet. kdpus (kopv%) helmet. yov, Sov: as orayav (orayov) drop, xedav (xedtOov) swallow. 0: aS meiI@ (meiSo) persuasion. — l, vi as mors city, odpv-s brow, vad-s ship. Except those under d and j. .

Masculine are those ending in

j. ev: as ypadev-s writer.

k. vr: as odovs (odovr) tooth, réevav (revovr) tendon.

l, nr, wr: aS Tams (ramnr) carpet, Epws (epar) love.

Except those in rr.

m. v: as xreis (krev) comb, Newov meadow. Exe. those in yor, dev.

Nn. p: as kparnp mixing-bowl. Except those in ap.

o. Stems ending in a labial or palatal (rm, B, $, x, y, x) are never neuter, but whether they are masculine or feminine cannot be determined by general rules.

Rem. p. Several words which properly are masculine, especially words denoting persons or animals, are also sometimes used as feminine: as 6 also 4 wdprus (uaprup) witness, 6 also 7 adextpu@y (adexrpvoy) cock or

‘hen, 6 also ai&Snp (aiSep) aether.

rpg rh @

153. Exceptions. The following are the principal exceptions to the rules above given: we omit those in which the gender is obvious from the meaning, as in 6, 7 mais (aid) boy, girl, 7 Svyatnp (Suyarep) daughter.

Exceptions to b, 6 Wap starling ;——+to f, 6 rovs (10d) foot, 6, 7 dpris (opis) bird ;——to i, masc. éyt-s Viper, dpxi-s testicle, dpi-s serpent, Bérpu-s cluster of grapes, Spnvv-s foot-stool, ixSv-s fish, pi-s Mouse, véKu-s

Y “os aed in ri ag by Se fem. Sais Car) vuxr) night, ydapis (yaper) favor, and neut. yada (yadaxr) mil <3 ta » xdpus (yap yada (y

154, The Casz-Enprvas are as follows:

| si Masse. and Fem. Neut. | Sing. Nom. ; s (or vowel lengthened) ° none eb Gene 5 | os Pot) >) Dat. t 8 Ai MeO; > a ory none io. Yoo none (or like nom.) none Du. N.A. V. é | G. D. - , ov } Plur. N . Vv. €s a - Gen. ov ~<-* Dat: a oi(v) Ace. ds ad

™ 155. The nominative, accusative, and vocative singular of - wNeEuUTER words are like the stem. Final 7 of the stem is either _ dropped (75), or changed to s (76): cdpa (for cwpnar) body, répas (for repar) prodigy. :

4 156. The NOMINATIVE SINGULAR of masculines and feminines _ adds sto the stem. But stems in y, p, s, 0, or, ovr, reject the end- _ ing s, and lengthen «, 0, to y, w: thus 4 Aipnv Auper) harbor, pyrep (pyrop) orator, rpunpns (rpinpes) trireme, meted (meio) persuasion, heducas (for eAvewr 76, St. NeAvKor) having ___ loosed, Néewv (for Aewvr 75, St. Neovr) Lion.

_ For the euphonic changes caused by s, see 47-49.

153 D. n, Several poetic stems (most of them defective) in op, wp, are

neuter: &op sword, jrop heart, €Awp prey, Téxuwp = Téxpap bound.

154 D. a. In the Gen. Dat. Dual, Hm. has ouy for ow: modotv.

___b. In the Dat. Pl., Hm. has both o: and eco: maou (for wavt-or) and mdyr-

1; (rarely cot: <Wy-ect.)

The ¢ of ecor is sometimes omitted when the stem ends in a vowel: véxv-oot, eoo.. The irreg. decor (from Ui-s sheep) should perhaps be written di-con

forms like @reoo1, = ewer + ox (55 D), the first o belongs to the stem:

1 bérac-o1, and mocol = mod-c1 (47 D), tpioos = pid-o1,

,. ~ --

42 THIRD DECLENSION. CASE-FORMATION. [156

Exo. a. Stems in w take s, though some of them have both. forms: deAdis or deriv dolphin. | b. Participles in ovr take s, when o belongs to the verb-stem: dovs (= do-vr-s) giving. c. s appears also in weAds (= pedar-s) black, radas (= tradav-s) wretch- ed, eis (= év-s) one, xreis (= krev-s) comb, ddovs (= odovr-s) tooth.

157. The ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR of masculines and feminines adds a to stems ending in a consonant: zovs foot, acc. 1d0-a. v to stems ending in a vowel: 7dAt-s city, acc. ToAL-v.

Exo, a. Stems in ev take a: Baowed-s king, acc. Bacidé-a (39).

For the ace. sing. of stems in 0, see 193-4. For y in the ace. sing. of certain stems in 7, 5, 3, see 171.

158. The vocaTIVE SINGULAR of mascéulines and feminines is regularly like the stem.

For dropping of a final consonant, sce 75. .But many words make the vocative singular like the nominative: thus a. Stems of one syllable, not ending in a diphthong: nom. voe. ki-s weevil (but nom. vai-s ship, voc. vai). Only sais (wad) child makes voc. sing. wai (75). | b. Oxytone stems ending in a liquid: nom. voc. zoiuny (rorper) shep- herd (but Saipzev divinity, barytone, voc. datpor like the stem). For irregular vocative in warnp father, avnp man, see 173: also.in catnp savior, “Amd\Aor, Ilocedav, see 172 b. c. Stems ending in a mute: nom. voc. dudaé (puvAak) watchman.—— But the following are exceptions, and use the stem as a voc. sing. : Exc. d. A few stems in 1d: voc. "Apreus (= Aprejud), nom. “Aprepts. So voc. wat (= maid), nom. mais child. Also yova: (= yuvatx) with irregu- lar accent, nom. yurvn woman. e. Substantive and adjective stems in yr, unless oxytone: voc. \éov (=Acovr), nom. Acwr lion, xyapiev (= xaptevr), NOM. yxapiers pleasing. Rem. f. All participles of this declension make the vocative singular like the nominative. So also the adjectives mas (arr) all, every, and éxav (éxovr) willing. For the vocative singular of stems in o, see 194 a.

159. The paTiIvE PLURAL of all genders adds o:(v) to the stem. For the euphonic changes, see 47-49.

160. Accent. In the accent of this declension, we have the follow- ing special rule, contrary to 120:

156 D. c. For é50ts, Hd. has 6déy according to the rule. 158 D. c. From tvat king, Hm. has, beside the regular voc. sing. vag, a form ava (for avaxr, 75) used in addressing gods.——e. From some proper

names in -as (stem -ayr), he forms a voc. sing. in -&: MovAvddua (cf. 81), for TlovAvdapay(7), nom. TovAviduas Polydimas,

gs OE

eg

oy bers, hrow the accent on the case-ending: if the case-ending ig long, it receives the circumflex (121): ve

ber Fy

in te { t

ACCENT. LABIAL AND PALATAL STEM, Ag ems of one syllable, in the Genitive and Dative of all num- _ Thus srovs (70d) foot, acc. sing. 1é8-a, nom. pl. 7dd-es; but genitives

ro0d-ds, 405-oiv, 708-ay, datives rod-i, r0d-oiv, o-cl. Exc. a. All genitives and datives of participles: dv being, gen. dvros,

ss Bvrow, dvrwv, dat. ivri, dvrowv, odor.

b, The gen. and dat. plural of ras all, every: mdavrev, ract.

ce. The gen. dual and plural of zais boy, girl, duas slave, Sas jackal, Tpas Trojan, ro pas light, ) pods blister, 7 das torch, ro ots ear, 6 ons moth: raidior, Sudwv, Soar, Tpdev, horor, Pddav, Sddav, Stav, céwv.

d. Some words in which a stem of two syllables is contracted to one: €ap spring, gen. €apos OF pos, dat. gape or Apt.

161. Quantiry. Several stems lengthen a short vowel in monosylla- bie forms: st. mod, nom. sing. rovs (for wod-s) foot; st. mavr, neuter way all; st. rip, nom. sing. rip fire; st. ov, nom. sing. oi-s hog.

key The Parapiems of this declension will be given in the following order : .

1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal (a, 8, $, k, y, x).

2. a lingual mute (7, 5, 3).

3. a liquid (A, », p). ;

4, the sibilant (c).

5. a simple close vowel (c, v).

6. a diphthong (ev, av, ov).

7. the open vowel o.

163. I. Stems ending in a Labial or Palatal.

6 pudra& 7 prey 9 oddmey& 9 Spi (Gudax) | (GreB) | (oaderyy) | (pty) watchman vein trumpet hair Sing. Nom. prvdra& prey oddmey§ Spié * Gen. | dvdak-os pr«B-ds oddaryy-os Tptx-ds Dat. pvAak-i pr«B-i cdAreyy-t Tpix-t Acc. pvdak-a pr€B-a aTdaAriyy-4 Tpix-a Voc. pira& prew oadmyé Spié Du. N. A. V. pvAak-e pr€B-e oadmeyy-€ Tpix-e G. D. uAak-ov prcB-oiv oudmiyy-ouv TPly-oLV Plur. N. V. udak-es pr€B-es oadmuyy-es Tpix-es Gen. uddk-wv preB-av cadriyy-ov Tplx-@y Dat. piraki prewi oddryét Spr&i Ace, cbvdak-ds pr€B-as oddmryy-as Tpix-as

cw

So 6 yi - (yor) vulture, 6 Aidioy (Acorn) Aethiopian, 6 Apay eet Ara wan, é popun& (uvpynk) ant, i pdorié (Maorty) whip, 7 Bng Bnx) cough, 7 pbppryé (popyryy) lyre.

ye

ad

44 THIRD DECLENSION. LINGUAL STEMS—NEUTER. [103 For the gender, see 152 0. For the formation of the nominative, ac- cusative, and vocative, singular, see 155-8. For the change of aspiration

in Spi, Tpxds, see 66 a.

164, The stem adtwmex makes nom. sing. 7 dAomné fox irregularly for adwme& (gen. ddomexos, dat. ddozexi, etc.). On the contrary, the stems

Knpok, powix, make nom. sing. 6 xijjpv& herald, 6 oe palm, where the

accent shows that v and « were sounded short (9

write knpv&, poiné. II. Stems ending m a Lingual Mute (7, 8, 9).

165. A. Neuter Stems.

b): but many editors

To dpa body| 16 imap liver To kepas horn (copdr) (nar) (xepar) Sing. Nom. capa imap képas Gen. o@pat-os* yrar-os Kepat-os (kepaos) KEepas Dat oopat-t hrar-t Képat-t (kepai) Kképa Acc. Tapa map kKépas Voe copa hrap képas Du. N. A. V.| ocapar-e Wrat-e képat-e (kepac) Képa G Twpdar-o nrat-ow Kepdt-ow (Kepnow) Kep@v Plur. N. V o@patT-a mwat-a Képat-a_ (kepaa) ——kepa Gen. TOUAT-OV TaT-OVv Kepdt-wy (kepawy) Kepaov Dat. cTopact yract képdoe Acc oopat-a Wrat-a Képat-a (kepaa) Képa

So ordua (cropdr) mouth, dvoua (ovopdr) name, Sércap (Seder) bait, répas (repdr) prodigy.

166. Here belong the stems in ar, together with yada (yaAakr) mith, pede (pedir) honey, and das (por) light. Of stems in ar, by far the greater part end in par: these drop r in the nom., acc., voe., sing. (75): mpaypa (mpayudr) affair.

167. Several in ar have ap in the nom., acc., voc., sing.: dpeap well, gen. dpear-os (also contracted dpnrés), dreuap (also dherha) unguent, gen. d\cidar-os. It is supposed that these ended originally in apr, and that r has been dropped in the cases above named (75), but p in all the other forms. °Ydap (vddr) water and oxap (oxar) filth have w irregularly for a in the same three cases. .

168. A few in ar have as in the nom., acc., voc., sing. (76): mépas end, gen. mépar-os. Képas (kepar) horn and répas (repar) prodigy sometimes

166 D. For as, Hm. has only ddos or ddws (cf. 870 D a), dat. oder, plural gdea. dos is used also by Attic (Tragic) poets.

168 D. In képas, gépas, the forms with 7 are not used in the Ionic, Hm, has the forms with a pure: «épaos, xépai; and sometimes contracts them: «épq. Hd. changes a pure to e, and does not contract: xépet, répea.——For wépas wéparos, Hm. has meipap, welparos.

In such cases, it is probable that 7 was first changed to o (62 a), and th

z ar-ds) ear, see 202, 3, 5, 13.

é sre LINGUAL STEMS—MASCULINE AND FEMININE. between two vowels; the vowels are then regularly cm d. en opped according to 64. :

or yévu (gen. ydvat-os) knee, Sdépu (gen. Sdpat-os) spear, and ods (gen.

169. B.° Masculine and Feminine Stems.

6 3s 7 €Amis 1) &pts 67 Opus | 6 yepev (Snr) (eAnid) (epid) (opis) | (yeporr) | hired man| hope strife bird old man Sing. Nom. Ins eAmris Epis dpvis yépav Gen. Syr-ds eAmid-os | €épid-os dpuS-os | yépovt-os Dat. SyT-i eAid-t epio-t dpuS-e yépovT-t ; Acc. 37T-a eArid-a €puv dpyiv yépovT-a - Voc. Ss eArris Epis dps yépov 7 Du. N. A. V.| 3iT-e eArid-e €p.d-e dpuS-e | yepovt-e * G. D. SyT-o1v eArid-ow | épid-oww dpvid-oww | yepdvt-oww 4 Plur. N. V. Syr-es eAmid-es | €ptd-es dpuiS-es | yepovt-es ; Gen. SnT-Ov eAmid-ev | epid-ay épvid-av. | yepdvt-wv a Dat. Shot eAriot Epiot épuict yepovot - Acc. Sir-as eAmid-as | €ptd-as épuiS-as_ | yepovr-as of So 9 w& (vwucr) night, ) Aapmds (Aayrad) torch, 7 xdpis (yapir) favor,

6 yiyas (yeyavr) giant, 6 New (Acovr) Lion. For some irregular forms of dpuis bird, see 202, 12.

- 170. In the Nominative Singular, zovs (705) foot lengthens the short vowel, contrary to 47, see 161. Adpap (dauapr) wife, chiefly poetic, re- jects s on account of the harshness ; see 156.

171. In the Accusative Singular, barytone stems in 7, 6,4, after a close vowel, commonly reject the final mute, and annex v to the close vowel.

This applies to barytone stems in cr, 1d, 13, vd, v3. This ydprs (yapir) Savor, ace. xdpwy, rarely ydpit-a; but kpymis (kpynnid) base, oxytone, ace, Kpymida, never kpymv. Only the oxytone xAeis (kdevd) key has in the ace. sing. «ety (rarely xAcida), and in the acc. pl. xAeis or Kreidas. ;

169 D. A few stems in wr have forms without 7 (cf. 168 D). Xpdés (xpwr) skin is declined in Ionic, xpds, xpods, xpot, xpda. Hm. has also, but rarely, xpwrés, xp@ra. Hiven the Attic has dat..sing. yp¢@ in the phrase év xp@ elcse by. From idpds (idpwr) sweat, yérws (yeAwt) laughter, Zpws (epwr) love (also pos, 2d declension, poetic), the forms with r are unknown to Hm. — He has only dat. sing. dpe, yeAw, pw, and acc. dpa, yéAw (or yéAwr, 2d decl.), %por.

i71 D. In Hm., words of this class often form the Acc. Sing. in a: %pida more frequent than épiv, yAavedmida from yAavedms bright-eyed.

For xAcis, Hm. uses the Ionic rants, acc. sing. cAnida; the Doric has naats

: (Lat. clayis), rarely «dé.

*

46 THIRD DECLENSION. LIQUID STEMS. [172 172. Ill. Stems ending in a Liquid. 6 moipny | 6 Saipev | 6 aiov 6 3np 6 prrep (wotpev) | (Satpor) (ator) (np (pnrop) shepherd | divinity age wild beast| orator Sing. Nom. | zroiunv Saipov ai@v 3np pytap Gen. | momev-os | daipov-os | aidv-os Snp-ds | pyrop-os Dat. motev-t | Oaivov-t | ai@v-t Inp-i pyrop-t Ace. mowsev-a | Oaiporv-a | aldv-a Inp-a pntop-a Voc. Touny Saipov aiopy 3p pntrop Du. N. A. V.| woueév-e | Saipor-e | aiav-e Snp-e pytop-€ G. D. | rowmév-ow} Satudv-ow | aieov-owv Snp-otv | pyrdp-ow Plur. N, V. | roweév-es | Saipov-es | aiav-es Snp-es | pyrop-es Gen. | romérv-wv | Saipdv-wv | aidv-wv Snp-@v | pynrdép-ev Dat. mouneoe | Salpoct aiaou Snp-ot | pyrop-ot Ace. moimev-as | Salpov-as | aidv-as Snp-as | pyrop-as

So 6 pv (unr) month, 6 Any (Atper) harbor, 6 jyepav (yepov) leader, 6 mravav (raav) pacan, 6 aywv (ayer) contest, 6 aisnp (aiSep) aether, 6 Kpa- . thp (Kparnp) mixing-bowl, 6 pap (pap) thief.

a. The only stem in A is dA, nom. 6 das salt, 7 Gs (poetic) sea.

b. In the Voe. Sing., cwrnp savior, ’Amd\Aov, and Mooedév shorten the long vowel of the stem, and throw the accent back upon the first syllable: oadrep, “AmodXor, IdéoeSov.——The accent is also thrown back in some compound proper names: ’Ayapeuver, “Apioroyeitay, VOC. “Ayd- pepvov, Aprordyerrov. ;

173. Syncopated Stems in ep.

_ Ilarnp (narep) father makes the vocative singular like the stem, but ~ with the accent on the first syllable, contrary to 120: marep. In the genitive and dative singular, it drops e and accents the case-ending (cf. 160): warpés,'warpi. In the other cases, it retains e and accents it: a- répa, matépes. Only in the dative plural, by metathesis and change of vowel, ép becomes pd: marpact.

The same peculiarities belong also to unrnp mother, Svyarnp daughter, and yaornp belly. The proper name Anunrnp (vocative Anunrep) Syn- copates all the oblique cases, but accents them on the first syllable: Anunrtpos, Anunrpa. "Aotnp (acrep) star has no syncopated forms, but makes dat. pl. dorpdcu.

_—

172 D. b. The Epic dahp (Baep) husband's brother has voc. sing. d&ep.

173 D. The poets often have the full forms in the gen. and dat. sing.: mas tépos and marpés. In Svydrnp, they sometimes syncopate other cases: Sdyatpa, Suyarpes, Suyarpay; this happens also in warpaéy for warépwy. In the dat. pl., the Epic -ecos may be used: Svyardpeco:, From dvhp, the poets use *ayvépos, "avépes, etc., as well as avdpds, tivdpes, etc.; in the dat. pl., Hm, has both évdpdor and &ydpecot.

*

ware ino

e sound: (53) : _ dvdpos, dvdpes, avdpact.

man follows the analogy of marnp, but syncopates all th ep comes before a vowel: it also inserts 6 between yand

aes p to strengthen th

otis 6 marip Hh eNTNP H) Svyarnp 6 dynp pobettvartes © Pei: (waren) (untep) (Suyarep) (avep) Red Sather mother daughter man Sing. Nom. maTnp pntnp Suyarnp avnp Gen. maTpos pntpds Svyarpds avdpés Dat. marpt pntpl Suyarpi avOpi Ace. marép-a pnrép-a Svyarép-a avdpa Voce. maTeEp BTEp Suyarep dvep Du. N. A. V marep-€ pntép-€ Suyarép-e avdpe G. D. jmarep-ow Pacey ost Suyarép-owv avdpotv Plur. N. V. marép-es pntép- es Suyarép-es avdpes Gen. Tare p-@ov pntep-wy — | Suyarép-wy avdpav Dat. marpaot pytpdoe Svyatpdot dvdpact Acc. marép-as pntép-as Suyarép-as avSpas

174. Comparative Stems in ov.

Adjectives of the comparative degree in or (stem oy) drop »

in certain forms, and then contract the concurrent vowels.

Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. Sing. Nom. pelCov greater peiCov . en. peiCov-os petCov-os Dat. peiCor-t peiCov-t - Ace. peiCov-a [pero-a] peilo poetCov Voce. peiCov peicov Du. N. A.V. | peigor-e peiCov-e -D. | pecgdv-ow pecCov-ow Plur. N. V. peicov-es [erCo-es} peiCovs peiCov-a [perfo-a] peigo Gen. poerCdv-av petCdv-wv Dat. peiCooe peiCooe o Acc. peicov-as [werCo-as] peifovs _peifov-a [perCo-a] peio

So Bedriov better, aicxiwy more shameful, ddryiwv more painful.

175. a. In comparatives of more than two syllables, the forms which end in oy throw back the accent on the antepenult: BeAriov, aicxuor.

b. The forms with y and the contracted forms are both in use.

~ intermediate forms (as pe:Coa) are never found. c. According to the same analogy, ’Amd\A@p, locedév make in the

acc. "AmdéAAwva and ’ArdAX@, Tocerddva and Tocedo. For substantive stems in ov which occasionally drop », see 194 c.

175 D. The statement in b. applies also to Hm. and Hd._—The contract ace. of *ArdéAAwy and Mogeidéy is not used by Hm. and Hd., but from xuked» mixed draught Hm. makes ace. sing. kuke@ or kuked.

4

The

48 THIRD DECLENSION. STEMS IN 3. [176

IV. Stems ending in s. 176..A. Stems in es.

TO yevos TACE M. F. evyevns = N. evyevés well-born (yeves) (evyeves) Ss. N yévos - | M. BF. edyenns N. ciyevés G.| (yéve-os) yévous | (evyevé-os) edyevods D.| (yéve-i) yéver (evyevé-i) — evyevet A. | ‘yévos (edyevé-a evyern NN. evyevés V.| yévos’ evyevés

Dual. | (yéve-e) _ yern (edyevée-e) — evyevin

(yeve-owv) yevoiv | (edyevé-ow) evyevoiv

RB, N. |. (yéve-a) -yevn (evyeve-es) evyeveis N. (cdyeve-a) edyera G. |- (yevé-wv) yevdv | (edyevé-wv) edyevar D.| _yéveot evyevert A. | (yéve-a) evn (cdyevé-as) evdyeveis N. (edyevé-a) edyeva |

So 7d cidos form, xddrdos beauty, pédos song. Adjectives caphs (neut. cages) clear, axpiBns (dxpiBés) exact, ednSns (edndes) simple.

177. The stems in es are very numerous. The substantive stems are neuter, and change es to os in the nom. sing. (25). The adjective stems retain es in the neut., but change it to ys in the nom. mase. and fem. (156).

‘H rpinpns (tpinpes) trireme, and some others in npns, though used as substantives, are properly adjectives, belonging to an implied vais ship.

178. Before all case-endings, s falls away (64). The vowels, which come together, are then contracted.—ee in the dual gives 7 (contrary to 32 d).—ea coming after a vowel gives a (contrary to 32 b): iyujs (iytes) healthy, acc. tya (but also byzi)), xpéos (ypees) debt, neut. pl. ypea. But adjectives in @uns have both pu7 and hua: evpuns witty, edpuy and edpua. —For contraction of eas to evs in the ace. pl., see 36 b.

179. Barytone words in ns have recessive accent (97) everywhere, even in contract forms: Swxpdryns, voc. Sexpdres (n0t Sexpdres, 120), avrapkns self-sufficing, neuter avrapkes, gen. pl. (adirapkéwy) aitdapxer (not avrapKar,

* 176 D. The uncontracted forms prevail in Hm.; yet he often contracts e to ex in the dat. sing., and sometimes eés to es in the nom. pl. In the gen. sing., he sometimes contracts eos to evs: Sdpoevs from Sdpogos courage. KA€0s fame makes nom. pl. nada for Kréea. In the dat. pl., Hm. has three forms: BeAé-eoc1, BéeAco-o1, and BéArc-o1 (55), from BéAos missile.

Hd. has only the uncontracted forms.

178 D. In Hm., a vowel before the e is sometimes contracted with it: ed- KAens glorious, acc. pl. ebxAcias for edxrcéas; but a&yaxAjos for dyaxAeéos gen, of d&yaxAens (in &KAnets for &xAeées, the first € is irreg. lengthened to 7).—— onéos or omeios cave has gen. oreiovus, dat. orqi (for orée-i), dat. pl. omheror (for - omeé-eost) and irreg. oméoot. déos fear has irreg, gen, Selous.

180. Proper names in xAens, compounded with xAéos (dees) Jame, have in some forms a double contraction: nom. (Ilepuxdens) Tepixdjjs,

gen. (Ilepixdceos) Ilepexéous, dat. (IlepixAeci, Tepuxdeec) Iepixdet, ace.

181. B. Stems in as, 0S, ws.

_ (TlepexAcea) Tepixdéa, voc. (IepixNees) Tepixders.

TO Kpeas Jlesh 7 aides shame 6 pws ‘ . (kpeas) (atdos) hero : Sing. Nom. Kpéas aides pos e Gen. Kpéd-os) Kpéws aidd-os) aidovs }pw-os , Dat. Kpéa-i) kpéa aidd-i) — aidot npart

Acc. Kpéas ; aidd-a) aida pe-a Voe. Kpéas aides pos Du. N. A. V. Hpo-e

3 G. D. 1p@-olv ; Plur, N. V. (kpéa-a) Kped Hpw-es Gen. (kped-wv) Kpedy pa-ov

Dat. Kpéage p@-ot Acc. (kpéa-a) Kpéed 7pw-as

_ 182. These stems are few in number, and all substantives. Those in as are neuter: rd ynpas old age, ro kvésbas darkness. Those in ws are masculine: 6 Sas jackal, 6 unrpws mother’s brother. In os there are but two, both feminine: aides (aidos) shame, and Epic-jas (nos) morn (= At- tic €ws, which is declined according to 146 and 148),

183. These all drop s before a case-ending, like stems in es. In the dat. sing., ai is contracted to a: ynpa (for ynpai), though some would write yipa.. The quantity of a in the contracted nom., acc., pl. is vari- able.——In late writers, xpeas has forms with r: xpéaros, etc. (cf. 168).

184, The dat. and acc. sing. of ijpws are usually contracted: ip, foe (for zjpwi, jpea); so, sometimes, the nom. and ace. pl.: ijpas (for jpaes, jpeas). Some of the stems in ws have occasional forms according to the Attic Second Decl.: gen. sing. gpa, acc. jpav.

180 D. Hm. declines ‘HpaxAéys, ‘Hpaxajos (178 D), ‘Hpaxaqi, ‘Hpaxaja, ‘HpdiAeis. Hd. “Hpakaéns, ‘“Hpaxdéos, ‘Hpaxddi, ‘HpaxAéa, ‘HpdxAeces, one € being rejected before endings that begin with a vowel.

182 D. Stems in as. Hm. always has & for aa in the nom., acc., pl.: yépa

prizes, Séma cups; he sometimes contracts in other caseg: oéAg, xpedv or

Kpet@v.—§ovdas ground, floor, Kaas fleece, xrépas possession, in all other forms take ¢ for a: otdeos oder ober, dca Kdeor, KTéEpea KTepewy funeral-gifts: so

also poetic Bpéras, Bpéreos, image. Cf. yépea Hd. for yépaa, The only con-

tract forms in Hd. are xpéa, xpeav. Dor. xpijs = kpéas. ‘The two stems in os always show the contract form, even in Hm. and Hd, _ From stems in ws, Hm. has fpwi and fipy, Mivwa and Mive.

$

4

ws]

a x5 ‘The neuter ddyés (M. F. ddn37s) true throws back the accent when 5 +3 used as a question: ddnies ; really? .

= e

THIRD DECLENSION. STEMS IN I AND Y. [185 185. V. Stems mt and v (simple close vowels). 7 mods 6 mxvs TO Gotu 6 pus 6 ixSvs (mrodt) (anxv) (aord) (po) (1x30) ’ city fore-arm city MOUSE Jish Sing. Nom. | wéri-s mHxXv-s datu pi-s ixSv-s Gen, | mdde-ws | mye-ws aore-os | pu-ds ix3v-os Dat. |(wdre-i) |(anxe-i) ‘| (deore-i) pu-i. ix3v-i monet TNXEt aores Acc. | addi-v mXv-v aor po-y ixSv-v | Voc. | more 7HXV doru po-s ixsv Du. N.A. V.| onXe-e T™XE-€ dore-e pu-e ixdv-e G. D. | wodé-ow | anyé-ow | doré-ow | pv-oiv ixSv-ouw Plur. N. V. |(adre-es) |(anye-es) — |(Gore-a puv-es ix3v-es moXets TNXELS adaoTn Gen. | wddce-av | mnye-wv. | dore-ay | pv-av ix3v-ov Dat. | woéde-ot | mxe-ou dotresot | pu-oi ixSv-o8 Ace. |(mdde-as) |(mnyeras) |(dore-a) (| pt-as or | ty%b-as or modes mHXELS aorn pus ix3vs

So 7 divapi-s power, 7 ordot-s faction, 6 wédexv-s axe (like mijxus), 6 4 av-s swine (like pis), 6 Bdrpu-s cluster of grapes (like iySvs).

186. The final: or v of the stem always appears in the nom., acc., and voc., sing. Elsewhere, it is generally changed to e. Contraction then occurs in the dat. sing. and in the nom. and acc. pl. For eas contracted to evs in the acc. pl., see 86 b.. The nom. and acc. dual are seldom con- tracted (ee to n, cf. 178): mddn, adorn. After e, the gen. sing. takes as, the so-called Attic ending, which, however, does not prevent the accent from standing on the antepenult (96): wdAews, myxews. The gen. pl. fol- lows the accent of the gen. sing.: wéAc@v, ryxeov. The neuter doru has gen. sing. doreos, less often dorews.

The New Ionic retains : in all the forms, but contracts u in the dat. sing. to 7, and sas in the ace. pl. to is. Thus Sing. wéArs, wéAtos, mwéAt, WA, WAL, Pl. wéAres, woAtwy, wéArot, wéAis. The older editions of Hd. admit other forms to some extent, as dat. sing. wéAe:, nom. pl. wéAis, acc. pl. méAtas OF WéAets.

Hm. changes z to e before « in the dat. sing. and ot in the dat. pl. Thus Sing. wéais, méAsos, wéAet or wéAet, wéAw, woAt, Pl. wéAtes, woAl@y, wéAeot OF woAlegot, wéAuas. In the dat. sing. and acc. pl., he sometimes has the contract forms of the New Ionic: «dé dat. sing. of kévs dust, &xolris acc. pl. of &korris wife. He even uses wéaAeis for méAtas.

From wéars itself, Hm. has also a peculiar form with n: aéAnos, réAni, wéAn- es, wéAnaS. For the datives meAéxeoot, deoo1, see 154 D..

Stems in v. The Ionic always has os in the gen. sing. Hm. sometimes contracts ef to e1, vi to vi, in the dat. sing., and vas to ts in the ace. pl.: mhxe, txSvi, ixSds. Hd, has only the contraction of vas to vs. For the datives véxvoot, Tirvoct, see 164 D,

, :

186 D. Stems int.

a “Most stems i in « follow the formation just described. So too PF e stems in v: these, however, take os in the gen. sing., and — e no contraction in the neuter plural: yAvku-s sweet, yhuké-os, yAuké-a, eal substantives, such forms as rdAcos, mnxeos, are sometimes found, ' iy in poet | . b. “Most. substantive stems in v preserve this vowel through all the fabs. ve in the dual and plural may be contracted to o: axa (for ix3ve), _ ixsis (for ix3ves): the acc. pl. generally has vs for vas (33).

E188, "Eyxedus eel is declined like ixSvs in the Sing., but like mjxvs in the Pl.: gen. sing. eyxéhv-os, nom. pl. éyxéAeus.

‘The poetic adjective tdpus (Spr) knowing retains the final « of the stem as in all the cases.

189. VI. Stems ending in a Diphthong.

6 Bacirev-s 67 Bod-s | 1 ypav-s 1) vav-s

= = king ox, cow | old woman ship SS er -eeee< = z - | Sing. Nom. | Bacidev-s » Bots ypav-s vad-s ad en. | Baowre-as. — Bo-ds ypa-ds VEe-@S — *Dat. |(Bacire-i) Baoret Bo-t ypa-t vn-t Ace. Baowdé-a Bot-v ypav-v vav-v a Voc. | Bacired Bod ypav vav - Du. N. A. V.! Bacide-e Bo-e ypa-e vi-€ . G. D. | Baor€-oww Bo-otv ypd-oiv ve-owv = | flur. N. V. (Baorhe-es) Baatreis | Bo-es ypa-es vij-es iP Gen. | Bacwr<-wv Bo-av ypa-av ve-@v at Dat. BactAcd-ot Bov-oi ypav-oi vav-ot ¢ Ace. | Baowré-as Bov-s ypav-s vav-s

So 6 yovev-s parent, 6 icpev-s priest, Odvacev-s, “Axirev-s.

«4 a 190. The final v of the diphthong disappears before all vowels, ac- cording to 39.——The stem vav, after dropping v, becomes vn before a short vowel-sound, ve before a long one. an regard to stems in ev, observe that 4 a, the gen. sing. has ws instead of os, cf. 186. b. the dat. sing. always contracts <i to e7.

5 189 D. Stems in ev. Hd. has only the sucwiliaeta forms. Hm. has 7 in- _ stead of ¢, wherever v falls away: Bacireds, Baotrcd, BaciAcdo1, but BaciAjos, —s- Baw1ARi, etc., dat. pl. apiorherot. Yet in proper names, he often has €: TyAjjos . and Tnagos, Tina fi and InAéi, etc.; rarely with contraction: gen. ’Oduceis, dat. "AxuAAe?, acc. Tvd7. : Bods Dor. Bas, ace. sing. Body Dor. Bay (once i in Be. ): Hm. has in dat. pl. _ Béeaor and oust, ace. pl. Bdas and Bois. Tpats: Hm. has only ypnis (11 D) and -ypnis, dat. vont, VOC. ypnd and ‘ypn’.—Nais is declined by Hm., nom. sing. ynos (11 D), gon. (onds,) veds, dat. vyt, acc. (vija,) véa, nom. pl. (viies,) véesy

en. ia veay, dat. ynvot pore: veéegot), acc. (vijas,) véas. The forms not I 0 ong also to Hd.

52 THIRD DECLENSION. STEMS IN O. [190

¢. the acc. sing. and acc. pl. have a and remain uncontracted.

d. the contract nom. pl. has js in the older Attic writers: thus Bacidjs in Thucydides, instead of Bacrrcis.

e. when ev follows a vowel, contraction may occur in the gen. and ace. sing.: Iepated-s Piraccus, gen. Ietparas, acc. Mespasa (cf. 178).

. Rem. f. The gen. in ews and the acc. in ea, eds, arose, by interchange of long and short quantities, from the Homeric forms in nos, nd, nas.

191. Some compounds of ovs (708) foot form the acc. sing. as if from

a stem in ov: rpimovs (rpurod) three-footed, acc. rpimovy (but in the sense

‘tripod, acc. rpiroda). Oidimovs Oedipus makes Oidimrodos and Oidizov, Oidimod:1, Oidimroda and Oidirovy, Oidimovs and Oidimov.

192. The only diphthong-stem ending in . is o:, Sing. of-s sheep, oi-ds, oi-i, of-v; Pl. of-es, oi-Gy, oi-ci, oi-s (ef. 23 D).

VII. Stems ending in o.

193. Sing. Nom. WELIa Persuasion. en. (metd-os) metSovs Dat. (wewSd-i) mevSot ‘ Acc. (meiSd-a) meso Voc. TESOL

So 7 7xo (nxo) echo, Kaduwo, Anta.

194. a. These are all oxytone feminine substantives——The contract acc. Sing. is oxytone like the nom. (contrary to 98).——The voc. sing., varying from all analogy, ends in ot.

b. In the dual and plural (which occur very rarely), they are de- clined like stems in o of the 2d or O-Decl.: Acxw, nom. pl. Aexoi.

c. A few stems in ov have occasional forms as if from stems in o: eikav (evxov) image, gen. eikovs, ace. eika, acc. pl. eixovs, andar (andor) nightingale, voc. andot.

195. DecLEensions ComparEeD. The Consonant-Declension (Decl. IL1.)

and the Vowel-Declension (Decl. I. IL.) agree in the following points:

1. In all genders,

a. the D. S. ends in « (in the Vowel-Decl., « subscript).

b. the G. D. Dual end in w (aw, ov).

ce. the G. P. ends in op.

d, the D. P. ended originally in ov. 2

. In the neuter, (e) the N, A. V. P. end in a.

191 D. To Oi&frovs belong also gen. Oidirdda-o Hm., and in Trag. gen. Oidimdda, acc. Oidimddav, voc. Oidimdda.

192 D. Hm. (commonly) and Hd. have of for a: dis, dios, etc., dat. pl. Hm. dteoor (once oveor) and vero (154 D). |

193 D. Even the Ionic has only the contract forms. _Hd. makes the ace. sing. in ody: *Iody for “Id.

masculine and feminine, ‘A i

f, the N.S. takes s (or an equivalent for it). This, however. does not apply to feminine stems of the A-Declension. |

___g, the A. S. takes y generally when the stem ends in a vowel. Bry fh the A. P.endsins. ©

__ Rew. i. In the Acc. Sing., v (u) was originally applied even to conso- a nant-stems, a being inserted as a connecting vowel; but v afterwards fell | amar (77): Compare 68dvr-a(v) with Lat. dent-e-m.

In the Ace. PI., the ending was originally vs. Here also a was insert- ed after consonant-stems. When » fell away (48), a preceding a or o of 4 “vetenas became long, ds, ovs; but the connective a remained short: dddvr-d-(v)s Lat, dent-é-s. — .

196. The principal differences of ending are found a. in the G. S. of all genders, where the Cons.-Decl. has os (as). b. in the N. P. mase. and fem., where the Cons.-Decl. has es. c. in the N. A. V. S. neuter, where the Cons.-Decl. does not take ».

i UY

Irregular Declension.

197. In some instances, a word has forms belonging to two different _ stems. Such words are called heteroclites, when the Nom. Sing. can be | formed alike from either stem (érepdxdura differently declined). Thus ~ N.S. oxdros darkness (stem oxoro Decl. IL., or oxores Decl. HI.), G. 8. _ o@kérov Or oxdrous: ef. 184. = 198. Thus proper names in ns of the 3d Decl. often have forms be- ' longing to the Ist Decl., especially in the Acc. Sing.: Swxpdrns (stem ' Sexpares), Acc. Swxparny (as if from a stem Sexpara), together with the » regular Acc. Soxpdrn. But proper names in xAjjs (180) have only forms of the third declension.

199. But usually the Nom. Sing. can be formed from only one of the two stems. Then forms belonging to the other stem are called metaplas- tic (from petramdacuds change of formation). Thus rd dévdpo-v tree, D. P. dévdpecc (as if from stem Sevdpes); 7d Sdxpvo-v tear, D. P. daxpu-ce

e

197 D. In Hd., some words in 7s of the first declension have ea for ny in

the Acc. Sing.: deamrdrns master, A. 8. Seomdrea. From Saprndéy, Hm. has

ddvos, etc., also Sapwhdovros, etc. From Mivws, Att. Gen. Miva, etc. (146), Hm. Mivwos, etc. (182 D).

199 I Hm. aax-f D. 9. of dAnh strength,—iopiv-. D. 8. of sopuivn battle,— pdort D.S., udori-vy A. S., of wdorik(y) whip,—ix@ (as if for tyw[o]a) A. S. of _ ixép lymph,—idn-a A. 8. of iwxh rout,—[vipa Hes. A: 8. of vpds(S) snow],— ryradid-eoot D. P. of ayndan elbow,—avipamdd-eoor D. P. of avipdzodo-v slave, —deopuar-a Pl. of Searud-s bond,—mposémar-a Pl. of mpdswmro-v face,—rd mAeupd Ion. and poet. = ai wAeupat Pl. of wAeupd side. From Mdrpordo-s, declined regularly, Hm. has also MarpoxAjos, TarpoxAjja, ’ ets (stem TlarporAees, 180 D). _ From jvloxo-s charioteer, declined regularly, Hm. has also jjoxjja, nvioxies (stem jvioxev, 189 D): ef. AiStowas and Aisiorjas, A. P. of Aisloy (163).

Pi

54” IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 198

(poetic N.S. déxpu) ; 73 wip fire, Pl. ra mupd (2d Decl.) wateh-sires, D

mupois ; 6 dveipo-s dream (2d Decl.), but also G. 8. dveipar-os, N. P. dvei- par-a (3d Decl.); 4 ddw-s threshing-floor declined like éws (148), but sometimes G. ddwyr-os, etc.: like Gas are 6 raws peacock, and (in poetry)

6 tupas whirlwind. Of. 194 c¢.

200. In some words, the Sing. and Plur. are of different genders (heterogeneous), though alike in stem. Thus ‘6 airo-s corn, Pl. ra cira; 6 ora%pds station, stall, Pl. often ra oraSpa; 6 Seopds band, Pl. often ra deopd; To orddtoy stade, Pl. commonly oi orddior.

201. a. Many words are defective in number, often from the nature of their meaning. Thus aiznp aether, only in the Sing.; of érncia annual winds, ra Acovicra festival of Dionysus, only in the Plural.

b. Other words are defective in case. Thus évap dream, vrap wak- ing, dpedos use, all neuter and used only in the Nom. and Acc.;.pddn arm-pit used only in the phrase td padns (later tad pddny).

202. The most important irregularities of declension, which have not been noticed already, will be found in the following alphabetic table:

1. “Apns (Apes) the god Ares, G.”Apews and ”Apeos, D. "Ape, A. ”Apny (198) and ’Apn,. V. reg. "Apes.

2. apv lamb,.stem without N.8.; hence (rod, ris) dpyds, dpvi, dpva, adpves, dpvdot. The N.S. is supplied by dyvds, 2d decl., reg.

3. To yovu knee (Lat. genu), N. A. V.S. All other cases are formed from stem yovar: yévaros, ydvari, ete.

4. 4 yurn woman. All other forms come from a stem yivak: they are accented (all but the V. 8.) as if this were a stem of one syllable, ¥ vax (160): G.S. yuvarkds, D. yuvari, A. yuvaika, V. ydva; Dual yuvaike, yuvaxotv; Pl, yuvaixes, yuvarxav, yuvar€i, yuvaikas.

5. To ddpu spear, N. A. V.S. All other cases from stem dopar (cf. no, 3): dSdparos, Sdpari, etc. Poetic G. dopds, D. dopi and dédper.

200 D. Hm. dpipd Pl. of dpipuds oak-wood,—€orepa Pl. of gomepos evening,— KéAevda (also KéAcudor) Pl. of H KéAcudsos way. Hd. adxva Pl. of Adxvos lamp.

201 D. a. Hm, Pl. @yxara entrails, D. &yxac1,—dooe eyes, only N. A. Dual (in Trag. also Pl., G. dccwy, D. tegois),—Pl. txea, dx€éwv, xegG1, chariot (Sing. 6 &xos, not in Hm.).

b. Only Nom. or Acc., Hm. 86 (for d@ua) howse,—xpi (for xo1dh) barley,— &pevos wealth,—déuas body,—dos delight,—jpa only in jpa pépew to'render a service,—jrop heart,—réxuwp (Att. réxuap) bound,—all neuter. Only Voce., na€ or hAacé (Hm.) foolish,—pére (Attic poets) my good sir or madam. Only Dat., Hm. xredr-ecor to possessions,—(év) dat in battle.

202 D. The dialects have the following peculiar forms:

1. “Apns: Hm. “Apnos, “Api, “Apna, also “Apeos, “Ape: (Hd. “Apel, “Apea).

8. yévv: Ion. and poetic yobvaros, yobvart, yotvara, Be: deh yotbvact. Epic also yourds, yourl, yotva, yolvwr, yotverot.

_ 5. Bdpu: Ion. dodparos, Sovpart, Sovpara, Souvpdrwy, Sobpact. Epic also Sov ods, Soupl, Sodpe, Sodpa, Sovpwy, doiperor. .

1 Zeus, G. Aus, De A, Ala, V. Zeid. — " )) right, declined ae in =s phrase Sigs io seus eori fas est), the N S. is used r the Acc. . Sépuy. nvavs-s partaker, regular ; but also nN ws P. kowdv-es, -as, n Xenophon. | Pd dog, V.S. xvov. All other cases from stem vv: xuvdsy kuva KUvEs, KUVGY, KUG, KUVaS. P10; fy G-s stone, contr. from daa-s, G. Ad-os, D. Nas A. aa-y, Aa-v ; P haed, dd-av, Ad-eoor Or Ad-eou. Poetic word for AiZos. bee Ae i) papr-s witness, DP. pdprd-o1 All other cases from stem ; - paprip: _ paprupos, paprupt, 1, ete, Bg ‘12. 6 4 dprts ‘(opvi3) hed, declined reg. (169); A. S. 6, dpuiv, also dpria. Less frequent forms, made from stem opm, are N. P. dpveis, G. dpvewv, A Spvers and rarely dpvis. a 13. 16 ods ea N. A. V.S. All other cases from stem wr: ards, ari; PL. éra, Grav, aci. These forms were made by contraction from ovas, ovaros, etc., see below. Cae ae Tieee Pnys, place for the popular assemblies of Athens, stem Tluxy (87): Tlvxvds, Iovxvi, Ilvxva.

15. 6 mpeoBevrns (mpeoBevra) embassador : in the Plur. commonly mpéoBets, mpecBewv, mpecBeot. ‘These forms come from the poetic ‘Sing. mpéoBu-s embassador, also old man, in which latter sense xpeoBurys is the

_ common prose word for all numbers. _ 16. rdv a defective stem, only in Voc. & ray, also writtem & ’rav, O friend, rarely plural O friends. ore: 17. 6 vid-s son, declined reg.: also from a stem ULES, | G. vidéos, D. vii (A. viea rare) ; Du. viée, vicow; Pl. vieis, viewy, vieot, vieis. b 18. y xetp hand, stem xep; but G. D. D. XEpoir, D. P. xepoi. = §6©=s_ 19. b xous congius, reg. like Bows, but A. P. yéas. Also G. 8. xods, _ A. S._ x04, A. P. xoas (as if from st. yoev, cf. 190 e); these are sometimes written Xoo xda, xdas. § 3 Xpeos bt, N. A. V.S.; also G.S. ypéws. Other cases are a”. ‘supplied by TO xpeos debt, which is declined oaucky (178). ¢

a

4 202 D. The following appear as irregular only i in the dialects:

21. 6 éhp (fem. in Hm.) air. Ion. Hépos, népt, HE pa. 2 22. 6*Aidns Hm. (Att. “A:dns the god Hades) Ist decl., G. *Atdao or *Aidew, = D. tat b A. *Aldnv: but also G. “Aidos, D. “Aid: (st. Aid, "3d decl.). “Rare N. _- *Aidwvet-s, D. ’AiSwvqt (189 D).

_ 6. Zeds: Poet. also Zynvds, Znvi, Ziva. Pind. Af for Act. 4, Suis: Hm. Séuseros, etc., Pind. Séurros, etc. «AL, adprus: Hm. always udprupos, 2ddecl. Of. pvAaKos Hd. (once in Hm.) 4 - for pvaat watchman. 12. dpuis: Dor. dprvixos, dpvixi, etc., from st. opvix. 18. ods: Dor. és, Hm. otaros, Pl. ofara, otfac1, once wat. - _--:17. vids: Hm. often has vids, vidy, vié,—other forms of the 2d decl. very rarely. Of the forms from st. vies, he has all (mostly _uncontracted) _except 'D.P. Further, from st. vi, he has vfos (gen.), vit, via, vie, vies, vido, vias. ee 18. xelp: Poet. xepés, xept. Hm. D. P. xepot and xelperst.

LOCAL ENDINGS. [202

fi 202 D. 23. 7d dSévdpov tree, Ion, and poet. dévdpeov, Sevdpeov, etc. For _irreg. D. P. d€v8pecr, see 199.

24, 7d napa head, Hm. kdpn, stems xapnr and kpar, also with inserted a, KapNaT, Kpaar.

Gen. Sing. xdpnres Kapharos Kpaaros Kparés

Dat. kdpnri (Trag. kdpg) Kaphart Kpaare Kpart

Ace. xdpn, also Kép Kpara masc, and neut, Nom, Plur. «dpa, also ndpnva Kaphara Kpaara

Gen. Kaphywv kparwy, Dat. kpact Acc. = Nom. (xparas Trag. masc.)

The Attic (Tragic) :poets have only N. A. V. 8. xdpa, D. S. wdépq, and the forms from st. xpar.

25. 6 Als poetic for Aéwy lion, A. S. Atv, defective.

26. D. 8. Arri, A. P. Aira, smooth cover, Hm., defective.

27. 6 wels (for pev-s, and that for uny-s), only Nom. Sing., Ionic and poetic form for 6 uhy month, -

28. 4 TAndds (declined like ixSvs) Ionic for 7d rARdos multitude ; of the latter, Hm. has only rafSei, rAAder.

29. (4% mrvxh fold, not in Hm., who uses only the defective) D. 8. rruxf,

_ A. P. rrixes, trixas.

80. (6 orlxos row, not in Hm., who uses only the defective) G. 8. orixés, N. A. P. orixes, orixas.

Local Endings.

208. Closely analogous to case-endings are certain endings which mark relations of place. These are a, -Jt for the place where: ddXdo-d elsewhere. b. -Jev for the place whence: oixo-Jev from home ; less fre- quently, for the place where. c. -de for the place whither: oixa-de home-ward.

These endings are affixed to the stem: ’ASHvn-Sev from Athens, kuxrd-Sev from the circle (xkvxdd-s) ; but o is sometimes used for final a of the stem: pitd-ev from the root (from pita root); and after consonant- stems, o is used as a connecting vowel: mavt-o-Sev from every side. The ending de is often affixed to the accusative form: Méydpa-de toward Megara, ’EXevoiva-de toward Hleusis ; otx-a-de (st. orxo) is irregular: for the accent of these forms, see 105 d.

204. Instead of d¢, the ending -ce or -¢e is sometimes used: &dXo-ce toward another place, A&nvate (for ASnvas-de, 56) toward Athens, OnBate (for OnBas-de) toward Thebes, Svpa¢e (for Supas-de) out (Lat. foras).

203 D. The local endings are much more frequent in Hm.: o%kod: at home, "IAda pd before Troy, odipavdsev from heaven, &yopisxev from the assembly.

The form with Sey is sometimes used by Hm. as a genitive case: katd& kp vey rb the head down, wholly, e arAdSev out of the sea.

n Hm., de is commonly added to the Acc. (not to the stem): ofkovde home- ward, bvde Sduovde to his own house, juérepdvde to our (house), réAwde to the city, pdBovde to flight: peculiar are pbyade to flight, pate to earth, *Aidésde te ‘the abode of ) Hades (202 D, 22).

-

Cae.

_— “ASHyn-or (79 b) at Athens, Wrarador at Plataea, sipao. (Lat. foris) at the doors, abroad, dpace at the proper season. ,

ADJECTIVES.

_ A. Apsnortves or Tan Vowx1-Ducrension.

207. This is much the most numerous class. The masculine and neuter follow the O-Declension; the feminine usually fol- lows the A-Declension. Thus the nominative singular ends in os, 9 (or a), ov (Lat. us, a, um).

M. good -F. - N. M. friendly ¥. N.

S.N. | dya3ds ya ayasdv | didttos giriia — iduov G. | dya%ov dya%js aya%od | ditiov © gdidias = dudiov al D. | ayasé ayas7 ayas@ prio gpiria iri 4 . A. | dya%év . dya%nvy = dyaddv =| diktovy = hudiay ~— iduoy e- V. | dyas¢ ayasn dyaSév | ide piria idvov 1e Dual ; aya%@ § ayaSd ayasa piri prria piri Ze dyaS%ow «aya%aiv ayaSow | diiiow giriav duirioww 6 i P.N. | dyaS%0i dya%ai = daa piriot pirdvar pircd = G. | dya3a@v dya%av = dyaSav | fitiey gditiav = didriav ft D. | dya%o0is aya%ais dya%ois | didiows gidias diriors re A. | dya%o0vs dya%ds ayaa dirtovs dirias pidrid

a

Rem. a. The vowel a in the nom. sing. fem. is always long. It is used after a vowel or p: Sixavos just, fem. dixai-a, aicypds shameful, fem. aicxpa. But yn is used after the vowel o, unless p precedes it: dmAdos simple, fem. dmddn, a&pdos collected, fem, a3pda.

: Rem. b. The Feminine, in the Nom. and Gen. PI., follows the accent of the Masculine: BéBaos firm, nom. pl. masc. BeBaror, fem. BéBaca, not BeBaia, as wetmight expect from nom. sing. BeBaia (120); gen. pl. fem. BeBaiwy, like the masc., not BeBady, as in substantives (128).

206 D. Eric Case-Envine gt. <A peculiar suffix of the Epic language is gi or gw, 79 D), added to the stem. The form with gu serves as a genitiwe or ive, both singular and plural. Thus(a)in the 1st declension, always singu- lar: Bin-d: (less correctly Bindi) with violence, krratnge in the tent, amd veupigr Sis the bow-string ; irregular én’ éoxapddu (for exxapn-pt) on the hearth. b) in the 2d declension: *IAid-q: of Troy, Sedpi with the gods. (c) in the 8d declension, almost always plural: az’ dxeo-du fire the car, mapa vad-opr by _ the ships, xpos korvdndov-d-gx (genitive) to the feelers; irregular ad xpdreo-gr ) from the head (202 D, 24). _ 207 D. For Ionic » instead of & in the Feminine, see 125 D. Hm, has dia, fem. of dios agit ¥ short a: dia Sedwy divine among goddesses. ore * ;

ADJECTIVES. VOWEL-DECLENSION. [208 ‘ 208. Adjectives in eos and oos are subject to contraction. Thus Gadods simple, dpyvpois of silver, contracted from dzAdos, apyvpeos. The uncontracted forms may be known from 207; the contract forms

are as follows:

S.N. | dwAdots amd7 dour dpyupovs dpyupa dpyupovr G. | dmdod dadijs drdov dpyupob dpyupas dpyvpov D. | admro imtjy andr@ dpyup@ — apyupg apyup@ A. | dmdotv = GA dmovy dpyupoby dpyupay dpyupovv V. | drdots amy dm\odv | apyupots apyuvpa apyupovr Dual | dro dm\a amo dpyup® apyvpa dpyupe dmdow drdawv drdoiv dpyupotvy apyupaiy apyupoiv P.N. | drdot dmat anda dpyupot apyupat apyupa G. | dm\av dr@v amha@v dapyupav dpyupav dpyupov D. | dwdois = dmdais ~— dts dpyupois dpyupais dpyupots A. | dtdots = ams dma dpyupovs apyupas dpyupa

For the peculiarities of contraction, see 36 a.

the contract forms, see 145. 209. Many adjectives of this class have but two endings, the

masculine form being used also for the feminine:

N. jovxov, quiet. M. F’, a-rexvos childless, M. ¥, xapro-dpos fruit-bearing. Rem. a. In many adjectives of three endings, the fem. is sometimes

found like the masc..;

For irregular accent in

M. F. jovxos, This is the case with most compound adjectives :

and conversely, some adjectives of two endings

have occasionally a distinct form for the fem. These exceptional cases are especially frequent in poetry.

S.N. | M. F. jovxos quiet N. jovxov\M. F. tiews propitious N. ihewy G. HOVXOV iAe@ D. nOUX® idew A. ovxXov idewy V. | qovyxe Hovxov | ttews ideov Dual novxe iAco novxow ihewv P.N. | jovyos jovxa thew iAe@ G. Siva iAeov D. naovxols ikews A. | novxous yovxya iAews ide

210. “Theos isa specimen of the few adjectives which follow the Attic

Second Decl.

IIkews full is declined thus in the Masc. and Neut.

208 D. For contraction omitted in Ion., see 144 D. 132 D.

210 D. For fAews, Hm. has fAdos (also in Att. poets): for mAéws, Hm. waAci- os mAeln, TAeiovy, Hd. wAgos, n, ov.—Hm. has o@s (only in this form), but for oaos he has odos, ody, cdov, Comp. cadérepos.—With (wds, h, dv living, he has N.S. d@s, A. Gav.

——

but forms a Fem, mdéa of the A-Decl——The defective adj. M. F. ods, N. ody (formed from caos safe) has A. S. aay, A. P. ods; also oa as S. Fem. and Neut. Pl, The kindred odos, ca, cador, is also confined

the Nom. and Ace.

CONSONANT-DECLENSION.

STEMS IN Y.

211. B. Apsectives or THE ConsoNANT-DECLENSION. of these, when it differs from the Masc., follows the A-Decl.: it is formed from the stem of the Masc. by annexing vé; but this addi-

tion causes various changes (32. 58. 60). 212. 1. Stems in v.

in most of the cases (cf. 186-7).

Here belong

The Masc. and Neut. have «, instead of v, The Fem. has ‘e-va, contracted

The Fem.

into ea. sweet black S.N. | 7dvs neta 700 pédas péeAawa peda “G. | 7déos ndeias ndeos peAdvos pedaivns -peddvos D, | 7dct n0eia ndet pedawe = peat ~— peat A. | dvv 7Oetay Ov pedava = peAavay = aeAay V. | dd noeta nov peXav péAava =e Dual | 7d¢€e 70¢ia nO€e pedave pedaiva péedave nocow deta ndéou peAavowy eAaivay peAdvotv PLN. | 9deis noeiat nod€a péedaves redarvat peAava G. | nddov ndedv dco peAdvav pedavay pedavov D. | décor noeias =. Oot peAace peAaivars péeAace | A. | ndeis nOeias ndéa péeAavas pedaivas peAava

So yAuxvs sweet, Bpadvs slow, Bpaxis short, raxis swift, edpis wide. Rem. a. In SyAvs female, the poets sometimes use the masculine form for the feminine.

213. 2. A few stems in v.

até, for perav-va (58).

In these, the « of the fem. ending ta passes into the preceding syllable: pédads (peAdr) black, Fem. pé-

For full inflection of eddie: see 212.

Similarly declined are raAds, rédawd, rédGv unhappy and répyy, Tépewa, Tepev tender.

214. 3. Stems in-vr. In these, the Fem. v7-1a becomes -ca, and the preceding poet is lengthened. ‘They are mostly participles.

212 D. For fem. ea, elas, | ete., Hd. has éa, dns, én, av, etc. monly has efa, eins, etc., but aéa "for é deta, Baxelns and Baténs, BaSeiay and In Hm., 73ds and movads (for woAds), as well as OfAvs, are sometimes fem. In the A. 8., Hm. sometimes has ¢a for dv: edpéa wrdvrov the wide sea.

214 D. Adjectives i in evs (evr) are much more frequent in poetry: those in nets, oes are sometimes contracted: Hm. tivjs=ripheas honorable, Awredyra

BaSéay.

=Awtdevta

Hm. com-

lled with lotus, poet. wrepoicca=mrepseooa winged. Hm. some-

times uses these adjectives in the masc. form with fem. names of places,

e

60

Adjectives in er have ecoa, not eo, in the Fem., for evr-ta.

ADJECTIVES.

For their D. P., see. 50 a.

STEMS IN NT.

ra14

loosing giving S. N. | Avov Avouca voy did0vs didodca diddy G. | Avovros Avovons DAdvovros | diddvros Sidovans Siddvros D. | Avovre Avovon Avot diddvre — Govan = Suv Te A. | Avovra Avoveav§ dor ddvra = SiOodcav Siddv V. | Avov Avovca Adov d.d0vs didovca diddv Dual | Avovre Avotca ~= AvovTeE O.Oovre dibotoa diddvTe Avévrow Avotcaw Avdvrow | Siddvrow Sidotcaw Sdédvrow P. N. | Avovres Avovear Avovra Siddvtes StOodtoa SiddvTa G. | Avévr@vy Avovedv Avdvrav | Siddvrav SWovedy Siddvrev D. | Avover Avoveais Avovor dudodar didotoas didodor A. | Avovras Avovoas Avovra diddvtras Sidotoas Siddvra loosing showing ; S. N. | Avods Avoaca = dotiv devxvds Secxvioca Seuxviv G. | Aveavtos Avodons Avoartos | Setxvivros Setkvions SerxvivTos D. | Avoavtt =Avodon DAdoarte |Setxvivre Secxvion Secxvivte A. | Avoavra = AVoacav icay Secxvivta Secxvioav Seuxviv V. | Avoas Avoaca =Adoav Servis Serxvioa Serxviv Dual | Avcavte Avodoa Rdoavre | Oerkvdvre Serxvioa Seixvuvte | Avedvrow Avodoaw Avodvrouw!| Secxvivrow Secxviccary Secxvivrow P. N. | Avoavtes AVoacae Advoavra | detxvivtes Secxvicar Serxvoyra G. | Avodvrev Avoacay Avodvroy | Secxvivray Setxvucdy Serxvdvtev D. | Avoadot = Avodoas Avodou | Secxvioe Setxvicais Secxvicr A. | Avoavras Avodoas Avoavra | Setxvivras Secxvicas Setxvivra loosed pleasing S.N. | AvSeis Avdeioa = Avdsev xXapieis xaplieaoa yapiev G. | AvSevros Avseions AvBevros |xapievtos xapreoons yxapievros D. | AvSevre = AvZeiog = AvSevTe = |xaplevte xapieoon xapievtt A. | Avdévta = AvSeioay AvsEev Xaplevta xapieooay yxapiev V. | AvSeis = AvSetoa = Sev xapiev —xapieooa = yxapiev Dual | Av3evre =Avseioa = AvSEevre |xapievre Yapteooa yapievre AvSevrow Avseicaw AvIevrow |xaptevrow xapieaoaw yaprévrow P.N. | AvSevres Avseioae Avsévra |xapievres yxapieooa yapievra G. | AvSevray Avser~Gv Avrévrwv |xaptevT@Y XapLeooay yaprévT@y D. | Avseioe AvSeloars AvSeiot |Xapieot yYaptéeroats xapiect A. | AvBévtas Avdeicas AvSévtra |Xaplevtas yapteocas yapievra

Rem. a. The fem. adj. xapieooa arose probably from a form without v, xaptet-ca (60); while the fem. part. AvSeica arose from Avzevr-sa, Avser(a)oa (48), Avovea, from Avovr-ia, Avor(c)ea, ete.

215. Participles which have ovr after a, «, 0, are contracted: Tydwv (TYyaovT), Tiudovoa, TYysdov honoring, contr. tiov, Tipdoa, TLV; piréwy (piAcovT), provera, Piréov loving, contr. Prav, pirodea,

i

Peter (8_oorn), dndAdovea, SndAdov manifesting, Sante dnAGr,

OyAotv. The uncontracted forms are like those of Atwr

(214) ; the contract forms are as follows :

Pies N. | Tiney Tiaoa TLD prov pirovca roo ~G. | tipadvros tipoons tipdvros |pirotvros prrovons iAovrros D. | triypavte = tipoon = typ@vte |didrovvte irovaon gidodrre A. | rynévra ss tipdoay §=tiuey = |rdodvta Gudovcay didodv V. | ripay TIL@Tg TLLOV pirov girtovca didrovv Dual | tiyavre tipwoa tiporte |dirodvte gGirovaa duidrodrre | Tim@vrow Tipo@oaw Tipe@vrow |pirovvroww hiriovcaw didrovyrou PLN. | ripdvres tipaoar tiara pirovrres pihovaat pidowvra G. | tievrev tipwody TLLOVT OY provvrav provedy dirovvrov D. | tipaou = Tippoorats Tydar |dirovor dirovoas prover A. | tiymavtas tiydcas Tidvta |pidodvras pitovoas gidrodvra

Anday (contracted from dy\dwr) is declined exactly like gird.

216. Stems in or.

These are participles of the Perfect Active.

The ending or in connection with the fem. va is changed to wi.

having loosed standing S. N. |NcAteas AeAvevia AeAvKds eras éutéoa éards G. |AeAuKdros AeAvKvias AeAvKdTos EoTaros. éoTr@ons éaTe@rTos D. [AeAvedre =Dedvevia AeAvKdTe éorore éoT@on €oT@TL A. |AeXuKdra DeAvKviay eduKds €oTOTa éoTaoav éoTds VY. |NeAvKds = AeAvKvia AeAvKds EGTOS éoTaoca éards Dual |AecAukére DeAvkvia edvKdre | crate éathHaa éaTaTE AeAvKorow AcAvkviawy AeAvKOTOLY | EoTaToW éoTocaw éotTerow P. N. |NeAvedres AeAveviac AeAvKSTa | éotates EoTaca. éoToTA G. |AceAuKérwy AcAuKuiay AeAvKOT@Y | Egratav écTacav éaToTeVv D. |NeAvKdot DeAvKviats ANeAUKIot | Eotdat Eatraoais éordct A. |AeAvuKéras AeduKvias AeAvKoTa | éotaetras EotTaocas éardra

Rem. a. éoras is contracted from écraas, and is irregular in the forma-

tion of the Fem.

The neuter form écrés is also irregular.

Rem. b. wa of the Fem. appears to imply a masc. and neut. ending ut (= or); vr-ia would give vova (62), and then wa (64).

217. Adjectives of Two. Endings. Consonant-Declension, the masculine form is used also for the femi-

nine (cf. 209).

Here belong

In many adjectives of the

a. Stems ins: M. F, dAnIjs (adn 9s) true, N. Antes (cf. 176). b. Most stems inv: M. F. evdaiuwr (evdaxiov) happy, N. ae

nov, M. F. appv (dponv, st. apoev) male, N. appev (cf. 172). | c. A few simple stems ending in other letters, as M. F. i3pi-s knowing

217 D. b. Hd. has pony for &pony.

j

f

Z

62 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [217

N. idpe (cf. 188). Also some compounds of substantives, as M. F. dra tap (a-natop) fatherless, N. dmarop ; eves (ev-edmid) of good hope, N. eVedmt; Prororts (Piro-ror1d) city-loving, N. pidrdmodr 3 e’xapis (ev-xapir) agreeable, N. e&yapt; Simovs (di-70d) two-footed, N. dimovy, A. S. Sirouy (191) and Sdimoda.

S. N. | adn3ns adnsés | eddaivwv edSaiov | eveAmis — eVeATL G. dAnZovs evdaipovos eveAridos D. aAnset evdaipove eveAmid« A. | ddn37 dAndes | evdaipova etdatyor | eveArw eveATrt V. aAnSés’ evdatpov eveArre

Dual adn3n evdaipove eveAmibe

aAnSoiv evoarpovoy eveAridou

P. N. | ddnSeis GAn3n | evdaipoves evdaipova| evéeAmides evéAmida G. dAnS@v evoaiuoveav eveArridav D. dAn%éot evdaipooe eveAmiot A. | ddn&eis GAn3n | evdaipovas evdaiuova| eveAmidas eveAmida

So eiyerns well-born (176), dusperns hostile, aagadrns safe, arevdns false, adrnpns full,——rérerv ripe, cappav discreet, punpov mindful, erunopev forgetful, mokumpaypov busy.

For comparatives in wy, see 174.

218. Adjectives of One Ending. In these the Fem. is like the Mase. ; but, owing either to their meaning or their form, they have no Neuter: thus dprag (dpriy) rapacious, pvyds (piyas) fugitive, &yvws (ayvwr) unknown, aaats (aad) childless, waxpoxeip long-armed, wévys (revyt) poor, yupvis (yvpvyr) light-armed.

Rem. a. Some adjectives of one ending, which belong to the A-Decl.,

occur only in the Masc., and differ little from substantives: thus éSeAop- Tys, G. eSeAovrov, volunteer.

219. Irregular Adjectives. Some adjectives are irregular, their forms being derived from different stems. So peéyas (mweya and peyado) great, wodvs (rodv and zodAo) much, many.

218 D. Hm. has many adj. which appear only in the Fem.: rérva {in Voc. also wétva) revered, Adxea (or perhaps éAdxeia small); ebwarépeia of noble father, 6Bpy.omdrpn of mighty father, aytidveipa match for men, Bwridveipa nourishing men, kvdidveipa making men glorious, movAvBéTepa much-nourish- ing, ioxéaipa arrow-showering, trroddcea thick with horse-hair, kaddrvyivoura A. 8. rich in fair women, To Fem. Sdaeia rich there is a Neut. Pl. Sdaea.

219 D. Hm. and Hd. have roaads, 4, dv reg. like &yadds (also neut. woAAdp ~ for woAv as adverb). But Hm. has also the common forms zoAvs, woAd, woAvy, as well as wovats, movat, movAty (24 D. c); and from the same stem zoAuv, he makes likewise G. 8. woados, N. P. rodéges, G. woréwv, D. wordgerot Or moAéot, A. moAéas.

The mase. zpo%s #8 found in Pind. Comp. tpairepos in Hd.

peydhn = péya~—s| odds ~—s ro) ~— oA

peyddns peyddou | wokdod moAdARs moAAod peyddn peydd@ | ToAAG TOAAR TOAD peydAnvy peya modvy = roAAnY ~— TOAD peyddAn = péya | _ OAD moAAn = OAV

. | peyddot peyddat peydda | wodAoi moddAai oAdd

_| peyddov peyddov eyddwv | mok\kdv mod\Aav modAGdy

). | peyadous peyddas peydAots | moddois moAdais soAXois | peyddous peyddas peydda | moAXovs .wodAds sroAAd

| if mpaelas, etc. The Mase. and Neut, Sing. are formed from st. pao, rarely _ from pau: mpaov, mpd, mpdov. In the Mase. and Neut. Pl., both forma- ___ tions are used: mpdoc and mpaeis, mpaéa and mpda.

oe Comparison of Adjectives.

: ¥ A. By repos and ritros.

: 220. The usual ending of the Comparative degree is repo (N. S. ____‘Té€pos, TEpa, Tepov); of the Superlative, taro (N. 8. raros, rary, rarov). _ ‘These endings are applied to the masculine stem of the Positive. i. Chus,

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.

____ odpos (kovdo) light kougdrepos, a, ov Kou éraros, 4, ov _—-yAukds (yAvuku) sweet ' -yAuKvTEpos yAvkiraros peas (peAav) black peAavrepos peAdvratos paxap (yaxap) blessed pakdprepos pakapraros cadns (cages) clear caeorepos cadeoraros — Xapiers (xaptevr) pleasing Xaptearepos Xapteoraros _ =@mevns (ment poor TEVETTEPOS MEVETTATOS

oe. aptéorepos and meveorepos arise from yapievr-repos and ‘trevyt-repos by change of r to s (45), before which v is dropped in the former (48), -- and » shortened in the latter.

a _ Hm. has some fem. adjectives which are not formed from the stem of the _—smase.: Sovprs(d) cmpetwous, M. Sodpo-s; wleipa fat, rich, M. rlwy; mpécBa and __—s mpéaBerpa honored, M. mpécBu-s (202,15); mpdppacca (for mpoppad-ia from paw) favorable, M. rpdppwv (from phy). The following are made from _ the stem of the masc., but by an unusual mode of formation: yadrKoBdpera heavy with brass, M. xarKoBaphs; Apryévem early-born (M. Apryerfs later) ; qbuewea (Hes.) sweet-speaking, M. jSverhs; pdiaipa (Pind.) blessed, M. udxap ; and in the Pl. only, Samewat crowded, rappeiat frequent, M. Sauées, rappées. ee -” €pinpo-s trusty, makes Pl. épinp-es (only Nom. and Acc. in each

Hee .

thumper)

Saxe a eg

64 COMPARISON BY 7Tepos AND TaTOs. [22]

221. The following adjectives depart more or less widely from the rule above given.

a. Stems in o with short penult, lengthen o tow: this prevents the excessive multiplication of short syllables: codu-repos wiser, dgus-ratos worthiest, from codd-s, dfvo-s.—But if the penult is long by nature or.position, o remains: zovypd-repos more wicked, Nerr6- ratos finest. So always, when a mute and liquid follow the vowel of the penult: aixpd-raros bitterest.

b. The adj. yepaids (Senex) always, mwadatés ancient, and cxodatos leisurely, sometimes, drop o after ar: yepairepos, maXairaros.

c. pecos medius, icos egual, evdios serene, mpwios early, dirios late, take a in place of o or @: pecairaros, mpwiairepov.——jjavxos quiet has novxairepos and jnaovy@repos; pidos dear, beside didwrepos, -taros, has pidrepos, -raros and duidairepos, -raros. From 7Anciov adv. near come mAnotairepos, -raros; likewise mapamAnotairepos more similar ; and from mpovpyov (for mpd epyov advantageous) comes mpodpytai-repos.

d. Some adjectives take the irregular endings ecrepos, eararos. So

1. Stems in ov: cappav (cappor) discreet, cwppovéorepos, evdaipav (cvdapov) happy, evSaipoveo-raros. Special exceptions are wiv fat, midrepos, -raros, and rérwv Tipe, wemairepos, -TaTos. ;

2. dkpatros unmixed, éppapevos strong, dopevos glad, and occasionally some others in os: dxparéorepos, éppwpeveotepos.

_. 8. Some contract adjectives in (cos) ovs: edvotorepos (for evvoerre- pos) from eivous (etvoos) well-disposed.

e. The adj. Addos talkative, mrwxés beggarly, dropayos dainty, jo- vopayos eating alone, and some adjectives of one ending, as xdemrns thiev- ish, have worepos, toraros: AaXiorepos, mr@xXioTaros, KAemTioTEpos.

f. Other adjectives of one gender in 7s (G. ov) follow the rule for stems in 0: t8piordrepos from iSpirrns insolent.

e. Compounds of ydpis favor, form the Comp. and Sup. as if they ended in yapiro-s; émtyaptra@repos from emixapis agreeable.

B. By wy and toros. 222. A much less frequent ending of the Compar. is tov (Nom. M. F. twv, N. tov), of the Superl. wro (Nom, wros,, wry, wor).

921 D. The poets sometimes use w after a long syllable: di¢dpérepos Hm.

* more wretched.

shining, pacwdrepos, but dadyraros (cf. 870 D a); from axapis unpleasing,

axapiorepos (for axapit-TeEpos). The force of the ending is nearly lost in

Snrdrepos feminine, aypdrepos wild (living in the country), épéorepos living in

the mountains, Sedrepos belonging to the gods, Setirepds Lat. dexter, which differ little from SijAus, &ypios, dperos, Setos, Sekids.

222 D. The forms with wy, wo'ros are much more frequent in poetry: thus (the starred forms are un-Homeric), *BaStwv, Bdsicros (Basis deep), Bpdo= cwy =*Bpadiwy, Bdpdio'ros =*Bpddioros (Bpadds slow), *Bodx.ioros (Bpaxds short),——ydvuilov (yAukbs sweet), ge (€deyxées Pl. infamous),——

r 3

From *18vs straight, Hm. makes iStyrara; from gaewds

a = —-

Py ty a * f =

|, not to the stem of the Positive, but to e a fipal vowel in the stem of the Pos. —

PO POS PAY

\ Awaba iets Comparative. ‘Superlative, nt (jd-onacampleased) yd-iov HO-LoTos — _ (rdx-0s swiftness) Sacoey (for ray-iwv) tdy-Loros

it (pey-eBos greatness) eifwv (for pey-twv) - péy-toros Similarly po in the stem of the Pos. disappears: - Se

-pd-s hostile — (&y3-os hatred) — ex 3-iwy éx2-ioros — a ide shameful aioe shame) —_aicy-iav ek aka . _ Rem. a. In peifor, for pey-.wv, the passes into the first syllable, as IN dyeivey for ayev-twy (58). So also in Sdccwv, Saocov, where a absorbs it and becomes long, Cf. waddov (for pad-tov, 59)

923, Tn the following’ words, this mode of formation is found connect- ed ‘oy eae peculiarities, especially the euphonic changes described ‘in 58-61. |

_—- Positive. Comparative. Superlative. AL. dyads good dpeivov id apev-tov ) “he - [dpetov Hm. ] dpioros ("Apns, dpern virtue) BeAtiov BeAticros :. Kpeloowy (kpeitrav) Kpdtiatos (kpdros strength) : Adav A@oros

REM. 4. dyeiver, dpioros, refer more to excellence or worth; Kpeicoar, __-Kparioros, more to power and superiority. The opposite of xpeicowyr is «Roo. .

2. xaxés bad kakiov KdKLoTOS . x«lpev (deterior) xelpiorog E jooey (inferior) yxiota ady, least of all 3. pixpds small puxpdrepos ' pukpdéraros 4 pelov 4, ddtyos Little, few ie wf 5% ddLyvoros q éAdoooy (eAdrray) €Adxworos

*xvdlwv, Kvdio'T0s (Kvdpds glorious), paccwy, whioros, Dor. *uanoros (uar- pds long),—otkrioros (oixrpés pitiable),——\nacowy =*naxlwv, méx.o'ros (7a- xis thick),——Alwy, *pidioros (plaos dear), ékioros (ats quick).

d. has wéwy for pelfwr. a In Epic and Doric poetry, the z of wwy is short. B, 223 D. 1. Hm. Comp. apefwy: Pos. xpard§ powerful, Sup. kdprioros (57): Comp. Awtwy and Awirepos——Hd. and Dor. kpéoocwy for xpeloowr. Poet. & ooh epos, BeAraros (not used in Hm.): péprepos more excellent, pépraros and ae p PLoTOS. me 2, Hm. Comp. «iitérepos: xepelwy (Dor. xepywy), xeperdrepos, xeipdrepos: m, also the defective ine D. 8. cepni, A. 8. Mens, N. P. Libites: Neut. xépya or xépera. Hd. goowy for hoowv.

4, Hm. Comp. éaicer.

_ 66 IRREGULAR COMPARISON, ADVERBS. | [223

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.

5. modvs much, many mdelwv or tA€wv (39) mAEtoTos Neut. rA¢ov, also mXciv J

6. Kadds beautiful xaddlov kddAaros (Kdddos beauty) 7. padios easy daw paoros ; 8. ddyewds painful ddyiov adytoros

294, Defective Comparison. The following adjectives are without

} the. Positive:

(mp6 before) mporepos prior mparos primus vorepos later, latter doraros latest, last - REM. a. mp@ros is probably made by contraction from mpo-dros. The same superlative ending dros appears also in

eaxdros extremus; and in the two following (mostly poetic) forms: —

védros novissimus, last in place (from véos novus), and Uraros Supremus, Summus (from tmép super, whence come also a poetic Comp. iméprepos, Sup. tmépraros).

formation and Comparison of Adverbs.

225. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding ws to the stem. The stem takes the same form as before wy in the Gen. Pl. The adverb has also the accent of the Gen. Pl.; and is contracted, when the latter is contracted. Tay

Thus didros dear, (G. P. didrov) Adv. diras, Sikavos just (Sixaiov) Sixaiws, uxpds cold (yuxpav) Woxpas, was whole, all (mavrwv) ravras, Taxus guick (raxéwv) taxews, oadhns clear (capéay contr. from cadéwr) capas contr. from cadéas.

Hd.

5. In the Comp., Hm. has also the defective forms mAées, wAéas. contracts €o to ev: mAedy, wAcdves, for mA€ov, tAéoves.

7. Hm. Pos. fnidios (also in Hd.): adv. pnidtws, often peta, pea: Comp. pntrepos: Sup. fntraros and phioros.

To the above add for Hm.

9. Kepdlwy, Képdioros (Kepdadrdos gainful, artful, Képdos gain).

10. prylwy, plyoros more, most dreadful (bryndds Hes. chilling, pryos cold) 11. Khdioros (Kndetos dear, xAdos care).

12. Poet. (not in Hm.) tplwv, tioros (ivnads high, tyos height).

224 D. Hm. sometimes forms a Comp. or Sup. from a substantive : BaciAed= Tepos, TaTos (from BactAeds king), kovpdrepos (kotpos youth), xtyrepos more dog-like (kbiwv dog).

Other defectives in Hm. are :,é7Adérepos younger, érAdraros, (apap forthwith);

&pdprepos and several expressing place: évéprepos lower (Trag. véptepos, evepor inferi, évepSev or vépSev infra), mapoirepos (mdpower before), dmtoratros (¥miadev behind), émacotrepos (Goooy nearer),——uvxolra- ros (é€v ptx@ in a recess). The ending aros appears also in wéooaros from uéeos middle, and mipmaros last = AoteSos (Trag. Aotodios), AotcShios. Hm. hag jordrios = toraros, and in the same sense debvraros (Sebrepos second),——A strengthened Sup. is Hm. rpéricros = tdumpwros first of all,

“a 2 ‘, ii , , 7 F ‘ ‘

Very often, also, the accusative neuter of the adjective, either singular or plural, is used as an adverb. Thus peéyas great, Adv. péya id peydAa, as well as ueyddas. 227. An earlier form for adverbs ends in a: raxis quick, Adv. rayi wickly, in Attic prose perhaps, dpa at the same time, pada very, aaiaks he Comp. of pada is padXoy (for pad-vov, 59) potius, the Sup. padiora potissimum.—ed well is used as the adverb of dya%ds good.

228. Adverbs are also formed in ws from comparatives and superlatives: BeBarorepws more firmly, kaAALovws more finely. But, generally, comparative and superlative adverbs are made by the accusative neuter of those degrees, used in the singular for the com- parative, -in the plural for the superlative: BeBarepov, KaAdov, BeBaiérara, kiAdora..

229. Adverbs in w (such as dw above, xdtw below, gow within, ¢£o without) make the Comp. and Sup. in : dvwrépw, xatwrépo. So also draréepo further from prep. dnd from, mepatépw further from mépa be- — eyyus Near, eyyuTepa, eyyuTdrw (or eyyvTepoy, éyy’rata), and a few others.

PRONOUNS. 230. PrrsonaL Pronouns. > First Person. Second Person. Third Person. Sing. Nom. | eyo J (ego) ov thou (tu) Gen. | euov, pov cov ov of him, her, it Dat. | eyo, pol cot ot Acc. | eye, pe we € Du. N. A. V.| (var) vod (cpar) cho (owe) G. D. | (var) vor (cpa) shav (opaiv) Plur. Nom, | nets we “Dpeis You ogeis they (N. odéa) . Gen. | nuav bpav — opar Dat. | npiv tpiv hice Acc. | pas vpas opas (N. oféa)

The forms enclosed in ( ) are not found in Attic prose.

221 D. Adverbsin & are more frequent in Hm.: Kdpra valde (paris, 223 D, 1), Atya shrilly (Avyts), odoa clearly (caphs), dxa quickly (@nvs). For ed, Hm, has ed, whenever the i would be long by position: éb yvolnv;

_ g0 too in compound words: éd¢wvos. But ed is sometimes found before a mute

and liquid: éAexros or evmrAeKTos. Hm. has also a defective adj. éis or his, A. 8. ey or hiv, also G. S. éfos, and G. P. édwy Neut.

229 D. exas for, Hm. éxarrépw, rdrw,— THA¢ or rTynAod far, Hm. rnroTdTw, —tyxt or a&yxov near, Hm. doooy (for ayxioy, 60) also docotépw, &yxioTa

4 (ayxordrw Hd.). The adj. &yxérepos, dyxdstaros, and &yxioros are post-Hom.

68 PRONOUNS. —-PERSONAL.—INTENSIVE. [231

231. The stems of the Sing. are cue (Lat. me), ce (te), € (se). But the Nom. is differently formed: éy, oi; and in the third person is entirely wanting.

The stems of the Dual are vw (Lat. no-s), oho, ode.

The stems of the Plufal are jue, ive, ope: € is contracted with most of the endings ; hence the circumflex accent (cf. 233 D).

232. The forms mentioned in the list of enclitics (105 a) lose their accent, when there is no emphasis upon the pronoun; and in the Ist person Sing., the shorter forms (pod, oi, pe) are then used. But if the pronoun is emphatic, it retains its accent, and the longer forms (éuod, €pol, eve) are used in the Ist person. So also, in general, after preposi- tions. Thus doxet por it seems to me, epoi od coi rodro dpéecker this pleases me, not thee; map’ enor from me, not mapa pov, émi cot upon thee, not émt oor: “yet mpds pe to me frequently occurs.

The Gen., Dat. and Acc. Pl. of the 1st and 2d persons, when there is no emphasis upon them, semetimes throw the accent on the first syl- lable: juor, duor; the last syllable of the Dat. and Acc. is then usually shortened: jpiv, iuds. The last syllable is sometimes shortened, even when the pronoun is emphatic: we then write piv, dpiv.

233 D. Personal Pronouns in the Dialects, Hm. has the following forms: those not in ( ) are found also in Hd.

S. N. _ eyo, (evar) ov, (rbyn) G Teneo], eed, med oéo, aed : €0, €b _~* (€ue?o, euédev) (veto, céSev) (elo, ESev) D. = euol, pot gol, Tol, (rely) ’ of, (€07, 23 D a) A. éué, pé oé €, (€€), uly Dual. (vai, vd) (cP@i, ce) (cpwe) (voir) (opaiv) (opwty) P. N. apes, (&%mpes) bpets, (Bupes) opeis not in Hm, G. qpewr, (jpelwv) juéwy, (ductor) chewy, (opelwy) D. — jytv, (%ppe) duty, (Bape) colo, opi A. = héas, (Supe) buéas, (Yupe) ohéas, (odetas), ope

éydy is used before vowels (79D). éuéo cannot stand in the hexameter. The datives gof and tof are distinguished in the same way as éuof and pot (232). For ply, the Dor. and Trag. have viv: both are enclitic, both used in all genders, and viy is sometimes plural. In Hd. and Trag., opé is some- times singular, In Hd. o¢iot (not op!) is reflexive: he has also the neut. opéa: but the forms juées, duces, opées in some editions of Hd. are probably incorrect.

The Dor. has N. 8. éyév even before a cons., rd (tu) for ot, G. Ted, Teds, réous, D. rol for col; also éutv, rly, ty for éuol, col, of, A. ré, enclitic rd, for oé. N. P. dpés, dues, G. Guéwv, D. auly, A. aud, dud, and wé for opé. Of these Pind. has only rv, rol, tiv.

234. Inrenstve Pronoun. Adré-s, air, abré self (Lat. ipse), is inflected like dyadds (207), except that the Neuter N. A. V. 8. does not take y (cf. the neuter article 70, 119).

234 D. For Ionic crasis in wirdés (Hm.), wirds (Hd.), see 68 D.

. oo? a a

ae eee a Pie, acdods aibros (asebs 68 5) fateh (aird), 73 , tabrdv), it signifies the same (Lat. idem).

= 235. ae Pronouns. These are formed from the stems

3 of the personal pronouns, compounded with airds.

Singular Gen. M.N. F. Dat. M.N.F. Acc. M. F. N,

Ast person = ewravov -7}¢ e“auT@ -7 €pauTov “nv myself person = weavrow ~ijs ceauT@ -7 ceauTov “1 thyself

. Oe cavTov “ns cavT@ -f oavTov “ny 3d iia €aurod -fjs €auT@ = éaurdy “Vv “6 himself, her-

or airod 6 -ys «= atta -sattrdv— -qy -5. elf, itself In the plural, both stems are declined together :

Plural § Gen.M.F.N. Dat.M.N. FF. Ace M.. F, Ist person = judy airav jpiy avrois -ais nas avrous -ds ourselves 2d person tpa@vairav tpiv avrois ~~ -ais tas avrous -ds yourselves 3d person = oavaitay odicw avrois -ais apas avrous -as themselves

Neut. opea aura

Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : éauTov éavTois -ais éavrovs -as -a or. avrav avutTois -ais avrovs -ds -d

236. The indefinite pronoun ddXos other (Lat. alius) is inflected

like airés (234). 237. RecrprocaAL Pronoun. This is formed from the stem of — GAXos (236), compounded with itself, adA~nXo (for adA-aAAo). It is used only in the dual and plural. M. F. N. Du. G. D. adAjdow ahAnAaty adAndow 3 A. GAANA® a\Anva ‘ a\Anho ” ‘ Plur. G. a\AnAwv ddAnA@v ad\Anrov D. GdAnAots aAAnAas GAAnrots ; A, adAnAovs a\AnAas a@AAnva . 238. PossrsstvE Pronouns. These are formed from the stems of the personal pronouns (231). €pés, th dv my, mine, from epe. HPETEpOS, a, ov our, ours, from 7 TE. " ds, ty, ov thy, thine, from oe. tperepos, a, ov your, yours, from ipe. Os, 7, Ov his, her, its, from é. operepos, a, ov their, theirs, from ode.

_ 235 D. Hm. always has the separate forms, even in the sing.: éué airdy, of abrd, not éuavrdy, éavrg.—F or duecuras, etc., Hd. has éuewvrod, ete.; and in like manner vewvrov, éwvtod (11 D).

Re 238 D. Hm. has also reds (Doric, = tuus), és; ids our (properly Der.), ts fil opés; also (from the dual stems vw, opw) vwlrepos, aparrege’, belonging

‘ Calon _-

70 PRONOUNS.—DEMONSTRATIVE. [238

Rem. a. és is never used in Attic prose; odérepos, only in reflexive sense, their own. The ending repos is the same with that of the Com- parative (220).

239. DemonsTRATIVE Pronotns. ‘The two most important are ovtos, avtn, Tovto this, that, 00¢, noe, Tdde this (this here). } | é8e is formed from the article and the demonstrative ending d¢ (en- clitic) : it is declined like the article, with d¢ added to each form. : ovros follows the article in respect to the / or ¢ at the beginning. It | takes av in the penult, wherever the article has an A-sound (a, n); but ov, where the article has an O-sound (0, ).

S.N.J6 = <-16 ode noe ~—_ T0E ovros avtTn TovTO i G.| rod rhs tov | rovde risde rovde TOUTOU Tav’TNS TOUTOV D.jré ry ro |Tede THde TedE TOUT@ TavTN TOUT@ ; A.| rév tnv 6 rovde thvde Tdde TovToy tavTny TOUTO

Dual| ra tad To tode Trade Twede .|To’T@ Talta TovT@

Tov taiv tow | toiwde taivde rToivde TovTow Tavrawrovrow |

P.N.J oi ai ra ode aide rade ovToL gira. Tavra G.| rav trav trav | ravde ravde Tavde TOUT@Y TOUT@Y TOUTeV D.| rots rats rots | roisde taisde toisde Tovrols TavTats ToUTOLS : A.| rovs tas Ta rovsde tasde tTade TovTous TavTas TavTa :

’

Rem. a. The adverb of é¢ is Sde, that of odros is ors Or ovTw (80 ¢) | in this manner, thus, so.

240. The demonstrative éxeivos, éxeivn, éxéivo that (that there or yonder) is declined like airds (234).—For airds used as a demonstrative, see 669 c.

241. Demonstratives of Quantity, Quality, and Age. These were r00%s, Totos, THACKos, Which occur often in poetry. In place of them, the Attic prose uses chiefly the strengthened forms:

ToT oUTOS, Towavrn, TowovTo(v) such (in quantity or number), TOLOUTOS, TovavTn, ToLovTo(V).- such tin quality), ‘ gndtkovros, tyAtKa’Tn, THALtKodTo(v) such (in age or size).

to us (you) both. ‘auds (also written *auds) is found in Att. poetry for éuds. —#s is sometimes used without reference to the 3d person, in the sense of own.

239 D. In Hm,, the article itself is usually a demonstrative, and has the following peculiar forms: G.S. roto, G. D. D. rot, N. P. rol, ral, G. Fem. tdwy, D. roict, thot Or THs. For rots}e Hm, has rotsdeoor or rotsdec. The forms tol, raf, are also Doric. Rem Sy ‘ 4

When used as demonstrative, 6, 7, of, af are often written with an accent, 7 8, H, of, at. ;

Hd. has D. P. rotor, rior; also rolde, ryolde.

240 D. For éxeivos the poets have xeivos: cf. 249 D.

—————— hhh rhrhmtrtttt—<‘ le

~

_-RELATIVE.—INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE. | 71_

Puree tet

Sik cl ietods lec niet Toy: puiblings totes ‘Pouy eyNue> ha plac al A or ¢t of odros. But the Neut. N. A. S. ‘has two mee

s rogodro and rogoiroy, etc. Emphatic demonstratives of similar meaning, roodsde, rowWsde, rnu- _ késde, are made by adding the enclitic d¢ to the forms of récos, roios,

rmAixos, declined regularly (cf. 68, 239).

242. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes rendered more em- phatic by appending to the different forms a long accented 7, before which the short vowels (a, ¢, 0) are elided: ovrosi, airni, rovri, ravri, 681, torsdi, exewavi.

243. Retative Pronoun. The relative ds, 7, 6 who, which, keeps the rough breathing throughout.

S.N. ds qf 6 DNAS Gd © 8 Seay aaa ear G. ow is ov G. D. oiv aiv oiv G. dv &v dp D 6 7 6 D. ois ais ois A. & wW 8 A. ots ds @

Rem. a. ds is used as a demonstrative in the phrases kai ds hn and

he said, 7 8 ds but he said. : . ; 244. InTERROGATIVE AND “INDEFINITE Pronouns. These are _ alike in all but accent: interrogative ris, ri, who? which? what? indefinite ris, 71, enclitic, some, any. : Interrogative. Indefinite. . Sing. Nom. M. F. ris N. ri M. F. ris . N. ri : Gen. tivos (row) rivds (rov) . - , “~ , a“ . Dat. / Tit (ro) Tit (ro) ; Acc. riva ti riva Tl : Du. N. A. V. tive Tive : G. D. Tivo TLVOLD - Plur. Nom. Tives Tiva TIVES Twa Gen. Tivev TLV@V Dat. riot Til Ace. rivas riva Tivds TLva

Rem. a. The acute accent of ris, ri interrog. never changes to the

grave (see 101).

243 D. Hm. has also % for 8s, Sou for of, éns for fs: the nom. sing. and pl. he sometimes uses as demonstrative.

~ even in Trag.

Hd. has és, %, of, af: for all other forms of the relative, he uses the article _ 6, Tov, Tijs, etc., except after certain prepositions: map’ ¢, é& od. of the article (r-forms) for the relative is often found in Hm., and sometimes

244 D. The Ion, (Hm, Hd.) has G. 8. réo, red, D. réw, G. P. réwv, D. réoror,

¢

This use

;

»

>) Ww 3 ¥

“y Dae. INDEFINITE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [244

b. rov, ro are often used for rivos, rim, and (with enclitic accent) for Tivos, Twi. They must not be confounded with rod, r¢ of the article.

c. arra (never enclitic, Hm. doaa) is sometimes used for the indef- inite rivd. 245. Another indefinite pronoun is deiva some one, such a one (Lat.

quidam). This is sometimes used without inflection; sometimes it is inflected as follows, without distinction of gender:

Sing. 67 To deiva Plur. Seives , Seivos deivav

Sei Seiva deivas

246. Inperinire RetatrveE Pronoun. The indefinite relative OsTis, ATIs, 6 TL Who, which (indef.), is formed by uniting the relative ds with the indefinite zis, each being separately declined.

. a v Sing. N. dstis rts ore . Plur.-oiriwes aitwes drwa G. odtwos Astivos ovtwos @vrivav &vrwev _dvrwev = e @ e e D. ori yr ori Olistiot = aistise olsTict A A. ovTwa vrwa OTe oustivas Gstivas driva e ; © e Du. N. A. Grive dre drive G. D. oivriwow aivrwow oivrivow

For the way of writing 6 ri or 6,r:, see 113 a. Rem. a. The forms rod, 76 (= rivds, rwi) are also found in connection . ao e c . . . J with és, but before these the stem 6 is used without inflection: Gen. drov, Dat. drow. So also, but less often, Gen. Pl. érwy, Dat. droior. These forms are masc. and neut., never fem.

b. For driva, there is another form drra, not to be confounded with drra = rid (244 c).

247. CorrELATIVE Pronouns. The following pronouns, corres- ponding to each other both in form and meaning, are called corre- lative.

246 D. Hm. has the following peculiar forms, in most of which the relative stem is undeclined, as it is in 6-mdeos, 6-motos, etc.

8. (87s) N. (6 rrt) Es N. &ooa (for aria, 60) érev (8rre0, Srrev) brewy : drew (244 D) éréoit (8riva) N. (8 rru) (8rwas) N. &ooa The forms not in () occur also in Hd.—In the Nom. and Acc., Hm. has

also the usual forms; so too in D. §. 8r@.

247-8 D. For réo0s, bcos, Hm. often has téocos, doaos (once éc¢edri0s). He often doubles 7 in the indef. relatives: émmotos, drmws (40 D). -

Hd. has x for mw in the correlatives: kérepos, koods, Skotos, Kod, Kore, dK etc. Of. Lat. gu in quis, quot, qualis, etc.

CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADVERDS.

7 Interrogative. | Indefinite. | Demonstrative. | Relative, Indef. Rel. _ |tis who? Tis 6de this (here), |és, dstus | EE |eohich ? what?|some otros this, that \who, which : Z| o ompar-|7drepos wérepos erepos the one or|émdrepos Jj ative jwhich of two?lone of two |the other of two\which of two : Quantity|rdéc0s how rods Of —_|(rda0s) 80 |dcos, omdaos of +} or = |much, many ?\some quan, \rocdsde <much,\which quan.,num., Number or number |rocotros (many \(as much, many) as _ _ ‘|rotos of rows Of —-|(rotos) such otos, omotos ; Quality jwhat sort? |some sort |rodsde of which sort, , rs TOLOUTOS (such) as : Age |mnXixos mnAikos (rnXikos) + old,|jNixos, mnXixos qj or |how old? of some tnrtkosde | large \of which age, size, Size |how large? |age, size _|rnAckodros (as old, large) as r

bl ae

~~? ~~

For the ending repos, see 220. The form ryXlkos is never used in Attic prose ; the forms récos and roios, seldom.

248. CorreLative Apverss are also formed from the same pro-

- noun-stems. v i Interrogative. | Indefinite. Demonstrative. ,; Rel., Indef. Rel. ; rou mov eva, evSade, ov, O7rov 4 where ? somewhere |\evrav%a, there | where ‘ , ei mTosev mosev from \evSev, evdevde, Sev, érdSev ‘ whence ? some place |évred%ev, thence | whence 4 Tot Trot to évSa, ev3dde, ol, 67rot Fy whither ? some place |evrav%a, thither| whither Mi TOTE Tore some TOTE Ore, omdre = Time when ? time, ever then when 5 mnvika at (rnvika) at | qvixa, omnvixa what time ? thnvikade < that| at which time tyvikavta ( time wn which 1H 80Me WAY, |rHSe, TaLTN y OTN Way ‘ 9 ae ; Dy ee “i way? how? | somehow this way, thus | which way, as ~ A ef e WA c o Manner | 7@S : TOs @s, be, ovTa(s)} as, dws how : somehow thus, 80 as, that

The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (105 b). .

248 D. Poetic are 16S: = 20d, wot = mod, 891 = 00% 3 also jjmos, Thuos (Dor. duos, rauos) = bre, rére. as long as, réws so long, Hm. has also elws, relws (and sometimes fos, reios, _ though not thus written in our texts). In the same sense, he has dopa, téppa. Beside 7, he has the form 7x1, but uses both only in the /ocal meaning, which ¢ poy, an : for ro7, dot, he always uses wéce, damdce. ; se

thence ;

e 66 D.

4

Toa there, réSer For Att. €w.

For éviaitra, éevoeirey

Pe i es)

Pitney

74 CORRELATIVES. NUMERALS, — - [249

249. To the pronoun éxeivos that (yonder), correspond the demon- strative adverbs of place, éxet there, éxeisev thence, éxeice thither.

250. The demonstrative és: does not occur in Attic prose, except in the phrases kai Ss even thus, obf ds (wn Ss) not even thus.——For rnvixa, the Attic prose uses the strengthened forms in -dde and -aira. Attic prose, év3a and év%ev are chiefly relative, év3a being used instead of ob and oi, évZev instead of d%ev.

251. The indefinite, relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are made more indefinite by adding the particles ody, 57, 8 wore, 54 wor ovv: Ostis ovv who (which, what) soever, éstis dn, Sstis 8n wore, dstis On wor ody: these are also written as single words, dstisovv, dstisdn, dstisdnmore, 6stisOnmor- ovv. With the same force, ris is sometimes added to indefinite relatives : éroids Tis aNd even drotds Tis ovv Of what sort soever. The same par- ticles are sometimes used in the same way with the ordinary relatives, but hardly in the Attic writers.

The enclitic zép gives emphasis to relatives (definite and indefinite) : doo ep Of which number precisely, dsmep just as. ovv is sometimes added after it: asmepodp. .

252. Observe also the negative pronouns and adverbs: ovris, pyres no one (poet. for oddeis, wndeis, 255; in prose only ovri, pyre not at all), ovdérepos, pndérepos neither of two, oidapov, pndapov nowhere, ovdapy, pndapn in no way, ovSapas, pndapas in no manner, with some others of similar formation.

NUMERALS.

253. The words which express number are of various classes, the most important are given in the following table:

249 D. For éxe?, etc., the poets use Ketdi, ketdev, retoe (240 D). 250 D. The dem. és (distinguished by its accent from the rel. ds as, 112)

is frequent in poetry: in the sense yet, it is sometimes written ds: nal as and

yet. The poets have also rés = obrws.

258 D. For the first four cardinal numbers, see 255 D.

Hm. has for 12, dé5exa, Suddexa, and dSvoxaldexa; 20, e%koor and éelxoor; 80, tpihkovta; 80, dydéxovta; 90, éverheovra and evyfjxovta; 200 and 300, Sinkdotot, Tpinkdcrors 9,000 and 10,000, évvedxiaol, Sexdxiro. He has also the ord. 3d, tpitaros; 4th, rérparos; 7th, €Bdéuaros; 8th, dyddaros; Ith, etvaros; 12th, dSvwdéxaros; 20th, éexxoords; together with the Attic form of each.

Hd. has dvédexa (Suwdéxaros), rprhcovra (rpinkoords), dydéKovTa, Sinkdotor (S:nxoowwords), tpinkdotor: for @varos he has eZvaros, and so eivdxis, eivaxdotol, givakisx lator.

Dor. e%kat: for etxoot.

Aeol. réume for mévre, cf. ord. wéurros.

. ‘

= «28 NUMERALS. 15 : S| eee Cardinal Numbers. Ordinal. ) Num. Adverbs. , we ° 2 , oa cal ne 1 a’ | cis, pia, Ev One (6) mp@ros (the) first drag once Sage 21. B’ | dvo devrepos dis DA aa y' | tpeis, tpla Tpiros rpis - eet, 2 BIS , te} 4 o | reocapes, réooapa,| rérapros TeTpakis | or rérTapes, -a } S 5 é , PES; , ‘ WEVTE TE LLTTOS TeVvTakis 6 rad o oo ces é exTos é&dakis way ¢’ | éxra €Bdouos €mrdkts 8 n' | oxTo dySoos OKTaKLS 9 oS > , wy »” | > 4 evvéa évaros (€vvaros) | évdxis (evvdxis) 10 U , , , t | déxa d€xaros dexakis U 11 | ca’ | &vdexa évdéxaros évOexdkus 12 | 18 | dadexa dwdéxaros Swdexdkis U 13 | wy | rpisxaidexa Tpiskaidéxaros 14 | | reocapesxaidexa | teroapaxaidéxaros / Teooapaxaidexa 15 U pP , , j te | wevrexaideca mMevTEKALOEKAaTOS } 16 , ¢ id ¢ dé | ts’ | éxxaidexa éxxaOéKaTos 17 uC’ | émraxaidexa émrakatOéxaros 18 | um | 6xroxaidexa 6xTwKalOeKaTos 19 | 13’ | évveaxaidexa evveakatOeKaros ’ ww : 20 K | etkoow(v) eiKooTos elKoodKLs + £ - ne 30 | A’! rpiakovra Tpiakoords Tpiakovrdkts . 40 p' | reroapakovra TecoapakoorTos TEC TapaKoVTaKis 5 50 v | wevrnKovta mEeVTNKOOTOS MEVTNKOVTAKLS 7 60 &' | €&nxovra éEnxoords éEnKovTaKLs 70 0 éBdop nKovTa éBdopunkoords €Bdounkovrakis 80 wm | dySonkovra dydonkoords éydonkovrakis Ae 90 Gq’ | eveynxovra » | evernxoords evernKovTdkis 100 p | €xardv éxatooTds EKATOVTAKLS 200 | - o | dtdxdoto1, at, a ~— |: Suakoooa rds SidkootdKis 300 rT | Tpidkéowol, at,a_ | TpidKoa.ocTds 400 v' | Terpdkdctot, at, a | TeTpakootoorés 500 | | mevrdxdotot, at, a | mevtaxootoords 600 x | €Edxdotor, at, a é£axootoards 700 | WF | émrakdoto, at,a | éewtaxocoards 800 @ | OKTaKoGLOL, al, a OxTakoaLooTés ’ >_ , > / 900 | BD’ | evaxdoror, at, a evakoclooTés EVVAKOO LOL, AL, a evvakooloaTés 1,000 a | xo, at, a xiALoaTds xuAtdKes , 2,000 B | dtsxircor, at, a disxtAcoords TpisxiAtot, at, a Tpisxthwoords 3,000 iY pesxir y ae, ptsxidto j t + 10,000 2 | puptot, at, a puploorés puptdets

254. Noration. ‘The letters of the alphabet are sometimes used in

unbroken. succession to denote the series of numbers from 1 to 24. Thus

_vis used for 21, being the 21st letter of the alphabet. The books of the Iliad and Odyssey are numbered in this way.

76 NUMERALS, © [254

But. generally the letters are used as in the table. Those from a’ to % denote units 1—9, <’ (Stigma) being inserted after ¢’ for the number 6, Those from v’ to m’ denote tens 10—80, ¢’ (Hoppa) being added after n for 90. Those from p’ to w’ denote hundreds 100—800, ~' (Sampi) being added for 900. For the thousands (1,000—900,000), the same characters are used again, but with the stroke wnder the letter. Thus Brus! = 2344, aors’ = 1859. .

Rem. a, Stigma (° b) in this use takes the place of Digamma (23 D). Koppa and Sampi, like Digamma, were letters of the primitive Greek alphabet, which became obsolete except as numeral signs.

255. The cardinal numbers from 1 to 4 are declinable:

leis pid & 2.N.A.d00 3. rpeis N.tpia 4. réoodpes réooapa

évds pas évds G. D. dvoiv TpLav Tecodpav évi ua evi Tpicl Téooapot eva pidy ev Tpeis — Tpla Tégoapas Téooapa

Like eis, are declined ovdeis, ovdenia, ovdév, and pndeis, no one: these are found also in the Pl. They are sometimes divided by tmesis (cf. 477), dy or a preposition being interposed: pnd av eis, ovde wap’ Evds.

Avo is sometimes used without inflection. A rare form for dvoiy is dveiy (used only in the gen.).

For ov in réocapes and all its forms, rr is also used (41).

For both, we have dude (Lat. ambo), G. D. dudoiy; also the plural word dudorepor, a, a, to which belongs the neut. sing. duddrepoy used adverbially (228).

The cardinal numbers from 5 to 199 are indeclinable.

256. For 13 and 14, we often haye separate forms, rpeis kai déxa, réooapes kat déxa. Separate forms are also found for the ordinals 13th —19th: rpiros kai déxaros, ete. 7

When the numbers 20, 30, etc., are connected with units by kai and, either number may precede: ecixoou kal wevre OF mevre kal eikoor; but if cai is not used, the larger number must precede: eixoor mévre 25. So also éxarév Séxa 110, ete. The 21st is expressed by eis xal eixooros OF mparos kal eixooros OF eikoords mp@ros; and in like manner, other ordinals of the same kind.

The numbers 18, 19 are commonly expressed by évds (or dvoiv) déovres eixoot twenty wanting one or two. So 28, 29, 38, 39, ete.5 vavoi puas Seovoais mevtnKovta with 49 ships. So too the ordinals: dvoiy dSeovre rpiaxooT@ erer in the 28th year.

255 D. 1. Hm. has also Fem. ia, ifjs, if, fav, with D. S. masce. %q.

2. Hm. has dvo0 and dtm, both indecl.; also Du. S016, Pl. Sool, at, d, D. Boiotc1, A. So.ovs, ds, d.——Hd. with dvo, dvoiy, has G. P. dv@y, D. dvoior; also 5do indecl.

4, Hm. with réooapes has wicvpes (Acol.). peskatSexa sometimes indecl., and 40 reooephxovra).—LDor. réropes, D. rérpact.

Of ovddels, undels, Hm. has only obddéy, undév, oddert; ef. 252.

Hd. réowepes (So 14 tecoe

__-_—« 257. The cardinal numbers from 200 on, and all the ordinals are re- gular adjectives of three endings. The ordinals have superlative endings (222): only dSetrepos second has the ending of a comparative (220)..

__. To the ordinal class belong roddoorés (many-eth, following many in _ a series) and the interrog. moorés (how-many-eth, having what place in a series ?), with a corresponding indef. rel. émdécros. _ Mvpiou, paroxytone, has the meaning numberless ; also sing. pupios ammense .

258. From the same numeral stems are formed several other classes of numeral words:

a. Distributives, with civ: civdvo two together, two by two, civrpets _ three by three, = xara dv0, card tpeis, etc. b. Multiplicatives, in mods (from moos, Lat. plex): ddods simple, durhots twofold, rpimdods threefold, mevramdovs fivefold, etc., moAdamAods manifold. Also dicods double, rpiccds treble.

Further, multiplicatives in mAdows: dimAdowos twice as many (dis Togovrot), TpimAdayos three times as many, etc., rohAanAdotos many times as many.

c. Adverbs of Division: povaxyn (udvos alone) in one part, single, Sixa or diyn im two parts, rpixn in three parts, etc., rohAkaxn in many WAY8, Mavraxyn every Way.

d. Abstract Nouns of Number, in ds: povds (uovad) the number one, unity, Svas the number two, rpids, rerpds, mepras, é£ds, EBdopuds, dySods, evveds, Sekds, eikds, ékaTovrds, xuAids, pupids: hence rpeis pupiades =

30,000.

259. Closely connected with numerals are such general expressions as éxdrepos (with comparative ending) either (of two), exaoros (with superlative ending) each (of any number), mwas, waa, wav (mavr) all, every. Observe also the general adverbs in dis ; moAAdkis many times, often, éxaotakis each time, rooavrdkis 80 often, duds as often as, mrevoraxis very often, dduydkts seldom.

257 D. Hm. uses only pdpios proparoxytone, and always in the sense of numberless. 258 D. b. Hd. diéds, rpitds, for Sioods, tpicods; SimAgo.os, TpiwAhovos, etc., for -mAdovos. c. Hm. has diya and d:x3d, tpixa and tpixdd, rerpaxdd; also rpimaj, TET PATA. ° 259 D. Adverbs in dis sometimes lose s in poetry: dood: Hm., see 80 D,

>

78 VERBS. VOICES. MODES. TENSES. [260

VERBS.

260. Voices. The Greek verb has three voices, active, mid- dle, and passive. ' Rem. a. Many verbs are used only in the active voice: and, on the other hand, many verbs—called deponent—are never used in the active, but only in the middle voice (or middle and passive).

261. Mopzs. Each voice has six modes: the indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative ; the infinitive, and participle.

Rem. a. The first four modes (jinite modes), taken together, make up the finite verb,—that is, the whole verb, strictly so called. In their inflection, they distinguish, not only three numbers, singular, dual, and plural; but also three persons, first, second, and third, in each number (230): thus they are more definite (finite) than the other two modes.

Rem. b. The infinitive and participle have a mixed nature. Hssen- tially they are nouns, the infinitive being an indeclinable substantive, the participle an adjective of three endings; yet they both share to some ex- tent in the properties of the verb.

Rem. c. The verbal adjectives in rés and réos are analogous to parti- ciples, though much less clearly distinguished from ordinary adjectives.

262. Tensxus. The tenses of the indicative mode are seven: the present, and imperfect (for continued action) ; the aorist, and future (for indefinite action) ; [tion). the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect (for completed ac.

The tenses of the other modes are three: the present (for continued action) ; the aorist (for indefinite action) ; the perfect (for completed action).

The subjunctive and imperative have only these three tenses. But for the optative, infinitive, and participle, there are two tenses more,—a future, and future perfect.

263. The tenses of the indicative are also distinguished as d. principal tenses: the present, future, perfect, and future perfect (which express present or future time) ; 2. historical tenses: the imperfect, aorist, and phiperfect (which express past time).

262 D. The future optative is seldom, if ever, found in Hm.; the future perfect ovtative, never. »

+ ;

ee ee ee ee

6] "VERBS. STEMS. TENSE-SYSTEMS, 79

_—--:264. a. The passive voice has a distinct form only for the gorist and future. In the other tenses, the middle form has both a middle and a passive meaning. ;

uf b. The active has no form for the future perfect (394 a).

: .

265. Srems. Roots. PruwrivE anp Derivative VERBS.

The stem is that part of the verb which belongs to all the forms in common, and from which they are all made by the proper additions and euphonic changes: stem Av, Pres. Av-w to loose, Aor. é-dv-ca, Fut. Perf. A<-Av-copar; stem riya, Pres, tysd-w to honor, Plup. TE-TLLN}-KELV.

From the verb-stem are derived also stems of nouns (both substantive and adjective) by adding the proper endings or suffixes (454): Av-ou-s ace of loosing, Au-rnp looser, dv-rpo-v ransom (means of loosing); ripn-ot-s act of estimating, riyzn-rn-s appraiser.

A noun-stem, formed thus with its derivative suffix, may be used (often with some change of form) as the stem ofa verb. Such verbs are said to be derivative. Thus tipa-w is said to be a derivative verb, be- cause its stem is that of the noun tipi honor, and is derived, by the suffix pa, from the stem of ri-w to esteem. These verbs are also called denomi- native (de nominibus), as being derived from nouns.

But when the stem of a verb contains no derivative suffix, the stera is called a root, and the verb is said to be radical or primitive: di-a, ti-w. The roots are nearly all of one syllable (originally all were so) ; the derivative stems, of two or more syllables.

Rem. a. A derivative verb, as just described, comes from a primitive verb, through an intermediate noun (though often one or both of these are out of use): thus ride, from rio, through rizn. Yet a few deriva-

tive verbs are made directly from primitives, with no intervening noun (cf. 472 k).

A=0 ta eR Sey Ap

~ rs

mae Ee oe Siw secede BE PG

BS 266. Tunsz-Systems. In the formation of its different parts, the verb divides itself into the following systems of tenses:

1. the present system including the Pres. and Jmperf. 2. the future system “ Fut. Act. and Mid. 3. the first aorist system “ 1 Aor. Act. and Mid. 4. the second aorist system “ 2 Aor. Act. and Mid. 5. the first perfect system “ 1 Perf. and 1 Plup. Act. 6. the second perfect system “ 2 Perf. and 2 Plup. Act. . - 7. the perfect middle system“ Perf.; Plup.,and Lut. Perf. Mid. 8. the first passive system “ 1 Aor. and 1 Fut. Pass. 9. the second passive system“ 2 Aor. and 2 Fut. Pass.

» 264 D. In Hm., the passive form is nearly confined to the aorist (395 D). The place of a future passive he supplies by the future middle used in a passive sense (379), :

80 are VERBS IN 2 AND MI. [266 Rem. a. The tenses called second are of earlier formation.than the corresponding jirst tenses. The verbs which- have the former are com paratively few, and are, nearly all, primitive verbs (265). Sometimes, though not often, the same verb has doth forms of the same tense.

Rem. b. Hardly any verb is used in aid the systems. In general, verbs of full inflection have but six of them (cf. Rem: a.). In many cases, the number used is less than this. Some verbs are confined even to a single system.

Rem. c. In describing a verb, it is usual to repeat the jirst person in-

dicative of every system used in it: thus Ave (1) to loose, Avo (2),

ehuca (3), AéAvKa (5), A€Avpar (7), EAUSnv (8) 3 Aeir@ (1) to leave, retro (2), €Aurov (4), AéAoura (6), AEACtwpar (7), eAeiPInv (8); BovAoua (de- ponent) to wish, Bovknoopa (2), BeBovAnuar (7), ¢BovdnSyv (8).

267. Verbs INQ anp Verssi1n MI. Verbs are distinguished thus according to the inflection of the present system. The name in each case is taken from the last syllable of the first person singular, present indicative active: Av-w, Tidy-p.

I. Verbs in w. These take connecting vowels between the stem and endings in the present system. In number, they are more than nineteen-twentieths of all verbs.

II. Verbs in pt. These are without connecting vowels be- tween the stem and endings in the present system. ‘They are of earlier formation, and are, nearly all, primitive verbs.

A similar variety of inflection is also found, though less often, in the second aorist system ; and, still less often, in the second perfect system. In these systems also, the forms without con- necting vowels are called pu-forms, even though the present of the same words has the inflection of verbs in o. |

268. Meaning of the Voices, Modes, and Tenses. This will be ex- plained at length in the Syntax. In the mean time, the English forms, which represent-their ordinary meaning, are given with the annexed Synopsis of the verb Avw to loose. For the middle voice, the English forms are not given: but they are easily obtained from those of the active, by adding a reflexive pronoun, which, for this verb, must follow the preposition jor: Avaoua LT shall loose for myself, diov be thou loos- ing for thyself, vcac%a. to loose for one’s self.

Rem. a. When a verb is referred to in the dictionary or the grammar, it is usual to give the first person singular, present indicative; but, when the meaning of the verb is added, it is expressed by the infinitive: thus Ave to loose.

Nore. b. The vowel v in the present and imperfect of Avo is usually long (in Hm. usually short). It is always long in the future and aorist, active and middle; always short in the perfect and pluperfect of all voices, the aorist and future passive, and the verbals.

. a en

i an) ie a)

269. Synopsis of the Verb dv-w to loose.

(Tense. Mode.| Active Voice. Middle Voice. | Passive Voice. Pres. Ind. | Avo I wm loosing (or L loose) | Avopat 2 I am loosed (continued) Impf. Ind. | €Avov I was loosing eAvdpunv S I was loosed Pres. Sub. | Avo I may or can be loosing Avopat ‘A I may etc. be loosed “ Opt. | Avorus I might, could, would, or | Avoipnv © I might ete. be loosed “ Imy. | Ave be loosing [should be lg | Avov 3 be thou loosed s Inf. | Avew to be loosing Aveoae 2g to be loosed “4 Par. | Avov loosing Audpevos a being loosed # Fut. Ind. | Atco I shalt loose [after) | Avcopae AvSjoopat I shall be loosed _[after) Opt. | Moore I might ete. loose (here- =| Avooipny uIncoipnv | J might etc. be loosed (here- * Inf. | Avoresv to loose (hereafter) AvoeoSat AvsnoverSat to be loosed (hereafter) Par. | \vooy about to loose Avodpevos vInodpevos | about to be loosed Aor. Ind. | edvoa I loosed eAvodpny ehUSnv I was loosed Sub. | Aico I may or can loose Av’oopat AvId I may ete. be loosed Opt. | Avoarpe LI might, could, would or | Avoaipny Avselnv I might ete. be loosed ~e\fe hdcov loose thou [should loose | kdoat AUSyTe ‘be thou loosed hooat to loose AVoacSar AuSjvae to be loosed Avoas loosing or having loosed «| \vodpevos huSeis loosed or having been loosed} AéAvKa I have loosed heAvpat 2 I hawe been loosed eAeAvKeLy I had loosed ehehupny a I had been loosed AedvKo I may ete. have loosed Achupevos & | I may ete. have been loosed AeAvKorpe I might etc. have loosed —_| AeAvpévos einy o Imight etc. have been loosed héAvKe do thow have loosed AEeAUTO be: do thou hawe been loosed NeAvuKévat to have loosed AeAvoSat 2 to have been loosed Reducos | having loosed AeAvpevos | having been loosed

Opt. Aekvaoiuny, Inf. ANeddcecSat, Par. NeAvodpevos.

co sei Aurés loosed or looseable, duréos (requirin

g) to be loosed. °

Perf. Ind. AeAdoouar, Mid. J shall have loosed for myself, Pass. I shall ogee been loosed,

4*

PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [276 270. ° ae Present System. to loose ; AcrivE. Mrpptz (Passrvz). | Present. | Imperfect. Present.. - | | Imperfect. S. L| Av-o €-Av-0-v Av-o-pat €-Au-6-anv 2| Ad-ei-s é-Av-e-s Av-n, AU-eu €-AU-ov 3} Ad-eu é-Avu-€ Ad-e-Tat €-\U-€-TO Indic- | D.2| Av-e-rov €-AU-e-Tov Av-e-o Sov €-AU-e-o Sov ative. 3 | Av-e-rov e-Av-é-Tnv Av-e-o Sov é-u-€-o Sy P.1| Ad-o-nev €-\v-o-pev Av-d-peSa €-hu-d-peSa 2| Av-e-re €-\v-e-TE Av-e-oSe €-AU-e-o Se 3 | Av-ov-o1 €-v-o-v Av-o-vrat €-AU-0-VTO “4 | Present. Present. 8.1 AU-o AU-w-pae v-n 0-n-TaL Sub- |p.9 Av-n-Tov Av-n-o ov al 3 Av-n-Tov hv-n-oov tive. Me 7 | AU-@-uev Av-o-e3a 2 Av-n-Te AU-n-oSe 3 Av-o-o8 Av-o-vrat ae: tu) Av-o1-pt Av-ol-pnv 2 Av-ol-s Av-ot-o 3 Av-ot Adv-ot-To Opta- | D.2 AU-ol-Tov Av-ol-oSov tive. 3 Av-oi-rnv Av-oi-oSnv ee Av-ol-pev Av-ol-peSa 2 Av-ou-Te Av-o1-oSe 3 Adv-ol-ev Av-ol-vTo 8. 2 Ad-e Av-ov 3 Av-€-T@ hv-€-oS@ Imper- | D.2 Av-e-Tov Av-e-c Sov ative. 3 Av-é-Tav Au-€-oSe@v Pao ep Av-e-rTe At-e-oBe 3 Av-é-recay Or z Av-€-o3@cay or Av-6-vT@v | Av-€-oSeov Infinitive. Av-eu-y | Av-e-o Bat N. Av-ov hu-d-pevo-s Dale. Av-ovea Av-o-pEevn ciple Ai-o-v Av-6-pevo-v "4G, AvU-o-vT-os Av-o-péevou —_ Av-ovens Av-o-pevns

a

_S\=

ea

>

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

272. re Future System. First Aorist System. ACTIVE. _Mippir. = * ACTIVE. MIDDLE. Future. First Aorist. hvu-w Avo-opat é-huo-d é-Avo-anv Ave-ces Avo-n, Avo-eEt €-Avo-ds €-hvo-@ Avo-er Avozerat é-Avo-e €-hUo-dTo Ado-erov Avo-eoSov €-hUo-drov €-hvo-acov Avo~erov Avo-eoSov \ | é-Avo-drny é-huo-doSnv Ado-opev Avo-dpeSa €-hvio-dsev €-hvo-dpeSa Avo~-aTe Avo-eoSe é-hio-dre é-Avo-aoSe . a x > 7 Ave-cuot Avo-ovTat €-Avo-div €-AvG-avTo | | Avo Avo@pat Avons Avon . Avon Avonrat Avonroy AvonoSov Avonrov Avono Sov Avowpev Avo @pedsa AvonTe Avonoe AVooor Avoovrat Avooupe Avoeoipny Avoatpe Avoraipny Avoos Avooto Avoats, Avoeidis | AdVoaLo Avoot Avoaro Avoat, AVoete Aveatro Avoourov AdooreZov Avoatroyv AvoatcSov Avooirny AvaoolaSnv Avo-airny Avealo nv Avoowpev AvooipeSa AVoatpev AvoaipeSa Avootre - AioourZe Avoatre AvoatoYe Avcotev AvcouwrTo AVaaev, Avoerdiv | AdoawrTo AUoov Avoat ; Avedro AvoedoS@ Avodrov AvVoacSov Avo dtrev AvedoSev Avodre AVoaoSe Avodr@cay or AvedoS@cay or Avodytov AvodoSev Adoew AvoeoVat Adora: AvoacSat icar Avo-dpevos Avods Avordpevos Aicovca Avoopern iodo Avoapevy Atoov Avodpevov Adoav Avordpevov Avoovros Avoopevou Avoavros Avorapevou Avaovons Avooperns Avodons Aveapevns

84. PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [278 278. 274. Av-w First Perfect System. | Perfect Middle to loose ACTIVE. | MippLE (Passtvez) 1 Perfect. | 1Pluperfect. | Perfect. | Pluperfect. S. 1 | XeAvk-a €-heAUK-ELY AéeAv-pat e-ev-pnv 2 | AeAvK-as é-AeAUK-ELs AeAv-eat €-hedu-70 3 | NeAuK-€ €-LeAvk-et éAv-TaL « €-\€Av-TO | ‘S| D. 2 | NeAvK-arov €-hedvk-etrov. | A€Av-o Sov €-hév-o Sov = 3 | NeAvK-aTov €-heAvk-eitnvy | A€Av-oZov é-Aehi-oSnv . S P. 1 | AeAvK-apev e-heAvx-eev | AceAU-peBa. €-AceAv-peSa TS 2 | NeAvUK-are €-heAUK-ELTE AeAv-cS@ €-AéAv-o Se 3 | AeAVK-Got €-heAvx-ecoav, | A€Av-yTat €-héAv-vTO é-heAUK-eoay , I 1 Perfect. Perfect. Ss. 1 AeAvK@ AeAvpev-os(=n,-ov) OB s 2 AchoKys. ae nS ‘S 3 Aedoxy | sf 7 $|D.2 AeACKNTOD - Rehupev@ (-a,-@) 7) jroy ) Sa AeAUKNTOV TOV aie. a AeAdKopev Aehupev-o1 (-at,-a) Gpev 2 2 AeAUKNTE ire 3 AeAVK@CL se dot Ss. 1 AeAvKoyst OF AeAvKoOinv Nedopeimos (-n,-ov) elyv 2 AeAvKOLS AeAvKoins <ins s 3 AeAvKoL - AeAvKoin mae keg ein $|D.2 AeAvKotroy AeAvKoinrov Aehuper-@ (-a,-o) einroy or. elroy = 3 AeAvKoitny. heAvKoinTHV eltyrny etryy S| P.1 AeAvKoywev eAvKOIneEV AeAvpev-ot (-at,-a) elnpev eiwey 2 AedvKotre —— AeAvKOINTE = einre _—€ire 3 AeAvKoLEV AeAvKoina av vi einoay elev S. 2 AeAvKE AeAvoo s 3 AeAUKETO AericSa $/D.2 AeAvKeTOP \ AeAVESov = 3 AeAvKETOr | AcAvoZov | &,| P. 2 AeAUKETE AeAvoBe Ss 3 AeAvKéT@oay OF AeAvoS@cay or AeAvKYTOY AeAvaav Injin AeAvKevat AeAVoSat o|N. AeAvKas AeAvpevos & AeAvKvia Achupern ye AeAvKds AeAupeEvoy iS G. AeAvKros AeAvpEvou Ay AeAvKvias AeAvpEevns

275. ° System. First Passive System. . AippLe (Pass.) ‘PASSIVE.

_ Future Perfect. | 1 Aorist. 1 Future. AeAvoopat €-hvSn-v AvSjoopat AeAvon, AeAUoer €-AVSIn-s AvSnon, AvIjoex AeAVoerat €-vSn AvInoerat AeAdoeoRov — €-AvSN-Tov AvInTerSov AeAvoec Sov €-huSn-THy AvsnoeaSov AceAvoouesa €-AUSn-pev AvSnodpeSa AeAvoerSe €-US-TE AvIjnceoSe AeAVoovrat €-AUSn-cav AvSyoovrar

Avw@

Avs7s

us7y”

AvSnrov

° AvSnrov

Avsapev

Avr

AvIao4r AeAvooiuny Avseinv AvSnooiuny

~ NeAVoroto Avseins AvsnToL0

AeAVootro Avsein Avs Toro AeAvootrSov AvSeinrov Or AvSetrov Avs Tole Sov AeAvaoiaSnv Avsernrny = AvSeirny . AvsncoiaSny AeAvooipeSa AvSeinuey = AvSeipev Avy coipeSa AeAvoor Se, Avseinre Av3yeire Avsnoos Se AeAVowTo AvSeinoay = AvBevev AvsycouwTo

AVSnTe

AvsnT@

AVSnTov

AvSnTev

AvSnTe

AvSnT@Cay Or

AvSEevrov

AeAvoeoSat AvSHva AvsncecIat AeAvordpevos Aveis AvSnodpevos AeAvaopevyn Avseioa AvSnTopevn AeAvodpevoy Avsév Avsnodpevoy AeAvoopevov Avsévros AvInoopevov AeAvooperns Avselons AvIngouEerns

86

PARADIGMS OF VERBS,

[276

276. 277. Netw Second Aorist System. Second Perfect System. (Air) canes ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. ~ | | 2 Aorist. 2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfect. S. 1 | &-Acz-ov €-Aun-Opunv A€Aolt-a €-Aeolm-euy S| 2| &-Arm-es €-imr-ov AéAour-as érAeXoim-eLs $s 3 | é-Aum-e é-Aim-ero AéeAour-€ €-heAoin-et 3 D.2| é-Aim-erov €-Ain-eaSov AeAolm-arov €-NeAoim-errov S} 3 | e-Aun-erny €-himr-eo Sn AeAoin-arov €-heAour-eitny S| P.1] &-Ain-opev €-hir-dpeSa Aeolrr-apev €-Nehoim-e Lev 2 | é-him-ere €-Nim-eoSe AeAoin-are €-eoinr-erTe 3 | €-Aum-ov €-hi-oyTo Aehoin-aot €-Lehoin-eroay, €-heAolmr-erav | | 2 Perfect. 8.1 | Aira Aitropat AeAoiTr@ | 2| Adrns hisn Aedolmns ‘S| 3| Aun Aimnrac * AeAoinn S| D.2| Aimnrov AimnoSov AeAolanrov S| 3] Aimnrov AlrnoSov AeAoinnrov L, "S| P.1) Airoper Aur@peSa ‘AeAolr@pev 2) 21 Nirnre ~ | AurnoSe Aedoimnre 3 | Alr@ot Aim@vrat AeAoir@ct S. 1) Alsou Aurroiuny AeAotsrorps OF AeAourroinv 2! Airots Aizroto AeXoizrots Aeourroins s 3 | Aimoe Aimrotro AeAoirot AeAourroin BS | D.2| Aérourov Aurora Sov AeNoizurrov eAotrroinror S| 3] Auroirny AuroloSnv AeAourroirny edourounrny S| P.1} Airouze AuroipeSa AeAoimrousev eouroinuey 2 | Aimoure Airrota Se AeAolmrorre _ AeAourroinre 3 | Aimovev Aimrowro AeAolrovey _—AeAOurroincay S. 2| Aire Aurrov A€Aourre S| 3 Auéro Auréc%a AeAourréT@ ‘$ | D.2| Aiwerov AimeoSov AeAoirerov & 3| Aurérov AuréeoSav AeAourrér@v &| P.2| Almere AlrrecSe AeAolsrere Ss 3| Auwérwoay Or =| AuwéoS@cav or AeAourér@oay Or humovrev uméeoSav AeAourévrov Infin. | Aureiv | AuréoSae AeXourrévar o| N. | Aurov Aumépevos AeAouras & Aurovoa Aurropevn AeAourvia a Aumov Atwdopevoy AeAouTrs | BS G. | Aurdvros Aurropevou AeAouwdros a, Aurovons Aurropevns AeAourrvias

a 1

ow

PARADIGMS OF VERBS,

278. oTéANo| Second Passive System. (ared) to send PASSIVE. 2 Aorist. | 2 Future. ~TS.5 é-oTaAn-v oTdAnoopac 2 e-oTaAn-s oralnon, oradnoes s| 8 €-oTdAn oraAdnoerat "S| D.2 é-oTdAn-ToV oTadnoeoSov S 3 é-oTaAn-THy oradnoerSov S| P.l €-oTaAn-pev oradnodpeSa Si} 2 €-oTdAn-TeE oradnoerSe 3 €-oTdA7-cav oraAnoovrat oe 8.1 oTAA® ae oraAns S| 38 oTa\y 8 D.2 oraAnTov =| 3 oTaAnrov > P.1 oTa\@pev mi 2 orTadnre 3 oTad@ou S.1 oradeinv oTaAnooipny 2 ataneins oTaAnaoto S| 3 oranein oraAnootro $ | D.2 oraneinroy OF oraleirov oradnoosSov S| 38 aTrakeinrny oradeirny oTadnooicSnv S/P.1 orancinuey oTadeipev oTaAnooipeSa 2 otaXeinre oraXeire oradnoocde 3 oTaveinoavy = oradetev oradnoowTo 8. 2 oTdAnse S$} 3 oTaAnT@ $| D.2) oTdAnrov = 3 oTannrav &| P.2 oTdaAnte aS 3 oTaAnTocay Or oTakevTov Infin. orakhvat oradnoeo Sat Ss N. oTaneis oTaAnodpevos & oTakeioa oTadnoonern & orahev oradnodpevor ES G. oraevros oTadnoopevou IX oraXeions oradnoouerns

88 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. "279 279. TULG-W Present System of to honor. Contract Verbs in aw. | ACTIVE. : | MIppLE (PassIvE). | | Present. | Imperfect. | Present. | Imperfect. | S. | ryp(dw)o érip.(aov) wv Tip( do) @-rat erip(ad)o-pny is 2 | rip(dews)as eriu(aes as Tin ( dy G,(det)a ériu( dou) S13 | rip dew)a eriu(ae)a Tip(de )a-rae erius(de)a-ro | 8} De) rep de)a-Tov erip(de)a-rov | tTip(de)a-cSov érip( de )a-oZov rs| 3 | rup(de)a-roy eTUys aé)d-Tnv Tiys(de)a-oSov | érip(ae)d-oSnv S| P.| reu(do)d-pev erii(do)a-pev | riys(ad)o-peXa éri(ad Jo-pesia 2 Ge pre eri (de )a-re Tip( de )d-oSe eri de) a-oSe 3 — dov)@-co8 eriu(aoy ov Tiys(do)a@-vrar | eri(do)@=-vTo , Present. Present. S. Tiu(dw)@ TUn( dw )O-pat w| 2 Tip dns )as rip(an)a ‘S| 3 rin an)a Tip( dn )a-rat g| D. Tiu(an)a-rov Ti ( an )a-cSov =| 8 Tu.( dan )a-roy rys( dn )a-oSov TES Ti( dw )a-pev Ti(aw)o-weSa R| 2 Ti( dn )a-1¢ ri( dn )a-oSe 3 TUL( dw)@-o1 Tiu(d@)@-vrat S. | rep dou) d-pe or Tip(aoi)d-nv Tiy.( aol )@-pny 2 | rip(dos)os Tp ae o-ns rip( do)@=o $/3 | rup oe Toy ik o-n rip( dor)@~=To BS D.} tip(dot)@-rov = Tux Sone Ti dor) G-o Sov 5 3 | teu(aol)e-rnv — T44(aov @-nTnY TiL(aoi o-oo S| P.| rep(douo-pev Tus (a @-n Lev TUL( aol )@-peSa 2 rip( dor) @-re Tie tae @-NTE Ti( dou) @-oSe 3 ru dor)@-ev Ti(dot)@-vTo |S. rip(ae)a SH gt $|3 rip (ae )d-re@ Tus(aé )a-oS@ cS D. Tu.( de )a-Tov Tip( de )a-oSov £| 3 Tiu( aé )d-Tey Tip(a€ )d-oSe@v S r. Toy ane Tip( de )a-oSe S| 3 Tit(aé)d-Taoay Or Tiyu(ae)d-oS@cay or Tun(ad)@-vToV Tip(a€ )d-oS@v Infin. Ti dew av j Ty.(de)a-oSae = N. Ti( dev) ay Tip.( ad )@-pevos S| Ti dou @-oa Tiu( ao )@-pevn 3! ria ( doy ev Tip(ad @-pevoy S| G Tuy.( do)@-vros Tip( ao) @-évou AY Tip{ aov)o-ons Ti(ao)w-pEerns

7 5 ~ < . , ideas A : - ine ee” a nt Ta et TE a « 5 7) HP os Pidel % 89 -

: Present System of Contract Verbs in ew.

Active Mipp.z (Passive). Imperfect. Present. | Imperfect. epidr(cov)ouy PiA(€o)od-par ediA(ed)ov-pny epir(ces)ets prcen)is (cev)et | eiA(Eov)ov epir(ce)er Pir(€e)et-rae e@ua(€e)et=ro Epir(Ee)et-rov Ppir(€e)et-oBov etd (€e)et-o Sov EDiA(ce et-ryv ir(€e)et-o Sov epir(e€)et-oSyv EDid(Co)od-ped dir(ed)ov-peSa EPiA(€d)ov-peSa eir(€e)ei-re Pidr(ce)et-oSe epir(ée)ei-o Se | epir(cov)ouv gid(€0)ov-vrat epir(€o)od-vro | Present. Present. q { Pir(éo)o Pprr(E@)@-par gy ; ese BNeOR ql €n)n iA(én)y-rat | pet prr(én)i-o Sov at ge (én)q-rov idr(En)j-o Sov “an Pir(ew)a-pev Pir(e@)o-pesa A ay Nhe 9 €w)@-o1 t\A(Ew) @-vTae a4 id(¢or)oi-u or, iA(coi)oi-nv PrrA(coi)oi-pnv ’ | Prd(Kors)ots pir(cot)ol-ns tr(€or)oi-o ‘ Pir(€or)ot Prr(coi)oi-n dir(€or)ot-ro | pir(éor)oi-rov PiA(€ot)oi-nrov gid (€or)oi-o Sov . Pir (cot)oi-ryv prr(cor)ou-nrnv dir(coi)oi-cSnv #4 dtd (€ot)ot-pev Prr(cot)oi-n pev Ptr(cot)oi-neSa f Prd (Eor)oi-re Pir(c0t oi-nre duir(€or)ot-o Se . ; iA (€or) ot-ev PtA(coi)oi-noav dir (€or)ot-vro " ) ayo i ote * tA(e€ )el-re X(e€ )ei-7 3a at pir(€e)ei-rov dir(ée)et-o Sov : ; } pir(e€)el-rav pir(eé)el-c Sav a} ir(Ec)ei-re Pir(e)et-o Se yay dir(eé)ei-racay or pir(eé)ei-cS@cav or I dir(€d)ov-vrav dir(c€ )el-o Sav . gir(éewv)eiv pir(ce)et-oSae prr(<ar)av Pir(€d)ov-pevos pir(ov)oi-ca id (co)ou-peéry ; vee Dated iA (€d)ov-pevoy pur €0)ov-vros did (co)ov-pEevou pid(cov)ov-ons did(co)ov-pévns

90 PARADIGMS OF VERBS, [281

281. dnAd-w to Present System of manifest. Contract Verbs in ow. | ACTIVE. MIDDLE (Passive). Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. S. OS ngs ed7nA(oov)ouy dnA(do)ov-pat | ednA(od)ov-p , = 2Q7 , Cad Lz : : dnd dets ois Nee Sn A(on ot, (der)ot edn dov)od 8 dnd de )oi edn o¢ ov dnA(de)ov-rac | edyA(de)od-To S| D.| dnd de )ov-rov ber ad dnA(de)ov-cSov | &dnd( de )od-aSov 3 3 | nA de )od-rov edn 0€ Jov-ryp dnd(de)od-o Sov ednA(0€ )ov-oSnv Z P.| Snr do )od-mev edd ray Acie dnA(06)ov-peSa | eOnA(06 )ov-peSa 2 i bed ae ednA(de)ov-re | dyA(de)ov-ae | ednA( de )ov-cSe 3 | dnA(dov)od-cr° | €dnA(oor our dnA(60)od-vrar | ednA(é0)od-vro AO Wak Present. Present. S. dnA(6@)a dnA(d@)d-pat gy |2 dnA( dys ois rN pe r S| 3 dnA(6n )ot dnA(6n)-Tae S| D. dnA( bn )@-rov dnA( dn )@-cSov =| 3 dnA(6n) d-rov dnA( bn) G-o Rov = if ae toad dnA(o@ )o-peSa 2 dnd én )a-re dnA(6n)d-o%e 3 dnA(d@)O-o8 Ond( 6@)@-vrat S.| dnA(dor)ot-pe Or dnA( oot )oi-nv dnA (001) of-yny 2 | dnr(dors ots dnA( 001 )oi-ns Sn\(Sor)or-o. $13 | dnA(dor)ot dnA( 001 )oi-n 5nA(dot)ot=ro © ie Ve . S| D.| dyA(dor)oi-rov — dnA( 001 )oi-nrov « OnA(dor)ot-o Sov = 3 | dnd oot Jot-rny dnd oot ou-nT NV dnA(o0i)ol-a Inv S| P.| dyA(dor)ot-wev — dyA(o0i )ot-nyev 5nA(00i)oi-peSa a2 nee dnA(o0i )oi-nre dA (601) of-aSe 3 | dnA(dot)ot-ev 5 8nX(6o1)oi-vro 8. d7nA(o€)ov dnA(6ov) od 32 OnA(0€)ov-T@ Hil peed 8 D. dnd (de)od-rov dnA( de )od-cSov 813 dnA(0€)ov-rev dnA(0€ )ov-cSav > P. dnd (de)od-re dnA(6e)0v-oSe aS 3 dnA(0€)ov-racay or dnA(0€)ov-cS@cav or dnA(06)0v-vrav dnA(0€)ov-oeav Infin. dnA(Gerv) ody &nA(6e)ov-oSae SIN. de Vand etd dnd (06)ov-pevos = 8 (dou)ov-oa dnA(00)ou-névn ‘S 0 Se aee dnd(0d)ov-pevov S| G. n\(6o)od-vros dnA(00)ou-pEvov Ry dnA(oov )ov-ons dnA(00)ov-pEevns

aa

- First Aorist System of Liquid Verbs.

TI é Mippie. ACTIVE. Mippxx. “fal (contraeted). 1 Aorist. al pavotpat ednrva é-pyy-duny

. avy, pavet é-dnv-as e-bnv-@

" aveirat é-pny-« €-bnv-aro faveioSov €-byv-arov é-pnv-aoSov faveiaSov e-pyv-drny é-pyy-dosny pavovpesa é-py-apev e~pnv-apesa paveiose € é-bnv-ate é-pyy-aose pavotyrat é-nv-av €-pnv-avro

pve pyvepat pyvys pn pin pnyyra 9 oe vj cet nunrov nynoSov pyvopev pyvapesa ’ oun yf a nvect nvevrat | pav-oips, -oinv | pavoipny pyvarpe pnvatyuny . | pav-ois, -oins | davoio prvacs, pnveras prvato | pavr-oi, -oin pavoiro prvat, pnvete pnvarro pav-oirov, -oinrov | pavotoZov yvacroy prvaco Sov | pav-oirny, -ounrny | pavoicSny pyvairny pyvatoSny | pay-oiper, -oinuev | pavoipea dnvatpev pyvaipesa | pap-oire, -oinre | havoicSe pnvaire pyvacose | Pav-oiev, -oinoav| havoivro pyvacev, pyverav | pyvawro | cbjvov prvat pyvare pyvagse nvarov prvaosov : ha 4 rent nvare nvagse dnvarecay or pnvacS@cay or dnvavrev dnvacSev haveioSat pavat pnvacsa. pavovpevos pnvas pyvapevos avoupern pnvaca pnvapevn avovpevoy pavay pnvdpevov pavoupevou pivavros pnvapevov | Pavoupévns dnvacns dnvapéevns ~

5 =

[284

92 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 284. ~ Perfect Middle and Pure Verbs, ie with added o. Equa Koren MIDDLE TeAEw (TedE) oréh\Aw (ored) paiva (piv) (Passive) to complete to send to show S. 1 | reréXe-o-par €oTaApat méepac pat

8 2 | rereAe-crat €oradcat mépavoat

es 3 | reréhe-o-Tat €oraArat méavrat

4 D. 2 | rerée-oBov €oradSov mépavSov

S 3 | reréde-o ov €oradSov méepavSov

& | P.1| reredé-o-peSa éorddpesa mepacpeSa

Ae) , »” ,

RY 2 | reréXe-aSe éoTaASe mepavse

3 | rerede-o-peévor eici =| €oradpévon €ici mecacpéevot eict S. 1 | &rerede-o-pnv eordAunv erebao puny

Ss 2 | é-reréXe-co é€oTadco erréebavaoo

S 3 | é-reréAe-o-To éoraXtro éméavro

6 D. 2 | &reréXe-oSov eoTadSop emréehavZov

t 3 | é-rerehe-oSnv eoTaASny erebavSnv

= |P. 1 | ererehé-o-peSa éordApeSa emepacpeSa

AY 2 | é-rerehe-cSe €oradSe errébavde

3 | rerede-c-pévar Hoav | éoradpéevor Hoav | mehacpevor Hoav *

Perf. Sub,| rerehecpévos @ eoradpevos @ mepacpevos ® Perf. Opt.) rereheopévos einv €oTaApevos €inv mepacpevos €iny S. 2} reréXe-co éoradoo mepavoo S 3 | rereAe-c3@ éoTaaSa mepavsa =| D. 2 | reréde-oBov éxraASov mépavSov Si 3 | rereXe-o Sav €oTaAS@v mepaviwp S | P. 2 | reréde-oBe eorahSe mepavse x 3 | rerede-oS@cay Or éord\S@cay Or mepavSacay Or TETENE-CS@v é€oTrd\Sav mepavIev Perf. Inf.| reredé-o3ar | €oradSat | repavSat Perf. Par.| rerehe-o-pevos | €oradpevos mecbac pévos Fut. Perf. 3 Ind. | €rehé-o-Snv epavsny Ss | Sub. | rede-o-30 pav3a S| Opt. | rede-o-Selnv avdeinv & | Lmo. | redé-o-Syre pavnre “| Inf. | rere-o-Syvat pavsnvat ri | Par. | tede-o-Seis avSeis 1 Put. Ind.|\ rede-o-Sjcopa | pavSnoopat .

. . > . ’ 4 : 3 P.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 93

First Passive Systems of

ed a i (ay

Mute Verbs.

| mt add\Adoow (addAay) | €Aeyy@ (eAcyx) meis@ (iS) et to exchange to convict to persuade | epptppac pAAaypat eAnreypat TETELT at | éppupae “HAAaEat . eAnreyéat méreroat epperrae 7 Aakrat eAneyKTat TETELOTAL | &ppepSov nARAaxSov eAndeyxZov meérevo Sov eppipSov AXaxSov eAnreyxSov métreto Sov | éppippeSa nrAAdypeSa eAnréypeSa Temelopesa eppipre nrrAaxde eAnreyx%e memEeroSe | epprmpevor clot nrdaypevor eiai | eAnAeypévor cioi =| wemetopévor eiot eppipnv nrraypnv eAnréypnv ememeio puny eppupo — 7 AAa&o eAnreyEo ET ETFELTO éppemro p\XakTo eAnXeyKTo émémetoro | €pprpSov mAAaxSov eAnreyxSov emremreto Sov | eppipSnv nrdaxSnv _eAnéeyxSnv ememreloSnv éppimpeSa MrAAdypeSa eAnréypeSa emereio peta | eppipSe pAAaxSe ednreyxSe emremreto Se €ppipevor Hoav | nAdAaypévor Hoav | eAnAreypévor Heavy | memEvopevor Hoa | eppyppevos & | nAAaypevos ® eAnreypevos @ | TETELTMEVOS @ Pairs ¢ , ey > s ” > , 7 t ” | €ppippeévos etnv mAAaypevos einv | eAnAeypévos einy | wemetopevos €tnv ~ 4 éppupo HAAaEO eAnrey&o WeTELTO a eppipSe nr\r\axo eAnhéyx%o mweTrELoS@ | &ppepov ni AaxSov eAnAreyxSov Wémreto Sov | eppid av n\AaxZav eAnhéyxSov meTEioS@v | eppie nrAdaxSe eAnreyxSe memeroSe | €ppidSacay or nAdxSe@cay or eAnrkeyxSocay Or | mereicS@cay or | €ppipiov nrAdxSev eAnrteyxSav TeTTELaS@v “i | eppip rat | nAAaXSae | eAndéeyySat | sremetoSat | €ppippévos | 7AAaypEvos | €AnAeypevos | memevopevos a Gastdrads | | | éppid MAX Nhéyx Inv emetoSnv Pi ddax3@ eXeyx2@ TELOS@ adX\axSeinv edeyx Sein metoSeinv adiaxSnre eheyxSnre meioSnre aAaySyvat eeyxInvat mero Snvar ad\XayxSeis edeyxeis metoSels

addaxSnoopa eAeyxSnoopat | revo Snoopae

ae

$4 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [285 285. Synopsis of riya-w to honor. Pr. Impf. Active. Future Active. Aorist Active. Perf. Plup. Active. Ind. TLL® TINO @ TeTinka eriwav eriunoa €TETLUTKELY Sub. TLL@ TLiLNT@ TETLUNKO Opt. TLUL@ Lt, -@NVv TLAN TOLL TL Taye TETULNKOLAL Imv. ripa Tipnooy TETLLNKE Inf... rua TUNoe Tino TETLULNKEVAL Par. TULOV TLUNT OY Tiunoas TETLUNK@S M. P. Middle. * Middle. M. P. Ind. TLUL@pat TLULNoopaL TeTiunpat ETLL@ NY eTlunodpnv eTETLLN UNV Sub. TLu@pat TLC OAL TETLULNLEVOS @ Opt. TiL@pnv TLiungoiuny TLunoaipny TETLUNMEVOS ENV Imy. TLIUL@ Tipenoat TETiULNTO Inf. TibaogSat TLIUNoET Sat TiunoagSat TETLULNOSaL Par. TLL@LEVOS Tino opEvos TLUNodLevos TETLLNEVOS Passive, Passive. Fut. Perf. Ind. TLNInoTopat erinsnv TETLUNOOMAL Sub. = TLUNS@ Opt. BSS TiLnSnooiny Tiuneiny TETLLNTOLLNY Imv. ses TiunInTe Inf. 2 >F TiunInoecVat =—- TN SHvar TETIMNO ETAL Par. TiLNSnodspevos TiunVeis TETLALNT OMEVOS 286. Inpd-w to hunt. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. Ind. Inpa Inpacw TeSnpaka _ eSnpov eSnpaca ereSnpaKe Sub. Spo Snpdcw TeSnpako Opt. InpOpt,-onv Bnpacorue Inpdoarpe TEInpaKorpe Imv. S&npa Snpacov TeDnpake Inf. Snpav Inpacery SInpacat TeSnpakevat Par. Inpav Snpdcev Snpdcas TeSInpakos M. P. M. M. M. P. Ind. Snpapar Snpacopar TeBnpaua eInpopnv €Snpadoduny eTeSnpapnv Sub. Inpa@par Inpacwpar TeInpapevos & Opt. = Snpadyny Snpacoipny Snpacaiuny TeSnpapevos etnv Imy. %npo Snpacat TeSnpaco Inf. SnpaoSae InpaverSar SnpdcacSat TeSnpagsat Par. Snpaopevos Snpacdpevos Snpacdpevos TeSnpapevos P. & Ind. Snpasnoopat eSnpadyv Sub. a Snpase@ Opt. 2 ‘s ‘S Snpaknooiuny BnypaSeinv Imv. eS 8. Spare Inf. Se) SPS SnpaInoceoSar = BnpaSjva Par. Snpasnodpevos Snpaeis

—_—. =

eae tr ¢ a SM ae Sl . ~ ; Perf. Plup. A. akties mepidnka 4 emecpiAnkety parjoo mepirdne prjoorpe parnoapu mepiAdnKorpe pidnoov mepidnke prjoew pdrjoa mepiAnkevat este peas mepinkas M. M. P. eed mepidnpat : eprnoduny emepiAnuny pryowpat mepiAnpevos o Prynooipny piynoaipny mepAnpevos einy Ppirrynoat mepirnoo 7 pirnoerSar pinoacSae mepiryoSae | didovpercs piryodpevos a meiAnuevos a PB Fut. Perf Pi PrrySnoopat gudieiyy mepiunoopat B.-f a Prnrs@ 4 4 “ose pirysnooipny pry seiny mepinootuny | 2a Parysyre ‘ > oo PhrnIjnoeosac PrrynBjvac mepirnoeoat , Pirrnsnodpevos Pparnseis mepidnodpevos H 288. tedé-w to complete. | Pr. Impf. A. Future A, Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. —TEA@ TEAD (TeAEow, 874) TeTéAeka | éréXoup éréheca eTeTENEKELY | TEA@ Teheow TETEAEKD TEAOLLL, ~oiny TeAoipt, -oinv TehErape TETENEKOLL rédet TéXewov TeTEAEKE Teel rede Tedéoat TeTENEKEvat TEAOY TEA@v redéoas TeTENEKOS . M.P.. M. M. M. P, | redXodpas TeAovpat ; Teréheg pat |. éreXovpny ereheo anv erereheopny | reX@pae TeAEoopat _Terehecpevos @ o | redolpny Tedoluny Tedecaipny Tereheopevos einv | redov redXecat TETEAETO | redetoSae Tedeto Sat TekeoacSat TeTeAéoSat | reNovpevos TeAovpevos TeAeoapevos TeTEAEg pEVOS | St a! P. Teheo Sj oopar ereheo Inv 28 TEAETI@ EE TedeoSnooipny TeAcoseiny SS ea TehEoSnTL oy TeAeoSnoerSat TeAeo Svat

TeheoSnodpuevos

rereoSeis

96 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [289 289. dndd-w to manifest. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. Ind. dnh@ dnAooe . dednA@Ka ednAovv . edojooa edednr@xew Sub. dnrA@ dnhoo@ dednA@K@ Opt. SnAotpt, -oinvy Ssyrwcorpe dnrA@catpt dednA@Koupe Imv dndov dnA@oov ded7A@ke Inf. dnXody dnhovety dnA@orat dednA@xevas Par dnrav dnkoowv dnkooas dednA@Kos M. P M. M. M. P. Ind. dnAodpat dnA@copat ; dedjA@pat ednAovpnv eOnioodunv edednA@pnv Sub. dnAGpat dnAoo@pat dednA@pevos & Opt. dnAoiuny SnA@ooiuny dnAocaipny dednAwpEevos ein Imv. dndod dnA@cat ded7jA@GO Inf. dnAovo Sat dnrkaoerSar dnA@oacSat dednA@oSat Par. dnAovpevos SnrAwcdpevos Ondwaduevos de\nA@pevos P. P. Fot. Perf. Ind. Syro@Sjcopat ednrw@Snv deSnA@oopar Sub. a Z dnA@%a Opt. 4ER SnrA@Synooipnvy Sydr@Zeinv deSnA@coipnv Imv. B22 Onr@Syre Inf. > oo dSnrojcersa Syr@Sjva dedyAacerSa Par. Snr@Snodpevos SnrAwSeis dednAwodpevos 290. oté\Aw (ored) to send. Pr. Impf. A. Future A, Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. Ind. oTée\A@ OTEAO éoraika €oreAor €oretAa €oradkety Sub. = aré\A@ oreiho €oTdAK@ Opt. oreAAoupt OTEAOIML, -oinv oreiAatpe €oTaAKout Imvy. o7rédXe oreiNov earaNke Inf. oredAewv oreAety orethae éoradkévat Par. ore\A@v oTeA@y oreiAas e€oTakkos A M. M., P. | Ind. ore\Aopat oTeAodpat éoradpat éoTe\AOuny éoreikaunv €ordApny Sub. oTe\A@pat oreiA@pat eoralpevos @ Opt. oreAoipny oredoiuny oretAaiuny €oTadpevos ein Imy. oréhAou oreiAae €orakco Inf. oreAXeoSat oreheioSat oreihagSat €oradSat Par. orehAdpevos oTeAovpevos oTeiAdpevos eoTadpevos 2 Future P. 2 Aorist P, Ind. oTaAnoopat €ordaAny Sub. o & oTAX@ Opt. gee oTadncoiny aradeiny Imv. ESS oTdAnst Inf. SEs oTradncerSae = oTaAnvat Par. oraAnodpevos oradrei>

, hee ee a tT ae

ory

ar) ————er reer

ss

97.

. fl Fi (piv) to » ahaa Gn second tenses, to appear).

_ Future A: Aorist A. 1Perf. Plup. A. 2 Perf. Plup. A, have mepayka mecnva ApS epnva errepayKetv erebnvew oa pnve mepayko mepyveo —— havotps, -oinv pyvarpe mepdyKotpe mervoupe BR gijvov meayke meyve aveiy pvat mepaykevat mepnvevat avav pnvas mepaykos mepnves ' M. M. M. P. 2 Aorist P. avodpat mepac pat 1 abe ednvaunv emeao pny epayny pyvepa mepacpevos & hava avoipnv pyvaipny mepao pévos aveinv privat mepavoo [einv pdyn% faveio Sat pyvacsat vmrepavSat gavnva gavovpevos hnvapevos mepac pevos aveis 1 Future P. 1 Aorist P. 2 Future P, pavencopa. eddavSnv davncopat avo 4 a harvIncoipny avdeinv gavnooipunv = 5 avSnre se HavIjccc3a avSnva pavnoeoSat havInadpevos av%eis pavnodpevos Nei (Air) to leave. Future A. 2 Aorist A. 2 Perf, Plup. A. Aeiipo AeAourra €Aurov €AeNolsrety iter Aira AeAolzr@ | Acirroupe Aetyroupe Airoupt AeAoisrorpe |Acire Aime AéAourre | Aeirew Nelyecy Aureiy AeAourrévat | Netra Actor Aur@v AeAourras M. M. M. P. Aelyopat AeActppac eAurrdunv eAchetupny Aim@par Achetppevos es) Aeoiunv Aurroiuny Achetppevos ein Aurrov AéeAevwo Neier Sar Auréo Sar AereihFar Aeupduevos Aurdpevos AeAetppevos 1 Future Pp. 1 Aorist P. Fut. Perf. AetPSjcopat eheifSnv AeAelyrowat AetHpra AePSnooipny AehSeinv AeAewipoiuny ‘ Aci@3yre . AechIjnorerBar ewpSjvac Aedeiers AechInodpevos Aerpeis AeAetypopevos

98 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 293. pimtw (pip) to throw, Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. 2 Perf. Plup. A. Ind. pinre pio eppipa Eppemrov eppupa eppipew Sub. pinta ibe eppipe Opt. ptmrouu pirpouut pivauut eppiouse Imy pimre pivvov eppipe Inf. pimrew pivew pirat eppipevar Par pinrev pio pipas eppipas M. P. M. M. M., P. Ind. pirropat pivopat . eppyspat eppimropny eppupauny epplupny Sub. pinreopat piipopua €pplppevos o % Opt. purroljny pioiunv piaipny aa einy | Imy. = pimrov pirat ppt | Inf. pimrecSat pivverSat pipacsat zpsiau Par pirrdp.evos pirypouevos pipdpevos €ppipevos af 3 es Fut. Perf. Ind. pipSjoopar eppiprny €ppiyvopat Sub. pipso Opt. 4 oS pipsnooiunv Bubelyy eppipotunv Imy. ap E pipsyre Inf. > 3 pipInoeo Sar pepsjvar eppipeosat Par. pepsinodpevos pupSeis éppirdopevos a. Less common are 2 Aor. P. épfidny, etc., 2 Fut. P. piphroua, etc. 294. dAAdcow (adda) to exchange. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. 2 Perf. Plup. A. Ind. a\Adoow aAdEo PAaxa 7ANacoov Hi AAaEa nrdrdyxetv Sub. dddAdoco aAdé@ MAA X@ Opt. aAdo coupe adAdEoune a@Aa€arpe mrAdAGxoupe Imy. 4ddaoce @DAaov ip \daxe Inf. ad\Adooetv adAdEew a\Adéat ndrAaxEvat Par. a\\doowy a\AdEwv aAAdéas nrd\axos M. P. M. M. M. P. Ind. dAAdooopat a\AdEopat prAAaypat “m\XAacodunv nrdakapny nAAaypny Sub. d\\dooe@pa a\Ad&@pat pMaypevos & ra) Opt. dAacooiuny ddra€oipny d\Xa€aipny nrAdaypevos einv Imy. «addAdooov a@ddakat mAAaso Inf. ahAdooerSar = dAAd Eco Sat ad\Adéac Sa NrdrdxSat Par addAacaodpevos addaSdpuevos ad\a€dpevos MAAaypEvos 2 Future P. 2 Aorist P. Ind. dAAaynoopa pAdyny Sub. 2.8 ahraye Opt. g ESE a@Aayncoipny addayeinv Imy. ers adayy se Inf. & 6G dayjoeosar adXaynvar Par. - a@\Aaynodpevos adAaysis © a. Less common are 1 Aor. P. 7AAdXAny, etc., 1 Fut. P. daAraxShooua

‘atu rist 1 Perf. Plup. A. 2 Perf, Plup. A. Telco i mémeKa mérosa trust er a éreioa ememreikety érremroiSetv on Treio@ _ wemeiKe Terolsw melooue meloatpe memeikoupe Memrot Soups ee 3 metoov memetke mémowde ss meioew metoat TeTELKeval memrouSevat - grelo@y meioas TETELKOS TETOLIOS Impf. M.P Future M. Aorist M. Perf. Plup. M. P. qreioopat not used TETrELO [LAL [emevodpny emerelopny Telo@pat memeLopEvos & mecooiuny = Fetoaipny - — merrevapevos inv meioae TémrELoro jmeioeo Sat meioacZat mereio Sat mecoopevos = reta'dyrevos | TETTELT LEVOS ~ Future P. Aorist P. Teco Snoopat €meioSnv wa TELTS@ S Teo Snoolny mevoseinv 4 8 TELoNTL ( Er = . mero S3noeo at mevo svat Teton OUEVOS mewoSels

a Poetic are 2 Aor. A. &riSoy, etc., 2 Aor. M. éridduny, ete.

edi€w (€Ftd) to accustom.

Future A, €31@ (from e3i-

-o@, 376)

€Scotpee

eSueiy

€SLOY

M. eStovpar

eStoiuny

éSteto Sat éSrovpevos P,

eStoSyoopat

eto Snooluny

eSuaSnoceoSae eStaInodpuevos

Aorist A,

See eltsioa >, , €310@ > / EeStoatpt WH, €SLOOV > , €Sioat wf €SLoas -M.

eiStodpnv €Yiowpat eStoaipny eSioar eSicagSat eSuodpevos Ps eiSioSnv eSto3@ €StaSeinv esiosnre eto Svat

_eSuoseis

Perf. Plup. A

eiStka XW!

ELSLKELY

%,/ €LSLK@ s e(Sikoune elke elSeKéevar

> / ELSUK@S

M. P. a, elsto pat %X,/

ELSLopny eiSuopevos ai & eiStopevos einv e(3co0 eiSioSat

S 4 elo pevos

100

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

297. Present System, | tidnpt (Je) to put. AcTIVE. | Mippte (PassIve). Present. | Imperfect. | Present. Imperfect. | S. ) ri-Sy-pe €-Ti-Sn-v » | Ti-Se-pae €-TU-Se-unv s| 2 | ri-Sn-s é-ri-2n-s, eri%ets| Ti-Se-cat, Tin | €-Ti-Se-co, -Bou ‘S| 3 | ri-Sn-o8 €-ri-9n, rises | Ti-Se-rau €-Ti-Se-T0 3 S| D.| ri-Se-rov €-Ti-Se-Tov Ti-3e-oSov €-Ti-Se-oZov S| 3 | ri-Se-rov €-T4-Se-THV Ti-Se-oSov €-Ti-S€-oSyv S| P.| ri-Se-pev e-Ti-Se-pev Ti-Se-peSa €-T1-Be-peSa 2 | ri-Se-re €-Ti-Se-rTe Ti-Se-oSe €-Ti-Se-oSe 3 | rt-Se-dor €-ri-Se-cav Ti-Se-vrat €-Ti-Se-vro | Present, Present. 8. TL-3@ Ti-S@-pae o| 2 Ti-I-s Ti-37 ‘S| 3 Ti-37 Ti-Syj-Tat Q| D. Ti-S-Tov Tl-S-O Sov = 3 Tl-Sij-TOV Ti-3-o Sov cAeSF Ti-3@-pev Ti-Ia-peSa 22 Tl-3-TE Tl-Sy)-o SE 3 TL-S@-Tt Ti-S@-vrat S. Ti-Sein-v Ti-Sel-unv OF Ti-Soi-unv 2 Ti-Sein-s Ti-Set-o Tt-Sot-o $|3 Ti-Sein Ti-Sel-To Tl-3ol-To BS D. Ti-Sein-rov OF Ti-Sei-rov Ti-Set-oSov —- TL-Sol-o Dov = 3 Ti-Seun-Tnv » Ti-Sel-rnv Ti-Sel-oSnv —- Tt-Boi-aSyv Sj P. Ti-Sein-wev —s- Ti-Sei-pev Ti-Sei-meSa —s-_ TL-Bol-peSa 2 Ti-Sein-TeE Ti-SeEl-TE _ Ti-Set-oSe Ti-Sol-oSe 3 Ti-Sein-cav —- Ti-Bele-v TL-Sei-vro Tl-Soi-vro S. ri-Seu Ti-Se-c0, Ti%ov $|3 Ti-3€-T@ Ti-Se-03@ $ D. Ti-Se-rov Ti-Se-o0 Sov &| 3 Ti-Sé-ToY Ti-3€-0S@v &| P. ri-Se-re Ti-Se-oSe Ss 3 Ti-S€-reacay Or Ti-Sé-cS@cay OF Ti-Sé-vT@V TL-Sé-0 Sev nin. Ti-Sé-vat ri-Se-oSau | N. Ti-Sels _ THSé-pevos 4 Ti-Seioa | TI-NE-pevn LS Ti-Se-v Ti-Sé-prevov &| G. Ti-SE-VTOS Ti-Se-EvOU Ry Ti-Selons Ti-Se-pevns

Mrppux (Passtvz).

| Imperfect.

81-d6-vrev

|. Present. | Imperfect. é-bi-da-v, edidouy | di-do-pae e~51-06-pny é-di-do-s, edidous | di-do-cat €-Oi-d0-c0, -dov e-Oi-do, edidov 6i-do-rat é-di-60-rTo | é-di-So-rov di-do-c ov €-01-d0-aov yp | e-8-8d-rnv 8i-So-c Sov e-51-86-o0 Snv een é-di-do-pev 1-86-peSa €=O1-8d-peSa * €-0i-o-re di-d0-a3e €-Oi-5o-a%e e-Si-So-cav 8i-So-vrat e-di-So-vTo Present. | Present. 61-58 - di-8d-pat 6:-80-s 51-30 6-50 di-8G-rat Ot-b@-Tor 5.-86-c Sov ~61-8a-Tov 61-86-a3ov 6i-0-pev 6-8d-peSa 1-d-Te 81-b-03e 8-84-01. : 6u-O-vrae 6u-Soin-v 81-doi-unv d1-Soin-s d.-Soi-o &:-doin 6:-doi-To - §i-Soin-rov or d:-doi-rov .-doi-c Sov ae aes 8:-doi-rnv d:-Sol-o Inv 6i-Soin-pev —-St-Soi-pev d:-Sol-peSa — Ot-8oin-re §=—_-St-Soi-re d:-doi-oSe ee fecrces du-Oote-vy 8:-doi-vro bi-dov di-do-co0, didou 6:-86-Tw 6:-86-03@ 6i-S0-roy di-d0-c Sov —— -6t-86-sav 6c-8d-c Sev - O680-re di-d0-0%e &:-86-recay or 6t-d6-c03@cav OF

61-86-c3@r

di-do0-c3at

d-dd-pevos d1-So0-evn

61-dd-pevov 8-d0-pévou d-S0-pévns

102 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [299 299. . : iornpt (ord) to set. ACTIVE. | . MIpDLE (PASSIVE), | Present. | Imperfect. | Present. | Imperfect. S. | orn-pe i-oTn-v i-ord-pat i-ord-pnv a a oe q 3,2 | torn-s (-oTN-S i-oTa-cat i-oTa-00, loro cr) cd ? ov | ‘S| 3 | Gorn-ot i-oTN t-oTa-Tat i-oTa-To a ro ad - S| D.| ord-rov (-oTd-ToV t-oTa-o Sov i-ora-oSov . o S| 3 | tora-rov i-ord-tnv i-oTa-o Sov i-ord-oSnv ? a S| P.| t-ora-pev (-oTa-pev i-oTd=meSa i-ord-peSa a cd 2 | i-ora-re t-OTa-TE (-oTa-oSe i-ora-oZe ca a 3 | t-ora-ou i-oTa-oay (-oTra-yrat i-ora-yTo | Present. Present. - S. i-ora i-oT@-pat c a c a“ g| 2 i-ory-s i-orn ‘S| 3 i-oTh i-oTn-TaL 8| D. i-orn-Tov i-otn-oSov = 3 i-ori-rov i-oTh}-oSov SES i-oT@=pev i-ora-peSa 2) 2 » tori-re i-ori-o%e 3 i-ora-o1 S i-oré@-vrat c ‘ c / S. t-orain-y i-orai-pyy 2 i-oTain-s i-oTai-o $13 i-orain i-oTai-To . / Lal lad ~ D. i-crain-tov oY i-crai-rov i-orai-oSov Ul “ 3 i-crawq-tnv — i-orrai-rnv i-orai-oSnv a Ss i-orain-pev _— i-orrai-ev i-crai-pe%a 2 i-orain-Te i-orat-re i-orai-oSe 3 i-orain-cav _—i-oraie-v i-crat-vro S. i-oTn i-oTd-o0, ioro s 3 c PA 14 , t-OTG-T@ l-OTa-OS@ a 5 7 $ D. (-oTa-TOV t-oTa-0 Sov =| 3 i-ord-Tav i-ord-o Sav 2 P ¢ o 5 . (-OTA-TE t-oTa-oSe€ S13 i-ord-recay Or i-ord-oS@cay Or i-oTd-vTev i-ord-oS@v Infin. i-ora-vat i-ora-oSat s|N. i-oras i-oTd-pevos c “= c , & i-ordoa _-ora-pevn 3 t-oTa-y t-7Ta-Evoy §| G. i-ord-ytos i-ora-pévou P 4 ag, i-oraons i-ora-evns

- Mippix (Passtvz).

Imperfect. | Present. | Imperfect. e-Oeik-vo-v delk-vd-pat €-Oerk-vd-pnv €-deik-vi-s Seik-vu-cat €-Oeik-vu-co €-Seik-vi Setk-vu-Tat e-delk-vu-To é-Seik-vi-rov Seik-vu-o Sov €-delk-vu-o Sov €-Seck-vi-rnv Seix-vu-o Sov €-Serk-vd ‘a Inv

| &-Oeik-vu-pev deuk-vi-pe%a €-Setk-vu-peSa €-Seik-vu-TE Seix-vu-o%e €-Seik-vu-o Se €-O€ik-vu-cay Oeik-vu-vrat €-Oelk-vU-VTO

Present. . | Present. Setkvio Serkvu@pat decks Setxvun Secxvun Secxvinrat Setxvonrov SetxvunoSov Secxvinrov Secxv’naZov derkvi@pev SerxvvapeSa Seuxvinre SetxvinoSe Secxvi@o detkvv@vrat Serxvvoupe Seckvvoipny

+» Sexviors Setkvvoto

Seckvvot Seixvvotro Sevkvvotrov Setxviorr Sov Sevxvvoirny SerxvvoiaSnv Seckvvotpev - SecxyvoipeSa Secxvvorre Serxvvoro Ze Secxviovev Setkvvowvro Seik-vi deix-vi-00 detk-vi-Te detk-vv-c Io Seik-vu-rov _ deix-vu-oSov Oetk-vi-Tov detk-vi-c3a@v Seix-vu-re deix-vu-o%e Oetk-yt-racay or deuk-v-02@cay Or Setk-vi-vrev detk-vU-7 Sav

Seik-vu-o Sat

derk-v-pevos detk-vu-evn

Setk-vu-pevov Seux-vu-péevov Setk-vu-pesas

104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [30 Second Aorist System, 301. 302. E | ri Inu (Ie) to put. Si8wpe (80) to give. : 2 Aoi. | Active. Middle. Active. -| Middle, S. 1! (€3yxa) €-Sé-unv éOwka) €-Od-yuny | s|2 | (€3nKas) €-Sov édwxas) €-Sov, | ‘S| 3 ree : €-Se-To edake) €-do-To | $| D.| &Se-rov €-Se-o ov €-o-Tov é€-do-oSov | S| 3 | &-Sé-rnv €-S€é-oSnv €-O6-Thv €-0d-o3nv S| P.| &Se-pev €-Sé-weSa €-Oo-pev e-d6-peSa | 2 | €e-re €-Be-o Se €-Oo-Te €-do-o3e 3 | €e-cay €-e-vTo €-0-cav €-do-vTo Li 4 S. | 3a 3@-pat 8a. d@-pat < 2 37-s 37 d@-s @ S| 3 | 87 Sy-Tae @ da-rat g| D. | Sy-rov 3n-o Sov da-Tov d@-oSov =| 3 | Si-Tov 37-7 Sov Sa-Tov d@-oSov > P, | 36-pev So-peSa d0-pev da-peSa é 2} 2 | S7-Te SH-oSe da-re ba-0Se 3 | 3é-c4 3@-vrat da-o4 d@-vrat S. | Sein-v Sel-unv, Soiunv | Soin-v Soi-pnv 2 | Sein-s Set-o oto doin-s doi-o 3 | Sein Set-ro otro | doin doi-ro D. | Sein-rov Set-oSov etc. | doin-rov doi-oSov | 3 | Seun-rqy Sei-oSnv Soun-rny dol-oSnv 2| P. | Sein-pev Sel-peSa doln-pev doi-peSa | 8|2 | Sein-re Sei-oe Soin-re Soi-oSe &| 3 | Sein-cav, or Sei-vTo doin-cay, or doi-vro 2] D.| sei-rop Sot-rov 3 | Sei-rny doi-rnv P.| Sei-pev’ Soi-pev 2 | Sei-re doi-re 3 | Seie-v Soie-v S. | Sé-s Sov dds dov $)3 | 3é-rw Sé-o3@ 86-Te 66-03@ $ | D.| Sé-rov Sé-o Sov 8d-rov 66-oSov = 3 | 3é-rev Sé-c Sev d6-Tev 66-c3ev &l P. | Sé-re Sé-a%e 86-re 66-03e RS 3 | 3é-rwoapr or S€é-c3@cav or | dd-rwoay Or 86-o3@cayv Or (| Sé-vrev S€é-0Sev dd-vTre@v 66-03 ev Infin, | %ei-vae | Sé-oSac Sov-vat 86-0Sa

Parti-| Seis, Seioa, 3é-v | Sé-pevos, n, ov | ciple. | Sé-vros, Setons

Se-pevov, ns

dovs, Sovea, b6-v

86-vros, Sovans

dd-pevos, 9, ov do-pevov, ns

[ 4 eo «

.

oe *

— bormpe (ori) to set.

Svovev

Active. “9 Perfect A. | 2 Pluperf. A. (€arnka) stand (€orHKeLv), e-du-s (€ornkas) (Eorhxets) v (€arnKe) (€ornKet)

€-Od-Tov €-oTrd-Tov €-ord-Tov

dv-tny €-oTa-Tov é-oTd-THy €-O0-pev €-oTa-pev é-ora-pev €-d0-Te €-o'Ta-Te €-oTa-TE é-d0-cay é-oTa-ct €-oTa-cav

2 Perfect A. uns 7 Y Sunroyv

Svnrov Svapev €-TO-pev dunre : dvect é-0TG-ot Ovoue €-oTain-v

y €-oTain-s

vou €-orain Svovroy €-orain-rov Suoirny €-oTan-Tnv Svorpev €-oTain-pev dvoure €-oTain-Te

€-oTain-cay, OY €-oTal-Tov €-oTai-Tnv €é-oTai-pes €-oTAl-TeE é-orate-v

€-o TG-Se €-OTA-T@ €-o'Ta-Tov €-OTA-T@V €-ora-Te é-oTd-Tecay Or €-OTA-VT@V

é-ord-vat

é-oTas, é-oT@oa, €-oTIS é-oT Gros, €-oTMONS

106 VERB-ELEMENTS, AUGMENT. [306

ELEMENTS OF THE VERB.

806. The elementary parts, which are combined in the different forms of the verb, are the augment, and reduplication ; the stem, original or modified ; the signs of voice, tense, and mode; the con- necting, vowels, and the endings. |

Augment.

307. The augment is the sign of past time. It belongs, there- fore, to the historical tenses of the indicative, the «mperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. It has two forms :

1.. Syllabic augment, made by prefixing e. 2. Temporal augment, made by lengthening an initial vowel.

Rem. a. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the

number of syllables : the temporal augment, because it increases the quah- tity (time) of the initial vowel.

308. The syllabic augment belongs to verbs beginning with a consonant: iw to loose, é-Avov, oré\Aw to send, é-crddynv, pirtw to throw, €-ppupa (43). sr” |

Rem. a. The eae augment assumes the stronger form of n, instead of ¢, in #-peddAov from péAAw to be about, 7-Bovdsuny from BovdAopar to wish, n-dvvapnv from dvvapat to be able. These verbs have also the com- mon form with e: €-yedXor, €-Bovdduny, €-Suvaunv. So in the Aor., 7-péA- Anoa Or €-pedAnaa, etc.

309. The temporal augment belongs to verbs beginning with a vowel: nrAavvov from éXAavvw to drive, dveidifov from dvewi~w to re- proach, “ixérevoa, from ‘ixered’w to supplicate, “wBpicInv from vBpi<o to insult. a becomes 9: iyov from dyw (a) to lead.

807 D. In Hm., the augment, both syllabic and temporal, is often omitted: Ave, Zaauve, exe, for Fave, HAavve, elxe. So also in lyric poets, and the lyric parts of tragic poetry; but seldom, if ever, in the tragic dialogue.

308 D. In Hm., initial A is sometimes doubled after the augment (40 D): @-aricoero (Alcona to pray). Similarly, w is doubled in &ppase learned, v in z-yyeoy were swimming, o in the verbs cebdw to drive and celw to shake, and 8 in the stem Se: @ooeva drove, &-d5e0e feared.

a. The other dialects have only « as augment in wéAAw, etc.; so also the Att. Trag. :

309 D. In Hd., the temporal augment is often omitted; the syllabic aug.

ment, only in the Plup———In the Dor., & by the temporal augment becomes a: dyov (24 D b).

ey

AUGMENT. i 107

‘The long vowels remain unchanged ; only a becomes 1: #2ouy from *aDhéw to contend.—«iw (a) to hear makes Giov (4). 310. Diphthongs take the temporal augment in the jirst vowel: qodavopny from aicIdvop:a. to perceive, wxreipa from oixteipw to pity, nvéndnv from avéw to increase.

But in av, o, the first vowel sometimes remains unchanged: it is usually so in ev, and always so in e, ov. Only ecixdfw to conjecture _ Sometimes has 7: yxaca.

q Rem. a. If a verb has the rough breathing, it is always retained in the augmented form. a :

311. Augment of the Pluperfect. The augment of the pluperfect

is applied to the reduplicated stem: é-Aedvxetv. But if the reduplicated stem begins with a vowel, it remains unchanged: oréAAw to send, Perf. éotadxa, Plup. éorddxew (not -noraAxew), oixéw to inhabit, Perf. dknxa, Plup. gjcev. But dxovw to hear, Perf. dxjxoa, has in the Plup. usually jxyxder.

» Rem. a. The augment of the Plup. is often omitted, even in Attic: AeAvKewv.

a 312. Syllabic Augment before Vowel-Initial. A few vérbs be- _ ginning with a vowel take the syllabic augnient: dyvvju to break, ' éaga. This with ¢ is contracted to a: é3i~w to accustom, <idiov (from «-eSiov). Here belong

ayvupe to break eaw to permit ddicxoua to be.taken éxito to accustom dvddvea to please eXicow to turn dvoiy to open . EAkw to draw ° dpdw to see ; erropat to follow ovpéw to make water epydfopa to work a%éo to push epra or éprru¢@ to creep aveopa to buy éotiaw to entertain

ex to have, hold : Here belong, further, the aorists efdov (aipéw to take, 450, 1) and eioa Let (431 D, 6). Cf. 2 Aor. of inus (€) to send (408, 1). % Of these, dpa to see and dy-olyw to open have both the syllabic and _ the temporal augment at the same time: éopwv, dv-ép£a. ; :

$11 D. Hm. #AfAaro for éAfAaro Plup. 8 8. of éaadve (era) to drive, Aphp- ero from épetd-w to support, apépe: for dpépe. from dpyuus (op) to rouse.

i 312 D. To this series belong also e¥Aw (A) to press, elpw (ep) to join, éptw (epi) to draw. Hm. forms égvoxde: from oivoxoéw to pour out wine, ivdavov and éfydavoy from ayddvw to please. In Hd., &yvums, EAxw,; Exouout, Exw are augmented as in Att.; avddvw ae Impf. Hvdavoy (Edvdavoy?), 2 Aor. €adov: the ‘rest usually (perhaps always) reject «, and take either the temporal augment (so GAloKoua, dpdw), or none at all (so dvolyw, édw, epydfouat, dw, wvéouat).

108 VERB-ELEMENTS. AUGMENT. [312

Rem. a. It is believed that all, or nearly all, of these verbs began originally with a consonant, F or o: dyvupmt, orig. Fayvysu, Aor. eFa€a, éa€a; ep, orig. cepa, Impf. exeprov, € eprrov, eipror.

b. Irregularly; éopratw to keep festival has the augment on the second yowel: éapragov instead of jopragov, ef. 190 f.

AUGMENT OF CompouND VERBS.

313. Compounds, consisting of a preposition and a verb, take the augment after the preposition: cishépw to bring in, eiséepov, mpos- dy to lead to, zposijyov. :

The prepositions é£, év, ovv recover their proper form before e: exreivw to extend, e&€rewov, éuPddAw to invade, évéBadXdov, ovddéyw to collect, cvvédega. Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before ¢: dmodépw to bear away, amrépepov. But wepi and zpo retain the final vowel: pd is often contracted with €: zpoPaivw to advance, mpovPatvov for mpoéPatvor.

314. Exc. In some cases the preposition has so far lost its separate force, that the compound verb is augmented as if it were simple: xa%evdo to sleep, éxa%evdov (yet also xa%nidov), xaSi¢w to sit, exaSifov. Cf. adinut (403, 1), xad%npuat (406, 2), ducrévvujs (440, 1). ahi

Some verbs have a double augment: dvéyouai to endure, nveryounr, dvop%da to set right, ivap%ovy; éevoydéw to annoy, nvaxdov». So, also, the two following, which are not in reality compound verbs: d.ardo (from Siara mode of living), édujrov; Svakovéo (from diaxovos servant), eOunkdvour.

315. Denominative compounds beginning. with a preposition (265). Some verbs, beginning with a preposition, are not compounds of a prepo- sition and a verb, but are derived from nouns already compounded : thus évavridopnat to oppose does not consist of ev and dyridoua, but is derived from the compound adjective ¢vavrios opposite.— erly augmented at the beginning: jvarvriovpny; poet. evaipw to kill, 2 Aor. ifvapov; perewpiCw to raise aloft (from peréwpos raised aloft), euerewptcov. More commonly, however, they are augmented after the preposition: éxxAnoid(o to hold an assembly (éxxdnoia), e€exAnoiaor 5 tmonteva to suspect (Umomros suspected), imamrevoy 5 Katnyopew to accuse (xarnyopos accuser), karnydpouv. Irregularly, wapavopéw to transgress law (from mapd-vopos contrary to law) makes rrapnydpour (as if from srap- avopew), mupowwew to act like a drunken man (map-owwos) makes émap@vovp.

316. Compounds of ei and dis. Verbs compounded with dvs zl have the augment after the adverb, when a short vowel follows it: dusdpearéw to be ill-pleused, Susnpéorovy (but dusrvxéw to be unfortunate édustvxour). The same thing occurs also, though seldom, in com- pounds of ed well: evepyeréw to be a benefactor, evepyérovy OY evnpyérour.

317. All other compound verbs are augmented at the beginning: asipew to be dispirited, nsvpouv.

Such verbs are prop- .

_ | - REDUPLICATION. — 109°

ae ree bist fs regen Reduplication.

a 818. The reduplication is the sign of completed action. It be longs, therefore, to the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect, through all the modes. It consists properly in a repetition of the initial

- sound.

319. Verbs beginning with a consonant repeat that consonant with ¢: Avw, A€e-AvKa. A rough mute becomes smooth in the redu- plication (65 a); Jvw to offer, ré-JIuxa. a

Exc. But when the reduplication-syllable is long by position, it omits the consonant and consists of « only. This applies to verbs beginning

a. with a double consonant © & Wr: Wedvdopa to lie, @Wevopar, not me-\revopat. *

b. with two consonants, unless they are a mute and liquid: aréd\\o to send, é-aradka, not o<-ocradxa; ypapea to write, yé-ypaha. But the stems xra and uwva make xéxrnuar possess and péeuvnuac remember. Cf. réentroxa am fallen (449, 4), rémrapa am spread (439,3).

ce. with yy, yA, and, in some cases, BA: yryvackw (yvo) to know, é-yvexa, NOt ye-yvaxa; BAacrave (Bdacr-e) to sprout, é-Bddornka, also Be-BXaornka.

d. with p: pinrw (pid) to throw, é-ppida, not pe-ppipa (43).

Nore. e. Instead of the reduplication, we find e in eiAnda from Aap- _ advo (AaB) to take, cihnxa from dAayydvw (Aax) to obtain by lot, cihoxa from déyw to gather, d:-ciheypar from dia-héyouar to converse (although eye to speak makes déAcypac) ; also in eipynka (fe 450, 8) have said, and, with rough breathing, in e{uapra: (uep) tt is fated.

eS Se ee eS ee ee a Le

_ 320. Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel (i. e. re- : peat it in quantity). Thus the reduplication in these verbs has the - same form as the temporal augment: édritm to hope, nArua, dppdu, to move, oppnke, azropéw to be at a loss, jrdpyKa, aipéw to take, ypnxa.

ge 318 D. The reduplication is regularly retained in Hm.; yet we find d¢xa- rou (for dedéxara, Pf. 3 P. of déxouat to receive), ciuat, eorat (orig. Feopat, Feorat, from evvuprto clothe), épxarat, 2pxaro or éépxaro (from épyw or édpyw to shut):——cf. Pf. ‘oi8a know in all dialects. The long a remains unchanged in the defective perfect ‘participles, adnxds sated (Aor. Opt. *adhoee might be sated), and *apnuevos distressed. In 2 Pf. tywya order, a is not made long. So in Hd., an initial vowel in some words remains short in the Pf.

319 D. Hm. has pepurwpévos soiled (for épsium.); but, on the other hand, tupope (for we-wope) from petpouon to receive part, écovpau (for oe-cvpat) from

to drive, like the verbs with initial p. In def-docxna and del-dia fear (409 D, 5), del-Beyuar greet (442 D, 3), the redupl. is irregularly lengthened. The Ion. ‘fas Teg. Gernot.

110 VERB-ELEMENTS. STEM. [32

321. Attic Reduplication. Some verbs, beginning with a, «¢, 0, followed by a single consonant, prefix that vowel and consonant: the vowel of the second syllable is then lengthened. This is called Attic reduplication.

The vowel of the third syllable is generally short: d\cidpw (arid) to anoint, dd-nrida, Gd-nAyspat; axove to hear, ax-nkoa (39), but Perf. Mid. #eovepat; dpvacw (opvx) to dig, dp-eptxa, dp-apvypat; €davvw (da) to drive, éh-nraka, €A-nAapat; ehéyx@ to convict, éh-nreypat (391 b), ete. Trregularly, éyeipw (eyep) to wake has éyp-nyopa, the last letter of the stem being repeated, as well as the first two; but the Perf. Mid. is regular, €y-TyEppau-

322. E as reduplication before a vowel-initial. The verbs mentioned in 312 have e for the reduplication also, and contract it with initial e to ev: ayvume to break (orig. Fayvust, Perf. reraya), aya, eSif@ to accustom, ei%ixa (from e-eSvxa). opdw to see makes éwpaxa; av-olyw to open, av- éwya OF dv-e@yxa. The stem ex (not used in the Pres.) makes Perf. é-ovxa am like, appear, Plup. é-@xew. Similarly the stem «3 or 73 makes el-w%a am accustomed.

323. In compound verbs, the reduplication has the same place as the augment.

Stem and Changes of Stem.

824. Stems are named, according to their final letters, vowel- stems, consonant-stems, mute stems, liquid stems, etc. 3

Verbs are named according to their stems: thus mute verbs, liquid verbs. Those which have vowel-stems are commonly called pure verbs.

The original stem may be modified in form by various changes. They are especially frequent in the formation of the present system. In reference to these changes, we distinguish the following

321 D. In Hm., more verbs receive the Attic redupl., and sometimes with- out lengthening the vowel after it: GA-dAnuat wander from aAd-ouat to wander, daA-ardnrnuce am distressed (cf. Hd. ddavnrdw to be distressed), tip-npa am fitted from épaploxw (ap) to jit, ép-éprmro from épelaw (epi) to overthrow, 63-édvera (st. odvs, Aor. ddvcduny, 55, became wroth), dp-wpa am roused from dpyups (op) to rouse, etc. and with inserted v, éuy-huvea from jud-w to bow the head; also the defective perfects, dv-hyode issues (or assued), éx-er-hvode is (or was) close upon. For ax-ax-pévos sharrened, see 46 D.——H4. has irreg. ap- alpnea from aipé-w to take.

$22 D. For ef-wSa, Hm. has also @-wSa (Hd. only €wSa): the orig. stem was perhaps oF, Pf. e-oFrw9-a (25).——Further, Hm. has éA2-w (FeAm) to cause to hope, Pf. Zoama hope, Plup. éAmewv, and Epdw (Fepy, Eng. work) to do, Pf. Eop- ya, Plup. edpyetv.

- CHANGES OF STEM. 111

Fs ce ; 325. I. First Cuass (Stem-Class). The stem appears without change in the present: Av-w, Tysd-w (contr. Tyo), pev-w to remain, - Tpér-w to turn, dy-w to lead. A a

_ 826. II. Szconp Crass (Protracted Class). These lengthen a short a, t, v of the stem to y, «, ev respectively. In most of them, _ the short stem appears only in the 2 Aor. and 2 Fut. |

Here belong a number of mute stems, as r7x-o (rdx) to melt, dein-o (Aim) to leave, peiy-w (iy) to flee ; also a few stems in «, which lose this vowel in the Pres. by 39: thus 3¢-a (for Yev-w, st. 3%) to run, xé-@ (xv) to pour.

Some verbs of other classes (especially cl. 5, 437 N) have, in particular tenses, a similar lengthening of the short vowel: AayBdvea (AaB) to take, Fut. An Wopat (= AnB-copat) ; Epyopar cl. 9 (epx, AVS) to come, Fut. edev- copa (= eAevS-copat).

327. Ill. Turp Cuass (Zau-Class). The stem assumes 7 in

the present. Here belong many stems ending in a labial mute

. (x, B, >): Tiat-w (riz) to strike, kadimt-w (KavQ) to cover, Bémr-w (Bid) to dip, dye.

Rem. a. Whether the stem of these verbs ends in zm, or f, or ¢, can- not be determined from the Pres, It may be ascertained by referring to the second aorist, if this is in use, or by referring to other words con- nected with the verb in derivation; e. g. to the 2 Aor. é-rim-nv, é-Bap-ny, or the noun kadv8-n cabin, cover.

328. IV. Fourrs Crass (Jota-Class). The stem assumes « in the present. This occurs in palatal, lingual, and liquid stems: it _ always occasions euphonie changes (see 58-61).

; a. Palatals with « produce oo (later Attic tr): pvdAdoo-w (for - @vdoxi-w) fo guard, réco-w (for tay-w) to arrange, topdoo-w (for ~ _ ——s- Tapaxi-w) to disturb.

"© ~~ gow (rrw) may arise from a lingual, and even from a labial stem: see 429-30.

Rem. The final consonant must be determined as above (327a). In some instances, however, it can only be ascertained that the stem ends in a palatal, or lingual mute. This is shown in the future, which has £ from a palatal stem, and ow from a lingual.

WD Oe ree ee ee ee a Ne ng Pe ee

328 D. b. Acol. cdw for ¢w, frequent in Theoc. (56 D): cuptodw for cupi(w to pipe. In Dor., most verbs in (@ have stems in y: Koul(w to take care of, Aor. éxduioa (for e-Kouid-on), but Dor. éxdusta (for e-kopry-ca). In Hm. too, - these verbs have y much oftener than in Att.: so in dAamd{w to lay waste, bait to divide, évapl{w to slay, strip, uepynpl(w to debate in mind, worcullw te war, orupert(w to push, ete.

112 VERB-ELEMENTS. CLASSES OF VERBS. [328

b. 8 (less often y) with « produces €: dpdé-w (for ppadi-w) te tell, xpat-w (for kparyi-w) to cry.

Rem. Here also the Fut. will show whether the stem ends in a lingual (d), or a palatal (y). For ¢ arising from 8-1, see 429.

Norr. The “following have stems in yy: KAd¢-w (kdayy) to makea - loud noise, maf{-w (wrayy) to cause to wander, cadrmif-w (cadmiyy) te sound the trumpet.

c, A with « produces AA: Bddd-w (for Badt-w) to throw.

Only dpeih-o (for opchi-w) to be obliged follows the analogy of d, being distinguished thus from 6@éAA-@ (also for ofeAt-w) to increase.

d. vy and p With c transpose it to the preceding syllable, where > it unites with the stem-vowel: daiv-w (for pavi-w) to show, pdeip-w (for Jepi-w) to destroy. If the stem-vowel is « or v, it becomes long (33): xptv-w or kpivi-w) to distinguish, cip-w (for cvpi-w) to drag.

e. To this class ees further two vowel-stems in av: xai-w (for kav-t-a by 39) to burn, and «Aai- (for kav-t-w) to weep, The Attic, however, uses the forms ki, cdo (39a).

329. V. Firra Crass (Nasal Class). The stem assumes vy, or a syllable containing y, in the present: a. vi pid-v-w to saa ce Kapu-v-w to be weary. b. ay (alone) : dpapt-av-w to err. dv (with inserted nasal): pavJ-cv-w (n2.9) to learn, \opp- dv-w (AGB) to take, Nayx-dv-w (Ady) to obtain by lot. Rem. ay is used alone, if the stem-vowel is long by nature or posi-

tion: if otherwise, with an inserted nasal (v, pw, y according as it precedes a lingual, labial, or palatal mute).

Ri ies ik-V€-Olal to come.

d. vu: deék-vu-us to show; after a vowel, wv: oBé-vvv-m to extinguish.

330. VI. Srxra Crass (Inceptive Class). The stem assumes ox in the present, sometimes with a connecting t Lz dpé-ox-w to please, evp-iok-w to find.

Rem. a. This class is called inceptive, because some verbs which be-

long to it have the sense of beginning or becoming: ynpd-ox-w to grow old,

c. Hm. has etaAw (€A) to press (not eAAw). But instead of épeiAw he com mony uses the form 6péAaAw. In Hm., some other vowel-stems annex 4, see 484 D.

$39 p,m hammer of stems assume va, chiefly in Epic, see 443 D.

- orner CHANGES OF THE STEM. | 115

831, VIL. Srventa Crass (Epsilon-Class). A number of stems B's assume « in the present: dox-<-w to seem, think, Fut. 86& (=Sdox- _—-«Gw) 5 purt-e-w another form for pirrw (pup) cl. 3, to throw.

Ss - Many verbs of other classes annex « in particular systems to the stem, original or modified: pay-opa cl. 1, to fight, Aor. é-payeroduny 3 xaip-w ~ (xap) el. 4, to rejoice, Fut. yatpy-ocw (335). This is the case especially

with many verbs of the first, fifth, and sixth classes——Similarly, a

few stems annex o: dp-vuse to swear, Aor. Inf. dud-ca. And a few,

chiefly poetic, annex a, see 448 D.

332. VIII. Ereuru Crass (Reduplicating Class). The stem as-

-sumes a reduplication in the present. This consists of the first

consonant repeated with 1: so tu-rpd-w to bore, ri-Iy-pe (Se) to put (65 a).

Consonant-stems of this class omit the stem-vowel (339): yiyvoua (for yi-yev-opar, st. yev) to become, tikrw (for ri-rek-@, Tirkw, 44a, st. Tex) to beget, bring forth. Nearly all vowel-stems have the ju-form. In ine (= t--pt, st. é) to send, the breathing is repeated as if it were a con- sonant. totnps (ora) to set is for ot-orn-ps (63) Lat. sisto. ioxo (cex) to hold, another form of éyo cl. 1, is for icyw (65 e), and that for ot-ox- (63): with this are connected dum-toxvéopat to have on and tr- trxveouat to promise, which belong to the fifth class. The Attic re- duplication is seen in dvivnus (= ov-ovn-pu, st. ova) to profit.

Rem. a. Seyeral reduplicating stems are referred to the siath class, because they assume cx, aS yi-yva-oK-w (yvo) to know.

333. IX. Nintu Crass (Mixed Class). This is added to include the verbs in which different parts are derived from stems essentially different: ép-w to bear, Fut. oi-cw, Aor. jveyx-ov.

* - Other Changes of the Stem.

The stem is further modified in different parts of the verb, chiefly

___ by vowel-changes. |

i 334. I. Varration (of vowels, 25). |

a. a, ¢, o may be interchanged: rpéf-w to nourish, 2 Aor. é- apac-ny, 2 Perf. ré-rTpod-a.

This occurs chiefly in consonant-stems of one syllable, which have a liquid before or after the stem-vowel. Verbs which make this inter- change, have a in the 2 Aor. of all voices, o in the 2 Perf. But liquid stems of one syllable have a also in the 1 Perf. and the Perf. Mid. : oreA- he to send, é-crad-ka, &-orad-pat. ;

; b. «, arising from %, is exchanged for o in the 2 Perf.: Actr-w (Aim) to leave, €-Aour-a. _ @. eis rarely exchanged for ¢: air-véw (mer) to fall.

114 VERB-ELEMENTS. CHANGES OF STEM. [334

-d. Cases which stand by themselves are pyy-vuye (pay) to break, 2 Perf. ¢j-jwy-a (25); st. rpay, 2 Aor. &rpdy-ov, Pres. rpwy-@ (for rpny-o) to gnaw ; st. 3 or n3, 2 Perf. ci-w3-a am accustomed.

335. II. Lenernentne (of vowels. Protraction, 28).

1. Vowel-stems lengthen a final short vowel, wherever it is fol- lowed by a consonant, and hence, in general, everywhere out of the present system. The short vowels pass into the corresponding long piré-w, Fut. pidr7-cw, dyAd-w, Aor. é-d7A0-ca. But & becomes a only after ¢, 1, p, elsewhere 4: Iypd-w, Perf. re-Ijpa-xa, Tysd-w, Aor. Pass. €or. YV.

Exc. a. The stem xpa (xpd to give oracles, xpdopar to use, kixpnur to lend) is lengthened to xpy: xpnoe, ¢xpnoduny. So too ti-rpd-w to bore, érpnoa. On the other hand, axpod-opa to hear makes dxpoaco-pat, ete.

For many vowel-stems which retain the short vowel, see 419.—— For pu-forms of vowel-stems, we haye the following special rule :

336. 2. Mi-forms lengthen the final stem-vowel a. in the Pres. and Impf. Act., but only in the Sing. of the Indic. : t-orn-pe (ord) to set, e-Seixvi-s 2 Sing. Impf. Act. of deixvi-ps to show. b. in the 2 Aor. Act., Ind., Imyv., and Inf.: or7-% 2 8. Imy., dro- Spa-va 2 Aor. Inf. of drodi-dpd-oxw to run away. Cf. 400 n.

337. 8. Liquid stems lengthen the short stem-vowel in the first

aorist system, as a compensation for the omitted tense-sign o. The

vowels are changed as in pure verbs, except that « becomes «i: 7re- paiv-o (repay) to bring to an end, é-épav-a, datv-w (dav) to show, é-pyv-a, pev-w to remain, &pew-a, kptv-w («piv) to distinguish, €-Kpiv-a, dpidv-w (apiv) to ward off, npiv-o.

338. 4. a is generally lengthened in the 2 Perf. of consonant-stems : kpdg-w (Kpity) to cry, Ké-Kpa&y-a, paiv-w (par) to show, ré-pyv-a. But be- fore aspirates it sometimes remains short: ypad-w to write, yé-ypad-a, Tdco-w (Tay) to arrange, ré-rax-a.

339. III.. Omission (of vowels, 38): yi-yv-opoe (for snc eohiits

st. yev) to become, axov-w to hear, 2 Perf. dx-yxo-a (for ax-nxov-a, 39).

835 D. In Dor., the lengthened form of a is &@ after all letters (29 D): ért- padnv, loraipt, rad, Epaiva, répava. In Ion., a@ is lengthened to y, even after €, t, p: ihoopon (idouat to heal), edppijivat (ebppatyw to gladden). Yet édw to per- mit makes & (not 7): édow, elaoa. The stem ta to get (chiefly poetic, Pres, not used) always appears as wa: mwacoual, eraicduny, méemaGuat possess.

336 D. b. For stem-vowel lengthened in the (uncontracted).2 Aor. Sub of pi-forms, see 400 D i.

888 D. In Hm., the 2 Pf. Par. Fem. sometimes keeps the short vowel, when it is lengthened in other forms of the tense: apnpds jitted, Fem. d&papvia, Ind. &snpa. (apapioxw), rednrds blooming, Fem, redaavia (SdAAw).

a ts

_ PASSIVE-SIGN. TENSE-SIGNS. = 1s 840. IV. Transposition (of vowel and liquid. Metathesis, 57):

st. Suv to die, 2 Aor. é-Jdiv-ov, 2 Perf. 1 P. ré-Svd-nev, Pres» Ivy-

-oxw (335). |

841. V. Aspiration (of labial or palatal mute). This occurs in

some second perfects (387 b): wéur-w to send, ré-ropd-a, taco-w (ray)

to arrange, Té-Tiix-a..

- For aspiration in Perf. Mid. 3 P., see 392. For transfer of aspiration

in trpep-@, Fut. Spéyro, and the like, ' see 66 c.

342. VI. Addition of o (to a vowel-stem). ‘This occurs in the perfect niddle and first passive systems of some pure verbs, especially such as retain a final short vowel (419-21): teAé-w to complete, re- TéAeo-pat, aKov-w to hear, 7Kovo-Jyv.

For v omitted at the end of a few liquid stems, see 433.

Passive-Sign.

$43. The active and middie have no special voice-sign, being dis- tinguished from each other by their different endings. But the pas- Sive voice affixes to the stem a passive-sign, Je in the first passive system, and « in the second.

In both systems, the ¢ is contracted with a following mode-sign: Av- Sa@pev for Av-Se-w-pev, oradeiny for crad-e-in-v. And in both, the e¢ be- comes 7, when a single consonant follows it: éAvSn-v, EdvSn (for eAvSn-7), oradn-couar; but 3 P.Imy. Av3é-vrwv, Par. Fem. oradcioa (for orade- voa), Par. Neut. AuvZév (for Avye-y7). ‘

Tense-Signs.

' 844. In some of the tense-systems, the consonants x and o are added to the stem, as tense-signs. Thus the tense-sign is « in the jirst perfect system: XéAv-x-a, eAcAV-K-eLv. o in the first aorist system: €Av-c-a, éAv-o-dynv. o in the future of all voices: Av-c-w, Av-c-opat, AVIA-c-opar. o in the future perfect: dedv-c-op.a.. 345. But a liquid before o was a combination of sounds which the Greek generally avoided. Hence

343 D. In the uncontracted 2 Aor. Sub. Pass., Hm. often Bigthens etoe (in 3 Sing. also to 7): dapel-ere for (Sayé-nre) "Sanire ye may be ¢ overcome gavh-n for (pavé-n) pavh he may appear.

4 844 D. In Hm., the tense-sign o is often doubled after a short vowel: whoow = dytiow Fut. of aviw to achieve, éyéracoa for éyéAdoa Aor. of a the p to laug

__ For Doric Future with oe as tense-sign instead of ¢, see 877 D.

116 « _VERB-ELEMENTS. MODE-SIGNS. [345

1. Liquid verbs, in the futwre system, take ¢ instead of o: paiv-é-w, contracted dave, instead of dav-c-w, from uivw (piv).

2. Liquid verbs, in the first aorist system, lengthen the stem- vowel in compensation for the omitted o: ¢yv-a instead of «-dar- o-a. Tor the consequent change of vowels, see 337.

Rem. a. « was first used in pure verbs to separate the vowels: éorn- k-a for €éorn-a. Homer uses it only in such verbs. But it was after- wards extended, as a tense-sign, to liguid and to lingual verbs.

b. ¢ in the Future of liquid verbs appears to have been originally inserted for the sake of euphony: dav-e-ow for dav-ow. The o after- wards fell away between the two vowels (64), which were then subject to contraction.

Tense-Stem. The elements already described, so far as they are found in any tense, form its tense-stem. The augment, however, being confined to the indicative, is not considered as belonging to the tense-stem.

Connecting Vowels and Mode-Signs.

346. In most cases, the endings are not applied directly to the tense-stem, but vowels are interposed between them. ‘These, for the most part, are mere connecting vowels: they serve to facilitate pro- nunciation ; when not required for this purpose, they are sometimes dispensed with. But the subjunctive is always distinguished by the long vowels y, w: the optative, always by the vowel +. These vowels, therefore, are properly called mode-signs.

MopeE-Siens.

347. Subjunctive. The Sub. has o before a nasal (, v), elsewhere 9: Av-w (for Av-w-p1), AV-w-or (for Av-w-vor), Ado-y-oFe.

345 D. In Hm., several liquid verbs have o as tense-sign: Fut. dp-cw,. Aor. &p-oa (3p-vuus to rouse), Exvpoa (kup-€w to fall in with), Exeroa (KéAAw to drive), éxepoa (kelpw to shear), Yéprouct (Sép-ouar to grow warm), pipaw (Aor. Sub. of @tp-w to mingle), Aca (ctAw to press), and the defective dmrdéepoa took away. The first four of these are found also in Attic poetry.

In Aeol., o of the 1 Aor. is assimilated to a preceding liquid: so in Hm., in one word, &pedAa (= whed-ca) for Sera, Pr. dpeAdrw to increase.

347 D. Hm. often has o, e¢, instead of w, n, as mode-signs-of the Sub. ; but the Sing. and 3 Pl. of the active voice (and of the Aor. Pass., 354) have only @, 7. 4

This formation occurs especially in aorists of the «i-form and in the 2 Aor Pass. (395); the preceding vowel is then usually lengthened (400 Di, 348 D): 5é-opey for (86-wpev) Suev, Sel-oucu for (Sé-wuor) SGucu, orh-erov (for ord-nrov) | or Arov, Sauel-ere for (Sape-nre) Saujre.

~ >

“

he - QONNECTING VOWEIS sg 117

Rem. a. The « subscript of the 2, 3 Sing, Act. and the 2 Sing. Mid. ‘comes from the original endings ou, 1, and oat.

b. The mode-signs of the Sub. were formed by lengthening o and e,

the usual connecting vowels of the Ind. Hence the Sub. never has a con- necting vowel in addition to its mode-sign.

348. Optative. The mode-sign of the Opt. is 1: Avoi-pt, Avoai-pyv. Before active endings, «y is often used instead of 1. This is always the

case in the Sing. of the passive aorists and of pu-forms, and frequently in

their Dual and Plur.: AvSein-v, didoin, oradei-re OY oTadein-re. It is also frequently the case in contract forms and in the Perf. Act.: tipaoin-p, contr. .riu@n-v, mero.3oin-v.

Before y in the 3 Plur. Act., ve is always used.

Rem. a. The mode-sign of the Opt. is usually joined to the tense-stem by a connecting vowel: it is always so, when the tense- stem ends in a consonant. «forms a diphthong with a preceding vowel: Av-ot-p1, Avo-ai-nyVv.

ConNECTING VOWELS.

349. 1. The jirst aorist system has a throughout: Avo-a-ys, Avo-a-oSa0.

Exc. a. a is changed to ein the Ind: Act. 3 Sing.: @vo-e, to o before v, in the Imy. Act. 2 Sing.: Ado-or, to a in the Imy. Mid.

2 Sing.: Ado-a:; also in the Inf. Act.: Ado-a. All these forms omit

the ending, as does also the Ind. Act. 1 Sing.: @Avo-a (for eAvo-a-v),

Rem. b. In the irregular, but more common, forms of the Opt. Act., 2 Sing. ev-a-s, 3 8. ci-e, 3 P. ei-a-v, the connecting vowel of the Ind. is thrown in after the mode-sign 1, in consequence of which the preceding a is changed to e.

350. 2. The perfect active indicative has a: NedAvK-a-re. But the 3 Sing. has «: AéAvk-e.

The same short vowels are frequent in the Sub. of the first aorist system: vepeoho-ere for veweoho-nre (veuerd-w to resent), epdap-ecn for (epdap-nar) epdy (epdarroua: to touch upon). These forms are often liable to be confounded with those of the Fut. Ind.——lIn other tenses this formation is less frequent. It is seldom or never found in the Pr. Sub. of verbs in .

348 D. Hm. almost never has cy in the dual and plural. In contract verbs, in is rarely used by Hm., never by Hd.

349 D. In Hm., the 1 Aor. sometimes has the connecting vowels o, ¢ (352) like the 2 Aor.: fe, itov came (txw), €Bhoero went (Baivw), édbcero went under (dt). So especially in the Imv.: dpceo, dpoev rise (Spvuut), Béere lead (&yw), oige bring (pépw),Acéco lay thyself, meddooeror bring near (werd (w).

850 D. In Dor., the Sing. of the Pf. Ind. may have the connecting vowels of the Pres.: AcAvx-w for AéAuK-a, AcAvK-ers, -er (the forms AcAvK-ns, -n are

_ probably incorrect) for AéAuk-as, -e.

118 .VERB-ELEMENTS. CONNECTING VOWELS. [851

851. 3. The pluperfect active has «, but in the 3 Plur. com- monly ¢: éAeAvc-ei-v, eeAVK-€-cay.

Rem. a. éAcAvcecay ought, in strictness, to be divided eheAvk-eca-v(r), cf Lat. pepend-era-nt for pepend-esa-nt. oa here belongs to an old Impf. of eiui = eo-pu, Lat. (¢)s-wm, Impf. era-m, for esa-m. In the other numbers and persons of the Plup., o was dropped, and e. formed by con- tracting the vowels. The Old Attic » for ew and « (1, 3 Sing.) was also formed by contraction from ¢(c)a(v) and e(c)e.

352. 4. The other forms which have a connecting vowel, take

o or «: thus a. The indicative has o before a nasal, elsewhere ¢: Av-o-pev, Avo-ov-or (for Avo-o-var), AcAVvo-e-o-Fe.

In the Pres. and Fut. Act., o in the 1 Sing. becomes w (on account of the omitted ending yu); « in the 2, 3 Sing. takes « (derived from the original endings ou, rt) : Av-w, Avo-eu-s.

b. The optative has 0: Acdvx«-or-pt, AvInG-ol-uyv.

ec. The imperative follows the same rule with the indicative: Av-6-vtwv, Av-e-oe. |

d. The infinitive has <, which becomes « in the Pres., Fut., and 2 Aor. Act.: Ava-e-v, Aghuxzé-vat, Ad-e-o Far.

e. The participle has 0: d¥-o-vres, Avo-ov-car (for Avo-0-verat).

353. 5. Forms without Connecting Vowels. There are no con- necting vowels a. in the perfect and pluperfect middle, the aorist passive, and the perfect participle active. ! b. in pt-forms (of the present, second aorist, and second per- fect systems).

351 D. Hd. has in the Plup. Act. 1 Sing. ea for e-y, 2 8. ea-s for ei-s, 3 8. ee for et, 2 Pl. ea-re for etre, 3 Pl. only eva-v. Hm. has 1 §S. ea, 2S. ea-s (also contracted 7-s), 3S. e or ei-y (contracted from ec, ee-v): éredhmen was astonished, éredhreas, SeSerrvjxew he had feasted. The uncontracted 3 Sing. is seen only in #See, comm. 73n he knew. In two or three words, Hm. forms a Plup. with the connecting vowels o, ¢, after the analogy of the Impf.: very-o-v (also qydéy-ex) Plup. of tvwya command, éu€un-o-v Plup. of péunna | bleat, éyéywr-e (also éyeydév-ec) Plup. of yéywva shout. Still more irreg. are 8 Pl. ivdy-evy, yeyor-evy (contracted from -eo-v),

352 D. Hm. and Hd. often have ée:-y for e7-y in the 2 Aor. Inf. Act.: Baad-éet-v to throw, id-éei-v to see.

The Dor. (Theoc.) often has e-s for e:-s in the Ind. 2 Sing., and e-y for es in the Inf.: cuplod-e-s for cvpi¢-e-s art piping, deld-e-y for Get5-ei-v to sing. The accent is the same as in the Attic forms. Rare is Dor. 4-v for ef-y in the 2 Aor. Inf.

ES ie MINORS . 119

-

Endings.

854. There are two series of endings, one for the active voice,

___ the other for the middle. The passive aorist has the endings of the

active; the passive future, those of the middle.

* The endings of the finite modes are called personal endings, because they have different forms for the three persons.

355. Invicative. The personal endings of the Ind. are

Active. Middle. Principal tenses. Historical. Principal. Historical. ah ama ag v [pe] pat pny 2. s [ou] S oat oo 3. ot [tt] —|7] TOL TO Ly, 2s TOV TOV otov oJov 3. TOV Vv oJov odnv P.1. pe [pes] pev [pes | peda peta 2. TE TE ote ode 3. (v)ou [vee] v [vr] VOL vTO

or cay [cavr]

The endings in brackets are earlier forms, not used in Attic Greek, but found in other dialects or kindred languages. For change of ru, yrt, to ot, (v)o1, see 62: for change of » to v, 77: for dropping of a final 7, 10, The forms ps, ot, Tr, vre were weakened in the ‘historical tenses, on account of the augment at the beginning, to p, s, 7, vr. In the middle they were extended to pat, oar, rar, vrac; of these, again, the last three were weakened in the historical tenses to oo, ro, vro..

355 D. a. The Dor. retains the earlier forms 7: for o1, vr for (v)o1, wes for wey. It has ray for rv, way for pny, oSav for cSnv (24D b). Thus ridnr, Avoyti, AvowyTt, AcAtKavTt, AUooues, eAvduay, édcAdoSay, for TiSyo1, Atovois Avowst, AcAdKAot, AVoomev, CAvduny, EAcCALTI HY. | b. Hm. sometimes has roy for rny and o8ov for o&ny in the third person ty dual of the historical tenses. =: ce. Hm. often has v for cay in the Aor. Pass. and in mi-forms: Adde-v i (orig. eAvSe-vr) for 2AvSy-cay, eora-y (orig. erra-vr) for Zorn-cav.

d. The poets often have weoSa for peda: Avd-peoSa for Avd-peda.

e. Hm, often has érai, dro for vrai, yro in the Pf. Plup. Mid. This occurs chiefly after consonants (cf. 392), but sometimes after vowels: Sedaf-wrar (Saio- uot to divide), BeBAh-aro (BdAAw to throw). Also in the Pr. Impf. of Ketuaz to lie, ja to sit: Ké-arat, ef-wro. Hd. uswally has arat, aro in the Pf. Plup. Mid., even after vowels, and often in the Pr. Impf. of wi-forms; a preceding - aor becomes e€: oixé-ara for @xn-vrat (oixé-w to inhabit), riSé-arcu for Tide- vrai, édvvé-aro for eddya-vro (S’va-nai to be able). The endings ara, aro do not occur after a connecting vowel. Such forms as rn8-é-ara: for Khd-o-vrau 3 = a for, éyev-é-aro for éyév-o-vto they became, which are found in most - editions of Hd., are probably incorrect.

_

ae

he

120 VERB-ELEMENTS, ENDINGS. |356

356. a. The endings of the three singular persons are clearly seen to be appended pronouns, J, thou, that: thus pu, ot, r1, the original forms, correspond to .the personal stems pe, oe (231), and the demonstrative stem ro of the article.

The ending oa for s is found only in a few w-forms: éedy-o8a thou saidst.

b. The ending of the first person plural is also used for the jirst per- son dual. A special ending peSov, for the middle first person dual, occurs only in Hom. I]. W, 485, Soph. El. 950 and Phil. 1079, beside two instances cited by Athenaeus.

tyv is sometimes used for rov in the second person dual of the histori- cal tenses.

c. The ending cay is found in the Plup. Act. and Aor. Pass. ; also in juw-forms: éAeAvKe-cav, EAVSy-cay, eriSe-cav.

357. SuBsuNCTIVE AND Oprative. The Sub. and Opt. take the personal endings of the Ind. The Sud. has the endings of the principal tenses: the Opt., those of the historical tenses.

Exc. a. The 1 Sing. Opt. Act. takes pu: Avor-pr; unless iy is the mode-sign. In that case, the 1 Sing. has v: Av%ein-v; and the 3 Plur. has cav: doin-cay, or Sdoie-v.

358. Imerrative. The personal endings of the Imy. are

Active. Middle. Set a 3. TH 2. co 3. ow D.. * - roy “ TwV “ odor « odwv Potrero “ rwoay “ode “« oSwoav Or vTwv or odov

359. Inrmitive. The infizitive-endings are Act. v after «, elsewhere var: Aveu-v, AeAVKE-Vau, Ausijevat. Mid. oda: veccisondteu, AvIjnoewo Fat.

857 D. In the Opt., Hm. and Hd. always have dro for vro: -yryvol-aro for yiyvoi-vro ; though in the Sub. they always have yrat: yyve-vra. In the 2 Sing. Sub., Hm. often has oSa for s: éSéAnoda for éSeAns (€8¢Aw to wish); rarely so in the Opt.: kAatoSa for kratos (KAatw to weep).

358 D, The endings trwcay and cSwoay do not occur in Hm., and the Attic drama. Even in Attic prose they are less frequent than yrwy and oSy.

359 D. For v or va, Hm. often has pevou OF pev (also Dor.), with the accent always on the preceding syllable: méurew or weuméwevar or meuméuer to send. Hm. never uses wey after a long syllable or va: after a short one: hence orhme- vot OF OTHVAL, never ornuev, Sauhwevat or SaeFivar Aor. Pass. to be subdued, never daunuey, Errdmevar Or Eorapev, never éordvar. Yet we have iéva: as well as Twevat, Tuev to go.

In Dor., the Inf. of the Pf, Act. is sometimes bers like the Pres.: AcAuns civ for AeAuKévat.

121°

t “% see 207, 214-6. For the feminine endings (v)oa, wa, see 214 a,

___ Eypines Orrrep or Arrerep.

361. 1. The active endings ju, o1, 9 are dropped after a vowel: Ava-o — (for Avo-o-ps and Avo-w-pr), AcAvK-e (for AeAvK-e-or), Ad-e (for Av-e-). But if the vowel belongs to the tense-stem, the endings are retained: riSn-p, Seikvd-o1, orddryn-%. pu remains also in the Opt.: Avou-pe. For an exception in regard to %:, see 401 b. For rz in AvSy-71, see 65 b.

362. 2. The personal ending (v)ov and the participle-ending (v)ca always drop v before «: the preceding vowel is then lengthened in com- pensation, see 48.

5

363. 3. The middle endings ca: and go, after a vowel, drop o (64) ; this is followed by contraction: thus Avo-7 or Avo~-er from Avo-e-(c)at, ' Avo-y from Avo-n-(o)at, eAv-ov from edv-e-(7)o, EAVo~w from edva-a-(c)o, ' Xvor-o from Avoi-(¢)o. In the last case (the optative), contraction is of course impossible. But if the vowel belongs to the tense-stem, o is generally retained. | rise-cat Or Ti%y (ride), iota-co Or icra; it is always so in the Perf. and _ Plup.: A€Av-cut, A€Av-co. 4 Rem. a. From ¢-(o)a: are formed both 7 and e. Of these, 7 is the _ usual form; but the Attic, especially the older Attic, has also «1: BowAo- ; + to wish and otopa: (oiya) to think have only BovAc, ote, in the ing.

q 360 D. The participle of the Pf. Act. is formed like the Pres. Par., in | KekAty-o-vr-es Hm. for rexAny-dr-es (KXBQw to make a noise). Cf. repptk-o-vr-as, _ kexAdd-o-yr-os in Pindar.

' Him. often lengthens or to wr in the Pf. Par.: reSvnadros, Att. reSvndros (Qvfokw to die).

" 3861 D. Hm. often retains mw, oc in the Sub.: eSéAwu, éSéAnor (more cor- _ rectly written é9€Ayor) for éSéAw, édAn, may wish.

862 D. The Aeol. has oa for ovoa and aoa for doa in the Fem. Par.: gay nourishing, Speyuoa. The first of these forms is used by Theoc., and both of them by Pindar,

_ 363 D. In Hm., the vowels, after’s is dropped, usually remain uncontract- ed: Avoca, Avona, edveo, etc, Hd. contracts na to » and sometimes co to ev: 2 Sing. Sub. BovAy, Imy. BodaAco or Botacv.wish. Hm. contracts ex to e only ‘in dpe thou wilt sce.

_ Hm. sometimes drops ¢ in the Pf. Plup.: wéuvn-a: Lat. meministi, also con-

Ct So in Hd., 2 Sing. Imy. péuve-o, with ¢ for 7.

6 a

a.

Wh

122 ACCENT OF THE VERB. [364 "7

364. 4, The first aorist system omits the endings in the 1 Sing — Ind. Act., the 2 Sing. Imy. Act. and Mid., and the Inf. Act.: 2ve-a — (for eAvo-a-v), Ado-ov (for Avo-a-S1), Ado-ae (for Avo-a-co), Ado-ar (for ; Avo-a-vai). The vy in Avgoy is a euphonic addition. See 349) a. ca

Accent of the Verb.

865. As a general rule, the accent stands as far as possible from the end of the form (recessive accent, 97); on the penult, when the ultima is long by nature; otherwise, on the antepenult: Avod- — odwv, AWoaode.

Final ac and ot have the effect of short vowels onthe accent (95 a): Avovrat, Adal, AvZnodpevot. But not so in the Opt.: Avoar, AeAvKor. For contract forms, the accent is determined by the rules in 98: hence Sox (Soxé-w), eA@pev (eAd-opev from édatva, 435, 2), wecodpar — eo from rinrw, 449, 4), diddpar (d15d-opar), AvVBG, AvSjs (AvsE-@, AvBé-ns).

EXcEPTIONS.

. ‘ 366. In the jinite verb there is only the following exception:—The — 2 Aor. Imy. 2 Sing. accents the connecting vowel a. regularly in the middle: di-0d contracted from dum-é-(c)o. b. in the following active forms: ecin-é say, éd2-€ come, evp-e Jind, id-é see, NaB-e take; but not in their compounds: dz-eure. Rem. Of course, this exception has no reference to yi-forms, which — are without connecting vowel.

367. The infinitive and participle, which are essentially nouns, pre- — sent numerous exceptions. :

a. In the 2 Aor. Act. and Mid., they accent the connecting vowel: the Inf. Act. is perispomenon, the Par. Act. oxytone: Aur-ci-v, Aim-o-v, Aur-é-cSar, Aum-d-yevos. For the 2 Aor. Par. Mid., this gives the same — accent as the general rule. a

b. In the 1 Aor. Act. and Perf. Mid., they accent the penult: tipjoas, © Tinoas, TeTIHoSat, Teriunpevos. For the 1 Aor. Par. Act., this gives the © same accent as the general rule.

c. All infinitives in va: accent the penult: riSévat, AeAvKevat, AvBvat, - oraNjvat. r

364 D. In all tenses, v of the 1 Sing. is dropped when a precedes: Hm. ja (orig. noap, noav) Iwas, jia I went, jdea Iknew. Only éxra-v I killed, where a belongs to the stem.

367 D. a. In Hm., the Inf. of the 2 Aor. Mid. conforms in some words to the general rule: ayépecSar (ayelpw to assemble), Epecdar (etpouct to ask), ExSec%ar (exSdvouar to be odious), &ypecSau (eyelpw to arouse). se

b. In Hm., the Perf. ardanoga, drarhpuevos (GrAdoua to wander), &udx cSat, dKaxhmevos or &knxewevos (Axvupa to be pained), éraoduevos (cebw to drive

conform to the general rule. 3

“i

mz.

RSS Oe eT eas j eer : Teen, a ~ ~ T VE RB 12 3 4

e third decl., formed without ere Ko , husele, oradeis. This includes all s, except that of the 1 Aor. Act.

2 en * gavoat TeXeoat SNe! 5 oy mreéEat mavoat Te\ecat dnrdooa r , *! nh mhe§at mavoat TeAeoat dnA@oas

368, ‘Compound Verbs follow the rules above given, but with the fol- > restrictions :

: a. The accent can only go back to the syllable next preceding the

sim aple verb : | en-oxes aie on, auvex-Sos give out together, not émicxes,

gee "The accent can never go back beyond the. ‘augment or reduplica- e tion: apt es he went away, ap-ixra he has arrived, rap-jv he was pre- “gent, not dmmdA%e, &fuxrar, rdpnv. This is the case, even when the aug- ment, falling upon a long vowel or diphthong, makes no change i in it: 4 tm-eixe he was yielding, but tr-exe Pres. Imy. be yielding, dv-eipov I ne"? again. .

FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE-SYSTEMS.

PresENtT SystEM, or

Saf wey i a at

Present and Lnyperfect.

369. Formarion of the tense-stem: see 325-33 ( Classes of Verbs).

_Inriecrion (Paradigm, 270). ~The elements of which the forms con- sist are generally obvious. For Xva, Aver, Avy, and Ave, see 361: for. _ Xbover and Avovea, see 362: for the middle Avy, Aver, éAvov, Ado, and OM vov, see 363. For the present system without connecting vowels | v form), see 399 ff. ~

bai

870. Conrract Verss (Paradigms, 279-81). The connecting vo wels of the present system are contracted with a final a, ¢, 0, in

— the ae -stem. Verbs which have this peculiarity are called Con- act. Ver

bi ‘For the rules of contimetion, se see 32-5. In reading the paradigms, the meontracted form will be seen by omitting the syllable next after the renthesis; the contract form, by omitting the letters in the parenthesis 4 ebas in ry(d-ev)4, Tyx(d-ov)d-or, the uncontracted forms are riydes,

*

. are ws, the contract forms, ripd, Tizdor.

124 TENSE-SYSTEMS. CONTRACT VERBS. [370

870 D. Contract Vers In THE DIALzcrts, Usage of Homer. a. Verbs in aw are commonly contracted; but often, with

a peculiar Epic duplication of the contract vowel. By this a contract w be- —

comes ow, or (after a long syllable, 28 D) aw: dpdw, from dpdw, dp@ to see; dpdqms, from dpdoywu, dpgur; bpdwor, “ dpdovor, dpaor; hevowaw, pevowdw, wevowd to long ; dpdwyres, “ dpdovres, dpGvres; jBdwaa, “* HBdovoa, 7Bdca being young, Under like circumstances, a-contract @ becomes aa or aa: épaa, from dpde, dpa; pvaacsat, from prdecSar, pvacSas to woo dpaacde, “ dpderSe, dpacde; (the syll. before yva is long by position). ww becomes wo, when the latter syllable will not be made short by it: #Bd- oyres, 7Béoyu. The duplicate form has the accent of the uncontracted form. lt is only used where the second of the two syllables contracted was long: thus we do not find épdwuer for dpdouev, Spader. édw to permit has only the duplication of a, but often lengthens e before »

toe: édas, ei@ot. Irreg. forms are puvwduevos (uvaduevos), yeAdorres (yeAdovtes |

laughing), vaerdwoa (vaerdovoa inhabiting), xpeduevos (xpaduevos usiny). ao is sometimes changed to eo without contraction in the Impf. Act.: Hvreov (avrdw to encounter), duoxrAdouev (duokAdw to rebuke).

b. Verbs in ew are commonly uncontracted, but sometimes e¢, ec: go into €3; €0, cov, into ev: reAer, TeACoval, TeA€eTal, TeA€oMevos, OF TEAE?, TEAEVOL, redeirat, TeAeduevos. e€o,may unite by Synizesis: eSphyeoy they were mourning, as three syllables. In the 2 Sing. Mid. é-e-a, é-e-o may become ela, efo, by contraction of ec, or éa, go, by rejection of one e: puSeta or pudéa, for puse- e-at thou sayest. The final e of the stem is sometimes lengthened to e: veel for verxéw to quarrel, éredelero from reAéw to complete.

c. Verbs in ow are contracted as in Att. But sometimes they have forms with a duplicate O-sound, as if the stem ended in a (see a above): dpdéwor (as if for apa-ovar, apdw to plough), dnidgper (as if for Syia-onuev, Snidw to treat as an enemy), drvdovras (as if for dava-oyras, Savdw to sleep). -

Usage of Herodotus. d. Verbs in aw commonly change a before o, ov, @, to €: Tiéovral, Tinedmevos, TyLeovOl, TInéw, Tyweducda (the first three are often less correctly written tTiméwyrat, Timedpevos, Tiewot. ev: ériuevy, Att. ériuwy). In their other forms, they contract a with the fol-

lowing vowel as in Att.: tim@s, TimGre, tTiuguny, TindoSar; so also 2 Sing. ;

Mid., Imv. riz, Impf. éryud, from (€)ripa-e-(c)o.

e. Verbs in ew are uncontracted, except that co, eov may go into ev: — pire, pircer, Pirgorut, pircouat OF PrrcDuar, prcover or piredot, But def ct 2s | necessary and its Inf. deity are usually contracted. Instead of 2 Sing. Mid. pire — e-at, pidré-e-0, épidé-e-o, we find forms with only one e, pirdat, piréo, epidéo; —

but these are of doubtful correctness.

f. Verbs in ow are contracted as in Att., but sometimes have ev instead © of ov: SAG, SnAo?, SnAGuat, SnArolunv, SyArovor or Syrcdo1, ESnAov or EdHAev.

Doric Contraction. g. The Dor. contracts a with 0, w (not in the ultima) —

to @ instead of w: it contracts a with ¢, 9, «, n, to 7, », instead of a, g: mwewa-

ues (for wewSper), weivavre (for meio), dpijre (for dpare), dpH (for dpa), dpihr

(for dpav). The Ion. contraction of €0, eov to ev belongs also to the Dor.

371. Remarks on Contract Verbs. a. The connecting vowel of the Inf. Act. was originally ¢, not e (352 d): hence for d-ew, d-ew, the contract forms are not dy, oiv, but ar, ovv (as if from dev, dev). . gi

eo rarely goes into —

eyes ia ae

i oo eed ae

esto ane 2

‘io d result. 9 Hie dubs us paving sail makes in the Pres. Ind. mdé-o, mis, Feirov, Pl. mhé-oper, mere, wré-ovor. Except dé-w to bind, kes 7 Boay (for S¢-ov), Sodpar (for 5é-op.at), etc., and is thus ished | from dé-w to want, require, which follows the rule, making ne , but 13 dé-ov the requisite.

we stems in a take yn instead of @ in the stdin forms: ¢u-w hy Aa (as), on, Cire, Gn, ete. (cf. 370 D g). So also rewd-w to dupa-o to thirst, kvd-o to scratch, opd-w to wash, \d-w to rub,

an opat to Use. oe ie pryd-w to be cold has @ and @ in contrat forms, instead of ov and

Inf. pryay, Opt. fe @. Aov-w to bathe sometimes drops v (39), and is then contracted as _ in ow: hou for meni Aodpa: for Ao(v)-o-par, etc. —

4

Future System, or - ae Future Active and Middle.

ai $72. The future active and middle adds o to the stem, and has the inflection of the present. (Paradigm, 271.)

a. Mute Verbs. A labial or palatal mute at the end of the stem unites with o, forming w or €: a lingual mute is dropped be- ow o (47).

T@ (kor) to cut Koro racow (ray) to arrange rdéw Brdrrea (Cra) to hurt Pddyo épvoc (opvy) todig dpa

; ware to write ypavo ppato (pad) to tell ppdace

K-w to twist - TrEE@ omevd-w to pour oreiow (49) For rpep-a to nourish, Sper, and the like, see 66 c.

_ b. Pure Verbs. A short vowel at the end of the stem becomes long before o (335). d-« to permit eae mrote-@ to make TonT@

» to honor Tino SovAd-@ to enslave Sovlaca "For exceptions, see 419.

“4

< D. c. Hm. has 2 Sing. Mid. 8pnar with irreg. accent for épd-e-a. Be- ; vy of the 3 Du., Hm. contracts ae, ee, to : mposavdhrnv (mposavddw to hea), é nv (cuvterrdeo to meet together), &meiAnrny (GiretrAéw to threaten). p hefoe seven in the Inf. : weivjuevar (rewdw to hunger), mevOhwevar (wevSdw n), ToShwever (woskw to miss), pophwevce and more irregularly dophva to bear).

we id. seldom, if ever, contracts ac, wer, to 7, n: xpacdat to use, not xpRoSa. _ es Hm. has Impf. Ade uncontracted for ZAo(v)e; and, with e added to the

Adcov for edo(u)e-ov. In the Aor. he has @dovea and éAdeooa,

apP. SS a. Hoe vs in tw from Pres. in ¢w, frequent i in Hm., see 328 D b.

». F d forms of &, Dor. rimadod, lon. ihooua, Weepheroptéie, gee For « doubled in Hm. after a short vowel (évtoow), see 344 D,

a

126 TENSE-SYSTEMS. FUTURE ACT. AND MID. Bea

c. Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stem in the Fut. rel@ (mtz) to persuade, reiow (not ricw); mvéw (mvi) to breathe, mvevooe pat (not mvicopmar). .

373. Liquid Verbs take « instead of o in the future (845); € is :

contracted with the connecting vowels, as in the Pres. of pirew: daivw (piv) toshow, pavé-w, contracted dave. (Paradigm, 282.) Exc. xé\A@ (xed) to drive and xvpéw (kup) to fall in with make kér- oo, kipow, with o. Contract Future from Pure and Mute Verbs.

374. 1. Some pure verbs in ew drop o in the future, and contract: reré-w to complete, rehévw, TehE-w, TEAS, 1 P. reAodpev, etc. The Fut. thus

_made has the same form as the Pres,

375. 2. Mute stems in ad (Pres. a¢w) sometimes do the same: BiBalo to cause to go, BiBdow, BiBa-w, BiB. Similarly éhavvw (eda) to drive, eXd(a)w, €A@, EAGs, €AG, etc. ~

376. 3. Mute stems in 1d (Pres. ifw), after dropping o, insert ¢ and then contract: xopyitw (Kod) to convey, Kopiow, Kopi-e-@, Koyo, 1 P. Kopodper, etc., Fut. Mid. copsodua. The name Attic Future has been given to this formation.

377. 4. Some verbs take ce instead of o, contracting e with the con- necting vowel: avé-w (xvi, wvev) to breathe, mvevoé-opa, rvevoovpat (also mvevoopat)} TAE-w (AW, wA€v) to sail, TAevoodpat (also wAEVTOmaL) 3; Hevy-w (piy) to flee, pevEodpai (also hevEoua). This formation is found only in the future middle, and only when it has an active meaning. It is called the Dorie Future (877 D).

378. Future without tense-sign. A few verbs form their Fut. with- out any tense-sign: yéw (yw) to pour, Fut. yéo, Mid. yéoua. So the ir- regular futures €Souat shall eat (450, 3), wiouwa shall drink (435, 4).

379. Future Middle used as passive or active. Beside its proper —

meaning, the Fut. Mid. has in many verbs a passive sense: in not a few, it has an active sense. The latter is found especially in many verbs

which express an action or function of the body: dxov to hear, dda to

' 878 D. The Fut. in ew has in the dialects the samé forms, contracted and

uncontracted, as the Pres. in ew (370 D b, e).

& For poetic Fut. in ow from other liquid verbs, see 345 D.

375 D. The Fut. in aw has in Hm. the same variety of forms as the Pres, — in aw (8370 D a): thus éAdw, éAdas, €Ade. In Hd., it is contracted as in Att. — 877 D. In Dor., the usual tense-sign of the Fut. Act. and Mid. is oe instead — of c: ¢ is contracted with the following vowel: Avo@ (for Av-cé-w), Avocis, Augel, AvoEetrov, Avo'cdmes, Avocite, AvocivTt; -Mid. Avocduar (for Av-cé-opar), ©

Avof, Avociral, etc., Avociodat, Avoedpevos.

378 D. Similarly, Hm. has Fut. Beloua: or Béoucu (89 a) shall live connected — with Bid to live, 34w shall find connected with 2 Aor. Pass. é8d-ny learned,

kelw or Kéw (39 a) shall lie from mejua.——¥Hm. sometimes omits o of the Fut.

after U: épdw Fut. of épdw to draw.

—es

EYP to nj, f. to wal. pate to nein a ste be sal, ,

sa Bria hae Srsre,¢ or. | Finst Aorist Active and Middle.

C a NFLE on (Paradigm, 272). The connecting vowel is athirotigh: for ee Adoov, Moat (Inf, Act., and Imy. Mid.), see 349 a: for 4 64. For the middle forms edvow, Avon, AVaato, See 363. eg optative forms e:as, eve, evay, which are called Aeolic, but are e used. bony the regular forms, see 349 b. For the accent of ceryain as, see 367 e. 3

881. Formation. The first aorist active and middle adds o to

: The future and jirst aorist systems, when formed with o, have the same tense-stem: hence the rules in 372 apply also to the 1 Aor. kor-ra éxowa ~ tdoow (ray) éragéa éd-@ eldoa

@ €Brapa 6pvacw (opvx) epvéa TLud-@ eriunoa

& ypah-a éypaya . gpdtw (pad) edpaca TOLe-w eroinoa ce émA\c&a ‘orévo-o éorewoa SovAd-@ edovlora ép-o + edpewpa meis@ (m3) emeroa mvew (vv) emvevoa

Xé@ to pour makes z exea (for eyevoa) corresponding to the Fut. yéw (Is Cf. the irregular eima said (450, 8), 7 veya (450, 6).

For three aorists in ka, ésnka from riSnut (Se) to put, Saxa from Si- Eons (60) to give, Axa from int (é) to send, see 402.

past? 382. Liquid Verbs. These reject o in the first aorist, and length-

en the stem-vowel in compensation for it: qaiva (dav), epyva (for epavea) ; 3 see 345. eaegaign, 283.)

_ Rem. a. The verbs atpa (ap) to raise and GXopar (4d) to leap make

‘ap pend ‘aX in the 1 Aor. , except in the Ind., which has 7 on account of

e augment: 7pa, Piduny, but dpas, dda iavuek

b. A few other verbs have a where ‘the rule (835) requires 4: Kep- » to gain, exépdava3 dpyaive to enrage, apyava 3—or, on the contrary,

e n after p, = of a: rerpaive to bore, érérpyva.

* alsa

Le

380 D. For 1 Aor. in Hm. with o and ¢, like the 2 Aor., see 349 D. 881 D. For o doubled in Hm. after a short vowel (éyénacen), see 344 D. ‘or €Adecou—=FAovea from Aotw to bathe, see 871 D e.

éxea, Hm. has commonly éxeva. Similarly, Hm. makes 1 Aor. éxn-a op sitten Exeim) Att. Eeavoa from ralw (Kav) to burn, rceva from oedw (cv) , nAcduny and jrcvduny from aAdoucr or &Xedouat to avoid, and the de- ve Aor. d€aro seemed (connected perhaps with ¢-3d-ny learned). has daréacSa: from daréoua: to divide.

382 D. Hm. has 1 Aor. in oa from some poe verbs (345 D)—Him, aa dpeira from épéAdw to increase (845 D).

128 TENSE-SYSTEMS. SECOND AORIST. 383 |

Seconp Aorist System, or ~ Second Aorist Active and Middle.

883. The tense-stem of the second aorist active and middle is the same as the verb-stem. It has the inflection of the present

system, the second aorist indicative being inflected like the imper-

fect. (Paradigm, 276.) | For the change of.e to a in the 2 Aor., see 334, For the accent of

the 2 Sing. Imy., the Inf. and Par., see 366-7 a. For the second aorist

system without connecting vowels ‘(ui-form), see 399 ff.

| 884, “Ay-@ to lead has in the 2 Aor. a reduplicated stem (832): iyay- ov, dyay-civ. Syncopated stems (339) are seen in é-ar-duny (aér-opat to Sty), € é-ox-ov (for €-EX-OY, Pr. é€x@ to have), é- on-dpny (for e-oen-ouny, Pr.

€rropat tO Sollow), HASov (for #AvS-ov Hm., Pr. épyouat to come), and some —

others: #veyxoy (for MY-EVEK-OV, Pr. dhépo ‘to bear) has both reduplication and syncope. For rpwye to gnaw, 2 Aor. é-rpdy-ov, see 334 d.

PrrFect ACTIVE SYSTEMS, or x Perfect and Pluperfect Actiwe. 385. The two perfect active systems have the reduplication (318 ff.)

in common, and are alike in their inflection (Paradigms, 273, 277). For —

the augment of the Plup., see 311. For the connecting vowels of the

Ind., see 8350-1. For the older Attic 7 in the 1, 3 Sing. of the Plup., see — 351. For cay in the 3 Pl. Plup., see 356 c. For the forms \édvxa |

and déAuxe, see 861. For the accent ‘of the Inf, and Par., see 367 c, d.

883 D. In Hm., a few stems which end in a mute after p, suffer transposi- : tion as well as variation of vowel in the 2 Aor. : baa tats ti to see, Cipaxoy, Tépd-w —

to destroy, Empaisoy. For Ion. ¢ew instead of ezy in 2 Aor. Inf, see 352 D.

884 D. In Hm., a considerable number of verbs have reduplicated stems in — the 2 Aor.: 2-xéppud-ov (ppdgor to declare), wémid-ov (welSw to persuade), rerapm-— dunv (répr-w to delight), mepid-écSat (pelSoucae to spare), etc. i*pap-or (st. ap,

‘Red uplicated aa syncopated ; are é-xexA-dunv (keA-omat to command), &AaAK-ov (at are, Pr. éréw to ward — off). Not used in the Pres. are répv-ov (st. pev) killed, rérp-ov (st. Tem) came

Pr. dpaptoxw to Jit), épop-ov (dp-vupt to rouse).

up to, Terary-dy (st. ray, Lat. tango) taking hold of. Two verbs, épix-w to

raw, évin-rw to chide,. reduplicate the final consonant of the stem, with @ as a

connective: Apiix-dx-ov, qvim-ain-oy (also évévin-ov).

Of syncopated stems, Hm. has also eyp-duny awoke (found even in Att., from éyelpw st. eyep), 4 aye duevor assembled (Inf. &yép-eoSat 367 D, Pr. &yelpw),

é-mA-duny (wéA-oma to be).

885 D. For Dor. w, es, et, instead of a, as, €, in the Sing. of the Pf. Ind.,

see 850 D. For Dor. ew instead of eva in the Pf. Inf., see 359 D. For Ionic forms of the Plup. in Hm. and Hd., see 351 D. —-For Ep. w~ a of or in the Pf. Par., see 360 D.

o4

“yan perfect system without ut connecting vowels (ue-form) :

The Sub., Opt., and Imy. have the inflection of the Pres. The Tmy rarely used, and only in perfects which have a present meaning. ce of it, the Perf. Par. can be used with the Imv. of cipi to be:

% , which do not very often occur.

hu \ €) ukaos to%t, oro, etc. Even the Sub. and Opt. are quite generally made in this way: thus AeAukds &, AeAuKos env, instead of AeAVKw, NeAVK-

886. Firsr Perrecr anp Piurerrecr. The first perfect and _ pluperfect add « to thereduplicated stem. (Paradigm, 273.) _ ____a, This is the only form for pure verbs (but see 409). It is the pre- _ yailing form for liquid verbs, and for mute verbs with lingual stems: the lingual mute is dropped before x: Kopig@ (kod) to convey, Kekdpixa. __ The pure verb dota to hear has the 2 Perf. dejxoa (821), 2 Plup. __ HKnkdey OY axnxdety (311),—the only instance of the kind in Attic prose. _ b. Pure verbs, and verbs of the second class, have the lengthened _ stem in the 1 Perf.

as rae , , r , ~€d-@ elaka Toue-@ = TeTFoinka meiS@ (wiS) qwémetka

. , , , UA , ‘ s Tyid-@ = TeTiunka Sovdd-w dedovA@xa mvéew (rd) wémvevKa

; c. Liquid stems of one syllable change ¢ to a (834 a): oré\Xo@ (cred) - to send, earadka, prcipw (prep) to destroy, épapxa.

___ vis rejected in a few verbs: xpivw (xpiv) to distinguish, xéxptxa, reivo (rev) to extend, rérixa, etc. (433). If not rejected, it must be changed | toy nasal: daivw (hav), réayxa.

_ Several liquid stems suffer transposition (340), and thus become _ yowel-stems: BddAo (Bad) to throw, Bé-BAn-ka, Kdp-vw to be weary, xé- _—«Kpn-ka. 7

___ 387. Szconp Perrect AND Puurerrect. The tense-stem of the

_ second perfect and pluperfect is the reduplicated verb-stem.

(Paradigm, 2'77.)

_ a. Vowel-Changes. « in the stem becomes o in the 2 Perf. (834 a): orpéd-w to turn, éotpoda, tiktw (tex) to bring forth, réroxa.

- Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stem, but change « to

tw (334 b): ryx-@ (rax) to melt, térnxa, deim-w@ (Aim) to leave, Nédoura,

_— Hevy-w (iy) to flee, mépevya.

i265

_ ~ 886 D. In Hm., only vowel-stems (or such as become so by transposition)

form a first perfect; and even these often have a second perfect form: wepd-acr

Att. meptnacr (pt-w to produce), kexun-ds Att. rexpnnds (kdu-vw to be weary),

n-os troubled (defective, used only in this form and in Pf. Mid. rerinua,

ar. teTinuévos troubled).

_ 887 D. a. In Hm., the Fem. Par. sometimes has a when other forms of perfect have 7 (838 D).

_b. ae povayon of a smooth or middle mute in the perfect active is Hm. |

6*

- %

tt, q PAs

+ ' — <a

130 TENSE-SYSTEMS. PERFECT MIDDLE, [387

In other verbs also, a is lengthened (338): kpd¢w (xpéy) to cry, és kpaya, ay-vue to break, taya, Mayxdve (Ad) to obtain by lot, cihnxa, paiva (hav), mednva.

But the stem-vowel remains short, 1. After the Attic reduplica- tion (821): dreibad (arid) to anoint, adjdipa. 2. In some instances, before a rough mute: ypadp-o to write, yéypida, taco (ray) to arrange, TETAXa.

iy or ¢ppwya from pryvups (py) to break, and cia%a am accustomed from st. «3 or 73, see 334 d.

b. Aspiration of Final Mute. Some verbs aspirate a labial or palatal mute at the end of the stem (341), changing z, 8, to 4, and

K, y, to x: KAérTw (kre) to steal, Kéxhoda, GAAacow (adday) to ex-

change, nAdaxa..

A few verbs have two forms, aspirate and unaspirate: mpdoce (mpay) -

to do, wémpaya intransitive, am doing (succeeding, well or ill), wémpaya transitive, have done; dv-oiy-w to open, avémya intrans. am open, avewya trans. have opened.

Prrrect Mipp1E System, or Perfect, Pluperfect, Fut. Perf., Middle (Passwe).

388. Perrect AND Piuperrect. The tense-stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle is the reduplicated verb-stem. The endings are applied directly to the stem, without connecting vowels. (Paradigm, 2'74.)

For the accent of the Inf. and Par., see 367 b.

389. Vowel-Changes. The vowel-changes which occur in the 1 Perf, Act., are found also in the Perf. Mid.

éd-@ laut SovAd-w SedovA@par oredr (oreA) Eoradpar Tyd-o@ TeTipnpat melS@ (mi%) mémevopar preipa (Prep) epSappat

MOle-@ TETTOINWAL mAéw (wAU) wéemrAevopat PBadlrAw (Bar) BeBAnpar

Further, the verbs rpép- to nourish, rpén-w to turn, and arped-a to twrn, change ¢ to a: réSpaypar (66 ¢, d), rerpappat, €orpappat.

390. Addition of «. Many pure verbs add o before the endings of the perfect middle: reAé-w to complete, re-réhero-pat, ére-TEde-C-TO. But the added o falls away before endings that begin with o (55): Te-TéAc-oal, ere-TeAc- ode. (Paradigm, 284.)

This o is almost always added to the Perf. Mid. of pure verbs which ~ retain a short stem-vowel (419) contrary to the rule in 835: €-oma-o-pai ©

(not ¢e-onn-pa) from od-w to draw. Other pure verbs in which it

oceurs, are enumerated in 421; some have both forms, with and without —

ow: KAei-w to close, KexNevopat and Kéxderpat.

888 D. For Ionic forms such as péuyy-a or péuyy (Hm.), péuve-o (Hd),

see 868 D.

ee

FECT MPPLE. = s«d18)

ot Verba oud Mate. Verbs. The concurrence of con-— n the e stem. and endings gives occasion to a number of changes. These are shown in the Paradigms, 284. They 2 place according to the rules of euphony in 44-7. a. Verbs which reject in the Perf. Act. (886 ¢), reject it also in the , Mid.: kéxpiwat, rerapar. If not rejected, it becomes o when the ding g begins with » (51): paive (par), répacpar ;——but sometimes it pecomes pw: o&vv-w 10 sharpen, &vypa. Before other endings, it remains ir _ anebanged: mépaverat (51), d&uvras. b. When ye or yy would be brought before p, the first consonant is rected mépr-w to send, wé-mep-par (for me-mepp-pac), édéyy-w to con- _ wict, ed- ewes (for ht cerpa):

c. onevd-@ to pour makes éorevopat (for eorevo-pat, for eoevd-ar).

F 392. Third Person Plural of the Indicative. The endings vrai,

__vro can only stand after a vowel. When the tense-stem ends in a consonant, the 3 Pl. Ind. is made by using the perfect participle, _ with the auxiliary verb <iot thefare for the perfect, and joav they _ were for the pluperfect. See 284.

Rem. a. The Ionic endings drat, dro (before which, 7, B, x, y are as-

pirated) sometimes appear in Attic, after a consonant: rerdyarat, érerd- _xaro, for reraypeévor cici, Hoav, from Tag ow ey) to arrange.

| 893. Perfect Subjunctive and Optat@e. The. perfect subjunctive + and optative are made by using the perfect participle with the Sub. _ and Opt. of <iué to be. See 274, 284.

Rem. a. A few pure verbs form these modes directly from the stem: krd-opa to acquire, Perf. xéxrn-yar possess, Sub. KEKT@pal, KEKT], KEKTHTAL (contracted from. KEKTI|-~@MAL, ete, ) Opt. KEKT@UNY, kexT@o, kexr@to (from KekTn-olpny, etc.), OF KexTnuNY, KEKTI}O, KEKTI}TO (from Kexrn-iuny, ete., with- out connecting vowel). So pipvnckw (ura) to remind, Perf. négionspias remember.

Ss

ag 4

. 394. Furure Perrecr. The future perfect adds o to the tense- _ stem of the perfect middle. It has the inflection of the future middle,

ns oe

{

392 D. The use of ara, aro is much more common in Hm. and Hd., see _ 855 De. Hm. has reredx-ara, aro (1 S. réruyuc, redxw to make) with ev for v, __ €pnpéd-aro (1 8. épnpeloynv, epeidw to support) with ¢ for e,—the change of quantity in each case being required by the hexameter verse, cf. 28D. Before " bitiese endings, he inserts § in é&«-nxé-8-arae (Par. ax-nxé-pevos tig éA- MA€-8-aro (for €A-nda-5-aro, st. eda, Pr. édatyw to drive). In éppddara: (paivw to a sprinkle), pad appears to be the primitive stem, cf. Aor. fdocare. And 5 be- pipnce to the stem in Hd. rap-eonevdd-arat (mepacneud es to prepare), and like forms from verbs in ¢w. In ri age aro (Hd.) = Att. dpvypevor ict, hoay, s not changed to x. & 893 D. Hm. has Sub. 1 P. Sone (Hd. peuvedpedsa), Opt. Menyyuny, B parler (ew for not, Got, 26); also Opt. 3 P. AcAdvro (for AcAv-t-vTo, 33),

te

182 ' 'TENSE-SYSTEMS, AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE. [394

from which tense it differs in form only by having a reduplication. (Paradigm, 2'74.)

The Fut. Perf. is not used in liquid verbs, nor in verbs beginning with avowel. Yet we have BcBrAjooua, rertunoopa, from Badr-ho to throw, réu-ve to cut, with transposition of the liquid (386 c).

Rem. a. There are two cases of a Fut. Perf. with active endings: in both, the stem is formed by adding o to the stem of the 1 Perf. : tornus (ora) to set, 1 Perf. €ornx-a stand, Fut. Perf. éorné- shall stand ; SynoKw (sav) to die, réSvnx-a am dead, re2vn&-w shall be dead,

Passive Systems, or Aorist and Future Passive.

395. Formation. The tense-stem of the passive aorist is formed by adding a passive-sign to the verb-stem (343). The first aorist takes-Je, the second aorist «. These become Jy and 7 before a single consonant. The passive “future annexes o to the tense- stem of the corresponding aorist (344). Thus the first future adds Ino, the second future yo, to the verb-stem.

Inriection (Paradigms, 275, 278). Both passive systems have the same inflection. The Aor. Pass. takes the endings of the Act. without connecting vowels, and thus resembles the p.-forms. For the contrac- tion of e with the mode-signs of the Sub. and Opt., see 343. For cay in the 3 Plur., see 356c. For the mode-sign of the Opt., see 343. For the ending 7: instead of & in the 1 Aor. Imv., see 65 b. For the accent of the Inf. and Par., see 367 c, d.

The Fut. Pass. has the inflection of the Fut. Mid.

396. Remarks on the First Passiwe System.

a. In regard to vowel-changes, the 1 Aor. Pass. agrees with the Perf. Mid. (889). So also, in the rejection of v from liquid stems (391 a), and the addition of o to yvowel-stems (390).

€d-@ elaSnv mei%o (ni3) = erreio Inv Bad-rAw = €BANSnv

Tind-@ = €TLLN INV TrEw (TAD) — eAEVA BY onmd-@ éondoSny mou-w éroLnSnv teiva (rev) er aSnv TehE-w = €TeAEO Iv dovAd-@ edovlw@Sny Kpive@ (kpiv) ékpiSnv dkov-@ jKovaZnv

895 D. Hm. y for cay in 3 P. Aor. Ind., see 355 D ¢:——the passive-sign e lengthened to « (or 7) in the uncontracted 2 Aor. Sub., see 8343 D:——the mode-vowels of the Sub. shortened in the Du. and Pl., see 347 D: MEV CLL for vat in the Aor. Inf., see 359 D.

In the Aor. Sub., Hd. contracts ey to 7, but leaves ew uncontracted: AuvSéw, AvdaTs, AvdF, etc.

In Hm., the 1 Fut. Pass. is never found; the 2 Fut. only in dahooua (2 Aor. Pass. é3dnv learned), mryhcouat (uly-vume to mix),

396 D. Hm. adds y before 3 to some vowel-stems: [Spd-v-Snv became seated (iSpt-w), du-rvb-y-Syv revived (st. xvv, mvéw to breathe). In padvSnv (dactvw to shine, = patyw) he changes gaey to paay (cf. 370 Da

7

Vee a ae ee

nk “939 1) have € in tis 1 Aor. Pass. This, . of these verbs being much more

Hcp “Before 5, ‘a labial or palatal mute (m, 8, x, y) be- ugh h (Gy x x)! a lingual mute (r, 6 Say vecolies a: a errr

for apd, etc., see 66 d. For éréSnv, érvany, see 65 ¢.

am. Remarks on the Second Passive System. -

‘ a. The verb-stem is only modified by variation of « to a + (388). oe to send, éoradnv.

— But mijooo (wAay) to strike makes ee yet in composition with d card, it takes the form -emAaynv.

b. The second passive system is not formed from verbs which have a2 Aor. Act. The only exception is rpéra to turn, érpdroy and érpdmny. 4 _ Some verbs have both passive — in use: ‘Brdaro (BraB) to in- he éBrapsny and €BraBnyv.

: fe

abies Verbal 1 Adjestives | °

___ 898. The verbal adjectives are analogous to passive participles. _ They are formed by annexing 76 or réo to the verb-stem.

a, 1. Xv-76-s, a 6-v loosed, looseable (solutus, solubilis).

. 2. Av-réo-s, a, o-v (requiring) to be loosed (solvendus).

__ The verb-stem assumes the same form as in the 1 Aor. Pass., except i: that a mute before rds and réos must be smooth (44).

_ éa-o earés, Téos mei3@ me.ords, TEé0s . Badd Brnrés, Téos -Tiyd-@ = TiNTds, Téos mAém mAEvaTds, TEos mAéK@ TAEKTOS, TEOS _ Tedé-@ TedeoTds, TEeos Teivw ratds, Téos Tadco@ TaKxTds, Téos _ akov-@ dxovoTds, Téos Kpive xpirds, Téos tTpepo Bpemrds, réos

‘Present, Seconp Aorist, aNnD Sreconp Prerrect Systems,

according to the pu-form.

____ 899. Some verbs inflect the present system without connecting _ vowels. These are called Verbs in ps (267).

In like manner, but less often, the second aorist and second per-— fect systems are inflected without connecting vowels. ‘These also are called pu-forms, though belonging for the most part to verbs in o. ae? © Paradigms, 297—305.)

38 97 D. Hm. has epiimoelopen gaudeamus (2 Aor. Sub. 1 Plur. for rpam-dpev LS 3 D from repm-w to delight, 2 Aor. Pass. érdpx-nv) with sie tir and 2 of vowel as in 883 D.

898 3D, Hm. dpa-rds, by transposition, for daprés, from sep to flay.

400. Further peculiarities of this formation.

1. In respect to the endings,

pe and ox are retained in the Ind.: @y-pi, dy-ci.

. % is often retained in the Imy.: da-3. say.

ovat and go usually retain a: tora-cat, edeikvu-co.

. the 3 Pl. of the histor. tenses has cay: éha-cay, @e-cav.

the Inf. Act. has var: dd-vat, dov-var.

the Par. Act. retains s in the Nom. Masc.: d:dovs (not didar). . for the ending o2a in the 2 Sing., see 356 a.

2. h. A connecting vowel a is inserted before (v)o. in the Pres. Ind. 3 Pl: ri3é-a-ox (for riS¢-a-vor), 5:56-a-o1:—this a is contracted with an ain the stem: ioraou (for iora-a-vor) ;—and sometimes with ¢ or o in the stem: ri8eior, Sudovor, rare forms for riSéac1, d1ddact. The same in- sertion appears also in the Perf. Ind.: dedi-a-or they are afraid, éoract (for éora-a-vot).

3. i. A final a, ¢, o of the stem is contracted with the mode-signs of ‘the Sub. and Opt.: riSéuar (for riSe-wpar), Soinv (=So-tn-v).

k. Hence these modes have the accent of contract forms. Compare the accent of the Sub. and Opt. in contract presents (279-81), and in the passive aorist (275, 278).

4, The stem-vowel in pi-forms is generally short ; but

m. the Pres. and Impf. Act. make it long in the Sing. of the Ind.: hny-pi, ey, but dha-pev, hainv, pa-vat.

n. the 2 Aor. Act. makes it long before a single consonant: ¢orn-s, éotn (for eorn-r), or7-St, oTH-vat; but rainy, otd-vrev, orav (Neut. Par. for ora-yr).

For the accent of the Inf. and Par. Act., see 367 ¢, d.

Mimo Aso

400 D. a. The Dor. has vr: for ot: pa-ri for y-ol; and yr for (v)ot: pa-vr for pact. See 355 D a. | d. Hm. y for cay, often: &pa-v for &pa-cay, te-v for fe-cay (355 D ce).

e. Hm. pevus or wey for vor: 86-uevou or 56-wev for Sod-var (359 D). g. The ending oda is more freq. in Hm. than in Att.: riSnoSa, Sid0icSa. For arat, aro used instead of yrat, vro (Hd.), see 355 D e.

h. Hm. and Hd. always have tis<e?o1, d:d0dc1, fyyvior, etc.; but two pres- ents insert a, @do1 (or eiat) they aré, tact they go. The forms foré-ac1, éore- aot (in Hd.), for israot, éoraot, are doubtful. /

i. In Hm., the Sub. of the 2 Aor. Act. often remains uncontracted. The stem-vowel is then usually lengthened and the mode-vowel shortened: but in the Sing. and 3 Pl. of the Act., the mode-vowel is always long: or4-erov for (ora-nrov) orijrov, Sel-ys or Sh-ps for (Se-ns) Sis, 5H-nor for (So-y) 8G. Similarly we find Sel-oua for (Se-wuar) SGuar in the 2 Aor. Mid. 7, lengthened from a, is sometimes changed to e: orel-ower (instead of orn-ouev) for orauer.

In Hd., only aw and ew of the Sub. remain uncontracted: aw he changes

to ew: oré-wuev for (ora-wuecv) or@uev. The same change is also found in Hm..

m, 0. In Hm., the stem-vowel is sometimes long in other forms: thus in the Pr. Inf. T1Sfpevar, Bidodven, &hver to blow, Pr. Ind. Mid, di¢nuct to seek, Par. Mid. r:iSfpevos. ‘For the 2 Aor. Sub., see i above. |

184 MI-FORMS. . FURTHER PECULIARITIES. 7400 ] ‘ . ’

oe ee

aN Se

{ f I

ay DE f x

eA

varks on the above 7 yy eg AR a li Na OSE A eS 1 the Pres. Imv., &: is only rejected, and the vowel before ened: fern (not iord-Sc), rider, SiSov, Secevs.— In the 2 Aor. [m after a short vowel loses 1, and % is then changed to ¢: dd-s (not dc 1), Sés. But sc remains unchanged after a long vowel: o7i-%1, Bi (in compounds sometimes ora, 8a: thus mapdora, cardia, poetic). © ga and go drop o in the 2 Aor.; also in the Pres. Sub. and Opt.; and occasionally in other forms: @3ou (not eSe-c0), 37 (NOt Sy-ca), didoio (not &ido-c0) 3 icraco and tore. hh, A connecting vowel is sometimes found in the Sing. of the Impf. Act. # edidour, edidSous, €5/Sou (contracted from. ¢d:d0-or, -es, -¢) are almost always used for edidar, edids, edidw. So also rides, érize. are more ~ common than éri&ns, éri3n. “ _ The connecting vowel o takes the place of the stem-vowel e, in the — Opt. riSotuny for (ride-tunv) TiSeiuny. ___ i, In the contraction of the Sub., an, an, on give n, 7, @ (not a, q, ot, 82, 34): iorira (for icra-nrac), orjs (for ora-ys), 56 (for do-7). _ __k. The Sub. and Opt. Mid. are sometimes accented without reference to the contraction. This is always the case with the deponents, divayat to be able, émiorapa to understand, Kpéwipa to hang, together with the second aorists émpidunv bought, avnpny recewed profit: dvvepat, dvatro not duva-par, dvairo). And it is sometimes the case with tps, risype, iSwpe: TiS@par, Sidorro. 1. A close vowel (1, v) at the end of the stem, is not contracted with _ the mode-sign (83): the Opt. then takes a connecting vowel o: t-a, deixyv- ' om. In such verbs, the Sub. and Opt. are not distinguished from the _ ordinary formation. r n. The 2 Aor. Act. of typi, ri3nur, Sidapr, lengthens only the Inf: | et-vat, Set-vat, Sod-vac; though in iyu, the 2 Aor. Ind. is long (ei-) by the - augment (312): cicav, eipeSa. The poetic 2 Aor. Act. «ray (xrd) is also short. On the other hand, | the 2 Aor. Mid. dvipny (ova) follows the rule for the Act.

401 D. b. Hm. sometimes retains 8: in the Pr. Imv.: 8/8w%: and dfdov give, ” Gpvv& swear. He has xaS-fora for kad-iorn. Pind. df50 for didov. : “h. Hm. sometimes has a connecting vowel in the Sing. of the Pr. Act.: Bidors (cf. Snrots for SnAd-ers) and Sid0icSa for didws, didot (and dldwor), Tet ~ (and riSyo1), tes (with irreg. accent) for is, fer (and Yor). In Hd. fe, rideis, _ Tiel, diB0is, Sid07, ior, are perhaps always used in place of the Attic forms. - So too, Hd. has Impf. 3 S. fora (= iora-e) for torn. he connecting vowel o takes the place of the stem-vowel a, in uapvolueda (Him.) Pr. Opt. of pdpvauat to fight. Hd. has Se-ofuny for (Se-yunv) Selunr 2 Aor. Opt. of riSnu. _ _k. So in Hm. and Hd., the Pr. Sub. Act. of Zyus: thus fyor (Hm.) for £7. 1. Hm. contracts 1, v of the stem with the mode-sign of the Opt. in din ‘for Sv-in) 2 Aor. Opt. of dvw, Savdro (for Sawv-rro) Pr. Opt. of dalvimar, to

feast, Piro (for pSi-vr0) 2 Aor. Opt. of pSt-vw to perish. un. With éerdy compare Hm. obra wounded ; with aviunv, Hm. wAjjro ap-

136 VERBS IN MI OF THE EIGHTH CLASS. [402

402. Peculiar First Aorist in xa. Three verbs in pu, input, riSype, Sidwp1, have with the 2 Aor. a peculiar 1 Aor. in xa (tense-sign «).- But this is almost confined to the Ind. Act.: fea, @ynxa, éS@xa. Here it is very common in the Sing., of which number the 2 Aor. is not in use: thus Saxa, édwxas, Swxe (never dav, edws, edw). It occurs also, but less often, in the Plur.: edaxapev, edoxare, eSwxav (usually <dopev, dore, éSovav). ;

|

ENUMERATION OF MI-FORMS, - :

403. Verbs in pu belong to the first, fifth, and eighth classes (325, 329, 332). Those of the first and fifth classes have the pe-form only in the present and imperfect (for one exception, see 408, 9). We begin, therefore, with

Verbs in pu of the Eighth Class.

1. inue (é 332) to send, inflected like rin (297, 301, and 403, 2). Act. Pr. Ind. tj: (3 Pl. always iao1, 400 h); Impf. inv, ins, in, etc. (also a ters, det, 401 hy; ddiec and nie from ad-inut, cf. 314) ; Sub. ia, Opt. ieinv, Imy. te, Inf. igvar, Par. ieis (ievr). 2 Ao. Ind. (Axa, fas, Hxe, 402) eirov, eirnv, cipev, cite, exrav5 Sub. 6, Opt. einv, Imy. és, Inf. eivar, Par. eis (évr). Mid. Pr. tewat to hasten, strive; Impf. igunyv; S. idua, O. iciuny, Imy. teoo (or tov), Inf. feoda, P. igwevos. 2 Ao. eipny, cio, ciro, eicSov, ciaSnv, elpeSa, cioSe, civro; Sub. Sua, Opt. eiuny, Imy. od, Inf. go%a, Par. euevos. Fu. ow, 1 Ao. fica, Pf. eixa, Pf. M. ciyar, Ao. P. cisnv, V. érds, Eros. Rem. a. The Pr. Opt. has also fore (Cots, tot, etc.) for icinv, tolunv for ieiunv; 2 Ao. Opt., otuny for funy: cf. 401 he 2. risinus (Se) to put. For ju-forms, see Paradigms 297, 301. . Fu. Snow, 1 Ao. énxa, Pf réSerxa, Pf. M. reSeruar, Ao. P. eréSyv (65), V. Serds, Seréos. Cf. 402. 3. didnpt (Se) to bind, rare form for dé@ (420, 1).

4, Sidmpt (So) to give. For pu-forms, see Paradigms 298, 302. Fu. ddc00, 1 Ao. @wxa, Pf dédaxa, Pf. M. dédoua, Ao. P. edd3ny, ! V. Sords, Soréos. Cf. 402.

5. tornps (ora 332) to set. For pu-forms, see Par. 299, 303, 305. Fu. ornow, 1 Ao. gornoa, PE. éornxa, Pf. M. eortua, Ao. P. eardaSny, Plup. éornkew or ciornkev, Fu. Pf. A. éornEw (894 a), M. éorn£Eopar, V. ordrds, oraréos. For irregularity of meaning, see 416, 1.

-

403 D. 1. Hm. Impf. 1 8. few, 1 Ao. ja and Enna (312): from dy-fnus he has a Fu, évéow, Ao. &veoo.——Hd. Pf. Ind. 3 P. dv-éwvrou irreg. for av-ciyrat, and Pf. Par. we-er-i-mévos very irreg. for weS-er-uévos,

2. Hd. Impf. 1 8. ériSe-a with irreg. connecting vowel a (406 D a, 864 D). 4, Hm. Fu. dé0@, and with redupl. d:dé0.

“ary. ‘CLASS. ‘ wee 137 i

1 ccudiee. 5 , + nv, Force: iri Opt. dil (4ol ‘yy Int Sebi: akdaoga Ao. dyvnoa, Ao. P. dvyiny

nyt (ma) to ill, a énipmdny, Inf. wiypaddvac;

a to fill one’s self, Impf. Cirepaehdhino, Inf. mipmdao at. i

7 ese ate tho. rAnoa, Pf. méadyxa, Pf. M. wémAnopar, Ao. P. émdnokny, i . A kindred form is 7A7j3@ to be full, Lat. pleo. Rem.a. In this verb and the next, the redupl. is strengthened by the sal. This, however, falls away in the compounds, if the preposition as Jie oiaguceet but Impf. 3 P. év-eripadacav.

} it 8. iparpmyse (xpa) to burn transitive, inflected like miuaAnps.

9 kixpnye (xa) to lend, Mid. xiypapa to borrow ;

Tre. xpnow, Ao. EXPITA, Pf. xéxpnxa, Pf. M. xexpnyar: cf. 885 a.

Verbs in put of the First Class.

pr A. Stems in a.

1. jue (cf. Lat. 4-io) to say, used only in Pr. 1 S. fe and Impf. 1, 8 8. iy, Fi ue & eye said I, 7 & bs said he).

q 2. pnt (pa) to say, dys, dnoi, pardv, hardy, paper, hare, pact ;

— Impf. edny, épyns comm. epnoSa, edn, epdroy, eparny, epdper, ehare,tpacay. Pr. Sub. 64, Opt. dainv, Imv. Padi or pds, Inf. pdvac (Par. fas). . Fu. djow, Ao. epyca, V. purds, pareos.

Rem. a. The forms of the Pr. Ind. are all enclitic except the 2 Sing.

— (105 c). The Par. das is never used in Attic prose, which takes hacky instead: cf. 444, 8. _ 8. xpy (xpa, xpe) it behoves, Impf. expiy OF Xpiv 5 Pr. Sub. yp7, Opt. xpeln, Inf. xpijvar, P. xpewy (only neut., for ypaov 26). “Fu. xP" cet (835 a). In composition, . dnd-xpn tt is enough, 3 P. (contract) amoxpéou, Impf. dmréypn3

eer. Inf. dmoxpyy (871 °), Par. amoXpGY, ~Goa, -Gr; both contract. Fu. droypycet, droxpycovor, Ao. aréxpnoe.

5. Hm. 1 Ao. 3 P. @oracay as well as Zornoay. 6. Hm. 2 Ao. Imv. dvyco, Par. dvjpevos. +4. Hm, Pres. Mid. also mimrdver at (829 a); 2 Ao. Mid. 3 8S. majo, 3 P. _ miro, became full, and in comp. furAnro, %umAqvto (in Aristoph. Opt. gun , Imy. urAnoo, Par. éuwraAjpevos). TAAaw is chiefly poetic, 2 Pf. wé i. ye 8. The form mphSw occurs only in év-érpndov Il, 1, 589. ae 10. Hm. Pr. Par. BiBds, from st. Ba, common Pr. Balyw to go (435, 1). ‘ta 404 D. 2. Middle forms of pnui are rare in Att. (thus in Plato, Pf. Imy. 3 §. rehdoSw), but common in other dialects; yet the Pr. Ind. Mid. is not used, " is Impf. epduny, Eparo or dro, etc., Imy. pdo, PdcSw, etc., Inf. pdcda, . pdpmevos.

8, Ha, has xph, xpiv, xpiivat, but amoxpe (ara, KaTéxpa), aroxpiiv. ahs

138 VERBS IN MI OF THE FIRST CLASS. - [404

To which add the following deponent verbs:

4. ayd-pat to admire, Impf. 7ydpnv. Fu. dydoopa, Ao. P. nydo%nv (418, rarely M. jyacdunv), V. dyaords.

5. duvd-pat to be able, Sivaca (poet. Sivy), Sivarat, ete. Impf. eSuvauny, édvvw (401 ¢), eddvaro, ete.; Pr. Sub. divepa (401 k), Opt. duvaiuny (401 k), Imv. dvva (401 c), Inf. divacda, P. duvdpevos. Fu. duvyocopa, Pf. dedvynpat, Ao. P. edvvnSny (418, seldom edvvacRny), V. duvards able, possible. Augment often n (3808 a); but never nduvacSny.

6. éniard-pa to understand, érioracat, ériorarat, etc. 5 ; Impf. nrordpny, nriore (401 ¢), nricraro, ete.; Sub."éricrwopa (401 k), Opt. émioraipny (401 k), Imv. éexiore, Inf. éwioracza, P. émiardpevos. Fu. émeornocopa, Ao. P. amiarnSnv, V. émarnrés.

7. &pa-pat to love (poetic for épd-w 419, 3). Ao. P. npdo®ny (413) V. épaotés. |

8. xpéud-pat to hang intrans. (cf. 439, 2), Impf. éxpenapny ; Sub. xpéuopa (401 k), Opt. xpeuaiuny (401k). Fu. xpepnoopat.

a . .

405. B. Stems in «. 1. eiue (%, Lat. i-re) to go.

v nA >. ” lJ wy a Pr. Ind. Eiut, “et, Elo, irov, trov, ipev, tre, taoes + > 2” > Impf. qetv OF za, ‘ y jetpev OF 7per, gets “ evona, yelropy rh YTV, gence TE nee “ qeuy, neitny “ nv, eoav. 7 ” a” x4 ” » Lf a ° Pr. Sub. tw, iS, U7, inTOV, INTO, LOPE, INTE, t@OLS y v 7 SA ” Opt. ioiny, tots, Lot, totrov, loirny, toupev, loure, Lovey; 7 M Imv. 121, ire, troy, trey, ire, tr@oay OF idvtmy $3 Inf, igvat: Par. iay, iovaa, idv, G. idvros (Lat. euntis) ; Verbals. irds, iréos (also irnréov one must go).

5. Hm. and Hd. have in Ao. P. only édvvdcSnv. Hm. has also Ao. M, eduynoduny. 6. Hd. Pr. Ind. 2 8. ég-emlorea: for éferioraca. a

9. St. apa, common Pr. dpdouar to pray, Hm. Pr. Act. Inf. dphuevas only Od. x, 322. +a - 10. St. fAa, common Pr. iAdoropat (444, 5) to propitiate, Ep. TAgmar rare; also in Act., Imv. “And: Hm. (iAGd Theoc.) be propitious.

Hm. has the following wu-verbs of the first class with stems in e: ,

a. &nut (ae) to blow, 2 D. &nrov, Impf. 3 8. &y or wet, Inf. afjvar or Ghuevat, Par. dels; Mid. Impf. 3 8. &nro, Par. &juevos.

b. St. due to make flee (in Mid., also to flee), Impf. 8 P. év-diecay; Mid. Pr, 3 P. dlevra, Sub. Sloper, Opt. 3 8. Storro (401 k), Inf. SiecSar. See 409, 5.

c. dfCnuat (5i¢e) to seek, 28. Signa, Par. diChuevos; Fu. dChoopat.

d. St. «xe (from xx, common Pr. xixdvw to come up to, 486, 7), Impf. 2 S. éxixes, 3 D. sexjrnv, Sub. xxelw, Opt. xexetnv, Inf. xexfvar or nixhmevat, Par. «xels, Mid. nyhuevos (400 D m).

405 D. 1. Hm. Pr. Ind, 2 8. eloSa; Impf. #ia (406 D a, 364 D) or Hioy Ft h), 3S. #ie or He, 1 P. jouer, 3 P. Hiov, Hioav, or 7oay. Hm. has also an ~ mpf. with simple i: 3. %, 3 D. %rnv, 1 P. quer, 3 P. toa. Hd. has in Impf. 18. ia, 38. Hie, 3 P. Hioar. , ps |

h flection a peaaeninti: “The initial j ngthen pplying the elena

Fak Ge poche sects (367 Bh gs wy)

2. Kelp phones Pf ag apnea tym tah

peat, Ase KeipeSa, ne exelieSa, Keio Zor, Keiose, eKEtoo, €ketoSov, — €xeroBe,

Prameeston,® KEtvTat 5 EKELTO, penenrigl i EKELVTO 5

sub. 3 S. Kénrat, FP Meera? 3 Opt. 3S. xéouro, 3 P. Kéowro (39 a)

? V. Ketoo, Keio Sa, KetoSov, Keto Sov, KeloSe, KelaS@oay Or Kelo sav § 3

me oe ketoSat; Par. xeiwevos. Fu. xeioopat.

Rem. a. The Inf. xeicSa: retains its areas bb in composition: xaraxeicSat,

ontrary to 365.

4 _ 406. C. Stems in s. 1. ciui (es, Lat. es-se) to be. Png PE Ind. Tipe

> , > ‘he STHEY, ny or 7, . a pad Re 3 > €gTOVY, €0TE, Yorsa, naortov OY nrov, nre OY HOTE, éardv, eiol; HV, qotny ‘ #rnv, noav3 Pr. Sub. Pr. Opt. S > + Pp 4 @ILEV, €lnV, etnuev OF eiuer, ‘ ww TOV, — ATE, eins, einrov OY eirov, einte * ire i Ul E) w i TOY, ° @Ol5 ein, eintny “* eirnv, etnoay “ elev;

Hm. Sub. 2 §. tycSa, 3 8. tot, 1 P. tomer (1) or twpev (i); Opt. 3 8. You (once _leln), Inf. iévar, qucvar or Ywev; Fu. efroua, Ao. cioduny, irreg, éerdunv. tevra Od. x, 304, sometimes regarded as Pr. Mid. of ews, should be written evra (403; 1).

ms 2. Hm. Pr. Ind, 3 P. netyrat, keiara (355 De), réara (39 a); Impf. 8 P. ieewro, Kelaro, kéaro; Sub. 38. xjra; Iterative (410 D)3 8. kéonero; Fu. elo OF xéw (378 D).——H4d. resolves e into ee, but only in cases where ¢ might be used as a connecting vowel: Kéerau, éxéero, reader, Kéeovat (not Kee jut, keewevos). In the Ind. 3 P. he has xéwra, éxéaro.

En. has two or three yu-verbs of the first class with stems in o and v: a, bvo-wat to find fault with, 28. dvoom, Opt. 8S. Bvorro (401 k); Fu. ‘copa, Ao. avorduny (Hd. avéoonp). Hm. ‘has also from st. ov, Pr. 2 P. ote Not D c) and Ao. dvdunr. be douas (ep, exp 24 D c) to guard, preserve, Ton. and poet. The efortae

i ta 3 P. eipdara, Impf. 2S. Zpico, 3 8. epiro, elpuro, 3 P. efpuvro, waro, Inf. gpvoda, pyodsa. Fu. éptovoua, (844 D; epteoSau, 878 D), s couat, Ao. épula)oduny, eipu(c)oduny. Cf. épbw to draw (420 D, 12).

Fr om eee ey (pb) = Jetouns come mi-forms, Impf. 3 P. ptaro, inf, provat.

of ?

are J

Ao. éppiodunr. et orev ret L to, undertake, Pr. Impf. 3 8. oredra:, orevro (Aesch,

140 VERBS IN MI OF THE FIRST CLASS. [406

Pr. Imv. to%, ¢orw, eéorov, ora, gore, Ecr@oay OF EoT@Y 5

Inf. efvar; Par. dv, oda, dv (ovr).

_ Impf. Mid. funy (rare, and only in 1 Sing.). Fu. Mid. écopa (3S. gorac), O. ecotuny, 1. oeoSat, P. eadpevos.

Rem. a. In the Pr. Ind., 1S. eizi is for eo-y1, o being dropped and e lengthened: 2 S. e? is for eo. (properly eo-ci): 3 8. éo-ri retains the orig. ending 71: 3 P. etoi has arisen from eo-yri. In the Impf,, qv, Hoda, je are for n(o)-v, n(o)-o%a, n(o-r) :. in Ao-a-r(r), a is a connecting vowel. The Sub. 3 is for (Ion.) from ec-w: the Opt. ein is for ec-in-v. The Imy. 3 P. gorwy is for eo-vrev (a form éyrey occuts only an Pl. Leg. 879 b). The Inf. efva is for eo-var: the Par. dv is for édv (Lon.) from ec-ar.

Rem. b. The forms of the Pr. Ind. are all enclitic, except the 2 S. e7. After a‘ paroxytone, they have an accent on the ultima, by 108. But the 3 Sing. takes the regular accent, gor,

1. when it expresses existence or possibility : 2. when it stands at the beginning of a sentence: 3. when it follows ov, 7, ef, os, Kai.

Thus rovro & gore that which exists, gore por Bovopeve tt is according to my wish, «i €or ovtas if it 28 80.

Rem. c. The Par. av, oda, etc., retains its accent in composition: rapov, mapovoa; So also the 3 8S. Fu. gora for everar: rapeora. The retention of the accent in several other compound forms is not irreg.: mrapnv (3868 b), wapd, wapeiev (400 k), wapeivat (367 ©).

406 D. 1. Hm. has many peculiar forms: " Pr. Ind. 28. éoot and e?s, 1 P. etuév, 3: P. (iol, and) gaox not enclitic ; Impf. ja, ga, ov, 28. (Roda and) &ycda, 3 8. (Fv and) jer, Env, Fnv, 8 P. (jay and) cay; Iterative (410 D) goxor (for eo-cxoy) ; Sub. 2, e%w, 8S. %, Zor, Hot, 3 P. €wor (once dar); ‘ Opt. (ezyy etc., also) ors, Zor; Imv. 2 8. €o-co (middle ending); Inf. (efvar and) Eupevau (for eo-wevar), Euper, also Euevau, Ever ; Par. ééy, éodoa, édv (eovT). Fu. often with oo: %rcoua; Fu. 8 8. (Z0era:, Zora: and) éroerat, also éooetra: (as in Dor.),

Hd. Pr. Ind. 2 8. efs, 1 P. eiuév; Impf. ga, 28. das, 2 P. gare; Iterative Zorxov; Sub. %w, Zwo1; Opt. once év-éor; Par. édy.

Dor. Pr. Ind. 2 8. éoot, 1 P. eiués, 3 P. évri; Impf. 88. Fs, 1 P. Hues; Inf. eiuev, juev; Par. édv. Fu. eooetpar, 9, etras, etc.

Rem. a. Some of these forms have a connecting vowel: so gaor for ¢(0)-a- (v)o1, ha for n(o)-a-(v) or noon Lat. eram, cf. 3 P. jo-a-r(7) Lat. erant. In &a, — Zoay, the augment is omitted: je is for n(c)-e-v: env, #nv come from Fy by doubling the H-sound: Zoy for e(o)-o-y omits the augment, and has the usual — connecting vowel o: this appears also in the Opt. dors, Zou, etaro Od. v, 106, sometimes regarded as Impf. Mid. of eiuf, should be written efaro (406 D, 2).

2. Hm. has Ind. 3 P. efara, claro (355 D e); with irregular change of q © to et, rarely gata, aro, Only once Rvro. Hd. always eara, €aro. 4

From two other consonant-stems, Hm. has pi-forms, viz. -

8. From @5-w (450, 3) to.eat, Pr. Inf. %-wevas; cf. Lat. estis for ed-tis, ssse for ed-se. 1 4, From oép-w (450, 6) to bear, Pr. Imy. 2 P. pép-re; of. Lat. fer-te,

i*, ‘

i x)

F = f pt qj

the io prose almost rs uses the compound — to sit down,

pat, KAS oat, Kant at, etc.

een Shn, exdsnoo, ekasnro, etc. (314)

or — KaSuny, KaSijro, kasjaTo, etc. (368 b)

>r, Sub. Kasapat, ka&7j, Ka&Arat, etc. (400 i)

_ Opt. kaSoipny, KaSoi0, KaZoiro, etc. (400 i)

— Imy. xdSnoo, katjo%, etc. Inf. casjo%a, Par. Kash pevos. 4 Pew, Corecwadiagd pregularly sata the accent of hasta? cf. caraket- a).

: 2 Verbs in ws of the Fifth Class.

a 407. In these, the endings of the present and imperfect are applied, not to the verb-stem itself, but to the syllable vv or ter a vowel) vvv, Which is added to the stem: Scix-vi-yt_ to show, xepd-vvi-y1 to mix. The added v is short, except in the singular of the indicative active, according to the rule in 336 a, a gti 300.

Rem, a. These verbs often take a connecting vowel, and thus con- form to the ordinary inflection: Sexvia, Sexvies, “ete. ; : especially i in the ap. Pr. Ind. Act.: Sexvvovor. In the Sub. and Opt., they are never stinguished from verbs in @ (401 1). ~The enumeration of these verbs will be found in 439-48, under Ppecial Fo: oak oti Fifth Class. *

S i 4 Bes Second Aorists of the pu;form. 408. For the 2 Aor. of Verbs in- wx iui, see 403,13 riamus, 403, 2; “lao 403, A; torn, 403, 55 dvivnpt, 403, 6; minh 403, 7. - St | s in a. er ey (Ba) to go (435, 1). 0. By, Ba, Bair, Bij 401 b), Riva, Bés. :

. 1. Hm. a. 3 D. Barny and Barny, 8 P. eBnoay, and ¢Bay Bdp Scape éBa » Sub. fae (400 D i) 38. Bins 1 P, Betouer (Hd. Béwyer),

142 SECOND AORISTS OF THE MI-FORM. r408

2. ynpd-okw to grow old (444, 1). 2 Ao. Inf. ynpava (poetic).

3. didpdoKw (Spa) to run (444, 2), used only in compounds. 2 Ao. edpar, (pas, edpa, etc.; dpa, dpds, Spa, etc.; Spainv, dparz, Spaivay

pats : 4, xreive (xrev, Kra) to hilt (433, 4). . 2 Ao. (poetic) < extay, extas, extd; Par. xrds, M. Krdpevor.: .

5. méropat (aer, also ) 7a) to fly (424, 19), 2 Ao. Act. (only poetic) é exrny, mrainy, nrijvar, wrds. : Mid. (also in. prose) émrdpny, TrdgSat, wTdLevos. . :

6. St. rda to endure, rare in Attic prose. oe 2 Ao. érAnv, TAG, TAainv, TAH, TAHvat, TAds. . Fu. rAncopa, Pf. neh (409 D, 10), V. rAnrés.

7. p%ava (pa) to anticipate (435,.3). 2 Ao. efinv, PIG, PRainv, PIjvar, PSs.

8. St. mpud, used for Aor. of dvéopa: to buy (450, 7). 2 Ao. émpiapny, mpiopar, mpiaipny (401 k), mpi, mpiacSat, mpeapevos.

Stems in «.

9. oBévvupe (oBe) to put out, extinguish (440, 3). } . 2 Ao. gaBnv went out (416, 5), Inf. oPyvat.

10. okéd\XA@ (oKeA, oxre) to dry trans. (432, 15). } 2 Ao. éoxrnv became dry (416, 6), Inf. oxdrjvat. :

ll. éyo (vex, oxe) to have, ie cone! Al)ati~ 2 Ao. Imy. oyés (for oxe%, 401

Stems in o. 12. ddioxopat (dA, ado) to be taken (447, 1). . 2 Ao. édhoy or Nov, GAO, GAoinv, Gddvat, Addods (4 only in Indic.), 13. Bid-o to live (423, 2) 2 Ao. éBiwy, Bid, Bianv, Bidvat, Brods. 14. yeyvarke (yv0) to know (445, 4).

2 Ao. éyvav, yva, yvoiny, yv@%, yvevat, yous,

Stems in u and v. 15. wive (mt) to drink (435, 4). 2 Ao. Imy. wi (poet. mie).

2. Hm. Par. yp pas. 3. Hd. pny, Inf. Spiivou, but Par. dpds.

4. Hm. 8 P. grav, Sub. «réwpmev (400 D i), Inf. wrdwevar, nrdpev; Mid. 8 8. Zeraro was killed, Inf. rrdoSa.

5. The 2 Ao. Act. is not found in Hm.; in Att. Trag. (chorus) if appears as Dor. érray.

6. Hm. 3 P. érad. Hm. has also Fu. raddoow, Ao. érddacoa (st. raAa)

7. Hm. 3 P. pdav, Sub. 3 S. o34n or PSHor (once Tap-PFalnor), 1 P. PSe- wuev, 8 P. p&éwot.

12. The form with ¢ is not found in Hm. and Hd. Hm. has Sub.388 bAdy (400 D i), Opt. 8 8. aroln and arg, Inf. aaévat and GAdpevent,

14, Hm. Sub. 3 §. a and yw, Inf. ywdueven and ywava. Pind. ‘Ina.

3 P. éyvar, &yvor.

3 416 "aes 5 Ben ato tn 8

. bet me 3), pio, piva, dus.

: D. The following second aorists of the p-form are peculiar to the Epic -

i 18. ‘he to satiate, Pr. M. 3 8. horas (370 D a), Fu. dow, 1 Ao. doa; 2 Ao. became sated, Sub. 1 P. Zouer ca D i, wrongly éwyey), Inf. dueva; V. a&ros tate (for taros). He ‘19. dmavpd-w to take away, 2 Ao. Par. &arovpas (M. &roupduevos Hes.). * «20. BdrAAw (Bar, BAa) to ee at (432, 4), 2 Ao. 8 D. tuu-Bajrny encoun- tered, Inf. tupBahwever; Mid. 3 8. ZBAnro was hit, wounded, Sub. 3 8S. BAherau (4 00 D i), Opt. 2 8. Bacio 78 BAn-t0), Inf. Prijodar, Par. ‘BAtwevos. _—s- 21. obrd-w to wound (423 D, 5), 2 Ao. 38. obra, Inf. odrduevar, odrduer, - Mid. Par. obrduevos wownded. 22. arendw (mehad) to come near (428 D, 21). From cognate stem aAa - come 2 Ao. M. 38. wAjjro, @rAnro, 8 P. Ksnry, TARVTO. ~—-: 23. arhoow (ryt) to crouch (428,'7). From cognate stem ara come 2 Ao. 8 Du. kara-wrhrny, Pf. Par. remrnds, ment naros. 24. hic ad (Bop, Bpo) to eat (445, 3), 2 Ao. éBpwv. io 2B. -w Ion. and poet. for wA€w (Av) to sail (426, 3), 2 Ao. (in comp.) | &mrov, Par. wads.

26. erigw (Krid) to fownd. From cognate stem «rt comes 2 Ao. M. Par.

- e-eriwevos well-founded. g 27. pSt-ve to perish (435, 6), 2 Ao. M. ébdSiunv, Sub. 3S. bSterar, 1 P. pdid- ae Opt. pSipny (for PSi-iyuny, 33), 38. pdtro, Inf. oSicda:, Par. pdtuevos.

28. St. nav (426 D, 8), 2 Ao. &kAvoy heard, Imv. KaAds, 2 P. crore, also

; nevus, kékdute (384 D). pa 29. Av-co to loose (269), 2 Ao. M. Aijunv, 3S. Adro and Adro, 8 P. Advro. 30. mvew (vv) to breathe (426, 4), 2 Ao. M. 3S. &u-mviiro recovered breath. 81. cevdw (ov) to drive (426 D, 9), 2 Ao. M. 3 8. ciro, Par. ovpevos (Trag.). 32. xéw (xv) to pour (426, 6), 2 Ao. M. 3 8. xiiro, 3 P. xbvro, Par. xdpevos.

Also the following (all in the middle) from verbs with consonant-stems:

33. GAAouan (GA) to leap (432, 3), 2 Ao. 2, 3S. GAoo, GAro (éx-GATo), Sub. 88. Ot GAnrat, Par. en-dAmevos (also ém- dAuevos). 34. dpapioxw (ap) to join (447 D, 1); 2 Ao. M. Par. tpuevos fitting. 35. St. yev, only in 2 Ao. 3S. yevro he grasped. 36. déx-ouar to receive, 2 Ao. eéyuny, 38. déer0, Imv. défo, Inf. déxSaz, . déypevos. eT. Ree to speak, 2 Ao. pata’ counted myself, 3 8. A€wro counted (for imself). 88. St. Acx (no Pres.), 2 Ao. 3 s. crcxro laid himself to rest, Imv. er ss Adéeo, see 349 D), Inf. nara-rAéxSa, Par. cara-rAéypevos. Fu. Ackouat, 1 “ae and Act. Acta laid to rest. 39. ply-vuys to mix ce 7), 2 Ao. 38. uuro, wiro. eur to rouse (442, 11), 2 Ao. 3 8. dpro, Imv. dpco (as to dpoeo, see

Inf. dpSa:, Par. dpuevos.

u

Pits. 3 P. Liv and ’iouy, Sub. 3 g. dun, Opt. 3 8. Sdn (for du-in, 83), ei SB ipos Inf. Séuevar and Sdvar; Iterative d0cKor.

144 SECOND PERFECTS OF THE MI-FORM. [408 —

41. why-vupu to fix (442, 12), 2 Ao. 38. kar-érneto stuck.

42. wdAdrw (maa) to shake (432 D, 26), 2 Ao. 38. wdaro dashed himself.

43. mwépS-w to destroy, 2 Ao. Inf. "répSau (for mepd-oSa) to be destroyed. Here belong also two adjectives, originally participles of the 2 Ao. Mid.:

44, &opevos well-pleased, glad (st. a5, Pr. avddvw to please, 487, 1).

45. txpevos favorable (st. ix, Pr. indyw to come, 438 D, 2).

Second Perfects of the pu-form.

409. In the indicative, the p.-form appears only in the dual and plural ; the singular always has a connecting vowel: see paradigm, 308.

1. torn (ora) to set, 1 Pf. & cornka (for oe-oTnxa) stand (416, 1), with regular inflection; 2 Pf, Dua. ¢ eataroy, etc. Paradigm, 305.

2. Baivw (Ba) to go oo 1), 1 Pf. BeBnxa have gone, stand fast ee , 2), regular; 2 Pf 3 P. BeBaor, Sub. 3 P. BeBaor, Inf. Peeve

ar BeBaos, BeBaca, G. BeSards (contracted from BeBaas).

3. yiyvopat (yer, also ya) to become (449,1), 2 Pf. yéyova regular: 2 Pf. Par. yeyas, yey@oa, G. yeyoros (contracted from yeyas).

; 4, SunoKe (Sav, Sva) to die (444, 4), 1 Pf. réSvnxa am dead regular 2 Pf. Pi TESVGMEV, TESVATL, 2 Plup. 3 P. eresvacay, Pf. Opt. reSvainv, Imv. resvaci, Inf. reSvavat, Par. reSvews, -@oa, -ds, G. -a@ros (26).

5. St. dv (er 30, Sou 25), 1 Pf. Sédouxa, 2 Pf. Séd1a, fear; 2 Pf. Pl. dediper, Sedidor, 2 Plup. 3D. ededirny, 3 P. édedicav, Pf. Sub. dedio, Opt. Sedieinv, Imv. d€d.S1, Inf. dedsevar, Par. SedvHs. Fu. deicouar (412 a), Ao. edevoa.

Rem. a. Instead of the ,-forms of this verb, forms with a connecting , vowel are sometimes found: Sediaper, ddeMecriiy.

The following have stems ending in a consonant, and are subject, — therefore, to various euphonic changes : ; ;

4 409 D. 1. Hm. Pf. 2P. Eornre, Inf. éordweven, éorduer, Par. éorads, éorar j bros. Hd. Par. éoreds, éoreaoa, etc., Ind. 3 P. éoréact (?). _ 2. Hm. Pf. 3 P. BeBdaor, Par. BeBads, BeBavia, G. BeBa@ros. 8. Hm. Pf. 3 P. yeydaot, Plup. 8 D. yeyaérny, Inf. yeyauev, Par. yeyacs, yeyavia, G. yeyadros. . 4, Hm. Imv. réSvam&, reSvdrw, Inf. reSvduevar, redvduev, Par. G. reSvna- tos, also reSvndros (some write reQvermros, Tedveidros), Fem. reSvqulys ; only p once Tedve@ri, as in Att. ; 5. Hm. has de for the redupl., defdia, detdorxea (once dediaor), and dou- bles 8 after the augment, 25de.ca, as well as after a short vowel in comp., me piddelcas (once brodeloare). Probably the original stem was dr: hence Pf. d<dria, Ao. eS¥eroa, which, after ¥ was lost, were changed to deldia, 2dde0a, preserve the long quantity of the first syllable. For SelBia, Hm. has also 5el6 with present form, but only in the first person sing. He has also an Impf. at Siov, feared, fled, always With epi, though separated from it by tmesis (477) cf, 404 Db.

ot

"SECOND PERFECTS OF THE ME-FORM. 145

t 7) (ed 30, ond arch 2 Ao. efdov saw, 2 Pf. ofa know—~The system of this verb presents several forms of the stem. inal 18 (i. e. FS, gi vid-eo) appears in the Pf. Ind. Du. and Pl.

1 ae ; the lengthened ‘et6, in the Pf. Par., and in the Plup.,

hicl changes it to 7 for the augment. eS becomes o1d by variation of m ‘owel in the Sing. of the Pf. Ind.: in the Sub., Opt., and Inf, it assumes ¢ (331), giving saat The 3 P. Pf. Ind. icaox is wholly irregular.

r. f. Ind. oi0-a, oi-cS%a, ofd-e, ta-Tov, to-rov, to-pev, aly. to-dore3 a ‘

joey or Hn, pOetpev or 7oper, noeasa “ ‘ idno%a, jjdecrov or HoTor, joewre “ jOTEe, noe(v) “ 7dn, noeitny “ norny, ndecay “ yoav; ~ e160, eid7ys, €id7, eiOnrov, eidntov, elddpev, eldjre, eiddoe5 eideiny, eldeins, eidein, etc. 5

to-S1, to-To, A Lo-T OY, to-re, to-recar;

Inf. idé-var; Par. cidds, etdvia, <idds, G. eidSdros. a ctcouat (412 a) shall know, V. ioréov. Rem. a. The forms des and 7dys are also used for jetaZa and 75n- Bea: oidas for ofo%a is rare ; still rarer, oidapev, oldare, otdaat, for toper, ete. ; rare and poetic, theier, noere, for Whetiber) Noelre. my . 7. St. ux (eek, otk), only i in 2 Pf. gotxa am like, appear, 2 Plup. E@Kety 3 (2Ph 1 P. eoixaper, poetic ¢ covypev, 3 P. colkaat, irreg. etaor (cf. icact), Inf. dorxévac and cixévas, Par. éorxas and eixads, vi ds. Fu. eté@ rare. _ 8. Kpago (kpay) to ery (428, 13), 2 Pf. xéxpa@ya as present; 2 Pf. _Imy. KEKpAaXSt. _ 409 D. Add further for Homer, — 9, palouat (ua, wer, cf. ya, yev | in 8 above) to reach after, seck : for, 2 Pf. to press on, desire eagerly 2 Pf. 8. uguova, as, ¢, D. wéucroy, P. pe mapev, peudire, ’ aydg Plup. 3 P. weuaoay, Pf. Imv. 38. weudrw, Par. wepads, via, G. meud- os or [enadros.

10. Pf. rérAnka (rAa) am patient (408, 6); 2 Pf. 1 P. rérAduev, Opt. re- “tAalny, Imy. rérAas, Inf. rerAduer(a), Par. rerAnds, via, G. dros.

— 11. 2 Pf. tvwya, as, € (avery) command, 1 P. tivoyuer, Imv. GvaXSt, 3 8. ee (with middle ending; so) 2 P. kvwyse: Sub. dvdéyw, Opt. dydryorut, rare Imv. tywye, Inf. dywyduer. Plup. jvdyea, 38. jvdye(v), commonly avéye. Por irreg. Plup. #vwyor (or tvaryor), 38. hvwye, 3 P. hydyevy, see 351 D. For PE 38. dvwye he commands, avdéye is sometimes used: 2 D. dvéyerov for dvw- yarov. Fu. dvdiw, Ao. Sveoke.

m>”'29. eyelpw (eyep) to wake (432, 5), 2 Pf. eyphryopa am awake, 3 P. éypnydp- aot wholly irreg., Imv. 2 P. eyphyopSe (middle ending), Inf. éyphyopSa: (middle ding, cog accent irreg.). Hence Pr. Par. éypyyopdwr.

i 8. Hm. has Pf. 1 P. ize (46 D), Plup. 2, 3 8. HdnoSa, H5n or Hee, also ery irreg. Heldns, Heldn (perhaps for eredys, ereidn); Plup. 3 P. tray (for 18-cav) ; > Su D. €ld@ (idéw ?), P. efSomer, elSere, cidGor; Inf. 3uevat, Suerv, Par. Fem. z and idvia (cf. 338 D); Fu. elooua and idjow.

4; Hd. has Pf. 1 P. Yéuev, Plup. 1, 38. #dea, Hee, 2 P. jddare; Fu. eidhow.

e Dor., with ofda, has a peculiar Pres. Yoaut, tens, tori, P. trauev, trav. . Hm. Impf. 3 8. ele, 2 Pf. 8 D. ixrov, 2 Plup. 3 D. éterny, 3 P. éofke , Pl p. Mid. 3 . Hixro or eixro.— Hd. has Pf. ofxa, Par. oixds.

a

146 DIALECTIC FORMATIONS. [409 |

+

3 q

13. %pxouat to come (450, 2), 2 Pf. éahavSa, etc.; also eiAfAovSa, 1 P.

eiAhAovapev (25 D). 14, adoxw (aad, revd) to suffer (447, 13), 2 Pf. wérov8a, 2 P. wémoode (better wéracSe, for rewad-re), Par. Fem. remadvia. ° 15. welSw (mS) to persuade (295), 2 Pf. réroda trust, 2 Plup. 1 P. éwéms pev (Imy. wémeicd: Aesch.). 16. BiBpdonw (Bpo) to eat (445, 8), Pf. BéBpwra (Par. N. P. BeBpdres Soph.). 17. wiarw (wer, wre, wro) to fall (449, 4), Pf. wéwrwxa, Par. A. P. wemre- &ras (werrds, wewT Gros, Soph.), cf. 408 D, 23. bel

DIALECTIC FORMATIONS.

Some formations, which are unknown in Attic prose, o¢cur

more or less frequently in other dialects. 410 D. Irerative Formation.

The iterative imperfect represents a continued past action as repeated or —

usual: méumecxe he was sending (repeatedly), used to'be sending. The iterative aorist has the same force in reference to indefinite past action, marking it as repeated or usual: érdoacke he drove (repeatedly), used to drive. Both are confined to the Indic., Act. and Mid.; and are generally found without the augment (in Hd. always so).

They are formed from the tense-stem of the Impf. or Aor., by adding the

tterative-sign ox, which takes the connecting vowels and endings of the Impf.: —

thus Act. -on-o-v, -ox-e-s, -ox-€, etc., Mid. -ox-o-uny, -oK-e-0, -oK-€-T0, etc.

These terminations are united with the tense-stem by a connecting vowel, —

viz. ¢ for the Irpf. and 2 Aor., @ for the 1 Aor.: pév-e-cxov (uévw to remain),

gby-e-cne (pedyw to flee), épntio-a-cxe (épntiw to restrain).——A very few iterative imperfects have a: kptrr-a-oxoy (kpirrw to hide), pimr-a-cxov (pirre

to throw). oxov (kadéw to call); or is dropped: &%e-cxov (@Séw to push). Verbs in aw sometimes change ae to aa: vaterdacxoy (vaserdw to inhabit), cf. vaerda.

In contract verbs, € either remains without contraction: kaAé-e-

The connecting vowel is omitted, when the ordinary Impf. or 2 Aor. has the — pu-form ; &pa-cxoy (pny said), ord-cKoy (Earn stood), &-cxrov (iv was), Ké-oKETO

(for xet-oxero, éxelunv lay), phyvu-cxov (epphyviv was breaking). The iterative aorist is found only in poetry.

411 D. Formation In &

Several verbs annex 9 to the tense-stem of the Impf. or 2 Aor.: & is usu- ally connected with the stem by the vowels a ore. This formation does not modify the meaning: it is mostly poetig, occurring very seldom in Attic prose, It is found chiefly in the Impf. or Aor. Ind. The following are the most im portant of these forms:

didkw to pursue StoKnd do

elxw to yield eixddw

dutve to ward off dpuvddso " elpyw to shut out gpyaxoy or éépyadtoy

Lelpw to lift up hepéSovrat, ovro, floated) in air éryelpw to assemble yepedovrat, ovro

pr éye to burn prcyeso

prtvw to perish Prwise

&xw to hold érxedov, Inf. cxedéew

Extoy went, Aor. éxladoy

4 : 4

v1 I “SHAT en mets ro MB Es baiere _ IRREGULARITIES or MEANING.

pelosi important irregularities of meaning are caused He panini? in the sense of another, or by PEE transitive tive senses in the same voice.

eb Forms of one voice in the sense of another.

a He a. In many verbs which have an active voice, the future middle s the place of a future active (879): pav3dve to learn, pa®joopa

) shall learn. This is the case with a large proportion of the whieh compose the fifth and sixth classes.

ee many verbs the future middle has the meaning of a future pas- ve (379): Neizrw to leave, Neirouar (= AecpSjoopar) shall be left.

i 413. ce. The deponent verbs are to be regarded as forms of the middle

“yoice. Yet in the aorist, not a few take the passive form instead of the niddle : BovAopat to wish, Fu. Bovdnoopa, but Ao, eBovdn Inv (not eBovdn-

al “oapny) wished. These are called passive deponents ; and the rest, in dis-

. age from them, are called middle deponents.

__ Of passive deponents, the most important are the following: those

F "which i in the future have a passive form as well as a middle, are marked

with an *: thus *Siadéyopae to converse, Ao. SuehéxSnv conversed, Fu.

4 | duadéfopas and diarexSyoopar shall converse.

» @yapat to admire (419, 1) *7dopat to be pleased

*aidcouat to feel shame (448, 1) *évSupconas to consider

dopa to wander mpoSupeopas to be forward

pur Guhddopat to contend. *Siadéyouae to converse (424, 15)

—_ dpvéopar to deny ertpehopar to care for (422, 11) “a OS She to be grieved (422, 1) perapehouat to regret Bovdopat to wish (422, 3) '. aqrovoéopat to despair — = Sopa to want-(422, 4) *Svavoéopat to meditate 8€pxopar to see (424 D, 31) evvoeopar to think on — Ovvapat to be able (404, 5) _mpovocopat to foresee, provide ie evayr dopa to oppose *oiouat to think (422, 15) éxiotapa to understand (404, 6) o€Boua to revere

~ evAaBéomat to be cautious proryséopar to be ambitious _Ren. (a). Some of these verbs, beside the aorist passive, have an a0) ‘ist of the middle form: ys dyapat, Ao. usually nyaoSny, but also nyaoapny.

Ai. d. Several verbs have an acrist passive with middle meaning: ippaiva to make glad, etppavanyv made myself glad, rejoiced ; orpépe to wr7 Saptichryy turned (myself )s atvw to show, épavny showed myself, ppearec but édvany was s

a

115. e. Several deponent eke have a passive aorist and future with ve meaning: idopa to heal, i lacduny healed, iaSnv was healed; Séxo-

iS ’

De ebebin» received, edexSnv was received.——In some, the

ee

148 | IRREGULARITIES OF MBANING. [418

middle forms of the present or perfect systems may have both an active ~

and a passive meaning: piycopa to imitate, pepiwnua have imitated or have been imitated.

B. Mixture of transitive and intransitive senses.

416. In some verbs, the*forms of the active voice are divided between a transitive and an intransitive sense. The future and jirst aorist are then transitive ; the second aorist and the perfect are intransitive. The most important cases are the following:

1. torn (ora) to set, place, M. torapa: to set one’s self ; Trans., Fu. orice shall set, 1 Ao. éornoa set; Intrans., 2 Ao. gorny (set myself) stood, Pf. éornxa (have set myself) am standing, éornxew was standing, Fu. Pf. éorn&w shall stand. »

a. The same important distinction prevails in the numerous com- pounds of this verb:—ddiorn to set off, cause to revolt, awéotny stood off, revolted, adéornxa am distant, am in revolt, ediornut to set over, exeatny set myself over, epertnxa am set over, Kasiatnpas to set down, establish, xaréarny established myself, became established, xa%éornka am established. The Aor. Mid. has a different meaning: xareornoare estab- lished for himself. 7

' 2, Baive (Ba) to go (in poetry also cause to go) ; (Trans., Fu. Snow shall cause to go, 1 Ao. €8nca; Ion. and poet.) Intrans., 2 Ao. ¢8nv went, Pf. BéBnxa have-gone, stand fast.

3. hv-o to bring forth, produce ; so pica, épica ; intrans., épiv was produced, came into being, mésixa am by nature.

4, 8v-w to pass under, take on; xatadio to submerge trans.; so dice, edvca, but edav dived, set, evediv put on, e&edov put off.

5. oBé-vvvju to put out, extinguish; 2 Ao. éoBnv went out, Pf. éoBy-

ka am extinguished.

6. oxéAA@ (oxed) to dry trans.; intrans., 2 Ao. goxAnyv became dry, Fu. oxAnoopa, Pf. €oxAnka.

7. mive (mt) to drink, 2 Ao. ériov drank; 1 Ao. éxioa (Pr. rimioke) caused to drink.

8. yeivouat (yer, cf. 449, 1) to be born, poetic; 1 Ao. eyewdpuny begot,

brought forth.

417. In several verbs, the second perfect is the only active form which has an intransitive sense.

dyvupe to break 2 P£. gaya am broken

eyeipw to wake trans. eypiyopa am awake

ddAvps to destroy drdoda an ruined (dd@dexa have ruined) reis@ to persuade werowsa trust (weiSopar comply)

miyyvuur to fix nennya am fixed

pyyvupe to break éppwya am broken :

onme to rot trans. ceonra am rotten

ryxo to melt trans. rérnka am melted

daive to show réednva have shown myself, appeared

(paivopa to appear) For the difference between dvéwya and dvé@xa, mémpaya and mémpaya, See 387 b,

y) : J - ms i"

F Pe rae 1 eo ERE AR oh SPECIAL FORMATION.

ne ai

¥

Pit;

of the verbs included in them. But other forms are introduced

eriod of the Common dialect (3 e) ; for the most part, they are not met with before the conquest of Greece by the Romans (146 B. C.). Other abbreviations used to show the character of the forms are ,/r. (frequent), ”. (are), r. A. (rare in Attic), n. A. (not found in Attic), n.A. pr. (not in Attic prose). . _ Verbal Adjectives in rés, réos. These are seldom noticed in the fol-

Towing lists, when the verb has a first passive system, as they are easily inferred from that.

uke

First Crass (Stem-Class, 325).

, _ 419. The stem appears without change in the present. This is much the most numerous of all the classes. We notice here only those verbs of it which have peculiarities of formation.

I. Verbs im pu of the jirst class, see 404-6.

IL. Vowel-stems in which the final vowel remains short _. (contrary to 335). a. The following retain the short vowel in ai/ the forms: AL. @yapar (404, 4) to admire, Ao. P. iryaoSny (Ao. M. nyacduny yr. A. | wpr.), V. dyaordés. Pind. ayatoua. 2. yeddw to laugh, Fu. yeAdooua, Ao. éyédkaca, Ao. P. éyehaoSnv. (Hm. also yedoida. ) _ 8. pda to love, ——Ao. P. npdoSny as act. (Ao. M. npacdyny Hm.): also ‘Pr. épapar (404, 7) poetic. 4, Sido to crush, Fu. SAdow, Ao. daca (Pf. M. réSracpa, Ao. P. - «-€XAdoSnv, n. A.): also Ad with same meaning and inflection. _ . krdw to break,——F u. xhdow, Ao. éxhaca, Pf. M. xéxXacpat, Ao. P. - ékXdo Sv. . 6. onda to draw, Fu. ordcw, Ao. éonaca, Pf. goraxa, Pf. M. gorac- pa, Ao. P. eomdcSnv. 7. xadrdo to loosen, Fu. xakdow, Ao. éyddaoa (Pf. xexyddaxa, Pf. M. ad kexdhacpat, n. A.), Ao. P. éyadao3nv. 8. axéouat to heal,——Fu. dxéoopa, Ao. nxeecdpny [Ao. P. qeéoRnr]. . ‘9. ahéw to grind,——F u. ddéow (ado, 374), Ao. wreca, Pf. ddnrexa, Pf. Mz. adjreopat.

ia nt

>

yw), see 344 D. : Tae bas: Ata oy | 1. Beside &yapua: to admire, Hm. has wor and dyatoua to envy, Fu oat, Ao. ytioduny, V. dynrs. ,

bia! 9 D. a. For tense-sign o doubled in Hm. after the short vowel (éyéAaoea,

Nore. The following lists exhibit the Attic inflection (tense-_ extent. Those marked date (1.), or enclosed in [ ], belong to the ©

i Soe SPECIAL FORMATION. FIRST CLASS. [419

10. dpxéw to suffice, ——Fu. dpxéow, Ao. #pxeoa [Ao. P. npxéoSny].

11. euéw to vomit, Fu. éuéow (ua, euovpat, 874), Ao. fueca.

12. Céw to boil, Fu. (ecw, Ao. éCeoa, V. Ceords.

13. &é@ to scrape, Fu. ca, Ao. ééeoa, V. Eeords.

14. redkéw to complete, see Paradigm 288.

15. rpéw to tremble, Fu. tpéow, Ao. érpeca, V. a-rpeoros; r. A. pr.

16. dpdw to plough,——Fu. apdow, Ao. j#pooa, (Perf. M. dpjpowa: Hm.,) Ao. P. npd3nv.

17. dviw to achieve, Fu. aview, Ao. Hyvvca, Pf. avuca, Pf. M. Avopas, Ao. P. jviodny, V. dvvorés, but av-nvuros. Att. Pres. also dvira or dvitw (327).

18. dptw to draw water,——Fu. dpica, Ao. ijpvoa, V. dpvoréos. Att. Pres. dpirw (327). ‘

19. éAxw to draw, Fu. €h€o. Other tenses from st. éAxv, Ao. eiAkuoa, Pf. etAxuxa, Pf. M. eiAxucpa, Ao. P. cikxioSny, V. eAxréos and éAxvoréos. The forms éAxkvo, éAxiow, cihEa, etAxSnv are late.

20. arva to spit, Fu. aricw, Ao. érrvaa, V. rrvords.

420. b. The following retain the short vowel in a part of the forms. The first three make it long beforec. *

1. dé to bind, Fu. dno, Ao. gdnoa, Pf. SéSexa, Pf M. deSeua, Ao. P. ed€3nv, Fu. Pf. dedjoopat. 2. Siw to offer, Fu. Siow, Ao. @ioa, Pf réSixa, Pf. M. réSvpa, Ao. P. érvsnv (65 c), V. Svréos. 3. Ava to loose, see Paradigm 270-5, and compare 268 b. 4, aivéw to praise, Fu. aivecw, Ao. yveoa, Pf. qvexa, Ao. P. gvésnv; n only in Pf. M. nvnwar: in Att. prose used mostly in comp. . karéw to call, Fu. cadéow (kad, 374), Ao. éxddeoa; but n in Pf. kéxAnka, Pf. M. xéxAnuat, Fu. Pf. xexdjoopwar, Ao. P. éxdy%ny, all from - syncopated stem kde. 6. pve to shut the mouth or eyes,——F u. pic, Ao. gutca, but Pf. pepona am shut. .

Xt

17. Hm. Impf. 3 S. #viiro, as if from Pr. &yvus (Theoc.). Also poetic ayo, — only Pr. Impf. ;

19. Hm. also éAnéw (881), Fu. EAnhow, Ao. hannoa, Ao. P. HAKhdnv.

21. Ion. and poet. vexéw to quarrel, upbraid, Fu. veiwéow, Ao. évelera.

420 D. 8. Hm. 2 Ao. M. Aijuny, etc. (408 D, 29).

4, Hm, Fu. aivhow, Ao. yvnoa; Pr. also aivigouc (in Hes. otvnut). 5. Hmm. also rpo-nartCoua, poet. kucrhorw cl. 6. , 10. Hm. ado (ad) to harm, mislead, Pr. M. 3S. dara, Ao. tion, aioduny, contracted doa, dodunv, Ao. P. adoSnv. The first a may become &@ by aug- — ment. V. &-déros. 4

11. Hm. xoréw (also noréouat) to be angry, Ao. éxdreca, Pf. Par. xexornds (886 D) angry. 12. Ion. and poet. épvw (3) to draw, Fu. épiiow (Hm. also éptw, 378 D), Ao. — elpiica, Pf. etptuar(Karefpvoua). Hes. Pr. Inf. (wi-form) eipijwevor (28D), Hm. has eipv only as result of augm. or redupl. (312 D). Different are épdouat, pio- uat, to preserve (405 D b). ee 2

u

ay sort vows. 151 >. BUSY, V. durée, bias ; eoghat

pee A883. sag 6 » miss, Nebel pp ee are inflected regularly with : ae aks aes aorist cence:

=} “1 The forms i in which o is added to the stem (342) are the perfec middle and first passive systems, with the verbals.

e belong the stems under 419, so far as they are used in these

forms (only é dépdw to plough has Ao. P. ipoIyv). Further, the foll Ne owing in which the stem-vowel is either long, or, if short, is lengthened according to the rule in 335:

: hits to do,—Fu. Space, Ao. paca, Pf. dédpaxa, Pf M, dédpapat bs nes &éBoac pics), Ao. P. éSpdoSnv.

2 kvaw to scratch (371 c), Fu. kvnow, Ao. éxvnoa, Pf. M. xéxvyopat,

Ao. P. exvno nv. beg xpde to give oracle, —Fo. xpyow, Ao. éypnoa, Pf. xéxpnxa, Pf. M. @ KEXpn pnopat, oF P. éxpjodny. A, Yao to rub (371 a: Fu. yjow, Ao. eynoa (PEM. eynopa or : fae both late, Att. Aynyya from Pr. Wye, Fu. iE): chiefly Be) used i in composition. 5B. véw to heap up,——F u. ogee Ao. ened, Pf. M. vévrnopar and véernuat 4 [Ao. P, pi Ath and evnsnr), V . mrs. 6. Kvdto to roll, Fu. xudice, Ao. éxtdioa, Pf. M. xexiduopar, Ao. P. ——eéxvAla Sv. Pr. also Kvhivdeo and xvAwvdéo. 4 ee to saw,——F. mpi, A.é empioa, Pf. M, réempiopas, A. P. émpioSny. 8. xptw to anoint, Fu. ypicw, Ao. éxpioa, Pf. M. xéxpiopar (and xe- . xpipar), Ao. P. éxpio%ny. 9. xda to heap Up; Fu. yooo, Ao. éxwoa, Pf KEX@KA, Pf. M. xéyo- : opal, Ao. P. éyaoSny. eee Pr. yovrvus or yovvve cl. 5. 10. fie to polish,——F. vow, A . &doa, Pf. M. . Evopat, A. P. e&voSnv. AL. to (@) to rain,——Fu. dow, ‘Ao. doa, Pf. M. dopat, Ao. P. dodny. (12. kvaiw to seratch——Fu. xvaicw, Ao. exvauoa, PEM. kéxvaucpa, Ao. iP. exvaioSny. (18. raiw to strike——Fu. raico (and maunoe, 331), Ao. éraica, Pf. e- mrauka (Pf. M. mémraro pat late, Ao. P. éraicSny poet.—usu. wérAnypat, —— exdnyny, from mrjoow 428, 5). uM. maraiw to wrestle,——Fu. mbhatee, Ao, emddaoa, Ao. P. emadaio®ny

ei .

_ poetic.

15. kXeiw to shwt,——Fu. kreiow, Ao. xdevoa, Pf kéxdecxa, PL. M. ke- bs “ Khevopiae and Keeheeeel Ao. P. exdeiosnv.

16. kyo Att. for keto, inflected in the same way, but in Perf. Mid only KeKAgpat.

1D. 15. Ton. ease Ao. éxahion, Pf. M. rexagi(o)uc, Ao. P. éxani(a)syr . Dor. also Fu. crak, Ao. raga. | (24 t. E net. patw to shatter, Fu. patow, Ao. P. éppalodnv.

152 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIRST CLASS. [42

17. celw to shake, Ao. P. éceicSny.

18. Spavw to break, Fu. Spavoo, Ao. épavea, Pf. M. réSpavpar and reSpavopa, Ao. P. eSpavaSnv.

9. ratw to make cease, Mid. to cease,——Fu. ratcw, Ao. éravoa, Pf,

méravka, Pf. M. wéwavpa, Ao. P. ératvoSny (Ion. and old Att. émav%nyv), V. mavoréos. .

20. Kedevw to order, Fu. xedevow, Ao. exedevoa, Pf. cexédevxa, Pf. M. kexerevopat, Ao. P. éxehedoSnv.

21. Aevw to stone,——Fu. Aevow, Ao. edevoa, Ao. P. eevo nv.

22. dxovw to hear, see 423, 1, [Pf M. #rovopal, Ao. P. nxovoSnv.

23. xpove to beat, Fu. xpovow, Ao. éxpovoa, Pf. kéxpouxa, Pf. M. xéxpou- pa (but xéxpovorar), Ao. P. éxpovoSny.

Fu. cciow, Ao. éoevca, Pf: c¢oecxa, Pf. M. céceropat,

IV. Stems which assume e in some of the forms (881).

Future. Aorist. Perfect. Passive. 422. 1. dyZopuai to be displeased. axSécopa (413) nXSeoRnv (413) 2. Bocke to feed trans., Mid. intrans. . Booknoe [eBdoxnoa] ~ » [eBooxnSnv]

a. The primitive stem Bo appears in V. Bords (also Booxyréos). 3. Bovropa to wish. Augment, see 308 a. BovAngopa BeBotvAnpat €Bovdnsny (418) 4. d€m to need, Mid. to want, entreat. Senora edenoa dedenxa, SeSenuat edenSnv (418) a. Impersonal de? it is necessary (only once in Hm.), Impf. @e:, Fu. def- oer, Ao. éd€nce.

5. epouat to ask, see 424, 9; Fu. epnoopar. 6. eppw to go (to harm).

ephoo ipinoa iiiinxa 7. evdo to sleep, usually in comp. ca%evdo. Augment, 314. Ka%evdnow V. kaSevdnreov 8. ew to boil: also éyéo cl. 7, rare. epnoe Aynpat Yn eny

| inoa V. ép2ds (for éy-ros) and éynréos. 9. éSéAw and SéAw to wish: Impf. #%edov (never Sedov). (€)3eAnow nwveAnoa n%eAnka [reBéAnka] | a. The Attic poets in the iambic trimeter have SéAw (not éSéaw); but é%¢Aw is the usual form in Attic prose, and the only one in Hm. and

422 D. 8. Hm. Pr. Inf. BoAeoSat, 2 Pf. mpo-BéBovaa.

an 4, Hm. has in Act. djce and édednoe, each once; in Mid. always devouan 39...

srems winom assum B.S

a 7 ye ampepe forms in Att. always have 7: thus Ao. 43¢Anoq ow or Babette D>

MU

psoas to fight. | om euaxerduny pepaynpar V. paxeréos, nréos a ' ; pe to care for. : i nie eveAnoa =e, nat epedninv Peat ay The Att. prose has the Act. only as an impersonal verb, yéAet ét con ae cerns, Fu. wedAfoet, etc.; and in the Mid. uses the comp. émméAoua

(also érmmeAdouar cl. 7) passive deponent (413).

«12, pad to be about. Augment 808 a.

pearArnoo enehAnoa Vs pedAAnréos 13. péva to remain: also pipvea cl. 8, poetic.

emewva pepevnka V. peveTos, TE0S . 14. vépw to distribute. VELO evetua ~ VeveuNKa, Nat éveun Inv

a. veuhow late; éveuédny rare and doubtful. 15. olowac (oipar) to think ; Impf. ddunv (@pnyr).

“oto opat [gnodpny] Siemy (418) 16. ofyopa to be gone; Impf. oxdunv was gone or went. — oixnoopat (oxnpa n. A., used only i in comp. x:

17. mepdor, see 424, 18; Fu. wapdjoopa. 18. méropas to fly, see 424, 19; Fu. n(e)rncopa.

V. Stems which form second tenses.

423, a. Stems ending in a vowel. 1. dxovw to hear. (Hm. also dxovdgopat.) - dkovoopat KovTa axnxoa (39, 321) nkovaSny (842) a. 2 Plup. jKnkdev, less freq. denedew. Pf. M. Hovey late.

10. Hm. pdxouat, also paxéoua, Par. waxerduevos or waxeotmevos (28 D), paxdouat USU. paxjooua, Ao. euaxerduny or euaxnodunv, V. waxnrtés. ‘Had. Pr. Par. paxedpevos, Fu. paxéoouat.

11. Hm. 2 Pf. péunaa, Pf. M. 88. wéuBaerou (for we-pAc-rat, 839, 53 D),

Plup. wéuBarero. 15, Hm. Act. ofw or diw, Mid. almost always with diaeresis dtoua:, Ao. @ioduny, Ao. P. atodny. The + with diaeresis i is long.

16. Hm. also Pr. otxvéw cl. 5, Pf. rap-gxnka. Hd. ofxwxa (for ovx-qx-a, 65). 19. Hm. &%Sopa to be healed, Fu. aadshooua. ta 20. Hm. xhdw to trouble, Fu. endhow, Ao. éxhinoa, (2 Pf. réxnda, not in Hm., ntrans. =) Mid. cAdouo: am troubled, irreg. Fu. Pf. rexadjooua, different from u. Pf. of xa(w (428 D, 18). a 21, Hm. pedopan to attend to, Fu. pedhooua, Cf. Hm. pedo (vr), wedéoor ardic Cf. also phdopa ic intend, contrive, Fu. ufoopat, Ao. bases 2

7*

154 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIRST CLASS. _ [425

2. Bidw to live. Of. dva-Bidcxopa cl. 6 (445, 1).

Bidcopat €Biwy (408, 18) BeBioxa . Biace |. eBiwoa rarer PBeBiopat . V. Biwrds, Téos 3. Sto to pass under, take on (416, 4): also dvve cl. 5. dice educa déddKa . eduSny (420, 7) edvv (408,16) dédupa v. dvrds, réos 4, diw to produce (416, 8). ; pice educa mepoxa ebunu epuv (408, 17) v. purés

424, b. Stems ending in a consonant. 1. dye to lead.

aéo ifyayov (884) Xa (later Xs . aéopai as pass. 7&a rare dynoxa), nypat axInoopat 2. dpxw to rule, begin, Mid. to begin. dp&c npéa pxaT., Wpypat ipxeny 3. Brérw to look, see. Brérvo eBrevva BéBdeda eBrehSny 4, Bpéxa to wet. , BpeEw éBpe&a BeBpeypat €BpéexSnv, €Bpaxny 1. 5. Bpise to be heavy, rare in prose. — Bpica - eBptca BeBpt%a 6. ypade to write. ypaypo eypaypa yéypapa, yeypappar éeypachny a. 1 Pf. yeypdonra and 1 Ao. P. éypdpdny are late. 7. dépa to flay: Attic also daipa cl. 4 (Hd. deipw). | depa edetpa dedappae (334 a) eddapny, V- Saprds 8. croua to follow ; Impf. eimdpny (312). .

a c , a / a U * eyrowat éorropnv (orapat, oroiunv, ood, omeaat, ordpevos)

423 D. 2. Hm. Fu. Belowa or Béouat (378 D). d

8. Hm. has Pr. Impf. Act. only dive (yet ape Sdwy late setting), Mid. only I Svoua, both with same meaning. For édbcero, dvoeo, Svaduevos, see 349 D.

4. Hm. 2 Pf. 3 P. repbacr, Par. repuds, -@Tos (386 D, 360 D); Plup. 8 PA émépuxoy Hes. (351 D).

5. Hm. ovtdw to wound, Ao. 88. o¥rnoe, comm. 2 Ao. ofr (408 D, 21), | 2 Ao. M. Par. obdrduevos wounded, Ao. P. Par. ournveis. Also Pr. obrdte, Ao. ovraca freq., Pf. M. 38. ovracrat, Par. ovtacpévos.

424 D. 1. Hm, also aywéo or &ylvw (829); Ao. Imv. sae (349 D). J

4, Hm. has also st. Bpex to rattle, only in 2 Ao. 3 8. €Bpaxe: also st. |

Bpox to swallow, only in 1 Ao. Opt. 3 8. ava-(scara-)Bpdtere and 2 Ao. P. Par. — eentinee ss

8. Ion. and poet. Act. (only once as simple) rw to be busy, Bu. apo, 2.Ao.

toroy (én-éorov), Par. oméy, 2 Ao. M. asin Att. The forms éorwpa, coxolnaee

. pres “wien FORM SECOND TENSES. 155

oe stem was*oer. 2 Ao. éorduny is for €-o(€)x-ouny (839) with en Be te eh tne oe sie = sy Apaps to ask. Pr. Impf. not used in Att., supplied from épewrda. épropat (422, 5) apduny 10. éptxa to hold back ; chiefly poetic. . ae jpvéa (Hm. also 7 taint 384 D) ll. go to have, hold ; Tmpf. elxov (812): also try cl. 8. «a, oxnow goxov ° érxnka, €orynpat éoxeSnv n. A. a. Vz berds, réos, and oxerds, réos. The modes of the 2 Ao. are érxov, & (=cxe-w, yet in comp. rapdoxe, etc.), exolny (in comp. wapdoxornt, etc.), sxés (408, 11), oxetv, oxdv. In the Pr., éxyw is for Exw (65 ¢),

and that for o<x-w (63). The stem cex is syncopated in Zorxov (8389), beside which it assumes ¢ in oxo, etc. (331).

12. Sépopar to become warm ; in prose only Pr. Impf. 13. SAiBw to press.

— Dipo eaiwa [réSdudha, -pyat] . eSriPSnv [eSrLByv] 14. Adpre to shine, Mid. Adpropar id. ; Adpabo eAapa _. AéAayrra 15. Aéeya to gather. Ae~o eleka etAoxa (819 e, 8848) edéeyny eiAcypat ehéxSnv r. A,

a. The Attic writers use this verb only in comp., and sometimes have Pf. M. AdAeyuar. On the other hand, Aéyeo to speak has no Pf. Act. (for the late A€AEX A, earlier writers use eZpnxa, 450, 8); its Pf. M. is AéAey- ih Ao, P. éaéxanv; yet Raheyonns (418) makes di-elAeyuau (319 e). 16. dy-otya to open; Impf. dveyov (313); also dv-olyvupe cl. 5. avoig avewéa dvigxa, dvégya dvegySnv dvewypat V. avoikréos a. For dvéwxa and dyéwya, see 887 b. . The latter was avoided by Attic writers, and dv eeprypa used instead. Rare forms are ivovyov, Hvorka. 4 A comp. di-ofyw is also used, and in poetry the simple verb is found, but without the syllabic augment.

a Sie: hs ‘in Hm. should prob. be changed to omaua, orotuny, etc., the preceding

_ word being read without elision: dua omécSw, not gw éoméoSw. Hm. Imy. _ ometo for oméo. Hd. Ao. P. mepi-epdny.

Cs peek Ton. Pr. {power (24 Dc), Fu. ciphoowa. Hm. also Pr. épéoma: cl. 7 (less

- Act. épéw) and épecivw. He has irreg. accent in Pr. Imv. peio (for épeio,

4 a epeco, 370 D b) and 2 Ao. Inf. gpeoda: (367 D a).

“ 10. Hm. has also épurdyw (329 b), épuxavdw (381).

«11. Hm. 2 Pf. txexa (for he Plup. M. 3 P. ér-éxaro irreg. Hd. 2

- 0. M. 3 8. qvéoxero (814) for dvécxero. For poet. goxeSor, see 411.

12. Hm. Fu. ae recek (345 D), 2 Ao. P. Sub. Sepetw (343 D).

ine Hm. and Hd. have no Pf. Act., in Pf. Mid. only aéAeypa, in Ao. P

.€) Hd. also éAéynv). For Ao. M. dreyuny, €Aekro, see 408 D, 37.

ey ae Hm. Impf. M. 8 P. &tyvuvro.

156 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIRST CLASS. _ [424

17. mépro to send.

Tréeppo emeppa Téroupa, wemenpat emeuSnv 18. mépdo, comm. répdoua, Lat. pedo (422, 17). Traponoopat émrapdov meémropda (884 a) 19. wéropa to fly; st. m(e)r, r(e)re, mra. See 422, 18. nTHTOMAL entounv WET TOpAL entauny, emtnv (408, 5)

a. meThoouat and érrny are poetic. This is the case too with trraya and nérapot, AO. P. érerdoSny (331). Poetic are also wordowat, woréopat, TOTHTOMAL, TWeTOTH UAL, ETWOTHINY.

20. mréxw to twist.

TrAEE@ eme£a métexa (rémdoxa) — emadknv (334 a) weTeypat emhéexSnv r. A. a. émAéxny often appears as a various reading for éAd«ny. 21. wviyo to choke.

mvigo emvuiga TemVLy pat emviryny 22. orépyo to love. orépEo éorepéa €oropya (8384a) V. orepKrds, Té0s 23. orpepw to turn. oTpevro éoTpewa eotpoda (384 a) eotpagny €oTpappar eotpepSny r. A. 24, réprw to delight. repo erepa ere pp&nv 25. tperw to turn. : Tpevo erpewa rétpoa, Tétpada erpamnv €rparrov TETPappat erpepSny r. A. 26. rpépo to nourish (66 c). Spevro expewra rerpoda (884 a) erpadny : TéeSpappat eSpepSnv vr. A. 27. rpiBo to rub. tpi erplva ” rerpupa erpiBny TETPLLpat erpipSny less fr

28. Hd. 1 Ao. P. éorpdpSnv.

24, Hm, 2 Ao, M. érapréuny, and with redupl. (384 D) reraprdéunv, Aw P. érdppSny and éréppSny, also 2 Ao. érdprny, Sub. 1 P. tpamelowey (397 D).

25. Hd. has Pr. rpdrw, Ao. P. érpdpSny (also in Hm.), but rpéyw, erpea. Hm. has also rparéw, rporéw. For rerpdpara, see 392 D.

26. Dor. tpdpw. Hm. has an intrans. 2 Ao. érpadoy was nourished, grew, 2 Pf. rérpooa.

: 30. Poet. st. yor. Hm. has 2 Pf. yéywva shout, Plup. 38. éyeydve: (and evyéywve, also 18. éyeydvevy, 351 D), Inf. yeywveuer, irreg. yeywveiv, Par. ye yoves (not in Hm, are Sub. yeyévw, Imv. yéywve; Fu. yeywviow, Ao. éyeyé= ynoa; also Pr. yeywvioxw or yeywvéw, found even in Att. prose). .

a ps

Rite

epuypat eixSnv, also eoxny, epiyny

a Szcoxp Oxass (Protracted Class, 326). "i feds i

425. A short a, 4, v of the stem is lengthened in the present to 7, «, ev respectively. The following verbs belong to this class

a. Mute Stems. } 1. AnSe (Aad) rare in prose, = AaryBdve cl. 5, to lie hid. « 2. anne (cam) to rot, trans.

one éonwa oéonta (417) eodmny 3. THKw (rdx) to melt, trans. mee ernéa réernka (417) éerdxny [rérnKrav] ernxSnv rare 4. tpwye (for rpyye, st. rpiy) to gnaw. a Tpwfopat €rpiéyov TéTpaypat’ V. TpwKTds

a. The 1 Ao. érpwéa is also found in comp.: xarérpwia. . 5. ddeihw (arid) to anoint. ddeivo _ prenpa addndua (321) nrcipSnv — adnduppat [retppacr} HAridny rare 6. épeimw (epim) to overthrow ; chiefly Ion. and poet.

- épeivo npewpa épnpiraam fallen npeipSnv ipimov fell §=— Epyptppac npimny

7. Aeimw (Aim) to leave, see Paradigm 292: also Acurdve cl. 5, rare.

81. Poet. d€pxopar to see, 2 Ao. e5paxoy (383 D), 2 Pf. Sédopra see, Ao. P - 23épxSnv saw (2 Ao. edpdieny Pind.). : 82. Hm. fAmw to cause to hope, trmouat or eéArouct (23 D a) to hope {= Att. eamiq@ cl. 4), 2 Pf. Zoama hope, Plup. ééamew (322 D), V. &-cAmros. 83. Poet. idxw and iaxéw cl.7, to sound; Hm. 2 Pf. Par, Fem. dud-axvia. 4 34. Poet. xéeAoua to command, Fu. rerahoopuat (331), Ao. éxeAnoduny rare, usu. 2 Ao. éxexAduny (384 D). 85. Poet. wéAouat (to move) to be, 2 Ao. érAduny (384 D) often used as pres. Less freq. Act. réAw, 2 Ao. 3S. dre. 86. Poet. wép3w to destroy (in prose ropSéw), Fu. répaw, Ao. %repca. Hm.

2 one tn nae (383 D), 2 Ao. M. Inf. répSa: (408 D, 43). tye

37. Poet. st. mop, 2 Ao. &ropoy imparted, Pf. M. 3 S. wémpwrat (840) it is

: d, destined, Par. wempwuévos.

38. Ion. and poet. réproucs to become dry, 2 Ao. P. érépanv. Hence Act aivw, Ao. érépanva (late érepoa) made dry.

158 SPECIAL FORMATION. SECOND CLASS. [425

8. meiw (nid) to persuade, see Paradigm 295.

9. orei8@ (ari) to tread, chiefly used in Pr. Impf.; rare in prose. — oreipo éorenpa eoriBnua (831) V. orermrds q 10. areiyw (erix) to march, go, chiefly in Pr. Impf.; Ton. and poet. — orei&o éorecéa and eotixyoy . 11. deidSopa: (pid) to spare. eivopat eperoapnv 12. épevyonat (py) to spew, chiefly Ion. and poet. Pres. also épuy yave Cl. epevéouar Kiteyov (in Hm. roared) — 3 18. KetiS@ eis) to hide, poetic. KevT@ €xkevoru kexevSa aS pres.

14. mevSopat (wd3) poetic for ruvSdvopua cl. 5, to inquire, learn. 15. revyo (riy, tix) to make ready, make, poetic.

revso erevéa TEeTVYy pal eTUXSnV

16. hevyw (piy) to flee; also duyyave cl. 5. devEouat or eptryov mepevya Vv. pevkrds, Téos devEovpa (377)

Se ee ee ee ee ae ee ee

426.b. Stemsinv. ° 1. Sé (Sv) torun. Fu. Sevoopat. 2. véw (vv) to swim. vevoodpat (877) evevoa VeVvEvKa V. vevoTéos

oe ae

8. Hm. 2 Ao. rémSov (384 D) persuaded, whence Fu. remShow shall pers : suade; but m&how (331) shall obey, Aor. Par. mShous trusting, 2 Plup. 1 P. erripev trusted (409 D, 15). Aesch. 2 Pf. Imv. wéreioSu. 4

11. Hm. 2 Ao. redidouny (384 D), Fu. Tepidhooudt.

13. Hm. also revSdvw cl. 5; 2 Ao. 88. xide, Sub. 3 P. cextdSwor (384 D). In Trag. reddw, réxevda, may mean am hidden.

15. Hm. 2 Pf. Par. rerevxds, Fu. Pf. reredgouar, 2 Ao. rérukoy, rerucduny (384 D) prepared. Also pr. tirboxe cl. 6 (for TI-TUK-OKW) to prepare, aim. ite rerevxarai, -aro, see 392 D. The forms rérevypa, éredxdny are late.

16. Hm. 2 Pf. Par. wepu(éres (cf. Hm. pita = pvyh flight), Pf. M. Par mepuypevos, V. purrds.

17. Ion. and poet. st. rap or Sam (cf. 66), 2 Pf. réSnma wonder, 2 Ao. Par.” TAPpor.

* 18. Hm. THA YO (rity) to cut = réuyw cl. 5 (485, 9), Ao. &runta, 2 Ao. 3 érpcryov, 2 Ao. P. érudynv. P

19. Ion, and poet. épefaw (epix) to rend, Ao. peta, 2 Ao. Hptxoy intrans. shivered, Pf. M. éphprypat. .

20. Hm. épetdw (epud) to make red, Ao. Inf. épedoat, Also pr. épudatvojeas el. 5, to grow red.

426 D. 2. Hm. has also vixw, vixouat, Fu. whtouas, (freq. in late prose) Dor. vaxw, vaxouct. Hm, vveoy (308 D).

\¢ Tie aes

tS rs aT a tog AG aren.

Aa fsa (342): V. wAevoréos | _ grémrvevka Ticoniaaned nénvevopa] §V. mvevords eppevora éBpvnxa (331) €ppuny, V. purds

: Tilda Epevoa and petooua, the Attic writers generally use the Ao, and Fu, Pass. épptnv, puhoopa.

6. xéa (xv) to pour. ‘xeo (878) éxea (881) Kéxtka, Kéxdpat = ex vIn 4 ’ | Tarrp Crass (Zau-Class, 327). _ 427. The stem assumes 7 in the present. Verbs of this class ] i ave stems ending in a labial mute.

fe

4 1. dnra (dp) to fasten, kindle, Mid. to touch.

iva fppac Aponv 2, Banta (Bad) to dip, dye. eBavya BéBappat eBadny, V. Barrds 8. Bddrre (BraB) to hurt. eBraa BeBradha eBrapSnv and / BeBrappat eBrAaBnv

3. Ion. and poet. tAdw, Fu. a Ao. érdwoa, also 2.Ao. érAwy (408 25), Pf. rérAwna, V. tTAwTEs. 3 4, Hm. 2 Ao. Imy. du-mvve, 2 Ao. M. 38. &u-rviro (408 D, 80), Ao. P.

-mvbvony (396 D), Pf. M. wémvijper am animated, intelligent : connected with

‘this sis Pr. mitonw (mwv) Aesch. to make wise, Hm. Ao. éxivioa. For intensive myico to puff with exertion, see 472 k.

dos, he also xelw (370 D b),- Ao. usu. Zxeva (881°D), 2 Ao. M. 38. xitiro 8 D, 32).. | % "Hm. GAgouar and &Aevouax (adv) to avoid (Act. &dAcvw to avert, Aesch.), om and jAevdunv. Pr. also aAcelvw. . Poet. eArew (Av) to celebrate (i. e. make men hear of), Hm. Krelo, but 1. rgouct. 2 Ao %xAvoy aed Imy. Kadss or réxavsi, KAdTEe OY KEKAUTE Ds 28), also KAve, xAdvere, Par. M. kAdpevos = V. dvds heard of, kreurés

ae De D,

a me ve - Poet. obo (av) to drive (also in late prose), Ao. Zrveva (308 D), Pf. M. rove hasten (319 D, 867 D), Ao. P. &€(c)oddqy, 2 Ao. M. 88. oro (408 D, 81). ie Att. drama has irreg. forms of a Pr. Mid., 38. cedras or codrat, 3 P. cody:

. G00, cota, coicde. From st. ov comes also celw to shake (= oev-e:

3 e. 2. 88) inflected as a verb of cl. 1 (421, 17).

" . 1. 0 Lat Ao, P. 8S. Edpdn (2).

: ae S. BAdBerau.

Sale

. Je Ars

Se: tol ee ae Oe Se ee Ot Pr he, © . se net hare rage: s + aie r

160 SPECIAL FORMATION, THIRD CLASS. [427 F

4, yvapnre (yvayr) to bend. yrapo eyvapapa eyrapp nu

5. Yarra (rad, 66 c) to bury. Sao eSavra réSappat erddny, V. Samréos 6. Spumra (rpud, 66 c) to break down, weaken. Spyro espuwa TéeSpuppat [eSpupSny] 7. Kkadvmrw (Karu) to cover. . Kahiwe _ exdduya Kekdvppat exadvpsnv 8. kdumreo (apm) to bend. kappa éxaprpa said (391 b) éxduSinv 9. Kreme (kde) to steal. Keyra : exe Wa nied (8840) éxdamny kékAeppar exrepSnv n. A. pr. 10. xémrw (kom) to cut. Koo exowa Kéxoctba, KeKoupar eKdmnv, V. Komrds 1]. xpimre (kpuB or xpud) to hide. Kpvwo ' | Expuwa Kéekpuppat expupsny

a. 2 Ao. P. expdBnv, éxpbpny are hardly used in Attic: %pudoy, expuBor eiepuBéuny occur only in late writers.

12. kimrw (kum) to stoop.

Kipo . exvwa Kexoga 18. parr (gad) to sew. . pao eppawra €ppaypac eppapyy, V. parrds 14. pimrw (pip) to throw, see Paradigm 293. 15. oxdara (cxad) to dig. oKayo éokawa eoxaha, €okappar eoxddny 16. oxémropat (wxKemr) to view. oKewvouat Rone Wa? - EOKEL LAL eoxep2nv

a. Instead of oxérrouct, the Attic writers almost always use the kindred oxoméw in the Pr. Impf.; but the other tenses of cxoméw are found on: ly in late writers.

17. oxnmte (oxy) to prop.

oxn Wo erxyn wa [eoxnpha] €oxnupar eoxnpSnv 18. cxamro (cKwr) to jeer.

oKoopuat eokova [eoxoppac] eckapSnv

e

5. Hm. Pf. M. 3P. Teddparas (892 P), Ao. P. ésdpadnv and érdpny. 10. Hm, 2 Pf. Par. reromds. Hm. 2 Ao. P. érpigny. 20. Hm, évlarw (evr) to chide, also pinta cl. 4 (429 D, 3), 2 Ao. jvimamos and évévirov (384 D). 21. Poet. udprrw (uapm) to seize, Fu. pdprpeo, Ao. Euapye. In Hes, 2 Ao, uénaprov (384 D), Ont. weudworev, Inf. wamdey, 2 Pf. weuapra + a

Tt ba Sage ats rune, 381) to strike.

TO te J "7 (va, érumov réruppat érimnv) | .is found in Aristotle ; rerbnrnka, TeTimTnual, erumrhsny are

- The aorist, perfect, and passive systems are unknown to Attic

pl the aorist system being supplied from mardocw (rarary), the per- fect t and passive systems from mAhoow (428, 5).

‘Fourrm Crass (Zota-Class, 328).

_ The stem assumes « in the present, always with euphonic shar Inges. The verbs of this class are very numerous. We notice only those which have peculiarities of formation, especially all those which form second tenses.

a “1 Verbs in cow and Sw which form second tenses. 428, 1. ddddoow (adday) to exchange, see Paradigm 294.

. 2. knpiooe (knpox) to proclaim.

knpvéo exnpvéa KeKNpUXa, ~ypar exnpvxSnv 3. doo (uay) to knead.

éuaéa uewaya, pepaypat epayny, euaxSnv vt dpvacow (opvx) to dig. opvée _ @pv&a dpapvxa, ~ypat a@pvxSnv

a. Pf. M. épuyuot (for dpdpvypuat) late, 2 Ao. P. wpdxny doubtful.

: 5. mAnoow (Any) to strike. (exmdnyrvo%a cl. 5, Thuc.)

mryjéo émAnféa menAnya emdiyny

: mwémAnypat emAnx2nv less freq.

a. ekmrhoow, karamkhoow make -emAdyny (397). Attic writers use the simple verb only in the perfect and passive systems, the other active

tenses being supplied from rardeow (waray), which in Att. is confined to the active.

6. mpdcow (mpay) to do. 0a Ew empagéa mempaxa, mempaya (387 b) Téempaypat empaxSnv 7. arjcoe (ry) to cower: also mraccq@ Ion. and poet. mre emrnéa emTnxa : ,s rapdooe (rapax) to disturb: also 3pacc@ (tpax) mostly poet.

erdpaga Terdpaypat eTapayznv expaga (66¢) rérpnya am troubled (é3paxSnv ¥.)

9. race (ray) to arrange. o- éraga TéTaxa, TéTaypat erdxSny (r. eraynv)

8 D. ‘s Hm. 2 Ao. (é)mérAnyor (384 D), 2 Ao. P. de-rahynv, PR on, 7. Hm. has from kindred st. rra, 2 Ao. 3D. kata-r7qTny (408 D, 23) and pert -@tos (386 D, 360 D).

162 SPECIAL FORMATION. FOURTH CLASS. [428

10. dplocw (dpi) to be rough.

ppito ebpiEa mwéppixa am rough ay 11. @uddoow (piddx) to guard, Mid. to guard (one’s self) against, drvrdéo epvraga | mepvdraya, ~ypat epuddySny 12. Krdto (krayy, 828 b) to make a loud noise. KAdy&o ékday&a kéxdayya as pres., Fu. Pf. cexrdyEouar 13. xpd¢w (kpay) to cry; Pr. Impf. rare. exptiyov Kéxpaya as pres., Fu. Pf. cekpa£owat

a. xpdto, txpaga, late. Pf. Imv. xéxpaxsi, see 409, 8.. 14. pét@ (Jey) to do, Ion. and poet.: also epde (for epfa, st. epy). peta épe&a, eppesa €pexSny ép&o épéa gopya, ewpyew (322 D) a. Hd. has a Pr. Impf. €pSw instead of Zpdw. 15. chdlo (cay) to slay, in Attic prose usu. opdrre. opdago éopaka ecpaypar expayny, r. erpaxSnr — 16. rpitw (rpry) to squeak, Ton, and poet. 2 Pf. rérpiya as pres. 17. pate (pad) to declare. aye |

dpacw éppaca meppaka, méeppacpar edpdaSnv 18. ydfw (xad) to make retire, Mid. to retire ; chiefly poetic. Xacopat exacapny

19. xéfw (xed) alvum exonero. xecovpat (877) €xera (Execov) Kéxoda (pass. kexéoSat, Kexeopevos)

Il. Verbs in cow and fo with other peculiarities.

429, a, Labial stems (328 a, b). 1. récow (wer) to cook: also rérre later.

neyo emewa TéTrEe Lpat emepSnv 2. vitw (8) to wash hands or feet: also vinrw not Att. vitro éviwa vévipppat evipSnv

10. Pind. Pf. Par. repplxovras, see 360 D.

12. Poet. 2 Ao. &adyov. Hm. 2 Pf. Par. xexanyds, G. -ovros (360 D).

17. Hm. 2 Ao. éwéppadoy (884 D). Hes. Pf. M. Par. weppaduévos.

18. Hm. 2 Ao. M. irreg. xexaddunv (884 D) retired, but Act. xéxadov de« prived, Fu. Kexadhow shall deprive. Cf. 422 D, 20. etd

20. Poet. xpite to creak; 2.A0. 3S. xplke (or epiye) Hm., 2 Pf. wéeprya Aristoph. if

21. Poet. weAd{w (medad, weAa, waa) to bring near, Mid. to come near, Fu meddow, Tedd (375), Ao. érérdoa, Pf. M. wéwAnuas, Ao. P. éreadoSny and Trag, émAadny, 2 Ao. M. 38. rAjjro, 3 P. érAnvto (408 D, 22). Pr. also mehdo, Ep widvnus or miavde cl. 5 (443 D, 6), Trag. reAdSw, rAdSw (411). Bite

429 D. 8. Hm. évioow (em)= éeviare cl. 8, to chide (427 D, 20). 4, Hm. docvoua (om) to foresee, only Pr. Impf.; ef. 450, 4. te

[wéracpa] eragSnv

» &nddoa Tema pat ema Snv aricoe to pound. - entioa enrio pat _ érriaSnv

431. ec. Stems of variable form. ae dpmdgo (dprad, also dpray not Att.) to seize.

ey

dp emda (copa) %f praca ipmraxa, prac pat prac sny (Gprago ijpwaga pmaypat jpmdx nv)

a. 2 Ao. P. ipmdynv late. Verbal apwaords (apmanrds n. A.).

__—- 2. Baordte (Bacrad, late Bacray) to carry, poct. (late in prose). Baordoo eBaoraca[-fa] [BeBaoraypar] [e8acrdx2ny] 3. vdoow (vay and vad) to press close.

ago évaka vevag frat

A, sraigeo (mad and avy) to sport.

ma£oipat (877) émauca TéTrAaLo ae V. matoreos

a. An memouxXa, Tenaya, ewmalxsnv are late: so also Fu. waltoum and mraliw

5. calo (cw, cwd) to save.

oooe écaoa céraka, céowopat ecaosny ceo @pat ¥. Tworéos

we 5. Him. Adouat (AaB) = AauBdvw cl. 5, to take (487, 4). Attic poets have | Aagupat.

D. 8. Hd. apdocw = eupeieo to feel, Ao. paca. t Hm. iudoow to lash, Fu. iuaow, Ao. tudiou; cf. iuds lash, G. iudyt-os. _ 10. rare koptaow (opus) to equip, Ao. M. xopyccdpevos, Pf, M. kekopud-

iad Pee. rare in prose) Afocouat (Air) to pray, also Afroua cl. 1. Hm.

0. &rddrodunv (308 D), 2 Ao. Inf. ArrécSat. ; | Poet. viccoua to go, Fu. vicoua. Also Pr, véouas, usu. with future Ze siteye vite - stem was perhaps vz, whence ver (326) or vir (827); véoua 9a

1D. 5. Hm. Pr. od¢w and odw (shortened in Sub. odps, op, cdot), Fu. G 0 Ao. écdwoa, Ao. P. écaddnv. The orig. stem was oao (cf. 210), from 28 also a 2 Ao, (ui-form) odw he saved and save thou.

Ss: a

164 SPECIAL FORMATION. FOURTH CLASS. [431

6. iw (id, ie, 831) to sit, seat, Mid. ifoua, also eCopar (Ed), to sit ; found chiefly in comp. with card. Hence ka%i¢@, Impf. éxd&ifov (314): also ifave, xa&vCave, cl. 5. ka%i@ (376) — exaSeva and xaSica “4 KaSi(jgopat = exa tod cadéCoua, Impf. exaSeCouny and xaeCdunv. ka%eSodpat (for xa%edSeropat, 331, 874) [éxaSeoSnv]

a. Pr. Ind. €€ouat, kadéCouat, is rare in classic Greek. The Pr. Inf. and Par. and the Impf. have usually an aorist meaning, and seem to have been originally aorists from the stem oed (Lat. sed-eo) with Epic re- duplication (884 D): €(éunv for éodounv (56) for oe-o(€)d-ouny (63, 38), cf. xexAduny (424 D, 34) from réA-owat. From the same stem was form- ed 1(w = icdw = ot-o(€)8-w (332, 339), cf. wrlarw (449, 4) = m-m()r-o.

7. poo (pvy, pute) to suck: later puféw, pufde.

putnoe euutnoa 8. df@ (05, o¢e) to smell. : o(ncw atnoa (d5ada as pres., Hm.)

Ill. Liquid stems which form second tenses.

432..1. dyeipw (ayep) to gather. °

dyepa ifyeipa dynyepka, ~pau nYEpSNY

2. aipw (ap) to take up, bear away ; contracted from delpa (aep). dp& (a) jpa (3820) pKa, jppat pany

3. @Aopat (ad) to leap. | dédovpat HAdpunv (882 a. 2 Ao. 7Adunv doubtful in Att., cf. 408 D, 33)

4, BadAw (Badr, Bra, 840) to throw. Bare €Badov BeBAnxa, BeBAnpar €BAnSnv

; 6. Hm. Ao. efca (= e-ced-ca, e-€-oa) seated, Imv. eivov (better ocov), Inf. ; €oso., Par. eoas (dvéoas), Hd. etoas; Mid. trans. 8 8. ééooaro (elcaro Eur., éoouvro Pind.), Par. éooduevos, Hd. eiodwevos; Fu. €coouo (= oed-coua). In comp. Ao. kaSeion and kddica. ECouas as Pr. is unknown to Hm,: for (eu Od. «, 378, read Eco 2 Ao. 9. Hm. apioow (apvy, apvd) to draw out, Fu. apttw, Ao. Hpitoa. Also — once Pr. dptw. = k 432 D. 1. Hm. Pr. Impf. 8 P. iryepéSovrat, -ovro (411), 2 Ao. 8 P. &yépovro, Inf. dy<pecdau (367 D), Par. &ypéuevos (884 D). 2. Hm. has only Ao. M. ajpduny, 2 Ao. dpdéuny (a), &poluny, apéoSa, Ao. P. Par. &pSeis. He comm. uses Ion. and poet. defpw (aep), Ao. Heipa, Ao. P. népsny, Plup. 8 8. &wpro (for nopro): Pr. Impf. 3 P. jepéSovrat, -ovro (411).— — The stem aep has the sense of ep (rep, Pr. efpw to join, 812 D) in Ao. ovy-feupe Il. x, 499, Ao. M. Sub. cuvaclpera: Il. 0, 680. : 4. Hm. Pf. 2 8.BéBAnau (363 D), 3 P. BeBAharat, -aro (355 D e), also BeBo« Afaro, Par. BeBodAnuévos; 2 Ao. M.3 58. &BAnro, etc. (408 D, 20); Fu. once ovpe BAhcouat. ae : gud

*

sith z =r vet Cede

a. Th ih n ie Rypeodau,

mo a A na th aso t of a presen (i petie : ee ar’ ‘sddo (Sad) to flourish. 2 PL réznha.

ta BA kaive (kav) to kill. 2 Ao. exavov 3 other tenses doubtful. In y prose only as compound, xaraxaive.

m8. Keipw (Kep) to shear. na,

A eu - Eketpa [kéxapka] Kéxappat éxdpyy, Ve Kaptés Rar oA, ‘ive (kdiv) to make incline, see 433, 1.

10. Kreiva. (xrev) to kill, see 433, 4.

. oo paivouat (pdr) to amet: poet. paive to inielisols Ao. gunva.

ovat péunvaammad = — eda ny 72. odeiro to be obliged. 2 Ao. dpedov. From odeidre (831) come ea apeiAnoa apeihnka — @bedy&Inv 13. reipo (ep) to pierce. ‘TEp@ €metpa - meéemappat (884 a) emdpny | aya caipe (ap) to sweep.

ay éonpa céonpa grin

15. oer (oxed, oxre, 340) to dry (416, 6).

CS €oxAny (408,10) €oxAnka

16. oeipw (arep) to sow. V. omaptés omepo éometpa comappat (334 a) eomapny 17. créd\w (cored) to send, see Paradigm 290.

18. ofddro (oar) to stock fall.

: & éognra [eodadka] €odadpat eoddadnv | a 19. daive (par) to show, see Paradigm 291.

20. preipw (Pep) to corrupt, destroy.

%epa eperpa edSapka, epSappar epSdpnv a ike case ahen ‘a v. ga

ee: Hm. Pf. Par. Fem. reSaAvia (338 D), 2 Ao. 3 8. Sac. Hm. Pr. Syrdw, Ranson, Pr, Par. SardSwv (411), rnrAcSdwv. 8. Hm. Ao. gepoa (345 D). 11. Hm. Ao. éunvduny, Theoc. Pf. M. weudvnucn (331). 2. Hm. in Pr. Impf. almost always é6péAaw (different from speARW to in- rs 18e, ps Opt. 6péArere, 845 D). 15. Hm. 1 Ao. irreg. Zoxnaa made dry. ES 9. Hm, 2 Ao. Act. iter. gdveoxe appeared. From older st. da he has ¢ (morn) appeared, Fu. Pf. wephoera: will appear. For paetvw, Ao. P. » see i D. For intensive raydaivwyr, Tappayday, see 472 k.

Fu. d1a- (345 D), 2 Pf. d:-<pSopa am ruined (in Att. poets nd int.) Hd. Fu. M. d:a-pSapéouce intr.

eS a

166 SPECIAL FORMATION. FOURTH CLASS.

21. xaipo (yap, also yape, xatpe, 331) to rejoice.

xXarpjow [éxaipnoa] kexdpnka, M. xeydp- exapny as act. Lxapnoopat] npat OF Kéyappat V. xaptés

IV. Liquid stems which reject v.

433. A few liquid verbs reject their final v in the perfect and | passive systems. They are

1. kdive (xdiv) to make incline. KNivo ékXiva [KexAixa] exAiSnv and

| KéxAipat katT-ek\lyny ; 2. xpive (kptv) to judge.

Kplv@ expiva Kekpika, Kéxpipat explinv 3. mdvve (wddv) to wash clothes. : ‘ Tivo emdova Temrd pat a (emdvsnv n. A.) 4, xreivo (xrev) to kill: also dwo-xrivvups, -bo, cl. 5. _ KTEVO eKTelva dm-exrova (later (ékrdSnv Hm.) 4 extdvov poet. éxrayka, €xTdka) .

a. For 2 Ao. poet. xray, see 408, 4. am-exrdySa: and Gro-eraysivas Inf, Pf. and 1 Ao. Pass. are late. For these tenses the Attic uses TEN NIC . and €Savov from dvhokw (444, 4). |

5. retvw (rev) to extend. q TEVO erewva Térdka, TéTdpat eraSny :

Norr. The stems of these verbs ended originally with a vowel, to which © vy was afterwards added: xpi, xpiv; mdv, mAtv3 Krd, Kray, Krev (334 a) a %

21. Hm. Ao. M. éynpduny, 2 Ao. nexapduny (384 D), Fu. nexaphow, -omai, Pf. Par. Kexapndés (386 D), 4 22. Hm. efAw (€A, Fed) to press, Ao. (@)cAoa, Pf M. Zana, 2 Ao. P. eddnz, Inf. &Ajvu. Pind. has 2 Plup. 88. édae. In Pr. Tmpf. Act., Hm. has only eiAéw (331). Even Attic writers have Pr. Impf. efAéw or cinco, also edo’ tAAw is old and poetic. . 23. Poet. évalpw (eviip) to slay, 2 Ao. Hvapov, Ao. M. 38. évhparo, 24. Poet. Sefrw (Sev) to smite, Fu. SevG, Ao. BSewva, 2 Ao. (Ind. not used) Sévw, Féve, Seveiv, Sevay. 25. Hm. pelpouat (uep) to receive as one’s part, 2 Pf. 38. Zupope (319 D), Pf. M. 8 S. efuapra: (319 e) it ts fated used even in Att. prose, Par. eluapuevos. In later poets, peudpnie, peudpnrat, Hemopnwevos. 26. Poet. wdéArAw (waa) to shake, Ao. érnda; Hm. 2 Ao. Par. afb izatas (384 D), 2 Ao. M. 3 S. dato (408 D, 42).

433 D. 1. Hm. Ao. P. éxalySny (396 D) and éxatSqv, Pf. M. 3 P. wexAlaroa (892 D). 2. Hm. Ao. P. éxpivany (so Hd.) and éxpidyv.

4. Hm. Fu. rrevéw and rravéw.

5. From st. (Tey Hm. makes also Pr .raydw (once with pu-form, Pr. M38 ctdvira), Fu. ravtow, Ao. érdviioa, Pf. M. retdvucuat, Ao. P, erayvcdnv. Pr. vTiraivw, Ao. arirnva. The form 7% in Am. is perhaps an Imv, of st. 7 ‘wh = Ta-e), reach, take thou. oe i nl

therefore bo referred to the fifth class. But present to the future and aorist

sy are her nthe urth class.

ion of these mola y of other liquid stems is sometimes

ate writers before x of the 1 Pf.: re%éppaxa for redéppayxa from

ts But one verb belongs more properly to this series, viz.°

- exépdava (382) Kéxépdnka te Vowel-stems of the Lem class.

éxavoa kékavka nlsae -V, kavords, kaurés «éxaupat (éxanv Hm.) Be KAai@ (kAav) to weep; Att. kAdw uncontracted. opat éxdavoa KekAavpat Vv. kAaurds and woovpat (377), also Kdajow, kanow (331) k\avorés

a. KeKAavopat, éxrAatbodny (342) are late.

Firra Crass (Wasal Class, 329).

_ The stem assumes v in the present, or a syllable containing v. I. Stems which assume v. 435. 1. Baive (8a) to go. (for Bav-t-w, cf. 828 d.)

- Bicopat eBnv (408, 1) BéBnxa (409 2) eBasny in comp. Boe (416,2) — %8noa BéBapa in comp. vy. Bards, réos

pr’ 6. Hd. Fu.. Kepdhooua, Ao. éxepdnoa. a 7. Hm. st. dev, orig. pa, 2 Ao. trepvov, wépvov (384 D) killed, Pf. M. wed auot, Fu. Pf. mephoroua.

». 484 D, 1. Hm. Ao. Zena (also cern probably incorrect), cf. 89. Attic _ poets have Par. xéas (shortened from kfas). & 8. Poet. Salw (Sa) to burn trans., Mid. intr., 2 Pf. Sé5ya intr., 2 Ao. M. Sub. 3S. ddyrau. 4 " 4, Poet. dalomat (Sa) to divide, Fu. Séicoua, Ao. edacdunv (used even in it, prose), Pf. 3S. dédacra, 3 P. (iereg. ) Sedalara. Also Pr. da7 €ouo (Hes. 0. Inf, irreg. daréacSa, 381 D). Bett 1B Poet. palopat (ua, mer) to reach a after, seek for, Fu. pdooum, Ao. eud- 2 Pf. wénova press on, desire eagerly, P. péeuapery etc. (409 D, 9), V. uac- rés. In the sense of the Pf., Hm. has intensive paudw (472 k), Ao. patunoe. ae Trag. we find Pr. Par. peemevos (= sa-omevos). 6. Poet. vatw (va) to inhabit, Ao. &vacoa caused to inhabit, M. évaccdunv ecame settled in, = Ao. P. evdadnp. Pf. M. vévacpar late. Hm. has also Pr. << Par. Fem. vaserdwoa (370 D a). 4. ‘Hm. ézvulw (o7v) to take to wife, Fu. éricw Aristoph.

:D. 1. Hm. Ao. M. 3 8. eBfaero (349 D). Pr. also Bdoxw cr. 6 (444 D, = Me Par. B:Bds (403 D, 10), also B:Bay (as if from B:Baw),

* *-. a -

a toe Fin

Pa?

168 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIFTH CLASS. [435

2. é\avve (eda) to drive: also éAdw poetic. €AG (€Adoa, 875) HAaca éAndaka, €AnAapat = AGS nv a. édAabyw is prob. for eAa-vu-w, cf. 329 d. éAhAacnat, HAdooyy are late, 3. PIdve (Pa) to anticipate. (Hm. Pave)

pIjcopa epsny (408, 7) epSdxa - [ep aonr] psdow epSaca |

4, nive (mi, also mo) to drink. niopa (378) emtov (408,15) mémaxa, méropat en dSnv

a. Fu. also rioduo, perhaps not Attic. The Attic makes z usually long in the Fu., short in the Ao.

5. tive (ri) to pay back, Mid. to obtain payment: also rivup. poet.

tic@ erica Térika, TETLC pal eric nv (842) 6. h&ivw (p3x) to perish, chiefly Ion. and poet. Siow trans. epwica trans. eépSiva eprisn vy

a. Late épdivnca, épdivna (331). 7. Saxvw (ddk) to bite.

djEopat (412) edxov dednypat ednxSnv 8. xapve (kp, Kua, 340) to be weary, sick.

KapLovpat €KG|LOV KeKunka V. d7ro-kunreov 9. répvw (rep, Tue, 840) to cut.

TELO érepov (e€rdpov) Térunka, TéeTHNwaL erpninv

Il. Stems which assume av.

436. 1. aicSavopa (acd) to perceive: also atoZopua: rare.

aigSnoopa noBounv noInpat V. aigSnrds 2. dpaprdve (Guapr) to err.

dpaptnoopat nmapTov HuapTnka, -nuat . aprnSnv 3. avédve (av€) to increase: also avéw (Hm. defo).

avéjow (331) — nvyoa nvEnxa, nvgnpa noénanv

2. Hm. Fu. éAda, ASRS etc. (875 D); Plup. M.358. éafaaro, once ind Aaro, 3 P. eAnAcdaTo (392 D).

5. Hm. tivw. Hm. and Hd. have also Pr. tivo, vivupa. Different from tivw is Poet. tlw cl. 1, to honor, Fu. tiow, Ao. &rioa, Pf. M. Par. retipévos, Vv. &-riros.

6. Hm. Pdivw, 2 Ao. Epdiov, M. épSiuny etc. (408 D, 27). Pr. also oo yiesw (411). m

8. Hm. Pf. Par. Kekunds, -@Tos (386 D. 860 D).

9. Ion. rduyw, 2 Ao. érauov. Hm. has Pr. réuyw once, réuw once; Baal (rua) cl. 2 (425 D, 18).

0. Hm. Sdvw (Hes. Suvdo) = S0-w to rush.

436 D. 2. Hm. 2 Ao. #uBporoy (for nuparov, nuporoy, 383 D. 25. 53D).

4

ve (Braor) (Brag) to sprout: also Braoréo cl. 7, rare Noo ets — @eBrdornea (819 ¢) Late r 1 Ao. eBadornoa. 5. Sap%dvw (Sap3) to sleep. , ie ae apr deddpyxa (331) [eddp%nv]

Bs ii ? dame Sdvopat (aay to be hated.

mexSHoopar = dmnxBopnv = dew} Spa

ae 4 ‘The forms @ySw to hate, éxSoua, aréxSouat, are poetic or late. ‘oF Kixdve (kx) to come up to, Ion. and poet.

le copat exlyov V. d-kixntos

8. olddve (018) and ofdéw cl. 7, to swell. (oiddw, oiSaive, late.) iio * @dnoa — @dnka

9. ddtcSdve (oAic®) to slip. (ddAtcZaiva late.)

AicIjow @AtaZov (dXionxa and adrlcSyoa n. A.) 10. dadpaivopa (oodp) to smell. (for ordpar-t-opar, cf. 328 d.) oodppyoopa aodpdunyv aoxppavanv

Ba 8. doppdouat cl. 7, d0ppalyw are late; so also 1 Ao. doppnodunv.

11. dfdtoxdve (ofr, orto, 330) to incur judgment.

bpdjoo a@pdov aprnka, apAnpac

a. 1 Ao. SpAnoa rare. 2 Ao. Inf. and Par. are sometimes accented as

present: bprew, BpAwy. This verb is connected with dpelAw (oper), 432, 12:

437. The following have an inserted nasal.

. 1. dvdavw (a8) to please, Ion. and poet.

ddjow Hd. éadoy Hd. eada

2. Svyyave (Sty) to touch.

BiEopar eSiyov WV. &-Suxros

sm <or

Oe A

5. Hm. 2 Ao. e5padov (883 D). : ee ay Kixavw, Ao. once xixhoaro. For pu-forms from st. «xe (381), e404 Dd 10. Hm, Ao. 8 P. doppayro. 12. Hm. &Addvw (ard) to make sarge (Aesch, &Adalyw); also &Adhonw (arSe, $1) cl, 6, to grow large. - 13. Hes. &arralyw (aAir) to offend. Hm. 2 Ao. #Atrov, M. HArréuny, Pf ur. irveg. dArrhuevos (331, 867 Db). : ath ur. dApdve (aag) to procure. Hm. 2 Ao. jAdo 15. Hm. épidatyw {eptd) to anteal (= épiqw cl. 4), Ns M. Inf. eprdhoardat 3 Pr, also épiduatyw to provoke. .

.D. i. Hm. Impf. #vdavov, éqvdavov (Hd. EdvSavov?), see 812 D; 2 Ao. ER (<enete, ef. 808 D), 2 Pf. 45a. For &opevos, see 408 D, 44.

I CREAT OF STE SBE 0

170 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIFTH CLASS. | [437

3. Aayxava (Ady) to-obtain by lot. Anfopa (326) edxov eltAnxa, etAnypat eAnxSny a. 2 Pf. Aédroyxa is chiefly Ion. and poet. 4, NapBave (AGB) to take. AnWoua €AGBov etAnda, etAnupat eAnpsnv a. For efAnupwa there is a rare form AdAnumau. 5. AavSave (Aa3) to lie hid, Mid. to forget: also AnSw cl. 2 (425, 1). Anco €AdSov EANSa, AEAnopar a. The simple Mid. is rare in prose, émiAavSdvouc (more rarely éx-Aay- Sdvowat) being used instead.

6. parSdve (pad) to learn.

patnoopat €pasov pepdnka V. paSnrds, TEos ‘ 7. muvSdvopa (nv) to inquire, learn: also wevSopnaucl. 2, poet. mevoopat ext Sounv mervopat V. mevoTéos

8. rvyxdve (Trix) to hit, happen. TevEouat eruxov retuxnka (881) a. 2 Pf. rérevya occurs first in Demosth.: rérevyum, éredxSyy, late.

Nore on 435-7. Mute stems, which assume » or ap in the present, have their proper form only in the 2 Ao.; ; elsewhere they either lengthen the short vowel (like verbs of the second class, 326), or assume e (831),

Ill. Stems which assume ve. 438. 1, Buvéw (Bu) to stop up.

Bic éBica BeBvopa (842) "€BvaSnvr] 2. ixvéopat (ix) to come. i£opat ikdunv iypat

a. The simple verb is rare in prose: &-ixvéoucu is commonly used instead. The 1 of the 2 Ao. is short, but made long in the Ind. by the augment,

8. Hd. Fu. Adtowa (24 Da). Hm. 2 Ao. éraxor obtained by lot, but A& ae (884 D) made partaker.

Hd. Fu. a pope, Pf. AcAgBnka, Pf. M. A€Aappaut (891 b), Ao. P. ‘hitsdoes, V. Aaprrds, -réos. Hm. 2 Ao. M. Inf. AcAaBéoSa: (384 D).

5. Hm, 2 Ao. &aSov lay hid, but Aéradov (884 D) caused to forget, M. Acdavécdat to forget, Pf. M. Acracuat have forgotten. The meaning cause forget is found also in rare Pr. AnSdvw, Ao. €Ayoa, and sometimes in Pr, Act. Aso. Dor. Ao. P. éddodynv. Late Ao. M. éanodpuny. 7. Hm. 2 Ao. M. Opt. rerdSoiro (384 D).

8. Hm. has also 1 Ao. érixyoa, and often uses Térvyya, deixar (from teixw cl. 2, 425, 15) in the sense of rerdxnna, ruxov. Hd. has 2 Pf. rérevxa,

9. Hm. xavbdve (xa8, xavd, xevd) to contain, Fu. Xxsloopa (=xevd-copat), 2 Ao. éxadov, 2 Pf. néxavda.

438 D. 2, Hm. has Pr. Impf. ixvéoua only twice, often ixdvw (also ixdye yon) and Yxw (i), 1 Ao. ite, ttov (849 D). For 2 Ao. Par, Yewevos, see 408 D, 4 Hd. Pf. M. 3 P. a@mixara, arixaro (392 D). i

-

simple verb is rare ce sh hab apeenilsl te WE Kian is fre- nt rf it Peis mposkuvhaw, mposexdynoa (mposéxitioa Pook) x ervew (rer, 384 c) to fall, poet. 2 Ao. émirvoy. Of. inte, 449, 4. 2 Pe eesprusciens recognize a Pr. aityw, and regard émrvoy as Tmof cs dpmurxvéopae (apn-ex) = dpméxopat, to have on: active d aumréexo, Fr: dumioxe, to put on. Pe pmo XOV, Inf. dumuryeiv

pmo spnv ss aa is for Cp abt cag For change of ¢ to 7, of. 65 d.

tox is for iox, and that for o1-c(e)x, a reduplicated stem of yw (cex) to have (332. 424, 11). The 2 Ao. must be divided HeerhoXoR t here phelongs to the preposition, Gi

yi 6 tmirxveopat (vm-ex) to promise. See 5a above and 424, 11. noopa § § bmerxdpny bméoynpat

Bay Stems which assume vv (after a wouel yyv). See 407.

439, Stems in a. id a A. kepavyvpe (xepa, pa, 839) to mia. & kepaco exépdoa Kéxpaka, Kéxpdpat éxpaSny Or %, Kparéos [kexepac pat] - exepaoSnv 2. mpeaoaips (xpena) to hang trans.: (also xpeud@ late.)

Kpep@ (-dow 375) apeneea [kexpepacpac] expeudoSny (342)

a. For Mid, Kpewapeau to hang intrans., Fu. oredr see 404, 8. 3. hich (mera) to expand : (also werdw late.)

mer@ (-dow 375) enéraoa mwéenrdpat (339) emerdaSny (342)

pyty 2

; a, meméraxa late, weméraouou not Att. 2 4, oxeSdvvpe (oxeda) to scatter: also oxiSynps rare in,prose. a oKedS (-dow 875) eoxedioa eoxedacpat (342) eoxeddaSny

440. Stems in «. iL. &mp (6, orig. res, Lat. ves-tio) to clothe: simple verb poetic.

dpa 1@ Ck 374) nupiera (814) npdieopat b oe pat (€mieoacSat Inf.)

439 D. 1. Hm. also Pr. repdw, kepalw, Ao. Inf. émi-xpjoa: Pr. Sub. 3 P.

at is accented like the wi-forms in 401 k. For «fpynus, see 443 D, 2.

_ 4, Hm. Ao. also without o, éxddacca, éxeddodny; cf. clSvnu 443 D, 8. 6. Hm. ydvupar (ya) to be glad, Fu. yavtoooua, ‘late Pf. yeydvipno Cf. @ cl. 4, only in Pr. Par. yalwy.

a 40 D. 1. Hm. Impf. 2 aS reo-vuoy), cf. Hd. én-elyuodat, Fu. erou, » Ao. M. 38. €(c)oaro or é€ooaro, Pf. M. ciuar (= reo-war), Eooat, Eorat lup. 2, 8 8. €c00, gore or gecro, 8 D. tony SF. claro (= Feo-aro),

172 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIFTH CLASS. [440

2. Kopevyupe sane) to satiate.

sin exdpera Kexdpeopat (342) exopea nv 3. oBévvupn (oe) to extinguish (416, 5). oBécw éoBeca eo Bnka oBnoopa €aBnv (408, 9). €oBeopar (342) ea BeoSnv 4, oropevvups (crope) to spread out: also orpwvvuse (ordpvupe). oTop@ (-€cw 374) eordpeca leardépecpat] [eoropéeoSnv]

441. Stems in o. 1. Cavvvps (fa) to gird.

(oow élooa [é{axa] eCoopa [efaoSnv] 2. pavvups (bw) to strengthen. poco éppoca eppepa am strong éppwa%ny (842) 3. oTpavvupt (arpa) to spread out = cropévvyps (and ordpvupt). oTpdow éoTpeca eoTpapat eoTparny 4. xpovvusm (xpo) to color = ypago cl. 4. Xpoacw éxpoca Kéxpoopat ExpaoSnv

442, Stems ending in a consonant. 1. ayup (ay, orig. Fay) to break. a&o éa&a (8312)° aya (417) [€aypa] édyny (&)

2. dpvupat (ap) to win, chiefly poet.; only Pr. Impf. For 2 Ao. npopnv, See aipw (482, 2).

3. Seixvupe (dex) to show.

deiE@ edevéa dederya, Sederypar det Sv 4, cipyvupe (cipy) to shut in: (also ecipye late.) elpEa eip£a, P.€pEas eipypat elpxSnv

2. Hof Fu. xopéw (374), Pf. Par. xexopnds (886 D), Pf. M. xexdpnucu (also Hd.), V. &-«dpnros.

Add the following with stems in ::

5. Poet. xivijwas (et) to move intrans., 2 Ao. éxioy went, Par. kiéy (Trag, ~ xiets rare). For éeladoy, see 411. From «: is derived also «yéw to move trans., inflected regularly. |

6. Hm, atvijuar (ar) to tdi away, in comp. amoatyyya: and @maivyyan

7. Ion. and poet. Salvups (Sar) to feast trans., Mid. intr., Opt. 3 S. davdra — (401 D 1), 8 P. Saidaro: Fu. datow, Ao. aoa. ,

442 D. 1. Hm. Ao. Zata, rare hga (Hes. Opt. 2S. navdtas, = narratas = — xara-Fatus, 73D). Hd. Pf @ Ene. 3. Hd. has st. dex in dékw, edeta, Seyuar, edéxanv. Hm, Pf. M. deldey- pas greet (for SeSeryyua), 3 P. deideXara, -aro (392 D). In the same sense of greeting, he has Pr. Par. Seuvipuevos, as also Pr. Sexavdowar and deidloxopat F == Be-Seix-cKxopa, cf. 447, 9). 4, Hm, has only forms with smooth breathing, even in the sense of shuts ting in. As stem, he has epy or cepy instead of espy. For &pxarat, (é see 818 D. For poet. elpyadov, Hmm. (é)épyastov, see 411,

| a, ¥ ae

Gipson z ; a. The forms of elpyw to shut out are distinguished from these by their

5. Cevyrupe (Cvy, Cevy, 326) to join. ce : | éCevéa eCevypar eCiyny, eCedxSyvr. A.

og 6. drro-krivvupt (krev, 884 c) to hill, = xreivw (483, 4). - plyvope (pry) to mix: also picye cl. 6, less freq. in Att.

.

pigo éptéa [weprya] enixSny and ae i pepeypae €piryny

8. GAAvpe (for odvvps, st. od, ode, 831) to destroy, lose (417). OG (-€ow 874) deca dd@AeKa (321)

— ddodpat @Adunv dAwAa

ie 9. dprvpe (op, ono, 831) to swear.

bod @poca - 6u@poxa (821) @pdSnv and (= op-e-opat) épepora and OLOoInv

- [6pdc, -opat] dp@poortat (842) Vv. dn-®poros 10. dudpyvups (omopy) to wipe off. — bpdpEopa @popsa OpspxSnv

11. dpyupe (op) poetic, to rouse, Mid. to rouse one’s self, rise.

- bpow @poa, @popov dpapa intrans.

Opodpat @pdopunv opmpepat (331) a 12. ayyvvpue (ray, ry, 326) to fia, fasten: (also rnocw cl. 4, late.) mnto énmnéa méennya (417) emdynv, V. mykrds

a. PE. M. wérnypou late; 1 Ao. P. érhySny n. A. pr. 13. mrapvupar (mrap) to sneeze, 2 Ao. éxrapov: (also mraipw cl. 4, Ao. émrapa, 2 Ao. P. émrdpny, n. A. 14. pyyvupe (pay, pny 326, pwy 334 d) to break. — pngo eppna eppwya (417) eppayny a. Pf. M. eppnyuor Hm., 1 Ao. P. éppqxsnv n. A.

a 7. Hm. and Hd. have only ufoyw in Pr. Impf.: Hm. once prydCowan— _ 2 Ao. M. 38. Eusero, uikro (408 D, 39). 2 Fu. P. wryhcouat (395 D). s Dy Hm, also Pr. éAéew (formed from 1 Pf.); 2 Ao. M. Par. odaduevos (28 D). ? ’ . = @ 11. Ao. dpoa (345 D), less often Spopor (884 D), 2 Pf. dpwpa (321 D), Plup. _ 858. épdper and apépe: (311 D), Pf. M. Sub. 3 8. dpdpnrar, Ao. M. Spro (oftener than épero), dpoo, dpa, dpuevos (408 D, 40). For dpoeo, see 849 D. Con- “nected with tpyuys are dpivw to rouse, Ao. dpiva, Ao. P. dpivdny; and dpotw to rush, Ao. épovea. 12, Hm. 2 Ao. M. 3 8. xar-érnnro (408 D, 41). «16. Hm. &xvijar (ax) to be pained (tare toma, axaxtCowas); 2 Ao. rae xdunv (384 D), Pf. dudxnwot (8321 D, 331), 3 P. axnxédara: (392 D), Plup. 3 P. waxelaro (for axaxnaro), Inf. duedynodu, Par. dxaxhwevos, axnxéuevos (367 D cane Poem to pain, Ao. Hraxov and axdynoa. Pr. Par. intrans, cw, ixeboov. — 17. Poet. ratvipat (for xad-yuuat) to surpass, Pf. nékacpot, Par. neraopévos

Ph.

"a> - :

q

174 SPECIAL FORMATION, SIXTH CLASS. [442 > 15. dpayvuys (ppay) rare form of dpdcae cl. 4, to enclose. oe

ppaéo eppata méppayya eppaxsny [eppdyny]

Srxra Crass Lneeptive Class, 330).

444, The stem assumes ox in the present, sometimes with a connecting «. Several verbs which belong here, prefix a redu- plication. Only afew show an inceptive meaning.

Stems in a and e. | 1. ynpdoxw = ynpd-w to grow old. 2 Ao. Inf. ynpavat (408, 2).

a. Fu. Pf. reSvhtw (reSvhtoua late), see 394 a. For Fu. Savoduat, 2 Ao. ZSavoy, the Att. prose always uses droSavotuca, &mréSavoy (never found in Trag.), but in the Pf. réSvnxa, not amro-ré8vnka.

ynpdow, omar éynpaca yeynpaxa 2. dudpacxe (Spa) to run, used only in composition. Spdcopat edpay (408, 8) dedpaxa $ 3. 7BdoKw (78a) to come to puberty: 7Bdaw to be at puberty. | iBieo ncaa | 4, Synoke (Say, Sva, 340) to die ; used also as pass. of kreivw to kill, — Savovpat esavov résynxa am dead (409, 4) |

18. Hm. dpéy-vupu (opey), = dpéyw cl. 1, to reach, Pf. M. 3 P. dpwpéxaras (321 D, 892 D).

443 D. In the Epic language, several stems, which for the most part show

a final a in other forms, assume va instead of it in the present. This is ac- companied in most instances by a change of vowel, and by inflection according to the wi-form.

1. Sduynue or Sapvdw (Sap, Saya, 831) to overcome, Fu. daudw (cf. 375), Ao. eddudoa, Pf. d€5unra (340), Pf. M. dédunua, Fu. Pf. deduhocoua, Ao. P. edapudodny (342) or €duhdny, more freq. 2 Ao. éddunv. Pr. also Saud(w. The forms édapacduny and édaudoSyny are even found in Att. prose. The same Perf. Mid. 5¢3unua: belongs also to the Ion. and poet. déuw (Att. oixodouéw) to build, Ao. ema,

2. xlpynust or xipydw (kepa), = kepdvvups to mix (439, 1).

83. Kphuvawor (Kpeua), = kpeuauc to hang (404, 8; cf 489,2). Active ephwvnut very rare.

v

4, pdpvopour (uapa) to fight, Opt. 1 P. wapvotweda (401 Dh).

5. wépynut (wepa), = mimpagKw to sell (444, 7), Fu. wepdw (cf. 375), Ao. éwépioa, Pf. M. Par. remepnuévos. *

6. wiAvnus Or TiAvdw (eda), = read (w to bring near, Mid. to come near — (428 D, 21).

7. wlrynps or tirvdw (wera), = werdvvups to expand (439, 3).

8. ocxldvnut (cxeda), = oxeddvvvus to scatter (489, 4): also without o, «id+ ynut (Keda). . .

444 D, 2, Hd. d:8phorw, Sphooua, epyv (24 D a).

‘ f

— —

; a ‘

ali

ae ayes (40): a Ae fuk to mein Mia. to acca mention. uaa pepynpar (319 b, 393 a) _eurynonv (342) The Fu. and Ao. Mid. are poetic; the Fugand Ao. Pass. take their.

ae ‘The Pf. M. wéuvquae is present in meaning, = Lat. memini. We Fite PF. peurhooua will bear in mind. ~ oe

a Dalal (pa) to sell ; wanting i in Fu. and Ao. Act. 0 (areSdunv) — érpaka, wémpapar empasny iaxw (pa) = dpi (404, 2) to say. The Pr. Ind. is scarcely L has only the Impf. In Attic prose, the Par. is frequent stead of bas, not used, 404, 2), but other forms are rare.

9. xdoKw (xa) to gape. From st. xav (329 a, Pr. xaivw late), come -Xavodpat éxdivoy Kéxnva

10. dpéoxw (ape) to please.

dpéc @ pera [dpnpexa] (npéoSnv n. A. pr.)

445, Stems in o.

1. dva-Bidoxopat (Bro) trans. to re-animate, intr. to revive.

Ao. dveBiov (408, 13) intrans., dveBiwoduny trans. Cf. Bid@ (423, 2). 2. Brdoxa (wor, pro, Bro 53 D) to go, poet. Pr. Impf. only in comp. _pokodpar €“oAov pépBroxa (340, 58 D)

A 3. BiBpacke (po) to eat.

[Bpdoopar] [e8paca] BéBpexa, BéBpopa (eBparyv n. A.)

a. The defective parts are supplied by forms of éoSiw cl. 9 (450, 8).

q 4, yyvacke (yvo) to know: also pat digs less freq. in Att.

. “yocopat —-eyvay (408, 14) @yvoxa, eéyvacpat éyvaosny (842)

; 5. Spock (Sop, Spo, 340) to leap, chiefly poet.: also Sdpyupai cl. 5 - Yopodpat eSopov

«6, terpdoxe (tpo) to wound.

» f > U eTpaoa TETP@LAL ETPOSNV

ah ae ae: Sy

5. Hm. also iddowar (iAdua), Imv. Ans (Theoe. tAus1), see 404 D, 10;

6. Hm. Pf. M. 28. uéuyno, wéuyn (Imv. péuveo Hd. )s see 863 D; Sub, adn (Hd. peuvedueda), Opt. peuvhunr, 3S. weuvewro, see 393 D. as Poet. mépynut (wepa), see 443 D, 5 hs Hm. Bdorw (Ba) = Balvw to go (36, 1), chiefly in Imv. Bdor’ 13: haste, once émBackeuer to cause to go upon. oR Poet. xixahonw (KA) = karéw cl. 1, to call (420, 5).

5D. 3. Hm. BeBpdédo. Ep. 2 Ao. @8pwy (not in Hm.). Soph. 2 Pf. Par. .

: ares (40 D, 16). =: 1 Ao. eahiare ie Poet. Me yrds (for yywords). 6 = a

176 SPECIAL FORMATION, SIXTH CLASS. ~ [446 —

446, Stems inv and v. 1. mimioxw (me) to give to drink, Ton. and poet. Cf. rive (485, 4). rice éntoa 2. Kkvicka (kv) to impregnate, Ao. tica. a. Mid. xvicxopa: to become pregnant ; but iw, kvéw cl. 7, to be pregnant . 3. peSvoK@ (ev) to intoxicate. peSvo@ epediioa [mepeSvopar] €peSva Sy a. Mid. wedtonoua: to become intoxicated; but peSdw (only Pr. Impf.) to be intoxicated. 447. Stems ending in a consonant. #1. GdioKopat (dX, dro, 331) to be taken, used as pass. to aipéo cl. 9,

AX@oopat éddov or éd\@xa Or Vv. dd@rds nA@yv (408, 12) fA@xKa 2. dv-aXioxw (av-ad, av-ado) to expend: also avadéo. dvaoce ava\ooa dvd\eoxa, avadopat avahosnv ayvnooa dvndoxa, avn@pat dynoSnv a. Rare forms, qvdAwoa, jvdAwpma (314). 3. auBrioxe (apBr, apBdo, 831) to miscarry: also é&-auBddo.

approce 7pProoa 7pPr@xa, fuBAopat 4, dumdakioxo (aprdak) to miss, err, poetic. Gumdaxjo® jumdakoy npmdakynrat

5. em-avpiockopat (ex-avp) to enjoy: also éravpicke, émavpéo Cl. 7. emaupnoopat emndpov, emnupdyunv a. The word is Ion. and poetic; in Att. prose, only 2 Ao. Inf. éwavpéoSat. 6. evpioxa (ctp) to find. evpnow (331) edpov eUpnka, evpnpuat evpeSny a. For 2 Ao. Imy. edpé, see 366. 1 Ao. M. edpduny late. 7. orepicxw (orep) = orepéw cl. 7, to deprive. oTEpnow eorépnoa eorepnka, nae eorepnSnv

a. Pass. creploxoua: and orepoduat to be deprived; but orépoma cl. 1, te be in a state of privation.

8. adégw (for adex-cxa, St. adex) to ward off ; Act. rare in prose. dvcEnoopar = nAeEdnv a, A Fu. dAdtoua is also found. 9. ddvoke (for advk-cke, St. aux) to avoid, poet.; Pr. Impf. rare. advé@ AvEa (connected with ddcopna, st. adv, 426 D, 7)

446 D. 4. Hm. mpatoxw (av) to show, declare. Akin to this is Hd. dia

patoxw or -pdckw to shine, dawn.

447 D. 7. Hm. Ao, Inf. orepéoa. Eur. 2 Ao. P. Par. orepels. 8. Hm. Fu. aarctnow, Ao. 7A¢Enoa, 2 Ao. %AaAKoy (884 D, 389). 9. Hm. has also éAvond(w cl. 4 and dAvoxdyw cl. 5.

| | : : | :

7 * — €bidaka —— be0iSaxa,~ywar (ts ODI

|. Ado (for Aak-cxw, st. Aax) to speak, poetic. at = edna (331) A€Anka Or ei, Phe See (338) 12. ploye (for pry-cka, st. pry) to mia, = piyvupe cl. 5 (442, 7). AB. wdoxe (for rad-cxw, st. a3, wevd, 329, 334 a) to suffer. TeiTop.at (49) émaov meétrovsa V. waSnros "a, For the two forms of the stem, compare 7d md9os and mévos suffering ee. _—s Svenru Crass (Zpsilon-Class, 331). 448, The stem assumes <in the present. Here belong ‘ = 1. aidéopat (ad) to feel shame: also aidopai poetic. — aldecopat noeoapny noeopar (342) 70€aSnv (418) a, Hderduny, in Att. prose, pardoned; in poetry, felt shame, = jd€cRnv. — ~— &. -yapéw (yap) to marry (Act. uxorem duco, Mid. ‘nubo). yao éynpua - yeyapunka, -npat V. yapern a, Late forms yauhow, éydunoa, eyapeSny Theoc. 3. yntew (yn) to rejoice, poetic; in prose only 2 Pf. -yninow eynsnoa yeynia am glad 4 4. Soxéw (Sox) to seem, think. ~ b6éo oka —— Gedoypat (€d6x3nv r. A.) a. Soxhow, edéxnoa, Sedénnna, Seddnnuct, Son Snv are poetic or late. 5. Kupew (kup) to hit upon, happen, Ion. and poet.: also xipw rare. _ KUpnow, Kipow exupoa, ex’pnoa

10. Ep. Ao. ed:idexnoa (331, not in Hin.). The orig. stem was 8a, Hm.

_ Fu. df shall find (378 D), 2 Ao. d€5aov (384 D, also @Zaov) taught, 2 Ao. M.

~ Inf. deddacdax (for SeduccSar), Pf. deddnna (331) have learned, 2 Pf. Par. dedads,

Pf. M. Par. Sedanucvos, 2 Ao. P. eddny learned, Fu. P. dahoouant (395 D).

11. Hm. Anréw, 2 Pf. Par. Fem. Acddxvia (338 D),.

13. Hm. 2 Pf. 2 P. wérooSe (409 D, 14), Par. Fem. reraSvia (cf. 338 D).

‘age a a amapicxw (ap) to deceive, 2 Ao. Hrapev (884 D), rare 1 Ao. Arde noe (331).

* 15. Poet. dpaptcxw (ap) to join, jit, trans., 1 Ao. jpoa (345 D), usu. 2 Ao. fi pov (384 D) twice intrans., 2 Pf. &papa am joined, fitted (found even in Xen.), Ton. tpnpa, Hm. Par. Fem. dpapvia (338 D), Ao. P. 3 P. &pSev (395 D), 2 Ao.

Mz. Par. &puevos (408 D, 84).

-16. Hm. toxw (=Fix-oxw) and éioxw (23 Da) to make like, consider like,

cf, 2 Pf. Zona (409, 7).

~ 17. Hm. rirdckopo (= te-Tvn-croua) to prepare (cf. redxw cl. 2, 425, 15),

to m (cf. ruyxdvw cl. 5, 487, 8). D. 2. Hm, Fu. Mid, 3 Sing. yauéoorera: will cause (a woman) to marry,

8*

@ VJ -

v 4 S

aye Htfr

ek) A

178. SPECIAL FORMATION. SEVENTH CLASS. [448

6. Heaprupew (uaprup) to bear witness, inflected reg., but paprupopa cl. 4, to call witnesses, Ao. é€uapripapny. Evpéw (Eup) to hae Ao. é&vpynoa, Mid. Evpéopat, but also 7) Bipoqa cl. 4, Ao. eEvpapny, Pf. éEvpnuat. 8. waréopat (rar, Orig. wa) to eat, Ion. and poet. nwdoopat endodapny Tera Lat V. d-mracros 9. mexréw (mex, mexr, 827) to comb, shear. (Hm. meixa for réko.) (wéfon, A. emeEan. A.) emexSnv 10. pirréw (pip, purr) to throw, = pire (427, 14), only Pr. Impf. ll. d3€@ (w%) to push ; Impf. eo%our (312). . @oH, OnTw ewoa [eoxa] foruat eooSnv a. @sjow is not found in Att. prose. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Attic,

Erenta Crass (Radupieiane Class, 332).

449. The stem assumes a reduplication in the present. For pi-verbs of this class, see 403. There remain

12. Poet. Souréw to sound heavily, Ao. édobrnoa (even in Xen.), éydov- ano (cf. éptySouros loud-thundering), 2 Pf. Sédou7a. 13. Poet. rerAadéw to roar, Fu. cedadfiow, Hm. Pr. Par. cerddov. 14. Ion. and poet. xevréw to prick, Fu. revriow, etc., reg.; but Hm. Ao. Inf. «évoo(=Kevr-ca), V. aad of kevr~r0s). 15. Poet. xruméw to crash, clatter, rareyin prose, 2 Ao. &rvov, also in Trag. 1 Ao. éxrémnca. "16, Poet. piryéw to shudder, Fu. peyhow, Ao. &pilynoa, 2 Pf. epprya used as a present. Different is prydo to be cold (371 d). 17. Ion. and poet. oruyéw to dread, hate, Fu. orvyhoowa, Ao. éoriynoa, etc., reg. Hm. has 1 Ao. éorvia made ‘dreadful, 2 Ao. €xrvyov dreaded. 18. Pr. tréw to love, inflected reg. as a verb of cl. 1, see Paradigm 287 ; but Hm. Ao, M. épiaduny (st. pA). 19. Hm. (xpato pec to help, ward of’, Pr: Impf. not used) Fu. xparuhaer, Ao. éxpalcunoa, 2 Ao. €xpaicpor. Add the following, which annex a in the present (331): é 20. Pr. Bouxdouat tq roar, Ao. Bpvxnoduny. In Hm., only 2 Pf. BeBpvxa | used as a present. : _ 21. Poet. yodw to bewail, Fu. yohoouat, Hm. 2 Ao. &yoor. . 22. Hm. Snypidopar to quarrel (Fu. Snpicoua: Theoc. % Ao. énpioduny, Ao. P. ednplySny (896 D). Pind. Syploue, Snpidw. 23. Poet. Aiyudw, -ouat, to lick, Fu. Aryuhoouu, 2 Perf. Par. rege AcAexuéres Hes, 24, Hm. pnndouet (utr, unr, 326) to bleat, 2 Ao. Par. paxdy, 2 PF. Par. usunnes, Fem. peuanvia (838 D), Plup. aulunnoy (351 D). a. Hm. pytidw, -ouat, to plan, Fu. pyticoua, Ao. éunriodunv. Me, . pnttowat. Nas 26. Pr. puxdopat (uve) to low (used in Att. prose). Poet. Ao. duende : Hm. 2 Ao. sini 2 Pf. menira used as a present. og!

y BIGHT CLASS. NINTH CLASS. e 179

iyvopat (yev) to become : also yivopat less freq. in Att.

roua eyevdunv _—--yéyova (409, 8) have become, have been

ts, awath , yeyevnpac (éyevfi3ny 1.) 2. tex@ (cex) to hold, another form of ¢yw (424, 11).

8. pipyw (wer) to remain, poetic form of péve (422, 18).

4, rlarrw (mer, nro, 339, 331) to fall: cf. mrvéw cl. 5 (488, 4) poet. - mecodpat (877) émxecov TETT@OKA

& are éregov is for orig. and Dor. &reroy (62 a).

—s«#&B=EL rier@ (for rirkw, st. rex) to bring forth, beget.

— reEopat eTeKov réroxa (334 a) ré&m less fr. éreEa rare (réreyparn. A.) (eréySnv n. A.) a Mid, rlierouas rare and poetic. . 6. titpdw (rpa) to bore: also rerpaivw (329 a, 828 d). tpnow (335a) erpyca TETPTILAL . Vv. tpntds _ TETpAVve éerérpnva (later -ava) [ererpav2ny] » For reduplicating verbs of the sixth (inceptive) class, see 444-6.

Ninta Crass (dfized Class, 333).

q 450, Different parts of the verb may be derived from stems _ essentially different: compare Eng. go, went. Here belong ‘ 1. aipéw to take, Mid. to choose ; st. aipe, €X (812). — alpnow ethov (Edw etc.) spnka, jpnzat npesny q a. Fu. éagn. A. Ao. efAduny late. 2. Epxopat to go, come; st. epx, eAvs. « eAedoopat HASov (339) eAnADIa (821) a. For 2 Ao. Imy. eas¢, see.366. For éAetcouo (326), the Attic prose generally has efu: (405, 1 a). = 3. éoSiw to eat; st. eo, €d, pay: Boyar (878) eptyov ed7doxa (331) (ndecSnv n. A.) edndeopar (381, 342). v. edeards, Téos bo a. éoStw comes from %oSw (328), and that from %w (411 D): all these ~ forms of the Pr. are found in Hm.

ee

‘ 449 D. 1. 2 Ao. 3 Sing. @yevro Dor. (and Hes.), different from yévro seized (408 D, 35). From st. yey comes also poet. yelvouat cl. 4, to be born, Ao. éyer- __ vdunv trans. begot, bore (of yewduevor the parents, also in prose). — ~~ &, Poet. also iaxdyw (329 b), icxavdw (331). _ 4,2 Hm. 2 Pf. Par. rerredras, Soph. rerrds, -Gros (409 D; 17).

— 4. Hm. iadw (av, ave 831, ae 89) to sleep, Ao. teoa (a, but by augm. a), once contr. &caper. 450 D. 1. Hd. Pf. &patpnea (321 D).

~—-& «=~Poet. 2 Ao. HAvSov with v Nee only in Ind., 1, 2,3 8. and 8 P.), Dor, Pind.) jvSov, jAcov. Hm. 2 Pf. eiAfaAovda, 1 P. eiAhrovdper (409 D, 18). 8 Hm. Pr. Inf. emeva: (496 D, 3), 2 Pf. Par. ednddés, Pf. M. €5450ucu.

180 SPECIAL FORMATION. NINTH CLASS. [450

4, dpdw to see, Impf. éopav (312) 3 st. dpa, 1d, om.

dyropat eldov (ido etc. éwpadka, Eopapar oPIv, V- dpards, Imy, idé 866) drama (321), dpa omtés, Téos

a. The Comic poets have Pf. édpaxa: trwma is chiefly Ion. and poet. : éwpddnv is late. Ao. M. @yduny is rare; eidduny (for eSov) is generally poetic (in Att. prose only in comp.), Imv. i303, but as exclamation idov lo! Poetic is also Pr. Mid. eloua: to appear, appear like, Ao. elodnr. . ‘ ‘

5. tpéxw to run; st. rpex, Spep (384 a). Spapodpat eOpdpov dedpapunxa (331) V- Spexreov (66 c)

a. Spetouat, @Speka (66 c), and Sédpoua are found in poetry; dedpdunua. occurs in composition, '

6. pépa to bear; st. pep, ot, ever.

olow iveyxoy (884) — evnvoxa (821, 884 a) nvexsnv

olcoua (as | Aveyka(881) = evnveypar evex3noopat

mid. and pass.) nveykapny V. olards, TEos olaSnoopat 7. dvéeopa to buy, Impf. ewvovpny; st. eve, mpia.

avngopat empiduny (408, 8) eavnuat eounsnv

a. éwynodunv is late. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Att, edynuat may have, éwrvfSny always has, a passive meaning (415).

8. eixov I said ; st. eum, ep, pe (340). . €po elmov etpnka (319 e) eppnsny, Vv. pytés ela elpnyat (eppesny n. A. (Imy. eiré 866) elpnooua pninoopat

a. The Pr. Impf. are supplied by Aéyw, @nul, and (especially in comp.) by a&yopedw to discourse, as &mraryopevw to forbid, Ao. dmretroy. The form elmoy comes from e-er-oy, orig. Fe-Fem-oy, a reduplicated 2 Ao. like rémigov (384 D): cf. éros, orig. Feros, word. The stem of épa@ was orig. Fep (cf. Lat. verbum); hence e%pyjxa for Fe-Fpn-xa, épphdnvy for eFpnony, pnrds for Kpntos. '

*

4, Hm. Fu. émdpoua shall choose, but érdpoua shall look on. Aeol. Pr. dpnut Theoc. For dtocoua (or), see 429 D, 4. 5. Dor. rpdxw.

6. Hm. Pr. Imv. pépre (406 D, 4), Ao. freuca (rarely #veuov), M. qvend- pnv; Ao. Imy. oloe (349 D), Inf. oicguer(ar), V. peprds. Hd. has Ao. Hyena, Pf. M. éviverypwa, Ao. P. AveixSnv. :

8. Hm. Pr. epw rare, Fu. épéw, Ao. e?roy and in Ind. (with augm,) evmroy (=e-FeFreroy). From st. cer, ém (63), comes év-érw or évvérw, 2 AO. &v1-crov (339), Imv. é-oe or Eviomes (2 P. Eowere for ev-orere), Fu. evipw (=en-o7-ow) or évi-omhow (331). Hd. makes Ao. usu, ela, Ao. P. eipéSyy and ciphdny at well as éppqonv. "

.

INDEX OF VERBS. . ESE

> ALPHABETICAL LIST of Verbs described in the foregoing Sections.

451. In the following alphabetical list, the verbs before described are not _ only referred to by the present; but one or more forms are generally added, to exhibit the stem and its changes, or to show the most important peculiarities of formation.

In using this index, as well as in looking out verbs in the lexicon, the _ student should bear in mind especially the following points :

I, At the beginning of verb-forms,

b a. e before a consonant (sometimes even before vowels) may be the aug- _ ment or reduplication (808, 812, 319, 822).

+b. e may arise by augment or reduplication from e (312, 322).

¢. 1 may arise by augment or reduplication from a or ¢ (309).

d. » may arise by augment or reduplication from o (309),

e. ez in a few words takes the place of Ae, pe, pe, as redupl. (319 e).

f. A consonant with e may be the reduplication, when followed by the same consonant, or when a smooth mute with e is followed by the cognate rough mute (319). .

g. A vowel and consonant may be the Attic reduplication, if the same vowel and consonant follow; but the initial stem-vowel is usually lengthened - after it (321),

h. When prepositions are prefixed, there is danger of mistaking an initial stem-vowel for the final vowel of the prep. Thus karaviw = kat-aydw not Kara- yuw, a&mokeoas = am-orAécas not amo-Acecas, emidoica may be either ém-dotca (Pr. ép-opdw) or ém-dotea (Pr. émi-dtdwpt).

II. In the middle of verb-forms, i. a or o may arise from e¢ in the stem and present (334). So o: may arise from e«, and w rarely from 7.

j. 7 may arise from a final a or e of the stem, and w from a final o (335). In the first aorist system of liquid verbs, 7 may arise from a and e from ¢ (337 In the second perfect system, 7 may arise from a (338).

k, The relations of the consonants are shown in the following table, where any termination of the other tenses may correspond to any form of the pres- _ ent given on the same line:

Fut. 1 Aor: 2 Pf. Perfect Middle. 1 Ao. P. Present.

“yo Wa -pa -pmat, ~Pal, -wrat, -prov ~pInv ~70, -Bw, -pw, -TTw “iw -ta -xa ~ymat, -tal, -KTOL, -XoOV -xXOnv “KW, ~YW, -XW, -TTW, Es : -TW, -80, -9w, -ToW, -(@ vapid | -dw, -€w, -lw, -dw, -vw

+

-0wW -oa “OMOl, -TUl, -OT UL, -T SOV

‘Ad-w (aca, doa, adodyv) 420 D, 10. adhoee, ddnxds, 818 D. tiya-mat (nydosny, jyaoduny) 419,1; ae (iadw, teow) 449 D, 7.

Se Gryd-ouat, &yatouo, D. deipw (aep, HepéSovTat, Xwpro) 432D, 2 ss beyelpw (wyep, &yhryepka) 432, 1; guv-heipe, cvvactperat, ib. ¥ nyepexovrat, aypduevos, D, aek-w, = avtw, abtdvw, 436, 8. — Uy-vue (Zaka, arya) 442, 1. &nut (ae) 404 D, a. ayp (ayelpw, &ypduevos) 432 D, 1. aid-€ouat (Hdécdnv), ald-ouc, 448, 1. tey-w (Fryawyor, iixa, ayhoxa) 424,1; —aivé-w (qveoa, jynua) 420, 4; , -véw, téere, D. aivigouc, alynust, D.

ii (wddre, gadov, eadov) 437, 1. al-vupat, &(o)atvuuct, 440 D, 6.

182

- abpé-@ (efAov, Erezv, zpédnv) 450, 1; &patonra D. aitpw (ipa, hprnv) 432, 2; dp-duny D. aiod-dvonat (Hodduny, Hodnuat), alod-onat, 436, 1. al-w (diov, ém-hica) 309. ax-ax from ax, 442 D, 16. 321 D. . dxé-ouon (Hreodunv) 419, 8. &xob-w (&xhkoa, Arovadnv) 423, 1; a&xovdouet Hm. dxpod-ouat (AKpododunv) 335 a, ad (efrAw, édAnv) 432 D, 22. GAd-omar (GAdAnwar) 321 D. 867 D. 413. BAS-dvw, -alyw, -hokw, 436 D, 12. dArcipw (GAhAwpa) 425, 5. dArdéw (HActdunv, Grckhoouon) 447, 8; &AaAKoy D. &Agouce or GAevouan (aAv, HAc[v]duny) 426 D, 7; GAeceivm ib. bAg-w (HAeoa, GAHAcouaL) 419, 9. BAS-oma (4ASHTomer) 422 D, 19. aA-loxoua (EdAwy, HAwy) 447, 1. dAut-alvw (-huevos, HAttov) 436 D, 13. adn (GAetw, HAaAKov) 447 D, 8. dAAdoow (HAAdYHY, HAAaxa) 294. &A-Aomat 432, 3; Garo 408 D, 33. ddvKrdtm (GAardnrnuat) 821 D. arAtonw (HAvéa) 447, 9; dAvok-d(w, -dvw, D. dAd-dyw (RAgpov) 436 D, 14. duapt-dyw (juapToy, judpryKa) 436, 2; i#uBporoy D. &uPpar-lonw (juBawou) 447, 3. &mirAAd-omat (GmAAHSHv) 413: aumioxveouat (Gupeto, Humoxov) 438, 5. dumran-lonw (-how, iumranov) 447, 4. &uby-@ (juvva), &uvyddsw, 411 D. dy-adr-tokw, dv-ard-w, 447, 2. ivddyw (Eadov, adhow) 437, 1; EhySavov, aor, evadov, Eada, D. dv-€x-omat (Averxdunv) 314. avhvove 321 D. diy-oly-w (avewta, avewrya, dvépya) 494,16; dv-oly-vum ib. dy-op9d-w (jvdpSeca, -wuc) 314. ayb-w (jvioa, Hrvoua) 419, 17; avitw, avitw, ib.; tyw D. tivwry-a. (tvwxSt, Fvwyor) 409 D, 11. un-a-toxw (Hmad-ov, -noa) 447 D, 14, amd-xpn 404, 8; aroxpg D. harrow (ap) 427,15; Edpdy D. ap (atpw) 432, 2. pd-oua (&phuevat) 404 D, 9.

INDEX OF VERBS.

[451

&p-ap-loxw (fpoa, Hpapov, tpnpa, tpuwevos) 447 D, 15.

&pé-cxw (Hpera, hpécdnv) 444, 10.

aphuevos 318 D.

&pré-w (Hpreoa) 419, 10.

apudtTw (Hpuoca), apudw, 480, 1.

&pyé-ouas (npynrnv) 418.

tip-yuuat 442, 2. :

&pd-w (Hpoca, Apésnv) 419, 16.

aomd ie (aprad, apray) 481, 1.

&pb-w (Hpvoa) 419,18; a&pdrw ib.

Upx-w (px Tpyuat) 424, 2.

Goa 408 D, 18. 420 D, 10. 449D, 7.

topuevos (8, dvddvw) 408 D, 44,

abé-dyw, ait-w (nvinna) 436, 8.

avp (éem-aup-loxouct, -éw) 447, 5.

aupa, (am-aupd-w, wrotpas) 408 D, 19.

apdoorw hates 430 D, 8.

apiorw (apy, < 481D, 9.

&xP-oua (AxSéoSnv) 422, 1.

&x-vullou (Heaxduny, axdxnuat, anye’ pat), axaxl(w, &xewv, axedor, 442 D, 16.

ti-w (doa, &uevor, tarar) 408 D, 18.

&wpro for nopro (detpw) 482 D, 2.

Balvw (Ba, €Bnv, €Byoa) 435, 1; Bdorw, BiBds, BiBav, D.

Bdr-rw (€Badrov, BEBAnKa) 482, 4; BeBoaharo, 2BAnro, Bacio, D.

Barre (e€Bddnv) 427, 2.

Bd-onw = Balyw, 444 D, 11.

Baordw (Bacrad, Barra) 431, 2

Belouat, Béouot (Bidw) 423 D, 2.

BiBdlw (BiBdow, BiG) 375.

BiBds (Ba) 403 D, 10; BiBay 435 D, 1.

BiBpdcrw 445, 3; BeBpd&w, EBpwy, D.

Bid-w (eBlwv) 423, 2; Belouor, Béoua, L

dva-BidoKropat (Bro, dveBlwv) 445, 1.

Bia (BadA-Aw, BEBAnia) 432, 4.

BAdrrw (€BAdBny, BéBAapa) 427, 3; BadBera D. ‘

Baagr-dvw (€BrAacrov, [B\éBAdornia) 486, 4; BAaoréw ib.

Baém-w (BEBAepa) 424, 8.

Bairro (€BdAwwa) 480, 2.

Badonw (Zuorov, péuBAwna) 445, 2.

Bore (BdA-Aw, BeBorharo) 482 D, 4.

Béckw (Bo, Book, Booxhow) 422, 2.

Bova-ouat (€Bovahoeny or HB.) 422, 3; BéAceosat, -BéBovaa, D.

Bpdoow (€Bpaca) 480, 3.

Bpéx-w (é€Bpdxnv) 424, 4. «

eyed) 409, 3. ( 447, 2. Ta 439 D, 5. y-a, yeyar-loKw, bes, 494 D, 30. Leer: éyewdunv) 449 D, 1. >» eyeAdonny) 419, 2.

ei isu: Epeebiin) 449, 1. y-70 408 D, 353 &yev-To 449 LD), 4. » (yeynda) 448, 3. net pd-w, 444, dy

ual (Py evouny, {eae yeyern- iia n) 419, 1; yelvouct D yvdone (Zyvow, Lyvecpat) 445, 4, um-Tw 427, gating 445, 4. » (yoov) 448 D, 21. ypde-co (eypdonv) 424, 6. ye PNebhie 424 D, 30.

(edcnv, Sho) 447 D : Wal-rons (Zaica) 440 D, as Balowat (eSacduny, Sé3uara), —ss Barr€opat, 434 D, 4. ym (d¢dne, Sdyrat) 434. D, 3. Sdx-ve (e5arov, ShEowar) 435, . Odp-vnwt, -vdw (e5duny, eBayida ny, eduhdnv), daudcw, 443 D, 1.

edpavov D.

Sie bac (Saréacdar) 434 D, 4. d€é-aro 381 D.

— Bel-Bi-a (Seldw), ZSeura, 409 D, 5.

pelt, Seraydopat, Seidloxonet, D, : ~w@ (@erua, Sé5punuat) 443 D, 1.

Be; 2 (edpny), Satpw, delpw, 424, 7. EX- (edeyunv, d€xro) 408 D, 36. é (07%, deSexa) 420, 1.

€-w (Sei, Bree 422, 4; det-ouc D. npt-dopec s vdnv) 448 D, 22.3

t, Be dot (Sédouxa, Seda, Eero) oD; deldia, 5 deldw, Ble, De

eo (Bebofrnea) 314.

Dc ciouons 814.

(dtergxSnv) 413.

INDEX EX OF VERBS. —

“As (Bale 434 D, 3; ‘rep 434 D, 4;

Bap>-dve (ZdapSov, SeddpSnna) 436, 4;

Belx-vypu (Séderxa) 442, 3; Sen delSey-

(2 parov, 5€5opra) 424 D, 31.

ee fs ais (S:dax) 447, 10; She, S€Saov,

deBdnear, ’8dnv, D

—— 8Inus = Sé-w, 408, afihe aig

di-5pd-onw (€5pav) 444, 2,

didwps (50, Cdwxa, SeBoua2) 408, 4,

die (evdlecav, Siwpar) 404 D bi

di¢nucu (Sie) 404 D ce.

dubd-w (SupF, asda 871 ¢.

didK-w, Siwkddo, 411 D. -

50 (B/Beu2) 403, 4.

Sox-€w (oka) 448, 4,

dou7-€w (2ySobmnoa) 448 D, 12.

Spa (didpdone, Zpav) 444, 2,

Spat (Sépx-ouat, Zdpaxov) 424 D, 31,

dpd-w (Sedpapa, edpdodyy) 421, 1.

dpeu (Tpéxw, Cdpauor, 8éBp0ua) 450, 5.

ae (eduvhdny, -doony) 404, 5. du-w (Zddv, S09), Sdvw, 423, 3.

‘E (Inu) 403, 1; (Evvupr) 440, 1. éd-w (<lwr, ela) 312.

_ eyelpw (eyphyopa, eyiryeppat, irypounv)

432,53 eypa, -ouat, ib

«5, €5-0, eo (eadiw) 450, 3.

Sopa: (€5) 431, 6.

edéA-w (adéanoa), SéAw, 422; 9.

Edt Cw (<idioe, eiSta) 296. 312.

eldov (15, dpdw) 450, 4.

eidds (15, of8a, #Betv) 409, 6.

cixd(w (efeaca, Hace) 810.

elic~w (celia), etxdSw, 411 D.

eixds (1K, coud) 409, 7.

eihw (cAca, eeAmait, adany, édAet), eid, ciAcw, elAAw, TAAw, 482 D, 22.

eluct, claro (€vvuus) 440 D, 1.

eiul (es, &y, Hv) 406, 1.

eluc (1, Hew) 405, 1; aie, He, toay, (é)ecoduny, D

eivvoy (Evvupr) 440 D, 1,

elit-ov (<pe, elpnica, 2ppéony) 450, 8; elpw, év(v)-érw, Evicrov, evo, D

elpy-vupt (Epgas), elpy-0, 442, 45 PY» EEPYs C€pXaTO, closer, D.

elp-omot (= Epouae) 424 D,

eipv, 405 D b. 420 D, 12.

elpw (eépéw) 450 D, 8.

cipw (eipka, zepuat) 312 D.

cia (Ecoat, €ous, 1(w) 431 D, 6.

éeloxw, trxw, 447 D, 16.

elwda (nd) 322; toa D.

€A (aipéw, efdov) 450, 1.

éAatyw (€Ahrdia), and-eo, 435, 2.

ergyx-w (€AnAeyuon) 321.

184 INDEX OF VERBS. [45) ’

ead for eAvd (Epxouat, HASov) 450, 2.

éAloow (efAréa) 312.

EAK-w (efAkvoa, elAKvopot) 419, 19; éAréw D. ;

EAm-w (ZoATa, ebdrmew) 424 D, 32,

eAud, eAcevd (€pxomat) 450, 2.

eue-w (Hucoa) 419, 11.

évalpw (Hvapov, évhparo) 432 D, 23.

évayTid-omat (hvayTiosnv) 418.

ever (pépw, Hrveyna, iveyKov, evivoxa,

eviveypat) 450, 6; Hveuca, -ov, D.

ér-evjvoxe 321 D. evdupué-ouat (€veSuuhdnv) 413.

évin-rw (jqvlmamov, évévimov) 427 D, 20.

évicow (= évin-rw) 429 D, 3.

E-vyupt (huplera) 440, 1; elvvoy, Econ,

eiuat, Eorat, efaro, D. evoxArc-w (vdxAnoa, -Ka) 314, fouxa (ede, eixds) 409, 7. Eoprd(w (Edpracov) 312 b. év(v)-én-w (nomor, éviivw) 450 D, 8. emimeAoman (€meueaAhonv) 413. erlora-wat (Amorhrnv) 404, 6. €x-oua (eitduny, Eomduny) 424, 8;

éx-w, omov, o7relo, ép (elroy, ép) 450, 8; etpw D. épd-w (hpdosnv), Fpa-uor, 419, 3. epyaCoucs (elpyaoucr) 312. epy (Epyw, elpyw, elpyvups) 442, 4. epdw (epy, Copya, edpyew) 428, 14. épeld-w (ephpercuat) 392 D, épelkw (ipicov, éphprypar) 425 D, 19. épelrw (ipirov, éphptra) 425, 6. épecow (jpeca) 430, 4.

epevyoua: (Hpuyor), épuyyydvw, 425, 12.

épevdw, epud-alvouat, 425 D, 20,

épid-alvw (-hoacdat), -ualyw, 436 D, 15.

Ep-oman (ephoouat, npduny) 424, 9; elpouat, épé-w, -omat, -elyw, D.

pir-w, -0¢w (cipro, elpruca) 312.

Zip-« (iippnoa) 422, 6.

&md-ep-ca 845 D,

eptx-w (npvxaxov) 424, 10; epuxdve, -avdw, D.

éptoucn (epu, etpv), pdouat, 405 D b.

épt-w (elpuca, etptor) 420 D, 12.

Zpx-omat (HASOv, EAHAVSa, eAedcouat) 450, 2; #AvSov, Fvdov, D.

es (eiul, éort) 406, 1.

eodiw (Zona, Eparyov, e5hdoxa, edfdeopat), Eodw, dw, 450, 3.

€o-oa, €o-rat (Evvum) 440 D, 1.

grou, €ocouat (iw) 431 D, 6.

- Sb-w (%doa, TEdVKa, erbonv) 420, 2

éorid-w (eiorlaoa, -Ka) 312,

e8-w (eddjow) 422, 7.

evrAaBe-ouat (evACAASHY) 413.

eip-loxw (ebpoy, efpnra) 447, 6.

evppalyw (evppavdnv) 414,

dm-exS-dvonat (-nxSdunv, ~hxInpar) 436, 6; ExSw, -opat, ib.

Ex-w (elxor, etw, Zrxov, oxhow) 424, 11 | dxwKa, éx-dxaTo, ZrxeSov, D. :

ey-w (Hvgnoa) 422, 8. ,

Ewuev (%-w) 408 D, 18, :

Zd-w (Ci, En, Chow), Ion. (Sw, 871 ¢. 4

Cebry-vupu (€Gdynv) 442, 5.

(é-w (&{eoa, Ceords) 419, 12.

(é-vvums (@(wopar) 441, 1.

7

‘HBd-cKxw, 4Bd-w, 444, 8, 3

98-ouar (HoSynv, RoShooua) 413.

hot (4s) 406, 2; clara, arc, D. ;

Tae (iv, H) 404, 1.

hut-w (€uvhuvea) 821 D,

Oddr-Aw (TéEINAA) 482, 6;

Snr€w, JareSwv, THAESdwv, D. say (SvicKkw, Savoy) 444, 4, Sam (réSyra, Tapdy) 425 D, 17. Sda-rw (eérdpyy) 427, 5. Se (riSnut) 403, 2. Selvw (Servo, Sévw) 482 D, 24. SéA-w (SeAhow) = eSEA-w, 422, 9. Sép-ouat 424,12; Sépoouas, Sepelw, D. Séw (Sv, Sedooua) 426, 1. Suyydve (@Ziyor) 437, 2. SAd-w (EXAGoa, ESAdTI nv) 419, 4. SALB-w (TEdALa, EXALBnv) 424, 13. SvhoKw (Savor, Tédvnna) 444, 4, Sop (Spdécxw, Sépyuua) 445, 5. Spdoow (eIpata, rérpnxa) 428, 8. Spad-w (réSpav[o]ucu) 421, 18. Spex (rpéx-w, ESpeta) 450, 5. Sper (Tpép-w, EIpepa) 424, 26. Splr-Tw (Tpvd) 427, 6. Spéckw (€Sopov), Sdpyumon, 445, 5. Sb-yw, Su-véw (= Sd-w) 485 D, 10. Sur (TUd-w, TESvupar) 424, 28.

"I (clus) 405, 1. id-ouat (iacdunv, iddnv) 415. iavw (tera, toapev) 449 D, 7. idx-w, iax-€w, 424 D, 338. 15 (dpdw, eldov) 450, 4;

(oida, eidds, Sev) 409, 6.

wont, ix-d pai 8; Ie D. iad-orcouas 444, 5; iad-ouat D. nd thon ye D

tuaoow (tuaca 9.

Grrapa = réromat, 424, 19.

ue 409 D, 6.

Torus (ora, Eornna, Exrds) 403, 5. ; (sex) = exw, 449, 2; —iexdvw, ioxavde, D.

Kad («éxad-or, ~how) 428 D, 18. ‘KaseCouce (Kadedoouc) 481, 6. ‘dda 406, 2. KadiGe (Kadi@) 431, 6; KaSeioa D. Katvupon (Kad, réxaopar) 442 D, 17. Kalveo (€xavov) 482, 7. Kalo, dw (Katow) 434, 1; a Zxna (€xeta), néeas, D. | KaA€e-w (exdrcoa, KéeKAnKa) 420, 5; mpo-KariCouct, kukrdhorw, D. _ -kadvaTw@ (KaAvB) 427, 7. : Kkdu-ve (Zkamov, kéexunna) 435, 8. Kdur-re (Kéekappar) 427, 8. kedd-vyvut, Kldynut, 489 D, 4. Kel-pat (Kéwpmar) 405, 2. Kelpw (kep@, exdpny) 432, 8. _ keAad-éw (reAddwv) 448 D, 13. _ KeAeU-w (exeAcvopar) 421, 20. _ ‘KeA-Aw (KeAgw, ExeAoa) 345 D. —KeA-opou (€xexAdunv) 424 D, 34. _ Kevt-éw (kévoa) 448 D, 14. Kepd-vyvus (Kexpara) 439, 1; 4 kepdw, kepalw, D. _ kepSalvw (xepdavd, rexépSnna) 433, 6. keVSw 425, 13; Kevddvw, nde, D. KAD-w (Kexadjrouct) 422 D, 20. _Knptoow (Knpuk, Kexhpyxa) 428, 2. — Kldvnet = Kedd-vyyus, 443 D, 8. KikAhonw (KAc) = kadréw, 444 D, 12, Kh-vuuou (Exroy, exiadov) 440 D, 5. klpynut, -vdw, = Kepd-vyvuut, 443 D, 2. Kix-dve ae Kixhoouat) 436, 7. xXpa, Expnoa) 403, 9. A (KéA-omat, exe-KA-dunv) 424 D, 34. Adlw (KéxrAayya) 428, 12; &kAaryov, KeKhnyes, D. alo, KAdw@ (KAavrotuat) 434, 2.

Wael «

J 6 4 = :

4

i

aE he

| . at on.

site ae

INDEX OF VERBS.

si

| KAd-w (ExAdoa, €xadoSny) 419, 5. KAe (Karo, KEKANKA, KiKAHTKw) 420, B.

KAel-@ (KéxAe[o |uar) 421, 15; KAnt-w, trata, D.

kAelw, KAgomet (Av), 426 D, 8.

KA€n-Tw (exrdany, eat 427, 9. -

KAH-@ (KeKANMat, exAjoRnv) 421, 16.

KALy@ oar KéxAtua) 433, 1.

KAv (kAvoy, KAclw, KAgouat) 426 D, 8. Kua (Kdp-ve, réxunra) 435, 8. kvat-w (Kéxvaropar) 421, 12, kvd-w (kvij, Kéxynopat) 421, 2. Kém-Tw (Kéxopa) 427, 10, kopé-vyume (Kexdpeopat) 440, 2; Kekopnés, kexdpnuct, D. koptaow (kexopuSpevos) 430 D, 10. Koté-w (exdreca, kexornds) 420 D, 11. Kpa (kepdvvuut, Kéexpara) 439, 1. Kpd<w (Kéxparya, Kéxpaxst) 428, 18. Kpeua-por (Kpeuhooua) 404, 8. Kpeud-vyu (expeudodnv) 439, 2. Kphuvajat = xpeua-wa, 443 D, 8. Kpltw kéxprya) 428 D, 20. kplyw (kpiv@, Kéxpixa) 433, 2. xpov-w (éxpovpat, éxpovodny) 421, 23, Kptwrw (kpuB or pvp) 427, 11. Krd-ouat (KéxTnua) 319 b. 393 a. krelvw (KkTev@, Exravoy, &-Kra-v, &im-éxtova), dmo-nrivvupt, 438, 4. xrl(w (ed-nrl-wevos) 408 D, 26. o-KTivvupse (KTev) 442, 6. Krun-éw (€xrvTov) 448 D, 15. ku-lokw (Exvoa), Kid, Kvéw, 446, 2. kvAl-w (KkextAiouar) 421, 6; KvAlvdo, nuAwdéw, ib. ku-véw (%xvoa) 438, 3. KUm-Tw (Kéexupa) 427, 12. Kup-€w (€xupoa), kip-w, 448, 5.

Aayxdyw (Zraxov, eAnxa, AEAoyXa) 437, 8; Adtoua D.

Adouar = AauBdvw, 429 D, 5. AauBdvw (ZraBoy, eianda) 437, 4; Aduoua, AeAgBnKa, D.

Adum-w (A€Aauma) 424, 14.

Aavddve (Erasov, AEAnSa) 487, 5 | Ahdw, AnSdvw, D.

Adokw (Aak, An, Aake) 447,11; Anréw, D.

Aéy-w (e€A€yuny, A€Kro) 408 D, 37.

Aéy-w (efAoxa, etreyuar) 424, 15.

Aelaw (ZrAumov, A€AouTa) 292; Aumdve 425, 7.

186 —

aed-w (€rcdodyv) 421, 21.

-Aex (ZAckro, EAcEa) 408 D, 38. Ans = AavSdve, 425, 1. Alocomat, Alr-ouct, 430 D, 11. Aixp-dw (AcAerxudres) 448 D, 23. Aov-w (EAov, Aoduat, Ade) 871 e. Av-w 269; Aduny 408 D, 29.

Matvowat (€udyyv, wéunva) 432, 11. palowar (u€uova, peuaper, meuads), poaudew, 484.D,5; udmevos ib. pax-dv (unkdoua) 448 D, 24. pavSdvw (tuasov, uarthooucn) 437, 6. pdpvapor (uapa) 443 D, 4. pdpr-Tw (ucudmorey) 427 D, 21, papTup-€w, wapTvpoua, 448, 6. pdoow (eudyny, wéuaxa) 428, 3. pdx-ouc (euaxerdunv, meudxnwat) 422,10; mwaxé-oua D.

Bed-oucn (-hoomat), uAdouar, 422 D, 21.

KEedd-crw (Cuedioryny), peddw, 446, 3. pelpouat (Euuope, efuaprat) 482 D, 25. HEAA-w (€ueAANO'D OF Hu.) 422, 12. meA-w (€uéAnoa) 422, 11;

Méunara, meuBarerau, D. Bev (watouat, weuova) 434 D, 5. fév-w (ueuevna) 422, 13; luv ib. MeTauerouae (uereueAqSnv) 418.

unk-douat (uakdy, weunnds) 448 D, 24.

Bnti-dw, pntlowa, 448 D, 25. puly-vumt, pioryw, 442, '7; winro D. pie-ouen (weulunuat) 415. Pyuvhore (uva, wéuvnuo) 444, 6. pluve (utvdcw) = wév-w, 449, 3. ploryo (wry) = plyvums, 447, 12. pve (uivhoKkw, weuvnuat) 444, 6. MOA (BAdoKw, Euodoy) 445, 2.

ut (@ (uvy, uve) 431, 7; putéw, dw, ib.

MuK-dowot (Euviov, weuvna) 448 D, 26. Bv-w (Euvoa, weuiiea) 420, 6,

Naerd-w (varerdwoa) 434 D, 6. valw (évacca, évdodnv) 434 D, 6. vaoow (vad, vary) 481, 8.

veiré-w (évelxeoa) 419 D, 21. véu-w (vevéunna) 422, 14.

véouat 430 D, 12.

véew (vv, Evevora) 426, 2; vhyw D. véew (vévn[o]uar) 421, 5.

vi¢w (vB) 429, 2; vimrw ib. viccouo (wr) 430 D, 12.

4wo-, Sia-, év-, mpo-voeouat, 418.

INDEX OF VERBS.

Fé-w (era, teords) 419, 18, tup-€w, Ebp-ouat, 448, 7. tb-w (€voua) 421, 10.

Odus (edvoduny, ddédvora) 321 D. b(w (05, of, Ydwda) 431, 8.

ot (pépw, ofow) 450, 6.

oty-w (Sita), ofyvups, 424 D, 16. oida (Yracr, eidéds, dev) 409, 6.

- 018-dyw (oidfow), oidéw, 436, 8.

oivoxo€-w (éwvoxder) 812 D. of-ouct, olucs (env), 422, 15; ot-w, dt-w, dt-ouat (gladnv), D. otx-omat (oixhoouat) 422, 16; oixvéw, map-dxnka, ofxwxa, D. oA (eYAw, edAcr) 482 D, 22. dALod-dvw (-how, édrAroSov) 436, 9. dA-Avuut (@AduNY, BAWAA, GASAEKAa) 442, 8; drA€Kw, ovAduevos, D. oAm (€Atw, forma, édarreiv) 424 D, 82. du-vuut (6udpona, dpd[o|Snv) 442, 9. oudpy-vuus (&mopta) 442, 10. dvivnus (ova, avhunv) 408, 6. dvo-ueu (dvorduny, avdcSnv) 405 D a.

om (dpdw, dWouat, Irwmra, SpInv) 450, 4 —

éruiw (érbow) 434 D, 7.

bpd-w (Edpwv—iouat, droma— eldoy, id<iv) 450, 4:

opy (%pdw, fopya, édpyeiv) 428, 14.

dpyalyw (&pyava) 382 b.

dpéy-vuput, dpéy-w, 442 D, 18.

dp-vuust (pou, Spopoy, Epwpa, dpdpeuat) 442, 11; pro, dpivw, dpovw, D.

dpiocw (dpdpuxa) 428, 4. :

drcouat (or) 429 D, 4. .

da pp-aivoua (d0pphoopar) 486, 10.

obpé-w (eobpnea, -nKa) 312.

ovTd-w (obra), ovrd(w, 423 D, 5.

bpelrAw (dpehov, dpetAfow) 432, 12; opéraw D.

dpa-toxdyw (Sprov, dpAhow) 436, 11.

ox (€xw, dxwxa, emdxaro) 424 D, 11.

Ila (éxaioduny, wéwaipor) 835 D,

Tas (rdoxw, erasov) 447, 18.

male (mod, mary) 431, 4.

Tal-w (rahow, émalodnv) 421, 18. maral-w (eéradaloanv) 421, 14, wdd-rAw (€rnaa, -Temardy) 432 D, 26, Taupalveyv, mappavdwy, 472 kk, mapavoue-w (mapnvdunoa) 315. mapowe-w (remappynka) 315.

wites (@raca) 480, 5.

spas éemdpny) 432, 13. réw (€rexdnv),. relic, 448, 9. 2 mead, TeAa, TAG, Thro), e)Addw, riAvnus, 428 D, 21. au (emrdunr), wérw, 424 D, 35. rELLT-C fie tarcstion, Were uct) 494, 17. } (weloouat, wémovda) 447, 13, mépd-omar (apd, mapde, mopd) 424, 18. meps-w » (EmpaSov) 424 D, 86; mopcrées ib. ys yt (repa) = minpdae, "443 D, 5. rw (wer) 429, 1; wérrw ib. oo ") WES (alnre, ‘exeoov) 449, 4, rerd-vyups (wémTauat) 439, 3. open (18 e|racomant, trrqv) 424, 19; fae WET AOL, TOThOMCL, ib. T rr bomen = Tuvddvouat).425, 14. : Ay-voe (emerynv) 442, 12; -éanero D. mliavnut, -vdw, = medd- “Ge, 443 D, 6. 7 tains (mAa), TAAS@, 403, 7. mpnut (pa), TpRrw, 403, 8. rTKW 426 ti-vw (moat, ion, mémwnra) 435, 4. is rimtokw (wi, Erica) i x mpdcnw (wpa) 444, 7 ‘w@ (mer, faerie, mexreokc) 449, 4. = yee (wer, Ewitvoy) 438, 4, 7 i yn, -vdw, = mend-vyUILt, 443 D, 7. pavokw (pav) 446 D, 4. x for med (1éAopat, éxaduny) 424. D, 35. me er TAHS@) 403, 7 ; TEeAG(w, TAHTO) 428 D, 21. Adlw (errwyia, emadyxonv) 828 b. aAdgow (tava) 430, 6. co (errdicny, méhox@) 424, 20, Achy. %rdevoa) 426, 3; tAdw D. » (erriryny, ~ewadyny) 428, 5. i GwAtiee méemAvuat) 433, 3. v, = TAéw, 426 D, 3. in dmvevoa 426, 4; ty TIVUTKM, D. ty cgal'a 0 \Tl- wa) ) 435, 4. ea aaa qmove-w 420, 8, 9. b-0 472 kk. oS om 424 D, 37.

yo j

sade pa ype em ere igen aR ARE HPI dan eae pador) 424D, 86. 18. mpad (wépde, ov * Agate 421,19. mpdoow (wérpaya, mempaxe) 428, 6. a) 295 5 v, mpi (empiduny) 408, 8. mpl-w (rémpic wat) 421, 1 (revi, mewhow) 371 c. "po (&ropoy, mem peora) 424D, 87.

Tpodune-omat (mpovsuphdyy) 413, wre (merdvyyut, wewrapa) 439, 8; (wérouat, @rrny) 424, 19.

wrdp-vonat, wratpw, 442, 13.

arrhcow (exrnxa), arboow, 428, 7; -TTATHY, TenTHds, D,

aricow (eri) 430, 7.

Tro (witTw, némraka) 449, 4,

arl-w (rica, wruords) 419, 20.

muvodvouat (erudduny, meboouat) 437, 7; medSoucu ib.

‘Palyw (éppddara, pdooare) 392 D. ied (¢ppatodny) 421 D, 24,

dara (€ppdpnv) 427, 13. i (elpnica, epphrny, 235290) 450, 8. pécw (fey, Epeta) 428, 14. péw (ep 5dnv, apidnia, eppevoa) 426, 5. ptry-vupe (eppaynv, eppwya) 442, 14, pry-éw (pprya) 448 D, 16. pryd-w (pyar, prydnv) 371 d. pirréw, = plarw (pip), 448, 10. plarrew (eppipny) 293. pv-ouat (Sdaro, pioSa:) 405 Db. pumd-w (pepuTm@pévos) 319 D. pa-vyups (epsdoanv) 441, 2.

Salpw (cup, eéonpa) 432, 14. cadml(w (eodAmiyia) 328 b. cad-w (eodwoa) 431 D, 5. oBé-yyup (EoBnv, ZoBeouat) 440, 8. oéB-omat (eoepdnv) 413. oel-w (céoetopar) 421, 17. acto (€oovpat, aro) 426 D, 9. anne (eodanv) 425, 2. oxdmrre (eoxdpnv) 427, 15. oedd-vyuye (€oxédacpour) 439, 4. oKEN-hew (EondAny) 432,15; goxnra D. okEer-Topal, TKOTE-w, 49'7, 16.

okhnr-re 427, 17.

oxldynut = oKedd-pyv pt 443 D, 8. oKan-Te 427, 18. oud-w (ona, tuna), ouhxw, 871 ¢.

o6-ns, bn, Two, 431

on for oem (roma, Sondunp) 424, 83 évi-oroy, tomete, 450 D, 8.

188

gtd-w (orice, tomacuc) 419, 6. orelpw (omep@, eomdpny) 482, 16. omévd-w (Zomevoa, -opat) 881. 391 ¢. ora (torn) 403, 5.

orelBw (oriB, eoriBnuct) 425, 9. otelxw (€ortxov) 425, 10.

oTéA-Aw (€oreiAa, eorddany) 290, atépy-w (€rropya) 424, 22.

otep-loxw, orepéw, orépouat, 447, 7. oTev-Tal, ored-T0, 405 D ec. oropé-vyuut, ordp-vumt, 440, 4. oTpep-w (eorpdpny, Eorpopa) 424, 23. orpé-vyuut 441, 3.

otvy-€w (arvyov) 448 D, 17.

opdtw or opdrrw (éopdynv) 428, 15, THdA-Aw (2opnaa, eopdAny) 482, 18. ox for vex (Exw, Erxov, rxHow) 424, 11. od (@ (ow, cwd) 431, 5.

Ta (relyw, réraxa, raydw) 483, 5.

Tay, TeTayav 384 D3; rdoow 428, 9.

Tara, erddAacoa 408 D, 6.

Tavb-w (érdvioa, Terdvvcpa) 433 D, 5.

Tapdoow (érdpata), Ipdoow, 428, 8.

Tdcow (erdyny, TéeTAXA) 428, 9.

Tap (Sdrrw, érddnv) 427, 5.

Tap-dy, TéeXnTa, 425 D, 17.

ve for Se (TiSnu, érédny) 408, 2.

relvw (rev, TéraKa) 438, 5; Tavbw, tTitalyw, D.

Tek (TikTw, &rexov, TéroKa) 449, 5.

Tehé-w (eréAcoa, TeTEACo MAL) 288.

Tem, TéeTWoy 384 D.

Téu-vo (erauov, TéeTUNKa) 435, 9 ; TAULVO, TEMW, TUTYO,

TépT-w 424, 24; rerapréunv D.

Tépo-omat, Tepralyw, 424 D, 38.

tetpalyw (erérpynva) 449, 6.

Tevxo (Térvyuct) 425, 15;

: TétuKoY, TiTbcKw, D,

7H (for ta-¢?) 433 D, 5.

thw (erdknv) 425, 3.

TnAEddwv (IdA-Aw) 482 D, 6.

Te, TeTINds, TeTinual, 386 D.

rlonue (Se, ByKa, TeEcKka, TEYELUAL, érédny) 403, 2.

tletw (@rexov, TéETOKa) 449, 5.

ti-vw (érica), Tlyvpt, 435, 5.

rivaivw (ray) 433 D, 5.

ritpaw (Tpa, erpnoa) 449, 6.

ritpdokw (Tpo) 445, 6; tpdw D.

“irboKouat (ri-Tvk) 447 D, 17.

vi-w (rica) 435 D, 5.

INDEX OF VERBS.

[453

TAa, erAnv 408, 6; rérAnxa 409 D, 10.

The (Téuvw, TEeTUNKA) 435, 9.

TEnyeo (Ermaryov) 425 D, 18.

Tpa (TiTpdw, Erpyoa) 449, 6.

Tpam-elouey (Tépmw) 424 D, 24,

TPA (Spdcow, rérpnxa) 428, 8.

TpET-W Age. TéTpopa) 424, 25 ; Tparw, TparTéw, ThoTwéw, D,

Tpép-w (edIpepa, erpdonv, TESpaypot, TéTpopa) 424, 26; rpddw D.

“rpéx-w (€Spe_a—Zpamoy, Sedpdunna)

450, 5; rpdxw D. Tpé-w (€rpeca, &rpeoros) 419, 15.- TplB-w (erpiBny, Térpipa) 424, 27. tplw (rérprya) 428, 16. Tpud (Sptrrw) 427, 6. Tpwyw (erparyov) 425, 4. Tpdw, = TITpdocKw, 445 D, 6. tu for Sv (Svea, érddnv) 420, 2. Tuyxdve (ervxov, Tevtouat, TeTUXNKA)

, 8; rérevxa D.

tuk (Tedxw, TéruKoy, TITIgKw) 425 D, 15. Ton-Tw (TUTThow, éruipa, érumov) 427, 19. Tip-w (erdpny, TEXUU po) 424, 28.

‘Ymoxvéoua (strerxduny, -nuat) 438, 6. B-w (boat) 421, 11,

ba, paivw, 432 D, 19; mépauat 433 D, 7.

gary (écdiw, eparyov) 450, 3.

palya (epdynv, mépnva) 291; Pde, we- phoerat, dacivw, padvanyv, 482D, 19

od-crw, —= pnul, 444, 8.

Sia-pavonw, -pdcKw, 446 D, 4.

pelSoucr 425,11; weptd-dunr, -hoouc, D

ev, pa (€repvov, wéepauar) 433 D, 7.

pép-w (olow; iveyKoy, hveyKa, évivoxa, eviveyuat) 450, 6; Avena D.

gpevyw (€puyov) 425, 16; puyydvw ib. mepuCdres D.

onul (pa) 404, 2.

~rd-vw (praca, pSny) 435, 3,

orelpw (prepa, eprdpnv) 482, 20; 51-Epdopa D.

adt-vw (€pdsioa) 485, 6; epriuny, parwtse, D.

pir-éw (€piadunv) 448 D, 18.

piroriweé-ouat (eproriuheny) 413.

pAd-w, = SAd-w, 419, 4.

prady-w (eprdyny late), prAeyédo, 411 D.

gv for pev (répvov) 433 D, 7.

ppdy-vunt, ppdoow, 442, 15.

pnul, 404, 2;

189

498 17; eréppadoyv D. = xAad (kexAad-ds, -ovros) 360 D. pal Ment yreegis silves hebacsediins) 421; 93 xévvvur ib. (puaAak. Repehanes Ae 11. _xpa (Kixpnur) 403, 9.

> pvpow, 7 a u-ov, expalounoa, 448 D, 19. ‘puv. "Epvea) oes os estan (xéxpnuat) 835 a. 871 ¢. Oe Se HTH Em > - “ xpd-w (Kéxpnomot) 421, 3. de gd) £38,185 ead, hows D. oh Cp xp, xo) 404 8. } ( 5 Xauphow) 432, 21; xpl-w (xéxpilo]uce) 421, 8. Kexapnads, D. xpd-vyvus (Kexpwouat), xpolw, 441, 4. éxaddasnv) 419, 7.

_Rexapunys

Sdvw (€xadov, xelooum) 487 D, 9. = Wd-w (Wi, Ay[o]uar), Whx-w, 421, 4. xd-oKnw (Exavov, Kéxnva) 444, 9. ix-w (epixny, ebiryny) 424, 29. xelw (xevodua, Kéxoda) 428, 19. éw (Exem, KexviKa) 426, 6; "NS-éw (wou, Ewonar) 448, 11.

— -xxelw, Exeva, D. dové-ouar (€wvoduny, empidunyv) 450, 7. : ae oe

i PART THIRD.

FORMATION OF WORDS.

452, Simptze anp Compounp Worps. A word is either s¢mple, i. e ‘formed from a single stem: Ady-o-s speech (st. Aey), ypap-w to write (st. “ypah) ;——or compound, i, e, formed from two or more stems: Aoyo- ‘ypago-s writer of speeches.

ye A. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.

_ 453. Verpats anp Denominatives. Words formed immediately from a verb-stem are called verbals: dpy-7 beginning, from the stem of dpx-@ to begin.——Those formed immediately from a noun-stem are call- ed denominatives: dpxa-io-s of the beginning, original, from the stem of apxn (apxa) beginning.

454, Surrixms. Nouns (substantive or adjective), whether derived from a verb-stem or a noun-stem, are formed by means of added endings: hese are called formative-endings, or suffixes. Thus dédy-o-s is formed rom the verb-stem Aey by means of the suffix 0; dpya-io-s, from the oun-stem apya by means of the suffix vo.

Rew. a. The suffixes limit the general idea of the stem, by assigning par- u ¥ relations, under which it exists or manifests itself. Thus the verb-stem

rl

(move w) has the general sense of making or composing: from this are med by various suflixes, woin-rf-s person composing, poet, woln-at-s act or f composing poetry, moln-ua (morn-wor) thing composed, poem. From the

le r. -

4

190 FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 7 [454

verb-stem "ypa (ypdd-w to write) come ypad-et-s writer, ypad-l-s (ypap-18) writ- ing-instrument, ypdu-ua (for ypab-mar) written letter or document, ypap-ph written stroke or line. Similarly, noun-stem dra, Nom. dinn right, dixa-to-s righteous, just, Sixao-cbiyn justice ; noun-stem Bacirev, Nom. Bactret-s king, Bacire-1a queen, Barire-ta kingdom, Baotd-ixd-s kingly.

Rem. b, A few verbal nouns are formed without any suffix: @uddeow (puAar) to watch, pvaat (pudak) watchman. Such words change e of the verb-stem to o (cf. 25): prdy-w to burn, prdé (paroy) flame.

455. EvpHonic Cuancres. The union of stems and suffixes gives oc- casion to many euphonic changes :

a. Vowels, when they come together, are often contracted: apxatos for apxa-io-s, Baorela for BaciAc(v)-1a, GAASea truth for adnSe(o)-1a (64) from aAn- Shs (adanves) true, aidotos venerable for ado(c)-10-s from aidés shame, reverence.

b. But a final vowel is often elided before a vowel in the suffix: ovpdy-to-s heavenly from ovdpavd-s heaven, éarép-to-s belonging to evening from éomépa even- ing. Even a diphthong may be elided: Bao1A-1xd-s from Bacired-s.

c. Again, vowels are interchanged, e with o, e: with o: ef. 25. This oc- curs chiefly in verbals formed by the suffixes o and a (457): rpdm-o-s turning, manner, from tpén-w to turn, Aon-d-s remaining from Acin-w to leave, roun-4

sending, escort, from méun-w to send, &droup-h ointment from GAclp-w to anoint. —

Also apwy-é-s helpful from &phy-w to help.

d. Further, vowels are sometimes lengthened: afd-n forgetfulness from Aavddvw (Add) mid. to forget. vowel before a consonant: moly-ua, woln-o1-s, morn-Th-s, from wo1é-w ;—or annex o before wp or T: KéAeve-ya command, redevo-rh-s commander, from Kerev-w to command. In these changes they follow the formation of the Perf. Mid.: cf. Te-Toln-Mol, -Tal, -Tal, KE-KEAEVO-wal, -Tat; and, on the other hand, d6-ua gift, 56-o1-s giving, So-rhp giver, from diSwmu to give, Perf. Mid. 5¢-S0-pou, -oou, -rat.

e. Lastly, consonants, when they come together, are subject to euphonie

changes: ypdu-ua for ypad-ma(r), Aegis speaking for Aey-o1-s, ixac-Th-s judge

for d:xa8-rn-s from dind¢w to judge, ete.

456. Accent. As a general rule, neuter substantives take the accent — ‘as far as possible from the end (recessive accent): AtvTpoy ransom, mARK- tpov instrument for striking the lyre, aporpov plough, waSdptov little boy - or girl, ypdppa writing, rvetpa breath, woinua poem. This is true with-

out exception in words of the 8d decl.: for exceptions in the2d decl., © see 463 b, 465 a.

Many masculine and feminine suffixes are regularly accompanied by recessive accent. Those which are not so will be specially noticed in the

pn

‘4

Especially, vowel-stems lengthen their final —

= eT eee Oe ee

following enumeration.

I. ForRMATION oF SUBSTANTIVES. Principat SUFFIXES.

457, A. Many verbals are formed, especially from primitive verbs, by adding to the stem the suffixes, o, Nom. o-s, masculine: Ady-o-s speech from Aéy-w to speak. ad, Nom. a or n, feminine: pdy-n jight from pay-opnai to fight. For change of vowel, see 455 ¢. a. These words are properly abstracts, expréssing the action of the verb but actually they have a wide range of meaning: oréA-Aw to equip, sem sréa-o-s a sending, expedition; hence that which is sent, an army or 1

191

“J . ai ie nei eupa i hing dr of pepe hi wa const genes A

watch of the etary party guarding, garrison.

, also are formed by the same suffixes: Aoim-d-s, -h, -d-v re- | Acla-w to leave.

mt. Adjectives in os thus formed are oxytone: Aomm-6-s. * So too E ves in os, when they denote an agent: dy-d-s leader. So also most 4 ae @ or n; especially those which have the change of vowel (455¢): woum-f ; pe come from stems of more than one syllable: pvAak-4.

458. B. The acrnr is expressed by the following suffixes: in verbals, denote the person who performs some action ; in denominatives, the . who has to do with some object.

1. ev, Nom. evs, masculine ; always oxytone. Poe ome of verbals in eds.

ypac-el-s writer . from ypdo-w to write

you-eb-s parent ylyvouat (yev) to be born

- Koup-ed-s barber keipw (ep) to shave Denominatives in eds.

- frr-eb-s horseman, rider | from fazo-s horse

mopoy-ev-s ferryman mopspud-s ferry

a. Several masculines in eds have corresponding feminines in eé (pro- -parox.): Baoiveds (of uncertain derivation) king, fem. Bactrcia queen (later BactAicoa). .

459. 2. rnp, Nom. rnp retpa, Nom. reipa 2 Tpia, Tpid : TOP, TOP mase, 5 aie pes fem.

TQ, TH-S 710, TI-S _. Verbals. ; Sl pete F from st. ow, Pr. od¢w (431, 5) _ ph-rwp (-Top) orator st. pe, Fu. épa (450, 8) xperhes (-ra) juige st. xpt, Pr. xplve

_ motn-Th-s Gre) poet _movh-Tpia fem. ©

z Sa : wig” t abré-w to play the flute _. Denominatives.

moré-w to compose

| modi-ry-s (-ra) citizen from méAr-s city oiké-rn-s (-Ta) house-servant ig — olké-ri-s (-715) fem. olxo-s house

a. Accent. Verbals in Typ and Tpis are always oxytone: so also most of those in TNS, especially when the penult is long by nature or position. Verbals ‘in twp, Teipa, Tpid, and all denominatives, have recessive accent.

460. C. The action is expressed by the following suffixes: a ti, Nom. ti-s eo ol, ct-s > feminine. ; ola, od

e belong to verbals bay: ot is for tt by 62, cf. Lat. ti-o. faith from mefSo (13), 2 Pf. trust

|

192 FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. r460

ulun-oi-s imitation from piué-ouar to imitate

oKéeyi-s consideration oKén-roua to view, consider —

mpati-s action mpodcow (mpary) to act

years origin - yiyvouat (yer, yeve) to become ;

doxia-cla examination Soxiud¢w (Soxuad) to examine | b. po, Nom. pd-s, masc. and oxytone, belongs only to verbals.

Gdup-ud-s wailing from 680p-oua to wail

Aoyio-pd-s calculation AoylCouas (Aoyid) to calculate |

ora-o-pd-s spasm omd-w to draw

pu--d-s (movement) rhythm péw (pu) to flow

c. From verbs in evw are formed substantives in e/a (for ev-ca) which express the action; they are all fem. and parox.: mavdeia education, from madevo to educate; Bacireia kingship, kingdom, from Baoiteiw to be king (cf. 458 a). .

461. D. The resurr of an action is expressed by the suffixes, a. par, Nom. pa, neuter; only in verbals.

mpay-a (-uar) thing done, affair from apdoow (mpi) to do (almost the same as 7d memparyyévoy, Lat. factum) pj-ma (pnuar) word from st. pe, Fu. épa (cf. 7d eipnucvoy, Lat. dictum) THA-wa (TunuaT) section from réuvw (rem, Tue) to cut (cf. +d retunpévoy piece cut off) ‘ b. es, Nom. os, neuter. Adx-os (Aaxes) lot from Aayxdvw (Aax) to get by lot &9-os (eves) custom st. eS, elwSa am accustomed § Téx-os (rexes) child tlerw (rex) to bring forth 1 In denominatives, the same suffix expresses QUALITY : : Bd&-os (Bates) depth from Badd-s deep Bdp-os (Bapes) weight Bapt-s heavy a Lijx-os (untes) length par-pé-s long . 462. E. The InsTRUMENT or MEANS of an action is expressed by j tpo, Nom. rpo-y, neuter; cf. Lat. trum. | 4 %po-rpo-y plough (aratrum) from &pd-w to plough 7 Av-Tpo-v ransom Av-w to loose \ didax-rpo-v teacher's hire diddoKw (5:5ax) to teach. .

Rem. a. The kindred feminine suffix vpa is less definite: tv-o-rpa flesh scraper from gv-w to scrape, épxh-o-rpa place of dancing from épxé-oua to dance, maral-o-rpa wrestling-ground from radal-w to wrestle. 3

463. F. The piacs is expressed by a. tnpto, Nom. rnpio-v, neuter ; only in verbals,

&xpoa-rhpio-v Lat. audi-torium from éxpod-oua to hear Sixac-rhp.o-v court of justice Sucdw (Sucad) to judge

b. ero, Nom. efo-v, neut.; properisp., contrary to 456 ; in denom. Aory-elo-y speaking-place from Adyo-s speech koup-eto-v barber's shop koupev-s barber

Movo-eto-v seat of the Muses Movca Muse

oe ana where, aot be ‘abounds: dpmer-ay vineyard from Spy men’s & ected from avi G. avdp-ds man, oiv-dv wine-

4. G. Substantives « expressing QUALITY are formed from ‘diéelive- stems by t the following suffixes:

a. tnt, Nom. rns, feminine (Lat. tdt, tat, Nom. tas, tus).

waxb-rns (-rnr) thickness from maxt-s thick

-yed-rns (-rTnT) youth - -y€o-s youn Br papbes rer equality Yoo-s equa & b. ove, Nom. vivn, feminine. Pete. obyn justice from Sfxato-s just - Gwppo-obyn discreetness _ chdpwv (cwppor) discreet c. ca, Nom. ca, feminine. cog-la wisdom from copé-s wise evdaipmor-la happiness eddatuor (evdaruov) happy — GAHSe-1a trut. &ANShs (aAndes) true — eByo-a, good-will ebvous (evvoo) well-disposed

d. es, Nom. os, neuter, see 461 b.

465. H. Dimrnvurives are formed from substantive-stems by the following suffixes:

a. co, Nom. co-v, neuter.

maud-lo-y little child from ais (wad) child — xyn-lo-v little garden Kijmo-s garden decent javelin &xwv (axoyr) lance

Those of three syllables are parox., if the first syllable is long by nature or position: ma:dlov.

Other forms connected with co are

| sid oix-td.0-v little house from olko-s house —apio: matd-d, a little child mais (maid) child vBpu0: pea-vdpio-v little song [éAos (weAes, were) Song _ __b. Mase. toxo, Fem. toxa, Nom. ioxo-s, ioxn, parox.

“veay-toxo-s Lat. adolescentulus from veavia-s young man maud-ioxn young girl H wats (mad) girl “ arepar-lano-s little wreath orépavo-s wreath

_ 466. I. Parronymics (substantives which express descent from a : father = ancestor) are formed from proper names of persons by adding 2 suffixes, $a, Nom. 4y-s, masculine, paroxytone ; and $8, Nom.s, feminine, oxytone. _ These suffixes are "e applied directly to stems of the first declension: “ C Boped-5n-s, Fem. Boped-s, from Bopéa-s Aivesa-5n-s ' Aivela-s om of the second declension in to change this to ca:

C. Ocorid-5y-s, Fem. cor -s, from @éo'r1o-s 4 ert ors Mevolrio-s

“a ae

194 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. | — [466

All other stems take 1 as a connecting vowel, before which o of the 2d deel. is dropped. Those in ev lose v by 39.

Mase. Kexpor-i-87-s, Fem. Kexpot-i-s, from Kéxpow Tinae-{-5n-s Tinaet-s (Hm. has also a form TyAn-1d-5y-s, cf. 189 D.) Anrto-{-8n-s from Anré (Anro) and from stems of the 2d declension: Mase. TayraaA-{-87-s, Fem. Tayraa-i-s, from Tdyrado-s Kpov-t-5y-s Kpédvo-s

a. A rarer suffix for patronymics is sov, Nom. fwy: Kpov-twy (Kpop-iov) son of Kpdvo-s. The poets allow themselves many liberties for the sake of the metre.

467. J. GenTILES (substantives which designate a person as belong- ing to some people or country) have the following suffixes : a. ev, Nom. ev-s, oxytone: cf. 458.

Meyap-eb-s a Megarian from Méyapa (2d. decl. plur.) *Eperpi-et-s an Hretrian *Epetpla (1st decl.)

b. ra, Nom. rn-s, paroxytone: cf. 459.

Teyeo-rn-s from Teyéa, Aiywh-ry-s from Atyiva, "Hreipé-rn-s from *Hreipo-s, Sucerid-ry-s from SuceAla.

c. The corresponding feminine stems end in 6, Nom. s: Meyapis (Meyapid) a Megarian woman, Teyearis (-18), Sickioris (-:d). The accent psc on the same syllable as in the corresponding masculine,

TI. Formation or Apjsectives. Princrpat SUFFIXES.

468. 1. 1o, Nom. to-s,

expresses THAT WHICH PERTAINS in any way to the substantive from which the adjective is formed:

obpdy-to-s heavenly from oipayd-s heaven Thovo-L0-s wealthy (for wAovr-to-s) TAovTO-s wealth

oixeto-s domestic (for. ouxe-10-s) olko-s house 2 Gyopaito- s forensis (for ayopa-to-s) &yopd forum

Sépeto-s of the summer (for pepeses) S€pos (Sepes) summer aidoto-s venerable (for aSo0-t0-s) aidés (ados) shame Baotaco-s kingly (for BactAcv-to-s) Bactret-s king

a. This suffix is also used in connection with adjective-stems : areudtpio- Hil liberalis, from éAcdSepo-s liber. q

b. It often serves to form adjectives denoting country or people (gentiles), — which may be used also as substantives: Mi:Afo-to-s (for MiAnt-io-s) Milesian from MiAnTo-s, "ASnvaio-s Atienian from ’ASivat Athens.

c. Adjectives in ao-s, o10-s are generally properispomena (aos, ois).

469. 2. xo, Nom. xé-s, always oxytone, generally applied to the stem with a connecting vowel .. .

a, In verbals, it expresses ABILITY or FITNESS: épy-i-nd-s capable of gov= erning, ypa- nt-Kb-s fitted for writing or painting. Many verbals insert, be- fore this ending, the syllable 7:, which denotes the action (460 a): aioden-ri-nd-s capable of feeling, mpax-ri-nd-s suited for action. :

b. Denominatives in «é-s express that which pertains to the noun fro which they are derived: BactA-1-n6-s kingly, pvo-t-xd-s natural, .

145, 1 pide, it re ite oft>? od ts - -s of stone from AXo-s, EUA-wo-s wooden len nye xpva6-s.——But wo, Nom. «vé-s, jectives Pte 2 TIME: xSeo-wd-s belonging to yesterday "yuerep-wb-s nocturnus, éap-wd-s vernus. evr, Nom. M. evs, F. cova, N. ev, — FULNESS OF ABUNDANCE: Xapl-ers Heegicd from xdprs; bAg-El-s woody _ These are mostly poetic.

ae 471. 6. Adjective-suffixes of less definite meaning are

@ oxytone, mostly passive: de-vd-s fearful (to be feared), ceu-vd-s (c€B-onar) to be revered.

gl Abs, Ug oxytone and active: Se-Ad-s fearful (timid), awarn-Ad-s deceptive. 06s, mostly oxytone and active: Aaum-pd-s shining, poBe-pé-s frightful (alarm-

ing), also pass. afraid.

wo-s, active: pdx-i-uo-s warlike; or passive: GolS-i-yo-s to be sung of. And q akin to this,

p:- in the present.

to av

- olmo-s fig = 71, 460): xph-oruo-s useful, pdgmo-s (= puy-oyo-s) avoidable or 4 oe ab a es, Nom. 7s, Neut. es, oxytone, chiefly in compounds, see 475. -

TI. Denomrnative VERBS.

yod-w to lament

Gpidne-w to number eUTUXE-W to be fortunate ioropé-w to know by inquiry Bactred-w to be king Bovred-w to take counsel

Aeviaty-w to whiten xareraty-w to be angry

472, Denominative verbs are-formed from noun-stems in many ways. _ The most important endings are the following; they are given as seen In their effect upon the meaning, they are not clearly

distinguished from each other. a 0-9 puasd-w to let for hire from picdds hire xpucd-w to gild xpuads gold Cnpusd-w to punish (nula penalty Ob. a-w Tiud-w to honor Tinh honor ig aitid-ouat to accuse airia fault

yoos lamentation apidpds number evruxns fortunate torwp knowing Bacired-s king Bovah counsel

Ari y &Anvedw to speak truth GANShs true K . Cw eaml(-w to hope eamis hope éaanviCw to speak Greek "EAAnY Greek puurnt¢-w,to favor Philip idurros dind¢-w to judge _ Sinn justice epyd Copan to work Epyov work Bic -ouat to use force Bia force onualy-w to signify oma sign

Aeunds white xarerds hard, angry

— by-w ce pee ats Adds —— Raper to brig. Aapmpds bright . Sais site to be ashamed alo‘xos shame

196 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. [472

Rem. i. It happens occasionally, that from the same noun are formed several verbs with different endings and different meanings: thus from SodAo-s. slave, SovAd-w to enslave, dovredi-w to be a slave; from méAcuo-s war, rodeué-w and moAeul¢-w to wage war, woAcud-w to.make hostile.

Rem. j. Verbs expressing desire (DESIDERATIVES) are formed from verbs and nouns; most frequently with the ending oem: yeAacelw to desire to laugh, Spacelw to have a mind to do; also in aw, 1aw: povdw to be eager for murder, kAavoidw to be disposed to weep. Some verbs in aw, aw express an AFFEC- TION OF THE BODY: @xpidw to be affected with pallor, dpXarpsdw to have sore eyes.

Rem. k. A few INTENSIVES (almost entirely poetic) are formed from primi- tive verbs, by a more or less complete repetition of the stem, generally with some change of vowel: poamd-w to reach after, long for, from patowa: (ua) id., toppup-w to be agitated (of the sea) from pip-w to mix up together, mornvb-w to puff with exertion from mvéw (mvv) to breathe. Here belongs Ep. mayzpatyev (once Sub. 3 Sing. raupatynor), also taupavdwr, shining brightly, from oatve (wap-pay for pay-pay, 65a, 48).

B. COMPOSITION OF WORDS.

I. Form or Compounp WorDs.

473. When a noun stands as the jirst part of a compound word, only its stem is used: vav-payia (vais, paxn) ship-fight, xopo-diddoxados {xdpos, didaoxados) chorus-teacher.

a. Stems of the Ist decl. change a to o, appearing thus like stems of the 2d decl.: xwpo-ypddo-s (xépa, ypddw) land-describer. Stems of both these de- clensions drop their final vowel, when a vowel follows: xop-nyds (xépos, &yw) chorus-leader. It is retained, however, when the second part of the compound began originally with digamma: Hm. 8nuto-epyd-s artisan, Att. Snusovpyds. .

Stems of the 8d decl. commonly assume o as a connecting vowel before a — consonant: dyvSpiayr-o-moid-s_image-maker, marp-o-krévo-s parricide, ugt-o- Adyo-s natural philosopher, ixSv-o-pdryo-s fish-eating. :

b. But the exceptions to these rules are quite numerous. Thus, the stems in s are often found in a shortened form: é1p-o-«rdvos (Elpos, st. Epes) slaying — with the sword, rerx-o-waxla (st. rerxes) battle at the wall. Stems of the Ist decl. sometimes retain the final a (as @ or »): Gpera-Adyos prater about virtue, xon-bépos bearing libations for the dead. Sometimes an inflected case is found instead of the stem: veds-ouxos ship-house, vavot-mopos traversed by ships. —

474, When a noun stands as the Jast part of a compound, its final — syllable is often changed.

This is the case especially in compound adjectives: piAd-rimo-s (tinh) honor- loving, moAv-mpdypov (mpayua) busy. So too in compound substantives, — when the last part is an abstract word: A1So-BoAla (Boah) throwing of stones, — vav-waxla (udxn) ship-fight, ed-mpatta (xpatis) good success. Only after a pre- — position can the abstract word remain unchanged : apo-Bovag forethought. 4

475. A very frequent ending of compound adjectives, though seldom seen in simple words, is ns masc. and fem., es neut.: it is found

a, in many adjectives formed directly from the verb-stem: &-BAaB-qs BAdwrw, st. AaB) unharmed, airr-dpx-ns (&pxéw) self-suficing, independent, —

10

adjectives of which the last part is a substantive in es (Nom. os): erhs (Eros) of ten year's, xaxo~ndns (80s) ill-disposed.

476. Compounds in which the jirst part is made directly from a verb- m, are nearly confined to poetry. They are formed in two ways: a. The verb-stem appears without addition, except a connecting vowel i, oro) used before a consonant: meld-apxos obedient to command, Sax-é- vw to bite) heart-corroding, a&px-t-réxtrwv master-builder, mso-d-yuvos er. .

; b. The verb-stem has ox added to it: this expresses action (cf. 460 a, 469), _ and becomes o before a vowel: Av-ot-roves releasing from toil, épv-o-dpyar- __¢s, -as (nom. ace. plur., Hm.) chariot-drawing, want-urmos (xAhoow, st. Any) horse-driving, orpet-dinos (orpép-w) perverter of justice.

477. CompounD Verss are formed directly or indirectly. They are formed pirecTLy by prefixing a preposition to a simple verb.

Originally the prefix was a mere adverb, qualifying the verb. Hence the augment was applied to the latter, not to the preposition (318). Hence also in the early language, as in Homer, the preposition was often separated from _ the verb by intermediate words, and even placed after the verb: in the last case prepositions of two syllables suffer anastrophe of accent (102 Db). This separation of the preposition from the verb is called ruxsis (ru jjors cutting from Téuvw to cut).

4 478, All other compound verbs are formed INDIRECTLY, being deno- minatives made from compound nouns :

Thus from AfSos and BéAAw comes the compound noun AiSo0-BédAos stone- throwing, and from this the compound verb A:oBoréw to throw stones ; from yavs and pwdxoua comes vav-udxos fighting in ships, and from this vavuaxyéw to

| fight in ships; from ed and st. epy comes evepyerns benefactor, and from this evepyeréw to benefit.

479. Accent. Compounds of the first and third declensions are ac- cented like simple words with the same endings. But many compounds in’ys (3d decl., 471, 475) are paroxytone instead of oxytone.

_ Compounds of the second declension are generally proparoxytone. _ But those formed from compound verbs, by adding suffixes, are common- ' ly accented like simple words with the same suffixes: cvAdoyio-pd-s _ from cvddoyifoua: to infer, drodo-réo-s from drodideps to give back. y a. Objective compounds (480) of the second decl., when the last part is an intransitive verbal, follow the above rule: A13é-Bodos thrown at with stones, _ patpé-nrovos slain by a mother: But when the last part is transitive, and made _ by adding o (Nom. os) to a verb-stem, they accent the penult if it is short ;— if long, the wltima: Aiwo-Bdros throwing stones, ynrpo-Knrdvos matricide ; orpar- | nybs army-leader, general, Aoyo-roids story-maker, Wuxo-roumds conductor of souls. i, But compounds of é€xw and d&pxw, with some others, follow the general rule: _ fvioxos (rein-holder) charioteer, dad0tx0s (contr. from da3é-ox0s) torch-holder, _ trmapxos commander of horse.

ead re

i

aa If. Mreanine or Compounp Worps.

480. As regards their meaning, compound nouns (substantive and ctive) may be divided into three principal classes. The division re- es properly to direct compounds, as vaumnyds ship-builder, from vais.

Co l 10a

»

198 MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS. — -[480

and mjyvuy.; not to indirect compounds (derived from nouns already compounded), as vavrnyia ship-building, vavrnyixss belonging to ship- building, derived from the compound vavrnyés.

1. Ossective Compounns. In these, one part is related to the other as a grammatical object; so that, when the two are expressed as separate words, one must be put in an oblique case, depending, either immediate- ly or by means of prepositions, on the other:

Aoyo~ypdo-s speech-writer = Adyous ypdpwy

&tid-Aoyo-s worthy of mention = tks Ad-you

deci-daluwrv fearing the divinities = Sedims Tobs daluovas xetpo-rolnro-s made with hands = xepoi roinrds Seo-BaaBhs harmed by the god = im rod Seod BeBAaupéevos oixo~yevns born in the house = éy otk yevduevos

481. 2. Possessive Compounns. In,these, the first part qualifies the second like an adjective or adverb, while the whole is understood as de- longing to something; so that, when the compound is expressed by se- parate words, a participle of ¢yw to have, or some verb of similar mean- ing, must be added:

parpd-xetp long-handed = pwaxpas xeipas Exwv

&ipyupd-roto-s with silver bow = d&pyupoty rétov éxwy

6u6-rporo-s of like character = Suo.oy rpdmoy exwv

yAauk-@mis bright-eyed = yAavKobs épSadpovs Exov

mucpds~yauo-s having a (bitter) unhappy marriage

dexa-erhs (having) lasting ten years

a. Here belong the numerous adjectives in -é5ns (-0-e15hs): yuvounddys =

yuvaiko-etdqs having the appearance or character of woman, woman-like,

482. 3. DeTERMINATIVE Compounps. In these also, the first part qualifies (or determines) the second, but without the added idea of pos- session; so that the compound may be expressed by two words, the first of which is an adjective or adverb :

dcpd-mori-s (Summit-city) citadel = tixpa méAus peo-nuBpia mid-day = wéon juepa Wevdo-Kjpvé false herald = pevdhs ijpvk 6u6-dovao-s fellow-servant = du0d SovAcdwy Meyado-mrpemys (grand-appearing) magnificent éi-yovo-s late-born = ope yevduevos ’ This is the least numerous of the three classes.

&

Rem. Prepositions may be connected with substantives in each of the above-described relations :

a. OBJECTIVE: eyxapuos native = év rh xdpe (dr) : eplamos belonging to a horse = 颔 tary (dr)

_ b. Possessrve: :

ZvSeos having a god in him, inspired, = ev (éavt@) Sedv Exav dupuctoy having pillars round it = kidvas dud (abrdv) Exov

c. DETERMINATIVE : dupiséarpoy amphitheatre = a surrounding or circular theatre it amededSepos freed-man, = free from (the gift of) another, = 6 &ré7rwos

ércddepos. aa

et ive compounds rh ae hi this edi iors etanttoo, are poetic: mirnp éuhrap an wnmotherly mother = pwhrnp ob whrnp obca. bv Vords, which began originally with dba: have a-, not dy-: a-ékwv, akwy, unwilling, Ranks atehi-siiaceiy (st. uc, Zoura).

“484, The ad ene prefix Sus- iid is the opposite of ed well, and expresses Hae Sl emt or dificult: dtsBovaos ill-advised (possessive) = =

ae acne (determinative) ill-pleased, dusdAwros hard to be

determinative compounds formed fies substantives wi vey rare: Bm a apis wretched Paris.

200 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. OBJECT. [483

PART FOURTH. SYNTAX,

DEFINITIONS.

485. Syntax (cvvrakis arranging together) shows how words are combined in sentences.

A SENTENCE is SIMPLE, when the essential parts of a sentence are found in it only once. (For compound sentences, see 724.)

The essential parts of a sentence are

the Sunsxcr, of which something is said, and

the Prepicare, which is said of the subject.

The subject of a sentence is a substantive (or substantive pronoun) in the nominative case. The predicate of a sentence is a finite verb in the same number and person as the subject.

a. The only nominatives of the first person are éyd, vd, qucis; of the second person, ov, opé, ducts; all other nominatives are of the third person.

b. These are sometimes called the grammatical, in distinction from the logical, subject and predicate. The latter include, beside the nominative and finite verb, all other words in the sentence which belong to these respectively. Thus in the sentence puplwy évaytiwudrwy h yuxh yéuer huay our soul is full of numberless contradictions, wuxh and yéue: are the grammatical subject and predicate, 4 Wux) jay and puplwy evayriwpdrwy yéue the logical.

c. The infinitive mode, though it is not the predicate of a sentence, has its subject. The subject of the infinitive is a substantive in the

accusative case.

486. Oxnsuct. The verb, beside its subject, may have an ob- ject on which its action is exerted. The object of a verb is a substantive in an oblique case (accusative, genitive, or dative).

The object is direct or indirect, according as it is related immediately or remotely to the action of the verb. The verb is transitive, when its action passes over to a direct object: other- wise, 1t is ¢ntransitive.

a. The remote relations of an object to a verb are expressed to a ereat extent by means of prepositions.

b. The infinitive and participle may have objects, both direct and

indirect, like the finite verbs to which they belong.

VERBS OF INCOMPLETE PREDICATION. 201

ad Arrrisutive, APpositivE, AND PrepicaTe-Noun.

487, A substantive may be qualified

_ a. by an adjective in the same case, number, and gender. b. by a substantive in the same case.

488. The adjective is called a. aN ATTRIBUTIVE, when its connection with the substantive

is taken for granted in the sentence, not brought about by it: 6 dyadds aviip doxet TH Sixatootvyy the good man practises justice. b. a PREDICATE-ADJECTIVE, When it is brought dy the sen- _ tence into connection with the substantive: 6 dvyjp dyadds éore (yéyverat, paiveras, kadctrar, vopilerar) the man is (becomes, appears, is called, is considered as) good. Rem. c. The adjective in the former case is purely adnominal, belonging exclusively to its substantive: in the latter case, it is generally adverbial, being connected also with the verb. Thus the Greek often uses a predicate-ad- _ jective, where other languages use an adverb, or a preposition with its case : -wprraiot arjASor they went away on the third day, Aaxedarudvioe torepa aplxovro | the Lacedaemonians arrived afterward, 8prids cor Aéyw I speak to you under ' oath. In some such cases, the adverb, used in Greek, would give a different meaning: patos MynSipyn mposéBadre he first (before any one else) attacked Methymna ; xpdtn MnSipyyn mposéBare he attacked Methymna first (before any other place); but with the adverb, mparoy Myndiprvyn mposéBare first (before doing any thing else) he attacked Methymna.

} 489. In the same two cases (488 a, b), the qualifying sub- stantive is called

a. @2 APPOSITIVE: Javydlw Midriddyy tov orparynyov T admire Miltiades the géneral.

b. & PREDICATE-SUBSTANTIVE: qolotot (Kadovot, Kadiurtact, vo- pilovor) MiAriadnv otparyyov they make (call, appoint, consider) Miltiades a general.

Rem. c. The substantive qualified is called the sussect of the attri- butive, appositive, or predicate-noun. This must not be confounded with the subject of a sentence (485).

d. The attributive stands in the closest relation to its subject, forming with it one complex idea, like the parts of a compound word. The appositive, in general, is less closely related to its subject, being added to it as an explan- ation or description. (But see 500a.) The predicate-noun (adjective or sub- stantive) is still less closely related to its subject, being brought into connection with it by the sentence, ,

e. The predicate-noun is sometimes called simply a predicate. It is oc- casionally preceded by és as, expressing comparison: rots #rroaw ws SovaAas xpavrau they treat the weaker as slaves,

“_

— aT oe, 7 — ww” fee | *

” 4

4 4

Verses oF INCOMPLETE PREDICATION.

490. Many verbs, from the nature of their meaning, are com- monly connected with a predicate-noun. Such are verbs which : 9

4 als i *

202 EQUIVALENTS OF SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. [496

signify to be, become, appear, be called, chosen, considered, and the like. With these, a predicate-nonn is put in the nominative case, agreeing with the subject of the verb: 6 dvip dyadds ote (yiyverat, paiverat, kadcirat, vouilerat); see 540,

a. The verb eiui to be, when thus used, is called the copula, since it does little more than couple the subject and the predicate-noun. For the ~; - frequent omission of the copula, see 508 a. |

b. Yet all these verbs, even ciui to be, are often used without a pre- dicate-noun, as complete predicates.

c. Transitive verbs, which correspond in sense to the foregoing, take a predicate-noun in the accusative case, agreeing with the object of the verb. Such are verbs whick signify to make, call, appoint, consider, and the Sera movovar (kadovot, KaSicract, vapitlauee) Midriddqy oTpaTnysr 5 see

d. The injinitwes and participles of the same verbs are also connect- ed with predicate-nouns belonging to their subject or object.

PRONOUNS OF REFERENCE. ,

491.a. Revative Pronown. A substantive may be qualified by a sentence: drip dv rdvres didoctior. a man whom all love = dvyp Tact pidos a man beloved by all. 'The sentence is then introduced by a relative pronoun, in the same number and gender as the substantive. The latter, as it commonly goes before the relative, is called its ANTECEDENT. ~

b. Demonsrrative Pronoun or Rererence. A substantive, once used, may be recalled or referred to by a demonstrative pronoun, in the same number and gender as the substantive or antecedent. .

ee. a ee ee

492, EQuIVALENTS OF THE SUBSTANTIVE AND Apsxctivz. The functions of the substantive and adjective, described in the fore- going sections, may be sustained by other parts of speech or forms of expression.

The principal equivalents of the apJECTIVE are

a. the article: of dvSpema the men.

b. the adjective pronoun: rives dv3pemor what men ?

c. the participle: dSupotvres avSpamot dispirited men.

d. The article is used only as an attributive. So too the sijeeaee and participle are always attributive, when placed directly after the article, iIn like manner, other forms of expression, when they follow the article, have the force of attributives : especially

e. a substantive in the genitive: of ris réAews tvdpwmar the men of the city.

f. an adverb: of viv &vSpwmo the men now (living).

g. a preposition with its case: of év rR wéAe &ySpwmrot the men in the citys

h. Even without an article preceding it, the genitive is often used asan attributive: vduicua dpytpov coin of silver = silver coin; also as a predicate- - ‘

~

INDETERMINATE SUBJECT OR OBJECT. 208

noun: 7d vomopa dpybpou éort the coin is of silver, A similar use of the ad. verb, and of the preposition with its case, is comparatively rare: 4 fiooa ovKn GADo Te Héper }) Uvtucpus Sovdrclay defeat brings nothing else than utter servitude, ey robtw TE Tpbre Hoav of “EXAnves the Greeks were in this condition. ; For the use of a sentence (relative sentence) as equivalent to the adjective, see 491 a.

493. The principal equivalents of the suBsTANTIVE are a. the adjective, or any of its equivalents, when used without a sub- stantive: mdvres émjvecay allapproved, of év ri médet éxadémawov those in the city were angry. _). the substantive pronoun (personal or reflexive) : jets 6uodkoyotper — we assent, c. the infinitive, with or without the neuter article: edogev dmeASeiv it was thought best to depart. d. a sentence, used as the subject or object of another sentence : Néyerat 6re radra éyévero it is said that these things took place. e. any word or phrase viewed merely as a thing: 16 yas oeavrdy kai 5 capover ear radrdy the “know thyself” and the “be wise” are the same thing. The forms c¢, d, e, are equivalent to substantives of the neuter gender. f. A preposition’ with a numeral may take the place of a substantive: &rSavoy abrav wep) EBdouheovra there died of them about seventy, diepSetpay és énraxoatous they destroyed to the number of eight hundred. So also the phrases, em) road a wide extent, em péya a great part, Kay Exdorous or Kay (va) Exac~ ov each by himself, and a few others: af vijes ém) moAd rijs Saddoons emetxow the ships covered a wide extent of the sea. g. All these forms are said to be used substantively, or used as sub- stantives.

INDETERMINATE SUBJECT OR OBJECT.

494, The subject of a sentence may be thought of in a manner wholly vague and general, merely as that to which the predicate applies. This is called the indeterminate subject, and is not ex- pressed in words:

aye jv it was late, judpa eyévero it became day, Karas exer it is well, dei _ —paxns (it needs a battle) there is need of a battle, SnAot (there is something that makes clear) it is clear, rapetxe: (there is something that allows) ¢ is allowed. ——tThe same construction is seen in passive verbs, especially in the perfect and pluperfect : mapecxetacrat wor (things have been prepared) preparation has ; been made by me. But it oceurs most frequently when the verbal in réoy (or _ réa) is used with eiut to be (expressed or understood): od« adicnréov éort (not any thing is to be unjustly done) injustice mist not be done, TG vduy meer éov (or weorrea) obedience must be rendered to the law.

a. These verbs which have the indeterminate subject, are most prop- erly called ImpERsoNAL verbs. That name, however, is applied also to the more frequent cases, in which the subject of a verb is not a nomina- tive, but an infinitive or a sentence: ¢feorw ebdaipoveiv it is possible to

be happy, dijrov jv Gre eyyis mov 6 Bacweds jy it was plain that the king was somewhere near.

= “it —_— * Sr oe

204 GENERAL RULES OF AGREEMENT. [405

495. The object of a verd may be similarly indeterminate ; poet. ray 6 daluwry eb 5:54, th Se? PlAwy whenever the divinity may give

. abundantly, what need of friends? Transitive verbs may thus appear as in- transitive: 6 Adyos karéxe the story (holds) prevails.

496. The subject of an atiributive is very often indeterminate. The attributive then is newter, and may be either singular or plural. The indeterminate subject may be expressed by such words as thing, affair, condition, quality, space, time, and many more:

&yasd (good things) goods, 7d Aeyduevoy (the thing said) the common saying, Td xphoma (the useful things) that which is useful, 7% rijs wéAews the (affairs) of the city, ro tupayvixdy the (condition or character) of tyrant, 7b Kaddy the (quality) beautiful, éx) woAv (over much’ space or time) to a great extent or for a long time, év wéow (in the midst) in public, ad’ od (from what time) since, 7d amb rovd_e (the time from this time) henceforth, 7d vavtiucdy the (naval force) navy, To BapBapixdy the (barbarian world) barbarians, 7d xowdy the common- wealth, 7% Arovvora the ( festival) of Dionysus ; ef. 563 b.

a, Neuter pronouns are very often thus used with indeterminate subject : other attributives, in this use, are generally preceded by the neuter article.

. GENERAL RULES OF AGREEMENT.

FINITE VERB AND SuBJECT-N OMINATIVE.

497. a. A-finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative ir number and person. But b. With a neuter plural nominative, the verb is singular. Cf. 514. EXAMPLES, a. ed ob mdyra eles, kad erpvécaper jets thou saidst all thing: well, and we approved. b. 7% mpdypwara Tatra Sewd ort these circumstances

are fearful. For exceptions in NUMBER, see 511-17. For omission of the subject or the predicate, see 504, 508.

ADJECTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE.

498. An adjective agrees with its substantive in case, num- ber, and gender:

avhp pirdripos edéAet aicxpav Kepdav dméxerSa a man fond of honor is dis- posed to abstain from dishonorable gains.——This rule applies both to the attributive and the predicate-adjgctive. Similar rules may be given for the ARTICLE, ADJECTIVE-PRONOUN, alld PARTICIPLE. For exceptions in NUMBER pnd GENDER, see 511-23. For omission of the subject, see 509.

APPOSITIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 499. The appositive agrees in case with its subject:

eis TléAras méAw oixovpevny to Peltae, an inhabited city——A similar rule may be given for the PREDICATE-SUBSTANTIVE.

é

500. Apposition is of several kinds:

yi

a, Arrrisurive Apposirion: the appositive has the force of an attributive- bmiaSodtaAakes Aoxaryol rear-guard captains. In this way, words denoting station or condition are connected with dyhg man or tySpwmos person (the former often implying respect, the latter contempt): BvBpes Sixacrat judges (juror-men, ef. Eng. gentlemen of the jury), péroios tvSpwmos a foreign-resident. Names of nations in attributive apposition assume the character of adjectives: “EAAnves meAtaoral Grecian targeteers.

Here belong also the cases in_which an appositive is placed between the article and its substantive (534): 6 Evppdrns worapds the river Huphrates, 6 Merayertvidy why the month Metagettnion.

_ b,. Partitive Apposition: the appositive is related to its subject as the part to the whole: 6 orpards, immecis xa) meCot the army, cavalry and infantry, Ada ai piv xpnoral ciow, ai dt xaxal pains are, some good, others evil, ai réx- svar To abrijs Exdorn Epyov épyd(era the arts work each one its own work, obras &AAos HAAG Ayer these say, one one thing, another another.

4 To words denoting person, in the accusative or dative, the poets often add ' am appositive denoting the part (head, hand, heart, mind, shield, ete.) which is specially affected by the action: Antonirny ovtacev Guov he wounded Detopites (in) the shoulder, nad ® &xos of xbTo puplov dpdarpotow excessive grief overspread _ (him the eyes) his eyes, rotdy oe xos piryey Epxos OdévTwyv what manner of say- mg has escaped the fence of thy tecth? adds Té ty Ueto Suudv and satiety came

to his spirit, cot ydp Te pddiord ye Aads "Axaay relcovTat pUdoor for thy words - most of all will the people of the Achaeans obey.

c. Descriptive Apposition: the subject gives the name of something, which is then described by the appositive: 7 querépa wédus, ) Kowh Katapyyh Tay ‘EAAhvev our city, the common refuge of the Greeks, Sdppos na pdBos,

: tipove EvuBovrAw boldness and fear, inconsiderate counsellors, "Ar€kavdpos 6 &1- Afrmov (sc. vids) Alexander the son of Philip.

d. Derritive Apposition : the subject vaguely indicates something, which is then definitely expressed by the appositive: 6 Sdvaros tuyxdvet dv dvotp —s mparyudrow didAvois, THs Wuxijs Kal Tod odparos death happens to be a separation of two things, the soul and the body, rovrd ye avrd, 4 evBovrla this very thing, | ood counsel, Sox 7d pGorov woreiy, emiriway Trois UAAos I seem to be doing the easiest thing, censuring the others. In Hm., the demonstrative 6 5¢, used at the beginning of a sentence, is often explained at the close by adding as an appositive the object referred to: of © aytia &yxe eipay Tpdes but they in op- ; position raised their spears, the Trojans, 1b 8 imépwraro xdAxeov &yxos but it flew over him, the brazen spear. With 6 pév, this is much less often the case.

—S -— A oa Pe

501. When a worp and a SENTENCE are in apposition, the word may stand either in the nominative or the accusative :

poet. Kketvra: meodyres, mloris od cups méde they are fallen, no small ground of confidence to the city, poet. eddamovotns, maddy jdlorwy Adywv may you be happy, a reward for the sweetest words. The word is put in the no- minative, as not depending in construction upon any other word (542), When, however, it is put in the accusative, it is brought into a kind of dependence on the verb of the sentence, as if in apposition with a cognate-accusative (547) 3 supplied after the verb: eddamovolns (eddatmoviav) uicddy, etc.

. 502. a. When the word is neuter, it is not certain from the form, which of the two cases is used. If, however, it stands in apposition with a dependent sentence, it must be regarded as an accusative. :

rae

é a

206 AGREEMENT. OMITTED SUBJECT. [502

b. Neuter words often used in apposition with a sentence, are onpetoy sign, Texuhpioy evidence, kepddauoy chief point ; also attributives with the neuter article, 7d wéyioroy the greatest thing, rd évayrloy the contrary, Td Tis wapoystas the expression of the proverb; and neuter pronouns, as ard rodro this very thing, trait TrodTo this same thing, dvoivy Sdrepov one of two things, dupdrepov or dupdrepa both, etc.

c. The sentence is sometimes introduced by ydp.for, especially after on- petoy and rexuhpiov, which may then be regarded as sentences themselves : ovdty érlorevoy éxeivors onpetoy 5é+ ob yap by Seip’ Koy ds huas they had no confidence ; but proof (of this is here, follows); for they would not (otherwise) have come to us.

Pronoun OF REFERENCE WITH ITs ANTECEDENT. 508. The relative agrees with its antecedent in number and gender ; .

evraisa hy Kphyn, ep i Aéyerat Mapotas toy Sdrupoy AInpedoa here was a spring, by which Marsyas is said to have caught the Satyr, rapddewos Snplov wAhpns, & Kdpos eShpeve a park full of wild beasts, which Cyrus used to hunt. A similar rule may be given for the DEMONSTRATIVE OF REFERENCE. a. If the relative is subject of a sentence, its verb takes the person of the antecedent: jets of rodro Aéyopev we who say this.

For exceptions, see 511-23. For attraction, incorporation, and other .

peculiarities of relative sentences, see 807-23.

OMITTED SUBJECT, : PREDICATE, AND OBJECT.

504. The supsEctr of a FINITE VERB is often omitted; a. when it is a pronoun of the first or second person. _

It is then sufficiently expressed by the personal ending of the verb: Aéyw I speak, &xotocare hear ye. But the pronoun is not omitted, if there is an em- phasis upon it: & dy éyw Aéyw, ducts dxotcare whatever I may say, do you hear. Compare 667. , b. when it is a pronoun of the third person, referring to a word in the context:

Kipos ras vais werewéularo, drws drAlras a&moBiBdoeve, Kad Bracdmevor Tovs moAculous TapéASorey, ei puddrroev Oyrus sent for the ships, that he (Cyrus) might land heavy-armed men, and they (the army of Cyrus) having overpowerea the enemy might effect a passage, if they (the enemy) should be keeping guard. The subject may be only émplied in the context; as the subject of mapeASorer in the example just given: vavrixd éfnprvero } ‘EAAGs, kal Tis SaAdoons ayr- elxovTo i of “EAAnves) Greece was sitting out navies, and they (the Greeks) were applying themselves to the sea.

c. when it is a general idea of person (dv3pemos).

Thus in plurals such as act, Aéyouo1, they (men, people) say. Less often in the singular: éodAmyte the trumpet sounded, lit. (one) sounded the trumpet.

A subject of this kind is very often omitted, when it is the antecedent of a re-__

OMITTED SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 207 oun; the relative sentence then takes the place of a subject (810): deol pirodow & ret véos (one) whom the love dies young. — re b , at least in their original use, such verbs as de it rains, vipe zt snows, dorpdmre it lightens, cele: (it shakes) there is an earthquake, ete. ; these operations of nature being regarded by the Greeks as actions of a divine person, Ze’s or Seds (which are sometimes expressed with these verbs). In later use, the idea of personal agency seems to have been lost, so that the sub- ject became wholly indeterminate ; see d. ae when it is the indeterminate subject (494): . | &$ 88 abtg od rpovxdpe: but when (things did not advance for him) he had mo success. Here also a relative sentence may take the place of a subject: -~:poet. ee Tod pirorovety ylyveY Gv SéAcis npareiy from love of toil are produced (things) which you wish to possess.

505. The onszcr of a VERB may be orhitted in the same cases (the first, of course, excepted): thus ,

b. when it is a pronoun, referring to a word expressed or implied in the context: eumimdds amdyrwy Thy yvounv drémeure (sc. adrods, referring to amrdy- tov) filling the mind of all he sent (them) away.

", ce. when it is a general idea of person: g:Aotiula wapotbve (Sc. avSpérous)

| -kw8uvede brtp eddotias Te Kat rarpldos emulation incites (men) to incur danger

'- for fame and country, poet. (A® avdpav ds axlvSuvoy Bloy ekewépace I envy -s ae men (one) who has passed a life without danger.

. when it is indeterminate : diapéeper méwrodu padov ph padSdvros one who

has learned (things learnable, i. e. truth, knowledge) differs entirely from one

who has not learned, of Seoi Gv Seducda xareoxevdxaor the gods have provided

(the ne we require.

506. The subject of an appositive or predicate-noun may be omitted, when it is the same with the omitted subject or object of a verb: thus,

a Of aN APPOSITIVE: OcwicroKAfs rw rapa o€ (1) Themistocles am come to _ thee ;——0f a PREDICATE-NOUN: pihtopés éo're (ye) are orators, dv of Seo pidodow amosvicKe veos (one) whom the gods love dies young, 7% kaxas tpépovra xwpl? periee motet (SC. avXpémovs) the places that furnish a poor support make (men) manly.

507. The PREDICATE-NOUN is seldom omitted: rf 54 éort TovTo, rep) ov adrds emaothuev éorly 6 copiers, Kal roy madnthy (sc. emorhwova) moe? what, now, is this, with which the sophist is both acquainted himself, and makes his pupil (acquainted) ?

508. The vers itself is sometimes omitted: thus a. the verb eipi to be, when used as a copula (490 a). : The forms éort and cicf are very often omitted: d&yadds 6 avhp the man (is) good, Seay Sbvauis peylorn the Bay of the gods (is) greatest, rt rovro what (is) | this? what of it? radra pev ody 3h ottws I say, then, these things (are) so, odx «Spa naseddeww (it ts) not time to be sleeping, of &Sucor ovdey mpdrrey per’ &\AHAwY ototre the unjust (are) able to accomplish nothing with one another, imméas @reu-

Wey épodvtas bri ev 636 H3n wdvres he sent horsemen to say that (they are) now | all on the way :——especially with verbals in réoy or réa (494): TG vduy meo- éo} nore) the law must be obeyed, lit. (something is, or things are) to be

obedience to the law..—The omission of the copula in other forms is

=

208 VERB OMITTED. [508

comparatively rare: giAh«oos eywye (sc. eiul) I for my zart ) fond of hear ing, ws (sc. éoré) &r' ev dopare?, puadiacde while (you are) yet in safety, be- ware, vvé (sc. hv) év péow, Kod wapijev TH borepalg night intervened, and we were present on the next day.

b. some common verbs of being, doing, saying, going, coming, bring- ing.

This omission is nearly confined to brief and pointed expression, especially in questions and commands. Thus, &ado ti 4 or &AAo 7: (sc. or, 28) any thing else (true, than what follows ?, see 829 a). iva rh (sc. yévnra) to what end ? lit. that what (thing may come to pass?, see 826 )b). dypiwrépous aitovs amépnve, kal radra (sc. émolnoev) eis aitév he rendered them wilder, and that (he did, viz. rendered them wilder) toward himself ; nat radra is especially used with concessive participles (789 f): Soxets wor ob mposéxew, Kal rad’ra copds dv you seem to me not to observe, and that (you do) though you are wise. Tl &AXo ovrat (sc. érolneay) i) éreBotrAcvoay what else (did) these men than. plot against (us)? oddty BAV 2 cupBovrctdovow hyiv (they do) nothing else than advise us, tt Xph Toy mérpior ToAlTny; Td EavTOd Tweipacda ow(ew what should the moderate citizen (do)? endeavor to preserve his own, eb ye, vh Thy “Hpay, bt dpSots Toy ma- tépa (thou dost) well, by Hera, that thou art upholding thy father. kalrot kar TovTo (sc. Aéyw or Aékw) though this also (1 say, or will say), &AX’ otarw tep) Tovtwy but not yet concerning these things (will 1 speak), éwe) xdceivo (sc. Act éov éort) since that too (must be mentioned), "wh mot wuplous E€vous (sc. Aéyere, tell) me not of ten thousand mercenaries. & pire batdpe, wot 5) (sc. e/), wad rddev (sc. Hxeis) dear Phaedrus, whither, I pray (are you going), and whence (are you come)? és kdpaxas (sc. @ppe, go) to destruction, lit. to the crows, as their prey, ovk és Képaxas (Sc. epfhoes) wo'nt you go to destruction ?——idwp, bdwp (se. pépere), & yelroves (bring) water, water, ye neighbors. For obx ori, wh dri, see 848 c.

c. any verb may be omitted, where it is readily supplied from a verb in the context:

ab Te yap "EAAny el, kal huts (sc. dopey “EAAnves) for both you are a Greek, and we (are Greeks), 7d capés oddels ore TéTe (sc. elxev) ore viv exer cimety the certain fact no one either then (was able) or now is able to state. Such omis- sions are especially frequent in connection with conditional and relative sen- tences, cf. 754, 819. The infinitive and participle may be omitted in the same way: ore mdoxovres Kady ovddtv, MOTE méAAovTes (SC. mdoxey) neither suffering any evil, nor being likely to (suffer any), avexdépnoay nad of "ASnvator, ered} Kad Tovs Aaicedatmovlous eldov (SC. dvaxwpodyras) the Athenians (also, 856 b) retired, when they saw the Lacedaemonians also (retiring). For ov phy Gard, Bee 848 e.

509. The supsxcr of an ATTRIBUTIVE is very often omitted ; a. when it is expressed or implied in some word of the context: el Trav pvploy ermldwy pla ris (sc. eats) & ty ors if of ten thousand hopes you have any one (hope of being saved), rls dy aicxlwy etn rabrns (sc. 5déns) déta what reputation could be more shameful than this ?——rodrov 6Alyas Exaiwe (sc. rAnyds) he struck this one a few (blows), ds Badiy éxouwhdns (sc. drvov) how deep (a sleep) you slept, és ulay Bovaedvety (sc. BovAny) to join in one resolve, b. when it is a word in common use, and readily understood from vhe meaning of the attributive or the connection of the sentence. The

,

words most commonly omitted are dynp or d&y%pwros MAN, yuri) WOMAN,

‘>.

se

a oO

tted are mase. xéros gulf, olvos wine; and a number of

as jjpépa day, yi land, xapa country, ddds way, xelo hand,

andsome others. ‘the wise (man), 6 BdépBapos the barbarian, 4 warh the beautiful of modAol the many, common people, of @nBato the Thebans, of émvyvy- the (men) of after times, éxxdrnoidCovea (women) in popular assembly.— wos the Ionian (gulf, = Adriatic mene &xparos unmixed (wine), ) mporepata he (day) before, 4 émiica the coming (day), 4 atpiov the morrow, 7 &vvdpos the ' desert (land without water), 7 éuavrod my own (country), Bddice Thy eddeiav walk the straight (way), tye thy em Méyapa he was leading on the (way) toward Megara, 7 dekh the right (hand), 4 dpiorepd the left (hand), pnropixh rhetoric (oratorical art), card rhy éuhy (sc. yrdunv) according to my ( judgment), éphunv | (8e. dienv) karnyopoter they bring as plaintiffs a deserted (suit, the defendant ‘not appearing), eixoorh (ucpts) a twentieth ( part), 4 mempwpevn (uotpa) the. allotted

(portion), destiny.

a (a) Feminine adjectives without a subject are often used to express di- | réltion, manner, or condition. These uses may have grown ont of an original _ omission of 634s way: et évayrias from an opposite direction, in front, waxpdy a long way-off, és waxpdy at a long remove (in time), xe thy taxlorny he sent iene uickest way) most quickly, Anorevew avdyrn Thy mpdrny it is necessary to plu (as the first course) at first, rhy tAAws adoAccxa I am prating to no pur- | pose (the way that leads otherwise, to ng proper end), # ton nad duola the equal

_ and uniform (way of government), condition of civil equality.

4 (8) With an attributive genitive, vids son is often omitted: *AAétaySpos | 6 SiAlmmov (se. vids) Alewander the (son) of Philip, 6 Xwpovicxov the (son) of | Sophroniseus, i. e. Socrates. So oikos house, or a word of similar meaning, in 4 eg such as eis TlAdrwyvos to Plato's (house), év “Aidou in (the abode of) Hades, év Awovicov in (the temple) of Dionysus, cis rlvos SidacKdAov to what _ teacher's (school) ?

Rem. The omitted subjects mentioned under this head have been all mase. _ or fem. In like manner, neuter substantives might sometimes be supplied with _ attributives of neuter gender; but almost all cases of the kind are better re- ferred to the following head.

¢c. when it is indeterminate: the attributive is then neuter, and may _ be singular or plural. For examples, see 496.

_ In cases b and ¢, the adjective is said to be used as a substantive: it may thus have another adjective joined with it as an attributive: md¢iorou TodEpior Very Many enemies, dvayKaiov Kakdv & necessary evil.

510. The anrEcEDENT of a RELATIVE pronoun (if the relative sentence has the force of an attributive) may be omitted in the same three cases, 609 a, b,c; cf. 810: thus,

a. when it is expressed or implied in some word of the context: vavuaxla

modardarn (sc. Tay vavpaxiay) dv topev a sea-fight the most ancient (of the sea-

fights) that we know of. :

___ b, when it isa word like &ySpwros, dyvhp, yuvh, etc.: Fxouev Kad viv woAAhy

Kad otrwes Talrny epydoovra: we have both much land and (men) who will work t, ovdeula mdpeoti bs jew éxpiy there is no one present (of the women) who ught to have come. .

__ & when it isindeterminate: dercis Gv de? emiperciodat you neglect (things)

ch you ought to care for.

210 AGREEMENT WITH TWO OR MORE SUBJECTS. [511

PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBER AND GENDER.

AGREEMENT WITH TWO OR MORE SUBJECTS.

511. Two or more subjects connected by AnD may have a predicate-word (verb or adjective) in common. For this case, we have the following rules.

With two or more subjects connected by anp,

a. the finite verb (or predicate-adjective) is in the plural:

b. with two singular subjects, the dwal may be used. With subjects of different persons,

c. the verb is in the jirsé, if that is found among the subjects :

d. otherwise, it is in the second person. i. With subjects of different genders,

e. the predicate-adjective is masculine, if they denote persons : -f. it is neuter, if they denote things:

g. if they denote persons and things together, it takes the gender of

the persons.

Often, however,

h. the predicate-word agrees with one of the subjects (the nearest, _ or the most important), being understood with the rest. Especially so, when the predicate stands before all the subjects, or directly after the first of them.

a. Ady Kad SuskoAla kad pavia eis Thy Sidvowww eurlrrover forgetfulness and — peevishness and madness get into the mind. b. ndovh Kat Adan ev rH woAc Baoireboeroy pleasure and pain will bear sway in the city.——c. Bewol kad coo) eyo Te kad od huey both I and thou were skilful and wise. d. kat ob Kar of &deApo) mapjore both thou and thy brothers were present.——e. kal ) yuvh Kad 6 avhp a&yasol eiot both the woman and the man are good. f. wéAcuos Kad ordots oAgadpia Tals wéAcoly eort war and faction are fatal to cities. g. Toxn Kar Slrurros joay tay epywy kipio fortune and Philip had control over the actions. ——h. Baoircis kad of ody aire cismimre cis Td orpardmedov the king and those with him break into the camp, ’AXhynot of wévnres kad 6 Sjuos wAdoy Exe at Athens the poor and the common people have superior power, meuye we “Apiatos Kat ’Aprdolos, micro) byres Kipp Kad duiv edvor, nad Kercbovor puadrrecda Ari- aeus and Artaozus sent me, being faithful to Cyrus and well-disposed toward you, and bid you be on your guard, eye Aéyw kal SedSns rd ard I and Seuthes say the same things.

Rem. i. When there is a predicate-adjective in the neuter plural, the verb is regularly in the singular: ore cémaros KdAdos Kad ioxds deid@ Evvoiuodvra apémovta patverar nor do beauty and strength of body, when dwelling with a coward, appear suitable. The predicate-adjective may be in the neuter plural, when the subjects (denoting things) are all mase. or all fem. (522): edyéverd re kad Sdvapus Kal Tina Snrd. éorw G&yada Bvra high birth and power and honor are manifest as being good things. It may also be in the neuter plural, when the subjects (or part of them) are persons, these being viewed merely as things: KaAAlorn modurela Kad 6 KdAALOTOS Gyhp Aovwd dv uty ely SieAdeiv the noblest polity and the noblest man would be left for us to consider,

predicate rs rarely used, whea spielve subjects are con- ic pray nor: %uehAov ‘emonoryhoac Sat Acwxdpns 7) Aucasoyévns &nes were about to make a defence ; rarely, also, when a_ subje ollowed by the preposition with: AnyooSévns meta Tav- “nyav pl Poe Mavrivedor Demosthenes with his associate-generals treaty with the Mantineans.

‘The arrrisurive regularly agrees with ihe nearest subject: may7 kab 2 pnxavii by every word and means.

_ _¢. For the arrosrtive and PREDICATE-SUBSTANT, , rules may be given similar to those of 511 a,b: Sdgfos Kad péBos, uppove “EuuBobrw daring and terror, unintelligent advisers, ‘HpaAjjs Kal Onoeds brép Tod Blov Tay avSpdrav — GSAnTad karéotnoay Heracles and Theseus became champions for the life of men.

_d. For the PRONOUN OF REFERENCE, the same rules may be given as for the predicate-adjective above (511): thus a and f, wep) moAcuov Kal eiphyns, & a exe peylorny Sbvauw ev TE Biy Tay dvIpdtov concerning war and peace, which

- have the greatest power in the life of men; so h, araddaryevres worepay Kal Ki , Sivwy Kal Tapaxiis, <is hy viv mpds GAAHAOUS Karéornuer delivered from wars and f: dangers and trouble, in ahaa we have now become involved with one another.

Be steiiers WITH A PREDICATE-Noun.,

. 513. a. A verb of incomplete prédication (490) may agree with the _ predicate-noun, when this stands nearer than the subject, or is viewed as more important

ak Xopyylat ixavdy cddaimovias onucidy eore the dramatic expenditures are & «Sufficient sign o A Soy pate Td xwploy mpdérepov "Evvéa 680i éxadodyro the place _ was before called Nine Ways. So, also, participles of such verbs: sreféSevro _ ras Svyardpas waudle dyra they conveyed away their daughters being children.

a b. A relative pronoun, used as a subject, instead of agreeing with its ; pemecedent, may agree with its predicate-noun : :

h Tod petparos wyyh dv tuepov Zeds wvduace the fountain of that stream which

Zeus named Desire. The relative may even agree with a predicate-noun be-

longing to the antecedent : ovderor’ dy etn h pnropixh Bdicov wpiryyua, bY de

| tept Siuccsocdyns rods Adyous woetra rhetoric could never be an unjust affair, since at least it (rhetoric) ts always making its discourses about justice.

. c. A pronoun of reference, which would properly be neuter, as re- _ ferring to an indeterminate subject, or to an infinitive or a sentence, may _ be mase. or fem. to agree with a predicate-noun:

todd cori tvo.a this (view or conduct) is folly, but often abrn éorly tote; 80 Hde dpx} THs Suoroylas, epéoSau judas abrovs this is a beginnin#of agreement, (Viz.) to question one another, iymep kadoduev pddnow, avduynots éore (that) q uhich we call cae: is recollecting.

oF

a’ i"

=

SrneuLaR AND Prurat UNIrep.

_ 514. Corzxcrrye Sussecr. The smgular is sometimes used in a collective sense, expressing more than one: éodys clothing e oth es), mrivdos brick (= bricks), 4 tmros the horse (cavalry), “ nis the heavy-armed.

212 AGREEMENT WITH COLLECTIVE SUBJECT. = = [514

a. A collective subject denoting persons, may have a pre- dicate-word (verb or noun) in the plural:

"ASnvalwy 7) WARS ofovra “Immapxov tupavvoy bvra a&moSaveiv the multitude of the Athenians believe that Hipparchus was tyrant (of Athens) when he died, To orpdrevua emopl(ero otToy By ea Tovs Bovs Kal dvous the army provided ttself food by slaughtering the oxen and asses.

b. Such words as Exaoros each, tls any one, was tis every one, ovdels no one, may have the construction of collectives, on account of the plural which they imply: nad 8cov Abyavrat Exacros as far as each one is able, oddels exar- uASn, Tobs dmoAwASTAS TevSoiyTes no one went to sleep, (all) lamenting the lost.

c. A pronoun of reference, referring to a collective, may be in the plural :

mapéorar MPéAreia, of Tavde xpelavous eict (assistance, i. e.) an auailiary force will be present, who are more effective than these, wedérw cot rod TAHSovs, Kad kexapionéevws abtois &pxe be careful of the multitude, and govern in a way ac- ceptable to them, ovyxadéous way Td oTpaTiwTiKdy, ErAeke Tpds adTors Todd having called toyether the entire soldiery, he spoke to them as follows, 7d Apkadindy émAt- TiKdy, GY hpxe KAedvwp the Arcadian heavy-armed force, whom Claanor led, was Tis duvucw, ois dpelAwy tuyxdvw every body swears, whom J »appen to owe, tw Gduceiy Tis émixeipj, TovToLs Kipos woAéuios tora if any one attempt to do ix justice, to these Cyrus will be an enemy.

d. Any singular antecedent, though denoting an individual, may suggest the idea of other like individuals, and may thus have a pronoun of reference in the plural: Syoavporoids avhp, ods 5) Kal erawe? rd TARSOs a money-making man, just (those) whom the multitude even praise. Conversely, when the ante- cedent is plural, the pronoun of reference is sometimes singular, referring to an individual of the number: domd(era: wdvtas, 6 by wepirvyxdvn he embraces all men, whatsoever one he may fall in with.

e. When the collective subject denotes ra1nes (not persons), the predicate is regularly singular. The neuter plural subject was regarded by the Greeks in this way, as a collection of things, and was accordingly connected with a singular verb. But if the neuter plural subject denote persons, then, like the collective, it may have a verb in the plural. Hence the following rules:

515. Neuter Piura Supsxcr. A neuter plural nominative | has the finite verb in the singular: see 497 b. But

Exc, a. A neuter plural subject, denoting prrsons, may have a verb in the plural: 7& réAn iwéoxovro the authorities promised, roodde werd. “ASnvalwy E3vn éorpdrevoy so many nations were combating on the side of the Athenians.

b. Other exceptions to this rule, though rare in Attic, are frequent in the other dialects: thus Hm. ordpra Aé€Auvyta the cables are loosed.

516. In a few instances, a plural subject, masculine or feminine, has a verb in the singular. This can hardly occur, except when the verb stands first, the subject being then thought of indeterminately, but afterwards specified by the nominative: doxoivrTs Sinaie elvar ylyveras Grd ris Sdkns dpxal re Kad yduwor to (a man) reputed to be just, there comes, in consequence of his reputation, both offices and nuptials. So with the dual: gor: rotrw dirtd TH Biw there are thess two different ways of living.

For gor of (ofries), see 812.”

Peg RT AeA A ie en aman:

a AL AND Prurat Unirep. In speaking of two, the dual is used, if the specific number is prominently thought of; if not, the plural. Hence, | The dual and plural are freely united or interchanged in the 2 construction : :

mposér, db0 veavlanw two young men were running up, eyedacdrny Eudeo PaAdvavres eis GAAHAouS they both laughed out on looking at one another, wéserd€ H8n, xalperov let me go now, fare ye well.

a

- $18. Prurat ror Sineutar. The Greek sometimes uses the plural, _ y' ere English idiom prefers the singular: thus,

-_—sa. in impersonal constructions (494 a), a PREDICATE-ADJECTIVE may stand - in the neuter plural: thus, with indeterminate subject, woAcunréa Fv it was ne- essary to make war (things were to be done in war), tAwimérepa éyévero na- wigation became more advanced (things became more favorable to val. §o too, with an infinitive as subject: ddtvard éorw d&ropuyeiy it is impossible to escape.

_, bb. @ NEUTER PRONOUN may be plural, when referring to an infinitive or sentence, which is then viewed as something complex: 6 dvénros tvSpwmros Tax? by oinSetn tatra, peveréoy civat ard Tod Seardrov a man without sense would per- haps think this, that it was necessary to flee from his master, karémw éoprijs | fopev, kat dorepoduev; Tobtwy altios Xapepaov are we arrived after the feast, _ and too late for it? for this is Chaerephon to blame.

¢. iN ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES, to express repeated instances of the quality : euod ai oad edruxiat ob« &péorover to me thy (often repeated) good fortune is not ecable. ' Hits. often uses the plural of abstract words to express the various ways in which a quality is manifested: immoodyys éxéxaoro he was distinguished in (the arts of ) horsemanship, &ppadlnor vdoro in foolishness (foolish operations) of mind. Even in CONCRETE words, the poets sometimes use the plural for the Singular: xdAa ToKedor cixdrws Svpovpévas forgive a parent jusily indignant (as all such have a*claim to indulgence). d. in the FIRST PERSON, especially when an author is speaking of himself: TovTo Tepacdueda Sinyhoacsa this I (we) will endeavor to explain. The plural here is preferred as seeming less egotistical. This construction is much more often found in poetry, sometimes with - abrupt change of number: #A1oy paprupducoda, Spdo° & Spay ob BolAoua I call the sun to witness, while doing what I do not wish todo. The predicate-adjective, _ when plural, is masculine, even though a woman is speaking (520): mwecotued’, + xph,; warp Tiumpodjievor I (Electra) will fall, ef need be, in assisting my father.

+519. SincuLAR FOR Piura. a. In dramatic poetry, acHorvs is commonly - treated as an individual, the Coryphaeus being regarded as speaking and act- _ ing for the whole body; so that the singular is often used in reference to it. _b. A Natron is sometimes designated by the singular with 6: 6 Maxedav, _ 6TMépons, for the Macedonians, the Persians ; but this is nearly c@nfined to _ monarchical states, where everything centres in the sovereign: seldom 6 “EAAn» - for the Greeks.

a ; Be 520. Mascutinr For Prerson In GenrraL, The masculine is used in speaking of persons, if sex is not thought of:

214 PECULIARITIES OF GENDER. [520 7

Tay etuxotyTwy Tdyres eict cvyyeveis all (persons) are kinsfolk of the pros perous. Further a. The masculine is used, when sex is thought of, if the same expression is applied to both sexes: . dwdérepos dy 7} BeAtiwy, dd 6 avhp, elY 7 ‘yuh, obros Kal mActoy péperae TOD dryadod whichever of the two may be the better, whether the nan or the woman, that one also receives more of the good.

521. Mascutinz Dua For Feminine. The masculine form is often used for the feminine in the dual of pronouns ; not often, in the dual of adjectives and participles.

For 7a, tatra, the forms 7d, rotrw are almost always used: rottw Th id , ~ 7 4 téxva these two arts, rovrow row Knwycéow of these two motions,—dto AclreaSov udyw pnxavd only two means are left, huey ev Exdore S00 Tivé eoroy idéa UpxovTe kal &yovre in each of us there are two ideas ruling and leading us. ;

522. Neuter ror Mascurmnz on Feminine. A predicate- adjective is often neuter, when the subject is maséuline or femi- nine.

In this case the adjective is used as a substantive (509 c); it expresses, not an accidental peculiarity of the subject, but its essential nature: opadepdz nycuov Spacts a daring leader is dangerous (prop., a dangerous thing, with in- determ. subject), xardy &AASea Kal pdviwoy beautiful is truth, and abiding, Sewdy of woddAol, bray Kakxovpyovs Exwor mpootdras formidable are the many, — whenever they have villains for leaders, rapaxa nal ordoes 6AESpia Tals wéAcor disturbances and factions are ruinous to cities.

So to0, a PRONOUN OF REFERENCE may be neuter, when the antecedent is j mase. or fem.: rupayyida Snpay, d xphuacw arlonera to pursue despotic power, — {a thing) which is taken by means of money, ddkns emBumue?, nal Todro éChaAwKe he longs for glory, and has made this his aim. .

523. Constructio aD Sensum (xara ovveow). A word in agreement often conforms to the real gender or number of the subject, instead of the grammatical.

Thus, a PREDICATE-ADJECTIVE (participle): 7& woxSnpd avdpdmia ray emdv- — puay axpareis eiot the miserable wretches are without control over their appetites, TauT ZrAeyey 7 papa alrn Keparh, ekeAnrvdds these things spake this abomin- — able person (head), having come out. So, in poetry, an ATTRIBUTIVE: & mepiood tyunvels téxvov O greatly honored child ; or a PRONOUN OF REFERENCE; Téxvwp — Savdvtwv éxrd yevvalwy, ots mor’ ~Adpacros Hyarye seven noble children having — fallen, whom once Adrastus led. oe

a. To this head belong also the constructions with COLLECTIVE subjects, — see 514. ? et

b. An adjective may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun of refer- — ence, agreeing with a substantive implied in it: "ASnvaios dv, wéAcws Tis me — ylorns being (an Athenian) a man of Athens, a city the greatest, oixia h buerépa, ot xpjove (your house) the house of you, who use, ete. ,

ce. Asword denoting place may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun of reference, belonging to the inhabitants of that place: a&dixoyro eis Koréwpa, — Zwwréwy dmotxovs they came to Cotydra, colonists of the Sinopeans, @emaroKAys — pevye: és Képxupav, dv abray edepyérns Themistocles flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor of (them) the Corcyreans.

524. The word 6 4 ré (like Eng. the) was at first a DEMONSTRATIVE pronoun, lich afterwards, by gradual weakening of its force, became an article. In _ Homer, it is wsually a demonstrative; and, though in many cases approaching» _ nearly to its later use as an article (especially when placed before an attributive with omitted subject: of %Adoz the others, r& érodueva the things about to be, _ td ply formerly), yet in all such cases its use was allowed merely, not required, by Epic idiom. In the Attic, on the other hand, the word is commonly an article, the demonstrative use being comparatively unimportant.

____ a. The language of Herodotus differs little in this respect from Attic prose. _ The lyric poets approach nearer to the Epic use; so too the Attic drama in its _ lyric parts. Even in the tragic dialogue, the article is more sparingly used than in Attic prose. ~ : For 6 4 7é ag a RELATIVE pronoun, in Homer, Herodotus, and Attic Tra- — -gedy, see 243 D,

‘O as Ob Demonstrative.

525. Even in Attic prose, the word sometimes retains its primitive _ power asa demonstrative. Thus,

a. in connection with pév and d¢; and usually in coNTRASTED ex- _ pression, 6. pev... 6 de this... that, the one... the other: . Tavs pty of iarpod (apedodar), Tos BE of odyducor these (sick persons) the phy- _ sicians aid, those (persons in a law-suit) the advocates. Oftener, with INDEFINITE ' meaning, 6 ev... 6 d¢ one... another, some... some, part... part, in which ' wse rls may be added: Aeyov rod Kupov, 6 pév tis Thy coplay, 6 5& Thy Kapte- | play, 6 5¢ thy mpadrnra, 6 Sé Tis nad 7d KdAdAoOs they,were speaking, one of Cyrus's _ wisdom, another of his fortitude, another of his mildness, yet another of his | beauty. Often a different expression takes the place, either of 6 péy, or 6 Sé: of pty Bxovro, KAdapxos 8& mepicueve they went, but Clearchus remained, éis- pepe exérevor (Sc. eya pév), of S obdty Seiv %pacay J was urging a war-tax, but others said there was no meed of it. ' _ Asadverbs, 7d wey... 7d8é, 74 nev... 7a 84, (also with 7}, thus Ta pépy _ ti,) mean on the one hand... on the other, partly... partly (in which sense _ we find also todro wey . . . rodro 5é).

| a) After a preposition, the order is usually changed: év pév rots, eis 8¢ rd. ; 8) In later writers (even in Demosthenes), the relative pronoun is some- _ times used in the same way, but only in oblique eases: adders, &s uty avaipar, - eis'&s BE Tovs guyddas kardywv destroying some cities, into others bringing back their exiles. i i

= (y) Very often 6 d¢ (without preceding 6 wév) means but he, but this; when thus used in the nominative by Attic writers, it refers almost always to a dif- _ ferent subject from that of the preceding sentence: "Ivdpws *"ASnvaious émnyd-' yero* of & HASov Indiros called in the Athenians ; and they came. Similarly, in _ Aitic poetry we have 6 ydp for he, for this.

_ _b. in kal réy, nad rhy, before an infinitive: nal roy aGroxpivacdar A€yeras and it is said that he answered. (In the nom., we have xa) és and he, kad 7, kal of: Kalo? nipdrav and they were asking. Cf. 4 5 3s, 48 H, said he, she.)

ny PY ee A ue bss

i

216 RESTRICTIVE ARTICLE. [525 |

Likewise in rdy xa) rév, 7d kal 76, TR Kad Td, THA TH: Wet yap 7d Kad Td mori cat, Kal 7d wh) worjoa for this and that we ought to have done, and this not to have done. The nom. ds xa) ds occurs in Hd.

ce. rarely before a relative: dpeyerat Tov 8 éorw toov he aims at that which és equal, mposhke: picciv Tos oidsmep obTos it is proper to hate those of a char- acter such as this one. But here 6 may be regarded as a proper article, the relative sentence being equivalent to an attributive with omitted subject: tod toov, Tovs ToLovTous.

d. in xpd rod (also written xporod) before this (time). Also in a few other cases of very rare occurrence. For éy rots with the superlative, see 627.

‘O as am Article.

526. The article, as a weakened demonstrative, directs spe- cial attention to its substantive, marking it either a. as a particular object, distinguished from others of its class (restrictive article), or b. as a whole class, distinguished from other classes of ob jects (generic article).

Thus &vSpwros a man, one of the species (&Spwros ef thou art a man): but 6 tvSpwros, a. the (particular) man, distinguished from other men (6 &ySpwros dv wdyres picoder the man whom ali hate); or, b. man as such, comprehending every one of the species (6 &vSpwros Svntés éort man is mortal). With an ATTRIBUTIVE, G&yaSol &vdpes good men, some of that character: of éyado) tvdpes, a. the (particular) good men, distinguished from others of like character, or b. good men as a class, distinguished from men of different character.——So with ABSTRACT nouns, dixaocdyn justice in any form or relation: 4 Sixaoodvn, a. justice in the particular relation, distinguished from other relations (4 dicaocbdvn Tod Seod the justice of the divinity); or b. justice in the sum of all its relations, as distinguished from other qualities (4 Sicaoctvyn aperh eos justice is true man- liness).

527. A. RESTRICTIVE Articte. The particular object is dis- —

tinguished from others of its class,

= 4 &. 43 BEFORE MENTIONED, OF aS WELL KNOWN: SoptBou frovee, Kal fpero —

tis 6 SdpuBos etn he heard a noise, and asked what the noise was, of Tpdes Ta déxa ern dyretxov the Trojans held out during the ten years (the well known duration of the siege).

b, aS LIMITED BY WORDS CONNECTED WITH IT: 7d Mndias re?xos the wall of Media, 4 wéAts hv wodtopkodpmey the city which we are besieging, év rais képous rais itp Tov wediov Tov Tapa Toy Keyrpiryy wotaudy in the villages (which are) above the plain (which is) along the river Centrites. In many such cases, we might regard the limiting expression (attributive) as uniting with the one

limited (subject) to form one complex idea: in this view, the article would —

have its generic use.

@. aS SPECIALLY CONNECTED WITH THE CIRCUMSTANCES of the case: wive rot otvov drink of the wine (here before you), axhroa rod wéAous I have heard the

song (just sung), €BovAero thy udxny moro he desired to engage in the (ex-

pected) battle: particularly, as NATURAL, USUAL, PROPER, NECESSARY, ete., under the circumstances: af ryuad weydAu, dv dmonrelyn tis TUpavvoy if one kill

i a’

s (usually resul ing ore yevoird ji Tas xdpsras aro it mine to return the thanks to a father, 7d wépos rap amérioe Tas Tevtakootas 9; s not having received the (requir-

6 the votes (regularly cast), he paid the (prescribed) 500 drachmae.

@, aS @ SPECIMEN OF ITS CLASS, selected at pleasure. In this use, the article is often equivalent to an unemphatic EACH: @wxe rpla judapend Tod “paves TE otpariary he-gave three half-darics a month to each soldier (lit. the ‘month to the soldier). This use approaches very closely to the generic article. _ 528, A NuMERAL may have the article, when distinguished as a part from _the whole number (expressed or understood) to which it belongs: amrjcay ray | Adxwr, d€xa dvrwr, ai rpeis of the companies, being ten (in number), there were _ absent (the part) three, rd Sv0 pépn two thirds (two parts out of three). So _ too, an approximate round number, as distinguished from the (unstated) precise number: arédavov &up) rods pvptous there fell about ten thousand.—A number _ as such (without reference to any thing numbered) may have the article: ph ” épets Sri 7d, Bddend ears ds EF will you say that (the) twelve is twice sia?

_ a, So too, the article is used with adjectives of number, as of rActoror the ' most numerous part, the largest number (in a given total), of roves (the more “numerous part) the majority, and with much the same meaning of zoAAof (the _ numerous part) the larger number, often used for the democratic mass, cf. of _ dAtyot the oligarchs, Also, rd road the great part. Oi repo: the one or other _ of two parties; of AA the rest, but Ado: others.

A

. ; P - 529. B. Generic Artictx. This must often be left untrans- lated in English: | 6 tySpwros Svntds éors man ts mortal, Bis waides of yépovres old men are _ twice boys ; and generally so, when applied to ansrract nouns: 4 diucaoodbyn justice, ; yewpyla husbandry, 7 pnropixh rhetoric, &AX of wévor tierovar Thy ed- | Botlay but toils beget good reputation. a. To this head belong the cases in which a single object forms a class by itself: % yj the earth, 6 dxeavds the ocean, 5 hAuos the sun, 4 cedhyn the moon, 6 Bopéas the north wind, 6 véros the south wind, etc. These, however, often omit the article, like proper names. ;

630. Articte OmitTep. In many cases where the article could have been used with propriety, it was omitted, either, because the definiteness of the subject was not thought of, or because it seemed unnecessary to ex- “press it. This was most frequently true of the generic article, and espe- ‘cially with abstract nouns, when used to express a mere idea: dv¥pémov Wuxy Tod Seiov perexer the soul of man partakes of the divine, pdBos pripnv exmrnocer fear drives out recollection: for the divinity (in general) Seés is used, but 6 Seds the (particular) god. _ a. Proper names of PERSONS and pLacgs, being individual in their nature, re usually without the article ; yet they often take it, to mark them as before mentioned or well known (527 a), and sometimes for other reasons: 8rt robs UT 1c" u _ rag KAdapxov dareASdéyras ela Kipos thy KAéapxov exe de-

chet Aa a My A Rl AE Gh Shea AE so Be BOM,

218 ARTICLE WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. [530 |

cause their soldiers, who had gone to Clearchus, Cyrus allowed (the said) Ole — archus to retain; 6 TWiAdrwy the celebrated Plato, in plur. with generic article of WAdtwyves the Plato's, philosophers like Plato. Plural proper names of NATIONS Or FAMILIES more often have the (generic) article; yet are frequently without it: rdv éAcuoy ray TleAomwovynolwy kat ASnvalwy the war of the Pelo- ponnesians and Athenians (the article is here omitted with the second genitive,

. on account of the close connection, cf. of orparnyol kat Aoxaryot the generals and captains). BagiActds, used almost as a proper name for the king of Persia, may omit the article; cf. rpurdveis the prytdnes (officers in Athens).

b. Similarly, the article is omitted in many common designations of PLACE and Timz, made by such words as &orv, wédus, city, &xpdmoarts citadel, &yopd forum, retxos wall, orpardémedov camp, wedlov plain, aypds country, yh land, SdrAacoa — sca,—dekid, apiorepd, right, left (hand), dekidy, edovupov (Képas), right, left (wing), — pécoy centre,—nuépa, day, vt night, ws morn, dpSpos day-break, detan afternoon, éomrépa evening, ap spring,—and the like,—especially after prepositions or ad- verbs: eis &orv to town, xara viv by land, ém Sédpu to the (spear-side) right, nap aomtda to the (shield-side) left, eddvupor elxov they held the left wing, ua hucpa at day-break, vuerds by night, i Ew just before day-light. These should perhaps be regarded as relics of earlier usage, which remained unaffect- ed by the developed use of the article.

c. The omission of the article may have emphatic force, attention being given wholly to the proper meaning of the word, instead of its particular re- ~ lations; especially in copulative forms, as yuvatkes kat maides women and child- ren, Wux}) Kal caua soul and body, otte marpds ore pntpds pelderar he spares — neither father nor mother (more forcible than his father, his mother). :

ee eee _

531. ArticteE wir Arrrieutivrs. When a substantive, qualified by an attributive, requires the article, this is always placed before the attributive. :

This remark applies not only to adjectives, but also to a participle, an ad-— verb, and (usually) a preposition with its case, when used as attributives; but much less constantly, to the attributive genitive: thus 7 Tod mwatpbds oixta and “4 oixla 4 Tod marpés the father’s house, yet often % oixla rod marpds (but rarely h emiBovah bxd THs yuvaucds the plotting by the woman, for 4 éx. 7 bmd etc.)

532, A. Usually, the attributive stands between the article and sub-— stantive. ;

Te papa relxn the long walls, 4 xporépa drvyapxia the earlier oligarchy (fol- - lowed by another oligarchy), 4 mpérepoy dAvyapxla the earlier oligarchy (follow- ed by a different form of government), 7 Kad’ juépay tpoph the daily food.

a, When an attributive participle has other words depending on it, either” these words or the participle may follow the substantive: af im Aioxlvov BAa- vdnuta eipnuérar the slanders uttered by Aeschines, 5 nareinpas klyduvos Thy wdéaw the danger which has overtaken the city. When the attributive parti ciple has a predicate-word connected with it, this is commonly put before. it: 6 orparnyiKds vousCduevos dvtip the man considered as fit for a general, 7b Kort- Aaor Kadovmevoy dpos the mountain called Cotylaewm, ot adrod ASucnedres those who have themselves done wrong. | i

b. When two attributives precede the substantive, the article is not usu- ally repeated with the second: of &AAo: woAAol tduwaxor the other numerous allies, of émt rod Bhuaros wap suiv Adyor the speeches before you on the bema,— yet also } Artin) 7 madaid pwvh the ancient Attic speech. vy,

»

.. rt “1 Y 3

s often, the substantive stands first, followed by the passe: (6) dvip 6 dya%ds. The latter is then less closely with its subject, and has the general nature of an appositive. ntive itself may appear either with or without the article, viz. ‘the article, when this would be required, even if the attributive : of Xio. 7d retxos wepiciAoy Td kauvdy the Chians threw down (the)

“new one.

. WwitHour the article, when this eoule, not be required, if the atiributive

vere dropped: rf duadepe kSperos aKparys Snplov rod duepareordrov how does

a violent man differ from the most violent wild beast (but without the attributive,

“from a wild beast”)?

} xe a.

534. a. In general, any word or group of words standing between the

; article and its substantive, has the force of an attributive (492 d). Hx-

eee however, the particles pev, d¢, YS Té, yap, dn: roy pev dy8pa, TH Se

. aixa,—but with a preposition, mpds d¢ rov dvdpa or mpos TOY avSpa- d¢

( mpos tov Se avdpa, rare in prose) :—also, in Ionic, ris: ray tis Tepoéov one of the Persians.

7 b. In most instances, where an atiributive is used as a substantive (the

. ea , especially the indeterminate subject, being omitted), the article is found

re the attributive, see 496 a.

~—s-635. ARTICLE WITH Prepricate-Nouns. a. The predicate-noun, in general, rejects the article: iperos ei thou art aman. Hence we may . distinguish subject and predicate in sentences such as mpoddrns jv 6 orpa- _ myss the general was a traitor.

___ The reason is, that, in ordinary predication, the subject is said to be (or not to

be) an individual ‘of the class denoted by the predicate. But if the subject is said

| to be THe individual or Tux class, distinguished from others, the predicate-noun

_ may have the article: Toy Adturmoy divaucadoivres Tov apoddrny calling Dexippus

_ the (notorious) traitor, of riS€uevor rods vduous of daoSevels &vSpwrol eiot Kal of _ moadol the enactors of the laws are the weak men and the multitude (as a class).

a b. The predicate-adjective (or participle), if connected with a sub- stantive which requires the article, cannot stand between the article and | ‘substantive (534), but must precede or follow both of them: dya%ds 6 dvnp or 6 advnp ayadés the man is good.

7d cdma Svntdy drayres Zxouey we all have our body mortal (the body, which -we all have, is mortal), adrds dyadds, cby &yadols rots map’ éuol good. m yself, | with the men about me good (while my attendants are good), Gua TO 7pt aipXo- pve at the beginning of the spring (when it was beginning), of *ASnvato: rap’ _ éxdytay Tay tuupdxwv Thy iyyepovtay €raBov the Athenians received the leader- 4 ip from their allies acting willingly (these were willing to confer it), mécoy nee) otpdrevya how large ts he leading the army (the army, which he leads, ‘hw large)? év dwole ti yj det putede olda I know in what kind of soil one st plant (of what kind the soil is, in which one must plant).

__ 986. ARTICLE WiTH ADJECTIVEs OF Prac. Some adjectives of place, ed in the predicate position, refer to a part of the subject:

h xdpa or 4h xdpa wéon the middle of the country, but 4 péon xdopa the country (between other countries); &xarov 7d dpos or Td dpos ErxXaror he xtremity of the mountain, but 7d écxarov Ypos the extreme mountain (01

wi ;

220 ote ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS. [536

several mountains); apa 7 xelp or 7 xelp &xpa the point of the hand.-——In like manner, fyuovs 6 Blos or 6 Blos tious half of the life.

587. ARTICLE WITH was AND 8Ao0s. The adjective mas (strengthened Gras, cvpras) all has usually theepredicate position, but sometimes the attributive, with little difference of meaning: mdyres of wodtrat all the citizens, of wodtrau adyres the citizens all; less often of mdyres woAtrat the whole body of citizens

(cf. of mdvres with numerals, éxarby of rdéyres a hundred as the whole number, .

a hundred in all), Without the article, rdyres woAtrau all citizens ; and in the sing., mas woAtrns every citizen. Yet the sing. may mean ALL: wacay buiv Thy danseay épd I will tell you all the truth; so even without the article: mdon mposuule with all.zeal, cis &macay pavadryra to (all) utter meanness.

Similarly, 6Aos whole: 68An % was or H wdALs GAN the city as a whole, h Ay mérts the whole city, 7 méAts % SAn the city the whole of it; without article, An mwérts & whole city.

538. ARTICLE WITH Pronouns. a. Substantives with d6d¢, otros, éxet- vos, require the article, and the pronoun takes the predicate position:

b3¢ 6 dvhp this man, rd mpdyuara radra these affairs (the subst., if used without the article, is a predicate: év Tlépaas vduos éorly obvros among the Per- sians this is alaw). The same is true of &upw, aupdrepos, both, Exdrepos cach (of two). “Exaoros each (of several) has the same position, if its substantive takes the article: éxdorn 7 apxh each magistracy : and this is likewise true of the genitives of PERSONAL pronouns (od, cov, adrod, judy, etc.) when con- nected with a substantive which has the article (while the REFLEXIVE genitives, éuavrod, etc., have the attributive position): 4 yAécod cov thy tongue, mere- mwéuaro Aoruayns thy éavTod Svyaré his daughter and her boy.

Yet if the article is followed by an attributive, most of the above pronouns may stand between the attributive and its subject: (yryréoy rhy pilav éxelynp monitelay we must seek for that one polity, 4 mdAa huey priors our old nature.

b. The pronoun ards, in the predicate position, means rPsE; in the

attributive, IDEM: avrés 6 aynp or 6 aynp avrds the man himself; but 6 —

avtos avnp the same man, rarely (6) dvip 6 avrés.

c. The possusstvE pronouns take the article, only when a particular — object is referred to: euds piros a friend of mine, 6 ends pitos my friend —

(the particular one).

d. An INTERROGATIVE pronoun may take the article, when it relates to an ©

object before mentioned: mdéoyet 5 Savuacrdéy* ro Th; A. He suffers something wonderful. B. (The what) What is it?——So, even a personal pronoun : Sedpo

5} evSd Huav> wapa tlyas rods butis; A. Come hither straight to us. B. (To the —

you being whom) Who are you, that I must come to?

e. “Erepos (Lat. alter) one or other of two; 6 repos the one, the other; of érepot the one, the other (of two parties), may mean the enemy.— AdAdos (Lat.

alius) another, 6 %AAos the other, the rest: Sadprny re wal thy &AAny ‘EAAGOa

Sparta, and the rest of Greece ; often used for all except a part mentioned © AFTERWARD: TG pey BAA OTpaTe jobxaey, Exardy St weATAaTTUsS mMpoTeumTeL

with the rest of the army he kept quiet, but sends forward a hundred peltasts,

_ tives: of woA?rat kad of %AAO E€vor the citizens and (the others, being foreigners)

the foreigners beside, yépwv xwpet wed’ Erépov veavlov an old man comes with

(a second person, a young man) a young man beside, | we

pa kad troy Tatda abriis Astydges sent for

These pronouns have sometimes an APPOSITIVE relation to their substan-—

a? hike

i, THE OASES. © oo Ae NOMINATIVE.

. Supsecr-Nomrnative. The subject of a finite verb is put in the nominative. (For the rule of agreement, see 497.) Eade: 540. Prepicare-Nomiative. The predicate-noun, when it 1 elongs to the subject of a finite verb, is put in the nominative. This occurs with verbs which mean to be, become, appear, bé made, chosen, called, considered, and the like (cf. 490): | —s_xaxlerara: Bacideds he becomes (established as) king, "AAétavBpos Seds avo- pdCero Alexander was named a god, fixes wor cwrnp thou art come for me as a savior.—To these verbs belongs dxotw to hear, in the sense of being called : » of év *AShvats pereiserees KéAares Kad Seots exSpol ixovoy those in Athens, _ who favored Philip, were called flatterers and enemies of the gods.

_ 541. Nominative ror Vocative. The nominative is often used for _ the yocative in address, especially in connection with otros: 6 ’Amoh)é- » Sapos obros, ov mepipeveis you Apollodorus there, will you not stay ?— -- _ also in exclamations : vjzos fool!

- §42. Nominative InpEPENDENT. The nominative is used for names and _ titles, which form no part of a sentence: Kupov ’AvdBaots Hxpedition of Cyrus, - BiBAloy Mp@rov Book First ; and sometimes so, even when they become y of a sentence: mposelAnde Thy rev wovnpav Kowhy exwvuplay, cvKopdyTns he obtained the common appellation of the vile, ‘ sycophant,” wapeyytba 5 Kipos _ civSnua, Zeds Eiupaxos Kab jyeudv Cyrus gave out, as pass-word, “ Zeus, our ally and leader.”

— By

Peg aie

B. VOCATIVE.

543. The person (or thing) addressed is put in the vocative.

a. In Attic prose, @ is usually prefixed; but in animated address, it is sometimes wanting: put SopuBe?re, & kydpes "ASnvatos make no noise, O men of Athens, doves, Aicxivn hearest thou, Aeschines ?

___b. The vocative, like the interjections, forms no part of a sentence, and is 4 therefore enclosed in commas.

ea 0, ACCUSATIVE.

_ 544. The accusative properly denotes the opsxct of an action, that to, on, or over which an action is directed; thus:

Tie

__ The Drrecr Oxsuxcr of a transitive verb is put in the accusa

For omis-

Ses oder quads ev xvddbvos the god preserves us in dangers. ‘the object, see 505: for omission of the verb, see 508.

Fo es Pi a, ty A ne ; on yee Moe let ae ri fe ys ¢ 4

222 ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT. [544 —

a. Many Greek verbs are transitive and followed by an objects accusative, when the verbs commonly used to render them in English are intransitive and followed by a preposition:

duvivat Tos Seobs to swear by the gods, eb (kas) woreivy rovs avSpdmovs to do good (ill) te men, wévery twa to wait for one, petyew twd to flee from one, Aavadvew tid to escape the notice of one, puvddrrecdal twa to guard (himself) against one (act. pvddrrew tid to guard one), aidetoSat, aicxtverSar Tov marépa to feel shame before his father, Sappeiv twa to rely on one} Sappeiv Tas pdxas to have no fear of the battles, rrciv thy SddAacoay to sail over the sea, viKav paxnv (Stenv, yvounv) to be victorious in a battle (a law-suit, a resolution).

b. Conversely, many Greek verbs are intransitive and followed by a genitive or dative, when the verbs commonly used for them in English are transitive :

tpxew avdpdrav to rule men, &mrecdar THs Kdpons to touch the hay, &xodvew SopvBou to hear a noise, weAdCew TH cisddy to approach the entrance, aphyew Trois pidros to aid his friends, pSoveiv rots rAovatots to envy the rich.

c. In many cases, the Greek itself varies, using the same verb at dif- ferent times as transitive and intransitive :

aicddversxat Tt or Tivos to perceive something, évdupetadat twos, Tt to consider something, évoxdciv tiva, Tit to trouble one, émrrparedew Tivd, Ti to war against one (so too, other compounds of ézt), de? pol ros I have need of something, poet. 5ez (xph) wé Twos. Especially in poetry, verbs usually intransitive some- times take a direct object: mpoBaiveay roy wé5a to advance the foot, hasat or Sdocew (Keloda, wndav) téroy tivd to sit (lie, leap) in a place, xopedew Toy Sedv to celebrate the god by choral dance, rods eboeBeis Seol SvyhoKovras ov xalpover the gods rejoice not in the death of the pious.

d. Many intransitive verbs become transitive from being compound- ed with a preposition : diaBaivey roy notapuédy to cross the river, éxBalvew Thy harrklay to pass out of the age, mapaBatvew rovs vduous to transgress the laws, amodedpadres marépas having run away from their fathers.

e. In rare cases, an intransitive verb in connection with a verbal noun, forms a transitive phrase with an object-accusative: émorhuoves joav Td mpos- jnoyra they were acquainted with their duties, ort rd peréwpa ppovriorhs he is a student of things above the earth, kapvoy eivar thy Slarray to reject the settle- ment, reSvdvar TE pbBy Tors OnBatovs to be mortally afraid of the Thebans, ot pvémos (éorl) is able to escape thee ; so, in poetry, ef d¢ pw &S del Adyois etiipxes if you always thus begun your addresses to me, deandbray dois nardpkw 1 will begin with lamentations for my master.

545, ADVERBS oF SWEARING. Ny and pa are followed by the accusative (perhaps on account of éuyvps understood): vf is always affirmative ; pa, unless vai precedes it, is always connected with a negative, expressed or implied: 7) Ala by Zeus, vai pa Aia yea, by Zeus, od pa Aia no, by Zeus, pa Tov—ov ov ye not you, by—(the name of the god suppressed with humorous effect): rarely is yd omitted after the negative as in ov, rdvd Odvurov no, by this Olympus.

The accusative is sometimes found in other exclamations: odros, @ oe — rot you there, ho! you, I mean. ae

228°

Accusative or Errrecr. Many transitive verbs have, + object, the thing effected or produced by their action: ypdde tiv emorodw he writes the letter. But many verbs, not roperly transitive, take an accusative of the effect, denoting ‘t hat which is made to exist or appear by their action: veo evew eiphyny to negotiate a peace (form a peace by acting as embass- ), Spkia Teuvew foedus ferire (hostiam feriendo foedus efficere), yopyryotvra Awyvtcra celebrating the Dionysia by furnishing a chorus of boys, poct. HOE (7 avapxla) tpoTwas Karappfyrvor this (anarchy, breaks defeats) causes defeats _ by breaking oy , Closely connected with this use is the following: ‘Sh Fae 547. Coanarz-Accusative. This repeats the meaning of the verb in the form ofa noun. It might be called the implied ob- ject, as being already contained in the verb. It is used with _ many intransitive verbs, and commonly has an attributive con- _ nected with it. Here belong

___ a, Accusative or Kinprep Formation: pdxny eudxovro they were fighting _ &@ batile, roumhy wéumewy to conduct a procession, kaxiorny Sovdctay eSovAevoe he _ became subject to a most wretched servitude, ds bv aplarny BovdAhy Bovrdcton who- ever may (counsel) give the best counsel, riv évayriav vécov vorotuey we are (sick) suffering under the opposite disease, peydany tid xplow xplvera he is wndergo- ing a great trial.

' b. Accusative or Kinprep Mranine: (heeis Blov xpdriorov you will lead the best life, ranyhy riwrerau Baputdrny he is struck a very heavy blow, rdoas vocous Kduver he is sick with all diseases, wéAeuov eorpdrevoay tov iepoy Kadotpe- ~ vov they engaged in the so-called Sacred war, ypaphy didnew to prosecute an im-

_ ~=peachment, éoricy ydpous to (entertain) give a wedding-feast.

In many cases, the meaning of the verb is not actually repeated as a

> noun, but must be wnderstood in connection with the accusative of an

” adjective or qualifying substantive. Hence two more forms of the cognate- accusative :

ce. Neuter Apsective. For the indeterminate subject, we may supply the _ repeated meaning of the verb: péya peddera: (= néya Weddos Wevderar) he utters @ great falschood, xdvra metooucs I shall obey in all things (render all acts of _ Obedience), rabra Avrotuont Kad radTd xalpw Tols moAAois [ have the same pains _ and the same pleasures with the multitude, opixpdy rt drop I am in some little _ perplexity, rl xphoopa tovTe what use shall I make of this? poet. ceuvdy Brémeis you look grave. —

_ ___ d. Quatiryine Supstantive. This may be regarded as standing in defi- nitive apposition, its subject (understood) being the idea of the verb, repeated asa noun: Page oho médny they contend in (a contest, ayava, viz.) wrestling, _ Tovroy Tov Tpbmov mpdkas having acted in this manner (of action), Hm. zip épSaa- " ploiot Sedopxds looking (a look of) jire with their eyes, Hm. pévea mvelovres Ax aol _ the Achaeans breathing courage. Cf. 501-2, though the substantive there is less _ closely related to the verb of the sentence.

648. The cognate-accusative is also used in connection with adjectives . Kaos Tacay kaxlay bad with all badness, &yadds wacxy aperhy good ‘vith all eax

es .

Ae vo wap , A

224 ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. OF EXTENT. [548

cellence ; especially the accusative of neuter adjectives (547 ¢): 6 mdyra copds months the poet wise in all things, &yadds rodTo yood in this particular (of goodness), 4 wéAus judy oddty duola yéyover éxetvors our city is not at all like them, Boa por xphomol éore ol8a I know for how many things (uses) ye are wse- ful tome. Yet these constructions might be referred to the following head. —

549. AccusATIVE oF SpectFicaTIon. The accusative is loosely connected with predicate-words (verb, adjective, substantive), to specify the part, property, or circumstance, to which they apply. It is also, but less often, used with attributives. The accusative specifies

a. apart of the subject: xduyw thy keparhy Ihave pain in my head, exouey TX cdpara we are well in our bodies, poet. ruprAds ta 7 Gta Tov TE vod? Ta 7 dupor ef you are blind in your ears, your mind, and your eyes.

b. a property of the subject (nature, form, size, name, number, ete.): wAj- Sds tt Thy oiow eorly h Tors the city is in its nature a multitude, mapSévos Kady Td eldos a maid beautiful in her form, rorayds, Kidvos tvopa, edpos dbo mwAéSpav a river, Cydnus by name, of two plethra in breadth, dmreipot Td wAHSOs infinite in their number, dikaos tov rpdroy just in his character.

c. a circumstance not belonging to the subject: 7b éxefvou péy edruxeis pépos thou art happy, so far as he is concerned (as to his part), cal Td puxpad Teipauc ard Seay dppacsa: even in little things, I endeavor to begin with the gods, % wéAus ciphyny Ta wept Thy xdpay tye the city enjoys peace in things re- lating to its territory, Td Kar’ éut ovdey erAclper on my side there shall be ne failure.

550. Accusative or Extent (Zime and Space). The extent of time and space is put in the accusative.

a. TIME: évyradda Kipos Euewev jucpas wévre there Cyrus remained five days, ai omovSal éviavtdov ecovra the truce will be for a year, SovAcbovet Tov Aovmdy Btov they are slaves all the rest of their life. :

b. Space: Kipos éferatve: did tis Avdlas cradpobs Tpeis, mapacdyyas elkoot kat Sto Cyrus advances through Lydia three days’ marches, twenty-two parasangs, Méyapa airéxet Supaxoveay ore rAody woAdy ote 55év Megara is not far dis- tant from Syracuse, either by sea or by land (no long voyage or journey).

Rem. ¢c. The accusative singular is used with an ordinal numeral, to show the number of days (months, years) since a particular event, including the day (month, year) of the event itself: EBdduny judpay ) Svydrnp abTge erereAcuThKes his daughter had died the seventh day (i. e. six days) before. The pronoun odroct is often added: é&fASouev Eros rout) tplroy és Tidvaxroy we went out two years ago (this, as third year) to Panactum.

551. Ossecr or Morton. The poets often use the accusative without a pre- position, to denote the object towards which motion is directed: +d kotAoy “Ap- ryos Bas having gone to the hollow (low-lying) Argos, rod KA€os odpavdy tre: his

ame has reached to heaven, pynorijpas apixero she came to the suitors, c& 765 eAfAuse way kpdros this whole power has come to thee.

552. ApverBrAL Accusative. The accusative is used in many words and phrases, with the force of an adverb.

“TWO ACCUSATIVES. 225

is use may be explained, in most cases, by the principles already given ), ef. 501-2). Thus révd_e (todrov) ov tpdxov in this manner (547 d), ‘a tpdmoy in every manner, dv tpdtov in which manner, etc. Compare ases In which 684v way is perhaps to be supplied (509 a): rhy raxlorny 7G ars xapl(eoda to gratify the body in the quickest way. So (rhv) dpxhy, al- ys with a negative: dpxhy St Snpay od mpérea: Tausjxava it is not proper to , in ilities at all (not to make even a beginning of it) rake <5 vy dié- - Bawoy they were just passing across (the acme of their crossing) ;——and, in _ like manner, (1d) réAos at last (as the end), mpotka and dwpedy gratis (as a free gift), Xdpuw por the sake of (in favor of) takes a genitive, as also dleny like (in _ the fashion of): &yyelou dixny mewAnpGodat to be filled like a pail, rod Adyou xdpw for the sake of the discussion, éuhy xdpw for my sake, _ a, Many neuter adjectives are used in this way: péya, peydra, greatly, “®OAV, TOAAG, Much, 7d ToAL, TX wodAd, for the most part, mpdrepov before, rd _ «pdrepov the former time, rp@rov (at) jirst, rb mpHrov the first time, Tb Aowwdy forthe rest, for the future (but rod Aorod at some time in the future), ruxédy per- er a Tocodroy so much, dcov as far as, tT) somewhat (éyybs tt pretty nein’, a why (rt rraleis why are you weeping ?), Trotro, Tatra, therefore lar’ TAVTG VU cower for these very reasons are we now come). Cf. adverbs of the compar. and superl. degrees (228), and the cases of apposition in 502. »

4 For accusative as subject of the infinitive, see 773. _ For accusative absolute with a participle, see 792.

Two Accusatives with One Verb. ~

553. Dovusre Onsecr. Many transitive verbs may have a double object, usually a person and a thing, both in the accusa- tive. ‘Thus verbs of asking, teaching, clothing, hiding, depriv- ing, and others.

Thus ait@ to request (Kdpov mdoia vessels of Cyrus), épwr& to inquire (robs avTouddrous Ta ep) Ta ToAculwy of the deserters as to the news from the enemy), diddonw to teach (roy waida thy movouhy the boy music) welSw to persuade (juas ravaytia you of the contrary), évdbw or d&udiévvups to clothe (twa Tov xiTGva one in the tunic), exdiw to unclothe, strip (due thy écdijra me of the dress), kpiwrw to hide (ue rodro from me this thing), &patpovuat or &roorep@ to deprive (rods “EAAnvas thy yiv the Greeks of their land), ovaA@ to despoil, mpdrtoua, also mparrw or eismpdrrw to exact (rods vyoiwras éthxovra tdAdavra of the islanders siaty talents), avapiuvhokw to remind. a. The passive of these verbs retains the accusative of the thing: — - &iOdoxopat tiv povorxny J am taught music, apypnrar tov tov he has been _ deprived of the horse.

Several of these cases, and of those in 555, might be explained by the prin- ciple, that

___ 554, Causative Verss, with the accusative of the person, take the case

which belongs to the included verb. Thus dvauvhow suas robs nwdbvovs I will

cause you to remember the dangers. So, to ask is to make one give an answer ; o teach is to make one learn, etc. To the included verb may belong a genitive: y ae tyuns to make one taste of honor, wh w dvapyhons kanav remind me.

not ils.

as 10*

oi ef

= fj

226 TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB. [554

555. Onsecr anp Coanate-Accusative. Many transitive verbs may have, beside the object, a cognate-accusative :

éprwcay Tovs orpari@ras Tovs peylorous Spxovs they made the soldiers swear the gréatest oaths, MéArros éypdivard we Thy ypapiy tavtny Melitus brought this impeachment against me, Hm. dv Zebs iret mavtoiny piddtnta for whom Zeus feels all manner of love: éut 6 rathp thy Tay waldwy erpepey my father reared me with the training of the boys, Aioxlyns Krnoipavra ypaphy wapavépnewv edlare

Aeschines prosecuied Ctesiphon on charge of an illegal resolution ; ef tls tt dryar

Sdby Kandy morhoetev airdy if one should do him any good or evil, wodAd &y Tis exer Swxpdrny éeravécor one would be able to bestow many praises on Socrates, Hiikchoapuey rodroy ovdév we did this one no wrong.

a. Such verbs in the passive may retain the cognate-accusative: KpiSnvat adorepas Tas Kpioes to undergo both the trials, rimrecat wevtn- xovra mAnyas to be struck fifty blows, ob Brayrovra: GEva Adyou (547 ¢) they will not suffer injuries worth mentioning. me

556. Opsect AND Prepicatre-Accusative. <A predicate-noun, when it belongs to the object of a transitive verb, is put in the accusative. This occurs with verbs which mean to make, show, choose, call, consider, and the like (cf. 490 c).

rotodpal tiva plrov I make one my friend, aipeiodal rwa otparnydy to choose one as general, rapéxw euavtdy edradn I show myself ready to obey, of éAares "Adetavdpov Sedv avduator his flatterers named Alexander a god, ob robs wActora Zxovras evdanoverrdrous voullw not those who have most, do Iconsider as happiest, fAaBe todTo dapoy he took this as a gift (but roiro rd Sapor this gift). The predicate-accusative may be an interrogative pronoun: tt rodro motets (as what are you doing this) what is this you are doing? tlvas robs® eisop& who are these I behold? wota raira Aéyes of what nature are these things which you are saying? cf. 826a.

a. The predicate-accusative is often distinguished from the object by the absence of the article (535): ra meperra xpnyatra mpdypara éxover they have their superfluous wealth for a vewation. {

. b. In the passive construction, both of these accusatives become

nominatives (540): *“Adc£avdpos Seds avoudtero Alexander was named a god.

D. GENITIVE.

557. The genitive properly denotes, (a) that To which some- thing BELONGs ; also, (b) that rRom which something is sEPAR- ATED. In the latter use, it corresponds to the Latin aBLaTivE.

Genitive with Substantives.

558. One substantive may have another depending on it in » ita

the genitive.

"(GENITIVE WITH sUBSTANTIVES. 227

ro things, denoted by the substantive and the depend- nitive, may have a great variety of relations (expressed y by English or). Thus the former may belong to the

Gana | a, asa part of it: Genitive of the Whole, or G@. Partitive. ____b, as composed of it: Genitive of Material.

__ ¢. as more definitely expressed by it: G. of Designation. (na, b, o, the two things are more or less the same; in the following, they are distinct :) | d. as possessed by it: Genitive of Possession. -e. as connected with it and pertaining to it, though not strictly in possession: Genitive of Connection. .

(The following may be regarded as special varieties of e:)

f. as an action or attribute of which it is the subject: Genitive Subjective.

g. as an action of which it is the object: Gen. Objective.

h. as produced or accounted for by it: Genitive of Cause.

i, as measured by it in extent, duration, or value: Genitive of Measure.

Rem. j. It is not intended here to give an exact analysis of the relations ex- “pressed by the genitive with substantives; but only to specify relations which the student may notice with advantage.

It should always be remembered that the genitive does not express these relations distinctly, but only the general idea of belonging which is common to all of them. Hence the same construction may sometimes be referred to dif- ferent heads, the two things having more than one relation to each other: thus in wéS0s tod droSavdvtos regret for the dead, rod &roSavdyros may be re- garded either as the cause of regret, or as the object regretted.

559, Genitive Partitive. a. The part is most commonly expressed by a word of number or a superlative, the whole by a genitive plural: moAAol razr ASnvalwv many of the Athenians, rérepos tev &deApav which of the two brothers, - wdyrov tipioros best of all men, oi orovdato: rév moditGy the excellent among the | ettizens, tes Tay pnrdépwr some of the orators, Shuov avip a man of the people,

| puxpdy trvov a little (portion of) sleep, Hm. Sia Sedwy divine among goddesses, Mie iv wecov huepas it was the middle of the day,—Béartioros Eavrod in his best estate : (lit. best of himself; the superlative referring to the man in one condition, the genitive to the man in the sum of ai/ his conditions).

b. The genitive partitive is used (with the article) to denote the district or region to which a place belongs: O7Bo tis Bowrlas Thebes in Boeotia, rijs Xepoovhcov ev EAmotyt: in Hlacus of the Chersonesus.

_ ¢, The genitive partitive with neuter adjectives (496) often denotes de- gree: én) péya duvduews exdpnoay they advanced to a great (degree) of power, __ eis TovTo dvolas HASoy to this (extent) of folly did they come, év roit@ Tijs wapa- | oKevijs joa in this (state) of preparation were they, év wayt) xaxod in catremity

evil.

d. If the word expressing part has the article, the genitive takes the po- ion of a predicate-adjective (535 b): 6 rérapros ray maldwy the fourth among , ASnvatwv 6 Sijuos the people of the Athenians (i. e. the democratic 88, opposed to the aristocracy; but 6 "ASnvatwy Sijuos the whole people).

228 GENITIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES. * [559

e. Adjectives which have a partitive genitive, usually conform to it in gender, so as often to appear in the masc. or fem., where we might expect the neut.: 6 fusovs (6 Aourds, 6 wAcioros) Tod xpdvou the half (rest, most part) of the time, WOoAAH Tis xdpas (also woAd tijs xdpas) much of the country.

———- -- -- eee

560, GENITIVE OF Marertat: vduiopa apybpov coin of silver, xphyn hdéos Wdaros a spring of sweet water, Body &yédn a herd of cattle, rARSos avSpdtav a multitude of men, Epatar cirov wagons (wagon-loads) of corn, tpiaxdoi, téAavTa pdpov three hundred talents of tribute, dbo korbAcu olvov a pint of wine.

561. Genitive or DESIGNATION: 7d dpos Tis *lorévns the mountain of Istone, / ~ ‘ : ° . . . ueya xpiiua ovds a (great affair) monster of a wild boar. This construction is chiefly poetic: Tpolys wroAleSpor city of Troy, Savdrou rédos end of (life, i. e.) death.

562. GENITIVE OF PossESsION: oikla watpds a father’s house, of xjmot rod Bactréws the gardens of the king, ta Svevvéowos Bacirea the palace of Syennesis, td icpdy Tod *ArdAAwvos the temple of Apollo.

For the omission of a word in phrases such as és 8:3acKdAov to the teacher's (house, school), év“ASov in (the abode of) Hades, é& *AréAAwvos from Apollo's (temple), see 509 B.

563. GENITIVE OF CONNECTION: kéuara Tis Qaddoons waves of the sea, i Kpyms Tod Telxous the foundation of the wall, 4 rod meidew Téxvn the art of per- suading, épa aplorov time for breakfast. It is used especially with words which imply

a. Connection in Family, Society, State, Army, etc.: 6 THs BaciAéws yuvau- nds Gdergds the brother of the king’s wife, oikérns Annoodévous a servant of De- mosthenes, ératpos Kiuwvos a companion of Cimon, Bactreds Maxedovias king of Macedonia, of pidror(mor€utor) Kipov the friends (enemies) of Cyrus, of KXedpxou otpariarat the soldiers of Clearchus.

For the frequent omission of vids in phrases like *AA¢Eaydpos (6) SiAlamov Alexander (the) son of Philip, see 509 B. ,

b. The genitive after the neuter article (with indeterminate subject, 496) is usually to-be regarded as a genitive of connection, though sometimes denoting ~ possession: 7d Tis wéAews the eer of the city, rd ris Téxvns the (business) of the art, 7d rijs dAvyapxtas the (constitution) of the oligarchy, r& rav Supaxoctopy the (resources) of the Syracusans, &inra Ta Tay ToAeuwy uncertain are the (issues) of war, de? pepew Ta Ta Seay we must bear the (ordering) of the gods. In some such cases, the neuter article has little force: 7a ris Wuxijs (the soul with all + ~ that belongs to it) nearly the same as 4 Wuxf.

7 . ; ‘

564. Genitive SupsectivE: 6 od8os trav woreutwy the fear of the enemy (which they feel), 6 ra:wvos tGv tpecBurépwr praise of older persons (which they give), 4 wopela rod Bactdéws the march of the king, Aaumpdérns Tod orparedpa- ros the brilliancy of the army, Td edpos Tov morapod the breadth of the river.

565. Gentrive Opsecrive: 6 éBos tv modculwy the fear of the enemy (which is felt toward them), éravos ray mpeoBurépwr. praise a, older persons (which is given to them), ééraois ray ‘EAAhver a review of the Greeks, 6 bAeSpos Tay otpatiwray the destruction of the soldiers. 7

Other prepositions are often to be used in translating: Seay ebyal prayers to the gods, 4 tay Kpeioodvewy Bovdcla servitude to the stronger, &popyh Epywy oc- rasion for actions, etvoi tav plrwv affection for one’s friends, éumeipia tev TO- AcuiKay experience in the affairs of war, éyxpdreia idovijs moderation in pleasure, avers Sexes release from death, axdoracis Tay "AXnvalwy revolt from the Athen-

| GENITIVE WITH VERDS, 229

adkdoons power over the sea, amdBaots Tis yiis a descent wpon modit@y (with violence toward the citizens) im spite of the Genitive or CAUSE: ypaph KAoTis an impeachment for theft, Revopar- os :*AvdBacis Xenophon’s Anabasis (by Xen. as author), poet. Nérov kipara waves raised by the south wind.

667. Gunitive or Measure (Extent, Duration, Value): morapds edpos mré- _ Spov a river of one plethrum in breadth, rpidv hucpav 656s three days’ journey, — piaSds rerrdpey pnvay four months? pay, TpidKovTa TaAdvTwy ovcla a property of thirty talents, xiAlwy dpaxudy dien a suit for a thousand drachmae.

_ 568. The GENITIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC so frequent in Latin (vir swmmae pru-

dentiae) is rare in Greek prose, and scarcely found except as a predicate-geni- tive (572): gor: rodrov rod rpdrov, Tis abriis yyduns, Tov adlrév Adywv he is of this character, of the same opinion, he uses the same language, poet. 6 Tijs jov-

xias pees a uife of peli a quiet life, poet. réAuns mpéswroy a front of acity = an audacious front.

569. Two Grnirives WITH ONE SussranTive. The same substantive

may haye two genitives depending on it, usually in different relations : wav avSpdhrov dé0s Tod Savdrov (f and g) men’s fear of death, id thy rod | ayeuov trwcw Toy vavorylwy (f and g) because the wind drove the wrecks out to sea, trou Spduos huepas (f and i) a day's run for @ horse, Atovicov mpecBu- | ay xdpos (d and b) a Dionysiac chorus of old men, Revopavtos Képov *AvdBacts ' (hand f) Xenophon’s Expedition of Cyrus.

Genitive with Verbs. 570. The genitive sometimes appears to be connected with a verb,

' when it really belongs (as genitive of connection) to a neuter pronoun or __ a dependent sentence :

;

; 4 TovTO jpav pddiora Savud Couey for this we most admire you (lit. this of you "+ we most admire), ri 3¢ trmwy ote: but of horses, what think you? & SiéKe Aio- [ - xlvns rod Ynpiouaros tar’ earl the points which Aeschines impeaches in the ‘ decree, are these (lit. which points of the decree), dyvootuey GAAHAwY 8 Tt A€yo- [ pev we misunderstand each other's language, rod oixdde wA0d Stecxdmovy Sry Kopt-

| *aShoovra touching their homeward voyage, they were considering (this question) by what course they should return.

571. Gunirive as Supsecr. The genitive (used partitively) is sometimes found as the subject of an intransitive verb:

o> ov mposhier mor THS apxis I have no part in the ,government (lit. to me be- _ longs not of the government), év dAvyapxia wévnow ob péreots cvyyvduns in an oligarchy, poor men have no share of indulgence, odt améSavoy abtay wAhy ef Tis

énb Teycarav there were not slain (any) of them except some one (slain) by the Tegeans, émmeyvivar tpacay opay xpos Kapdobxous they said that (some) of their > had intercourse with the Carduchians. In such cases the genitive might ° _ be regarded as depending on an omitted form of 71s.

,

Ed Sah Deg 5 Be Ly Sy Fd eS

2. Guntrive AS Prepicare. With verbs of incomplete ication (490), the genitive is often used in place of a predi-

s

230° GENITIVE WITH VERBS. [572

cate-noun. The subject (or object) of the verb is thus brought into various relations with the genitive,—relations which cor- respond to those in 558. Thus we have the PrepicaTE-GEnIriIvE

a, PARTITIVE: of @eccado) rav ‘EAAhvey foav the Thessalians (were of )

belonged to the Hellenes, ety Evxpdre: rev tpidnovta yevéosar it was in the.

power of Hucrites to become (one) of the thirty, Zorw 4 TWdAos Tis Meoonvidos more ovons ys Pylus belongs to what was once the Messenian land.

b. or MATERIAL: 7d retxos AlSou werolnra the wall is made of stone. -

¢. OF POSSESSION: 7 oikia Tod orparnyod éyevero the house became the gen eral’s (property), éavrov elvas (ylyvecdat) to be (become) one’s own man = one’s own master.

d. or CONNECTION: 7d TOAAG GroAwAcval Tijs HueTepas Guerelas ky Tis Sely Sixalws that many things are lost, one might justly regard as (the fruit) of our neglect, rd vavTikdy Téxvns earl the navy is (a thing) of art.

The predicate-genitive of connection is especially used to denote birth or origin: Aapelov xat Tapvodridos ylyvovra: matdes dt0 of Darius and Parysatis are born two sons, @ovxvdldns oixlas (réAcws) weydans jv Thucydides was of a great house (city).

e. SUBJECTIVE: 6 Adyos Anuoodévous eat the speech belongs to Demosthenes. The genitive in this use is often connected with an infinitive, and denotes one whose nature, habit, or duty, it is to do something: moAlrov ayaSod voulerat Sappety it is considered (gg the part) of a good citizen to be courageous, 7d Te aicxpa eiddra ebAaBeioda copod Te Kal adppovos Expive to know and shun what is shameful, he judged (to be the part) of a wise and discreet man.

f. OBJECTIVE: ob THY KaKodpywy olkTos, GAAX Tis Sikns compassion ts not for the evil-doers, but for justice.

g. OF CAUSE: % ypaph KAomijs jv the impeachment was for theft.

h. or Measure (Hetent, Duration, Value): él roy Evppdrny worapdy, bv- za Td edpos TeTTdpwy TAESpwr to the river Huphrates, being (of) four plethra in breadth, jv éraéy as tpidxovra he was (of) about thirty years old, 7d tiunud éo- Tt Td Ths xdpas ELaxisxiAlwy rardvrwy the rateable property of the country is (of ) siz thousand talents. ‘

For the predicate-genitive of CHARACTERISTIC, see 568.

GENITIVE AS OBJEOT.

573. Many verbs, which in Latin or English would take the accusa- tive, have the genitive in Greek, because the action is regarded as belong- ing to the object, rather than as falling directly upon it. Many verbs vary in their construction, see 544 ¢.

The relations, expressed by the genitive with verbs, correspond, for the most part, to those of the genitive with substantives.

574, The genitive is used with verbs whose action affects the object only In PART (compare Genitive Partitive). Such are verbs of sharing (having, giving, or taking, part of something), touching (which affects only the surface), aiming (seeking to touch), enjoying (more or less of something), ete. Here then belong

a, VERBS OF SHARING: dySpémrov Wuxh Tod Selov peréxer man’s soul has — part in the divine (being); 80 petaAapBdavw to receive part, meradldam to give

part (17js Actas rit of the booty to some one), xowvwvéw to participate, and the like. — a

GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 231

pb. VERBS OF TOUCHING, TAKING HOLD OF, BEGINNING: aupds for Svydvra dSds nalerSau it is possible that one touching fire should not be burned imme-

ely ; 80 G&rropat, Watw, to touch, Exoua to on to, be close to (rijs méAcws /)s ris RN emirapBdvoua, to take hold of, &pxopou to begin (rijs mau-

The same verb may have an accusative of the person, and a genitive of the . , touched: ZAaBov ris Cévns rv Opdyrny they took hold of Orontes by the girdle. So too, with verbs in which touching is only émplied: w&yet rijs ivlas roy _ trrrov he leads the horse by the bridle. The genitive of the part touched is seen also in xareayévan (ouvrpiBiivar) rs keparjjs to have one’s head broken (bruised), y ¢. VERBS OF AIMING, REACHING, ATTAINING: oroxd(ouat to aim at (rod oko- _ mod the mark), dpéyouc to reach after (trav &dAorplov the property of others), e&- — (eg-)ixvoduae to arrive at, attain (rév nadav what is honorable), rvyxdvw to hit upon, obtain (rév &sAwy the prizes), Awyxdvw to get by allotment, and in poetry kupéw to light upon.

d. VERBS OF ENJOYING: GroAatw to enjoy (Tar peyloTwy dyaddy the great- est advantages), evwxod Trot Ad-you feast on the discourse, évds avBpbs eb ppovt- gaytos Todo) ay arorabociay from one man who has thought well, many might receive profit.

e. Other Verbs, when their action affects the object only IN PART: toy iuerepwy eno) Hiddva1 to give me (some) of your property, AaBdyres Tod BapBapixod orparov having taken (part) of the barbarian army, adinot rav aixuareétov he releases (some) of the prisoners, rijs ys @reuov they ravaged ( part) of the land, mivew olvov to drink wine, but mivew otvov to drink some wine. :

575. The genitive is used with verbs which signify fullness or the contrary (compare Genitive of Material), i. e. with

Verzs or PLENTY AND WANT: tluranu, tAnpdea, to fill, TAHI@, yéuw, to be full, S€ouon (Set por) to want, ra Sra evewAnoay Saiovias copias they filled their ears with divine wisdom, Pirurmos xpnudtoy eirdpe Philip had abundanee of treasure, ov xpuclov mAouTEiy, GAAG (wijs &yadijs to be rich, not in gold, but in a good life, cecarypévos wrovrou thy Wuxhv having his soul glutted with wealth ; —roaay évéde: abt@ he lacked much (provision), ot ripavvar éxatvov o¥rote onaviCere you tyrants never have a scarcity of praise.

Here belong expressions such as éuedtoan Tod véxtrapos he became intoxicat- ed with the nectar, 4 wnyh pet pada Wuxpod Bdaros the spring runs with very cold water.

a. The active 5éw, as a personal verb, is found only with genitives of quan- tity, roAAod much, dAtyou, pucpod, little, roxobrou (also tocotro) so much: rocob- Tov déw karappoveiy I am so far from despising ; also impersonally, roAAod det obrws clvar it wants much of being so. With omitted de?, dAfyov and puixpod have the force of adverbs, meaning almost: mrwxobs Spas dAlyou mdvras thou seest that nearly all are beggars. After a negative sentence, 008 dAlyou Se? has the meaning, (nor does it want little) far from it ; so ob5& moAAod Sei (nor does

it want much, but rather every thing). for participle d€wy in designations of number, see 256.

_ 576. The genitive is used with many verbs which signify an _ action of the senses or the mind (compare Genitive of Connec- _ tion) i, e. with |

_ YVeres or Sensation anp Mentat Action: dxodw, &xpodoua, to hear, yeto- _ pot to taste (act. to cause to taste), drppatvouor to smell (for verbs of touching,

232 GENITIVE WITH VERBS. [576 4

see 574-b), aicSdvouat to perceive, mimyhoxoua to remember (act. to remind), érv AavSdvouat to forget, were pol tivos I am concerned for something, werapérc jot twos I repent of something, émsédouan to take care of, évtpémoua to regard, dimedéw to neglect, drvywpéw to think little of, épdw to love, émiSuuéw to desire, newdw to hunger (xpnudrey for property), Subdw to thirst (érkevdepias for freedom), meipdoua to make trial of, muvddvoucs to be informed of (by inquiry)more comm. with the accusative.

a. Many of these verbs vary in construction: d&otdw and a&xpodoua to-hear usually have the thing heard in the acc., the person heard in the gen. (perhaps gen. of source, 582): dover toy Adyov to hear the discourse, but &kovew Tod didacxdAov to hear the teacher.

577. The genitive of cause (566) is used with

a, VERBS OF EMOTION: Savud(w oe Tijs cwppooivns I admire thee for thy discretion, cvyxalpw tav yeyevnuéver I share the joy for the things which have occurred, Tovtous oikrelpw tis wyav xadkerfjs vécou I pity these for their very severe sickness, Gv ey gor ob pSXovhow (for which things I shall not envy you) which I shall not grudge you, Hm. xwéduevos yuvainds angry on account of a woman.——Here belong also éraw ’AAgzavdpov ris els Toy Eratpoy alorews 1 praise Alexander for his confidence in his friend, roo® dy oddels evdixws wewpat- 7d pot for this no one could justly blame me, ebdatmovicew tive Tdy byadar to congratulate one on his advantages, cvyyryvécKe abtois xp) THs émiuplas it is right to forgive them for the desire.

b. VERBS OF JUDICIAL ACTION: KAomis ypdpecdat alaxpdy to be impeached for theft is disgraceful, pdvov Siéxew to prosecute for murder, pedyer mapavduwyv he is indicted for an illegal resolution, amépuye kaxnyoplas he was acquitted of slander, EdAwoay mpodoclas they were convicted of treason, Sépwy ddbdeiy to incur a charge of bribery, woAAGy of Tarépes wndicpod Idvarov Karéyywoar our fathers passed sentence of death against many persons for favoring the Persians.

@avdrov, used with such verbs, is a genitive of value, giving a measure of the judicial action: of “Epopa: tov Spodpiay irfjyov Savdrov the Ephori impeach- ed Sphodrias on a capital charge.

Rem. c. To these, add VERBS OF CLAIMING Or DISPUTING: werarolodyran dperas they make pretensions to virtue, obx dytimoiodmeda Baoir? ris dpxqs we do not contend for the sovereignty against the king, Evtpormos hpdiaBhrnoey *Epexset ths TéAcws Humolpus disputed with Erechtheus the possession of the city.

578. The genitive of value (567) is used with

a. VERBS OF VALUING, BUYING, SELLING: 6 5odAos wéyre prov tiara the slave is valued at five minae, rodAdod oveiosar to buy at a great peice, raddyrov &moddc8a to sell for a talent, oixta w8' wvdy Sroneimevyn a house mortgaged for 44 minae.

b. Sometimes with other verbs: xpyudrwy émixoupeiv to help for oney, of — rbpavyor mood pirAakas Exovor the tyrants have guards for pay, wécov BiddoKe — for how much does he teach? mpowérorm tijs mapavtika xdpitos Th THs T4hEws mpaypara the interests of the city have been sacrificed for immediate popularity, — Thy Tapavtina éamlda ovdevds GAdTTecdat to exchange the hope of the moment — for nothing. : ~

Rem. c. The thing valued is rarely put in the gen. (of cause): Swxparns ovdéva THs cvvouaias apyipioy empdrrero (553) Socrates for his society demandea money of NO Or. #

oe

a 233

. The genitive is further used (as an ablative case) to

.

Oe a ae

. that rrom which something is separated :

pb. that rrom which something is distinguished ; ¢, that rrom which something proceeds.

It is used, therefore, with

‘680. 1. Verzs or Separation, i.e. verbs which imply removing, restraining, releasing, ceasing, failing; also sparing (refraining from), yielding (receding © y ig parame others: 4 vijcos ov word diéxet THs Hrelpov the island is not far distant from the mainland, ci Saddrrns elpyowro if they should be excluded _ from the sea, Exet ros woAculous THs eis Td mpdadev wapddov he keeps the enemy _ from advancing further, xpeGv jrevdépwoe he freed (men) from debt, BobaAov Guaprnudrwy Kadapedew wish to be clear from faults, ei karadvey weipdoerve TOd-" tov ris apxns if ye shall try to put this man out of his command, AwpG rijs ddvns Kal yeynde ct rests from its pain and rejoices, epebadn THs éAmidos he was disappointed of his expectation, tév cwpdrov apedioaytes Eatnoay tpdmaa _ having been unsparing of their bodies, they set up trophies, ris opyfs avévres - vesigning their anger, Tis tTév.‘EAAhvwv édevSeplas wapaxwpicu birlrrm to surrender the freedom of the Greeks to Philip. 5 a. Verbs of depriving sometimes take a gen. of separation (instead of the ace., 558): Tay tAAwy &patpodmevor xphuara taking away property from the rest, | abcwy amearrépnose; ovx) Saxéas; ob TvAas; of how many things have you been |. bereft? of the Phocians, have you not? of Thermopylae ?

581. 2. Verss or Distinction, Superiority AND INFERIORITY: Siapeper wap- TOAY pasov wh wardvros one who has learned differs altogether from one who has not, “Eppoxpdrns tivecw ovdevds érclrero Hermocrdates was (left away from) second to no one in understanding (in 4 &perh Tod TAASovs weprylyverar courage gets the better of numbers, ef tis Erépou mpopeper eriarhun if one 2s more advancea | than another in knowledge, the gen. is probably owing to the preposition in the ‘compound verbs). This construction is frequent with verbs derived from com- parative adjectives: tiwats todTwy érdcoverre?re in honors you had the advantage over these men (but wAcoverreiy Tay Tiuay to have more of the honors, gen. part.), ~ berepiCover tav mporyudrwy they are (later than) too late for their affairs, qrra- oea tay éxSpay (also imd tay exSpay or Tois exports) to be worsted by their ~enemies; vixaoda to be vanquished has the same constructions as 7rraécSa. _ ——Add further i a, VERBS OF RULING AND LEADING: Sefoy rd edeAdvrwy &pxewv tt is divine to _ govern willing men, *Epws raév SeGv Bacircver Love is king of the gods, MoAunpd- _ ans Sduov érupdvve: Polycrdtes was tyrant of Samos, Aaxns imréwy éorpartyet _ Laches was general of cavalry, Mivas rijs Saadoons expdrnoe Minos became master of the sea, Xeipleopos iyyetro Tod orparetparos Chirisophus led the army. The gen. with these verbs is perhaps more properly explained by 563, 573.

582. 3. Other Verbs, to denote the Source: tadra dé cov ruxdvres but ob- _ taining these things of you, pdS< Sé pov nat rdde but learn of me also these things, _ émuySdvovto oi ’Apkddes tay dud) Revopdyra, tl rd wupd KatacBéceay the Arca- dians sought to learn from those with Xenophon, why they extinguished the fires. Tn the above cases, the gen. might be regarded as depending, not on the verb, but on the acc. or sentence which forms its direct object (570); in other cases, it might be taken as gen. absolute with a following participle (593): € yryra gkeis €uod PIeyyouevou if you understand from my statement.

*

234 GENITIVE WITH VERBS. WITH ADJECTIVES. [582

a. In poetry, the genitive of the source is sometimes used with passive participles and verbals, to denote the agent: oparyels AiyleSov slain by Aegis- thus, pwrds irarnuevn deceived by a husband, nelvns didanré taught by her, piror &karavros unwept by friends.

583. Compounp Vrerss. Many verbs compounded with a preposition take the genitive, when the preposition, used by itself in the same sense, would have that case:

apdnerrat Ths ’Arrichs dpn meydaa in front of Attica lie great mountains, émiBayres Tod Telxous having mounted the wall, tmepepdynoay rod Adov they ap- peared over the ridge, bwepdixetv rod Adyou to plead for the principle. Espe- cially many compounds of kard, which have the sense of feeling or acting AGAINST: xpi) wh) Karadpovely Tod TAHous we should not contemn the multitude, tls ovk By KararyeAdcetey Sav who would not deride you? 30 exSpav narayeddor- tat pov through enmity they attack me with falsehood, Aewxparns Kareyvdret airod mpodedoxévar Thy warpida Leocrédtes had convicted himself of having be- trayed his country, ta td tTpidKovTa GyapThuara éuod Karnydspouy they chargea on me the offences of the thirty, éviwy racay buas &xplrov Sdvarov raraynol- cacdau they persuaded you to pass sentence of death on some persons without trial.

Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs.

584. The genitive is used with adjectives which correspond, mm derivation or meaning, to verbs that take the genitive; espe- cially with adjectives

a. OF SHARING: wéroxos coplas partaking in wisdom, ioduoipos Tay waTp¢- wy having an equal part of the patrimony.

b. or PLenTy oR WANT: peortds Kaxdy full of evils, rAotcws ppovhrews

rich in good sense, réyns xpnudtwv poor in property, kevds émiorhuns void of knowledge. So the adverb dais enough.

Many compounds of alpha privative take.a genitive of the thing wanted: — tras appévey watdwy childless as to male children, &dwpos xpnudrwyr taking no —

bribes of money.

c. OF SENSATION OR Menta Action. Thus compounds of dxotw, éarhroos Adywy Kad@y listening to excellent discowrses, bwhkoos Tay yovéwy obedient to one’s parents. TupArds Tod wéAdrorros blind to the futwre, poet. tyevo'ros kakay

without taste of evils, durhpov tay nvdivev unmindful of the dangers, éryedys — opixpor attentive to little things, &reipos ypaypdrwy unskilled in letters, dtsepos —

Tav andyvrwy enamored of things absent. d. or ACCOUNTABILITY: alrios rovTwy accountable for these things, voxos

SeiAlas liable to a charge of cowardice, drddikos pédyvov subject to a trial for murder, — imetsuvos Tis apxis bound to give account of his office, btoreAhs pdpov subject to

payment of tribute.

e. OF VALUE: dkios éralvov worthy of praise, dvdtios ris wéAcws unworthy

of the city, yntos xpnudrwy to be purchased for money.

f. or SEPARATION: dppavds dvdpar bereft of men, éredSepos aidods free from shame, kadapds mdyrwv Tay Kax&y clear from all things evil, yupyds Tod odmaros stripped of the body. Some of these might be referred to b. .

g. OF DISTINCTION: didpopos tev AdAwy different from the rest, GAda TOP

Siucatwr things other than the just, érepov 7d 750 Tod dryadod the pleasant ts dif $

ferent from the good. Here belong Adjectives

4 ‘ 4 1

d : :

85. h. or THE Comparative Decrer. The comparative de- ‘takes the genitive: = | ieee | w Tod adeApod greater than his brother, Borepor adtxovro ris pdxns came (later than) too late for the battle (similarly rH borepale tis pdxns the day after the battle), rovr’ &o€Bnua erarroy tivos iyyciode (as less than at, do you consider this impiety) what do you consider as a greater impicty this? ovSevds Sebrepos second to no one, Soxe? elvar Aevxorépa Tod bvros, Tis ews she appears to be fairer than (reality, nature) her real, natural com- rion, Karadecorépay Thy Sdtav rijs éAmidos ZAaBe the reputation he obtained e short of his expectation, déta xpelrtwy Tav PIovobytwy a reputation (greater n the envious) superior to envy, mapoixynois ewixwduvorépa érépwv a proximity ore dangerous than (the proximity of) other men for ris érépwv wapouhoews. i. Multiplicatives (in -rAdowos and -rAods) have the same construction:

a ‘bros morAAatAactos tudy erorkeuhoapey we engaged in war with others many times more numerous than you.

586. a. When 7 than follows the comparative, both objects compared are usually in the same case: yphuara rept meiovos movetaSat 7) pidovs to consider money as of more value than friends ;—yet not always: dvdpibs

| duvatwrépov 7) eye vidv son of a man more powerful than I(am). For 7 between two comparatives, see 660 b. ’ b. The genitive is freely used in cases where #, if inserted, would be fol- lowed by a nom. or acc.; much less freely, where # would be followed by some _ Other case or by a preposition: a@SAiérepdy éort wh byiods cduaros (=} ph Byiet odpart) wh bye? WoxF tvvouety it is more wretched to live with a diseased : soul than (with) a diseased body, Bade eis thy eumeiplay waddoy THs dperijs 3 ( h eis thy &perhy) to look at skill more than (at) courage. _ ¢. The superlative sometimes takes a genitive of distinction, like the com- ‘parative: péyorros tay 4Adwy (greatest in distinction from the others, = pelCop | Tay tdAdov greater than the others), more properly uéyioros wdytwy greatest of a al, Similarly pdvos trav tAAwy = pdvos wdytwyv alone of all.

ms

My -

~ 587. The genitive is also used _ _ & with adjectives of Transtrivz action, where the corresponding verbs would have the accusative: dyads rijs ddiuctas late in learning injustice (uav- Mey Thy dduclay), Kaxodpyos Tay %AAwy doing evil to the others (kaxoupyeiv rods _. GXAous), piravarara: tay GAAoTplwy ready to spend the property of others, obu- yn 0s ToL TOVTOV TOU vduou associated with thee in voting for this law: especially _.___.b. with adjectives of capacity in ixds: mapackevao'rinds Trav eis Tov wéAcHOV qualified to provide the (requisites) for the war, didacKxariKds ypayparixis fitted to teach grammar, __¢. with adjectives of possrssion, to denote the possessor (562): xowds rae

_ tpidv belonging in common to. the three, tos (oixetos) éuod belonging to me alone, ; fepbs Tov “AmdAdwyvos sacred to Apollo,

_ 4d. with some adjectives of connection (563): tvyyevhs rod Kipou akin to ay axddovda GAAHAwY consistent with one another, dudvuuos Swxpdrous a namesake of Socrates.

_ __ @. with some adjectives DERIVED FROM sUBSTANTIVES, where the genitive _ wInay be regarded as depending on the included substantive: dpata yduou xipe for marriage (&payduou age for marriage), Téreuos rijs &periis perfect in virtue (rédos “Gperiis (perjoction. of virtue), poet. Sopdroy tardoreyo (= ixd oréyny Sopdror)

nder cover of houses.

“ bf

236 GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS. [587

f. with some adjectives of prace (589), but seldom in Attic prose: Hm. 2vavrlor orav "Axaay they stood opposite to the Greeks, Hd. émxapotas rod Mdy- rou at right angles to the Pontus. rae

GENITIVE wirH ADVERBS.

588. Adverbs derived from the foregoing adjectives, may have the genitive: dvafiws ris téAews in a manner unworthy of the city, duadepdvtas Tév dAAw dvdIparwv differently from the rest of men.

589. The genitive is also used with other adverbs, especially those of place.

It is generally to be explained from the uses in 590, 591, 559; but some- times from the ablative use of this case (579). mov yiis where on earth? ot mpocrharuser docryelas &vdpwmros to what a pitch of profligacy the man has come, evTds leet Tay opwy tueve he remained inside (outside) of the boundaries, etow (Zw) rod relxous HASOv they came within (without) the wall, rrnotoy (eyybs, poet. &yx) ToD Secuwrnpiov near the prison, xpdovev, Eumpoosey (bmigdev) Tod orpa- Tomedov in front Sey of the camp, duporépwder (Exarépwdey, Evdev Kad Evsev) ris 6500 on both sides (each side, this side and that) of the way, tym moTrapav up stream, ev3d Tis Paohdrdos straight. towards Phaselis, wéxpt Sedpo Tod Adyou to this point of the discussion, réphw coplas hxe he is far advanced in wisdom, anvika THs huépas at what time of the day? dpe tijs Spas late in the hour, ras xes THs youns in what state of mind are you? &xodaclay peveréoy ds Exet modav éxacTos huay we must flee from license, as fast as we can, each one of us (according to that condition of feet in which he is), ixav@s émorhuns eb he will be well enough of for knowledge, xwpls rod cdyaros apart from the body, erctdepos ovdels ears TARY Aids no one is free except Zeus, kpdpa TGV "ASnvalwv (in concealment from) without knowledge of the Athenians.

Genitive in Looser Relations.

590. Genitive or Piacr. The genitive is used in poetry to denote

the place

a. TO which an action BELONGS. The action is regarded, not as covering the whole extent of space, but as occupying more or less of it: vépos ad palvero mdons yatns no cloud appeared over (any part of) the whole land, ie rotxov rod érépoio he was sitting by the other wall, 7% ob« “Apyeos hey "Axaixod was he not (any where) in Achaean Argos? Séew wedtoro to run on the plain.

In prose, this construction appears only in the adverbs of place which end in ov: mov where, etc. (248), adrov there, duod (in the same place) together; and in a few phrases: érerdxuvoy tis 6800 they were hurrying them on the way, éropevorro Tod mpdaw they were proceeding forward.

b. From which something is srparareD: foracd_ Bddpwr stand off from the steps, imdyew THs 6500 to withdraw from the way. ;

591. Genitive oF Truz. The genitive is used to denote the time to which an action belongs.

The action is regarded, not as covering the whole extent of time, but as occupying more or less of it: juépas by day (at some time in the course of the”

;

: 4

i

or Causz. The gen, of cause is used

FLAC At)” B ATIONS (with or without interjections), to show the cause of feeling : ged tod avdpds alas for the man! 6 padpior opm Tis Savpaorhs vorew On y you for your wonderful nature! & Mdcedor, Sewav Adywv O fearful ate ! ris roxns my (evil) fortune !

: es the INFINITIVE With neuter article rod, to show the purpose of an m: Mivws 7d Anotidy Kadijpet x THs Saddoons, Tod ras mposddous uGAAov avrg Minos was sweeping piracy from the sea, Sor the better coming in to n of his revenues. See 781 a.

593, Gunitive Ansotutr. The genitive is used with a par- nle to denote time, means, wider condition, or concession.

a aie see 790. 2a ag

E. DATIVE.

_ 594. The dative is used to denote a, that ro which something is done (not the direct object) : Di My Dative of Inflience. __b. that ror which something is, or is done: = Dative of Interest. ¢. that wira which something is, or is done: Dative of Association and Likeness. ’ d. that sy which something is, or is done:

Bos ai Dative of Instrument, Means, Manner, Cause. ___ @, that my which something is, or is done: bar Dative of Place and Time.

ae The dative thus, beside its proper use, to denote the indirect object, Beene uses of an instrumental and a locative case, which in Latin be- ese to the ablative. The dative of the indirect object i is most amonly a patter, or a thing regarded as a person.

Dative of Influence.

595. The dative is used to denote that ro which aialeaNus Eine (not the direct object, 544): thus a with TRANSITIVE VERBS. The direct object stands at the same Done me accusative. But if the passive is. used, the direct object of peecmnen the ee of the ican while the dative remains un-

7) a Shee

238 DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. [595

pioddy SiSdvar (imioxvetcda, radrrew) rots orparidrats to give ( promise, ap- point) pay to the soldiers, diavéuew xphyara rots woAlraus to distribute treasure to the citizens, dogpdrcray wapéxew Tots piras to afford safety to one’s friends, emitpémew Td mpdrypara Tos eumeipordros to entrust the affairs to the most ex- perienced, xphuatra moddots detrei to owe money to many (persons), Bofdeay méumew Boiwrots to send aid to the Bocotians, réyew (Sinyetodat, ayyérrew, oveidiCew) TG Bactre? Ta wemparywéva to tell (relate, announce, cast up as @ re- proach) to the king what had been done. With the passive: BovjSem ereupry Bowrots aid was sent to the Boeotians, ra wempayyeva TG Bacidel ayyédrerox what had been done is. announced to the King.

(a) In some instances, the indirect object of the action becomes the sub- ject of the passive verb, while the accusative remains unchanged: of émrerpap- peévor Thy dudakhy those entrusted with the guard (for éxetvor ois émurérparran 7 gvaarh), XAAo Tt wetCov emiraxShoecse ye will have some other greater command imposed on you (for %AAo Tt pet(ov emiraxdhoera).

b. with INTRANSITIVE VERBS. Many of these express actions which in English are viewed as transitive, and connected with a direct object (544 b). eBxec8at Tots Seois to pray to the gods, elxew rots xpelrroo: to yield to the more powerful, dovdrcbew Hdovais to be a slave to pleasure, welSecSar Tots &pxover to obey those who rule, BonSe<iv rots ptAos to render aid to one’s friends, mpéret (mposhker) mor Aéyeww it becomes (belongs to) me to speak, apéoxew (amapéoxeww) ois tAAois to please (displease) the others, morevew (amiorety) rots Adyots to trust (distrust) the words. Especially with verbs denoting disposition toward an ob- ject: xaremalvew (dpyiferdar, Supodadat) TH wérAe to be angry toward the city, pxovely Trois wAovatos to envy the rich, edbvociv TG Seawdryn to be well-affected toward his master. '

c. with many apJEcrivzs, especially those denoting disposition to-

ward an object: ;

broxos Tots Seots subject to the gods, &mperhs orparnys unbecoming to a general, évayrtos Trois vdpos in opposition to the laws, plaos TG dyad a friend to the good man, dusueveoraros TH} wéAct most hostile to the city, xadewbs Tots &dicodat severe toward wrong-doers, émixtyduvos aot dangerous to all, ixavds trois ocdppocr sufficient to the wise.

d. sometimes with SUBSTANTIVES expressing ACTION: 7a map’ quay Sapa Tois Seois the gifts from us to the gods, h éuh TG Ses brnpecta my service to the divinity. The same substantive may have also a genitive, denoting either the subject or the direct object of the action: émavderacis uépous twos TE BAgyTijs Wuxijis an insurrection of some part of the soul against the whole, caradovrAwors tay ‘EAAhvev trois "ASnvatos subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians.

Datwe of Interest.

596. The dative is used to denote that ror which something is, or is done. It is connected, in this use, with verbs and ad- jectives; sometimes even with substantives. A thing or action may be regarded as subsisting for a. person,

a.. when it tends to his advantage or disadvantage. b. when it belongs to him in possession.

a

tidy 7 : : : - arVe, * oe 3 os 7 J s tr = r ~ a pais & yee: oa oe eee mS ee r : : Z sal

> merely feels an interest in it (ethical interest). ‘is the result of his 25 Cee en his interest is less definite than the foregoing. |. Darive or ApyanTaGe or DisapyanraGe (dativus commodi, in- ): Exaoros yeyévyrar rH warpld: each one is born for his country, Sdrwv - vduous EXnxe Solon made laws for the Athenians, orepavotcsa TG crowned in honor of the god, peydAwv mpaypdtrwv Katpol mpocivra TH opportunities for great affairs have been thrown away for (to the detri- ment of ) the city,—@ ai tots deomdrais dronelwevon Bddravor the dates reserved for the masters, copds éaur@ wise for himself, xphomos dySpdros useful for men, aBepds TG oayari hurtful for the body, eomdvifoy Tpopijis Tots modAois they

were in want of provision for the most, éamida exer owrnplas TH wéAe he has hope of safety for the city.

_ 698. 2. Dative or tHE Possessor. This is used with eiul, ylyvoua, and _ similar verbs: od tort xphuara juiv we have no treasure, mpoydvwy pupiddes | éxdore yeydvac. every man has had myriads of ancestors, bwdpxer rots wapotat 7 tay amdvtwy the possessions of the absent belong to those who are present.

ee verb may be omitted: 7@ rarp) MupiAduans dvoua (se. éorl, the father has yrilampes as his name) the father’s name is Pyrilampes.

]

tl __ a. The possessor is more properly expressed by the genitive (562, 572 c): _ the dative denotes rather one who has something for his use and service. _ b, The dative, in this use, is sometimes found in connection with substan-

4 tives: Hd. of opt Bédes their cattle, of ySpwro ey tov Knrnudtwv Tors Seors eit _ men are one of the possessions belonging to the gods.

vy

599. 8. Ernican Dative. The personal pronouns are thus used in the dative: | TovTy dv or mposéxere Toy vodv to this attend carefully (for me) J pray you, rh cot poS}ropa (what shall I learn for you) what would you have me learn? Gpwovedrepor yevhoovra duiv of véor the young will become ruder for you (you will _ find them becoming so).

_ 600. 4. Dative or tHE AGENT. With passive verbs, the agent is sometimes _ expressed by the dative (usually by imé with the gen.). In Attic prose, the _ only passive tenses often used with a dat. of the agent, are the perfect and plu- _ perfect: +a col mempaypuéva the things done by thee, éreid) wapeoxevacro rots - KopwStos when preparation had been made by the Corinthians, poet. raandis ay- Spero ody ciplowera the truth is not found by men.

_ . With verbals in réos, the agent is regularly expressed by the dative, see 805.

_ 601. 5. Dative or INTEREST IN LOOSER RELATIONS: Swxpdrns edéner Tints titws elvar ri) wéAex Socrates seemed to be worthy of honor (in relation to) from . _, the city, reSvnx swiv wdda is he long dead for you? Hm. rotow avéorn (for them) among them he rose up. Thus the dative may denote one in whose case _ something is true: drorauBdvew Set 7H rovodTw Sri edHdns earl in the case of | such a man, one must suppose that he is simple ;—or one in whose view some- thing is true: poet. 6 éoSAbs ciryevys euol y avhp in my view, the good man is — noble. _ a. In these constructions, a ParTiciPLe in the dative is frequently used, and often with omitted subject: juépa jv méumrn émimddovar tots ’ASnvatois it was the fifth day for the Athenians making their expedition, cvveddsyrt (or ds guverdytt) eirety to say it briefly (lit. for one to say it, having brought the matter to a point). The participle may denote the condition under which some- ing manifests itself: # diaBdyte roy morapdy mpds Eomépay 536s the route toward

~ a ;

ee ~~ oS

240 DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION AND LIKENESS. [601

the west (as it presents itself to one) after having crossed the river ;—or the feel- ing with which something is regarded: ylyvera: rodTo éu0) BovAouévy this takes — place according to my wish, émavéASapev, ef gor Hdomévey earl let us go back, if — tt is your pleasure to do so.

Dative of Association and Inkeness.

602. The dative is used to denote that wirm which some- thing is, or is done: thus |

1. with WORDS OF ASSOCIATION OR OPPOSITION: 6utAciy Tols KaKots to asso- ~ ciate with the evil, naradAdAdrrev wéAw tére to reconcile city with city, kowwvely — &AAos wévev to participate with others in toils, duoroyetvy &AAHAos to agree with — one another, tAnoid(ew TG Témy to approach the place, émecSau TE iyryeudu to follow the guide, dmavrav TG Zevoparti to meet with Xenophon, évruyxdvew rots mworeutois to fall in with the enemy, diaréyerdar TE SiBacndrAw to converse with the teacher, kepdoa thy xphynv otve to mingle the spring with wine, &dAov- Sos TH pice: consistent with nature, Kowwvla Tots &yaSots participation with the good,—pdxersa TUxn to fight with fortune, épllew (aupioBnrety, SiarywvilerSat) — aAAHAOLs to quarrel (dispute, contend) with one another, Siapépecdat Tots woynpots to be at variance with the bad.

a. So with PHRASES: "ASnvatots 51d. woAguov iévou to carry on war with the Athenians, eis Adyous (xetpas) 2pxeoSal tiv to come to words (blows) with any one. —

b. Here belong the apvurss dua at the same time, duod together, épetiis next in order: &ua TH huépg at day-break, 7d tdwp érivero bu0d TG WHAG the water was drunk along with the mud, rd robrois epetijs Huiy Acnréov we must say what comes next to these things.

603. 2. with WORDS OF LIKENESS OR UNLIKENESS. These are chiefly adjectives, or words derived from adjectives: of woynpo) &AAHAOs buo10r the bad are like one another, ov Set trov rovs Kaxods Tots ayaSots txew the evil must not have equality with the good, &rrucpevor hoay rots adtots Kip brdous they were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus, rotro mapardhoidy éort TE “AoTudvakrt, kar Zoucev ‘EAAnvixots Tad’ra T& dvduara this (name) is similar to Astyanax, and these resemble Greek names, 6 rdérmos re kad dudvupos euot my grandfather, and of the same name with me, ciynpos huiv @& you are voting with us, 7d duorody éavrdv tAAw pipetoSat éort to make one’s self like to another is to imitate, avo- potws &AAHAos in a manner unlike one another. .

a. In such cases, the form of expression.is often abridged (881): émotav rais dobAus elxe Thy éodira (for duolay rH tev SovdAay éoSHr1) she had her dress — like (the dress of) the female slaves. ‘

604. 3. with other words, as Dative or ACCOMPANIMENT: ets Kal trois ~ rots duvatrwtdros Kad dvdpdor mopevdpeda let us go with horses the most powerful and with men, of AaxeSamdvioi Te Te Kata yi oTpaTe mposéBardAoy TE Teixlopart Kad rats vavolv dua the Lacedaemonians attacked the fortification with their land- army and their ships at the same time. This occurs chiefly in mélitary expres- © sions, The intensive adrés is often used with this dative: 6 ‘Immlas mevraocl- — ous imméas ZAaPev abrots rots Sdo1s Hippias took 500 horsemen with their arms {the arms themselves, arms and all),

ee ee ee a or a ee eel

vs i aia mae

*»

4 5 w

605. Dative with Compounp Verss. Many verbs com- pounded with a preposition take a dative, depending, either on

-

epos ne or on the general meaning cial wi verbs compounded with év, ovy, fron with mpos, Tapd, Tept, bd:

y 2umoreiy th Wux§ to produce knowledge in the soul, wbyiphst for ve me (lit. judge with me, in my favor), éwéewro rots woAcuious they press- rd upon the enemy, & &daAots emiTmGpey that which we bring against others ound of) censure, mposicvar Ta Shum to come before the people, maploracsas a) TH to stand by (be present with) the man, wepimlmrew rots Kaxots Ul about) be involved in evils, imoxeioSau TG Upxovrt to be subject to the ruler. a. Many of these verbs take also the accusative (544 c); or use a preposi- on (often the same preposition repeated) before the object.

Dative of Instrument, Means, Rani Cause.

606. The dative is used to denote that ny which somethin _or is done. Hence the means or instrument by (use of of) oghich, the manner by (way of) which, the cause by (reason of) | which, something is, or is done, are put in the dative.

607. Dative or Mrans orn INSTRUMENT: ovdels Zravoy jdovais eet hoaro no Bis has gained praise by pleasures, ré pEéAAovTa, xplvowey Tos Mpoyeyeynuevols we judge of the future by the past, eyvdosnoe 7h axevij Trav Smrwy they were re- | ognized by the fashion of their arms, papydiees aréSave he died by poison, (nt- ata Sai Savdr@ to be punished by death, edéxovTo abrovs TH wéAer they received zy hem {by) in the city, BdAAew tive Mous,to throw at one with stones, dpdpev Trois pois we see with our eyes, Hm. rloeay Aavaol éuda Sdxpva coior BéAcoow the Greeks by thy arrows (be made to) atone for my tears. a, Hence the dative is found with xpdoua: to use (i. e. to serve one’s self ) 3 in Lat. the ablative with wor. A predicate-noun is often added in the same eas 8: TovTwy Tiol piAatiw éxpiiro he used some of them as guards. BY 608. Dattve or MANNER: Spdum jmelyovro they hastened (by running) On @ Tun, wavtl rpdry weipagducda we will try (by) in every way, TUXN &yad KaTap- xéTw let him begin with good fortune, rorAAR Kpavyfh emlacr they advance with ‘ oud outcry, &rede? rH viien aveornoay they retired with their victory incomplete. shen by force, Soreibly, ovyn silently, orovd hastily, earnestly, yéver“EAAny a , cele by descent, diac nards evil by nature, Odiparos évduart Thapsacus by ‘name ;—and many forms with omitted subject (509 a): tatty (éxelvn, #, 7h) “this (that, which, what) way or manner, idle (Snuocia, now) by individual (public, common) action or expense. Often with the idea of accorpINe 70 : Ti uh ele according to my judgment, tobrp TH Adyy according to this statement, aandela in truth, 7G ovr in reality, Epye in act, in fact, Adyp i word, in fearon T €t in pretence.

it Dative or Respect. The dative of manner is used to show in what par art lar are or respect something is true: diapépew (mpocxew, AclweoSat) (neyédet, xphuact, ppoviicet) to be distinguished (superior, inferior) im er (size, a; sense), inxdew TG oduart to be strong in body, Tas Wu- ephoueré oTEpor Jirmer in their spirit, 1d mpdrresy Tod A€yew borepoy dy TH oe TH Suvduer earl action, shang after speech in order, is chile it

11

242 DATIVE OF CAUSE, PLACE, TIME. [610

610. Datrve or Decres or Dirrerence. The dative of manner is used (chiefly with the comparative) to show the degree by which one thing differs from another : .

rérrapot pvais Zharrov less by four minae, Th Keparp pmelCwv (greater by the head) a head taller, moddais yeveats torepoy Tay Tpwikay many generations later than the Trojan war, Séxa erect mpd Tis év Barapive paxns ten years before the battle at Salamis. So, very often, the dative of neuter adjectives: moAA@ by much, paxpe by far, drtyy by little, etc., woArg xelpwy (also word xelpwv, 552) much worse, TS waytl xpetrrwy (better by all odds) injinitely better, rdo@ mar- Aov dy pucotacde how much more would you be hated? rocovty Hdiov (@ bow wAcio Kéxtnuat I live more pleasantly (by that degree, by which) in proportion as I possess more: and with the superlative, paxp@ apiorros best by far. .

Rem. a. In many instances, the same dative may be regarded indifferently as expressing, either the manner of an action, or the means of its performance: mapeAdety ovk Fv Bia it was not possible to get past in a violent manner, or by means of violence. :

611. Dative or Cause: modAdxis é&yvolg éEanaprdvopev we often err by rea- son of ignorance, pbBy amiardvoy they departed through fear, ovdels oddity mevig Spdoret on account of poverty no one will do anything. |

a. Many VERBS OF FEELING take a dative of the cause: odSev) ofr xalpets ds oirols &yadtois you delight in nothing 30 much as in good friends, 6 Seds Epyors rots Sixators Hderau the divinity is pleased with just actions, axSeodels TH avaBorAR vexed at the delay, TG ‘Exarwvipw xareratvoyres Tos cipnucvos angry with Hecatonymus for what he said, aicxtvoua rats mpdrepoy &maprlars Tam ashamed of the former errors, iyydray ty cwrnpla they were contented with their safety, Xareras pépw Trois wapovor mpdypact I am distressed at the present affairs.

: a q *]

Dative of Place and Time. | |

612. Dative or Pracz. In poetry, the dative is often used without a preposition, to denote the place 1n which something is, or is done:

‘EAAdS valwy dwelling in Hellas, MvAtoww: vatwv dwelling (in) among the Py lians, thy 7 o¥pect Téxroves tydpes ekéranov which builders felled on the moun- tains, ebde pixy Krolns he was sleeping in the recess of the tent, r6? buoow éxwv having the bow on his shoulders, &ypote: rvyxdver he happens (to be) in the country, ddots on the way.

a. Seldom thus in prose (mostly in reference to Attic demes): MeAtrn at jUelite, ra rpdraa rh Te MapaSéu nal Zarapive Kal Wrarauais the trophies at Marathon, Salamis, and Plataea. 3

613. Dative or Trem. The dative is used to denote the time in (at) which something is, or is done.

This applies to words for DAY, NIGHT, MONTH, YEAR: TH aith huepg the sam day, Thde TH vunrt to-night, tH borepaig on the following day, r@ émtdyrt pyvt 4 the coming month, terdprw ere (évavre) in the fourth year ;—also to Spat xewudvos Spa in time of winter ;—further to FESTIVAL times: tots *OAvutiots a th; Olympic games. To other words, év is usually added: év rotrw 7G xpovg (xatpG) at this time (occasion), év TG wapdvtt at the present time, év TG Tére at that time. When time is designated by words denoting circumstance or event év is rarely omitted: rf mporépa éxxAnotag (for év rH etc.) at the time of th former assembly : cf. poet. xexneple vérw at the time of the wintry south-wind.

243

Ee eetpcclsoia nities a twofold use :——a. In composition with they define the action of the verb, in respect to its direction —— pera words, connected with particular cases, they show the a words in a sentence, more distinctly than the cases alone ¢ eer _ The name preposition (mpdzeors) is derived from the former use. Such a ds, therefore, as dvev without, mrAnv except, évexa on account af, etc., rT ich have the latter use only, not being compounded with verbs, may called improper prepositions. ‘They all take the nite (cf. 589), =. ak as, which takes the accusative. .

615, All the prepositions were originally adverbs. Many of them are still used as such. in poetry, especial yin Hm.: zept round about, and, with ana- [strophe, « t exceedingly ; aby Sé and therewith. Hd, has ém) 3€ and thereu on, pera. 5é pie next, év 3€ or ey d& 5h and among the number; also mpds dé, kad pds, and besides, which occur even in Attic prose.

a. The preposition, in its adverbial use, may belong to a verb understood, and may thus stand for a compound verb : 80, even in Attic prose, é for é- €or! it is possible ; in Attic poetry, mdépa for mdpere to be present. Hm, has also » Mera, for trear, péreort, etc.: similar is the imperative éya up! (= dvd- Se. For retraction of the accent (anastrophe) in this case, see 102 a.

616. On account of this origin, the prepositions in Hm. are very free as re- -gards their position, being often separated from the verbs (tmesis, 477) or sub- _ stantives to which they belong: év 8 airds édvcero véopoma, xarKdy and he him- self put on the shining brass, Gud) 8& xatra Syots &lrcovra and round their Beer diers wave the manes. In Attic prose, the preposition is separated from its substantive only by words that qualify the substantive (487, 492): but par- icles such as peév,.3¢, y¢, ré, yap, oby, may be interposed after the preposition; pepaer oe very rarely: mapa yap oluat tos vduous for contrary, I suppose, the laws. — a For anastrophe when the preposition follows the word it belongs to, see eee Db. In prose, this is confined to wept with the genitive.

| Use of different cases with the prepositions. General Remarks,

i abh The accusative is used with prepositions, to denote the object

wds which motion is directed (551) ; or, in general, the object ¢o, on,

F over which an action extends (544).

ee genitive is used to denote the object from which an action pro- $ (579), in expressions of departure, separation, or distinction: also,

EL denots the object to which an action belongs (compare genitive with

have bs, 589; and seé 573). *

~ ane dative is used to denote the object in, by, or with which an action

akes place.

_ 618. The dative is properly used with prepositions, to express being, ai naining, IN & particular situation ; for coming To the situation, the

cusative i is used; for passing From it, the genitive: péver mapa T$ 5 Bact

i he remains (by the side of) in the presence of the king, inet map’ avrdp $ Con 1 to his presence, olxerau map avrod sa as gone from has presence.

as “ "

244 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [618

a. Verbs of motion sometimes have a preposition with the dative, to de- note a state of rest following the action of the verb: év 7@ worau@ erecov they fell (into, and were) in the river. So too, in place of a dative denoting rest, we sometimes have an accusative or genitive, in reference to a following or preceding state ef motion: ords eis wécor (lit. standing into the midst) coming into the midst and standing there, rots éx TldAov Anpdeiot to those taken (in, and brought) from Pylus, oi éx rijs &yopas Karadumévres TH via Epvyov those in the market left their goods and fled (from it).

General View of the Prepositions.

619. Prepositions used with only onzE case, viz. I. the Accusative: <is, as. II. the Genitive: dvri, dd, e& tp0,——also dvev, dxpt, pEexpl, éevexa, tAHV (614). Ill. the Dative: éy, ovr. . Prepositions used with Two cases, viz. IV. the Accusative and Genitive: dud, xara, trép. VY. the Accusative and Dative: dvd. Prepositions used with THREE cases, Viz. VI. the Accusative, Genitive, and Dative: dpi, emi, pera, maph, TEpi, TpOS, UTd. .

I. Prepositions with the Accusative only.

620. 1. «zs (also és) into, to; properly to a position im something (= Lat. in with the acc.), opposed to e€ owt of. Itis used a. Of PLACE: Sucedol é& *IraAlas b1€Bnoay cis SuceAlay the Siciili passed over from Italy into Sicily, eis Sicacrhptoy eissevar to (enter into) come before a court (of dicasts or jurors), Adyous woreiodat eis Toy Bipov to make an address to the people, eis tvBpas eéyypdpew to enrol among mem (write into the list of men) b. of trmME: eis vixra.(to) till night, eis huas to owr time, és ri (to what time) how long? eis évavrdy (to the end of a year) for a whole year, poet. éros eis ros from year to year. An action may be thought of as taking place when a certain time is come to; hence eis is also used for the time WHEN (613): édd- ket yap eis Thy borepalay Htew Baciréa for it was thought that on the next day the king would arrive, eis napdy in good time, és rédos finally. F c. of MEASURE and NUMBER: els Siakogtous to the number of 200, about 200, eis rérrapas to (the depth of) four men, four deep, eis dbvapww to (the extent of one’s) power, according to one’s power. : ¥ d. of AIM Or PURPOSE: xphowoy cis Tov méAcuoy useful (toward) for the war, eis Td5¢ HKowey (to this end) for this are we come. e In COMPOSITION: into, in, to. a Norr. In Attic prose, eis is the common form: only Thucydides (like Hd.) has és almost always. The poets use either form at pleasure. he a

621. 2. as (cf. 614) to, only with persons: a, : Hm. aied roy duotoy tye: Beds ds Tov Spotoy a god always brings like to like

IL, With the Genitive only. =~

1. dvré (compare Ep. dvra, dvrny; also dvrixpd), as a separate pre- n, lost its original meaning over against, opposite to (cf. év-avri-os) ; this gave the idea of counterpart, substitute, and hence the common : ing, instead of, for: ‘: ‘i

— Am. avr) nacvyvhrov kcivds ¥ ixérns re rérverat in place of a brother (equal- WN esteemed and aided) és a stranger and suppliant, dvt) Svnrod cdéparos addy _ arov dbiav GrAAdEacSan for a mortal body, to gain in exchange immortal glory. In composition: against, in opposition, in return.

623. 2. dao (Lat. ad, a, Eng. off) from, off from, away from ; prop- _ erly from a position on something :

a. of prace: Hm. a trmwy Garo xauaice from the (horses) car he sprang _ to the ground, a trmov udxeodou to fight (from a horse) on horseback. Dbz of TIME: Ga” éxelyns rijs juépas (from) since that day.

_&. Of CAUSE: airdvouos amd Tijs ciphyns independent (from) in consequence of the peace, amd tuvShuaros fret he is come by agreement.

__-Purases: amd oxorod away from the mark, without aim, amd rabroudrov 4 (rom self-moved action) without occasion, of itself, amb orduaros rAێyetv to speak

_ (from mouth, not from a thinking mind) by rote, of dad oxnvijs (those who act from the stage) the players. In composirion: from, away.

Rs 624. 3. ¢& (before consonants éx: Lat. ex, ¢) from, out of; properly from a position in something (627):

a Of PLACE: é« Sadprys petyer he is banished from Sparta.

_ »b. of time: é« waldwy (from children, Lat, a pueris) since childhood. ence of immediate succession: Adyov éx Adyou Aéyew to make one speech after ther, Um. kaxdy ek rarod evil after evil.

€. Of ORIGIN: é« marpds xpnorod éyevero he came of a worthy father. ce with passive verbs (instead of id with the gen.): timéodat & twos to honored by some one: the agent is then viewed as the source of the action ; construction is rare in Att., but frequent in other dialects. .

d. of INFERENCE: ex Téy rupdyrwy (judging from) according to the present stances, ek TOV SuoroyouLevwy euol Te Kal cot according to the truths ad- oth by me and by thee.

ASES: x Defias on the right hand, ét tcov (from equal ground) on an j, Oijoal (Kpeudoa) te Ex Twos to bind (hang) one thing on another. OMPOSITION: owt of, from, away.

4 Cc ia “te

4. xpé (Lat. pro) before: . Of PLACE: mpd Supay before the door. of TIME: mpd rijs wdxns before the battle. Of PREFERENCE: mpd ToUrwy reSvdvat wGddrov dy Erouro before these things ve would rather choose death.

_ d. of prorxcrion (for one’s safety, interest), a less frequent use: mpd mal- eadat to fight for one’s children (prop. in front of them).

ES: mpd oAAod Toretodau (to esteem in preference to much) to con. ble, important, Hm. mpd 6300 further on the way.

ITI0N: before, forward, forth.

GRE a eds 4, at ae 9 oat } 7 5 , { Teh cy 4 Y Siig > + “ , ‘ “e xte z oe PREP OSITIO NS AN ae ed ; etc Y - AND CASES. , ote ys es rey ’ = . y y 2 Creeley ee, Co erre RAR Pe aie ob) . Waa A ‘ ; a

es i

246 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [626

626. Inprorrer Prepositions (614).

5. dvev (poetic drep) without, Lat. sine.

6. mArnv except; often used as a conjunction, see Rem. r.

7. axpt, péxpt, until; often used as conjunctions (877, 8).

8. évexa (also evexey, eivexa, poet. ovvexa) has two meanings:

a. on account of, for the sake of (with gen. of the motive, Lat. causd): Tis byiclas Evena Xpwmedg TE iarp@ for the sake of health, we employ the physi- cian (cf. did with acc., 630 b).

b. as regards: doparas En, vend ye Tav cvnopayrayv he lived in safety, so far as the sycophants were concerned (without danger from them).

Rem. r. The adverbs peratd between, dSixa and xwpls apart (from), are often used as improper prepositions. On the other*hand, zAnv except is often used without a genitive, as a conjunction: poet. od dp’ ’"Axaiots &vdpes eiod wAhv Be (with the same meaning as wAjy rodde) have the Achaecans no men but this one ?

Il. With the Datwe only. 4

627.1. év (Hm. évi, év) in, = Lat. in with the ablative: o

a. of PLACE: éy Sadprn in Sparta :——with a word implying number, it — has the sense of among: éy rovras among these, év dhuy A€éyew to speak (among) ~ before the people.

b. of time: év robtm TG re in this year.

c. Of OTHER RELATIONS: éy TG Seg Td Tis udxns TéAos (in the power of) — with God is the issue of the baitle, év raparnevi} elvas to be in (a course or state of ) preparation.

PHRASES: év SrAois elvar to be (in) under arms, év airia xew Tw (to hold one in blame) to blame one, év dpyh exew tw to be angry with one, weipdoopmor év kaip@ oor elvan I will try to be (in good time) useful to you, év mposdhnns méper — in the (part) character of an addition, as an addition: also éy rots, rarely used to strengthen the superlative: éy trols mp@ros HAde he came first A all (i. e. ev rots €ASod01 among those who came), cf. 665a. For é with verbs of” motion (év xepol TiSévar to put in one’s hands), see 618 a. ;

In CoMPOSITION: in, on.

Nore. Rare poetic forms are iy, ¢ivt.

628. 2. civ (also iv, = Lat. cum) with, i. e. in company with, in connection with (cf. werd with the gen., 644): : : eradebeto oly TH AdeAPG he was educated with his brother, ov *AwérAr@n — éevixnoe he gained the victory with (the help of ) Apollo, civ véuw (in conformity) with law (opposed to wapd with acc., 648 e). . In composition: with, together.

IV. With the Accusative and Genitive.

629. 1. da through (connected with dvo two, di-ya in two, apart, Lat. di-, dis-, asunder: prop. through the space which separates two ob- jects). otag

did with the GENITIVE: a

a. of pace: Hm, 81d piv domldos FALE pacivijis UBpysov &yxos through the Bhining shield passed the stout spear. ae

: vy : + ) 2

.

.

eo un F ay the see (through) by means of the

hae: ¢ a stave of action or feeling: abrots did woAguov iévar to proceed (in ay of war) in a hostile manner toward them, dia pdéBwv ylyverdsar to come a state

t state », Rt SES: Bid ordpuaros %xewv to have in one’s mouth (passing through the ), Sie xerpay Exew to have in hand, did rax€éwy (by quick ways) quickly, us completely. Aid with the gen. often denotes, not the space or ne of the action itself, but that which separates it from something else: 5:0 waxpod after a long interval, Mecofyny Sid terpaxoclwy érav MéAAovot Karol Cew ti hey are about to occupy Messene after (an exile of ) 400 years, 5:& roAAGy tjue- ay 5308 at a distance of many days’ journey, 51d déxa émdrtewv whpyor joay at intervals of ten battlements, there were towers. yes an

680. dé with the AccUSATIVE:

| ° a. through, during, mostly poetic: Hm. 8:4 dduara through the halls, did _pbera during the night.

Bie, b. regulary) on account of (with accus. of the efficient cause, cf. vera, 626 ay dia Ti vdcoy xpducda TH iatpG on account of the sickness, we employ the physician. ‘

_ Purases: abtds 8° eavtdy by and for himself, 5: rl why, wherefore ?

- Incomposition: through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-): Siapépw = differo.

631, 2. card (cf. adv. xarw below) originally down (opposed te dvd). «ard with the GENITIVE:

a, down from: Hm, Bi 5 kar’ ObdAdpro10 Kaphywv he went down from the - heights of Olympus, T& xara yijs that which is (down from) under ground.

pa towards, down upon: Hm. rar’ dpdaApeov Kéxur’ &xAus a mist settled down upon his eyes, pépe kara xeipds twp bring water (to pour) on the hands. ence towards: eraivos nard twos praise (directed) towards one ; but “usually in a hostile sense, against: pevdeoSa: (Kane Aéyerv, udprupas mapéxeoSar) _ Kard twos to lie (speak evil, produce witnesses) against one. _ Purases: wéAw kar’ &xpas érciv to take a city completely (from its highest “point down), card vérov in the rear (of an army).

632. xard with the accusatiyE, down’ along ; passing over, through, or un- to; pertaining to, according to:

. a. Of PLACE: Kar& fodv down stream, xard viv Kal SdAaccay (over) by land

and by sed; Hm. Zeds %8n xara datra Zeus came down to the feast.

|b, of TIME: xar’ exetvoy roy xpdvov at that time, kara Thy eiphyny during the peace, of kaS’ jyas our contemporaries. __ & ‘Of OTHER RELATIONS: kaTd Todroy roy rpdmoy (according to) in this man- “ner, kare mdvra, in all respects, xara Stvapw according to ability, kard rods vé- “yous according to the laws, nat’ éué as regards me, xara Ulydapoy, tpirrov bSwp according to Pindar, water is best (of all things). __ 4, in pisrripurive expressions: Hm, kar& ida according to clans, each clan by itself, ward. rpeis by threes, three by three, naS juepay day by day, daily. _ In composition: down, against. Often it serves only to strengthen the meaning of the simple verb, and in many such cases it cannot be translated.

ve y*

533. 3. imép (Hm. also imeip) over = Lat. super. p with the GENITIVE :

nr

.

248 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [633 ;

a. Of PLACE: 6 ffAuos bwtp Huav wopeverat the sun journeys above us. b. in derived sense, for, in behalf of: pwdxecdat brép Twos to fight for one : ae over him, standing over to defend), 6 imtp ris marpidos kivduvos the peril) struggle for the fatherland ; also in place of: éy& bmp cod amoKpt- vovua I will answer in thy stead ; and on account of : imp rijs ahedeplag duas eddauorvl(w I congratulate you on account of your freedom. bwép in the sense of rept concerning is rarely found before Demosthenes: rhy itp Tov mo- Aguou youn Todbrny éxew to have such an opinion concerning the war.

634, drép with the accusative, over, beyond, of place and measure: Hm. brép ovddy éBhaeto he passed over the threshold, brtp Sivamyw beyond one’s ability. In composition: over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of.

‘V. With the Accusative and Datwe.

635. dvd (cf. adv. dvw above) originally wp (opposed to card).

avd, with the partivz, only in Epicyand lyric poetry, up on: dvd Tapydpe txpy on the summit of Gargarus, xpycég dvd oxhwrpy upon a golden sceptre.

é q 4 :

4

636. dvd with the accuUSATIVE, wp along; passing over, through, or unto (cf. xard with acc., 632): a. Of PLACE: dvd pody up stream, ava waicay Thy yy over the whole land, — Hm. ava orpardy through the camp. ; b. of TIME: dvd wacay Thy juépay (over) through the entire day. ; c. in DISTRIBUTIVE expressions: avd rérrapas by fours. j PHRASES: dvd Kpéros (up to his power) with all his might, avd Adbyor (up to) according to proportion, avd ordua txew to have in one’s mouth, to talk about — (ef. did, 629). : In composition: up, back, again.

j VI. With the Accusatwe, Genitive, and Dative.

Rem. The proper meaning of the preposition is, in general, most — clearly seen with the dative. ;

637. 1. audi (Lat. amb-) connected with dudo both: properly on © both sides of ; hence about (cf. mepi, 649).

| “4

&upt with the pativE, only Ionic and poetic, about, and hence concerning, — on account of: Hm, idpdoe: teAauav aud) orhdeoot the shield-strap will sweat — about his breast, Hd. dup) arddy ri Cuff welcoual ro concerning my departure, 1 d will obey you, poet. aud PdBy on account of fear. wie

638. aut with the cunitivE, about, concerning: Hd. &ud) rabrns ris wéAuos (about) in the neighborhood of this city, Siapépeodar aut twos to quarrel about something.

639. Gul with the accusaTIVE, about, of place, time, measure, occupation: dud) T& Spia (about) close to the boundaries, &upi rodroy toy xpdvov about this time, Gul ra éEjnovra about sixty (Lat. circiter sexaginta), duo) Se?mvov moveiy to be busy about the supper. . .

PHRASES: of Gudl riva a person with those about him, his friends, foll soldisirs, etc. ; hence even of éug) TAdrwva Plato, as head of a philosophic school.

In composition: about, on both sides. is

¥ y a WN, I. fateh 2 ve Vt Nap en Se ed F Ah leo Ny He Y : AL hee ey wh ery IX “ : i ‘ 4 ‘+

‘PLace: Hm, ém) x8ov) ofroy @ovres eating bread upon the earth, émt

) oixety to live (close upon) by the sea.

MME: ém) todrors after these things, thereupon.

-¢. in OTHER RELATIONS: én) rots mpdyuacw elvat to be (over) at the head of ém rots modeulors elvat to be (dependent upon) in the power of the enemy, xalpew to rejoice (on the ground of) on account of something ;——espe-

of the arm, on which an action proceeds: ém) maidelg roto Zuades in

to an education hast thou learned this ;-—-and the conpirion, on which stion depends: ém) réxots davel(ew to lend on interest, éx rot on this

_ condition. de

Be aie, 2 .

«641, éwt with the GENITIVE:

sa. of spack,——+to denote the place where: Kipos mpobpalvero 颒 &puaros

Cyrus aupeared upon a chariot, éx) rod ebwrytpuou (sc. xépws) on the left (wing),

ém) paptipwy in the presence of witnesses ;——or the place whither: ém Sduou

_ mdeiv to sail (upon) toward Samos.

Db. of time: ém Kpotoov &pxovros while Croesus reigned, ep judy in our

_ time, ém Kwvdbvov in time of danger.

__—-@,:-in OTHER RELATIONS: ém) Tijs dpxijis mévewv to remain in the office, Aéyew

_ énl twos to speak (upon) with reference to some one, ép éavrod oixeiv to live by

_ himself (apart from others), ém” dAlyor retaypyévor drawn up with little depth

_ (few men in depth).

Bi

642. emt with the accusartve, to (a position) wpon, unto: dvaBatvew ed? in- ‘mov to mount on horseback, éw) dekid. toward the right. _ ___Parases: én) road to a great distance, os émt rd oad for the most part, rd én éué so far as I am concerned. - In composition: upon, over, after, toward, unto. Often it only marks the _ action as going forth upon the object, and in many such cases cannot well be translated.

643. 3. pera (akin to pécos medius) a-mid, among. werd with the partive, poetic, chiefly Epic: Hm. “Exropa ds Sebs Zone per’

- avSpdo1r Hector who was a god among men.

644. werd with the Genitive, with, implying participation (cf. ctv, 628): _ pera Tay tuppdxov nwdvvetey to meet the dangers of battle (in common) with the allies, werd Saxpbwy with (amid) tears, yijpas werd wevias old age along with

4 poverty.

645. werd with the accusative:

a. to (a position) among or along with, poetic: Hm. idv werd e8vos érafpwr among the multitude of his friends, Hm. tby Soup) per’ Adrouédovra BeBhret

went with his spear after (in pursuit of ) Automedon.

Db. after (so as to be with something, and obtain or secure it), poetic: Hm. L pete TaTpds axovhy to go after (in quest of) tidings of a father, Hm. mérc-

Mies Swphacorro they were arming for war.

, & after, in TIME Or ORDER: meT& roy TeAorovyynoiaxdy wéAcuov after the Pes

loponnesian war, pera Seovs yuxh Seidraroy (after) next to the gods, the soul is (a thing) most divine.

_ PurRasEs: werd xetpas Exew to have in hand (prop. to take between the mds and hold there), wed” jjuepay by day (after day comes, begins).

ri

y

+ 7 HA

¢ ~~ @s : IP Ean rt aig

+

ie

250 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [645 q

In composition: with (of sharing), among, between, after, from one place to another (weraridéva: to put in a new place).

646. 4. wapad (Hm. also wap, mapai) alongside of, by, near.

mapé with the pative: Hm. rapd vyvol kopwrtor pimvd (ew to remain by (the side of) the curved ships, nad wap’ éuol ris éureipla éort with me too (as it were, at my side) is some experience.

647. mapé with the Gentrive, from beside, from, with verbs of moTion and those which imply recervine (outwardly or inwardly): Hm. émovooreiy mapa inav-to return from the ships (from a position by or near them), AauBdvew (wav- Save, rs! pots twos to take (learn, hear) from some one. Very rarely, and only in poetry, without the meaning ‘‘from”: varerav map’ "Iowhvov peldpav dwelling by the currents of Ismenus.

648. wapdé with the accusative, fo (a position) beside, unto ; also along by:

a. of PLACE: Hm. tae & adris trny rapa vijas but they two went again to the ships (to be by or near them), Hm. BH & axéwy mapa Siva Sardoons he went sorrowing along the sea-shore.

— b. of TIME: aap’ 8Aov rdv Blov (along by) during his whole life.

c. Of COMPARISON: Se? ras mpdkes wap’ GAAHAaS TIdévar we must put the ac- tions beside each other, compare them, mei(sv Tt mapa todto somewhat larger in comparison with this. . |

d. of CAUSE: Tapa Thy huerépay duérciay PiAuwros avterat on account of our neglect Philip is becoming great (prop. by it, in connection with it).

e. Of EXCEPTION OF OPPOSITION: @xouev Tt mapa Tadra AAO Aéyew beside this we have another thing to say, raph tov véuov contrary to the law (prop. pass- ing by or beyond it, trans-gressing it) the opposite of card with acc. (682 c).

PHRASES: mapa uixpdy by little, within a little, mapa pixpdy HASov Gmrovavely I came near dying, rapa word vinay to be (victorious by much) completely victori- ous, Tap obdty rociadat to esteem as naught,

In composition: beside, along by or past, aside, amiss.

649. 5. wepi around (on all sides, cf. dudi 637). -

mept with the pative, not frequent in Attic prose: a. of PLACE: Hm. éybduve wep) orhdeoat xitdva he put the mail-coat around his breast, Hm. wep) xijpi (about the heart) at heart, heartily. b. of cause: Hm. wep) ofo1 paxeduevos xredreco fighting (about) in de- fence of his possessions, ea wept TG Xwply they became alarmed for the place.

650. wept with the GENITIVE:

a. chiefly in derived sense, about, concerning (Lat. de): BovAebovrat meph Tov ToA€uov they are taking counsel about. the war, riva détay exes wep) Todt wv what opinion hast thou concerning these things ? ;

b. in Hm. (surrounding, and hence) swrpassing, more than: wep) wdvray Euwevar &AAwv to be superior to all others. Hence, in prose, such phrases as rep wodAov Toictosat to consider as (more than much) very important, desirable, rept odderds iyyciaSa to esteem (just above nothing) very low, think litile of.

651. wept with the accusative, nearly the same as &ui (639): mep) Atyur- tov about Egypt, in the region of Egypt; and in derived sense, wep) pirocopiapy omovddlew to be busily engaged about philosophy. ae

In Composition: around, (remaining) over, surpassing (with adjectives = Lat. per in permagnus). -

For Hmm. wépi as adverb exceedingly, see 615. = aes

‘ gee

xp Um slo npr or) a ob (ho fot of, ep in to mpd. . sen | with the pamrvE: an

a. at: 6 Kipos jv mpds BaBvady: Cyrus was at Babylon. Also with verbs tion (618 a): Hm, wor) 3& oxirrpoy BdAe yaly but he threw the staff on the d (80 as to be, lie, there);———and in derived sense: tov voty mposéxere Te apply your mind to this. be tn aatition to: mpds rovras in addition to these things, furthermore, _ mpds Tots &AAots beside all the rest. —

653. «pds with the Genrrive: |

a. in front of, looking towards: mpds Opduns Ketodar to be situated over against Thrace, 7 xpos éarépas tetxos the westward wall, cf. mpés with ace. ; _ —similarly in swearing : pbs SeGv before the gods, by the gods. So mpbs ma- _ pds (untpds) on the father’s (mother’s) side, xpos pwrarydpou elva to be on the _ side of Protagoras, mpés twos Aéyewv to speak on one’s side, in one’s favor, Hm. _ mpos yap Ards eit tetvor for strangers are (on the side of) under the care of Zeus. _ Often, to express what is natwral or appropriate on the part of some one: mpds | iarpod éort it is the way of a physician, od hv mpos Tod Kupov rpdmov it was not

according to the character of Cyrus.

% b. from (prop. from before, cf. rapd, 647): dABos mpds Seay prosperity from the gods ; sometimes used with passive verbs (instead of iad, 656 b): mpds Tivos pircioSat to be loved by some one (cf. éx, 624 c).

654. mpds with the aAccUSATIVE: a. to(prop. to the front of): Epxovra: rpbs nuds mpéoBers embassadors come to us, mpds Tov Sijwor ayopevery to speak to (before) the people.

a b. towards : mpds Boppay towards the north ; especially of DISPOSITION OF RELATION toward some one: miords Siaxsiodar wpds tive to be faithfully dis- posed towards one, mpbs Bactdéa orovdas roicicSa to make a truce with the king, dindeoSa: wpds Twa to carry on a law-suit against one,

c. with a view to, in reference to: pds Td éEavTG ovudépoy in order to his own advantage, mpds Tl us Tadr’ épwrds (to what end) for what do you ask me _ this? pds ratra (in view of these things) therefore, diapépew mpds aperhy to | differ in respect to virtue, ra mpbs roy méAcuov the things pertaining to the war,

mpos Td Gpyvpioy Thy edvdatpoviay Kplvew to judge of happiness (by reference to) according to money.

d PHRASES: mpds nSovhy, xdpiv with a view to please, gratify (one’s self or an- other), rpds Biav by (resort to) force, forcibly, mpdos dpyhy in anger, angrily, obdiv mpos éué it is nothing to me.

In composition: to, towards, in addition.

655. 7. ind (Hm. also imai) under = Lat. sud.

| ~ $d with the pative: itd 7G oipavg under the heavens, bwd 7G Sper at the

foot of the mountain, ix’ ’ASnvatos eivas to be under (the power of) the Athe- ; —s ee in Hm. xepotv bg’ juetépnow Grodoa (Troy) conquered (under) by our :

656, émé with the GENITIVE: a, of PLACE: imd yijs under the earth ;——hence in some expressions of _ DEPENDENCE: ba abAntav xopevew to dance under (the lead of) flute-players. _ But much oftener, under the working of a cause or agent: hence

_ bp. of aGency, with passive VERBS or those of passive meaning: timaoSas | tay modtay to be honored by the citizens, 4 mérs Eddw bwd THY “EAAhvwy the

a

*

oe, ;

252 ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE. [656

city was taken by the Greeks, woddo) &méSavoy brd THv BapBdpwy many died (were slain) by the barbarians. c. Of CAUSE: bd yhpws dodevys jv he was weak by reason of old age.

657. iwé with the ACCUSATIVE : a. of PLACE, prop. to (a position) wnder: Hm. brd réyroy éd0cero kuuaivor 7a he dived under the surging sea; used also in expressions denoting rest (618 a): bmd 7d Bpos nbAiCovro they were passing the night at the foot of the mountain. Hence, in derived sense, of subjection: méAeis Te kal Edvn bp EavTovs moeioSat to bring cities and nations under their power. b. of rmx (under a time either impending or in progress): dd ydera just before night (Lat. sub noctem); bxd thy vinta during the night. In composition: under, secretly, slightly, gradually. It is sometimes used where the idea wnder is foreign to our conceptions, and in many such cases can hardly be translated. :

ADJECTIVES.

658, For attributive and predicate-adjective, see 488. For agreement of adjective and substantive, see 498. For omitted subject, and use of adjective as substantive, see 509. For peculiarities in number and gen- der, see 511-23. For use of adjective as adverb, see 226, 228, For neuter adjective used as cognate-accusative, see 547 c.

Degrees of Comparison.

659. Positive ror Comparative. The positive may express a quality as disproportioned to the circumstances of the case, and may thus haye a comparative force :

hn xapa opicpa 5) ef ixavijs tora the territory, from being sufficient, will be- come small (i. e. too small, smaller than its inhabitants require), In most cases of the kind, an 1nrinitrve follows, usually with és or &sre: dAlyo: opty as éykpareis elya: avtay we are too few to have possession of them.

660, Comparative. The comparative degree may be follow- ed by a genitive, or by 7 than (see 585-6). ;

a. The genitive is always used, when the comparative is followed by a re- flexive pronoun: éray &y rin Kuvdbvy Got, TOAAG xeipov Eavtay A€youar whenever they are in any danger, they speak much worse (than themselves, i. e. than they do under other circumstances) than they usually do. Compare BéArioros éav- zou (best of himself, better than in any other state) in his best estate (559 a).

b. # is always used, when the two objects of comparison are adjectives: both of these are then put in the comparative: orparnyol mAcioves 2) BeAtioves generals more numerous than good, ovytoumtepoy 7) capéorepoy Siarexdivau to discourse more briefly than clearly.

c. # is used after the comparative, when the quality is represented as dis- proportioned to something: thus 7) kard with the acc., # or 4) as or } Ssre with the infin.: voworérns BeAtlwy 7) Kar’ &vSpwrov a lawgiver better (than according to man) than consists with man’s nature, pelfw } nara Sdepva memdvPacr they

258

igs too great for tears, BeArlous t) ind Bbpuv rapurpémea®ax too pauced by If ra Sdvapuy exer 2) Sore role atnatd aperciv he

ee r to serve “ Fete

1. # is sometimes irregularly omitted, when wAéov (wAciv) more or ZAarrov ov) less is followed by a numeral not in the genitive: Gmonrelvovor Tay ay: peloy wevraxootous they kill not less (than) 500 of the men. The same erbs, with or without #, may be used for any case or number of the adjec- ve: thus in the last example, pefoy = welovas; &réSavoy ode ~darroy (= eAdr- _ roves) ray elxoor there fell not less than 20, ev wr€ov (= TAgoow) } Siaxoctos rect in more than 200 years.

a

Giveste Pe MARA Ley : ; : _ 661. Instead of the genitive or the particle i, other forms are some- _ times.used with the comparative: | } aiperdrepds éort 5 Kadds Sdvaros dvr) rod. alaxpod Blov a noble death is more _ to be desired than (lit. instead of) a shameful life, undtv wep rAclovos ro.od mpd _ 0d dixalov consider nothing as of more account than (lit. before) justice, xewov | pelCwy rapa thy xaSeornkviay Spay a cold more severe than (lit. in comparison with) the ordinary season, mpbs &rayras Tovs &Adovs of Supaxdcior wAclw eropl- gato the Syracusans provided more than (lit. in relation to) all the rest, 6 wéAe- | pos ovx Srdwy 7d wACoy GAAS Samdyyns war is not a thing of arms so much as of _ expense (lit. not of arms more, but of expense). ;

; 662. The comparative is often used aBsoLUTELY, i. e. without any ob- | ject depending on it. Such an object may then be understood from the

connection :

__ aiperdrepoy 7d abvrapréarepoy the more independent position is more desirable

(than another less independent), uh tT. vedrepoy amayyeArets do you report any- _ thing newer (than we know already)? &wewdv éort bd Selov Kad ppovimov kpxe- aati it is better to be governed by a divine and intelligent being. Thus the comparative may signify MORE THAN OTHERS, MORE THAN IS USUAL Or PROPER, and may- be rendered sometimes by the positive with Too, QUITE, VERY: of go- pebrepa: the wiser, men of superior wisdom, ei Kat yedordrepoy ciety though it is rather a funny thing to say.

' 6638. Sureruative. The superlative represents a quality as belonging _ to its subject in a higher degree than to any other individual of the same class. ‘This class is most commonly designated by a genitive partitive _ (559 a), which may often be understood where there is none expressed.

_ But the superlative is also used without definite reference to a class, to ,. represent a quality as belonging to its subject in a very high degree:

_ aynp coperaros & very wise man.

-

. 664. Strengthened Forms. The superlative is strengthened by various additions, especially by a prefixed os or dri, less often 7 (in poetry also Gras): ds AAaxlorwy SetoSa to have the very smallest wants, brt pddrora as much as possible, br év Bpaxutdry in the shortest possible space, 4 pacra in the easiest manner. Sometimes és and 87. are used together: ut ds bri BéATioroy yevé- a8at that I should become as good as may be. The adj. pron. ofos has a similar Ise: 6p@ 7a mpdyuara ovx ola BéATiora byta I see that our affairs are not in the y best condition, tyros mdyou ofov Sewordrov there being a frost of extreme

6

254 PRONOUNS, PERSONAL, INTENSIVE. [664

a, These forms of expression appear to have arisen by incorporation and attraction (810-11): oftws Seioda, ds eAdxiord eort to want (things) in that way, in which they (the things wanted) are least, év robtp 8 Tt Bpaxdrardy éort in that space which is shortest, éut &s Todo 8 Tt BéeATioTéy éort yevéodar that I should become as that which is best, wdyou rowbrov oios devdrards err a frost of that sort which is most severe.

b. In such expressions, words denoting possrrnity are sometimes found

(but not with 8r1): dinyhooua ds dy divwpour 51a Bpaxurdrwy I will state in the briefest terms Iam able, ot Aaxedaui.dvior ofr hj avvordy perpiwtdre Tpépover the Lacedaemonians support life with an amount of bread as moderate as possible, rye orpariay Sony wAclorny edbvaro he led as large an army as he could.

665. a. The superlative is also strengthened by 54 annexed: péyoros 84 the very greatest. For éy rots with superl., see 627. A negative form of ex- pression may be used with emphasis: ode éAdxioros not least = very great {an example of /itdtes), The superlative may receive emphasis from the numeral cis: mAciota cis dvhp Suvduevos aperciv being able to render most aid (as one man, i. e.) beyond any other one man. ’ >

b. Sometimes uwdatora is added to the superlative: 8:2 robs vduous udAdwora péeyiorrol éorre through the laws ye are most of all greatest. So paddoy is some- times found with the comparative: aicxuyrnpérepos waAAov Tod déoyros bashful more than he ought to be.

666. The particrpLes never form a comparative and superlative, but —

take paddov, wdducra instead. This is the case also with many verbals in rds, and with some other adjectives. It is sometimes the case even with adjectives which usually form the comparative and superlative.

PRONOUNS.

667. The Pzrsonat Pronouns, when they stand in the

nominative, are emphatic; otherwise they would be omitted

(504 a): . |

kal od ber adtdy thou also wilt see him (thou as well as others). Yet they have little emphasis in some phrases, such as ds éyw a&xotw (ruvddvouat, oluar) as I hear (learn, think).

668. The pronoun o%, oi, etc., of the third person, is in Attic always reflexive (671a); instead of it, adrds is used as a personal pronoun: this also, when it stands in the nom.,isemphatic: eidov airqv I saw her, abris én (ipse dixit) he himself (the master) said it. ‘

669. InrENstvE Pronoun. a. Airds, in agreement with a substantive, is intensive or emphatic (= Lat. ipse): 6 dvjp airds or aitos 6 dvyp the man himself (538 b).

So with various shades of meaning: émorhun abrh knowledge in itself ( 4

its own nature); 4 yewpyla roAAd xad abrh diddoKner agriculture yard also (as

well as other pursuits) affords much instruction ; fryoduar thy jerépay woAwW abriy word Kpeloow elvor I believe our city by itself (atone) to be much superior in strength ; advo) dpyfducvor of orpariarau the soldiers being angry of themselves

a ae

ain ieee

5 intuence Bytes: er abrots rots aiyiarois on the toasts theme upon, close upon, the coasts); rérrapas vais ZAaBov abrois avdpdor : ‘ships, erews and all (604). It is ad by a peculiar idiom, with erals: éo7, t Nuclas rplros abrds Nicias was general with two third and chief)

tis ape emphatic when it stands by itself (in agreement word understood) ; in the nom. it is always so (668), and times in the oblique cases :

Bpacldas 7H OcocadGy yf Kal adrots (se. Tots Gece.) otros iv Brastdas WAS @ 2m to the country of the Thessalians and-to (the people) themselves, wrevo'r ov

» Ouiv) eis Tas Tprhpets adrois euBaor (you) must sail, having yourselves gone oard of the triremes, ody ofévre dmeri adrdy bvra (sc. ‘ ruvd) &AAous torely ei- it 1s impossible ( for one) who is careless himself to make others careful.

_ ¢, But usually, when standing by itself in an oblique case, ‘it: serves as a personal pronoun (668), or a weak demonstrative, | ae to a person or thing previously mentioned (491 b):

Ki maphoay ai éx TeAowovyjcov vijes, kal éx’ adrats Tludaydpas the ships ig ede joined Cyrus, and Pythagoras in command of them, ods 3&

| ae eBpicxoy, kevorddioy abrois érolncay such as they did not find, they made a

| ae Sor them.

Mor 6 abrdés the same, see 538 b.

» © 670. The RUrLExive PRONOUNS refer to the subject of the ‘ Egentance : : Ta dpiota Bovrcdeo Se tytvy adrots take the best counsel _ for yourselves.

=

' __ a, When connected with a dependent verb (finite, infinitive, or par- ticiple), they refer to the subject, not of the dependent, but of the prin- z pee! verb; and are then said to be INDIRECT REFLEXIVES:

yo 78 eis doa mpds TH Eavtav (yh) Hv, avelrovro they took up the wrecks, as many as were close to their own (land), 6 rbpavvos voutCer rods wodtras danpereiv faurg the tyrant thinks that the citizens are servants to him (lit. to himself), _ tovtwy iipte Kipos obx éavtgG duoyAdrray bvrwv Cyrus became ruler of these, _ though they were not of the same tongue with him.

} b. Sometimes, however, the reflexive pronouns refer, not to the principal subject, but toa dependent word: &m cavrod ce Biddkw from yourself I will in- struct you, (nrodre Tobs pndev kaxdy opicw abrots cuvedoras emulate those who are conscious (with themselves) ¢ in their own minds.of no evil, rov kapdpxnv @xeTo ’ papa &ywr mpds Tovs éavrod oixéras Xenophon went conducting the governor - _-of the village to his own people (the governor’s, not Xenophon’s).

% 671. The personal pronouns are sometimes used instead of the re-

“ Hlexive :

Bond por od« dmapdokevos elvar I (seem to myself to be) think that I am not

a hout preparation ; especially for the indirect reflexives: ody efew 6 tt

xen reve avT@ vouller he thinks that you will not know what to do with him.

__ a. The personal pronouns of the third person ( 08, of, etc. ) are in Attic

ot s used as indirect reflexives; but of and é are rare in Attic prose, and of dom emphatic : eyrAjuata érowitvro, brws opiow bri peylaorn mpdpacis ety

iv they were ph reat oharget, that they might have the greatest pos-

=a 0 4 4 x4 < - a ri r - ‘ “ - wz Prat oeeet ; “ 4 : Br A = ‘

256 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. [671

sible color for making war, A€éyera "AréAdwy éxdeipar Mapodtay eptCovrd. of neph goplas Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, when contending with him (Apollo) in respect to skill. > hs

b. In Hm., 0%, of, etc., are freely used as personal pronouns (= Att. adrod, ~fs, ete.): abréuaros 5é of jASe Mevédaos but Menelaus of his own accord came to him ; yet they are Often reflexive: yaorhp éxéAcuce €0 pyhoacSa avdeyKn the stomach requires one perforce to think of it. ;

672. a. The reflexive pronoun of the third person is sometimes used for that of the first and second: de? juds avepéoSar Eavrods we must question ourselves. ——In Hm., the possessive pronoun gs (éds) has a similar use: 0d yap eywye

. hs (for euijs) yalns dbvaua yAuKeporepov AAO idéodau for I can look on nothing sweeter than (mine) own land.

b. The reflexive pronoun, in the plural forms, is often used for the recipro-

cal (4AAHAwy, GANAS, etc.) : Bicheyaueda huty adrots we were conversing (with

ourselves) with one another. ;

673. The forms eye airdy, adrdv pe, o¢ adrdy, adrdv ce, and the like, are emphatic only, not reflexive :

Tovs Taidas TOUS éuobs KaTHTXUVE Kal eut aitdy he insulted my children and me myself, poet. arg tadrd vor Sida to thee thyself do I give these things. Tn- stead of & abrédy, etc., in the third person, adrdy alone is used: AauBdvovew labrdy Kad yuvatka they take the man himself and his wife. In the plural, jpady avra@y, etc., may be either reflexive or emphatic; avrdy judy, etc., emphatic only: but spd adray is only reflexive, and airéy opéy is never, used,

a. But in Hm., to whom the compound reflexives are unknown (235 D), such forms as @ a’rdy, of abt, oo) aire, etc., are sometimes reflexive and some- times emphatic.

674. The reflexive pronoun may be made to receive emphasis by pre- fixing adrés to it:

avrés in this use agrees, not with the reflexive itself, but with the subject .

to which it refers: abrds abrdy amécrewe he (himself) killed himself, rov cody abtroy ait@ wdrrora de? copdy civar the wise man must be wise e: specially for him- self. The two pronouns are separated by a preposition: 7d pév abrh 8? abrijs h wuxh emioxote? some things the soul surveys by itself ; but not, usually, by the article: karadéAuke Thy abtds abtod Suvacrelay he has overthrown his own do-. minion.

675. PossEessivE Pronouns. The article is often used instead of an (unemphatic) possessive pronoun (527d). (For the article with a possessive pronoun, see 538 ¢.)

a. The genitive of the personal pronoun is very commonly used in- stead of the possessive: cov 6 vids or 6 vids vou (for the position, see 538 a). For the 3d person, the Attic prose always has adroi, -js his, her, its (in- stead of 6s); and airay their (instead of oérepos). oérepos in Attic prose is always reflexive: ds_or éds is only poetic. 7

b. The possessive, being thus nearly equivalent to the genitive of a per- sonal pronoun, may have an adjective or appositiye connected with it in the genitive (cf. 523b): 4 duerdpa trav codicray réxyn emidédane the art of you the sophists has advanced, poet. taua Svorhvov naxd the ills of me, unhappy one, Hm, dpérepos & ei uty Suuds veueciCera abray if your (own) mind is offended. —

t

S

segsive pronouns often have a reflexive use: ,

nudrov cor rev euav etxpnut I lend to thee of my own property : as to

see 675a. In this use, juérepos, buérepos coated take abrady

bob abrav Wg od Aێyouer our own actions we do not ie ; for v

ray, the geni quent: 7& opérepa abray (or Td éav

oH tive éavray is fre ray) ed ridecdau to manage well their own affairs. The forms éuds adrod (-js) ds adrod (as) are poetic: the genitives éuavrod (-7s), ceavrod (-7s) are used in ; and in the third person, éavrod (-jjs). 677. A possessive pronoun is sometimes equivalent to an objective genitive : 4 etry éuh good-will to me (not my good-will to another); so ohy xdp (as a _ favor to thee) for thy sake.

678. DemonsrrativE Pronouns. The ordinary demonstra- _ tive is otros this, that. “Ode this (here) is used of something near

or present ; éxeivos that (yonder), of something remote.

* a. These pronouns, and especially dde, are sometimes used almost as adverbs of place:

__-—s atrias Xatpepav b5e Chaerephon here is to blame for it, poet. dpa thvd ex | Oduev orelxovcay “loxdorny I sce Jocaste coming hither from the house, ixmeis ovToL ToAguIOL patvoyra: there are seen horsemen of the enemy (‘‘ those horse- - men” would be expressed by of imme?s otro), vies éxeivar émimAdover yonder are ships sailing towards us. |

679. In referring to an object already mentioned, odros is generally used; but ddc, in reference to an object yet to be mentioned: ¢\céay ratra | they said these things (before stated), ehcEav rade they said these things ' (which follow). The same distinction exists also between rovodros such, | Togodros 80 much, many, rnALKovTos 80 old, large,—and the corresponding forms in de, rovdsde, roodsde, TyAukdsde. a. Yet obros is sometimes used—especially the neuter rodro—in reference _ to a word or sentence following in apposition: ob rotro udvoy évvoodyra, ri mel- _ coyrat they think not of this alone, what they shall suffer. More rarely, 85¢ is _ used in reference to something before mentioned. b. *Exeivos is also used in referring to an object before mentioned, even ' when mentioned immediately before, if the object is thought of as remote, _ or is otherwise especially distinguished: Kipos kaSopG BactAda kal 7d dud? exe?- voy oripos Cyrus observes the king and the band around him (some way off, as leader of the opposite army). °Exeivos may even refer to a word or sentence - following in apposition: rapa éxelvay, oluat, ‘rapa. rav undémore morculov from _ those, I think, (viz.) from such as never were hostile.

Sh es

' 680. Otros sometimes repeats the subject or object of a sentence with emphatic force: “

6 7d orépua tapacxdy, obros Tay pivtwy atrios the one who furnished the _ seed, he is responsible for what grew from it. So adrds, but withou? emphasis: mepdooua To nénry, Kpdrioros dy immets, cvupaxedv are to my grandfather, Iwill try, being a first-rate horseman, to act as an ally to him.

For kad tadra and that with omitted verb, see 508 b.

_ & Odros is sometimes used in addressing a person: ofros, ri woe?s you

here, what are you doing (678 a). if

258 PRONOUNS, RELATIVE, INTERROG., INDEFINITE. [68) q

681. Retative Pronouns. For agreement of relative and antecedent, see 503. For peculiarities of relative sentences, see 807-23.

a. The ordinary relatives (6s, da0s, oios, etc.) are often used where the antecedent is indefinite: weiZovrat ods dv (= ovstwas ay) yya@vrat Bed- tiatous eivat they obey (those, any) whom they may think to be best.

b. But the indefinite relatives (dstis, émécos, éroios, etc.) are not used where the antecedent is definite or particular. Where the antecedent is apparently of this nature, an indefinite idea is really connected with it: Hd. éreSvpnoe Toduxparea dmodéoa, O¢ dvriwva Kaxos iKovce he desired to destroy Polycrates, (as being a person) on whose account he was ill

spoken of. Yet in late writers, déstis, etc., are sometimes used without:

any indefinite idea. For indefinite relatives used as (dependent) interrogatives, see 682, 825: as indefinites, see 816 a.

682. InrERRocatives. A question may be 1. one which the

speaker himself asks (direct question): ti BovAeoBe what do you want ? or 2. one which he describes as being asked (indirect or dependent question): npata ti BovAowro he asked what they wanted.

The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, 247-8) are used in both kinds of questions, But in dependent questions, the indefinite relatives are more common: 7pera 6 rt BovAowro; in direct questions, they are never found.

For peculiarities of interrogative sentences, see 824-31.

683. InpEFin1rE Pronouns, The pronoun ris, ri, may express in- definiteness, not in ‘respect to the particular object, but in regard to its nature or quality :

6 codpiorhs wépayral tis Zumopos the sophist has been shown to be (not some one who trades, but one who pursues some trade) a soré of trader. In this sense, it is often connected with adjectives: wh BAdE ris Kad HALSi0s yévoman lest I should come to be a sort of dull and simple fellow (not some one who is dull, but one who has some dullness): so roar’ &rra (not some things of that kind, but) things of some such kind, wéyas tis of some magnitude, ev Bpaxet rt xpévw in a pretty short time, rpidxoyrd twas dréxreway they killed (some thirty) about thirty, 6Atyo. twés some few.

a. So 7) with adverbs: oxeddv m1 pretty near, wndéy tt wdvy SiwKdmevor scarcely pursued at all (lit. a sort of none at all). b. Tlas tis, Exaords tis, denote every one, each one, taken at pleasure. Tbs

is sometimes used in the sing., when several must be thought of: xp) Semvety

8 rt Tis Exer whatever one (and another) has, he (they) *ust make a supper of it. . @. Tis is sometimes used with an implied notion of importance: poet.

nixes Tis elvar you pretended to be somebody (of consequence), Aéyew tt to say

something (worth while): so oddéy Aéye to. say nothing (worth while).

e active voice seit ‘the wes as seh Tt Mh a pen the action passes over to a direct object, other-

Bisdieis tr, to sti, intr. to ride, march ; mpdrrey tr. to do, intr. e& (ands wrewv to (do, i. e.) succeed well (ill) : Exew tr. to have, hold, intr. exe 5f = ) now, &X’ hpeua, ovxf (hold) keep still, ears Exer Lat. bene se habet, i¢ és ——In English, this is still more common, as in the verbs ¢o move, turn, reak, melt, increase, etc.

In some verbs, the two meanings belong to different tenses, see 416-1.

is ~ 685. Some transitive verbs have an intransitive meaning only when aie with a preposition :

__ BadAcw to throw, weraBdAdew (to throw from one place to another) to change

tre, and intr., eisBdANew. and eu Pddrewy to make an invasion, also (of rivers) to

mp ty; diddvar to give, évd:ddvar to give in, surrender tr. and intr., émdiSdvae to

dvance, improve; némrewy to cut, arpoxdmrew to make progress ; bepew to bear,

: Agcy to differ.

For fataanative verbs which become transitive in composition, see 544 d.

af 686. A subject is often described by the active as doing what it only s another to do (causative use): 6 Kopos xaréxavoe ra Bacideva Cyrus bur iat the palace, i. e. caused it -o be burnt,

B. MIDDLE.

“687. The middle voice represents the subject as acting on ‘itself that is, as affected by its own action.

. It is, therefore, reflexive in meaning, the action, as it were, turning “back upon the agent. Like the active, it is transitive when it takes a direct object: mpdrrer sar xpypara to get one’s self money ; -—— otherwise, intransitive: dméxeo%a (to hold one’s self away) to abstain. ~ ‘The subject may be variously affected by the action. Hence we dis- tinguish the following uses of the middle:

_ ie 688. 1. The Direcr Mrppix,—\in which the subject of the ? action is at the same time its direct object:

| Robeoda to wash (one’s self), Tpemersou to turn (one’s self), eidelevvodsat te ) one’s 8e ip te toracSat to set one’s self, nartarecda to cover one’s self. In-

tead o the reflexive form, an intransitive verb is often to be used in Eng.: to make cease, mabeosat (to make one’s self cease) to cease; galvew to Bs gotoooda (to show one’s, self) to “pp pear ; wetSew to persuade (cause to lieve), welSecda: (to make one’s self believe) to trust, comply.

260 MIDDLE VOICE. [683

a. The direct middle is much less frequent than the indirect: instead of it, the active voice is generally used with a reflexive pronoun, Even with the middle voice a reflexive pronoun is sometimesused for the sake of clearness or emphasis: @Sfcovra }) KakGom iuais t) opis abtobs BeBardcacdar they will get the start either in harming us or in securing themselves. :

689. 2. The Inprrecr Mipp1z, in which the subject of the action is at the same time its indirect object, most commonly as dative of interest, FOR one’s self’:

moptCew to procure, mopiferdar (xphuara) to procure (money) for one’s self, onacsa: Td élpos to draw (for one’s self) one’s own sword, &yecdar yuvaixa to | take a wife (to one’s own house), meraréuroual twa I send after one (that he may come to me), Hm. abtds epéarerat tivdpa oldnpos the iron itself draws the man to it. Thus too, 6 vowodérns tidnor vduous the lawgiver makes laws (for others), but 6 djuos tiderat véuous the people makes laws for itself. .

a. It may be for the interest of the subject that something should be re- moved FROM it: d&udveoSa Kivyduvoy to ward off danger (for one’s self, i. e.) from one’s self, rpewéueda Tos moAculovs we turn the enemy from ourselves, put them to flight, &xodéc8a1 vai to sell a ship (prop. to give it from and for one’s self, for value received).

b. In some verbs, the indirect middle has a causative use (686) :

SddoKoua Tov vidy I procure instruction for my son (make others teach him for me), mapatideuat Setrvoy I have a meal served up to me (make others serve it for me); davel(w J lend, davetCoua (I make one lend to me) J borrow; modxdw I let for hire, pcSodua (I make one let to me) J hire; ducd¢w I give judgment, duxdCoua (I make one give judgment for me, in my case) J maintain a suit at law.

690. 3. The SussxctrvE Mippie, in which the subject is thought of as acting in his own sphere, with his own means and powers :

mapexew to furnish in any way, mapéxeodau to afford from one’s own property ; mowelv TéAcuoy to make war simply, woretodor réAcuoy to make war with one’s own resources; AapBdvew ti to take something, AapPdyecdat tivos to take hold of something with one’s own hand; ckorety to view, cxowetadau to take one’s own view, consider in his mind.

a. Hence some intransitive verbs form a middle, which gives special pro- minence to the subject, as acting in his own sphere: BovAevey to take counsel, Bovaeveodan to take one’s own counsel, form his own plan; modiredew to be a citizen, act as such, mwoditevecSat to perform one’s civic duties (espec. public duties), to conduct public affairs; mpecBevew to be an embassador, negotiator, wag (used of the state) to conduct its negotiations (by sending embas- sadors).

691. The following verbs may be added to those already given, as showing ‘ various and important differences of meaning between active and middle: afpeiy to take, aipetoda: to choose; &mrrew to fasten, imrecSat (to fasten one’s self to) to touch; exew to hold, éxerdat to hold on to, hence to be close to; Timwpeiv rn to act as avenger or helper to a person, Timwpeicdai Twa to avenge one’s self on a person; &pxw I begin (in advance of others, opposed to iorep@ am behind), tpxoucu I begin (my own work, without reference to others, opposed to mavoua

sxe ver may have different uses of the middle voice: thus &- irect middle with causative meaning (689 b); but also as direct

Sie ee

“Re

692. Drronrnt Verss show the same uses of the middle voice, and r from the verbs already given only in having no active:

Direct Middle, smoxvetcSa (to hold one’s self under) to undertake,

; Indirect, déxecSa: fo receive (to one’s self), nr&cda to acquire (for

self), dvaBidcacSa: causative, to (make live again) re-animate ; Subjective, eaSat to contend (with one’s own powers), ofecSas to think (in one’s own

).——For passive deponents, see 413.

C. PASSIVE.

_ 693. The passive voice represents the subject as acted on, _ or suffering an action.

_ Hence the object of the active verb becomes the subject of the pas- sive. The subject of the active verb (the agent) is variously expressed with the passive; sometimes by the dative (600): usually by id with _ the genitive ; rarely by other prepositions (624 c, 653 b). ;

_ 694. The passive is used in Greek more freely than in Latin, espe- cially in these particulars: a. Many verbs form a passive voice, which in the active take their object i genitive or dative (not in the accusative): karappov rivos I despise some ve, KaTappoverrat Tis bm’ euod; miorevovor TE Bactrer they trust the king, 6 _ Bacircds mioreberat OT adTay. | ie b. Neuter passive participles are formed from verbs wholly intransitive : _ 7& otparevdpueva the things done in making war, military operations, rd ool me- _ morirevpéeva thy political course or conduct. _ ¢e. Deponent verbs (though properly middle, 413) are sometimes used with _ passive meaning: in this use, the aorist and future take the passive form: Bid- (eadat to do violence, Aor. Bidcacda:; but also pass. to suffer violence, Aor. Bia- " ovat (cf. 415). So too in other verbs, a passive meaning may arise from that of the middle: afpety to take; Mid. aipetoda, Aor. éAgcSat, to choose; Pass.

re® 2

- alpetoda, Aor. aipedijvat, to be taken, also to be chosen. Rem. d. On the other hand, the Latin impersonal passive from intransitive _ verbs (curritur, ventwm est, etc.) is unknown to the Greek.

_ For Aor. Pass. with middle sense, see 414,

js his suit (indictment) against he.

262 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [695 : ) ! THE TENSES.

695. The tenses of the verb distinguish the action——1. in — relation to its own progress: 2. in relation to the time of speaking. Hence

1. The tenses represent the action as continued, completed, -or indefinite.

a. In the indefinite tenses, the action is viewed at the outsxt of its pro- gress, as introduced into being, browght to pass, without reference to continu- ance or completion. In the continued tenses, it is viewed in the coursz of its progress, as going on, without reference to introduction or completion. In the complete tenses, it is viewed at the ciosz of its progress, as concluded, with- out reference to introduction or continuance.

696. 2. The tenses of the indicative also express TIME, present, past, and future, Thus

Action. - Time. Tense. Example. — continued atthe present time Present +ypddw am writing i at a past “ Imperfect ¢ypahov was writing bro’t to pass at a past ¢ ~~ Aorist eypaiva wrote . s at a future “ — Future ypape shall write completed atthe present “ Perfect yeypaha have written * at a past “ — Pluperfect ¢eyeypahew had written “ at a future “ Fut. Perf. yeypayrona: shall have

[been written

a. It will be observed that the above scheme has no form for action brought to pass at the present time, or action continued at a future time. But these deficiencies are usually supplied by the present and the future: thus ypado I am writing, but also L write; ypaWwo I shall write, also I shall be writing.

b. The other modes of the present, perfect, and aorist represent the action as continued, completed, or indefinite, without reference to the time of speaking. But as regards the optative, infinitive, and participle, of the aorist, see 717: for the same modes of the future, see 718.

I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. A. PRESENT.

697. Untversat Trurus. <A proposition which is aheays true, is generally expressed by the present, as being true now:

tort Seds there is a god, y GANXea emiumpare? rdvrev truth prevails over all things. But sometimes it is expressed by the perFEect or the FUTURE, as that which has been or will be true: mwoAAol dia Sdtav peydAa Kanda wemdySact many on account of glory have suffered great evils, avhp emiechs &modéoas tt bgora otc a reasonable man, when he has lost anything, will bear tt very easily. ——For a similar use of the Aorist, see 707.

Perrrecr. ' esent of some feta. ) express an porcniiet elongs to the a but hat continue in the present: also I ‘(have heard and ) am informed; vucdw I conquer, OF uered) am victorious; pevyw I flee, or (have fled) am in ewile; adt- corbnd. or (have done wrong) am a wrong-doer. The presents feo I y otxonaeT lam gone, are only used in this way. —

9. Prespyr For Past or Fururs. In vivid DATIAIOD A

ee in this use of it is called nisrortcat PRESENT; it is freely inter- ed with the historical tenses (263): Aapefov «ad Mapvodridos matdes yly- yrat Sto of Darius and Parysatis are born two sons, éwel jyeiro ’Apxldamuos Tous Tohepious, evravsa obTor od« édekavTo, GAN eyxAlvover when Archidamus s leading against the enemy, these did not abide the attack, but turn to flee. a. Even a FUTURE event, when thought of as immediate or certain, may Fhe expressed by the present: puxp& cimdy 75n xataBalvo after having said a eile, I am already coming down. This is the Reserat use of elu: J (am going, e.) am about to go (405 a).

100. ‘Past ror Presmnt. Sometimes (especially in letters) a writer puts himself i in the position of the reader, and views the moment of writing as a time: mpaoce wer ApraBd(ov, by cor émeua negotiate with Artabazus, ‘whom, Er (sent) send to thee.

_ a, A past tense is sometimes used, where a present fact or truth is thought _ of as perceived (or not perceived) at a past time: ob rod7’ Fv ed3datmovla Kaxod Wipe this—deliverance from evil—is not happiness (as we before supposed 5 it t to be).—The future also may be used in a similar way.

Bi B. IMPERFECT.

701. The imperfect is used especially where different past Esotions are conceived as going on at the same time. It is used “also in reference to past actions frequently repeated, and in re- ference to past states or conditions:

Hm. dppa pév jas iv Kad atero lepdy Huap, réppa pan dupordpwy Bére’

Pero, mimre 8¢ dads as long as it was morning and the sacred day was becruneiny, _ 80 long were the weapons of both parties clashing, and the people were falling, ovmore peioy Gmectpatomedevoyro of BdpBapor Tay ‘EAAhvey éLhrovra oradiwy the barbarians never encamped (in their repeated encampments) at a less distance from the Greeks than sixty stades, robs émidprovs Kal Gdlious ds 6b GwALcuEvous | eoBetro the perjured and wnjust he was afraid of as (thinking them) well armed.

_ 702. Imprrrecr OF ATTEMPTED AcTION. The imperfect often Tepresents an action as attempted merely, not accomplished :

» KAéapxos tovs orparidras éBid(ero idvar- of St adtdy ZBaddAov, eel Hptaro mpoiévar Clearchus (was forcing) attempted to force his soldiers to march; but peers throwing stones at him, when he began to go forward.——As this use ws out of the idea of continued action, it is sometimes found in the PRESENT:

1g -B(Beoet Tam eens Se to give) offering, Hm. Tépmovres TuKWWas a&kaxhwe y ovr dt Sums répwero endeavoring to amuse (Achelles) in his grievous afflie nj but he was by no means amused in spirit.

7 P -

” by

“i by

264 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [703

703. Verbs of opLicaTIoN are used in the imperfect, to express that which ought to be, but is not:

%er rods Aéyovtas uhre tps ExIpay woretodat Toy Adyov whre mpos xdpw the speakers ought not to make their discourse with any reference either to enmity or to favor (i. e. they do speak with partiality, but were under prior obligation not to do so). Thus also xpijv it were proper, eixds iy it were fitting.

704. The imperfect is sometimes used with dv, to express a customary past action (action which took place, if occasion served, at various past times) :

dvarauBdvey adrav rd rovhuata dinpdrwyv dy Tl Aéyotey taking up theer poems, I (would be asking) was often asking them (the authors) what they meant.—— The AORIST INDICATIVE With &y has a similar use, but without the idea of con- tinued action which belongs to the Impf.: érctev &y he (would say) was ac- customed to say.

©. AORIST.

705. The aorist is used in narrating past actions, when thought of merely as events or single facts, without reference to the time they occupied, or to other actions going on at the same time:

» tokikhy Kal iarpuchy Kal pavtinhy ’AméAAwy avedpe Apollo invented archery and medicine and divination, Hm, rhy 8 road mrparos 18¢ TnAguaxos Seoeidhs, BHT iSds mpoSdporo, veuetohdn F evi Suns keivoy 58a Sipnow eperrduer, ey- yis 5 ords xeEip’ Ere Sekirephy Kal edétaro xdAKeov eyxos but long before others, godlike Telemachus saw her, and went straight toward the door-way, and was vexed in his spirit that a stranger should stand long at the door, and standing near he took her right hand and received the brazen spear.

706. Aorist For Prerrecr or Prouprrrectr. The aorist in- dicative is often used in Greek where the perfect or pluperfect might be used with more exactness:

tay oikerav od8€va KaréAimev, GAN Eraytas wémpaxe of his servants he (left) has left no one, but has sold them all, Aapetos Kipoy werawéumerat (699) amd rijs &pxiis hs abrdoy carpdarny érolnoe Darius sends for Cyrus from the government — of which he (made) had made him satrap. The aorist is thus used with the temporal conjunctions, ézel, ds, dre, when, as in Latin the perfect with post- quam, ubi, ut: &s 6 Kipos joSero tis kpavyis, dverhSnoey em) toy trmov when Cyrus (had) perceived the outcry, he leaped upon his horse.

707. Gnomic Aorist. General facts, established by experi- ence, are often expressed by the aorist indicative, referring to past instances in which the fact appeared.

The aorist, in this use, is freely interchanged with the present; and the English present indefinite is naturally used in rendering it: +@ xpévw 4 Sixn dvtws jAS Groticauevyn with time justice always (came) comes inflicting retri- bution, ras Tay patAwy cvvavalas dAlyos xpdvos Si€Avo'e the associations of the bad a little time (is wont to) dissolve. It is called gnomic aorist, as being espe- cially frequent in proverbs or maxims (yvdua). By Hm. it is often used in similes or comparisons.

| AORIST. AND 1 265 vcuprive Aorist. In many verbs, the present of which 3 a continued state, the aorist expresses the inception of state (B95):

ety to exe dominion, tptas to attain dominion; éBactrcve he was king, ve he became king ; ioxvew to be strong, icxica to grow strong ; ovyayv silent, svyica to become silent; Exew to hold, possess, cxeiv to take hold of, jossession of ; palvecdXa: to appear, be evident, paviva to become evident ; Kwouvevew to be in danger, xvbvvetou to incur danger; vooeiy to be sick, voo7- = rau to be taken sick.—This use is found in all the modes of the aorist. 4 “er é 709. The aorist is sometimes used, especially in the 1 Sing., to denote an ion which began to be, just before the moment of speaking: éyéAaca I can’t help laughing (was made to laugh by something just seen or heard), poet. éx- wee epyov kal mpdvoay hy eSov I praise the work, and the forethought which you exercised. ; For the aorist indicative with ty, see 704.

A

4

Bees) D. FUTURE.

_ 710. ‘a, The second person of the future is used as a softened form of command (Future for Imperative) : obrws ody morhoere Kal melSeodXé wor (thus then ye will do) do thus and obey me. With negatives, it expresses prohibition: ob« émopxjoes thou (wilt) shalt not swear falsely. But in negative questions, it forms a lively expression for urgent demand: ov mepievets wilt thou not wait? od wh AadAfoets, GAN dKorovShoets uot (won’t you not talk) don’t talk, but follow me. ‘q b. With the future indicative, é (Hm. rév) is sometimes used to mark the future event as contingent: ed of8a art %opevos dy mpds &vdpa oios ob ef &madAa- s yhoera I know well that he will gladly be reconciled (should opportunity be 4 given) to aman such as thou art, Hm. 6 d5€ rev nexoddoerat, bv Kev Tkwpau but he will be angry, to whom I may come (= if I come to any one, he will be angry).

c. In relative sentences, the future indicative is often used to express | purpose: ov yup €xopev Grou cirov wvncdpesa for we have nothing with ‘which (we shall buy) to buy corn. For émes with Fut. Ind. used in _ this way, see 756. |

ae 411. Permurastic Furure. To represent a future action as immediately expected or intended, the verb péddAw is used " with the infinitive of the present or future, or (more rarely) the

aoris = .

PAA Sptis Byew (Kew, &yaryeiv) eis *Actay (in Asiam vos ducturus sum) I am about to lead you into Asia. Other tenses of wéAAw are used in a similar “way: mAnotoy H5n jv 6 cradpds, Sa Eweddov Katadrvoew the station was near, where they were about to stop for the night. Cf. Lat. ducturus eram, ero, etc. -—The phrase més (rf) od weAAw—; has a peculiar meaning, how (why) should

f ? mas od péAAEL Td GoPsrepoy KdAALOY palverdai why should not that which appear nobler ?

12

266 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. {712

E. PERFECT.

712. PERFECT WITH PRESENT MEANING. Several perfects ex- press a continued state, the result of,a completed action, and thus have a present meaning:

péuynuoe (from piuvhoxw: I have recalled to mind, and hence) J remember, Lat. memini; xéxAnua (from xarew: I have received a name and still bear it) Tam called; xéxrnucat (from xrdowat: I have acquired) J possess; judleopos (from a&udiévyyst: I have dressed myself) J am dressed; mérowWa I (have put confidence) have confidence in; mwépuxa J (have been produced) am by nature ; éornka I (have set myself) stand; BéBnxa I (have stepped) stand fast, also 1 am gone; twda J (have suffered destruction) am ruined. Here belong also the perfects oida know, gona am like, elwsa am accustomed, dédo1xa am afraid, kéxparya (Pres. xpd{w rare) cry, and several others: though it may be doubted whether some of these ever expressed completed action.

a. In these verbs, the pluperfect has the meaning of an imperfect : exextnnv LF was in possession of, éatrnxew I was standing ; and the future perfect has the meaning of a simple future: peuynoowa I shall remember.

For the aorist used instead of the perfect or pluperfect, see 706.

F, FUTURE PERFECT.

718. This tense is formed only in the middle voice (264 b), though usually with passive meaning. In the active, its place is supplied by using the perfect participle with the future of eciyi to be: ay rair cidémev, ra

Scovra éodped3a eyvaxdres if we know these things, we shall have recognized our obligations.

II. TENSES IN OTHER MODES.

714, Present. The other modes of the present represent the action aS CONTINUED, whether in present, past, or future time:

povdueda wdvres, Sréray dpyi(oueda we are all insane, as often as we are angry, treyov TE EdAvdhuy Sri wdvres Eroyuor elev pavddvew they said to Huthy- demus that they were all ready to learn, obrw rovhow bras dy-od Kededns I will act as you may command (be commanding) Lat. sic agam ut tu me agere jube- bis, ovk éSéAover (HSeAov, ESEAF ovat) pdxerdou they are not (were not, will not be) willing to fight, éruxov ev rij &yopa Kadevdovres they happened to be sleeping in the market-place.

715. Perrect. The other modes of the perfect represent the action aS COMPLETED, whether in present, past, or future time:

galvouat (epdynv, pavhrouat) oddity Kady oe weroinnds I appear (appeared, shall appear) to have done thee no wrong, od Bovreterdat Spa, dAAG BeBovacionau it is time, not to be consulting, but to have consulted (finished and decided), Réptns ds éxbSero toy ‘EAAhomovtov éCedx Sat, mpojryey &x Tv SapSewv when Ker-

axes learned that the Hellespont was bridged over (already, dr: €evxro), he led forward from Sardis, jrev tyyedos A€ywor brt Zvevveois Acdoutws ely TH Epa there came a messenger saying that Syennesis had left the heights, obdenta mapat- veots ixavods mwoveiy mornoet, iv wh mpdcSey Hoxnkdtes Gor no exhortation will

make (men) able to endure toil, unless they have had previous exercise.

oe =

‘ST The ade sida tt the aorist represent the action as pis in present, past, or future time : Sicpivax do thou answer : ‘me, ph Sauudonre, day mapddotoy elm@ TL be a DiS cect ng surprising, of rpidkovra mposératay &maryaryety ‘ay ty? Gewosdy ot oil thirty gave orders to lead away Leon, that he might be dant edu (er (ered lush eeanhces eAdSyipos yevéosar he desires (de- will desire) to becom » It is often eee men express the difference between these ino ads as in the present and in the aorist. In general, the present is used when uance is naturally thought of; otherwise, the aorist, especially i in refer- » to single or transient actions: xaderdy 7d. raety, Td "BS keAedoat pddiov tt Se ewecute (in continued action), to command (a single, transient act) exes dyrirdyew, dyrineye* ef 8¢ wf, madoa worAAdnts Aéyov Toy ad- Bd eke hast any answer to make, answer (in continued discourse) ;

pve eoeel not, cease (at once) repeating the same statement. Yet the briefest ac- ii tion may be viewed as going on, and thus expressed by the present; while the S a on pgest action may be viewed without reference to its length, simply as brought 1 ss, and thus expressed by the aorist.

or the aorist used (in all modes) to express an incipient state, see 108.

_ 717. The aorisT particreLE, however, represents the action as prior to that of the principal verb in the same sentence:

- __ Kpoicos “Aduy SiaBas peyddny apxhy karadrtoe Croesus having crossed the - Halys will destroy a great empire, maxav 5 re vis &yvw (707) by (previous) suffering even a fool becomes wise.

a. Properly, the Aor. Part. represents the action only as introduced

“(brought to pass) before that of the principal verb; in its _ continuance, the _ former may coincide with the latter: Hm. Seicas ¥ éx Spdvou GATo Kad taxe and (having become afraid) in fear he sprang from his throne and cried. Thus the _ Aor. Part., when joined to a principal verb in the aorist, imay denote the means | or manner : eb ye érotnous dvayvicas pe thou didst well in reminding me. » by The aorist opratrve and rnrinitive, used in dependent assertions (734), _ may represent the action as pr tor to that of the principal verb with which they are connected: of *Ivdol Zrctay b7i méewere ois 6 *Ivdav Bactreds (Indic. Ore a eube) the Indians said that the king of the Indians had sent them, KtxAwmes Benrerscs 2 ev Succrle oixjoa the. Cyclopes are said to have lived in Sicily.

ase be x

q 433

718. Forurn. The future optative, infinitive, and participle represent . action as posterior to that of the principal verb with which they are connected :

ba ae Tovhaot, od Sierfynve but what he would do, he did not indicate, &50- vara, % Mtew tmicxvovvra they promise (that they will perform) to. perform im- _ possible things, tuvpecay Bovrdevaducvor they came together for consultation (about 9 consult, cf. 789 d).

a. The rorure PErFect in the same modes has a similar use heed inate ee action as posterior to that of the principal verb.

At

268 FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. [719

THE MODES. A. FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES.

719. The rnDICATIVE represents the action of the verb as real ; the SUBJUNCTIVE and OPTATIVE, as possible ; the IMPERA- TIVE, as willed by the speaker.

The Inprcatrve expresses that which 7s, was, or will be. It is used when the reality of the action is affirmed, denied, or questioned: “*He went; he did not stay; will he return?”

Rem. a. Reality must be distinguished from certainty. Thus the sentence, “ perhaps he will not return,” asserts a future reality, “ he will not return, ” but expresses it as uncertain.

For the indicative in hypothetical sentences (with or without dv), see 745-6 ; 3 in expressions of wishing, see 721 b. For the Ind. (Impf. or Aor.) with dy to denote customary action, see 704.

720. The SunsuncriveE expresses that which may be. It re. presents the action as possible, with some present expectation of its being realized. Hence it is used

a. to express something demanded or requested: this use is nearly confined to the first person : topev (eamus) let us go, pépe On, Tas papru- oias bpiv Gere come now, let me read you the testimonies.

b. with yj, to express something prohibited or deprecated (723 a): uj) ToUTo mounons (ne hoc feceris) do not do this.

c. in questions as to what may be done with propreny or advantage (SupsuncTiIvE oF DELIBERATION).

Thus chiefly in the first person: rf @@ what shall I say ? (not “what am I going to say” as a future fact, but “‘what had I best say ”), défeode juts, A amtouer will you receive us, or shall we go away? Hm. més rls ror mpdpav ereow relanrat Axady how shall any one of the Achacans willingly obey thy words ?

d. with Mh, i in expressions of anxiety or apprehension: wh drypouxdrepoy F Td GAnSéts eimety I am afraid it may be too rude to say what is true. (In strict- ness, the sentence here expresses something desired, may it not be too rude, I hope it may not be, though I fear it is.) If the object of apprehension i is negative, uh od is used: Hm. uh vb ro. ov xpalopyn oxnwrpdy Kad oTéupa. Seoio (there is danger) indeed that the staff and wreath of the god may not avail thee.

e. In Hm., the subjunctive is sometimes used to denote Suture events, nearly like the "future indicative: od yap mw Tolovs {Sov avépas, ovdé dapat for never yet saw I such men, nor (may I hereafter) shall I see them. To the Subj. in this use, &y is sometimes added: ode &y tou xpatoun bap Asestions the gifts of Aphrodite (may probably) will avail thee nothing. Cf. 710

721. The Oprative expresses that which might be. It re- presents the action as possible, but without present pac A of its being realized. Thus

—

si aa Pr. TIVE OF Wisuine. The optative is used without dy, 0 express a wish (that something might be) :

of Seo) aroricawro may the gods requite (would that they might do so). this use comes the name opéative. Particles which serve to introduce a wish are ei (Hm. ai), e@S¢ (Hm. ei Ydppas: cide od plros july yévoio O that thou wouldst become a friend i. e. “if thou wouldst do so”, I should rejoice), Hm. és pis a&mrdéAorro would thai a, might perish (lit. how might it perish, O for a way in which _it might perish). |

__b. Wish VIEWED AS UNATTAINABLE, When a wish is recognized as inconsistent with a known reality, it is expressed by a past tense of the _ indicative with ize, ci yap (746). The imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect is used, according as the contrary reality would be expressed by a present, an aorist, or a perfect

et yhp rocabrny Sivapmw elxov O that I had so much power (but I do not have a else cot tTéTe cuveyevduny O that I had been with thee then (as I was not),

Such wishes are expressed also by &pedov (ought) with the present or aorist in- * @: Spere pty Kipos (iv O that Cyrus were living :——the particles of _ wishing may be prefixed, «¥9 Speroy, ei yap Bperor.

| 722. 2. Porenrrat Oprative. The optative is used with dy “in assertions and questions:

‘rotTo yerorr’ ty this might take place, worrds dv ebpors unxavds thou couldst | find many contrivances, odx dv dpyndetny I would not deny it, rot dir dy elev of Eévor where, I pray, might the strangers be?

. a. This use of the potential optative is not essentially different from that

’ in the conclusion of a conditional sentence (748). In the cases here described, the condition on which the event depends is left indeterminate, not being ex- ‘pressed, nor indeed distinctly thought of. Thus ‘‘this might take place” (if

_ circumstances should favor), ‘‘ you could find” (should you wish), ‘‘I would not

_ deny it” (if I could), “‘ where might the strangers be” (i. e. be found, if one

_ Should seek them).

_ _b. The potential optative is often used, where the indicative might _ stand. A known reality is modestly or cautiously expressed as some- ___ thing possible.

Thus od« &y Adyouu I would not say (non dixerim, for “I will not say”), _ Bovarotuny tv I should like (velim, for “I wish”), Spa dy avoenevderSar ely it _ might be (for ‘‘it probably is”) time to pack up for starting. Sometimes it ap- proaches the imperative, expressing a command as a permission: Aéyors dy ds _ -tdxuo'ra (you might speak) speak at once.

____¢. In poetry, the potential optative is also used without ty: Hm. peta Seds P Sérwy Ka tyrdsev Uvdpa cadom a divinity willing (to do so) could easily bring a man in safety even from far. This is rarely the case in prose.

3 wy 7

hi) a : _ 723. The Inprrative expresses that which must be (by the will of the speaker). It represents the action as commanded, or, with negative words, as prohibited. _ a. For the second person, there are only two ways of expressing rohibition :—by py with the present imperative, if the action is thought a

"

~ a

270 COMPOUND SENTENCES, PRINCIPAL, DEPENDENT. [723

of as continued: px) yadérawe do not be offended ;—otherwise, by py with the aorist subjunctive: pr xadrennyns do not take offence (720b), ratra — prot mpaor, Téxvov, Kal yn Bpadvve, pnd emturnoSjs er Tpolas do this for me, child, and don’t be lingering, nor mention Troy any more.

b. For the third person, ~4 can be used also with the aorist imperative: _ BAAR yap wh Spivey tis TovTov Tov Adyov vomodrw but let not any oue regard this discourse as being a lamentation.

‘For the infinitive instead of an imperative, see 784. For the imperative in the conclusion of a hypothetical sentence, see 745, 747: for imperative used in expressing the condition, 751.

B. FINITE MODES IN COMPOUND SENTENCES,

724, SuporprnaTion. A sentence may enter as a subordi- nate part into another sentence. The whole is then called a compound sentence: it consists of a principal, and a dependent or subordinate, sentence :

of St dmexplyayro (principal sentence) dr: odk évradSa e~n (dependent sen- tence) but they answered that he was not there; roy kaxby Set koAd¢ew (principal), i” auelvwr 7 (dependent) we must punish the bad man, that he may be better; ¢ Seol tt SpHow aicxpdy (dependent), ovx eioly Seol (principal) ¢f gods do any thing shameful, they are not gods,

a. Co-orpinaTIon. On the other hand, connected sentences are said to be co-ordinate, when they are mutually independent :

kowh ) Toxn, Kal Td méAAOv adparoy fortune is fickle, and the future is un- scen, TOUTO eyw ovr clpynka ovTe Aéyouu ty this I neither have said nor would Say. For different conjunctions used with co-ordinate and subordinate sen- tences, see 853 a. .

b. The same thought may often be expressed either by two co-ordinate sentences or by one compound sentence: pnder ovpdopay dveidions, Kowh yap n Toxn reproach no one with misfortune, for fortune is fickle ;———or ére) 4 tox Kowh éort, pnder cvupopday dvedlons since fortune is fickle, reproach no one with misfortune. The co-ordinate arrangement prevails especially in the Homeric language.

725. A dependent sentence may have another sentence depending on it, to which it stands as principal.

Thus in the compound sentence jpdunyv”*AgoBor ef Ties maphoay 87° dmreAdu- Bave thy mpoixa I asked Aphobus whether any persons were present when he re- ceived the dowry, 67° &meAduBave Thy mwpotka depends on ef tives waphoay, and — this again depends on jpduny”AgdoBov. So too an infinitive or participle may — have a sentence depending on it: ofoua adrdy épeiv as &xupdy éort 7d Whoiona I suppose he will say that the decree is without force, dxvotyres wh daipedetey — 1G Acting A€youot fearing that they might be deprived (of them) they speak to — Dexippus.

726. A substantive which properly belongs to the dependent sentence, _

is often transferred (usually with change of case) to the principal sentence. The object is to give it a more emphatic position. When the substantive

| USE OF MODES IN DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 271

18 (mpohnyes anticipation). age | Kal mot Tov vidy cimé, ci weuddnne Thy TExvnV = Kat mot elmé ei 6 vids ce Thy réxvnv) and tell me whether my son has learned his art, Hm. Tv- ’ ov dy yvolns morépoiot peretn you could not distinguish to which party mged, Kal trav BapBdpwy emeucreiro ds woAeucty ixavod elnoay he took o that the barbarians should be in condition to make war. On the other a substantive may be transferred from a principal to a dependent sentence: Hm. De Fever a hv rér drntpwy*kovpny Boiojos and among them shall be the bypapivel of Briseus, whom I then took away. Cf. 809.

4 ‘GENERAL Usz oF THE Moprs in DEPENDENT SENTENCES.

Bs 727, 1. The rnpicatrvE in dependent sentences expresses & _ reality as conceived or assumed, not asserted, by the speaker.

‘Thus in the sentences, Hyyérdn Sri Méyapa adéornne it was announced that | Megara was in revolt, ei Scot cicty, Zot ad epya Seay if there are gods, there are also works of gods, tatra émolovy méxpt oxdtos eyévero these things they | were doing until darkness came on,—the (reported) ‘‘revolt of Megara,” and the _ (Supposed) “existence of gods” are not asserted, nor.is it clear that they are _ believed, to be real: even the “coming on of darkness,” though clearly be- lieved, is not asserted by the sentence. Indeed it is sometimes implied that _ the reality which the speaker would assert is directly contrary to that which

he assumes: Yows Gy GmréSavor, <i wh ) Tay TpidKovTa a&pxh KaTeAVSy I should

perhaps have been put to death, if the government of the thirty had not been over- _ thrown (but it was overthrown, and I was not put to death).

‘We 728. 2. The suBJUNCTIVE expresses possibility with present | expectation—that which may be realized in present or future Thus in FINAL sentences: wapaxadc? iarpods, rws wy amoddvy he calls in physicians, that he may not die ;——in CoNDITIONAL sentences: édy %xwpey Xpnuas’, Lower plrous if we have property, we shall have friends ; in RELA- | TivE sentences: Grr” ty vot dalynra BéAriora, TadTa émiréree whatever things _ may appear to thee best, these execute: also Subjunctive of Deliberation in _ DEPENDENT QUESTIONS: Grop@ Tod (244) mpOrov pvnodS I am in doubt what I should mention first.

; 729. 3. The oprative often expresses possibility with past | expectation—that which could be looked for, as a thing that might be realized, at some past time.

In this use, it corresponds to the subjunctive in dependent sentences: _ the subjunctive being used, if the principal verb denotes present or future time; the optative, if it denotes past time. _ hus in Finan sentences: aapexdAccev iarpobs, Bras uh &moddva he called in physicians, that he might not die ; in RELATIVE sentences: &rra BéATioTa dalvorro, Tatra emerérc: whatever things might appear best, these he was ewecuts ing ;——Optative for Subj. of Delib. in DEPENDENT QUESTIONS: amwépouv rot Fparov pyvnovelny I was in doubt what I should mention first. ;

x¥ Pees

+ A ”

272 USE OF MODES IN DEPENDENT SENTENCES. [729

at Very often, however, past expectation is expressed by the sub- junctive, the past time being lost sight of:

€Bovactoyro «i kataxavewor Tos &vdpas they were consulting whether ther

(shall) showld burn the men, t” of HAA Tov Sikalwv rbxwo1, TA Buerep adTar

aynatonxere that the others (may) might obtain their just rights, you expended your own resources.

b. In conditional and relative sentences, the optative is much used to express indefinite frequency of past-action ; that which occurred often, being thought of as liable to occur—as something to be expected—at any time:

ef tis Gytelrol, ebdds TEavhKe if any one opposed (as happened from time to time), he was immediately put to death, émeure radra ois joSels tUxor he was sending (occasionally) those things with which he happened to be pleased, eweidh Tt éupdyoev, avlorayro Kal éropevoyro as soon as they had eaten something (one company after another), they got up and continued the march,

730. 4. The oprative is often used to express mere possibility without expectation,—that which might be realized in present or future time.

This is the prevailing use of the optative in conprTroNAL sentences: rl dy xots eimeiv, ei S€01 oe A€yeww what would you have to say, if it should be neces- sary for you to speak? It occurs likewise in HYPOTHETICAL RELATIVE sentences, see 760d. And here belongs the potential optative with &y (722), when it stands in an INDIRECT sentence: amrexplyaro KAedvwp bti mpdodev by droddvorey 2} Td érAa rapadotey Cleanor answered that they would sooner die than surrender their arms (direct mpéodev dv &rodsdvomer, etc.)

731, 5. The oprariveE is often used in place of the indicative in repeating past conceptions or expressions (oratio obliqua, 734):

tére éyvdodn Sri of BdpBapor toy &vSpwrov sworeéuWaser then it was under- -

stood that the barbarians had sent the man, avhpovro bstis etn they inquired who he was, of "ASnvaiio: Mepucréa éxdccCov, bt orparnyds dv ovk ewetdyor er) rods mwodeulous the Athenians were speaking ill of Pericles, because (as they said), though a general, he did not lead out against the enemy, ef tis wéAts em) wéAw oTparevoot, em rabrny pn iévar he said that if any city should make war against (another) city, he would:go against it. .

a. In all such cases, the indicative may also be used: but the opta- tive shows more distinctly that the speaker is not responsible for the thought which he repeats, since he gives it only as what might be.

b. The subjunctive has no analogous use in reference to the present or future: pn p avépy ris eiys (never tis &) do not ask me who I am, Lat. ne me interroges quis sim.

732. Prorasis, Apoposis. These are grammatical terms correspona- ing to each other: protdsis, applied to the dependent sentence, final, con- ditional, or relative (but not to the indirect) ; apoddsis, to the: principal sentence on which it depends.

oft Cee ie ee

MODES IN INDIRECT SENTENCES. 278

Bear a

L Modes i m Sadiriel Sentences.

i Paatrect assertions are introduced _ by ore or ds that: ec i questions, by <i whether, worepov .. . ) whether ... or, and - interrogatives (682). The indirect sentence is the object we peeape verb; or, if that is passive or intransitive, its

‘ Sie “734. Onid Osriqua. When the words or thoughts of an- other are stated in a dependent form, they are said to stand in o atio obliqua (indirect discourse) : in distinction from this, the original, independent form is called oratio recta (direct discourse). _ Thus or. obl. of 53 : Grenplyayro rt ovn eidetev but they answered that they did 6 know, or. recta od towev we do not know; or. obl. odk évvoct ri weloerat he s not consider what he shall suffer, or. recta ri welrouat what shall I suffer ? . a. A speaker may state his own words or thoughts, like those of another, in the oratio obliqua: ——— npbuny”AgoBov ef twes mapioa I asked Aphobus whether there were any 4 , Or. recta Gpa mapiody ries were any present? rodro ywyvdoKw, bre TéA- EBD diucate, Kal Seds ovAAauBdver this I perceive, that with righteous daring a di- winity also co-operates. : b. In many cases, the forms proper to the oratio obliqua do not differ from those of the oratio recta: thus in the example last given, the direct sentence would read ToAun Sckaig Kal Seds ovAAapBaver. But often, where _ the proper forms would be different, we find those of the oratio recta used in dependent sentences, instead of those proper to the obliqua: sof BE Prov Brit ixavol oper but they said (that) “we are able,” instead of ika- vol elev or eict they were able. Sometimes the two are found together in the same connection: pera, Tovrov &dAos avéorn emiderxvis ws endes fy (Or. Obl.) “ayeudva aireiy mapa robrov 6 Avuavdueda (or. recta) thy mpatw after him an- | other rose, showing that it was a foolish thing to ask a guide from this man ~ (Cyres), for whom we are ruining his enterprise. __ ¢. AN INFINITIVE Or PARTICIPLE is often used in the oratio ihliings Winatoad of a pependent sentence : tpacay Tovs piv juaprnevat, aro) St cd ev rods vduous they said that those _ indeed had transgressed, but they themselves were upholding the laws, or, recta of iad nuaprhract, aro) 5& odour, etc.; Ticcapépyns Kipoy émorparetovta mpa- Tos fryyeire Tissaphernes was the first to announce that Cyrus was carrying on _ war, or. recta Kipos émorparevel.

m4

735. Usr or Mopes. In general, indirect sentences have the ame modes-that would be used in the direct. This is regular- I the case, when the principal verb denotes present or future ime; and often so, when it denotes past time. Thus a ~a. Iypicattve. When the Ind. is used, the tense is generally the same as ae be found in the direct sentence: never ws ovdév éoriy adiccrepoy onuns s that nothing is more unjust than fame, #5.” AdoBos capes St ebeAeyx:

12*

274 MODES IN INDIRECT SENTENCES. [738

Shoera Aphobus knew clearly that he (will be) would be convicted, hxev dryyéaror ris s EAdreia, KarelAnmras there came some one announcing that Llatea (has been).had been taken, worby xpdvov ardpour ti wore Aéyer 6 Beds for a long time I was in doubt what the god (means) meant.——But when the principal verb re- | fers to past time, the indirect sentence may take the imperfect, in place of a present in the direct: éreiSovro to Karedpxy, dpavres Sri pdvos eppdver ofa det Tov &pxovra (the soldiers) obeyed Clearchus, seeing that he alone had the mind which a commander ought to have (direct pdvos ppovet he alone has the mind),

b. Sussuncrive (of deliberation, 720 c): BovAetboucay wHs oe drodpa I am con=

sidering how I shall escape from you, od eixov 6 tt yéveovrat they knew not what (they should become) would become of them.

c. Oprative (potential opt. with &y, 722): ob« 019 5 ri ty Tis xphoato orpa- ridrous obrws &Sdpws exover [know not what any one could do with soldiers tn this state of discouragement, eiwev O71 6 dvhp by GAdomos etn he said that the man would be easy to capture.

736. But if the principal verb denotes pasé time, the indirect sentence may take the optative, in place of an indicative or a subjunctive in the direct: thus 7

1. the opraTivE is often used in place of the inpiIcaTIVE (781): @yvwoay of orpatiarat dtt Kevds 6 pdBos etn the soldiers perceived that their fear was ground-— less (direct revds 6 péBos earl), Ticoapépyns SiaBddArct (699) Tov Kipov apds roy aderpdy, as emiBovdcvor abtg Tissaphernes (accuses) accused Cyrus to his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against him, Kipos €rcyev btt H 65ds eoorro mpds Baoirea Cyrus said that their march would be against the king (direct 4 6dds Zorat), Npdtrwy TorvKAéa ef avatActaesey Exwv apyipiov I asked Polycles whether he had sailed away with money (direct Gpa dvémdevoas ;), ZAeyov OT. Kipos wey résvnev (735), *Apiatos 5& wepevyws etn they said that Cyrus was dead and that Ariaeus had fled. a

a. The hypothetical indicative (746b) never changes to an optative in the indirect sentence: od« jv 6 rt by eroeire pdvor there was nothing which you could do (by yourselves) alone. -

737. 2. the opratrve is generally used in place of the sussuncrive (729): éBovrevduny Os oe &rodpainv I was considering how I should escape from you (direct ras drodpé how shall I escape? Subj. of Delib.), of "EmiSdurior rov Sedby erhpovro ei mapadotey KopwStos thy wéAw the Hpidamnians inquired of the goa whether they should give up their city to the Corinthians (direct mapadéuev shall we give up ?). . ) ‘4

a. It must be observed that the form #yvdour 6 11 rootey (nesciebant quid facerent) may mean, according to the connection, either they knew not what they were doing, or they knew not what they should do.

738. When two or more connected sentences stand in the oratio ob- liqua, depending on the same principal verb, these uses of the optative (736-7) are not confined to the first (or leading one) of the connected sentences, but may appear in any of them. The same is true when an infinitive is used in place of the leading sentence (784 c). ie

Thus @reyov moAAol, Ort mayrds tiia Aeyer (735), Xeyudy yep ety (direct éort) many said, that he says things worthy of all (heed), for it was winter, éBda yeu Td otpdrevpa Kare mécov Tay ToAculwy, Ort eet Bactreds ein he cried out that he showd lead the army against the centre of the enemy, because the king wa

{ove “sy el Ml bvouro; wo, amoorhsowro ai méAcs (direct édy uh paxd- ~ Thoovra ease Sa if they should not fight, the cities would ELBios &mexplyaro bri Bovdctcorro wep wav oTpaTiwTay b Tt Sbvatro aya-

Bovretoouae 8 re dv Sivwucr) Anawibius said that he would provide liers whatever advantage he might be able.

oO ea ho, Modes in Final Sentences.

__ 139. Sentences expressing aim or purpose are introduced by ‘conjunctions iva, as, drws (and. Hm. d¢pa), that, in order that, fy bd e 7 / Hah, OF OTWs (as, iva) py, that not. : ! Present or future purpose is expressed by the subjunctive ; “past purpose, by the optative (728-9) : a - § ripavvos Torguous Kuvel, W& ev xpele aryeudvos 6 Sijuos 7 the tyrant stirs up wars, that the pipe may be in want of a leader, Siavociras thy yépupay Adoat, Gs ph dtaBire he intends to destroy the bridge, that you may not cross, Kade " etAkov TXS TpLhpets, as ev Tabras cHCowro they were launching the triremes, that in these they might save themselves, éd6ner dméva, wh emldeors yévorro rots Kara > AcActmevors it was thought best to return, lest an attack should be made on those left behind. In some elliptical expressions, the principal sentence is omitted: ba ovvréuw to be brief (sc. I say only this); t7 é« rodtwv tptwpas to begin with __ these things. | bis. 740. a. But the subjunctive is often. used in reference to a past purpose (729 a): TMepdixxas expaccey, bras wérAcnos yévnra Perdiccas was exerting himself, that a war (may be) might be brought about, "ABpoxduas +e wrote Karéxavoer, a ph Kipos 3:89 Abrocomas burned the vessels, that Cyrus (may not) might “not cross. In such cases, the time is lost sight of, while the idea of aim or ex- pectation is made prominent. b. The optative is rarely used of present purpose, to represent the attain- _ ment as a mere possibility (730): rodrov roy tpdmov xe 6 vduos, tva und ebama- rnsivat yévorro the law stands thus, that no deception might occur, The optative "may be used with the same force, when the principal verb is an optative of mere possibility: ef wh ob ye émimedcio bmws twS& ri cispeporro unless you should take care that something should be brought in from without.

_ _ 741, With és or dws, the particle &y (Hm. ré) is sometimes used, to mark oa attainment of the purpose as contingent: ds by pddns, tcovcov hear, that

may learn (as you will, if you hear).

Oe 742. UNATTAINABLE Purpose. A purpose which could only be at- _ tained in an imagined case, contrary to reality, is expressed by a past _ tense of the indicative (746): (avri eee (703) BonSetv mdvras, dws Sika érara {ny they ought all to have aided him while living, that he might | have lived most justly (as he could haye done, if they had all aided him).

___ For éras with the future indicative, see 756. For the result expressed ith Ssre, see 770-71. ae

' 743. Franine implies aim or purpose that the apprehended event ma: nt be realized. Hence — ic . em ait co

276 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [743

After expressions of fearing, a dependent sentence is introduced by pa lest, that ; or, if it is negative, by yy ov. The modes are used as above. lato apprehension is expressed by the subjunctive; past apprehension y the optative, yet very often by the subjunctive:

Sedona wh emidaddueda ris oindde 6300 I am afraid we may forget the home-

ward road, époBeiro ph ov Siveato he feared that he might not be able, PtAurmos |

ev bBo tv ph expiyo Ta rpdypara Philip was in alarm lest his objects might escape him, of "ASnvato: Tobs cvpudxous ededlecay uy &rorraot (729 a) the Athe- nians were afraid that their allies (may) might revolt. Other words of fearing are ppoyri(w to think anxiously, pvadrroua to beware, bwowredw to suspect, dpdw to see to it, cxowéw to consider, ete.

a. After expressions of fearing, u4 and drws uh are occasionally followed by the indicative, the object of apprehension being thought of as a reality: poBotua ph Hdovas ciphrouey évayrias J fear that we shall find opposite plea- sures ;———especially when the fear relates to something already past: poBot- peda wi) auporépwy huaprhxaper we are afraid that we have failed of both.

b. After such words as dpdw and oxoméw, wh often introduces something suspected as probable, i, e. conjectured (rather than feared): &pet wh od TodTo H Td Gyaxsdy take heed lest this may not be the (genuine) good. The indicative is then used in regard to something conceived as a reality: dpa uh wallwy ereye (look to it lest he spoke in jest) see whether he did not speak in jest.

Ill. Modes in Conditional Sentences.

744. In the dependent sentence (protasis) something is supposed or assumed as a@ CONDITION, from which the principal sentence (apodosis) follows as a conciusion. The former is introduced by the conjunction iF, Greek «i, or édv (for «i dv, cf. Hm. ef xe) contracted jv, ay (a). The latter often takes dy (a) to mark it as contingent (i. e. as only conditionally true). The whole compound sentence is called a HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD.

There are four leading forms of the hypothetical period, corresponding to four varieties of supposition.

745. 1. Somete Supposirion. ‘The condition is assumed as

yeal, but without implying any judgment as to its reality (727). We have then,

in the condition, «i with the indicative ; in the conclusion, the indic. without av, or the imperative.

Thus ¢i rodro werolnxas, émawvetoSat &éios ef if thou hast done this, thou art worthy to be praised, & ti wetcovrar M7501, és Tlépoas rd Sewdv Hie if the Medes (shall) suffer anything, the danger will come to the Persians, vo) ef rn GAAD Soxe?, Aéye Kad didacne if to thee it appears otherwise, speak and instruct me.

a. The past tenses of the indicative may also be used in this kind of suppo- sition; and care must then be taken not to confound this form with the follow- ing (746): e&jy vor driévan ex THs TéAcwS, et MH HpeoKdy oot of ydpor you were at liberty to depart from the city, if the laws did not please you (in the present €€- eorTi— , ei py &péokovor); ef Tt TOY SedvTwy empdxn, Tov Kalpdy odK ewe Hnow al- Tiov yeyevnodat if any of the necessary (measures) was carried out, he says that the occasion has been the cause (of it, and) not J. If &y is used with the past tense in the conclusion, the supposition is always of the second kind; if & is not used, it is generally of the first (but see 746 b).

ees

—

277

46. 2. SupPosITION conTRARY To Ruauiry. The condition assumed as real, but with an implied judgment that it is con. trary to reality. Wehavethen, — . : in the condition, «i with a past tense of the indicative ; in the conclusion, a past tense of the indicative with av. th the condition and the conclusion imply a contrary reality ; and i the imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect is used, according as the con- trary reality would be expressed by a present, an aorist, or a perfect. - Thus ef roy SfAumov 74 Bicaa mpdrrovra édpev, ood8pa ty Savuacrdy Fryot- pny airdy if I saw Philip doing what was just, I should regard him as very ad- -mérable (but I do not see—, and do not regard him thus), ob« dv émolnoev ’Aya- clas Tadra, ei wh eye adroy éxérevoa Agasias would not have done these things, af I had not ordered him (but I ordered him, and he did them), e ep) kawod _ Twos Tpdypnatos mpouTisero Aéyew, exérxov ty if it were proposed to speak on any new matter, I should have waited (but this is not proposed, and I did not wait), ef uh iets HASTE, emopevducda by mpds Baciréa if you had not come, we _ should be marching against the king (but you came, and we are not icin te ebabrdpKn Ta Wndicpara hv, birAurmos ob by bBplkea Tocodrov xpdvov if your de- erees were sufficient, Philip would not have insulted you so long (but they are insufficient, and he has insulted you). : a. But the imperfect is sometimes used where the contrary reality would _ be expressed by an imperfect: ’Ayapéuvwy ode by tay vhowy expdrel, ei wh Tt vauriudy eixe Agamemnon would not have been master of the islands, if he had not been Hear of a naval force (but he was possessor of a navy, and was master of the islands). And, less often, the aorist is used when the contrary _ reality would be expressed by a present (indefinite, 696 a): ef rls ce fpero, rh _ by Grexpive if any body asked you, what would you answer? (but no one asks, and you answer nothing). : b. The indicative, thus used in the conclusion, is called the uypo- _THETICAL INDICATIVE; the accompanying particle dy is sometimes omitted : noxvvouny, ei bd rodepmiou ye dvros eEnnarn nv L should be ashamed, if I had been deceiwed by one who was an enemy. |

{ame igh om ©. -

-

747. 3. Supposrrion wira Progpasiiry. The condition is assumed as possible and with some present expectation that it may be realized. We have then,

in the condition, éév with the subjunctive ; in the conclusion, the indicative (principal tenses), or the imperative.

‘Thus dvr’ fori ekevpeiy, eav wh tov wévov hebyn tis it is possible to find out all things, if one shun not the toil, iy tis avSiorirat, Tepacducdsa xeEtpod- axa if one resist, we shall try to subdue him, ebraBod Tas SiaBorads, khy Wevders bot avoid calumnies, even if they be false.

a. The aorist subjunctive in conditional sentences is often nearly equivalent _ to the Latin future perfect: veos dv movhons, yihpas €kes eddadrés (si juvenis la- _ boraveris, senectutem habebis jucundam) if you toil (shall have toiled) while

young you will have a thriving old age.

___b. Hm, sometimes uses ei alone, instead of édy (ei dy, ef xe), with the subj,

In Attic, this is very rare: Soph. &vdpa, nef tis @ copds, 7d pavSdvew WEAN Moxpoy ovder for a man, even if he be wise, to learn much (more) ts no disgrace.

he.

‘a

"y aa : y ra é.

278 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. . [748

748. 4. SuPPosrrioN WITH MERE Possremiry. The condition is assumed as possible, but wholly uncertain, without expectation of its. being realized. We have then,

in the condition, «i with the optative; in the conclusion, the optative with av.

Thus e% tis kextnpévos eln wAODTOY, xpGTo Bt aiTe wh, Gp by edSatmovor if a man should possess wealth, but (should) make no use of it, would he be happy ? ei Graytes piunoalueda Thy Aaxedamovioy mAcovetiay, Gmayres by darodolweda 7 we should all imitate the rapacity of the Lacedaemonians, we should all perish, —In Hm., &y (xé) is sometimes inserted in the condition, and sometimes omit- ted in the conclusion. The former occurs also, though rarely, in Attic writers.

The optative thus used with @y in the conclusion, is called the PoTENTIAL OPTATIVE, cf. 722 a.

749.. There is a very different use of the optative with «i, in which it denotes a past expectation (729), or a past conception (731).

This occurs chiefly when the conclusion is itself dependent on a verb of past time: éopevduny, iva, ef ti S€orr0, wpedolny adtdy I was going, in order that Imight aid him, if he should have any need of it (present mopevouat, tva, édy Tt dénrat, @PEAG). In the oratio obliqua, after verbs of past time, the optative is often used with ei, where the oratio recta would have the indicative or the subjunctive (i. e. with supposition of the first or third kind): KAéavdpos elmey drt A€iirmoy odk eratvoln, ei Ta’Ta wemoinkws etn Cleander said that he did not praise Dexippus, if he had done these things (or. recta ok éraw@, ¢i remol- nke); edAwoe Kopos ort Eromds eort (735) pdxecdau, ef Tis ebepxorro Cyrus showed that he was ready to fight, if any one should come out (or. recta éromds eit, edy Tis eépxnra). Cf. 738.

a. The optative with ¢ is also used to express indefinite frequency of past action (729 b), usually with an indicative in the conclusion: «7? zov é€eAavvor "Aorvdyns, ep tmmov xpucoxanivou mepiiye Tov Kipov as often as Astyages rode out, he took Cyrus about on a horse with golden bridle.

750. Mrtxep Forms. The form of the conclusion does not always cor- respond to that of the condition. Thus, very frequently, when the con- dition has the jirst or third form, the conclusion takes the fourth, being represented as a mere possibility :

ei ToUTO Aéyels, Guaprdvors ky if you mean this, you might be in error, édy edeahonte modrrew atiws budv adbtav, tows by péeya Ti KThoaode ayaddy if you will consent to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you could perhaps gain some great good. A condition of the second form is rarely connected with a con-

23

clusion of the fourth: Hm. rat vb nev ev dardroito, ei wh tip’ dtd vdnoev *"Adpo-

dirn and now would he perish there (his destruction being vividly conceived as

an undecided possibility), ¢f Aphrodite had not keenly observed him.

751. OruER ways of expressing the condition or conclusion. The most frequent is by a participle (789 e), or an infinitive (783).

The condition may be implied in other forms of expression: 67 iuds abrods mdéAu by arordaere by yourselves (i. e. if you had been left to yourselves) ye — would have perished long ago. It may be implied even in a co-ordinate sentence: — abn éoStovor TAcl@ } SbvavTat pepe, Siapsayetey yap ty they eat no more than — they can bear, for (if they should eat more) they would burst. The imperative

etin e equivalent to a condition of the third form: qatdes SerisBwim * jn ware wrAéa let children be born (=if they are born), all things l of cares. — JAA ee aide

Conprtion Omrrrep. This occurs especially in the second and

varieties of supposition. Thus #Boudéynv dv I should wish (ci édvvd- had the power, as I have not), BovdAoiuny av I should wish («i dv- I should have the power, as possibly I might have). The poten- i. with dy, in simple sentences, may be explained in this way (722). _ 453. Conciusion Omirrep. This occurs when ei, «ie, ef ydp are used in expressions of wishing with the optative or indicative (721 a, b). a, When two.opposite suppositions are expressed, the second by ef 8¢ wh _ (754), the conclusion of the first is sometimes omitted altogether, as suffici- enti y obvious: ef wey ody eyw spas ixavds SiddoKnw* ei St wh, Kad Tapa Trav Tpo- | yevernucvey pavddvere if then I instruct you well enough (xadds Exe it is well, OF od tw Diddonxeade be instructed thus); but if not, learn from the men of former

P Laan cD, Fp es Di i) i

J tim "8. ——For aposiopesis, see 883.

tes

_ 754, Ver OMITTED IN CONDITION OR concLUsIon. This may occur in the cases 508 a, b, c: |

‘ he _ xaplferdal oor Botroua: Kad yep dy Kal pawoluny, ei uh (sc. Bovdoluny) I y bean to gratify you; for indeed I should be even insane, if I did not wish it, po- Botpevos, Ssmep by ei ais, rd Téuveodar fearing, like a boy, to be cut (prop. és- | ep ty poBoiro, ci mais ein as he might fear, if he were a boy).

Cope, Especially, where the same verb belongs at once to the condition _ and conclusion, it is often omitted with one of them:

ef ais Kab hrdos dvhp, Kad Kipos tiids ors SavudcecSa if any other man ; py to be admired), Cyrus also is worthy (856 b), bwdkovcoy, eimep mdéror” awSpérwv tii (sc. iwhxoveus) obey, if ever yet (you obeyed) any man, ovKovy “jas ye opdaAret, GAN ciwep oé (for elrep Twa opddrrel, gpPddAAE wé) ws then it does not deceive, but, if (any one), thee, et 5h re copdrepos patyy elvat, rolTw dy (Se. painy, etc.) if in any respect I should say that I was wiser, in this (I should

say it). Hence ei ff gets the meaning of except: od yap dpGmev, ef wh OAl- us TovTous for we sce not (any, if we do not see these few) except these few. But ef wh did except for must be explained by supplying an idea of hindrance : | edéKouy by mdvta KaradaBely, ci wh did Thy éxelvov werAdAnow it appeared that they _ would have taken all things, {if not prevented by) except for his delay.

|

b. A supposition directly contrary to something just before supposed, asserted, or demanded, is expressed by e? d¢ pn:

} ag Gmijre: Te xphuara: i St wh, ToAcuhoew pny adtois he bade them restore the property ; but if not (if they should not restore it, ef uh dmodoiev), he said he | would make war upon them. Ei 5& wh is sometimes found where édy 8& uh _ would be more regular: édy meéy buiv Sond A€éye GAnSés, Evvowodroyhaare* ei bt wh, dvtirelvere if I seem to you to speak truth, agree with me; but if not, oppose, It is often used after negative sentences, where we might expect ei dé: i otrw Acye~ cf BE wh, od Sappodyrd we ters do not speak thus; but (if not, if otherwise) if you speak thus, you will not find me confident. So too ei dé is sometimes used where we might expect ef 5¢ uh: ed wey BotrAcrar, EWerwe €i 8, 6 tr: BotrAcra, rodro wotelrw if he wishes, let him boil me; but if (he wishes some- thing else), let him do what he wishes.

me a om,

a}:

280 MODES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. [755 —

IV. Modes in Relative Sentences.

755. Relative sentences are introduced by relative pronouns or ad verbs. ‘They show, in general, the same uses of the modes as occur in simple sentences.

Thus Sussunotive or Detip. (in indirect questions, 735 b), ok Exw 6 rt wpa-

Tov AdBw I (have not) know not what I should first take ; Oprative or WIsHING —

(721), 6p@ oe Sidkovra dv wh Toxo I see thee pursuing what (I pray) thou mayst not obtain; PotentTiaL OpraTivE (722), duets eore map’ Gy dy KdAMOTA TOUTO udxo. you are of those from whom one might best learn this; Hyprotnetican In- DICATIVE (746 b, 752), ob Hdedov Aéyew mpds duas Toadra of* dy Suiv Hdior’ iv &xovew I did not wish to say such things to you as would be most agrecable for you to hear (i. e. ei Aeyov if I said them). Even the imperative may stand in a-relative sentence: de? moredoa rots &pyois, dy buets capéoratoy ercyxov TOD GANLOVs voutoare you must believe the actions, which (I bid you) consider as the surest test of the truth, poet. oiaS’ 6 dpacoy; knowst thow what thou art to do? or the subjunctive with imperative meaning: éxaSéCero “Avutos d5¢, MeTadamev THs Dieictes Anytus has set down here, to whom let us give a part in the investigation.

756. The FUTURE INDICATIVE is often used in relative sentences to ex- _ press purpose, see 710c, Thus, in particular, draws how, that, im order that, is very often used with the future indicative, after verbs which ex- press attention, care, or effort:

oxdmre: Stws TA mpdypara cwdhoerat see to it that the state be preserved (lit. how the state shall be preserved), ppdvri{e Saws pdtv avdivoy ris BactAclas nowhoes considér anxiously that you may do nothing unworthy of the royal office. For éxws with subjunctive of purpose, see 739.

a. Before dws with the future, in earnest commands and warnings, the — principal verb is often omitted: drws mapéce eis Thy éowéepay (sc. oxdme look to it) that thou be present at the evening, &xws wept Tov wor€uov pndty pets (sc. pu- Adrrov take heed) that thou say nothing concerning the war.

757. A relative sentence is indefinite, when the relative word refers to an uncertain CHeeetereneny) subject or object. A sentence of this — kind may have a hypothetical force, implying that 7f the event (conceiv- _ ed as possible) takes place, with whatever subject or object, the princi- _ pal sentence then holds good. This is called a

HyporsericaL Re.ative SENTENCE. It takes the subj. with dv, in a case of present uncertainty (728) ; the opt. without dv, in a case of past uncertainty (729). The principal sentence commonly has the indicative (without év), or the imperative. . Thus 6 te &y means épeiv, mpdrepoy emondre TH yvdun whatever you may be going to say, first consider it in your mind (i. e. if you are going to say any — thing, whatever it may be, consider it), Hm. dv 8 ad 84uou 7’ trdpa 1801 Bodwyra r épedtpor, Toy oxhrrpy erAdcacke but whatever man of the people he (might see) saw, and found him bawling, him he struck with his scepire (=if he saw any one bawling, he struck him), ds dy robrwy rt Bpa, TeSvdtTw whoever may do any of these things, let him die ixerebovow (699) drm évrvyxdvorey wh pebyew they —

at whomsoever they might ‘in with not to flee, ¥pacay épeiv drota by Bb= at kK od-rtorra (729 ay haw detared that they would say such things as they best 1) could, mdvras, dcous AdBorey ev TH Saddooy, diépretpoy they were destroy r any as they might take on the sea.

a Hypothetical relative sentences of time, place, and man- a aaa by relative words denoting time, place, and . They show the same uses of the modes. Thus epieucvomey Exdorore ews avorxdein Td Secuwrhpiov> ereidy SF avor- , Hemev mpds Tov Zwxpdrn we waited each time until the prison should be ne ; but when it was opened, we went to Socrates (if it was opened at any me, we waited till then, and went then), de? rods yevouévous, méxpt dy (Gor, roveiv those who are born must toil as long as they live (if they live for any sneth of time, they must toil so long), érecde brn ty tis jryjta follow where y one may lead you (if one lead you anywhere), és &y tis xphonrat Tots mpary- acw, odrws avdyin Kat Td Tédos exBalvew in whatever way one may conduct his fairs, in the same way must the end also turn out. ~ For conjunctions of time, place, and manner, see 875-9. For mply with the infinitive, see 769.

_ 759. The particle a, which belongs to the subjunctive, is placed in mmediate connection with the relative word: it even unites with some relative adverbs, giving compound forms,—éray, émdrav, émdy or éemny (Hd. emedy), eredav, from dre, émdre, émei, éevdy.——But dy is sometimes omit- - ted, even by Attic writers, where the rule requires it: éomevorat, pepe 1 eravehSwow ot mpécBers a truce has been made, until the embassadors shall have come back. Still more rarely is ay found with the optative.

ae &

760. a. The aorist subjunctive with ay is often nearly equivalent to ihe Latin future perfect (747 a): emewddav rdvra dxovonre, kpivate when you (shall) have heard all, then judge. : _ b. Thesubjunctive with dy is sometimes found in cases of past uncertainty 729 a): woreucty otrw eddxer Svvardy civa, mply dy imnéas petameupwor it did not as yet seem to be possible to carry on war, before they should send for cavalry. _ ¢. The optative, used in hypothetical relative sentences, implies past expectation, aud very often with the idea of indefinite frequency (729 b): Ondre of “EAAnves Tots rodepiows erioter, padiws amedhevyov as often as the | Greeks might attack the enemy, these escaped with ease.

_ d, But sometimes it is. used, espec. in poetry, to express a mere possibility (730): poet. dv 7 wéAus orhoete, ToDde Xph KAvEw if the city should instal any one as ruler, him it is necessary to obey. This is regularly the case, when the princi- il verb is an opt. of mere possibility: exay dy SpéWas (or ef yap Fors) &vdpa Istis EvéAot Grepixe Tods adicodyTds ce you would gladly support (or, O that you might have) a man who would be willing to keep off those that injure you.

it Sp ATA MANE At NINA Rr Sa) Ala PRIAES TE Re om =) em Mt

OUP a PS AEE ER AR OM A BMC TRAM BABA and Bed iv

761. A hypothetical relative sentence takes the indicative, when it

xpresses an event asswmed as real (cf. 745): obs pr eVpirKov, Kevoradioy Irois éTroinoav + ei Twas pr evp) if they failed of finding any, they

We a cenotaph for them. Such sentences, though very common, have

hing here in the use of the mode. But, if negative, they take pi, x 02 see ® ‘ ag

7

ogee:

282 DEPENDENCE OF THE INFINITIVE.

i »

C, INFINITIVE.

762. The infinitive and participle are verbal nouns,——a substantive and adjective derived from the stem of the verb (261 b). But they are unlike other verbals, being much more nearly related, both in form and in construction, to the finite verb. Thus, in particular, | e

a. They are made from qld verbs, and with different forms for the different voices and tenses. : - a b. Words expressing the object are connected with them in the same manner as with the finite verb (486 b). af

Dependence of the Infinitive.

763. The infinitive may stand as the subject or the object of a verb: as & SUBJECT, ;

chiefly with INTRANSITIVE Or PASSIVE Verbs: maow Gdety xaAdemdy (sc. éort, 508 a) to please all is difficult, étijv wévew it was possible to remain, ote mpoie- var it seemed best to proceed, odx byiv mposhket (mpémer) TovTOvs PoBeioda: it does not become you to be afraid of these, Néyerat Thy Kipov mxjou it is said tha Cyrus conquered. ‘The infinitive may also stand as the predicate: rodra pavSdvew kadrcira this is called learning: ;

764, as an OBJECT,

a. with verbs of THINKING, PERCEIVING, SAYING, SHOWING (verba sentiend et declarandi): ofera: Sety he thinks it is necessary, &xobw mdyras wapeivan I hear that all are present, duopdskare Siuxdoew ye have sworn to give judgment, xwetaoau 7a wdyra a&ropavduevos maintaining that all things are in motion. 1

b. with verbs which imply POWER Or FITNESS, FEELING Or PURPOSE, EFFOR! or INFLUENCE,—to produce (or prevent) an action: dtvayra: dmedSeiv.they ca go away, pet(dy Tr. &xw eimeiv I have something greater to say (can say it), ob wé guxas Sovacdety thou art not formed to be a slave, wroureiv édeAcx he wishes to be rich, poBodua Aéyew Iam afraid to speak, éyvwcay Thy worapdy duaBiva the determined to cross the river, tls abrov nwadoe Sedpo BadiCew who will hinder hin from marching hither ? syiv cvpBovrcbw yvaven buas adrovs I advise you to knot yourselves, airodyrar Tovs Seovs Siddveu they ask the gods to give——So with th impersonal de? it is necessary, xph it behoves (strictly, something requires, urges 494): Sef (xph) w eAdety I must (should) come. a4

c. sometimes with other verbs: 4 wédus éxwSdvevoe maoa SiapSaphvar t. city was in danger of being wholly destroyed.

765. The infinitive is often used (as dn indirect object) to de note the PURPOSE of an action: =

Eevooay Td fiusov Tod orparedparos KaréAume puadrrew Td orpardmwedov Aen ophon left half the army to guard the camp, wapéxw euavtdy 7G iarp@ réuvet kal watew I yield myself up to the physician to cut and cauterize, mety d:ddv tivi to give one (something) to drink. > mae

>

766. The infinitive may stand in apposition with the subject or

ject: atrn pdvn éort Kaxy mpakis, emornuns orepyriva this alone 7s oD fortune, to be deprived of knowledge (500 d). ‘ {0} ees

The infinitive may depend upon a SUBSTANTIVE or AD- “ey Ming lic tin ah ATE BATE, Shoes, ' ; ¢ bdew it is not a time to be sleeping, dvdrynn emiperciaSau it is ure, pAuctay Exover madevecSau they have the proper age for ag oa jv dvioracdat there was an unwillingness ‘o rise up, y there is no (grudge) objection to speaking,——mpédSvpos peeve eager (ready) to abide danger, ixayds (bewés, musavds)

4

‘ul, persuasive) in speaking, &kos tAnyas AaBety worthy to re- arerov edpeiy hard to find, oixta jdlorn evdiarradoda a house very to live in, Adyo xpnomdrarar axotca words most useful to hear, GAN 6 dvos Bpaxts éort Sinyhoacda ra mpaxdévra but the time is (too) short to re-

what was done (659).

oles, oidste, Scos, with the infinitive, see 814. a. The infinitive with substantives may be compared to the genitive of onnection (563), or the genitive objective (565): with adjectives, it may some- aes be compared to the genitive in 584—7, but oftener to the dative of man- r (608) or of respect (609).——The infinitive used as a dative of respect is metimes found with substantives: Satya Kal dxotou a wonder even to hear of. he active is generally employed in these constructions, even where we expect the passive: af1os Savud(ew worthy of admiration (that one should re him) = &twos Savyd(ecda: worthy to be admired.

oS

~ 768. The infinitive is used with 7 than after comparative words : poet. vdonua petoy 7) pépew a disease (greater than that one should bear it) too great to be borne, obdty &AAo 7) Soxeiv copdy civat nothing else than appearing to be wise.——ésre is usually added.with the infinitive: #oSovro*Exdixoy éAdr- gard Exovra 2) Sst rovs pidous wperciy they perceived that Hedicus had 00 small a force to assist his friends. Cf. 659, For infinitive with rod after comparatives, see 781.

f 769. After mpiv (prius) before, # is generally omitted (in Attic prose Jmost always so): —

amply Thy apxiy opSas broSéoSai, wdrasoy jyyoduat wep) Tis TeAcuTis Aéyew before laying down the commencement properly, I think it vain to speak about

oe ors it . Cae} @ end. Hm. uses mdpos in a similar way: wdpos rdde Epya yevéodar before

these works were brought to pass. « Instead of ply alone, we often find mpérepoy ‘=. mply, or mpdodev ... xply (and in Hm, amply... mplv, or mdpos... mplv): Tw Tes cUTELSels cio, SsTe mply cidévar Tb mpostarTdpevoy mpdtepoy melSovTan Some are so obedient, that they obey before knowing the order.

a 770. The infinitive is used with ésre to denote the resutt:

Tois HAuKidtats ovvenéxpato, Sste oirelws SiaxcioSa he had mingled with those of his own age, so as to be on familiar terms with them. The infin. with sre may also denote the puRPosE (as a result to be attained): wav rowidow, iste Siknv ph Siddvar they do every thing, in order not to suffer punishinent ; r the conpizion (to be attained, in order that something else may be): éfjv is mpoydvos Upxev TOY ‘EAAhvev, dsre abtovs éwaxovew Bactrc? it was in the mer of your ancestors to be leaders of the Greeks, on condition of being them- lves subject to the (Persian) king. For 颒 @re with the infinitive, see 813.

owt. Both mply and ésve are followed by a finite mode, when the action of verb is to be expressed as something real, probable, or possible: «is ris

284 SURJECT AND PREDICATE WITH INFINITIVE.

barepalay obx Fxev, Ss¥ of “EAAnves éppdyrifov on the next day he did not come, _ so that the Greeks were anxious, ob xph w evSévde GmcASeiv mply by 5@ Sluenv I must not go hence before I have suffered punishment (760 a).

472. INFINITIVE IN LOOSE CONSTRUCTION. The infinitive (with or without the particle és) is used in several phrases with loose construction, somewhat like the adverbial accusative (552): os eiweivy or ws eros eimeiy so to speak, to use this (rather strong) expression, (as) ovveAdvtt eimety (sc. tut, cf. 601 a) to speak concisely, éuol Soxeiv as tt seems to me, in my view, ddAbyou (utkpod) dety & as to want little of it, almost, 7d viv elva for the present, nata tobro elya this relation, and the like. °

For éxdy eivat, see 775 a.

Subject and Predicate with the Infimitwe.

773. The subject. of the infinitive stands in the accusative case (485 c).. A predicate-noun, belonging to the subject of the infinitive, stands in the same case.

yyyethay tov Kipov vixijoot they reported that Cyrus had conquered, cvvéBy pndéva Tay otpatnyav Twapeiva it chanced that no one of the generals was pre= sent, Tov adiucoy &vdpa pny USALov elvos I assert that the unjust man is mis- erable, kad of wey exovTo ws SoAlous bvras Anpdrjva and some desired that they should be taken as being treacherous. q

a. The subject of the infinitive may be another infinitive: diawempayyevos fire: Tapa Bactréws Sodjval of cwH(ew ros “EAAnvas he is come having obtained from the king that it should be granted him to rescue the Greeks, where oa (eu is the subject of S03 jva. ¢ 3

b. A sentence, when stated in oratio obliqua, is often expressed by the in- finitive (usually with subject-accusative); see 734. When two or more con= nected sentences are stated in oratio obliqua, the infinitive may be used, noi only for the leading sentence, but for any of those connected with it: rod irra opis pn SiadrexSévras i€var* ered dé yeveoSat em) TH oikla, dvewypevyy Ke TadauBdvey thy Stpay “after such conversation,” he said, “they went aways but when they came to the house, they found the, door open.” é '

774. Omrrrep Supsxcr. The subject of the infinitive is fre quently omitted: thus :

1. very often when it is an indefinite word:

maow adeiv xadrerdv (sc. Tid for any one) to please all is difficult, obx Spa Kaxevdey it is not a time (for one) to be sleeping, Adyot xpnoimeTaror anodes words most useful (for me) to hear.——aA predicate-noun, connected with the infin, and belonging to the indefinite subject, is put in the accusative: 74 Tomdra tears (Sc. rwd) merphoavra kal apiduhoavra eidévau such things (a man may know by measuring and counting. he

775. 2. when it is the same as the subject of the principal verbs «_

> . . ‘ ey yes, duopdxare Sixdoew ye have sworn to give judgment (that you will give), ga

Bodua Aéyev I am afraid to speak, wav mowitow ste dtenv wh diddvar they d

every thing in order not to suffer punishment (that they may not suffer).——

Seaeopateaag with the infinitive is then put in the nominative case: 6 *AA€tap- pos Epackey elves Aids vids Alexander declared that he was son of Zeus, eye ov;

AND PREDICATE WITH INFINITIVE. = -285

ire, GAN bd cod KexAnuévos I shall not admit that I have 7 ee mi by thee, of Boxodvres wdvtwy copdraror elvas those who nay willing, connected as pred.-adj. with the inf. eiya: used in truction (772), comes the phrase éxayv elvas (so as to be willing) will- dro Exey elyat ov rorhow I shall not do this of my own will.

3ut sometimes, for the sake of emphasis or contrast, the subject of the verb is also expressed with the infinitive; it may then stand either .

vA 0S

1e nominative or the accusative: Hd. of Aiydbmrio: évdurCov Ewutobs mpdrous Sar dvdpémav the Hoyptians believed that they themselves were created first ug men, ei oleade Xadrniddas 7) Meyapéas Thy ‘EAAdSa odcew, ducts F dro- TK TA Mpdywara, oVK Spas oleade if you think that the Chalcidians or

arians will save Greece, but that you will escape the trouble, you are mistaken.

y so :

" 776. 3. when it is the same as the object of the principal verb:

‘ ls abroy Kwdrvcet Sedpo Badifew who will hinder him from coming hither? ro Huo karéAure puddrrew Td orpardmedoy he left half to guard the camp, dpiv TuBovrctw ywavar duds adrovs I advise you to know yourselves, A predicate- oun with the infinitive takes the case of the preceding object: Kdpov édéovro Gs mpodupordrov yevécda: they besought Cyrus to show himself as favorable as possible, mayr) tpxovri mposhke: ppovium elvas it becomes every ruler to be prudent ; ——but sometimes it stands in the accusative, when the object is a genitive or ative: cvudeper abrots plaous civar waAdAov 7) woAeulous it is advantageous for nm to be friends rather than enemies.

_ 777. Persona Construction ror Imprrsonau. Instead of using an ‘impersonal verb (4942) with the accusative and infinitive, the Greek ‘often puts the subject of the infinitive in the nominative case, and joins it as a subject with the principal verb. _ This occurs with doxe? it appears, Zoue it seems, Aéyerau it is said, dyyéAAe- “rat it is reported, duoroyeirat it is agreed, and the like; with ovuBalve: it hap- ens; and with Slrady éor: it is just, dvaynaidy éort it is necessary, emurhderdv €ort it is fitting, and some similar phrases: 6 Kipos jyyéASy vixjioe (Cyrus was reported to have conquered) = jyyéAdy Toy Kipoy vixjoa it was reported that Oyrus had conquered, airrés wor Son evddde karapeveiy it seems to me that Imy- self shall remain here, dixaos et yew &vSpérovs (thou art just to lead men) éé ts just that thou shouldst lead men, émtdogot ciot Td abd wetreoSat (they are prob- able to suffer) i¢ is probable that they will suffer the same. Yet the imper- é construction is also admissible: qyyéASn Tov Kopoy vurjjom, ot Sixady w &yew avSpaérovs, etc.

a. The personal construction here may be explained by prolepsis (126): thus, proper form #yyéASn br. 6 Kipos évixnoe, by prolepsis jyyéAdn 6 Kipos 6 -évinnoe, and, with vucjoa: in place of dr: *évlunoe (734 ¢), HyyéASN 6 Kipos Vik oul. pb. The ordinary construction of the acc. with the inf. (773) may be ex- ained by a similar prolepsis, when the principal verb is transitive : thus, prop- ‘form #yyetday 811 6 Kipos évixnoe, by prolepsis #yyeAay rov Kipov bri évinnoe, id with the infin. #yye:Aay tov Kipoy vuxijou. The construction was perhaps rst established in connection with transitive verbs, and thence extended to ses where the principal verb was intransitive or passive.

SS

286 INFINITIVE WITH NEUTER ARTICLE. "ee

Infinitiwe with Neuter Article.

778. The neuter article, prefixed to the infinitive, gives it more dis tinctly the character of a substantive. Each case receives a form of it own, and may be made to depend on any word which would take the same case of a substantive. But as to words which depend on the in finitive (its subject, predicate, and object), they are expressed in the same way, whether it has or has not the article. Hence the rules in 773844 and 762 b are applicable here. ci

779. The infinitive with the neuter article prefixed may stan as a substantive in any case: thus a

Nominative: 7d opoveiy ed8aipovlas mpGrov Srdpxe to be wise is the firs (condition) of happiness, Td Gpaprdvew (sc. abrots) avSpémous byras oddty Sav paordy (sc. €ort) it is no wonder that being men they should err. =

a} va

780. ACCUSATIVE: meip Karepydoacda ds pddiora rd eidéveu (sc. radra) Botra mpdrrey endeavor to secure, as far as possible, the understanding of thos things which you wish to pursue. Especially with the prepositions eis or Ka in reference to, did by reason of, éxt or apds in order to, mapd in compariso with: 1a 7d E€vos eivat od By ofer Gducndijvas do you think you would not be im 4ured on account of being a foreigner ? mpds Td petplav SeioSar KaA@s wemaudev- pévos well trained to having only moderate wants. Ss

a, The infinitive with 7é is sometimes found in loose construction, analo gous to the accusative of specification (549): a&véAmorol ciot rd és Thy yiv hue ésBdadrew they are without hope as regards the invasion of our land, rls Mhda cod arerelpdyn Td ph oor &xoroudeiv what one of the Medes remained away froi you, 80 as not to follow you (as to the not following)? Sometimes it resemble the adverbial accusative; see 772. \

781. GENITIVE: emiSuula Tod mety desire of drinking, ) rod weidew réxvy ti art of persuading, &hSns Tod karaxovew tivds unaccustomed to obeying any one éuol ovdiyv mpecBirepoy Tod Sri BéATioTOy. eue yevedar to me there is nothing more important than to become as good as possible, émiedetrar Tod as ppovipe raros eivat he is careful (of being) to be as wise as possible. So with many pre positions, as é& from, in consequence of, mpd before, prior to, wept concernin évexa on account of, imép for the sake of, dit by means of, tvev without, asia from; and with some adverbs, as &€w elya: Tod kaxds mdoxew to be out of rea of injury. . ae sf 4 The infinitive with rod is often used, without a preposition, to denot the puRPosE (especially a negative purpose): Tod ph Siapedyew roy Aaydr | Tov durtiwy, cxoTods Kadiorapex that the hare may not escape out of the net we set watchers.

482. DATIVE: Tadra obk hv eumoddy TG robs Sunéas cdCecSa: these thi were no bar to the preservation of the Phocians. Especially as dative of mean cause, Or manner: Kexpdtnke TE Mpdrepos mpds Tovs ToAEulous i€var he has umphed by marching first against the enemy, ai kad@s modirevduevar Snuoxpar te mpoexovot TE Sixcudrepar elvar well conducted democracies are superior in bein more just. Also with prepositions, as éy in, émt on the ground of or on come tion that, xpés in addition to: év 7@ Exaoroy Sixalws tpxew 7) wodirela o@ ere when each administers his office justly, the order of the state is preserved (im an through the just administration). + | Cane

nfinitive takes dv, where a finite verb, standing in. would take it. Thus the inf. with é corresponds ENTIAL OPTATIVE with &y (722): udaora olua dv cod mudSécSau construction wdédora dy rvSolunv) I think that I should learn best d with expressed condition (748): Sgnetré por (777) word BéA- mor€uov BovdrctoacSa: (indep. BéAriov &v Bovrctaace), ei roy as evduundelnre it appears to me that you would take much better cerning the war, if you should consider the situation of the country. jhe HYPOTHETICAL INDICATIVE with &y (746): Kipos ei éBiwoev, &pirros xwv yeverSat (indep. &pio'ros dy eyévero) it seems probable that Cyrus, lived, would have proved a most excellent ruler. So with implied con- 1): rods radra &yvooiyras Swxpdrns avdparodddeas by kexdjoSa Hyetro el ties TadTa iyyvdovy, aySpam0dHdets by exéxAnvto) Socrates thought that ignorant of these things (if such there were) would be called slavish. _e. The particle éy, though belonging to the infinitive, may be attached the principal verb, or to other emphatic words in the sentence: see the fore- x examples.

Infinitive for the Imperative. _ 784, This occurs in the second (seldom in the third) person. It is

rely found in Attic prose.

Ih this use of the inf., its subject, if expressed, is put in the nom.; a predi- ate-noun belonging to the subject is put in the same case: Hm. maida 8 éuod Dool re pidanv, td 7” trowva SéxecIau release to me my dear child, and accept he ransom, Um. Sapray viv, Avdundes, em) Tpdecor udxeoSar with courage now, Yiomedes, sight against the Trojans, ov, KAcaptia, tas widAas dvoltas érexSety 0 thou, Clearidas, having opened the gates, hasten out against (the enemy).

eI

We

mi D, PARTICIPLE. | For the nature of the participle, as a verbal adjective, but different rom Other verbal adjectives, see 762. For the agreement of the parti- ple with its substantive or subject, see 498.

eee . . ° 8

pe Attributive Participle.

_ 485. The participle, like the adjective (488.a), may express

n attribute of its substantive or subject (493) :

| xddus ebpelas &ynids Exovea (= wdbrrs edpudyua Hm., or wédrs edpelas d&yuids

et a city having broad streets, at radoduever AidAov vijcot the so-called islands

Aedlus, 6 wapdyv raipgs the present occasion, The participle is always at-

butive, when it follows the article (492 d).

786. The attributive participle is often found, with omitted subject, as a substantive (509) : 3

288 CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE. | [786

of mapdévres the (persons) present, 6 ruxdv whoever happens, rape rots &ploros Soxovow elvar with those who appear to be best, wA€ouev em) worAds vais KexTy= pévous we are sailing against (men) who possess many ships. Such participles are often to be translated by substantives: 6 dpdoas the doer, of Aéyovres the speakers, mposhkovrés tives some relatives, réAts ToAcuotytwy a city of belligane £8, td déovra the duties, mpbs Tb TeAevTaioy éxBdy ExacToy tev mply brapkdyTwy Kplve- rat by the final issue is each one of the previous measures judged of. a. Participles thus used sometimes take a genitive, like substantives, espe- cially in poetry: 7& cuupépoyta tijs réAews (563) the advantages of the state, 7d dotdCoy ris Wuxhs (559) the thinking (part) of the soul, poet. 6 éxelvov texap (568 a) his parent. : b. The participle with the neuter article is rarely used in an abstract sense,

like the infinitive: 7d wh wereray the not-exercising, failure to exercise (= 7d wh — pererav). In prose, this is nearly confined to Thucydides.

Predicate-Participle.

787. The predicate-participle, like the predicate-adjective (488 b), 1s brought into connection with its subject by the sentence, It is called CIRCUMSTANTIAL, when it is loosely related to the principal verb, adding a circumstance connected with the action; and supPLEMENTARY, when it is closely related to the principal verb, supplying an essential part of the predicate. %

a. These subdivisions of the predicate-participle are not in all cases clearly — distinguished, but run into each other. ‘

Circumstantial Participle.

788. The circumstance, denoted by the participle, may be re- } lated in various ways to the action of the principal verb. Thus_ there is always a relation of :

a. Tix (for the tenses of the participle, see 714-18): radra eimdy &mpew after saying these things, he went away, yeAav elre he spoke laughing (at the same time), mposéxere TovTos dvaryryvwoKouévors Toy vouy give your attention to” these things, while they are being read, AAKiBiddns eri ais dv éSavudfero Alci-= - biades, while yet a boy, was admired (in such cases éy cannot be omitted), éxt *Apxira. epopevovtos Atcavdpos eis “Eperoy adlnero while Archytas was ephor, Lysander came to Ephesus. *

_ Sometimes the participle may be rendered by an adverbial expression: dpxd- pevos at first, redXevtav at last, diadimey xpdvov after an interval of time, eb (kar@s) mo@y with right. Similarly roAAq réxvy xpouevos with much art, ras” vaos &améoreiAay exovTa AAklday they despatched Alcidas with the ships. Observe — also such forms as pAvapets éxwv thou art trifling (holding on to it) continually, tvorye avbcas open with despatch, hxe rd naxd pepdueva the evils are come with a rush (lit. borne on, with haste and violence).

789. But the participle may denote also . i

b. Muans: Ani€duevar (Gor they live by Bataan ovk Zor &diucodvra Sb- vauuv BeBalay erhoacda it is not possible (for any one) by wrong-doing to gain jiurm power. | ae

Yr

otter T&y Kepdar 7 xp% voulCovres elvan from these stained, because they ¢ em to be shameful.——Thus tt fered what? and rt pasdy having learned what? are usedin urprise or severity, the reason of some fact: Ti yap paddvres for with what idea did you insult the gods? iture participle often denotes purpose: mapeAjauvda cupBove e come | d to advise you, Toy GSicodvTa Tapa Tos Sixacras rovTa it is necessary to bring the evil-doer before the judges, in he may suffer punishment (lit. give justice).

NDITION: Tots *ASnvalois woAcuodow tuevoy Eora it will be betier for tans, if they make war. Even an attributive participle may imply

adition on which the verb depends: 6 wh dapels &vSpwros ob radeverar the : who if not whi. is not educated (if not whipped, he is not educated). The conditional participle with wf can.often be rendered by without: odk forw Gpxew ph diddvTa picddy it is not possible to command without giving pay (774). _ f. Concession (cf. 874): 1b b5wp ebwvdraroy tpioroy bv water is the cheapest (of all things), though it is the best, tucts Spopduevor Ta TWemparyuéva Kad Susxe- patvoyres iiryere Thy ciphyny duws you, though you were suspicious as to what had een done, and were dissatisfied, continued to observe the peace notwithstanding. r, _ Rem, g. It must be remembered that the Greek participle, while it stands in all these relations, does not express them definitely and distinctly. Hence the different uses run into each other, and cases occur in which more than one Might be assigned: thus robs pidous edepyeroivres kal robs éxSpods duvhoecde Koad (ew by benefiting your friends (means), or if you benefit your friends (con- ‘A ion), you will be able also to chastise your enemies.

9 4

ye Particyple with Case Absolute.

_ 790. The circumstantial participle may be connected in its various uses (788-9) with a genitive (less often an accusative) ybsolute, i, e. not immediately dependent on any word in the sentence. |

-_—

. Genrrive Azsotute. The participle with genitive absolute may denote |

' a. Trme: Tepsdéous tryoupévov, roAAd Kal Kard epya amedeltayro of *ASn- yoio. while Pericles was their leader, the Athenians accomplished many noble orks, TovTwy AcxSevtwv, dvérrnoay Kal awjrSov after these things were said, hey rose up and went away. ;

_ b. Means: tév coudrwy Snrvyomever, kad ai puxad apiwordrepar ylyvovra the body being enfeebled) by the enfeebling of the body, the spirit also is made eaker.

_ ¢&. Cause: oddty trav Sedytwr rootvrwy buay, Kakds %xer Ta mpdyuara be- wuse you are not doing any of your duties, your affairs are in bad condition.

» d. ConvitTion: ov« dy FASov Sedpo, budv ph Kercvodvrwy (= ei ph Syuels exevoare) I should not have come here, if you had not commanded it, poet. your’ by may, Seod Texvapevov (= ei debs TexvGro) every thing would come to ss, should a divinity contrive.

( SSION: MoAAGY Kara yiv Kal SéAaTrTay Snplwy dvyTwy, TodTO péyio- though there are many wild animals on lard and sea, this one is the

13

“Sar Tt

290 PARTICIPLE WITH CASE ABSOLUTE. [791

791. The Greek construction of the genitive absolute differs from the Latin ablative absolute in several respects: P

a. The subject of the participle is often omitted, when it is easily under-" stood from the context or from the meaning of the participle: évredSev zpoidy- Tov, epalvero txvia trmwy as they (the army of Cyrus) were proceeding from thence, there appeared tracks of horses, tovros (Zeus raining, cf. 504 c) while it was rain- ing. The subject is omitted, also, when it is indeterminate, see 792 b. ‘

b. The participle of é:ut to be cannot be omitted, where the sense requires © it, as in vod maidds dvros (but Lat. te puero) when thou wert a boy. Except in” connection with the adjectives éxéy and &kwy, which closely resemble parti-— ciples: éuod Exdvros with my consent, éuod &xovrTos against my will, a

c. The Greek, as it has perfect and aorist participles in the active voice, — uses the construction of the case absolute much less often than the Latin: 6 Kipos thy Kpoicoy vikhoas kateotpeyaro trovs Avdots, Lat. Cyrus, Croeso victo, Lydos sibi subjecit.

d. The genitive absolute is sometimes used, even where the subject of the participle is at the same time dependent on other words in the sentence: tai7’ cindvros avtov, Gsoké Tt A€yew TE "AoTudye (= Tadr’ eimdy Cote) when he had — said these things, he appeared to Astyages to say something (important), diaBe- Byxdros Tepixdéous, nyyéAdn adrg ( = dia BeByndre Tepierc? HryyeaAsn) when Pe- ricles had crossed over, word was brought to him. 4

792. Accusative AzsotutTEs. Instead of the genitive abso- q lute, the accusative is used when the participle is impersonal — (494 a), ive.

a. when the supsxcr of the participle is an INFINITIVE: oddels, éfdy eiphynv — yew, méAcuoy aiphoretat no one, (it being permitted him) when he is permitted — to keep peace, will choose war, mpostaxsév mot Méveva tyew eis ‘EAARsTovtoy, exdunv dia Tdxovs (it being commanded) when a command was given me to con- — vey Menon to the Hellespont, I went in haste, npavyh od« oAtyn expGyro, &dbva- Tov dy év vuntl BAA TY onutvas they made no little outcry, (it being impossible) — as it was impossible in the night to give signals by any other means. The infini- — tive is sometimes understood: od8els 7d pei(ov alphrera, éfdy Td EAarroy (SC. — aipetaSat) no one will choose the greater (of two evils), when it is permitted (to choose) the less. ;

b. when the suBJECT is INDETERMINATE: rovrtwy obdtv ylyverat, Séov mdyrav pddiora ylyversau none of these things takes place, though it is above all neces-— sary (something requires) that they should take place. Yet in this case the participle is commonly put in the genitive, if the corresponding verb is not or- dinarily impersonal: ofrws ZyovTos or. éxéyrwy (it being thus, things being thus) in this state of things. So, also, when the subject is a dependent sentence : onnavsévrwy TS Aorudryer bTt ToACutol eiow ev TH Xopa when it was reported to — Astyages that enemies were in the land (for the plural, cf. 518 a, b). “

‘793. After as (795 e) and dszep, the accusative absolute is sometimes found, even when the participle is not impersonal : ,

Tovs vieis of marépes elpyovow amd Tay Tovnpay, es Thy ToUTwY SuiAlay ards | Avow otcay aperis fathers keep their sons away from evil men, thinking that their society is the destruction of virtue, cwrf edelrvouy, Sstep TovTo mposTeTarypevoy airots they were supping in silence, just as if this was enjoined upon them.-— Rarely so, without preceding &s or Sstep: mposikov ait@ Tod KAHpov pépos Si « part of the inheritance belonged to him, Sétavra d¢ raira but these things havi been resolved on (also détav rabra, where perhaps woeiy should be supplied). —

ae -ADJUNOTS OF THE PARTICIPLE. 291

" ; 794, A participle with case absolute is often connected by conjunc- ions to a circumstantial participle in construction with the sentence:

1-@

eishASouer eis Tov wéAcuoy Exovres Tpihpers TeTpaxoclas, drapxdvTwy St xpn- sparen mohAay we entered into the war, having four hundred triremes, and (with) many resources dein id to us, T@ Telxer MposéBadov dovevel Kat avSpotay odt es vivrevthey attacked the wall, because it was weak, and there were no men on it.

a) —— > «- ig

F - " > \ SSS ws

meena 4 _ Adjunets of the Participle.

795. The relations of the circumstantial participle, in its various uses _ (788-90), to the action of the principal verb, are rendered more distinct by adding certain particles, which may be called adjuncts of the parti-

ciple. Thus,

; «a. TéTe, elra, Zrevra, ofrws represent the action of the principal verb ‘as _ SUCCEEDING that of the participle. They are placed after the participle, and, as it were, repeat its meaning: Kkaradurdy ppovpay obtws én’ otkov dvexdpnoe he left a garrison, and thus (after doing this) marched home again. . - -b. edSds (placed before the participle) represents the succession as IMMEDI- ATE: T@ Seki népq. evIVs AroBeBynkdti ewéxewro they fell upon the right wing immediately after its landing. ; c. dua at the same time and peratd between represent the two actions as _ CONTEMPORANEOUS: of “EAAnves Eudxovro dua wopevdueva: the Greeks were fight- ing while wpon the march, rA€éyorrds cov, perakd por yéyove h pavh even while thou wert speaking, the voice came to me. They are commonly placed before

the participle.

\ d. dre (also ofoy, ota) with the participle gives a CAUSAL meaning: raré- | Bapdse mdvu Todd, Gre waxpav Tay vuKTdy obaGy he slept a great deal, because the nights were long.. Tt denotes something actual (onszctive), and differs thus os the following. - @. ws with the participle represents its meaning as SUBJECTIVE, that is, as thought, felt, or uttered, by some person: Swxpdrny woSodaw as wpermotaroy tyra Tpds Gperijs emiérciav they regret Socrates, because (as they think) he was most useful for the cultivation of virtue, SavudCovra ds copol re kal edtuxeis iy- Opes yeyevnuevar they are admired as having been (in the view of their admirers) | both wise and fortunate men, rA€éyet &s Si8axrod ovens Tis dperis he speaks in the belief that virtue is a thing that can be taught, poet. tears pwveiv, ds euod wd-

yns Téhas (Sc. ovans, omitted contrary to 791 b) you are at liberty to speak aloud, 4 assured that I alone am near, tva mpds thy éxxAnolay Hrorev, ds Sh Evyyeveis bvres Tay Grodwidteov that they might come into the assembly, pretending that they ‘were kinsmen of those who had perished, dmeBadpare mpbs GAAHAOUS, &s adrds Bev Exacros ob morhowy 7d ddkav, Toy 5e TAnotoy mpdéovra (793) ye looked to one another, expecting each that he himself would not do what was resolved on, but that his neighbor would accomplish it. - f. xalwep (less often cal) with the participle gives a concEssIvVE meaning and is rendered though: nalwep oftw copds dy, Bedrtioy br yévoio though thou art so wise, thou couldst become better. In Hm,, the caf and wép are often se- -parated (cf. 477): of S€ kal axvipevol wep en abtG Hdd yéAacoay but they, al- though troubled, laughed pleasantly at him; or wép alone is used in the same ‘sense: &xvipevol rep.——— Opws yet with the principal verb, expresses the same meaning: Hd. dorepoy &muduevor Tis cupBorjis iuctpovro duws Yehracdat rods Sous though they came too late for the engagement, they yet desired to look on the Medes. war

Bf

292 | SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. [796 :

Supplementary Particuple.

796. The supplementary participle supplies an essential part of the predicate. It may belong either to the subject or to the — object of the principal verb:

a. to the SUBJECT: maveoSe del rept Tay a’rav BovdAevdpevor Cease COn- sulting forever on the same matters, io&t Aumnpis av know that you are offensive.

b. to the OBJECT: 6 médepos exavoev Huas del rept Tay a’rav Bovdev- opevous the war compelled us to cease consulting forever on the same mat- ters, oida av’rov Avmnpdy dvta I know that he is offensive. ‘

be ee 58 i me

- 797. The action of the supplementary participle is represented, through its connection with the principal verb, 1. as BEING Or APPEARING TO BE. Sé with ciul to be, iadpxw to be (orig. to begin to be), 2x (to hold one’s self, and hence) fo be, daivoum to appear (802), pavepds (S7Ads) eit to be miunifest, ona I seem. So with verbs of SHowING (causing to appear): delx- vu (Snrdw, &ropaivw) to show, movéw to represent, ekeAéyxw to convict, dryyéANo to announce, duoroyéw to acknowledge. Thus ei rots wA€oow dpéonovrés eopev if we are acceptable to the majority, &smwep mposhkdy ort Or Sswep mposhxov as itis proper. For the participle used with eiuf to supply certain parts of the verb, see 385, 892-3, 713. nnpvias — txw I have proclaimed (lit. having proclaimed I hold myself thus): this is chiefly poetic. Constructions like dvodpevor SobAovs Exover they purchase slaves and hold them, belong to 788. &mopalyover Tovs pevyovras mdAat Toynpods ~ bvras they show that the exiles were long ago bad, Pikurmos wdyTa Evexa EavTod moimy ekeahrAcyxra: Philip has been convicted of doing all things for himself.

798. 2. aS BEGINNING, CONTINUING, OF CEASING, to be.

So with &pxouce to begin (691), Surreréw (Sid-yw) to continue, wabw to make — one cease, mavoua (Afryw, éréxw) to cease, dia- (émt-) Aelaw to leave off, intermit ; also dmaryopedw to give over, édAAclrw to fail. Thus d:aTere eyo Exwv wiow iuiv I continue to bear good-will to you all, émloxes dpyi(éuevos cease to be angry, — *"AynotAaos ove ametre peyddwy Kal Kaddy edieuevos Agesilaus did not give up aiming at great and honorable things. ,

799. 3. as an object of PERCEPTION, KNOWLEDGE, REMEMBRANCE, and ~ the contrary.

So with aicSdvopias to perceive, voullw to consider, dpdw to see, mepropdw to (overlook) allow, dcotw to hear, pavSdyw to learn (802), ruvSdvopa to learn by inquiry, ebploxw to sind, AauBdvw to (catch) detect, GAloxopat (pwpdopa) to be detected, olda (éricrapa, yryvdonw) to know (802), dyvoéw to be ignorant, peuynpa I remember (802), emaravddévouce to forget.

Thus ¢ldov robs woAculous weAdovras they saw the enemy approaching, 78éws dxotw Swxpdrovs Siareyouevov I gladly hear Socrates discoursing, iv émBovracdar aArlonnrat if he should be detected in laying plots, ebh&ns early bstis &yvoet Toy éxeidev (cf. 618 a) wéAcuov Sedpo Htovra foolish is (any one) who does not know that the war subsisting there will come hither. a

a. obvoiddé wor may take the participle either in the nominative or in t dative: éaur@ Evvjdew ovdtv émiorduevos or em'rauévy he was conscious that

PARTICIPLE WITH dy, 293

ag. When it means to know 6 privity with another, it may have an — participle in the accusative. as

800. 4. as an object of ENDURANCE or EMOTION.

So with oépw to bear, avéxouas to support, naprepéw to endure, al pee (Gdoue, réprouat) to be pleased, ayardw ia he ead dryavanréw (&xFoum, Ka- Aetas depw) to be vexed, displeased, dpyiCouc to be angry, aicxtvoua to be — ashamed (802), perapéAouct (uerapérAc por) to repent: also Kduyw to be weary. —Thus ddvarat Aoidopodpevos pépew he is able to bear being reviled, xalpet _ Grawotpevos he delights in being praised, perapérc adt@ Wevoupévy he repents of crag Magia pavrdvev ui) kduve be not weary in learning.

erie Ag; participle with verbs of emotion might be regarded as the cirewm:

stantial used to express means or cause.

_ 801, 5. as taking place in some general MANNER indicated by the principal verb. . ___ §So, as taking place WELL or ILL, indicated by ed (kax@s) moi; WRONGLY, by Gdixew, Guaprdyw; WITH SUPERIORITY Or INFERIORITY, by vikdw, HrTdowat; BY OHANCE, by tuyxdvw, poet. kupéw; WITHOUT NOTICE, by AavSdyw; BEFORE the action of another, by @Sdvw; ete. Thus &duce?re woAguov tpxovtes Kad orov- Bas Avovres ye do wrong in commencing war and breaking truce, érvxov érdtrat | & TH &yopd KaSevdovres heavy-armed men, as it chanced, were sleeping in the _ market-place, ékax<e roy Kipov ameASav he departed without the knowledge of Cyrus, ZkaSov SiapSapévres (sc. Eavrods unnoticed by themselves) they were _ ruined unawares, pSdve Tos pldous evepyeray he anticipates his friends in con-

| ferring benefits.

_ a. With rvyxdvw, the participle may be omitted where it is readily sup- ' plied from the connection: mepiérpexov brn Tixout (SC. TepiTpéexwv) I was run- _ ning about wherever I might chance.

*

| 802. Generat Remark. With many of these verbs, an infinitive may be tiSed in the same sense; but often there is a difference of meaning,

Thus galverar tAovrady he appears to be rich (is rich and appears so), but | dalverat mAoureivy he has the appearance (perhaps deceptive) of being rich; | aioxivoua Aéyor I speak with shame, but gicxtvouc Aéyew I am ashamed to emg (and therefore do not speak); olde (uavddver) ved he knows (learns) that

he is victorious, but olde (uavddver) uxav he knows (learns) how to be victorious ; pepvnwa <is lydvvoy éraSdv I remember that I came into danger, but péuynuas roy Kivéuvoy pebyav I am mindful to shun the danger.

Participle with dv.

_ 803. The participle takes dv, where a finite verb, standing ‘independently, would take it (783). Thus the partitiple with corresponds :

_. a, to the POTENTIAL OPTATIVE with &y (722): ras HAAas wérAcis brepedpwv, Gs ov iy Suvapévas Bondjoa (indep. od« dv Sivawro) the other cities they over- looked, supposing that they would not be able to give aid; also with expressed condition (748): eyo cius ray H5éws by CreyxSévrav, ef Tt wh GANSés Aéyw (750), qodcws 8 dy ereyidyrwy, ef Tis wh GAnSEs Adyor (indep. of dy eAcyxAeiev, EAs erav) I am one of those who would gladly be confuted, if I say anything untrue,

ut would gladly confute another, if he should say anything untrue.

294 VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN Té0s. [802

b. to the HYPOTHETICAL INDICATIVE With &y (746): SfAurmos Morl8aiav Ero kat duvndels dy adrds exe, ei EBovajdn, OAvyStois rapédwxe (indep. éduvhSn ky) Philip, when he had taken Potidaea, and would have been able to keep it himself, if he had wished, gave it up to the Olynthians.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN TES.

For the meaning of the verbal adjectives in rés and réos, see 398.

|

804. The verbal adjective in réos, when used as a predicate with «ipi, has a twofold construction, personal and impersonal. The latter gives prominence to the necessary action expressed by the verbal; the former, to the object of that necessary action. The copula eiui is very often omitted, see 508 a.

a. In the PERSONAL construction, the object of the action is put in the nominative (693), and the verbal agrees with it: ov mpd ye Tis GAndelas Tiuntéos avhp aman is not to be honored before the truth, 4 wédrts Tots woAlras @peAntéa earl the state must be aided by the citizens. With the infinitive or participle of eiut, the object and the verbal may be put in other cases: & rots éAeudépois qyovvTo elvar mpaxréa things which they thought were to be done by freemen, moAdA@y rt por AckTéwy bvTwy there being many things yet to be said by me. ;

b. In the mvpERsonar construction, the verbal stands in the neuter (réov or réa, cf. 518 a), and the object is put in an oblique case, the same which the verb itself would take:

Thy eiphynv anréov ert it is necessary to observe the peace, &rréov huiv Tod

moA€uov we must take hold of the war, ods ob mapadoréa eort who must not be — surrendered.

“TS, a

— =

=

ee

ae

805. The verbal in réos takes the AGENT (or doer of the action) — in the DaTtvE, cf. 600.

For examples, see the sentences given above. With the impersonal con- — struction, the agent is sometimes put in the accusative (perhaps because the — verbal was thought of as equivalent to Se? with the infinitive): raraBaréoy év méper Exacroy each one must descend in turn, od8er. tpdry Exdvras &dienréov by no means should (men) willingly do injustice.

806. a. The verbal in réos may also have an indirect object, like the verb from which it comes: ods od mapadoréa rots "ASnvatos éort who must not be surrendered to the Athenians.

b. The*verbal in réos sometimes shows the meaning of the middle voice: meotéov one must obey (reldw to persuade, mid. obey), pu\axréoy one must guara against (pvadcow to watch, mid. guard against), arréov one must take hold of

arrw to fasten, mid. touch).

ATTRACTION. INCORPORATION. 295

oa :

ia > a Pe. | . “ae {

real YetReey

5

PECULIARITIES IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF ; RELATIVE SENTENCES.

Attraction. Incorporation.

i A

807. A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in number and _ gender (503), but stands in any case required by the construction of its ownsentence. Yet there is often an irregular agreement in case (attrac- _ tion), as well as a peculiar arrangement (incorporation), which bring _ the relative sentence into closer connection with its antecedent. They _ occur only when there is a close connection in sense, the relative sentence _ qualifying its antecedent like an attributive.

808. I. Arfracrion. The relative often varies from the case required by its own sentence, being attracted, or drawn into the case of its antecedent.

Thus the relative may be attracted 1. from the accusative to the | GENITIVE: pépvyo%e Tod dpxov od duwpoxare (instead of dv du.) remember _ the oath which ye have sworn. 2. from the accusative to the DATIVE: | Tois ayaSois ois €xopev Adda ktyodpeSa (for ad ¢yoper) by means of the ad- nantages which we have, we will acquire others.

"a. The relative is seldom attracted rrom any case but the accusative (the _ Object of a verb), or ro any case but the genitive or dative. But when incor- poration occurs, other varieties of attraction are sometimes found with it: dp evtuyxdve pddiora tyapat oe (for rodrwy ois) of those whom I meet with, I ad- | mire thee most, & cot Sone? euuévery ois &prt edokev juiv (for rovrors &) if it seems _ to you best to adhere to those things which seemed best to us just now. Cf. 810.

fF

| 809. II. Incorporation. The antecedent is often incorpo- ' rated, or taken up, into the relative sentence, The relative and antecedent must then agree in case. Hence : _ The antecedent may conform to the case of the relative: ei twa dpén xa- tTackevdtovra is apyow xwpas (for tiv yapav fis dpxyor) if he saw any one Improving the district of which he was governor. 2. The relative may _ conform to the case of the antecedent.(attraction): mpds ais mapa Avodr- | Bpov ae vavoi (for rats vavoi ds @daBe) in addition to the ships which he received from Lysander. 3. When both regularly stand in the same ase, no change occurs: pi) apéAnoSe budv adray hy mddar Kexrna%e Sdéav Kadny do not take away from yourselves the honorable reputation which yu, long possess. a. If the antecedent in its ordinary position would take an article, this ally disappears in the relative sentence. See the examples just given.

810. ANTECEDENT OmitTED. When the antecedent is omitted

(510), it is virtually contained in, and supplied by, the relative sentence. Constructions of this kind are regarded, therefore,

=

296 RELATIVE SENTENCES. _ [810 :

as instances of incorporation. The relative sentence may then — _ be compared to an attributive with omitted subject (509): it has — the use and construction of a substantive in the different cases :

Thus NoMINaTIVE: ey kal dv eye par wevoduer (for obra: dv) Land (those) whom I command will stay. ACCUSATIVE: Tis pucety Sivar’ by bp Ob cideln Gyadds vousduevos (for rovrov by 0d) who could hate (the man) by whom he knew that he was considered as good? GENITIVE: 4 wéAis Rua@y Gv EdaBe wot me- Tédwxe (for robrwy &) our city gave to all a share of (those things which) what — she took.—— DATIVE: edwxod ody ois pddiora pircis (for todos os) feast with — (those) whom you most love. ad

a. In explaining this construction, it is usual, as in the examples just given, — to supply a demonstrative as antecedent. It must be observed, however, that — the Greek idiom makes. a distinction between ovy ois udAiora pidrets with those — whom you most love (your best friends, without other distinction), and ody Tod- — Tos ois pddtora pircis with these (particular persons, mentioned before, or — otherwise distinguished) whom you most love. We have also oby ois udAuoro pidcis civ TovTas edwxod (the demonstrative introduced after the relative sen- tence): this has the same meaning as the form first given, but with an emphatic repetition (680): wth those whom you most love, with ruEM (I say) feast. -

811. Orner Rexatives. These peculiarities of construction (attraction — and incorporation) are not confined to. és, but apply also to the other re- latives, daos, otos, #Aikos, dsris, etc.: a Sioicety Tas TéAEs ToLOvTOLS HIEow olois Edarydpas eye (for ofa) to govern the — cities with such manners as Hvagoras had, eispépere ag’ Sowy exacros @xe (for amd tocodtwy boa) contribute from that amount of property which each one has. — The use of indejinite relatives as dependent interrogatives rests upon incorpora- _ tion (825 b). | - a. The same peculiarities extend to RELATIVE ADVERBS: Hf yas %Sa 7rd mparyya eyevero (for éxeioe Eva) I will take you to the place where the affair — occurred, Tovs SovAous &roxAclovow bdev ty Tt AaBeiv H (for éxetdey dSev) they ex- clude the slaves from places whence it may be possible to take any thing. Often . we may supply a pronoun as the antecedent: done érddev ddters dpovetv (for — tovTo éndxev) practise that from which you will appear to be wise. An instance — of attraction is seen in d:exoul(ovro eddds bev bweteSevto Taidas Kad yuvaikas — (for xetSev of) they immediately brought over their children and women from the — places to which they had withdrawn them. ‘4

a,

812. "Eorw ot. Here belongs the frequent construction of goru of, — less often eiciv ot, there are (those) who, that is some (= rivés, but more — emphatic): in like manner égorwy oirives, used in guestions.

(For the singular ori, see 516.) Thus: dvaraBdv trav imméwy tras torw tis having taken some squadrons of the cavalry, trowrot eyévovto torw ey ois © they came to be suspected in some things, torw obstwas dvSpéray TeSabmaxas ix copia hast thow admired any among men on account of wisdom? Four (also 4v of) Kad rip mposépepoy some too were bringing fire. (Compare the word | evior some, made up of &+ of, where é is for %veors or 2veror, 615 a.) Similar’ expressions are gory bre (éviore) sometimes, Zorw 09 or Brov somewhere, zor Saws somehow, ete., in which the omitted antecedent is an idea of time, place, manner, etc. “ 3

ATTRACTION. INCORPORATION. 297,

eR Retatrye. In some cases of omitted antecedent, the neuter relative has a free construction with the force of dru or dsre: _-mposhicer xdpv abrots txew Gv CobSnouy ip’ dudv (Gv = TobTwy Sri, 518 b) st becomes pons grateful for this, that they were saved by you. So av® ay in urn for (this) that, €& dv in consequence of (this) that (cf. ofvexa, dSobvera, 9, 8). 颒 5, ed” Gre (= em) rottw Ssre) on condition that, often used with the infinitive: of rpidkovra jpéSnoay 颒 Ste cvyypdiu vduous the rty were chosen on the condition that they should draw up laws. Hd, has émt rw em ore With the same meaning. | a. The neuter relative is used with prepositions in several expressions of time and place: é& 06 (= éx robrov év 6 from that point of time at which) since, —&@’ of since, ev 6 while, cis 6 (= «cis TodTo ev G) till, wéxpt (&xpt) 08 until, also to where (to that point of space at which). So with other relatives: e& drov since, mexpt Soo as far as where. Hd. sometimes uses péxpr oF, like wéxpt, with a genitive. © . For special uses of sentences which begin with neuter relatives, see 823.

itt

cs ¢ be

‘

Other constructions which require particular notice are the following:

814. Oios (full form rototros oios) is often used with the injinitive, and means of such sort as to, proper for. And so oidsre in such condition as to, able to; daos of such amount as to, enough to.

-‘Thus od« fy dpa ola &pdew 7d wedloy it was not a proper season to water the plain, odx oiotre jour Bondijou they were not able to render assistance, Exopev bcov amoCiv we have enough to live.

815. Oios and décos are sometimes used where, in supplying the antecedent, we must supply with it an idea of “thinking,” “considering”: améxAaov Thy | €uavrod tixny, olov avdpds Eralpou éorepnucvos etny (sc. AoyiCduevos TotodTov ty- ‘Opa otov considering the kind of man of whom, etc.) J bewailed my own fortune in that I had been deprived of such a man as a companion, Hm, aiuaros els GyaSoto, 0%” dyopetdes (sc. Tw Aoyouevy Toadra ofa in the view of one who “considers, etc.) thow art of good blood, to judge from such things as thou art saying. Similarly eddaluev wor avip épaivero, ws ddeGs nal yevvalws erercbra the man appeared to me happy (considering the way in which) in that he died 80 fearlessly and nobly.

a. The same relatives, ofos, cos, and ds, are used in EXCLAMATIONS, where we should employ interrogatives: & mdmre, 800 mpdypara exes ev TG Selrvy O grandfather, how much trouble you have in your supper (oh! the amount of trouble which you have), és 78vs «ef how pleasant you are (oh! the way in which you are pleasant).

_. 816. When ofos (seldom écos, jAlxos) would properly stand in the nomina- tive, as a predicate with eiui, the copula eiui is often dropped, and the relative With its subject is attracted into the case of its antecedent: 950 éor: xaplCeodau je co aydpt (for rotolry oios at ef) itis pleasant to gratify a man such as thou ari. To this construction the article may be prefixed: ois ofois juiv to such as we are. Yet sometimes the subject of the relative remains in the nomina- tive: robs ofovs duets pice? oviopdytas he hates sycophants such as you are. The form rovs ofos obtos avSpérovus is also found. : _ a, By a similar attraction ésris gets the meaning of any whatsoever; and the same idiom extends to other indefinite relatives. This is always the case when -ovy is added: obd« gor: dixalov dvipds BAdtrewy dytivoby avipérwy (for rid Sstisovv €or: any One whoever he is) é¢ 1s not the part of a just man to injure

13* R

298 RELATIVE SENTENCES. [816 4

any gee whatsoever. So too gstis (or ds) BotAc, like Lat. guivis, is used for

tis dv BotAc: wept TloAvyvérou 2) %AAov Brov BoiAc concerning Polygnotus or

any other whom you please. :

b. A peculiar incorporation is seen in the phrases, a0: wives (as if tocav- Tdicis Soot wives ciot a8 Many times as there are months) monthly, doa Aucpas (also donuépa) daily, ete.

817. Inverse Atrraction. The antecedent, without being incorpo- rated into the relative sentence, is sometimes attracted to the case of the relative. :

In most instances of this kind, the relative sentence comes between the antecedent and the word on which it depends: rhy odctay hy karéAurev od mAcl- ovos Gla jv (for 4 ovata fy) the property which he left was of no more value,

poet. tds® Gsmep eisopds Hrovor mpds cé (for afde &s) these (maidens) whom thou.

seest, are come to thee. So with adverbs: kal &ddAooe bra: dv Apixn dyamrhoovat oc (for &AAod1) and in other places, wherever you may go, they will love you. a. In this way, ovde/s is attracted by a following és7is od: oddev) btw odk

&mroxptverou (for obdels €or bt od dat. there is no one whom he does not answer) —

he answers every one.

b. By a somewhat similar change, Savpacrdy éorw bcos, dcov, etc., passes into Savpaords Boos, Savyacrod Sov, etc. ; and in like manner, Savuacrdy éorw &s, into Savpaocra@s as. A few other adjectives show the same idiom. Thus Savpacrhy bony wep) o& mpoduulay Ee he has a wonderful degree of devotion for

you, bweppuas ws xalpw I am prodigiously pleased.

Other Peculiarities.

818. OnE RELATIVE WITH TWO OR MORE VERBS. The same relative may depend at once on two different verbs, even when these in their regular use require different cases.

a, The two verbs may stand in the same sentence, the one being a finite verb, the other an infinitive or participle: xatraAapBdvover retyxos 9 Terxiodpevot more "Akapyaves kow@ dixacrnpl@ éxpavro (prop. @ éxpavro) they take a fortress, which the Acarnanians, having once fortified (it), were using as a common place of judgment. a

b. The two verbs may stand in different sentences, one of them subordinate to the other: aipodyeda adrouddrous ofs, érdétay Tis mActova mioddy 5188, per éxelywy &xohovd hoover (prop. of akoAovs.) we choose (as guides) deserters, who, when any one may offer them larger pay, will follow those (who offer it).

c. The two verbs may stand in co-ordinate sentences: *Apiatos, dy qjpets HXAopey Bacihéa kadiordvat, Kal dxapey kal eAdBouey mord (prop. 6 édéKa- pev, ad? ob eAdBouev) Ariacus, whom we wished to make king, and (to whom) we gave, and (from whom) we received pledges, Hm. tywxadt 3€ ww yauéerda TB

Orem TE TarThp KéAeTa, Kal ayBdver adrh (prop. dstis avddver) bid her marry that —

one whom her father commands, and (who) is pleasing to herself.

Rem. d. In the last case (c), the Greek hardly ever repeats the relative, but t often uses a personal pronoun (commonly airéds) instead: of rpdyovor, ofs odx

exaplCovd’- of Adyovres, od8 eplrouy adrots our ancestors, whom the speakers dia —

not try to please, and were not caressing them, Hm. ayriseov TloAdpnpor, Sov kpd-

Tos éo7l méeyiorov maow Kukadrecot, Odwou dé wiv Téxe vigpn the godlike Poly-

phemus, whose power is greatest among all the Cyclopes, and the nymph Thoosa bare him,

OTHER PECULIARITIES. 299 He Vers Omirtep. Where the same verb belongs to both sentences, antecedent and relative, it is sometimes omitted in one of them, especially in the relative sentence : } poet. plrous vopifove’ ofsrep by moots oéSev (sc. voul(n plaous) considering as friends those whom your husband (may consider so), T& yap BAAG Soamep Kar buets emaretre (sc. éroter) for all other things (he did) as many as you also were doing, Suorov eno Soxodor mewovSévan, ofoy ef tis ed omelpwv én tov KapTdy Ka- pores yete they seem to me to have suffered the same thing as (one would suffer) @f, _ while sowing well, he should let the crop perish. After relative adverbs, the _ omission is much more frequent: @eorw, Ssmwep ‘HyéAoxos (sc. ZAeyev), hpiv DR evaw tt is permitted us to speak, as Hegelochus (spoke), as éuod idvros barn by _-Hpets (Sc. Ine) obtw Thy ywoduny Exere as if I were going wherever you also (may go), so make up your mind, éreidh od rdre (Sc. Wetkas), GAAL viv Seitov since thou didst not then (show), now at least show.

- 820. Preposition Omirrep. When the antecedent stands before the rela- _ tive, a preposition belonging to both appears only with the first: éy rpiot ar _ béxa odx GAois Ereow ois emimoAd(e (for éy ois) in not quite thirteen years, in

which he is uppermost, of uev én’ ekovolas érdans jBovAovTo émparroy (for 颒 __ brdons) they were acting with as much license as they pleased.

a 821. TRaNsreR TO Retative Sentence. Designations which belong most

_ properly to the antecedent, are sometimes taken into the relative sentence:

- eis "Apueviay Hiew, hs Opdytas Fpxe moAAs kal evdatwovos (for woAAhy Kad eddal- pova) they would come to Armenia, of which Orontas was governor, an extensive and prosperous country, obra, ere) eddéws oSovTo Td Tpayya, amexdpnoay (for evdéews émel) these immediately, when they understood the matter, withdrew. So ére) (ds, te) tdxioTa for rdx.oTa eel (ds, STE): weiparducda wapelva Iray Td- xioTe Siamrpatduedsa we shall endeavor to be present (most quickly when) as soon

as we have accomplished. In like manner: f#yayov éadcous tAclorous eSuvduny

I have brought (the largest number which) as many as I could. For the use of relative words to strengthen the superlative, see 664.

822. Retative Pronoun ror Consunction. A relative pronoun is some- times used, where we should expect a conjunction, dr: or déste (cf, 813): Sav- pacrdy mo.cis, ds jyuiy obdty Sidws you are acting strangely, (who give) in that you give us nothing, ris otrws éort Sustuxhs bstis marpida mpoécdat Bovdtoera _ who is so wretched that he will be willing to betray his country? dmdpwy early | _otrives éSédover 5¢ emiopklas mpdrrew Ti it belongs to men without resource, that they wish to pursue any object by means of perjury. For the relative used

' with the fut. ind. to express purpose, see 710 ¢.

~~ 823. Loosz Construction. A sentence commencing with a neuter relative, _ ‘is sometimes loosely prefixed to another sentence, either (a) to suggest the » matter to which it pertains: & © eirev, ds éyd eis ofos del more peraBdArcoSat, _ karavohowre but what he said, that Iam such a one as to be always changing, (Se. rep) robrwy A€éyw concerning this I say) consider, etc. ; or (b) with ap- _ positive force: 6 dpre EdXeyov, (nrnréov tives tipioro: piAaKes (what) as I just » said, we must inquire who are the best guards. In this case, the principal sen- _ tence is sometimes irregularly introduced by dr: or ydp (cf. 502): 6 wey mdvrev Savuarrdéraroy axotoa, oT ty Exacroy Gy émnvécapey amrdrdrver Thy Woxhy what ts most wonderful of all, (that) each one of the things which we approved ruins the soul. In like manner, after phrases such as és Aéyovor as they say, &s Zoue as it appears, etc., the principal sentence is sometimes expressed as dependent : _ bs yap HKoved Tivos, dtt KA€avdpos é Bufayriov wérrer Htew foras I heard from

y 3 \

300 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. - [823

some one, (that) Cleander is about to come from Byzantium, 7dde ye phy, os of- Mal, avaykadtaroy eivou (for éort) Aéyew this, however, as I think, it is most ne cessary to say.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.

824, The question expressed by an interrogative sentence may relate, either

a. to the EXISTENCE of an act or state denoted by the verb of the sentence; or aS:

b. to something connected with that act or state, as its suz- JECT, OBJECT, TIME, PLACE, OF MANNER, *

QUESTIONS AS TO SuBsEcT, OBJECT, ETC.

825. These are expressed by means of pronouns or adverbs, —hby interrogatives, if the question is direct,—by interrogatives or indefinite relatives, if it is indirect (682). !

a. The pronouns represent an uncertain person or thing, quantity or qua- lity, to be determined by the answer: the adverbs, an uncertain time, place, or manner, to be determined in the same way. Thus ris Aéye who is speaking ? Tt (5a rl, wéoa, woia, wére, Tod, THS) A€yer what (on what account, how many things, what sort of things, when, where, how) does he speak? apdunv cls (rt, Tota, THs, also dstis, b TL, dwoia, Srws) Aéyor I asked who (what, what sort of things, how, he) spoke.

b. Strictly speaking, the indefinite relatives have no interrogative force : they are proper relatives, and have for antecedents the uncertain person, thing, time, place, etc., to be determined: it is the connection only which gives the idea of a question. Hence the simple relatives are occasionally used in the same way: @eworoxAjjs Seloas ppde TE vaverhpy, bstis €or, nal B° & pedyer Themistocles in his fear makes known to the shipmaster, who he is, and on account of what he is fleeing. .

826. The interrogative word often depends, not on the principal verb of the interrogative sentence, but on a participle or other dependent word :

tivos émoripey Aéyers as acquainted with what, are you speaking ? tov ex molas méAcws oTparnyoy mposdox@ Tadra mpdtew (the general from what sort of city do I expect) from what sort of city must the general be, whom I expect to do these things? rt isev KprréBovaAoy rowodyTa TadTa KaréyvwKas a’Tod (having seen C. doing what, have you brought) what have you seen Critobalus do, that you have brought these charges against him? of mddAat ’ASnvaito: od SieAoyloavro bwep ofa (825 b) weroinkdtwy &vSpdrwv kwdvvetoover (for men haying done what sort of things) the ancient Athenians did not consider what sort of things the men had done, in whose behalf they were to incur danger, &reiAGy odx emavero, rat rh

kaxdy ob mapéxeyv he did not cease threatening, and (what evil not causing ?) caws-

ing every evil. For ri raday and ti paddy, see 789 c.

a. The interrogative may stand as predicate-adjective with-a demonstr : | tive pronoun, not only in the nominative, but in an oblique case: tls 8 obros —

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. o. a

does that one come) who is that coming? &yyerlav pépw Bar Tl viv kya pipes) I bring heavy tidings : Cocina aioei ou bring these) what are they ? poet. ti 768 avdas what (is) this (which) thou art speaking? Hm, motoy rby pivov eeures of what kind (is) this saying (which) thou saidst ? | ___b. So in a compound interrogative sentence, the interrogative word is _ sometimes connected with the verb of the dependent sentence: aére & xp) mpak- ere; emeiday rh yévnra: (sc. mpdtere) when will you do what you ought? after _ what shall have occurred (i. e. after what event, will you do your duty)? ta cl _ -yevnrou (that what may come to pass) to what end? also iva rf (508 b).

! 827. Dousix Question. Two interrogative words are sometimes found in the same sentence: tive oe Xp KaAciv, ws Tlyos emiorhuova tTéxvns what must one call you, as being acquainted with what art? moia émrolov Blov uiphuata, ove txw Aéyew what kinds (of numbers) are imitations of what sort of life, I cannot say, Hm, ats, wéSev els &vdpav who (and) from whom among men art thou ? ¥ For interrogative pronouns with the article, see 538 d.

QUESTIONS AS TO THE EXISTENCE oF AN AcT OR STATE.

828. Direcr questions of this kind are expressed with and without interrogative words:

a. without interrogative words: “EdAnves dvres PipBdpors Sovretco- pev being Greeks, shall we become slaves to barbarians ? These are shown to be questions only by the connection in which they stand, though in speaking they may have been marked by a peculiar tone.

b. by means of interrogative particles; these cannot usually be _ rendered by corresponding words. The most important are dpa and 7:

| Gp’ cipl pdvris am La prophet? 7 obrot rodep0i cir are these enemies ?

2 Rem. c. Neither gpa and 4, nor od and uh (829), had originally the nature

- of interrogatives. The proper meaning of dpa was accordingly (cf. &pa, 865, 1, from which dpa was made by dwelling on the first sound), marking a question as naturally arising from, and suggested by, preceding circumstances or con- ceptions. The proper meaning of 4 was really, truly (852,10), marking a

_ question as directed to the real truth. Both a@pa and % are often cornected

_ with other particles: apd ye, 4} ydp, 4 mov, etc. Hm. never uses apa, but has #.pa with much the same force.

829. *Apa and # in general imply no expectation as to the nature of the “answer, whether affirmative or negative. In this they differ from od and ph, _ employed as interrogative particles; ov (also gpa ov) implying that an answer _ is expected in the arrirmaTiIve: pf (also dpa wh, and way for wh ody), in the _ NEGATIVE: thus dpa (4) PoBe? are you afraid (ay or no)? od (dpa od) pofe? are you not afraid (i. e. you are afraid, are you not)? wh (dpa wn, wav) poBe? you are not afraid, are you? _ a, An interrogative expression which very clearly shows the nature of the _ expected answer, is &AAo rs 4 (for &AAO v1 Zot H) is any thing. else true than _ =is it not certainly true that ?—also, with 4 omitted, Ao 71, in the same “sense: GAAo Tt 7) Gducoduey are we not certainly in the wrong ? %AAo 71 ody wavTa

4

4 Taira dy ely pla emoriun would not then all these things be (but) one science #

-

ae

802 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [830

830. InpmrecT questions of this kind are introduced by « whether (sometimes éév with the subjunctive) ; also by dpa, and, in Homer, 7 (7) : | |

okoretre ei Sixalws xphooua TH Ady~ observe whether I shall conduct the dis- course rightly, Hm. @xero wevodmevos peta ody KA€os, % mov &r” elns he went to inquire after news o* thee, whether perchance thou wert yet alive. This use of ei and édy is closely connected with their use as conditional conjunctions: thus the first example may be rendered, ‘‘ observe (so that) if I shall. conduct aright (you may know it).” Indeed, it is often necessary to supply an idea like eied- pevos in order to know, before ei and édv (Hm. ef ke, a¥ xe) used as dependent interrogatives: Hm. AaBe yotver, at kev mas S€Anow aphta embrace his knees, (that you may find) whether in any way he may be willing to assist.

831. DissuncrivE questions of this kind are introduced by aorepov (rérepa) ...73 these are used both in direct and indirect questions. But indirect disjunctive questions are introduced also by «ire... €lTE.

aérepov déSparev 2} o¥ ; wérTepoy txwy ) Exdv; has he done it or not ? eniwitl-

ingly or willingly? amopotmev etre &xwv 2 Exdy S€Spaxe we are in doubt whether he has done it unwillingly or willingly. For the use of ere (ei+7é), cf. 861. For the interrogative mérepos, see 247: wérepoy Sédpaxey 7) of may be ren- dered, ‘“‘ which of the two Petntuanirats is true), he has done it, or (he has) not done it)?” ; ( a. for disjunctive questions, especially when these are indirect, Hm. has also 4 (Hé) ~~ H (He): melvar’ ém) xpdvov, dppa Sadmev 2 eredy KdAxas payred- eran he Kad ovnl wait for a time, that we may know whether Calchas prophesies truly or even not so.

For the use of the modes in indirect questions, see 785-8. For the subject of the indirect question drawn into the principal sentence ( prolepsis), see 726.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES.

832. There are two simple particles, od and py, used to ex: press the negation (xon-existence) of a state or action. Ov ex- presses non-existence merely ; px expresses it as willed, assumed, or aimed at. The same difference appears in their compounds, = oUTE, PATE; OvdEIs, pydeis; ovdapHs, pydapOs; and many others.

ence

- 833. My is used with the supyuNcTIVE and IMPERATIVE in all sentences, whether dependent or independent :

Bh Geary Tov Adyov KataAlmwpey let us not leave the discussion unfinished, pndels oiéoS@ pe TodTo Aéyew let no one suppose that I say this, Aéyere, eisto } ph say, shall Igo in or not? édy ris nduyy, mapaxadreis iarpdy, dws wh arosdyn

sf one is sick, you call in a physician, that he maynot die, caSpédy éort oboe —

way & 71 by ph dixalws 7 wemparywévoy rotten by nature is every thing which has rot been wrought with justice. ’ But the subjunctive in its epic use for the fut. ind. (720) has od,

ty

SE a ae

. "NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 308 884, Independent sentences with the myprcaTrve and orra- t1vz have px} in expressions of wishing (721); but otherwise, od, ss Huaprev, &s phror’ were (sc. Guapreiv) he missed, as I would he had never done, pndevi emiBovrctoaps let me plot against no one,——lrurmos obk tye eiphyny Philip does not maintain €, ei we) XPETO Tots Tapotary, ovK dy cvdas- povot if he should not use what he has, he could not be happy.

For ov and pf as interrogative particles, see 829.

ve

¢ 835. Dependent sentences with the rvpicaTIVE and OPTATIVE have py when they express a purpose or a condition ; but other-

wise, ov:

Hence pf is used in FINAL, CONDITIONAL, and HYPOTHETICAL RELATIVE, sen- tences: elev Ort dmievar BovAoro, wh 6 marhp &xSorro he said that he wished to depart, lest his father should be displeased, ei wh Tt nwrver, EX€AW adTots Siarex- Siva if nothing hinders, I wish to confer with them, drére wh tt Setoeay, ov tuy- Roms when they had no fear of any thing, they did not come together. . So in _ hypothetical relative sentences with the 1npicaTIVE (761): & uh olda ovdt ofowas —— eideven what Ido not know (= ef tt wh oda if I am ignorant of any thing) I do

not even suppose that I know. °

a, So too, uA is used with the future indicative in expressions which imply puRPOSE (710¢): Wydloacde roadra ef Gy wndémore buiy perapeAhoe: vote such _ things that in eonsequence of them you will never have repentance, dpa bmws wh

oot Sees tours see to it that they do not revolt from you.

For uf in expressions of FEARING, see 743. °

836. Dependent sentences in the oratio obligua take the same nega- tives that they would have in the recta:

elrey Ort oddtv aitG péAot TOD Huerépov SopdPov (direct obd€y mor péAer) he said that he cared nothing for our disturbance. But after ei in dependent ques- _ tions, either od or wh can be used at pleasure: épwrG ei od aicxdvoua (direct _ ovK aicxtvn;:) he asks whether I am not ashamed, npdtwy i pndty dpovti¢er | (direct dp’ obd&v gporvrifes) they asked him whether he had no concern, cxo- Tapmev ei wpémer 2) ov let us consider whether it is proper or not, tod’ abtd ayvo-

eis, ei xalpers 7) wh Xalpes you are ignorant of this very thing, whether you are pleased or not pleased.

837. The INFINITIVE commonly has 7 (as expressing some- thing merely assumed or aimed at), especially when connected with the neuter article:

TavTa duas wh ayvociv HBovAduny I wished you not to be ignorant of these things, treyov abrots uh &dixeiy they told them not to commit injustice, eixds copdy tvdpa uh Anpeiy it is fit that a wise man should not talk idly, vod rd wh seyjoos Aordy jv it remained for thee not to become silent, ai Sepijves avSpdrovs xareixov, Sse ph amievan ax’ avray the Sirens detained men, so that they could not get away from them.

a. Some exceptions are merely apparent: duds dtiodow od tuppayeiy GAAR __-tuvaduccty they demand that you should be, nut allies with them, but partners in _ wrong-doing, where ot belongs properly to a&fotew. Similarly oddevds auapreiy —-Bixauds ears it is not just that he should fail of any thing.

i¥ b. But od may be used with the infinitive in the oratio obliqua (734 ¢): — bporoyG od Kara tobrous clvar phrwp I confess that Iam not an orator after theit

804 NEGATIVE SENTENCES. [837

sort, els Aaxedaluova éxérevey i€var od} yap elvar kbpios abtds he commanded them to go to Lacedaemon ; for (he said) that he himself had not the authority,

838. In connection with verbs of NEGATIVE meaning, such as hinder- ing, forbidding, denying, refusing, and the like, the infinitive usually takes pn, to express the negative result aimed at in the action of the verb:

Kwrvduedsa wy pareiv we are hindered from learning (so as not to learn), &metroy Tots SovAas wh metéexew TGV yuuvaciwy they forbade the slaves from shar- ing in the gymnasia (requiring them not to share), j#pvodyro wh memrwxevan t denied that they had fallen (asserting that they had not fallen), éwéoxovro ph ex Thy éxarépwy yiv orparetoa they refrained from making war upon the land of either (so as not to make war).

839. The PARTICIPLE has yy when it expresses a condition (789 e); otherwise, od:

tls dy médts bd ph wWeiSouevwv Groln what city could be taken by disobedient men (by men, if not obedient), Seod wh diSdvros, oddtv ioxter mévos unless a god bestow, toil avails nothing, Kipos avéBn ém) 7d pn, oddevds KwAvovros Cyrus went up on the mountains, (no one opposing) without opposition, éSopuBetre, ds od TorngoyTes Tata you were clamorous, as not intending to do these things. The participle with wf, after the article, may be expressed by a hypothetical relative sentence: of wh eiddres (= of dy wh €id@o1) all or any who may not know (if such there are): but Aéyw év rots obn eiddar the particular persons among whom I speak, do not know.

* 840. My is also used with aDJECTIVES, ADVERBS, and even with suB- STANTIVES, to express a hypothetical sense: rd jt) dya%év (= 0 dy jt) dya- Sov 9) the not-good = whatever is not good, 6 jt) tarpds the non-physician, whoever is not a physician. .

841. My FoR ov. M7 is often used instead of od with participles or other words, through an influence of the verbs on which they depend, when these verbs either have uy, or would have it, if negative:

By xalp’, Arpeldn, Képdeor Trois wh Kadois rejoice not, Atrides, in dishonorable gains, brérxerto eiphyny worhoev, whte Sunpa Sovs, uhte Ta Telxn KadeAdy (uh on account of worhoew, 837) he promised that he would make peace, without either giving securities, or demolishing the.walls, édy tt atoSyn ceavtdov ph €iddéra (uh on account of édy aloSp, 835) tf you perceive yourself to be ignorant of any thing. }

842. Od FOR wh. Od is sometimes used for uh, when it has a frequent and

special connection with a particular word, as in o# pnut to deny, ode &@ to for- |

bid, ob modAol few, ovx hocoy more, and the like: in such expressions, od is oc- casionally retained, when the above rules require wh: rdyvtws otrws Eyer, dp re ov pire edy Te HATE it is so in any ease, whether you deny it or affirm it.

Two OR MORE NEGATIVES IN ONE SENTENCE.

843. When a negative is followed by a compound negative

of the same kind, the negation is repeated and strengthened, In English, only one negative can he used: the others may be rendered by

indefinite expressions: poet. od« Err obdty Kpetccov 2 vduor wéAE there is(not any thing) nothing better for a state than laws, évev robrov ov8els cis oddéy abderds —

. |

ei erin inn tl become of any»

“When a negative is followed by a simple negative ofthe same» the two balance each other and make an affirmative: ovdeis avSpa- tiow ov« drodace no man that does injustice will not pay the Z ty, hs e. every one will pay.

& 845,08 | py. Od followed by py is used with the subjunctive or future ep enene? in emphatic negation.

_ This hens may be explained by supplying after od an omitted expression of i prehension : ov hh Torhow (= od pont éoy p} Torhow it is not to be that shall do it, no danger of my doing it, i. e.) [ certainly shall not do 4 it, ovdels whtore eiphoet Td Kar ewe ovdéy anreipoér no one shall ever Jind that _ any thing, so far as depends on me, is neglected, ob whore eéapvos yevopar never surely shall I deny it.

846. M7 ov. My followed by od is used in different ways.

1. After expressions of fearing, where 7 is rendered lest, that (743), _ pa od is rendered lest not, that not (Lat. ne non): .

—— 8Souxa pw. od Seuerdy 7 7 Iam afraid that it may not be lawful: or, without the verb of fearing, Bh ov ‘Seuirdy F H, the construction described in 720 d, which implies anxiety, but does not distinctly.express it.

847. 2. The infinitive takes pay ov instead of py (837), when the word - on which it depends has a negative:

q ovdels oidsre HAAwS Adywy wh ob KaTaryéAac'ros Elva NO One speaking in any other way (is able not to be) can avoid being ridiculous. The od here only re- peats the negation which belongs to the principal word (cf. 843).

i. a. Hence verbs of hindering, forbidding, denying, etc. (8838), when they

have a negative, are followed by «2 od with the infinitive: od nwAvdueda wh ot

_ padeiv we are not hindered from learning. In such cases, the neuter article is

_ sometimes added to the infinitive: poet. ui) mapis 7d uh od ‘dpdoat do not forbear to make it known.

, b. M} od is used in the same way, when the principal verb stands in a question which tmplies a negative: tiva ole: dmapyjoecSar wh odx) émtoracdat Te Sixaia who, think you, will deny (= no one will deny) that he understands

q what is just ?

Some NEGATIVE ExprREssIonNs. 848. For otre, uhre, ovdé, undé, see 858-9.

a. ovdé<y, pndev, and ofr1, wrt, are often used (like Lat. nihil) as emphatic negatives in the sense of not at all (552).

b. overt, pnéri, no longer, must not be confounded with of1w, ufo, not yet: odkért morhow, odxw wemolnna. ; c. obx Ort, fy bte-(probably for od Aéyw 871, wh Aéye Gri, (I) do not say that, it is not enough to say that, and hence) not only, usually followed by a waa Kat but also, or GAN’ obdE but neither : odx Srt 5 Kplray év jouxle jv, Ard kad of pido adrod not only was Crito quiet, but also his friends. Odx Smws, Bh ws, are used, and may be explained, in the same way: pd dws (sc. od edv- ace) bpxeiadau év pudpg, GAN odF dpSodad8ar edivacde not on ly (were ye nor to dance in measure, but ye were not able even to stand erect.

o

306 INTENSIVE PARTICLES. [848

d. udvoy ov, udvoy odx!, only not, hence all but, almost; and, in reference to time, doy ob (tantum non) almost: karayedAg in’ dvdpav obs ob pdvov od mpos-

kuveis you are ridiculed by men whom you all but worship, écov od« abtixa (only:

so much as not immediately) almost immediately.

€. ob phy GAAd, ob wévror GAAG, nevertheless, notwithstanding. They are to be explained by supplying before @AAd some idea drawn from the preceding context: 6 trmos pucpod (575 a) éxeivoy ekerpaxhrAiwev od why (sc. ekerpaxhriwer) GAAG eréuewev 5 Kipos the horse almost threw him over its head; (yet it did not throw him, but) nevertheless Cyrus kept his seat.

PARTICLES.

849. PrazposiTIve AND Posrrositive. A particle is said to be prae- positive, when it is always put first in its own sentence ; postpositive, when it is always put after one or more words of the sentence.

I. InTeRROGATIVE Partictrs. See 824-31. Il. NecarivEe Particizs. See 832-48,

850. II. Inrenstve Parricrus. These add emphasis to particular words, or give additional force to the whole sentence. 1. yé (postpos. and enclitic) even, at least, Lat. quidem,

adds emphasis to the preceding word: Hm. efmep ydp o° “Exrwp ye kakdy Kad aydrrida phere, GAN ob welcovta Tpa@es for though even Hector (himself) shall call thee base and unwarlike, still the Trojans will not believe it, wa modAods ye Eveodat EAeyov Tos eYeAfoovtas and they said there would be many even who would wish it, Hm. dard ob, ei divacat ye, weploxeo maidds but do thou, if only thou art able, protect thy son, mAHXer ye ovx bwepBarolued’ dy rods wodeutous in numbers at least we should not surpass the enemy, ob yap viv ye hay eouKas Ba- - otreds civar for now at least thou seemest to be our king. It is added with especial frequency to pronouns: éywye I for my part, Lat. equidem, dye in Hm. even he, dsye Lat. qui quidem, Hm, étis toward ye pégor whoever should do such things (even such). ; ;

a, T'é, when it belongs to a word which has the article, is usually put after the article: ye dvSpwrivy copia human wisdom at least. So too after a pre- position, if the word depends on one: oddels Hroveey By ye TH Havep@ no one heard, in public at least.

2. yodr (postpositive) at least, Lat. certe,

contracted from -yé ody (sometimes written separately), and hence stronger than yé. It is used especially after a general statement, to mark some particular

case, or limited extent, in which that statement is certainly true: ov mAacrhy *

Thy pirlay mapelxovro* éSedoto.t yody abtG ovveBohdnoay they offered no pre- tended friendship ; at least, they willingly joined him in giving aid. 3. mép (postpos. and enclitic) very, just, even,

shortened from the adverb wép: very much. In Attic; it is used to strengthen relatives: bsmep just who, the one who, &smep even as; also in etmep (édymep, Hivmep) even if, xalwep though. In Hm., its use is very extensive: éyd & édeevd- tepds wep but Iam much more to be pitied, mparév wep for the very first time,

uyéova Seot per har sera ater detest ; and especially with parti- _ eiples, in the sense of xatmrep (795f): axvduevol rep though grieved, xpurepds _ wep ey (or kparepds wep without dy) though he is mighty. 851. 4. 8 (postpositive) now, indeed, in particular, a marks the idea of a word or sentence, as being immediately present and obvious _ tothe mind. It is commonly put after the emphatic word, and admits a great variety of rendering: oAAo) 84 (obviously many) @ great many, pdvos 4 all alone, djAa 8h it is quite plain, dylem cad KddAdos Kal wAodTos 54 health, ana beauty, and particularly wealth. It adds urgency to IMPERATIVE expressions; - éwoeire 5h consider, I pray you, tye 54 come now, wh dh éxelvy TH eAwid: ewaups- peda let us by no means be elated with that hope. It strengthens the supERLA- _ «*‘TIVE: péyioros 54 the very greatest; and gives definiteness to DEMONSTRATIVES and RELATIVES: ds 57 the (particular) one who, dots 54 of whichever (particular) kind, obtws 5% (in this particular way) just so. So with other pronouns and particles: ri 84 what now? what precisely? rod 34 just where? Sh tis some cer- tain person, huérepoy 5) Epyoy our own work (belonging to us only), ef 34 if in-

deed, if really. For rat 5) nal, see 857.

, a. It is often used with something which is now present to the mind, as

being MENTIONED, or at least SUGGESTED, BEFORE: ody obras xen; exer 34 is it _ ot so? it is indeed (as you say), ds év ppoupd eopev, kad ov Set 5h éEavTdv ex _ —-Tavrns Avew we are as if (set) on guard, and indeed (the obvious conclusion) one _ must not release himself from this. Especially so with demonstratives and rela- tives: && Gy 34 from which things now (already mentioned), oftw 54 thus then (as previously described): and hence often in the apodosis (782), as ére... Tote 3h when... then, I say; or with reswmptive force, taking up a subject again after a digression. Hence, too,

b. It sometimes approaches the meaning of #5, Lat. jam: xa woAAd dH HAAG Ackas cime and when now (already) he had spoken many things, he said, viv 54 even now, Hm. 7&8) viv wdvra TeAcirau all these things are now already re- ceiving fulfilment.

e. The Epic 8) ydp, and poetic 8) rére, may stand at the beginning of a sentence,

852. 5. dywov (or dn mov indeed, I suppose) probably, methinks,

often used, with slight irony, in cases which admit no doubt: rpéperas 5¢ Wx} tits pashuact Simov with what is the spirit nourished? with learning, doubt- less.——A stronger form is d4movSer.

6. dra (a stronger 67) surely, in truth,

nearly confined fo the Attic: od dfra surely not, ms Sita how in truth? ofk- Tepe diTa do really pity.

7. dq%ev truly, forsooth, mostly in reference to a seeming or pretended truth. 8. dai (an Attic form of 67),

“used only in questions, and chiefly in rf dal; mas dal; what now? how now? © with surprise or passion.

| 9. Epic Snv (postpos. and enclit.) methinks, Lat. opinor,

has nearly the same meaning as 847ov, which last occurs but once in Hm.

—-—«*10. 4 (praepositive) really, truly,

(not to be confounded with 7 interrog., 828 b, and # or, than, 860) adds force _ to an assertion.——# wv (Hm. 7 ev) is used especially in declarations under

Cc

ee es. |

308 CONJUNCTIONS. [852

oath: Gpooay 8pxous F phy wh pynoiarhoew they swore oaths that in very truth they would not (remember wrongs) bear resentment.

11. roi (postpos. and enclit.) surely, doubtless, * may often be rendered you know, you must know, be assured, and the like: obra surely not. For pévrat, see 864, 6: for rolyuy, tolyap, Tovyapoty, Tot apo, see 867. ;

12. #rot (} + roi) verily, only Epic, @ naive expression of assurance: #ro: dy &s eimay nar’ tp’ ECero (in sooth) when he had spoken thus, he sat down. For the disjunctive #ro... # either... or, Bee 860 a.

~ 13. py (postpositive) in truth, Lat. vero,

Ton. wév, Dor. udv; Hm. has pé, pdy, and why: &8¢ yap etepéws ad why TeTE- Acopévoy éora for thus will I speak out, and in truth it will be fulfilled. Even the Attic uses wév for why, in wey ody, wév 34. The word has also an adversa- tive use, yet, however ; and this is always the meaning of uévro: (864, 6).

14. vai yes, surely,—vn and pa surely, used in oaths and followed by the accusative (545).

Conjunctions.

853. The conjunctions are particles used to connect one sentence with another. They are divided into classes, according to their meaning: though in some instances the same conjunction has various meanings, which bring it into different classes.

a. The first four classes of conjunctions (copulative, disjunctive, ad- versative, and inferential) connect co-ordinate sentences (724): so too the causal yap. ‘The other classes stand with subordinate sentences, and connect them with the principal sentences on which they depend.

b. A sentence introduced by a relative (or indefinite relative) is-al- ways subordinate ; and all indeclinable relatives are reckoned among the conjunctions. The inferential dsre, being a relative, belongs to a sub- ordinate sentence. The adversative éues is generally attached to a prin- cipal sentence, to mark its connection with the subordinate.

854. In continued discourse, every sentence has, in general, a conjunc- tion, or some other expression, which marks it as connected with what goes before. Occasionally, however, a sentence appears without any such connective. This form of construction is called asyNpETON (dovvderov not bound together): it is most common in explanatory sentences (which only bring out what is signified in the preceding sentence). Sometimes it is preferred as a livelier and more striking mode of expression,

855. IV. Coputative Consuncrions. ;

The principal copulatives are xai, ré, and. Té is postpositive and en- clitic: it corresponds in general to Lat. gue, as cai to Lat. ef. The poets have also 75¢, id¢, and (cf. Lat. atgue); id is epic only.

a. The copulative is often used with both of the connected members;

so

u ’ u q } b

{... nal, or re. i. kal, Or re. ..-Tet sip sd fini tant j anal Land oe sea, Hm. "Arpeidal Te Kal %AAOL eixyhuides ’"Axaol ye sons of “e us and other Achaeans with goodly greaves, Hm. aie ydp ror &pis te plan spol re mixer te for always is strife dear to thee and wars and battles. In ik ce manner, the Epic has judy... Hdé as well... as also.

__._ b. Occasionally we find re. . . 5¢é, the two members being at first thought

of as simply connected, but afterwards as standing in a certain contrast.

__-—- 856. a. In the Epic language, ré is used very extensively to mark the con- nection of sentences and parts of sentences, being often attached to other per- ticles, as nal, pév, dé, ydp, dAAd, and to relatives (sre, oidste). In such cases, _ it can hardly be beneiated into ’ English. The common words &ste and ibe. found in all writers, are remnants of this early usage.

4 b. To raf belong further.the meanings atso and rvEn: Hm. map’ Euorye

Kad HAAoL of Ké Me TYhoover with me are others also who will honor me, kad kata- -yedGs mov you are even laughing at me, nad uddAwora even most, Kal Bpaxdy xpévov ren) only a short time. In the meaning also, it is often repeated with both members of a compound sentence: ka) qyiy rabrd Sore? &arep xa Bacirct to us

_ also the same things seem good, which (seem good) also to the king. In wah 8é, the proper connective is S¢, while kal means also, even: Sleaov Kad mpémoy 5k

Gua just, and, at the same time, fitting also.

. After words of likeness, xaf may be rendered as: dyolws nal Lat. ata ac.

857. “AAAws te wal means both in other relations and (particularly in the following). Hence it may in general be rendered especially : xaremdy éore Sia Balvew toy morapdy, tAdws Te Kal wodeulwy woAAGY eyyis bvTwy it is hard to eross the river, especially when many enemies are near, So xa dh nal and in particular also, gives special prominence to that which follows it: Hd. d&mxve- ovrat és Sdpdis HAN re wdyres ee Tis “EAAABos copioral, kat 5} rad drwy there come to Sardis both all the other wise men from Greece, and particularly Solon. Tn like manner, od pdvov .. . GAA Kal not only... but also, are used with con- nected sentences to give prominence to the second, For ovxX rt, odx Srws, followed by GAAa «ai, with similar force, see 848 c.

858. NEGATIVE SENTENCES are connected by ovdé, pndé, or odre, pyre. Of these, ovdé, pndé take the place of xai (standing singly) in affirmative sentences, and therefore signify

a. and not, nor either ; in this sense, they connect a single negative mem- ber to a preceding sentence (usually negative): Hm, Bpduns obx Garren odde | moriros thow touchest not food (and not drink) nor drink either, pds ood 008 uot ppdow I shall not speak for thy interest nor for mine. Sometimes obdé » (undé) has the adversative meaning but not (862). aS b. also not (neither): eric “ab38 robs modeutous peveiy I expect that the enemy also will not remain (that neither will the enemy remain) ; or, with _ emphatic sense, Nor EVEN, Lat. ne—quidem: ov8€ TodTo ety not even this was _ allowed, Um. va und ivoy’ avrod év avSpdmowt Alenrau that not even his name may remain among men. For ovd€ (und) with efs, see 255.

859. Odre, pyre take the place of re... Te, or kai... kai, in affirma- _ tive sentences; thus ovre ... ovre, Or pate... pyre, neither... nor:

ape _pavepot ciow obre TH SeG weSduevor ore Tots vduois they are seen to obey - or the god nor the laws. Sometimes a negative member is connected with a following affirmative by ofre (ufre)... re (Lat. neque... et): dmooay phre

Bx

810 DISJUNCTIVE AND ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. [859

Tpoddoew GAAHAOUS odupaxol Te Ercadar they swore that they would not betray each other, and would be allies.

a. If after two members connected by ore... ofre, whre... Are, others still are added, they may take od8¢, undé. But if a single member with ofre (ujre) is followed by od8€ (undé), this is an irregular form (cf. re... . 8é, 855 b), and gives a special emphasis to the second member: aAA& yap obre TobTwv obvdév ear GAndEs, ODdE f ef TIVOS GxnKdaTE Gs eyo waidede emixelpS avSpadrovs but indeed neither is any one of these things true, nor even if ye have heard from any body that I undertake to educate men. . !

860. V. Dissuncrive ConsuNcTIONS. 1. # or, than, not to be confounded with 7 (828 b, 852, 10):

a. OR; and repeated, #... % either...or; also #ro...%#, with special emphasis on the first member: 4 roA€um xparndels, 2) kal HAAov Tid Tpdmov dovawsels either vanquished in war, or else subjugated in some other way.

b. THAN, after the comparative degree and adjectives like &AAos, repos, didopos, évayrios, which have a comparative meaning. See 586, 660.

861. 2. cire... ire whether... or, Lat. sive... sive,

presenting two possible suppositions which are left open to the choice of the hearer: efte GAnSés elre Wevdos, ov Kaddv por Soxe? ToITO Totvoua exew whether

at be true or false, it seems to me not honorable to have this name. Sometimes —

the first efre is omitted, or # is used for the second. With the subjunctive, édyre (Hvre, tyre) is used instead of ere. ae

862. VI. ApvERSATIVE CoNJUNCTIONS.

1. S€ (postpositive) but, and, marks a slight contrast with what goes before, being much weaker than d\\d. Hence, though it should generally be rendered but, it is often better given, especially in Hm., by and.

a. The first of the contrasted members very commonly has péy (postposi- tive, originally the same as phy, 852, 18): thus wéy... 8€ indeed... but, on the one hand... on the other ; though, in many cases, wéy can hardly be ‘ren- dered in English, Thus 6 péy Blos Bpaxds, % St réxvn waxpd life indeed is short, but art is long, Hm. of wep) piv Bova Aavady wept F Fore pdxecXouu you who in counsel (on the one hand), and (on the other) in fighting, are superior to the (other) Danai. .

For 6 uy... 6 5é, gee 525a. Me is often followed by other particles, dAAd, &rdp, etc.; and sometimes the thought to be contrasted with it, is ex- pressed in other ways or omitted altogether,

b. After a conditional or relative sentence, the apodosis (principal sentence) —

is sometimes introduced by 8¢é: Hm. éws 6 rat¥ Spuawe nara ppéva nad nard Supdy, HAE F *ASHvy while he was revolving these things in mind and in spirit, then came Athena. Here 6¢ is used as if the former sentence were co-ordinate with, not subordinate to, the latter. This construction, which is rare in Attic, occurs frequently in Hm.

863. 2. ddAd but, yet (from a\Xos other),

marks a stronger contrast than d€: Hm. évd’ &aao pey wdyres erevdhunoay "Axaol, GAA’ odk *ATpeldyn ’"Ayaueuvorr Hvdave Sum@, GAA Kaxds doles then all the

other Achaeans shouted assent, yet it pleased not Atreus’ son Agamemnon in his —

spirit, but harshly he dismissed him.

INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. 311 Af

.. After a conditional sentence expressed or implied, &AAd. is often to be endered at least: ei wh mdyta, GAAX ToAAG Y Tore you know, if not all, yet puch at least, & Scot marpgor, “ie aber yf Grd viv O gods of my fathers, be with me now at least (if never before). ‘ db. *AAAd is often used to break off the previous discourse and introduce a question or demand: Hm. ov« ard cxorot puSeira: Bactrem mepippwy* GAAd _ _mixeade the prudent queen speaks not amiss : but do you pomp ¢@, After negative expressions, 4a’ # (less often dAAd alone) is used in the

sense of other than, except: adpytpiov uev ode exw, GAN } wucpdy tr I have no money, except some little. For ov why adad, see 848 e.

864. Other conjunctions which express a contrast, or a transition to something different, are ! 8. ad (postpositive, properly again, hence) on the other hand; on the contrary. So Epic aére. ; 4, ardp (praepositive, Hm. airdp and ardp) but, however. 5. pyv (postpos., tt is true, Lat. vero) yet, however : see 852, 13. 6. pevros (postpos.: from per for pyv, and roi) yet, however. 7. xairot (not in Hm.: from «cai and roi) and yet, though.

8. dues nevertheless, notwithstanding,

marks decided opposition. See 853 b, and for its use with participles, 795 f. It is originally the same with poet. duds in like manner, in the same case. In ‘Hmh., it occurs but once.

865. VII. Inrerentian Consuncrions.

1. dpa (Hm. dpa, dp, and enclit. 5d, all postpos.) accordingly, therefore, marks an idea as following naturally from preceding circumstances or a previous course of thought. It is especially frequent in Hm., and may often be rendered by so, THEN: &s &p’ %pn thus then he said, ’Arpeidns F tpa vija Sony Grade rpoépvecer and so (a thing to be expected) Atrides launched the swift ship into the sea: ovx &pa not then (as might have been supposed), ei &pa if to-wit, if perhaps. For dpa (sometimes used in poetry for &pa, but usually) enterrogative, see 828 b.

860.2 “oty (Hd. and Dor. dy, postpos.) therefore, consequently,

stronger than dpa: Hm. fro vdoros amdaeto warpds euoto* ob7’ ody a&yyedrlns ert weldouo my father’s return is verily lost ; neither therefore do Iany more put faith in tidings (of him). In connection with other particles, it very often means. for that matier, at any rate, certainly: with relatives, it has the force of Lat. cunque: déstisotv whosoever (816 a). For pév ody, see 852, 13.

a. From od and ody, arise both obxody and o¥xovyv.——(a) The first is prop- erly interrogative: obdxoty cor Sore? odupopoy elvar does it not therefore seem to - you to be advantageous ? (8) But since questions with od look to an affirma- _ tive answer, odxovy canie to be used without interrogation, as an affirmative ; tyovow judy T& Xphuata> odKody xph éAabvey twas judy ém abrods they are _ plundering our property: therefore ought (= ought not therefore?) some of us _ to march against them.——(y) To express the sense ‘not therefore” without _ ‘interrogation, o¥xovy is used (with accent on the negative): ov«ouy dmorctWouat YE cov, i TodTO Adyets [ will not depart from you, then, if you say this. Some editors employ o¥ovy also in the first case (a).

312 DECLARATIVE AND CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. [867

867. 3. viv (Hm. viv and vd, postpos. and enclitic), | I

a weakened form of viv, like English now used for then, therefore. According to many critics, the word should be written vdy (not enclitic) in all prose-authors except Hd.; and in poetry too, unless the verse requires a short syllable. j

4, roivuy (postpositive) therefore, then, from viv above, strengthened by rol swredy (852, 11); never found in Hm, - 5. rovyapovy, rovydprot, so then, therefore, i praepositive, like poet. rolyap, of which they are strengthened forms. 6. &Sste so that, see 876, 4.

868. VIII. DeciarativE CoNJUNCTIONS.

1. dre that, Lat. quod, originally the same as 6 71, neuter of the pronoun éstis._ Like Lat. quod,» — it has both a declarative and a causal sense:

; 4

a. THAT: ‘HpdxAerros Aéye: Sti mdvta xwpet Heraclitus says that all things are in motion. Hence the phrases d9Aov or (also written SyAovdri) tt ts clear that, evidently, and ed off bri I know that, certainly: wdéytwy ed oif bri pnody- Tov ¥ ky though all, I am sure, would say. For the forms of the oratio recta used after éri, see 734 b. ‘

b. BECAUSE: Hm. xwdmevor 87° tpiorroy "Axaidy oddty Ericas angry because you paid no respect to the best of the Achaeans. Hm. sometimes uses 6, the simple relative, instead of 671, in both senses.

Rem. c. 8rt wh is used after a negative sentence, in the sense of except: obmor’ ex Tis wérAews ekRANeES, Sti wh eis *lospudy you never went out of the city, except once to the Isthmus (lit. what you did not go out that one time). For ér: with superlatives, see 664.

2. Another declarative in general use is as that, see 875. Little used -are dudre and ovvexa that, see 869, 3.

rs hw we

869. LIX. Causat ConsUNCTIONS.

1. Gri because, see 868 b. 2. dre and emei since, see 877, 1, 5.

3. dudrt, and poet. ovvexa, dovvexa, because.

d:d71 is for 8° 8 Te = 81% TodTO Sri on account of this that (818). And so — obvexa, d9ovvexa are for of (rev) Evexa, = Evexa Tovrov brx. They are used also as declaratives, that, see 868, 2. i

870. 4. yap (postpositive) for

introduces a reson or explanation, mostly for a preceding thought, but some- times for a following one: viv 8é, opddpa yap Wevdduevos Soneis GANSH A€yewv, bid. Tadd oe Weyw but now since, in speaking what is utterly false, you think that you are speaking the truth, for this cause I blame you. | a. The thought which is explained, is often not expressed, but only impliea in the connection. Thus especially in answers to questions: &ywnoréov ev tipa hiv mpds Tous tySpas; dvdynn yap, on must we, then, contend with the men# (yes, we must contend) for it is necessary, said he. a b. In questions, yép is often used with reference to an unexpressed and vague idea of uncertainty, which is explained by the question: JAwAe ydps (possibly I misunderstood you) for is he (actually) dead? girocopnréoy dporo-

ammo D ES Te

E CONJUNCTIONS. au es

2 agreed that snd tat philosophy ah I think, but per- heey y), for is Lees ngs soF. So Lat. quinam ? ydp is similarly used with Toxiatarica to a vague idea of un- a which is explained by the wish: xaxds tl é&dAou0 (there is e) for would that you might a wretchedly, For ei ee

/

toa thas in Tanning 5 ng tt do not keep up, for) I am not able,

“ @ = do =e mock me, brother ; for I fe not to be mocked, but) am in wretched

rye

5 871. X. Frvat Consuncrions.

These are named, and their uses described, in 739-43. They are iva (cf. 879, 6), « os (cf. 875 e), draws (cf. 876, 3); ddpa (cf. 877, 7), pn (cf. 743, 832 ff). - For iva ri (se. wevncas), see 826 b

872. XI. Conprrionaf. Consuncrions.

ei if; éay (for «i ay, or by contraction) jy, dv (a), if

| For their use in conditional sentences, sée 744 ff: in indirect questions, _ 8380: in expressions of wishing (with ei, elve, ei yap), 721. Ei pen is sometimes used for except, as Lat. nisi: juty obdéy éorwv dryasdy AXo ei py OTA Kah dperh we have no other good save arms and courage: so ei wh except if, Lat. nisi si. & Etrep (850, 3), Lat. Siquidem, if indeed, as true as: vh A, elrep ye Aapelov eon) “Tats, ovK Gwaxyed TAdT eyo AfWoun ay, by y Zeus, as sure as he is a@ son of Darius, a shall not get these things without fighting.

Mf 4

q 873. dy (a, postpositive) perhaps

“marks the sentence as haying only a contingent or conditional truth: it can seldom be rendered by an English word. It is used with the (potential) opta- ' tive (722, 748); with the (hypothetical) indicative (746 b); with the indicative, » implying repetition (704); with the future indicative (7 10 b); with the subjunc- __ tive in relative sentences (757 ff); with the infinitive (783), and participle (808). a Not unfrequently, éy is found more than once in the same sentence: ovk | ty bpSGs 6 ToDTO Tovhoas wep) oddevds By Aoyloarro the man who did this would not reason rightly on any subject.

; b. Ep. xé, xév, Dor. xa (postpositive and enclitic),

- almost exactly equivalent to dy (a), which is also freely used by Hm, Some- times both éy and «é are found in the same sentence, cf. 873 a.

874. XII. Concrsstve Consunctions. These mark a con- _ dition as something which may be conceded without destroying the conclusion. They are 1. ef Kai (dv kai) if even, although:

ti. rédw (726), ef kad wh BAmets, poveis & (862 b) Suws ofg vdow tiveors as fe mh Sie ie a feet thou art blind, thow yet perceivest with what a ma-

14

‘ “a

314 COMPARATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. [874

2. Kal ef (kal édv, xéiv) even if, Lat. etiamsi: hyetro aydpds elvat Gryadod dpedrciv Tods pidovs, kad ef undels wéAAor eloeoSar he thought it was the part of a good man to assist his friends, even if no one were about to know of it.

a. Both ei cai and xa) ef represent the condition as unfavorable to the con- clusion, yet not incompatible with it. But the former gives special prominence to the condition, as being unfavorable ; the latter, to the conclusion, as holding good notwithstanding. Often, however, the difference between the two forms ~ is very slight.

3. xairep (Hm. kai... wep) with the participle, see 795 f.

b. After concessive. conjunctions, the conclusion is often introduced by Suws notwithstanding, see 853 b. .

875. XIU. Comparative Consuncrions. These are proper ly relative adverbs of manner,

1. as as, that, Lat. ut,

properly in which manner, a proclitic (103 ¢), and thus distinguished from the demonstrative &s thus, so (250). Yet in poetry, the relative is sometimes oxy- tone, being placed after the word to which it.kelongs (104a). It has a great variety of uses, viz.

a, COMPARATIVE use: as BotAc as thou wilt. So with the force of Lat. tanquam : paxpay ws yéporti a long distance for me as an old man. It cor- responds to Lat. guam in EXCLAMATIONS (815 a), prop. O the manner in which ! Hmm. &s por béxerau candy ex kascod aiel how does one evil always follow for me after another ! For as with superlatives: és tdxiwra Lat. quam celerrime, see 664. ‘With words of nwmber and measure, it has the meaning about, not far from: as déka about ten, as éxt rd modd (pretty much over the greater part) for the most part.——lIn expressions of action, it often denotes that which is apparent, supposed, or professed: damier &$ mpds Tovs ToAEulous he went away in the direction toward the enemy (as if he were going against the enemy), @uAdr- — Teasxe Gs moAeulous Huais you are guarding against us as (supposing us to be) © enemies. Hence its.use as an adjunct of the participle, see 795 e. For its use — ’ with the infinitive, see 772.

b. TEMPORAL use, as, as soon as, when: ds ei’, Ss (demonstrative) puy paar- Aov &5u xdA0s when he saw them, then did anger the more take possession of him (lit. as... 80), ds tdxiora ews dredawer, EXtovTo as soon as dawn appeared, they were taking the auspices (Lat, ut primum).

" @ CAUSAL use, as, inasmuch as, seeing that: Se? xpjoSat rots ayasots, as oddiy Uperos Tijs nrhoews ylyverar one must make use of his goods, since no ad- — vantage comes from the acquiring (of them). 4

d. DECLARATIVE use, that: fev ayyéAAwy Tis ds "EAdrewa kareiAnmrat there came one with the tidings that Hlatza is taken, cf. 733.

e. FINAL use, that, in order that: &s wh wdvres tAwvrat that all may not — perish, cf. 759. . :

f, WONSECUTIVE use, like Ssre so that, mostly with the infin. (770): ofrw — por CBohSnous ds viv céowopa you so aided me that I am now saved, ixavas mpos- Ryov os Senvica thy otparidy they brought enough, so that the army could dine.

g. For és in expressions of wisuine (Lat. utinam), see 721 a.

876. 2. dsmep (@s-+ mép) even as, just as, ae strengthened as, but found only in the comparative use.

“TEMPORAL CONJUNCTIONS. 315

Ti teal os; that, tn othe ak ve e indefinite relative corresponding to és (as drozos to ofos, etc.) Its prin« cipal use is that of a final conjunction, see 739, Like other indefinite relatives, ‘§ itis used in dependent questions (825 a) how, in what manner. — 2 A, Ssre (856 a) used in two ways:

a ROA ms as; this is Ion. and poetic, and is aie a frequent

n Homer.

b. CONSECUTIVE use, so that: in this it denotes result, and may be connect-

ed either with the infinitive or with a dependent finite verb (770-71).

- 5, dre (in Hm. only as pronoun) as,

Pv ehietty used with participles, see 795 d: so nh Ofc. 6. 9, orp, as, see 879, 4, 7, Hm. jure as, like as. In Il. y, 10, 7, 886, it is a dissyllable (37 e

877. XIV. Temporan Consuncrions. These are mostly re- _ lative adverbs of time.

1. re, émdre, when ; and (with dv) éray, émérav. "Ore is also used in a causal sense: whereas, since. 2, eure (poetic and Tonic) = = ére, both temporal and causal. 3, nvixa, omnvixa, at which time, when, more precise than dre. In Hm., 7) nvixa is searcely found: on the other hand, 4, hos when (= jvixa) is little used except i in Hm.: it is found only with the indicative. 2 5. émet after, since, when; and (with dv) émny or endv (Hm. énny, emei ke, Hd. émedy). "Emel is very often used as a causal conjunction, since, seeing that. — 6. emerdy since now, when now, from émei strengthened by 54 (851): it denotes thus a more immediate and particular relation of time or cause. With dy, it forms émesddv, which is much more used than émny, émdv. 7. ore (not in Hm.), ws, and poet. dpa, Hm. eisdxe (or eis 6 ke, eis Gre ke), wntil, as long as:

aixlCovra Tods avSpdmovs ~ core ay tpxwow abrav they abuse men as long as they are masters of them, mepieuevopev Ews dvorx sein Td SecpwrThpioy we were waits ing until the prison should be opened. « “Oppa is very often used as a final con- junction (739): Hm. dpa uh ofos honed ayépaatos w that I may not be, alone among the Greeks, without a prize.

8. péxpt, dxpe (cf. 626, 7) united. 878. 9. piv before (that), ere.

_ In this use, it stands for mply # (sooner than, Lat. priusquam): it may be con- nected either with the infinitive (769) or with a finite verb (771). In its proper use (= prius, sooner, earlier), it has no relative force and is not a conjunction: _ this in Attic Greek is found only after the article (év rots mply Adyors in the fore- 4 statements, 7d mply before, formerly), but is very frequent in Hm. : ov yap 3 ey Atow* mply ww yap yipas exeow for Iwill not release (her); old age even shall come upon her before. He often uses it in correspondence with a conjunc- uw poe mply (769): od8€ Tis &rAn wply meéew ply Actor nor durst any one (sooner) _ drink before he made libation,

a

316 ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. ZEUGMA. [879

879. XV. Locat Consuncrions. These are relative adverbs of place. They are also occasionally used to denote position in time ; ang very often to denote situation, i. e, states, conditions, or circumstances.

. ob, Omov, where (Epic and Lyric 6%, émd%u).

. Sev, ordSev, whence.

- ol, Oot, whither.

4, orn (Hm. also jye), which way, in which part, where: also, in

comparative sense, as.

. &vza at which place, where, év%ev whence, more precise than od,

6%ev. They are often used as demonstratives, there, thence.

. wa where; but much oftener used as a final conjunction (cf. 739), that, in order that.

Rem. a. Adverbs which express the place where, are often connected with verbs of motion: they denote then the place of rest in which the motion ends: ex THs TéAEws 08 KaTépuye from the city where (whither) he fled for refuge. Conversely, of and So: are sometimes connected with verbs of rest, the adverb referring to a previous motion: poet. ¢xes diddtae 54 pw dor KaSéorapev are you able to inform me whither we (have come and) are set down? Cf. 618 a.

a oO Pwr

FIGURES OF SYNTAX.

880. Exirsis (defect) is the omission of words which are requisite to a full logical expression of the thought.

For numerous cases of elliptical construction, see 504-10, 752-4, 818 -20; but many of those constructions fall under the special head of brachylogy.

881. BracuyLoey (brief expression) is a species of ellipsis, by which a word appears but once, when in the complete expression it would be repeated, and, usually, with some change of form or construction:

dryasso) 7) wr (Sc. &yaSol) tydpes good men or not (good men), émpdtauey jets (sc. mpds éxelvous), kal éxetvor mpds juas eiphyny we made peace with them, and they with us. Very often the complete expression, instead of repeating the same word, would use another word of kindred meaning: ds Paddy éxomhSns (sc. davov) how deep (a sleep) you slept (509 a), of "ASnvate: petéyrwoay Kepxu- patos guupaxlay wh worhoacSa (for peréyrocay nal %yvwoay) the Athenians changed their resolution (and resolved) not to form an alliance with the Corey- reans, &ucdhous dv of roAAol (sc. emucdodvTa) neglecting things which the most care for, Thus €xaoros or 7s must sometimes be supplied from a preceding ovdels: ovdels Exdy Sleaos, GAAX Weyer Td ASicciy Advvatay adTd Spay no one is just by his own will, but (each one) blames injustice, because he is unable to prac- tise it.

882. Zevema (junction) is a variety of brachylogy, by which two — connected subjects or objects are made to depend on the same verb, when this is appropriate to but one of them: the other subject or object depends _ properly on a more general idea, which may be drawn from the inappro- priate verb: Z

_- PLEONASM, HYPERBATON, ANACOLUTHON. 317 |

. te éxdor@ temo depotmodes Kad routra tebxe Eero where for each ons éstacay) his foot-lifting horses and his curiously-wrought arms were lying, eodiira rest TH Sxvducj Suolny, yrSooay 8k idtny they wear a dress simi-

an, but (have, xover) a peculiar language. The figure is chiefly

883. ApostopEsis (becoming silent) occurs when from strong or sudden feel- _ ing a sentence is abruptly broken off and left incomplete: Hm. efrote & aire X per eucto yévnras derea Aovydy audvar—but if ever again there comes a need of

me to ward off shameful ruin—. It is a figure of rhetoric rather than of syntax.

_ 884. Pironasm (excess) is the admission of words which are not re- quired for the complete logical expression of the thought. For a pleon- astic use of airds and otros, see 680. This also is in most cases a figure of rhetoric rather than of syntax.

885. Hyprrsaton (transposition) is an extraordinary departure from the usual and natural order of words in a sentence. - Thus words closely connected in construction are separated by other words which do not usually and naturally come between them:

& pds ve yovdrwy (for mpbs yovdrwy oe sc. ixeredw) by thy knees (I entreat) thee, & oluct Tis axporarns éAevSeplas Sovacta wAclarn as a consequence, I sup- pose, of extreme freedom, comes utter servitude. It often gives emphasis to some particular word or words: moAAGv, & tvdpes "AXnvator, Adywr yryvouévey though many, O Athenians, are the speeches made ; especially by bringing similar or contrasted words into immediate juxtaposition: éya tuvijy nAuKkidras 7dduevos Hdouevors uot I associated with persons of my own age, taking pleasure in them, and they in me, Um. wap’ odk éSéAwy EXeroton unwilling with her wishing it.

886. ANACOLUTHON (inconsistency). This occurs, when in the course of a sentence, whether simple or compound, the speaker, purposely or in- advertently, varies the scheme of its construction:

kal diareyduevos ate, 250k por odTos 6 avhp elvat copds and conversing with him, this man appeared to me to be wise (for ‘‘I thought the man to be wise,” évousloy Toy avdpa, etc.), werd Tatra % tEbvodos Hv, ’Apycion wey dpyh xwpodvres after this the engagement commenced, the Argives advancing eagerly (’Apyeto in- stead of *Apyelwy, as if the sentence began with tuvijASov they engaged), rods “EAAnvas év TH °’Acla oikodytas ovdév mw capes A€yeras ei Erovrar but the Greeks that live in Asia, nothing certain is as yet reported, whether they are following (ci €woyrm instead of érecSa:, the expression changing to an indirect question), Hm. pnrépa & ef of Suuds epoppiirar yauéeoSai, ky trw és weyapov marpds but thy mother, if her mind is bent on being married, let her go back to her father’s house (a) trw instead of dmdmreupor send back), dswep of &SAnral, bray Tay dvrarywvic- Tay yevavTa Hrtovs, Tov7’ adtods and as the athletes, when they prove inferior to their antagonists, this troubles them (as if of &SAnrat belonged to the relative sentence, prop. ro’re dvidvra are troubled by this). Sometimes the anaco- lithon is caused by an endeavor to keep up a similarity of form between two corresponding sentences: roadra yap 6 tows émidelevuTare Sustuxodvras pty & _ ph Adwny tots GAXois wapéxer dviapd. Tore? PoulCew + ebrvxodvras St Kal Ta wh HBo- | wis tive map’ exelvwy eralvou dvarynd Ce ruyxdvew for such effects does love exhibit: _ unfortunate persons he causes to regard as troublesome, things which give no pain _ to others; but fortunate persons, he makes it necessary that even things unworthy _ of pleasure should obtain praise from them (edruxobyras map’ éxelywy instead of _ wap’ ebruxobyTwyr),

|

318 VERSIFICATION. FEET. VERSES. | [887

APPENDIX.

a-é oe

VERSIFICATION.

887..MretrE AND Ruytum. To all forms of Greek verse belong metre (uérpov measure) and rhythm (fvSuds movement). They all have a definite measure of long and short syllables, and a regular movement of times and accents.

888. Fert. Verses are composed of metrical elements called feet The most important are the following:

Feet of three (short) times. Feet of four times, Trochee -v Actre « Dactyl —vy Aclrouev Iambus v= Auweiv Anapaest vue Auwérw Tribrach vey eAumrov Spondee -- Aclrwy

Feet of five times. Feet of sia times.

Cretic ions Aerrérw Ionic a majore —-vv = Aertrolueda First Paecon —vvy aAemdueda Ionicaminorevy—— érmécSnpy Fourth Paecon vyv— = éarrdunvy Choriambus —-v»— Aciwomévous

Much less important are the following : Pyrrhic vy Alare Ditrochee —v—v Aeitrérwouy Amphibrach v—v ZAccrov Diiambus | v—-v— decd unv Proceleusmatic vv vv éAlirero Antispast v——v éXelrovro Bacchius v—— Aurdytwy First Epitrite »---— emécSny Antibacchius ——v AclroisSe Second Epit, -v»-— é€ercipSay Second Paeon v—vv €Aclrero Third Epit. —-—v— Aeipdhoerat Third Paeon ve—-» éAlmovro Fourth Epit. ----v AemShoowro Molossus wo Aeméyrav Dispondee —+-— Acdhoovra

889. Groups. A single foot, taken by itself, is called a monopéddy ; two feet, taken together, a dipody ; three feet, a tripody ; four, five, six, etc., a tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, ete. One foot with-half of an- other is sometimes called triemiméris (three half-feet) : so penthemimeris = two feet and a half; hephthemimeris = three and a half, ete.

890. Verses. Verses are named trochaic, iambic, dactylic, ete., ac- cording to the principal (or fundamental) foot used in them. They are further distinguished as monométer, dimeter, trimeter, etc., according to the number of their feet.

In trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, each “-meter” consists of two feet: thus, an anapaestic dimeter consists of four feet; an iambic trimeter, of six ; a trochaic tetrameter, of eight, ete. In other kinds of verse, each foot is reckoned as a ‘‘-meter”: thus, a dactylic hexameter consists of six feet; a cretic pentameter, of five; an ionic tetrameter, of four, etc. OE |

S] -—S=—S—=SCASSURA. ACCENT, ARSIS AND THESIS. 319

891. Caratuctic anp Acatatectic. In many forms of verse, the clos- ing foot is incomplete. Such verses are designated as catalectic (stopping short), On the other hand, verses which close with a complete foot are called acatalectic. : a, A verse is said to be catalectic in syllabam, in disyllabum, in trisyllabum, according to the number of syllables (one, two, three) actually used in the in- complete foot. .

b. The name hypercatalectic is sometimes applied to a verse which extends one syllable beyond a given measure: thus a choriambic tetrameter hyperca- talectic is a verse which would become a choriambic tetrameter by omitting its last syllable.

892. Resotution anp Contraction. Many kinds of verse allow the use of two short syllables in place of a long one, which is then said to be resolved ; or, vice versa, the use of a long syllable in place of two short ones, which are then said to be contracted.

_ Thus, in the trochaic dimeter ’ApaBlas 7° %pgiov kvSos (vyy —v —v —v), a tribrach stands by resolution in place of the first trochee. And in the dactyl- ic hexameter tyra oéSev, Tod vai, Seod &s, tepTducY addH (—vvy —-— —vv —— —vv —-—), a spondee stands by contraction.in place of the second, fourth, and sixth dactyls.. ;

893. Cazsura. When a pause in the sense, however sliglit, occurs within the verse, it produces a caesiira (i. e. a cutting, or dividing of the verse). ‘This division very often takes place in the middle of a foot, and in that case it may be designated as a foot-caesura.

Thus, in the dactylic hexameter dyra oéSev, ToD vOi, Sod ds, repTéucY addi (-vv —|-—-v |v —--|-ve —~-, before thee, by whose voice, as if tt were a god’s, we two are delighted), caesuras occur after céSev, vai, and és; and the first two of these are, at the same time, foot-caesuras.

894, Accent, Arsis AnD Tuxsis. In pronouncing verse, one syllable of each foot was distinguished from the rest by a greater stress of voice. This greater stress is called the rhythmic accent. It is wholly independ- ent of the written accent, which was disregarded in versification.

That part of each foot which has the rhythmic accent is called the arsis (raising) ; while the unaccented part of the foot is called the thesis (setting, lowering).

Thus, in the dactylic hexameter tyra oéSev, Tod vai, eod bs, reprducd’ addF (fev Se fuu L- Luv L-), the syllables which have the rhythmic accent are tiy-, -Sev, vO-, -o0, Tep-, ad- (only half of which have the written accent). Each of these six is the arsis of its own foot; while the remaining syllable or sylla- bles of each foot compose the thesis.

_ Rem. a. When a long arsis is resolved into two short syllables (892), the

first of them receives the rhythmic accent. Thus in the iambic dimeter dvaouw ovdty emxargs (v4 vt viv v-+), the tribrach which stands in place of the third iambus is accented on its second syllable. __ 895. Syncorz. Of many rhythms modified forms are produced by _ the omission of one or more theses. This omission is called syncépa _ The time of the omitted thesis was made up either by a pause, where the _ sense admits of one, or by a prolongation of the preceding long arsis.

320 _ ANACRUSIS. FINAL SYLLABLE. SYSTEMS. [895 Thus the verse Bapetar karadrAwyal (v4 o+ vt v-) is an iambic dimeter modified by syncope of the second thesis: the place of the omitted thesis we mark by a letter ‘‘ 0.” ; 896. Anacrusis. An unaccented syllable (short or long) prefixed to rhythms beginning with an accent, is called an anacrisis (upward beat). Sometimes we find a double anacrusis, of two short syllables.

Thus, the verses b, c, d, show the same rhythm as a, but with anacruses

prefixed : a. xEepoly duoomdpooww. tuvtvty b. mpoxndonéva Bapetay. vtlvetvty C. wy) TapBaréa Savors. —tuvtvty d. 7d dé cuyyevés euBeBaxev. vu tvuvtyty ;

Rem. e, The names zambic (903 ff) and anapaestic (912 ff), applied to large classes of rhythms, though convenient from their brevity, are not indispens- able: the iambic rhythms might with propriety be designated as anacrusic- trochaic, the anapaestic as anacrusic-dactylic, i. e. trochaic and dactylic with preceding anacrusis,

For Basis, see 916,

¥

897. Finat Sytuasie. The final syllable of every verse is unrestrict- edas to quantity (syllaba anceps). A long syllable may be used in that place instead of a short, and a short syllable instead of a long.

Thus éricxotodyr’ a&yvias (v4 »+tv+—) is an iambic dimeter catalectic (for v-+ vt vt ve); and rexvodvra Kal Texvodpevoy (v+ v+ v+ v¥) is an iambic dimeter acatalectic (for v-4+ v+ v4 vA), In marking quantities throughout the following sections, the final syllable of each verse will be marked long or short, as the order of the rhythm may require, without reference to its quan-

tity in the annexed specimen.

Rem. a. The reason of the freedom here described lies in the fact that the time even of a short syllable, when combined with the pause which occurs at the end of a verse, becomes equivalent to a long syllable. For a like reason, HIATUS (67) is not, avoided’ at the end of a verse, since the two vowel-sounds (at the close of one verse and the begiuning of the next) are not pronounced in immediate succession, but are separated by the final pause.

b. Yet we sometimes find a system of lines, having the same or similar rhythm throughout, in which the liberties above described (syllaba anceps and hiatus) are allowed only in the closing line. A system of this kind might be regarded with propriety as a single long verse, the lines which compose it be- ing metrical series rather than verses. Hence the lines of such a system are sometimes found ending in the middle of a word, which can never be true of a verse, strictly so called.

898. A metrical composition may consist

a. Of SINGLE LINES (o7iyor), in which one kind of verse (dactylic hex- ameter, iambic trimeter, etc.) is repeated indefinitely: the verse is then said to be used by the line.

b. of pisticHs,—couplets of two lines, in which two kinds of verse, differing more or less from each other, are repeated in the same order to an indefinite extent; see 911.

c. of sysTEMS,—answering to the description just given in 897 b.

d. of srropHEs,—combinations of several lines, with more or less

variety of verse.

Sie eat

| . 7

Rem. e. Strophes of a simple kind may be repeated (like single ‘ines or chs) to an indefinite extent. But the longer and more complex strophes, _ which make up the lyric portions (choruses) of tragedy and comedy, are usually _ arranged in pairs. Each pair consists of a stropHe and ANTISTROPHE, the latter _ of which is like the former, containing the same kinds of verse arranged in the _ same order. Such a pair is sometimes followed by a single strophe—called an EPODE (after-song)—differing from them in rhythms, and serving as a conclusion to them. the lyric odes of Pindar, this is the general law; most of them consist of érios, in which a like pair, strophe and antistréphe, are followed by an unlike epode ; but the successive trios of the same piece are all alike, show- ing the same kinds of verse in the same order of arrangement.

In these complex strophes, it is not to be expected, in general, that the student will be able to determine the rhythms for himself, without direction of the text-book or the teacher.

Trochae Fehythms.

899. The fundamental foot is the trochee. A trochaic “-meter” (890) consists of two feet, the last of which may also be a spondee. Hence the monometer, dimeter, trimeter, etc., may have either trochees or spondees for the even feet (2d, 4th, 6th, etc.), but only trochees for the odd feet (ist, 3d, 5th, etc.). -

A tribrach may be used by resolution (892), in place of a trochee; and an anapaest, in place of a spondee. A dactyl sometimes occurs in- stead of a trochee, but only in proper names.

The rhythmic accent is always on the first syllable of the foot, and the first foot of a “-meter” is more strongly accented than the second.

900. The following are specimens of trochaic rhythms: a, b. monometer ; b, catalectic (cretic) :

Gy mosodmer (2). Lune @ Sika (b). Like soe ¢, d. tripody (tthyphallic); d, catal. (penthemimeris) : exer ev Sduorat (c). tuevev Keloerat TdAas (a). he ins ie e, f. dimeter; f, catalectic: . GAN dvayyncdévTes, Gvopes (ec). ie te ele nee te Bh tvvwpdrys tis jy (£). Lvuevlve g, pentapody : Aids imarynddAwocpa ceuvoy “Hpa. Cuvee ve vee p, i. trimeter ; i, catalectic: Awply pwvay évapydtat wed{rw (h). pie en inate EU Gipmaryad St diadpouay duatuoves (i). tueubuvevutee

j. dimeter and ithyphallic : GAAG mor THY Eupevor kad phwor éxrareln, Lvy—vtv—-—Ly—vew

k. tetrameter (= dimeter repeated) : KADSE peu, yépovros evedeipa xpuadmemAe Kovpn. J v vv v

Bh hel Gee ee ee ee ee

1, tetrameter catalectic (= dimeter and dim. catal.): TOAAG mev yap éx Sardoons, TOAAG F ex XEpoou Kakee

U

Ae cess i Spr ane! cat, ceaieed Ay saa

14*

322 IAMBIC RHYTHMS. é. ; 900 ylyeras Syqrois, 6 wdoowy Bloros hy Tash mpbow.

Sey ace cas i we eres DAL AD dw ph tte ae

tetram, catal. scazon (Hipponactéan):

apt wey xpdutos uptoras, avelas 5& xepavt.

5b Ad nae WF OT WS man 1D oem Ai in ale eno

B

901. The following are specimens of SYNCOPATED FORMS: a is a Syncopated dimeter; b, a dim. catal.; c, d, e, catalectic trimeters; f, g, h, catalectic tetra- meters. Such forms as e appear to begin with a spondee, which, however, is really a syncopated dipody.

a. Gud) vady xépuyBa. tvmotons

b. was yap imanadras. Lu—olv—

Cc. ph Tuxodoa Sedv OAvpytlwv, tv—otv—vtlu—

d. viv maparroumévyn pol, TATED. Lumotu—Otue

e. eVonpdy Te ddopa vavBaras. LG 0) ee wm Bee hres

f. Zebs tvak &roorepoln yduov Susdvopa. Lueviveotly—vulu— &. Wraka, patpgov ayvicua Kvpioyv pdvov. tv-otv—otv—vulve h. wnpuovas éAvoar’ ed xeipt maria. — tuevtv-otv-otvu—

902. a. The CATALECTIC TETRAMETER is often used by the line (898 a), espe- cially in comedy: it generally has a caesura after the fourth foot.——In the scazon (hobbling)—a satiric verse—it is modified by the use of a spondee for the last odd foot: this makes the verse unrhythmical (899), with humorous effect. .

b. The DIMETER, COMPLETE and CATALECTIC, and the ITHYPHALLIC, are ex- tensively used in lyric strophes (898 d)——Systems (897 b) are sometimes found, in which a succession of complete dimeters (with, here and there, a mo-

nometer) is closed by a dimeter catalectic. ‘ %

Lambie Rhythms.

903. The fundamental foot is the 7ambus. An iambic “-meter” (890) consists of two feet, the first of which may also be a spondee. Hence the monometer, dimeter, trimeter, etc., may haye either iambi or spondees for the odd feet (ist 3d, 5th, etc.), but only iambi for the even feet (2d, Ath, 6th, etc.). In a tripody or pentapody, only the first foot can be a spondee. ‘

! A tribrach may be used by resolution (892) in place of an iambus; and a dactyl, in place of a spondee. An anapaest also may occur in place of an iambus: this is very common in humorous poetry ; in other kinds the anapaest (unless occurring in a proper name) is restricted to the first foot.—In all catalectic verses, the last complete foot is an iambus.

The rhythmic accent is on the second syllable of each foot, but on the third syllable of an anapaest. The first foot of a “-meter” is more strong ly accented than the second.

904. The following are specimens of iambic rhythms: a monometer :

& Séupares. ity b,c. tripody ; c, catalectic ( penthemimeris): - “EAAavides xdpat (b). -_ « vue

Kpdrasoy eyxos (C). vluev

4

: JAMBIC RHYTHMS. $23

d,e. dimeter; e, catalectic: = RT aie ‘ \ oe Tis evBovAlas (d). ee tye ete — deyGvas évrbds olxwy (e). vivevty f, g. pentapody ; g, catalectic : hs —-vaes TavwAESporow exBorais (f). —tusveveve _ - mpoBovaAdmas kpeptos tras (g). vtueyvovey h. trimeter catalectic: émwpéanoa mércos cteAéo dat. vlvevivunviy i, trimeter (acatalectic) : & dios aidhp, cad taxdrrepo tvoal, —tv——Lu-vleu- émel 5& wAhpns eyéver’ "Apyelwy dxAos. 9=vtv——teu——Lu— em) rGde F Arydpeve Aropndns tvat. vetvevluve—tue j. trimeter scazon (choliambus, Hipponactégn) : . bY jeeps yuvainds eiow HdioraU. vtivevtvevl-—

k. tetrameter catalectic (= dimeter and dim. catal.):

& naow avSpdéros payels wéeyiorov apeAnua.

kal mpdrepov emeBovAeveé coors Tov KavAdy ola’ éxetvor. l. tetrameter (acatalectic, = dimeter repeated) :

détat pe KwpdCovra, Seta, Aleooual ce, Aloovomat

— Oe ee ee)

905. The following are specimens of SYNCOPATED FORMS: a, b, ¢, d, e, are dimeters, the first two being catalectic; f, g, h, i, pentapodies, the first two catalectic; j, k, 1, m, n, trimeters, the first two catalectic; 0, p, q, r, tetra- meters, the first one catalectic.

a. pddois @ dors jot. viowvty

bs diradCera tid. aki mm Obie

c. Bapeta: karadAaryal. Pd Sn: po

d. xaxod 5& xaAKod Tpdror. vlv—otlve

@. pmeAapmaryhs merc. vioq-otv—

f. év dykGor Téxva SGpat. vigevev-vu

g. Abray & dover uty ovtis. vlv-o-—veu

h. poBotpor F eros 7éh exBareiy. vlLo-ve—veve

i. BéBarep plupa 51a wvdar. vlio-qevuduue

j. dapynpdpors BovdSdroier Timats. vlveotv-uty k. im dpxas & o¥rwos Sod wr. vlLo-otv—vuly

l, BeBaioiyap rolrep &ypdrat oTparod. vliveotuevulue

m. Big xarwav F avabdy weve. vtv—-otv-o+tv—

Rn. éravxhous St rotor gots Adyots. - vlo—-otvevlve 0. Bapeia F ei réxvoy Saltw, Sduev &yarpa. vtvevtiv—otv—vuly

p. mévor Séuwv véor waraoiot ovumryeis KaKots, vtv—vtLv—otvu—vlu— q. duod dt roaiva mady avdryer, & wapSévo. vtv—otv—otvvv—tu— r. bdwp re Atpkaiov ebtpapécratoy maudray. vtv—otv—vtv—otv— 906. The IAMBIC TRIMETER is, next to the dactylic hexameter, the most widely used of all rhythms. It prevails especially in tragedy and comedy, the dramatic dialogue being mainly carried on in this measure. Of the six feet ‘which compose it, the last is always an iambus. For the iambus in the odd feet (Ist, 3d, 5th), a spondee is very often used, and sometimes a dactyl; but a dactyl in the fifth foot is almost unknown in tragedy. Lach of the first five _ feet may also be a tribrach, and, in comedy, an anapaest. In tragedy, the _ anapaest is generally confined to the first foot: in a proper name, however, it

324 DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. . [906

may occur in any foot except the sixth. The most common caesuras are those which divide the third and fourth feet (penthemimeral and hephthemime- ral caesuras), especially the former. But caesuras of less frequent use are found at almost every place in the verse: the least approved are those which divide the verse into equal halves or thirds. When the fifth foot is divided by a caesura, the syllable before that caesura (if it is not a monosyllabic word) is almost always short.

a. In the trimeter scazon (hodbling)—a satiric verse—the rhythm is modi- fied by the use of a spondee for the last (even) foot: this makes the verse un- . rhythmical (9038), with humorous effect.

907. a. The CATALECTIC TETRAMETER is often used by the line (898 a) in comedy: it generally has a caesura after the fourth foot. Two syncopated forms of the tetrameter, 905 0, p (with fifth thesis omitted), were also used by the line.

b. The DIMETER, COMPLETE and CATALECTIC, and the CATALECTIC TRIMETER, though sometimes used by the line, were more employed in lyric strophes (898 d). Systems (897 b) are sometimes found, in which a succession of com- plete dimeters (with, here and there, a monometer) is closed by a dimeter ca- talectic.

c. In a few instances, we find iambic tripodies which (contrary to 903) ad- mit a spondee in the second or third foot. These are sometimes called iambic ischiorrhogic (limping): ef, 906 a.

Dactylie Rhythms.

908. The fundamental foot is the dactyl. But a spondee is very often used instead (892): at the end of a verse, it is much more common than the dactyl. proceleusmatic, used for the dactyl (892), is rare, and only found in lyric poetry. The rhythmic accent is on the first syllable of each foot.

909. Specimens of dactylic rhythms:

a. dimeter (almost always logaoedic, cf. 917 a): }

botpa didket. tvuulu

b,c. trimeter; c, catalectic (penthemimeris) : aBuweri, xeraBhew (b). tuvivele mapsxévor 6uBpopédpot (Cc). ile ha sy ooen'tgg hs

d, e, f. tetrameter; e, syncopated; f, catal. (hephthemimeris) : ovpavlots TE Seois Swphuara (d). tuvlvetlouus ovAduer’ aiklonara vekp@y (e). LouvigtvelLo Zser’ eroduevean Sdvapy (Ff): Luevlvutvut

g, h. pentameter; h, syncopated and catal.: GAAG pdroy 6 apéSvuos aed wévoy Eker (2). tvvtvetuvtvutl— 2) Spuds 7) €Adras &xpoxdmors (h). tuvivetotuvut

i. elegiac pentameter ( = catal. trimeter ag ssa 8 aisxivn dt piros juerépos eyévov. teLvvtotvuvtvut j,k. hexameter; k, spondaic (with spondee as fifth foot):

pa

as awcislocnoes; melSovrTd Te woméevt Aady,. Lvvt—t—+ vutvele GAN’ abrds Te KdSoOo, Ka tiAdous 1Spve Aao’s. L-Lvvtuv 2 —-tuvte k. rlar’ adr’, aiyidxo.o Aids réxos, ciAfAovSas. +—tyvtvetvet—L—

|, m. octameter (= tetram. repeated); m, catalectic:

& wérot, } peyddas wyadas Te roXocovbpov Buoras érerdpoapey (1).

Lovwhbvv Luv lovlvubuvvuluvutluy

oF Sie

pat

913] = | —ANAPAESTIC._ RHYTHMS. 825 | si pt ; Kawordrow oromdrow weplougont Phuara K® rapampiopar’ érdy (m).

er ftuvtvvty vtatuy vutovl The following are specimens of compounp Forms (dactylic and trochaic): _n, tetrameter, and trochaic monometer : —- Deki epG mporuxdy kéviov wdorevoe Sodvat. tuvevunvuea—tuny 0. trimeter, and trochaic dimeter catalectic: KékAuTe, Tatdes STEepSUuwv Te Pwrady kal dedy. Lyy—-vu——Ly———v— -p. trimeter (with anacrusis, and syll. anceps), and ithyphallic: rovroio. & bmicdev irw pépwy Sippov AvKovpyos.

ee a ion ye Uo a

910. The HEROIC HEXAMETER (909 j) is more used than any other rhythm, being the established measure for epic, didactic, and bucolic poetry. Of the six feet which compose it, each may be at pleasure a dactyl or a spondee; ex- cept the last foot, which can never be a dactyl. In the remaining feet, how- ever, the dactyl is the prevailing form; especially in the fifth, where hardly one line in twenty has the spondee (909 k).

The third foot is commonly divided by a caesura: this may be either mas- culine, i. e. after the long arsis of a dactyl or spondee ( penthemimeral caesura), —or feminine, i. e. between the two shorts of a dactyl, Often also there is a caesura after the arsis of the fourth foot (hephthemimeral caesura); or at the end of the fourth foot (called bucolic caesura, from its frequent occurrence in bucolic poetry). Beside these, there are other caesuras, of less frequent use, at almost every place in the hexameter.

911. The ELEGiac pDisTicH was not confined to the elegy, but was used for many other kinds of composition. Its first line is the hexameter, containing, of course, two complete dactylic tripodies: its second (909 i) is a verse contain- ing two catalectic tripodies, which are always separated by a caesura. Of this verse the first two feet may be dactyls or spondees at pleasure, The third foot consists of an accented long syllable (arsis): the time of its omitted thesis was made up by a caesural pause. The fourth and fifth feet are always dactyls: the sixth, like the third, consists of an accented syllable. The usual name pen- tameter was founded on a mistaken division into five feet, the third of which was always a spondee, while the fourth and fifth were anapaests.

Anapaestic Rhythms.

912. The fundamental foot is the anapaest. But a spondee or a dactyl is very often used (892) instead of the anapaest; much less often, a pro-« celeusmatic. The rhythmic accent falls on the final long syllable of the

-anapaest or spondee, and on the penultimate short of the dactyl or proce leusmatic (894 a). An anapaestic “-meter” (890) consists of two feet.

913. Specimens of anapaestic rhythms: a, b. monometer ; b, catalectic:

GroAets y’, &modeis (a). vutuul véxus 5n ( ). SAC Ae ce, d, tripody hprocadiar)s d, catalectic: Zaramtve t oTupéeAov (c). vuetvvltuvt Kaddy dvdp) weroucety (a). vetuvl— e. dimeter catalectic ( paroemiac): Kad phy 7é5¢ Kbpioy juap. a—tovlvvty adyTa yap jin TeTeACoT AL. a—bv—Luvl—

326 LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. | [913

oxipta © dvéuwy wrvedpara wdyTwv. ‘Lee Lee bndat by amoxevovra KaoraAlas. atvetotuvt

Tots aigeplois, Toiow ayhpws, Tots &pdiTa pwndouévo.oy. awtvubtobu Lo Luvluuly

914, ANAPAESTIC SYSTEMS (897 b) are composed of any number of complete dimeters (and, here and there, a monometer), with a catalectic dimeter (paroe- miac) always added as a close. They are widely used in tragedy and comedy, —more widely than any other rhythm, after the iambic trimeter. They are of two kinds, stricter and freer systems. The stricter systems differ from the freer in these respects: a. They avoid a succession of four short syllables: hence a proceleusmatic almost never appears in them, or a dactyl followed by an an- apaest. b. In the dimeter, they have a regular caesura, generally at the end of the second foot, but sometimes in the middle of the third. c. In the paroemiac, they allow a dactyl to stand only as the first foot, and almost al- ways have an anapaest for the third.

d. The freer systems are not subject to these restrictions. They sometimes consist, for lines together, of spondees only, or dactyls only; and sometimes they have two or more paroemiacs in succession. They are much less used than the stricter systems, and are mainly confined to the expression of com- plaint or mourning.

915. The CATALECTIC TETRAMETER is much used by the line (898 a) in comedy. It consists of a dimeter and paroemiac. These two parts are almost always separated by a caesura; and each of them is subject, in general, to the rules just given for dimeters and paroemiacs in the stricter anapaestic systems (914).

Logaoedic Lthythms.

916. Dactyls are often mixed with trochees so as to form—not a com- pound rhythm (dactylic and trochaic, 909 n, 0, p)—but a simple rhythm, which is called logaoedic. _ The dactyls may stand before the trochees, or after them, or interposed between them; but trochees never stand be- tween the dactyls. Hach trochee may be resolved into a tribrach ; but a, dactyl (unless it closes the rhythm) is very seldom contracted to a spon- dee. A trochee (or tribrach) standing as the first foot, is called a basis (step), and is treated with great freedom: a spondee is very often used, instead of it, as basis: less often, an dambus or anapaest (and, in Aeolic poetry, even a pyrrhic). A logaoedic verse may have an anacrusis (long or short) prefixed to its first foot. Also a double anacrusis (two short syllables) may be used, in which case the verse is called logaoedic ana- paestic. The rhythmic accent falls on the first syllable of each foot.

a. If two trochees precede the first dactyl, the second also is called a basis, but it is not treated with the same freedom as the first: only a spondee can be used here for the trochee (or tribrach).——b. A spondee may be used, in- stead of a trochee, as the second foot, even when the first foot is a dactyl—— ce. Further, when a verse ends with an arsis, a spondee may be used, instead of a trochee, before that arsis. Thus

ag ~ ay ey

\ -s LOGAOEDIC _ RHYTHMS. 827

; xadrnonpérav trmwy nrbmos. fevtitot C. Tas HAEKTpopacis airyds. oii OC Set

~~ d. ~‘Yrochaie rhythms used in near connection with logaoedic, may have ___ bases and anacruses, such as those above described; as also a spondee, instead of a trochee, before a final arsis (c). Thus E mpds tuais éAevdEpws. b—LyLvt & rére Jody viupay. —vuvelt—t 917. The following are specimens of logaoedic rhythms with one dactyl. The Pherecratean is called first or second, according as the dactyl is its first or pecan foot: the Glyconic is called first, second, or third, by a similar dis- tinction. a, b. Adonic (dactyl and trochee); b, with anacrusis :-

ovdey er tet (a). tuvtly To.isde BéAcoow (hb). —+tvvty c, d. Pherecratéan (first, second); e, f, catalectic: éwrambaAoot OfBats (Cc). tuvtvty deteral 7 em) mode (d). : tutvvty Wevdeor ToixtAos (€). : Luvlvl abrli’ dayyeriat (f). futoul g,h. Pherecratean with anacrusis (logacedic paroemiac) : eyo dé pve Kavevdor (g). vtuvlivly evdotoy &puart vixay (h). —tvutluvte i, j. Pherecratean catal. with anac. (logaoedic prosodiac) : iw yeveat Bporay i). vtuvlvt mdvrwy ionyoplay (}). —tvutuvt k, 1, m. Glyconic (first, second, third): By Kate Tov veavtay (Ix). tuvtvtvt Epws mapSévios 7édy (1). UeLyvtvt 6 péyas bABos & 7° dperd (m), bevtutyuut n, 0, p. Glyconic with anacrusis, or added thesis, or both: eVdotoy & véot kayidrwv(n). wtutvived ° Tay év OeppworiAus SavdvTwv (0). teLuvtvtv mAhpns wey epalved’ & oeAdva (Pp). —~teovivivtly q. Phalaecéan (hendecasyllable) : év piproy Krad) rd Elpos popjow. Lebwvlvtuls r. Sapphic (hendecasyllable) : ToucrAdspoy’ aSdvar’ *Adpodira.. tutvotuvtyuty 8. Alcaic (hendecasyllable), begins with anacrusis: ov Xp KaKxoto: Supdy éxirpérety. = tutetvvtul 918. The following have more than one dactyl: a. mapSévos eddonluwv yduwr. Luvivetyul be. ixdves dpoddyot véuorro. tuvbvutyty: C. méAa TE opis KaddArdrra, betuvlovt d. tveuos kar’ dpos Spvoly éurerdy. buolvutuvtuy €. olvos @ pire mat Adyerat kad GAdSea. futvvbvvuluvtyus f. jjpos dvSeudevtos emdiov épxopuévoro. fulvvluvuluvtuvute

_ &. mapdéve tay nepadray 7a D Evepde vina. tvvtvetvvtvutv

The forms d, e, f, belong to the so-called Aeolie dactyls ; in d, the basis is _ @ pyrrhic, and éumecdy stands for a dactyl by 897. The form g is called — - Praxilizan.

328 _ LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. [91$

919. The following have a double anacrusis (logaoedic anapaestic) :

a. ikerevoare 3 & Kdpa. vulvulut

b. 7d dé ovyyeves éuBéBaxer. vulvuubwly

C. KaréAamipas, Geitas eupayip. vutvvtutut d. ‘EAévay €Avcaro Tpwias. vvutvluvtul e. Ste Toy TUpayvoy KTavEeTHY. vulvtotluvt f. tin Tay Tdpos, & pdrawa O7Ba. vulvvtvtuty

The form e loses the second thesis by syncope. Trochaic forms with double anacrusis are also regarded as logaoedic anapaestic :

g. Neued 5é tls. vuelve

h. wéaw, GAN’ dvdoxov. 90 hclead gona

i. Zepvpov yiyavros apa. vutv—veyw

j- Xapirwy Exar Téyde KGmov. vulveveveu

920. SYNCOPATED FORMS are very numerous, They often give rise to choré- ambi or cretics. The following are specimens :

a. vavTiAlas éoxdras. t

vulotot Lotvt f

b. od Webdet réykw Adyor. —tvvtot C.. &pavoas adryewordras enol. ~ am tvtolvetel d. daxpudecody 7° eplrancer aixpudy. ~ tuvtotuvtvte Some verses consist of more than one series: thus. e. first Pherecratean catal., repeated: tydpa tipavvoy “Immapxov éxawerny. tuvlvtlotvvtvlt f. Asclepiadéan (= Pherecr. catal., second + first) : éreid)) weyav aXAov BaBvawrtos. beLovlotvetyt

g. greater Asclepiadean (has choriambus between two Pherecr.) : pndty &AAO ouretons mpdrepoy Séydpiov d&prérw. I

tubtvvloptvvlogtvvetet * h. Priapéan (= Glyconic and Pherecratean) : edpevis 8 6 AtKewos Zorw mdog veodalga. Lytyvtvtot—tuvly i, Eupolidéan (= Glyconic and troch. dim. catal.) : - & Seduevor karep@ mpds duds €revdepws. tyvtvtyvtoviLultul

921. PHERECRATEAN verses are sometimes combined in systems (897 b): but much more frequent are Giyconic systems closing with a Pherecratean,

a. In antistrophic composition, when one form of the Pherecratean (first or second) is used in a particular line of the strophe, the other form is sometimes found in the corresponding line of the antistrophe. The second and third forms of the Glyconic may correspond to each other in the same way, and either of them may correspond to the logaoedic form in 918 a. Sometimes a first Glyconic corresponds to a choriambic dimeter (924 b, c) or to an iambic dimeter; and a first Pherecratean, to an iambic dim. catal. These irregulari- ties are mostly rare: only the interchange of a second and third Glyconic is frequent. The rhythms in which they occur are termed POLYSCHEMATIST (multiform).

Cretic Rhythms.

922. The eretic often occurs, as the result of syncope (895), in trochaic, iambic, and logaoedic rhythms. Examples may be seen in 901, 905, 920. The name “cretic rhythms ” is frequently applied to such verses; espe- tially when the cretic—either in its proper form, or as resolved (892) inte

a pacon, first or fourth—occurs fpeatealy i in the same verse. But there are : a aaah more i sag 4 called by that name, in which the cretic fi ory by resolution, th t or fourth paeon) stands as the fundamental . Tt is not vars easy to distinguish between these two classes. _ oe following will serve as specimens:

Ps; i dimeter catalectic; by with anacrusis:

de xara (8). Lvvwty pe pate iv ye scvoiper (b). —tv—ty EB c,d. aecioe (acatal.); d, with anacrusis : : : evdev Ew eyd ¢). tutu & Zed, ti wore xpnodueda (d). — tevetuve e. trimeter: @s éue AaBodou Toy Snudrny. fovetv— tue he tetrameter catalectic : . | ' overt KaTRASe TWéAw ofkad bwd ploovs, Frvvvtvvvtvevty g. tetrameter (acatalectic) : ws penlonnd oe KAéwvos &rt padAov, dv fue tuveltvuvetue Karareue Toiow immedor kaTTUpaTa. buve tu— tutor h. dimeter, preceded by trochaic dimeter: _ ovdév €or Snpioy yuvaiKds auaxadrepor. tu-vivevluvetue .

1, pentameter :

god y axovowmev; dmorct* KaTd oe XdoouEY ToIs AlSols.

923. The rhythmic accent falls‘on the first long syllable of the cretic (894 a): at the same time there is a certain stress, though weaker, on the second long. a. Occasionally a spondaic basis (that is, a syncopated cretic) is prefixed to a cretic rhythm. In some instances, a trochaic dipody answers to a cretic, in _ corresponding lines of strophe and antistrophe.

Choriambio. Rhythms.

924. The choriambus occurs in Greek verse, not as the fundamental foot of a distinct rhythm, but only as the result of syncope (895) in dac- tylic, anapaestic, and logacedic rhythms. For examples of choriambi thus produced, see 909 e, “h, 919 e, 920. Yet the name “choriambic” is used as a convenient designation for verses which are made up either of pure choriambi, or of choriambi mixed with iambic dipodies, The follow- ing will serve as specimens :

a, b, c. dimeter; b and c begin with iambic dipody :

& warps, + SGud 7’ eudy (a). Lyvisnidey wm pws avinare wdxav (b). vive tuve dewdrar’ awretAodvras érav (Cc). =Uvue Luv d. trimeter: ei 5& Kupe? Tis wéAas olwyoTdAwy. Lag be Liew e. tetrameter : : + dewd wey ody, Seve trapdooe copds olwvoSéras.

f, tetrameter hypercatalectic (891 b): tAdAa 8 én’ BAAos erevdua oruperl(ov wéeyas “Apns.

teen LON oe! Began —V—e

329

330 IONIC RHYTHMS. [924

g. dimeter, and first Pherecratean: divamérouce 5} mpds”OAvuwoy wrepvyeoot Kovpats.

OO me ee Oe Ve

Lonie Lehythms.

925. The fundamental foot is the ionic a minore (vv»+—). The rhyth- mic accent falls on the first long syllable. The two shorts may be con- tracted into a long; and of the longs, each one may be resolved into two shorts. The verse, when catalectic, ends in an anapaest.

a. Anaciasis. Two trochees (—v—v) may be substituted for the two longs of one foot with the two shorts of the next (--v-). This change is very frequent, especially in Anacreontic verses: its effect is to produce ~ a breaking up (anacldsis) of the ionic rhythm, which passes into the trochaic.

926. Specimens of ionic rhythms: a, b. dimeter catalectic; b, with anaclasis :

Sucedds Kombds avhp (a). vutevul _ woreov 7 dvaordoets (b). vuetvavul c, d. dimeter (acatalectic) ; d, with anaclasis: thera: © aiordduntis (Cc). vetouvlo moAuo) wey july Hn (d). vutvevle e. trimeter catalectic : Kardpas Oidirdda BAablppovos. vetevet—vul f, g, h. trimeter (acatalectic); g, h, with anaclasis; orpards eis dytlmropov yelrova xdpav (f). velsvvteou tl * Atos ex wévwv yévoit’, oddaya TaVde (g). vebvevlnuvle &roreprels brd pntpds errohdn (h). vetevetvoev le i, j. tetrameter catal. (Galliambic); j, with anacl. : Savdr@ Avoimede? Snpoly dpelorot Bopdy (i). vetl—vet-vel—vel

plots odk MBwxe pdoxy AdAoy “Aww: crdua(j) vy ty—vt—vetvuevt

k,l. tetrameter (acatalectic); 1, with anaclasis : Sixa F tAAwy povddpwv eiul, Td yap dusceBes Epyov (k).

I

ee me ee ee ee Oe ee

mwarépwy Te Kal TexdyTwv rydos EvBixos parever (1).

Rem. m. An ionic verse may show thertwo forms (without anaclasis and with it) in corresponding lines of strophe and antistrophe. The rhythm is then termed polyschematist (cf. 921 a).

927. Sometimes the last long of the ionic is omitted, even in the middle of a verse: thus

& Wortyoupoy sdiopc. vetovvt— b. opevds ofror’ bpAhoe: kaxlay. vetovetavel C. Bdacw KadrAloroior Avralyeww, vul——Lovelo

Sometimes the jirst short of the ionic is irregularly lengthened, but not at the beginning of a verse: thus

d. wepiwatoyra: moAaol, 0s Li ts aig he a

| Dochmiac and Bacchie Rhythms. :

__-928. The dochmius consists of a bacchius with a following iambus f wage The rhythmic aecent falls on the first long of the bacchius: _ there is also a secondary accent on the long of the iambus. Lach of the two shorts (in the bacchius and iambus) may be lengthened; and each of the three longs may be resolved into two shorts. ‘These liberties give rise to a great variety of forms, most of which are shown in the follow- ing specimens’; a. Id mpdésmoda,

: vee vl b, ev y& Tad ped. cals de. Soke Bae bias. sof ely ae 6 d. Exdets "Arpeldas. Lame pipes €. otpardmedoy Auréy. vive ul f. dovdoctvas brep. —tvevut g. pevodAaBel névrpy. vive —t h. wAa{dwevoy Actoowr. —vv——t i, &riroy rt oe xph. vivevel j- pet words B5e Acds. 4 —Yevvel k. GApupdy éx) wéyrov. —Uvvv tL

l. dvépeAov éwéBares. J V

vwuvuVvVvVYeY

Mm. o¥more katadvoipor. : ;

we YVUYUYVYVYUY

n. dadyer” éxrdmoy. b

vive udu 0. Tov KaTaparétaroy. —dv—vude p- ov T, @ Avoyevés. vbvuuvul q. el aidépos vw. . m—Luvel Yr. tupdvvov wddea. vliuiuty

Rem. s. The dochmii are used in passages which express great mental agi- tation. They are often combined in dimeters, or longer systems (897 b). 929. OTHER BACCHIC RHYTHMS are little used in Greek poetry, and only in connection with dochmii. Thus we find a bacchic a. dimeter (dochmiac hypercatalectic) : Xopevséevr’ dvadvaAots. vi—vt

b. trimeter catalectic : : Wada mpoyevyntdpwv. vi—vl-vwt

e. tetrameter: , . edge pe rowuloecey roy dusdatuor “Asdov. — tue vin to vle

332

GREEK INDEX.

GREEK INDEX.

Norz. The references are made in all cases to the sections, not the pages,

of the Grammar.

The letters 7, placed after the number of a section, show

that the same subject extends into the following sections. For peculiarities of verb-formation, a special InpEx or Verss has been

given in section 451.

A, vow. 7 ff; quant. 86 ff. a, €, 0, interch. 25. 334 a. 383. 387 a. 889. 397a; Gt, t, 27. a after ¢, 1, p, 29. 125a. 126. 134. 207 a. 335 ff. @ for 24D b. 29 D. 125 D, 1. 184D. 309D. 335 D. 382 b. [338 D. & for 7 24D a. 125D, 3. & from ao, aw, see ao, aw. a from e, see e. a to wm 24De. [a, d. ato e 168 D.182D. 870D a to » 28. 125 ff. 134. 309. 335 ff. 372 b. 881-2. 887

a. 400 m, n. a conn. vow. 849 ff. 400 h. 410D,411D. [584».

a- priv. 483 ; in adj: w. gen.

-a. quant. 130, 1384. 183. 190 ¢. 207 a.

-a acc. sing. 154, 157.171. 1951; voc. sing. masc. 135; neut. pl. 115¢. 138. 154. 195e.

-@ gen. sing. for ov 136 d.

-a adv, 227,

¢ diphth. 11ff. [870Da.

aa to 232; aa, ag, for a, a,

&dw 420 D, 10.

éyaddés comp. 223, 1; adv. ed 227; rovro, macay &perhy, 548.

Gryatouct 419 Di 1,

ayoxdrehs 178 D.

&yapoat 419, 1. 404, 4. 413.

dyavaxréw w. part. 800.

&ydoua 419 D, 1.

iryardw w. dat. 6lla; w. part. 800.

ayyéAAw pass. pers. 777 ; w. part. 797.

wye 84 851. [D. 411 D.

&yelpw 432, 1. 8367 Da. 384

&yevoros kaxay 584 ¢.

dyhpws (aos) 147,

aywéw, -ivw, 424), 1.

&yndAn 199 D.

ayvoew W. gen. 570; w. par. 799; ayvolnoe 24D ce.

ayvola 611.

&yvums 442,1. 23 D. 312. 322. 387 a. 417.

ayvds 218. [pisev 203 D.

&yopd wt. art. 580b; ayo-

ayds 457 ¢.

dypduevor 884 D.

aypés wt. art. 530b.

aypdrepos, &yptos, 221 D.

wyx1, -ov, compar. 229D; w. gen. 589, [mid. 689.

tyw 424, 1. 349 D. 384;

&ywrvifoucs mid, 692; md- Anv 547 D.

&5 (avSdvw) 437, 1.

adeaAdds voc. sing. 141 a.

adhoere, GdnKds, 318 D.

&dinéw w. two acc. 555; w. part. 801; pres. for pf. 698.

adivara for &ddvaroy 518 a; &dvvaroy bv 792 a.

ado (Hm. &eldw) 379.

&Swpos xpnudray 584b.

ae (an) to & 82; ton 32D g. 870 Dg. 871¢; to aa 370 Da.

ae (iadw, teoa) 449 D, 7.

aet to a 84; to a 35a; to n 32Dg. 370Dg; toa

871a; to ag 870 Da.

deuchs 85a. 483 b.

deipw 850.432 D, 2.411 D.

&éxwy 32 De. 488 b.

adto 436,38. [fut, 875.

-d(m denom. verbs 472f;

an, an, tO G, g, 32.384; to n, n, 870 D g. 871 ¢. 401i.

anddy, andor, 194.¢.

anu: 404 Da. 400 Dm.

&hp 202 D, 21.

"Addva 24Db. [-nor 205.

"Adhvace 2043 -ndev 208;

adsréw 309.

&dpéw w. wh 748 bd.

axpdos, -da, 207 a.

“ASws 148; ’"ASdéws 146 D.

aw 11 ff; fora 24Dc; for o (w) in comp. 221¢; to n 129,D. 810.

-a elided 70D; short for accent 95.365; 2 sing. for ca: 363. 401 ¢.

ai for ef 721.

ala 132 D.

Afas 12a.

aidéouat, atdouo, 448, 1. 413; w. ace. 544a,

*AlSns (“Atdns) 65 D. 202 D, 22; “AiddésSe 208 D; ?Ai- Swveds 202 D, 22; ey. (eis) “Ardov 509 B.

aidotos 455 a.

aidés 181-2.

ate for efSe 721.

aishp 152 p. 2014,

AiSloy 163. 199 D.

aikhs 35a. 488 b.

-aw dual 195 b.

-aiva 1 dec]. 125b.

aivéw 420, 4.

2

Sy ea

Reet al nS 5

~— alvlCouas, aitynus, 420 D, 4.

—— alyuwor 440 D, 6. |

y -alyw denom. 472 g.

aipéw 450, 1. 312. 321D;

» Ww. two ace. 556; mid.

‘: 691; pass. 694 c.

— alipeo 432, 2. 85 a. 382 a.

ats, ~atar(y), dat. pl. 129.

-aica for -aca 362 D.

aicSdvouat (atoSoua) 436,

“1; w. ace. or gen. 544

c. 576; w. part. 799.

aisxpds compar. 222.

aicxtvouat w. acc. 5442; w. dat. 6lla; w. part. or inf. 800. 802.

airéw w. two ace. 553.

airs Ww. gen, 584d.

aixunrd 136 Da.

diw 309.

axdenra 136 Da,

ax-ax 442 D, 16.

dxaxpévos 46 D, 321 D.

&xéouat 419, 8.

dis adv. 259.

&rehs 178 D.

Gun 46a; aeuhy 552.

&o(v)h 39.

&orris 186 D.

w, dat. 602.

&rovd Comat 423, 1.

&xovw 423, 1.811.321.3879. 886 a. 421, 22; w. gen. 544 b. 576; in comp. 584¢; w. part. 799; am called 540; pres. 698.

&kparos compar. 221 d.

&kpodoua: 335a; w. gen. 576. [530b.

Gxpdmoris 482; wt. art.

&xpos w. art. 536.

&erts (v) 158 m. :

tov 32 De. 483b; gen. abs. 791 b.

ar (etAw, éddnv) 432 D, 22.

@Adowar 321 D. 367 D. 418.

- GA-adK (4Adtw) 884 D.

bAamwd(w 328 D.

GAvyewds compar, 223, 8.

% ee -alyw, -hoKw, 436

; 12

&ddovSos w. gen. 587 d;|

GREEK INDEX.

éArerpa(p) 167.

dAelpw 425, 5. 821. 887 a.

&AexTpudy 152 p.

dArdiw 447, 8. 384 D.

dAgouct, &revowo, 426 D, 7, 381 D.

dado 419, 9. [608.

GAhdera 125 D. 455 a; dat.

dAnans 179. 217.

&ASoua 422 D, 19.

Gris 28D; w. gen. 584b.

aAlonouat447, 1.23 D. 312. 408,12; w. gen. 577b; w. part. 799.

GdAtralyw 436 D, 18.

arn (ardtw) 447 D, 8.

bAKH, GAKl, 199 D.

&Anuvdéy 153 m.

GAAd 863; after compar. 661; od phy (error) G@AAd 848e; BAAD yap, BAN ob dp, ov yap aAAG, 870 d. (428, 1.

dAAdocow 294, 284, 387 b.

GAAhAwY 237. 672 b.

#AdOSt 203. [D, 33.

&Aouat 432, 8. 882 a. 408

BAAos 59. 236; w. art. 524. §28 a. 5388 e; appos. 538 e; w. gen, 58493 &Ados &AAo 500 b; péyioros (udvos) Tay wArAwy 586 Cc; ef Tis &AAos 754 a; &AAos # 860b; BAA tT (#) 508 b. 829 a; rh &AAO Hf, ovdtv BAN FH, 508 b.

&AAoge 204.

dddAtw 73D. [re ral 857.

&AAws, THY HA. 509 a; A.

arAdXev 203 D.

GAs 74d. 172 a.

GAgo, Garo, 408 D, 33.

GaveTdt@ (d&AaddeTnpar) 321 D.

daddonw (-d¢w, -dvw) 447, 9.

arAddvw 436 D, 14.

aAdmwnt 164.

&Aws 199.

dua T0c. 227; w. dat. 602 a; w. part. 795 ¢.

tuata (&uata) 65 D.

apmatirdés 139 c. [801.

: Brcelvo 426 DE,

auaptdve 436,25; w. part.

|

333. apBrlonw 44'7, 3. apuBpor (&uaprdve) 436 D,2. Sué 238 D. [222 a.

delvov (dyadds) 223, 1.

dmedéw w. gen. 576.

ames, -€wy, -tv, 233 D.

aphtrwp 483 a. -

GpirAAdoua 4138,

dupes, -(v), -e, 288 D.79 D,

dpvhwov w. gen. 584¢,

duds, auds, 238 D.

&ureAos 139. [5.

dun-éxw, -loxw, 65d. 438, —

aumioxveona 438, 5. 332.

dumractokw 447, 4.

dunvivsny (rvéw) 396 D.

&udpuoy 27. [411 D.

dpiyvw mid. 689 a; -ddw

audi 80D. 102 Db; w. case 637 ff.

dudtévyu 440, 1.; w. two acc. 553; perf. 712.

&upts 80D. [w. dat. 602.

dpdisBntéw w. gen. 577 c;

aupdrepos 255 ; -ov, -a., 502 b; w. art. 538 a.

dupotépwrev w. gen. 589.

tupw 255. 687; w. art. 538 a.

ay 5th class 329 b. 486-7.

ay- priv. 483. D

-dy from -dwy gen. pl. 128

éy for ava 73 D.

&y (a) 873; w. cond. sent. 744. ff; w. pot. opt. 722. 748; w. hyp. ind. 746b; w. fut. ind. 710b; w. subj. for fut. 720e; w, final és, daws, 741; w. subj. in rel. sent. 757 ff; w. inf. 783; w. part. 803.

dy (a) for édy ‘744 ff. 872.

&y for & iy 68b. [635-6.

avé 102D b. 112; w. case

éva 102 Db. 112. 615 a.

tiva voc. of tvag 158 De,

dvaBidoroua 445. 692.

avaryryvdonw 445 D, 4

dvaryratos pers. constr. 777,

avadynn W. inf, 767. :

avarlonw, dvardw, 447, 2.

dvapimviokw W. two Obj. 553-4.

»

334

tvat 23D. 158 De. &vdtios Ww. gen, 584e. dvdoow 23 D.

ayddvw 437, 1. 28D. 312. &ydpdmodov ‘199 D.

uvev w. gen. 626. 781. tivevde(v) 79 D.

avéxouat 314; w. part. 800.

avivosxe 821 D.

avhp 173. 58; om’d 509b; tivdpes Sixacral 500a; avhp 68 ¢,

EySpwros 118; om’d 504 c¢. 505 c. 506. 509 b; ays. péroikos 500 a.

dvinut 403 D; w. gen. 580.

divolyw, -vunt, 424, 16. 312. 322. 387 b.

&vouolws w. dat. 603.

dvoprdw 314,

tyra 622.

avrdw 370 D a,

tyre for édyre 861.

dyréxona w. gen. 57 4b.

tyrny 622.

ayvrt 102 Db; w. case 622; after compar. 661.

dyridveipa, 218 D.

dytiucpt, aytiupus, 80 D. 492 h. 622.

dytimorgomon W. gen. 577 ¢.

dyvor ds w. superl. 664 b.

. dvbw (dvitw, aybro) 419,

17. 344.D; dvdoas 188.

tive adv. 229, 6385; Ww. gen. 589.

&yw verb 419 D, 17.

tiyorya 409 D, 11. 818 D. 851 D.

avéryewy 146.

dvdvupos 2/7. [767 a.

&éios w. gen. 584 e; w. inf.

Go, ew, interch. 26. 136 D b. 147. 370Dd.

ao to w 32.136Db; to ow 370 Da; to @ 32Dh. 134 D. 870 D g; to eo 370 Da, d.

-do for -ov gen. 136 Db.

aor to @ 34.

dosh 32 D ee.

top 153 D.

nov to w 84;

to ow 870D

drodiipdonw 444, 2;

GREEK INDEX.

a; to cov 870 Dd.

am- for dwo- 73 D.

dmayopevw 450, 8 a; w. part. 798.

draivuuat 440 D, 6.

dros 218; w. gen. 584b.

dmavrdw 879; w. dat. 602.

dmaptoxw w. dat. 595b.

Giaas w. art. 587.

admrdrwp 217 ¢.

dravpdw 408 D, 19.

draplorw 447 D, 14.

daretréw 371 Dc.

dretpos W. gen. 584 ¢.

drexSdvona 436, 6.

dmoréw w. dat. 595 b.

amados 208. 207 a. 258 b.

dé 623; compar. 229.

droalvuua 440 D, 6.

dmodl8wur 444,73; w. gen. 578 a; mid. 689 a.

Ww. ace. 544 a.

dméepoa 345 D,

dmoivhokw 444, 4, [d.

drorave 379; w. gen. 574

*Amébddov 175 ¢. 172d.

&movoeouat 413,

dmopéw ri 547 ¢.

aroorepéw W. two acc. 553 ; w. gen. 580 a.

&robpas 408 D, 19.

amopatyw w. part. ‘797.

aropebyw w. gen. 577 b.

amdxpn 404, 3.

amméeuper 73 D.

dampens w. dat. 595 ¢.

amtw 427,1; mid. 691; w. gen. 544b. 574b; amréoy 806 b.

arwrépw 229,

ap stems in, 152b; nom. in, from st. in ar, 167.

ap (alpw) 432,23 (dpapto- nw) 447 D, 15.

&p for %pa 73 D. 865.

&pa 865. 112.

Gpa, 828 ff, 112.

apaids 23 D.

&pdouct 404 D, 9.

dipaplokw 447 D, 15. 321 D. 338 D. 384 D. 408 D, 34.

*Apysior 1D.

dpelay 228, 1. [595b.

apéow 444, 10; w. dat.

apiyw 253 w. dat. 544).

&ipnuevos 318 D.

“Apns 88 D. 202, 1.

“apioy neut. 465 a.

apiorepd wt. art. 530b.

apiorrevs 189 D,

upioros (&yadsdés) 223, 1.

dipicéeo 419, 10.

apudTre, epubten; 430, 1.

apv (&pyds, &pves,) 202, 2.

&pvéowat 413.

&pvupar 442, 2.

aipdw 419,16. 370 De.

aprd(w 431, 1.

ipmak 218,

pony, &pinv, 217 b.

vAprepus 158 d.

ape, apirw, 419, 18.

apxatos 455 a.

apxh; (Thy) apxhy 552.

tpxw 424,2; w. gen. 544 b. 581 a; aor. 708;— &pxouce mid. 691; w. gen. 574b; w. part. 798; ty &ptoua 739; &pxduevos 788.

. |apwyds 25. 455 ¢.

as stems in, 152¢. 181 ff.

-as nom. from st. in ar 168.

-ds nouns of number 258 d.

-as ace. pl. 154. 1951.

doa 408 D, 18. 420 D, 10. 449 D, 7.

topevos 221 d. 408 D, 44.

aomls coll. 514; én’ (aap’) domtda 530 b.

tooa 244¢; dooa 246D.

aooov 229 D, 224 D,

aorhp 173.

dorpdrre subj. om. 504¢,

tory 23 D, 185-6; wt. art,

530 b. aovvderoy 854, ar stems in, 152a. 165 ff -arat, -aro, 355 De, 392. ardp 864, 4. drraprés BY D.139¢

&re 876, 53; w. part. 795d

uirep w. gen. 626.

repos 68 ¢. "ATdls 40 b. 88 be

rtdve, avtw, 436, 3. aup (emavpioxoua) 447, 5.

aitdp 864, 4.

673-6. 680; w. dat. of accomp. 604; abrds 6 dvhp and 6 dvhp ards 5388b5 of abrod ndiuKnynKd- tes 5324; abtd TodTo 502b; abrd ratra 552 a;—é airds 5388b; w. » dat. 603; raird Toiro 502d. [590 a. avrov gen. 588a; adv. abTov = éavrod 235.

&haipéw w. Obj. 553. 580 a. &pap compar. 224 D,

&pdoow 430, 8.

&devos 201 Db.

&pedéw w. gen. 580. [e. G&pinus 403, 1; w. gen. 574 dpucvéouon 392 D.

&pin 137; apuhs 187.

_ dptoow 431 D, 9.

*Axaot 1 Dz &xapis soe. 221 D. axéwy, dxevoy, 442 D, 16. &xSoum 422, 1. 413; w. dat. 611 a; w. part. 800. *AxIA(A)evs 40D. [392 D. &xvupat 442), 16.867 Db. &xpi(s) 70b. 80 D. 877, 8; w. gen. 626. [870Dd. aw, ew, interch. 26. 128 D. aw to w 32; toow 370 Da; to a 32Dh. 128D.

dw, denom.. verbs 472b;

contract 370; fut. 375.

Hw 408 D, 18.

= -deov gen. pl. 128.

&wpro 432 D, 2.

B, 19 ff; bef. +v-mute 44; bef. u 46; bef. o 47. —

B for 1 53D; in u(B)p 53; to in pf. 341. 387 b. 392 a.

BadiCw 379. -

Basds 212 D. 222 D.

Balvw 435, 1.349 D. 408, 1. 409, 2. 416, 2; perf. 712.

Bdxxos 40 b. 88).

BdrAw 432, 4, 355 De. 886 b. 894. 408 D, 20; w. dat. 607 ; in comp, 685.

Bdarw 427, 2.

Bdpdioros (Bpadds) 222 D.

Bapts 90.

Bdoavos 139 a.

Baotreta 180 ¢. 455 a. 460c.

BaciAew 130 c.455 0.458 a.

BactAeos 468.

Baotreds 189; compar. 224D; wt. art. 530 a. -

Bacirkedw Ww. gen. 581la; aor. 708.

BactAutds 455 b.

Bactraiocoa 458 a.

Bdoxw 444D, 11.

Baord(w 431, 2.

BéBaAne 86 D.

BeBpddw 445 D, 3.

Beloucn, Béoucu, 378 D.

BéArepos, -Taros, 223 D, 1.

Beatty, -toros, 223, 1.

Bi to ¢ 429,

Bla dat. 608. 610a; w. gen. 565; mpds Blay 654; Bi-

no. 206 Da, BidCoum pass. 694.¢. BiBdGwo 815. [435 D,1.

BiBds 403 D, 10; BiBar BiBros 139e. [409 D, 16. BiBpdokw 445, 8.408 D, 24. Bidw 423, 2.378 D. 408, 18. ava-BidoKomat 445, 1. BA redupl. 319. Baa (BdrAAw) 482, 4. BadBero 427 D, 3, BaAdarw 427, 8. 897 b; w.

835

Bracréw 436, 4.

|BAcio 408.D, 20.

Badérw 424, 3; w. ace. 547.

BAhxoyv 153 m.

BAitrw 430, 2.

Bardon 445, 2. 58D.

Bodw 32 De. 879.

BonSéw w. dat. 595 b.

Bore (BdAAw) 432 D, 4.

BorAcoSar 422 D, 8.

Bopéas 136 d.

Boonw 422, 2.

Bérpus 158i. 185. [690a.

BovaAcdw w. ace, 547; mid.

Bovay 139 d.

BovAoum 422, 3. 308 a, 863 .a.413; éuol Bovao- péevm 601la; BovAotunv tiv, éBovaduny ty, 752.

Bots 189.

Bpadds compar. 222 D.

Bpdoow 430, 38.

Bpax 424 D, 4.

Bpaxds compar. 222 D.

Bpéras 182 D.

Bpéxw 424, 4.

Bplsw 424, 5.

Bpo (BiBpdécxw) 445, 8.

Bpords 53 D.

Bpox 424 D, 4.

Bpuvxdoua 448 D, 20.

Buvéw 438, 1.

Bas 189-D.

Bdocouc 32 De.

Bwridveripa 218 D.

I, 16. 18.19 ff; bef. r-mute 44; bef. ¢ 47; to x in pf. 341. 387 b. 892 a.

ya. (ylyvoua) 409, 3.

yata, 132 D.

ydAa 153 r. 166.

yalwy 439 D, 5.

yardws 146 D.

youew 447, 2.

ydvupas 439 D, 5.

ydp 870; co-ord. 8534; after art. 584a; after prep. 616; after rel. sent. 823; 6 ydp b25y ei ydp T21a.

cogn. ace. 555 a, Paaordyw 436, 4. 319 ¢.

yaorhp 153 n. 173, yy 40a; stems in, 828b.,

336

vé 850, 1. 70a. 105d; af- ter art. 584a; after prep. 616.

yéywva, -€w, -loxw, 424 D, 80. 351 D.

yeyes 409, 3.

yelvoua 449 D, 1. 416, 8.

yedacelw 472).

yeado 419, 2.844 D. 870D a. 379; aor. 709.

yerodw 419, 2.

yéAws 169 D.

yéuw w. gen. 575.

yey (ylyvouwat) 449, 1,

yévos dat. 608. [449 D, 1.

yévto 408 D, 85; &yevro

Vepaids compar, 221 b.

yépas 182 D.

yedm w. two obj. 554; yed- oua w. gen. 576.

yn 1382; om. 509b; wt. art. 5380 b.

ynvéw 448, 3.

yijpas 182-3. [2.

ynpdoKw, -dw, 444, 1. 408,

yt to oo 60.328a; to ¢ 61. 328 b.

yl(y)voum 449, 1. 81. 332. 355 De. 409, 3; incomp. pred. 490; impers. 494;

om, 508 b; w. pred. gen.

572; w. dat. poss. 598.

yiyvackw 445, 4. 319 ¢. 408,14; w. gen. 582; w. part. 799.

yA redupl. 319 ¢.

yAavKa@mis 171 D. 481.

wavs 212. 220, 222 D.

yAwxis 153 m.

yv redupl. 319.

yvdsxos 139 b.

qdprre 42'7, 4,

yvo (yryvdonw) 445, 4.

yvépn TOT; om. 509b; gen. 568; dat. 608.

ryodw 448 D, 21.

yov stems in, 152 ¢.

ydvu 202, 8.

rvyouv 850, 2.

your, youvar, 202 D, 3.

ypauuh 139 d.

ypavs 189.

yedpw 424, 6. 888; w. gen.

GREEK INDEX.

577b; w. two ace. 555;

mid. 691.

ypnis, ypnis, 11 b. 189 D.

yuurhs 218,

yuuvds W. gen. 584 f.

yuvh 202, 4. 158d; om. 509b; wt. art. 580c.

yowos 1389a,

yor (yéywva) 424 D, 30.

A, 19ff; bef. -ara, -aro,

45-6; dropped 47. 49. 75. 386 a.

5 stems in, 152 f. 169 ff.

Sa (Salw) 484.D,3; (dato- po) 484D,4; (éddny) 447 D, 10. 395 D.

dahp 172 D.

Bal 852,83 dat 201Db.

dai 328 D.

Satvuue 440 D, 7. 401 D, 1.

Salou 484 D, 4. 855 De.

Salpw 424, 7.

dais 153 r.

daiw 434 D, 8.

Sdxvw 435, 7.

ddxpu, Sdxpvoy, 199.

Saudi 448 D, 1.

Sduap 170.

Sduvnut, -vdw, 443 D, 1. 343 D. 347 D. 359 D.

Aavaot 1D.

SavelCw mid. 689 b.

Sap (Sépw) 424, 7.

Sapsdve 436, 4.

daréoua 434 D, 4. 381 D.

-Se local 203; enclit. 105 d. 110. 239.

dé 862. 70a; after art. 584a; after prep. 616; ve... 0€ 855b; Kad.. dé 856 b.

déaro 381 D.

Se (€d8eroa) 409, 5. 87D; pf. 712; w. wh 743.

Se7, see Sew.

delSeyuar 319 D.

SelSia, Seidw, 409 D, 5.

Serdloxoua 442 D, 3.

Serxavdoua 442 D, 3.

Sefxvums 442, 3. 800. 319 D.

400-01; w. part. 797.

392 D; in o(8)p 53; toe

SefA> wt. art. 580 b,

detAds 471,

detva 245.

Sewds 471.

Selous (Séos) 178 D.

Sermvéw 351 D.

Selpw 424, 7.

dex (Selxvups) 442 D, 3,

dexaerhs 475 b. 481.

Sertds 258 d.

Sexdxiror 258 D.

déxomar 65 D.

5éAcap 165. +

deAdis, -fv, 1564.

Séuas 201 Dd.

Séuw 443 D, 1.

Sévdpov 199. 202 D, 28.

Setids 221 D3 Seti, Setidy, wt. art. 530 b.

Setirepds 221 D.

Séouo w. gen. 575.

déos 178 D.

déras 182 D.

dépn 125d.

déprouat 424 D, 31. 883 D. 413; w. cogn. ace. 547 d.

Sépw 424, '7. 398 D.

'. [Beopds 199 D. 200.

dSeomdrys 185 a. 197 D. Sevouct 422 D, 4. devpo w. gen. 589. Sedraros 224D. Sedrepos 253. 257; w. gen. Sexhwepos 72. sécoua 65D. 818 D. 408 D, 36. 415; mid. 692. 5éw to bind 420, 1. 871b. 408, 8. | Séw to want 422,4. 370 D e. 871 b. 418; w. gen. 575 a.—de? w. gen. 494. 575a; w. acc. 57540; w. two cases 544¢; w. inf. "64b; %e 703; Setv 772; déov ace. abs. 7925 évds (Svoiv) Séovres 256. 54 851; after art. 5384a; w. superl. 665 a; exe 64 684.4; Kad 5) nat 857, djvey 852, 7. Syidw 870 De. dye (Sdxvw) 435, 7. SyAoveri 868 a.

[585.-

a “2

8: to ¢ 61. 328b.

di, Se, Sor, 409, 5. 808 D. 319 D. 400 h.

At (Zeds, Aids) 202, 6.

30; w. inf. 780-81. Sia 207 D. diaBalyw w..ace. 544d, did-yw w. part. 798. diorywrlCoua w. dat. 602. — Blowra 125 d, Sierrdw 314, - Biaxovéw 314. -Giaréyouae 319 e. 413. 424, >’ 16a; w. dat. 602. Siarclrw w. part. 798; 5: adumdy 788. SidAexros 3 e. 189 e. Sidwerpos 139 d. diavogouom 418. Siackowéw w. gen. 570. SiarerAdw w. part. 798. diapépw prep. 630; intrans. 685; w. gen. 581; mid. w. dat. 602. SiapSelpw 432 D, 20. didopos w. gen. 584g; w. # 860 b. — - Blyapwa 23 Dz — biddoxw 447, 10; w. two ace. 553; mid. 689 b. 5691 a, —— - BLlSyur 403, 8, | Bidpdorw 444, 2. 408, 8. —-BlSwur 403, 4. 298. 802. 847 D. 400-02; w. gen. - 574e; in comp. 685; pres. 702. ah

3355 w.

did 102 Db; w. case 629-

te (Stauat) 404Db.

diéxw w. gen. 580.

Si¢nuce 404 Dc. 400 Dm.

Siniedoror 2538 D.

Biucd¢w mid. 689 b.

dixaos pers. constr. 777.

dixn om. 509b; Sixny w. gen. 552.

diéés 258 D.

Avovioia 201 a.

dios, dta, 207 D.

Sidrt 869, 3. 868, 2.

dimAdotos 258 b.

SimaAjows 258 D..

dimAdos 258 b.

dimous 217 c.

dioads 258 b.

dlpSoyya: 11. [626 r.

Sixa 258¢. 629; w. gen.

Bixf 258 c. |

dixad 258 D.

Supdw 871 ce; w. gen. 576.

diwxddw 411 D.

Sidkw Ww. cogn. ace. 547b; w. two acc. 555; w. gen. 570. 577 b.

Sua (Sduynu) 443 D, 1.

due (S€uw) 448 D, 1.

duds 160 c.

So (5iS@pr) 403, 4.

dot (S€Souxa) 409, 5.

do1é, Sool, 255 D.

pers. constr. 777; (és) éuol Soneiy 172; Sdééavra (&3tav) radra 793. doxds 139 e. Sdéuovde 203 D. doy stems in, 152g. ddpv 202, 5 ; em Sépv 530 b. SovActw, Sovradw, 472i. SovAedw w. acc. 5474; w. dat. 595 b. Sovwréw 448 D, 12. Soup, Sovpar, 202 D, 5. Spa (Sidpdonw) 444, 2. Spad (SapSdvw) 436 D, 4. Spar (Sépromar) 424 D, 31. Spaw (rpéxw) 450, 5. Spacrelw 472 j. dpards 398 D.° Spdw 421, 1. lSpduds dat. 608.

15

Soxéw 448,45; w. inf. 763;)-

[Spdcos 189 e.

Spupds 200 D.

Sivawar 404, 5. 308 a. 855 De. 401k. 413; w. su- perl. 664 b.

ddvapuis dat. 609.

duds 258 d.

Stivw 423, 3.

dv0 253. 255. 629.

dvoxaldexa 253 D.

dus- 484. 316.

dusatwy 28 D.

dusaperréw 316. —

Sdsepws 96; w. gen. 584¢,

|Susuevfs w. dat. 595.

Adsmapts 484.

dustuxéw 316.

Sbw 423, 8.304. 349 D. 401 D1. 408, 16. 416. 420, 7,

dtw, -@v, -oio1, 255 D.

38 for Sana 201 Db.

daAos for SodAes 24D d.

Swpedy 552.

‘Sapo w. dat. 595 d.

E, vow. 7 ff; interch. w. a, 0, See a; W.1t, 27. 884¢,

e for a 849D; for » 347 D; for digamma 23a,

e to a 3384a. 383. 386 c. 389. 397.

e to 7 28. 156. 189 D. 309.

335-6. 848. 400 m, n.

e to ec 24 De. 31. 312. 870 Db. 337. 343 D. 400 D i. 401 n.

e to o 177. 334. 387 a. 454 b.455¢; tow 334d.

e contr. by syniz. 87D; inserted 376; dropped 173. 870 Db, e. 884.

e added to stem 331. 422.

437. 448.

e augm. 307 ff; redupl.

’ 319. 822; w. augm. or red, 312. 322.

e conn. vow. 349 ff. 355 D

e. 410 D. 411 D.

€ pass. sign 343. 395.

e fut. tense-sign 345. 378.

-e dual 154, ed 1,

é (fur) 403, 1; (Evvupe)

€ pror. 280.

338

ea to » 82. cf. 36.

-ea tor -exa 212D; for -vy 212D; fr. stems in es 178; fr. st. in ev 190e, f; in plup. 351 D.

eat to n 84. 85b; to e 35 b. 363 a.

édy 872; in condit. sent. 744 ff; interrog. 830.

édymep 850,33; édyre 861.

gap 23 D. 160d; wt. art. 530 b. [190 f,

-eas tO -eis 36D; from -qas

éaot 406 D, 1.

€arat 355 De,

€avTov 235; 670. 672. 674. 676; w. elvar 572c; w. Béarioros 559 a. 660 a,

Eddy 427 D, 1.

édw $12. 335 D. 870Da; ovK €@ 842.

adey 227 D. [253 D.

EBdouds 258d; éEBSduaros

éyyis compar. 229; wa gen. 589.

eySotvrnoa 448 D, 12.

eyelpw 432, 5. 321. 367 Da. 384.D. 409 D, 12. 417.

éynara 201 Da.

&ypm, -ouat, 482, 5.

eyxedus 188. [ 850, 1.

eye 230. 69. 485a; eywye

eyoua 68 a.

éya(v) 79 D. 233 D.

€5, €8-0, <d-es (€0diw) 450, 3. 4.06 D, 3.

gBvoy 23 D. [my 871 De.

ec to es 82. 312. 871 b; to

_-ee to -y 178. 186. 351.

eé 23 Da. 233 D.

eer to et 34. 871 b.

éelxoor 23 Da. 253 D.

éerxoords 258 D.

ecpy 442, 4. 318 D. 411 D.

-€es to -fjs 190d.

eCouas 431, 6.

en ton 82; €n to » 84.

éjos 227 D.

éns for hs 248 D.

EveAovrhs 218 a.

eérw 422, 9.

exey 233 D.

GREEK INDEX.

ec 11 ff; fore 24De; from e, see e; from sz 30; in- terch. w. o: 25. 834b.

ec redupl. 319e; e in plup. 351. -« 3 sing. act. 852a; 2 sing. mid. 35 b. 368 a. ei 872. 108c¢;. in cond. sent. 744 ff; indir: sey y si interrog. 830; wish (ei, cise, ei A 721. 758; ef 8 wh 758 2 T54b; ef 8€ 754b; ei uh, ef ph did ‘7544; el (cas) kat 874,1; Kad ef (édv) 874, 2.

el (it) 105 ¢.

-ela fem. 180. 212. 218 D. 219 D. 458 a. 460 ¢.

clapivds 28D. .[406D,1.

elarat, -aro, 855 De; eltiro

eldov 450, 4.

cidos 481. a; acc. 549 b.

eidés 409, 6.

-ein for -era 125 D, 2.

cide 110 a. 721. 7538.

eixd(w 310.

eixddw 411 D.

eixds 258 d.

elkart 253 D.

efxeAos 23 D.

etxoor 253. 23 D. 796.

eYew 23D. 411 D; w. dat. 595 b.

eixaoy 153m. 194 ¢.

eixds 409,73 eixds Fv 708.

ciAfAovsa 25 D. 28 D.

elAov (aipéw) 450, 1.

elAw,- eiAéw, efAéw, efAAw, 23 D. 482 D, 22. 312D. 328 Dc. 345 D.

ela, 23 D. [D.

eluat (€yvupr) 440 D, 1. 818

eluaprat 482 D, 25.

ciut 406, 1. 105¢. 64D. 400 D h. 410 D; copula 490a,b; om. 508 a; Ww. pred. gen. 572; w. dat. poss. 598; w. part. 713. 797; gorw of (ofriwes, dre, ov, etc.) 812 ;—rd/é

_ pov elvat, Kat’ TovTo ei-

ediCw 296. 312, 822.

vat, T7123 éxey efvar 775

a;—-&y circumst. 788; case abs. 791 b. 792 a; om. 795e; Te dyrt 608.

elut 405, 1. 859 D. 864 D. 400 D hs om. 508 b; as fut. 699-a,

ely for éy 627.

elvderes 100 D.

eivdis 253 D ; -xtaror ib,

nielvakdorot 253 D.

elvaros 253 D.

eivera, -Kev, 24D c. 626,

eivi for év 627.

eivvoy 440 D, 1.

efo 233 D.

lov neut. 463 b.

elos for Ews 248 D.

elmep 850, 8. 872.

eltroy 450, 8. 23D. 366 b° as (270s) eimreiy 172,

elpyvup 442, 4.

elpyw 442, 4a. 411D; w. ©

gene 580.

etpowat 424 D, 9.’

eypu 405 Db. 420 D, 12.

elpw 312 D. 450 D, 8.

-eis 2 sing. act. 58a. 852 a.

~els, ~eooa, -ev, adj, 214, 470. 50a.

cis 103b; w. case 620, 618 a; ‘vy. num. 493 < w. inf. 780.

eis 258. 255. 156.¢; . fs avhp Ww. superl. 665 a.

eis 105 D. 406 D, 1.

ciow 431 D, 6. 812.

ciodunv 405 D, 1.

eisBdAAw intrans. 685.

etonw 447 D, 16.

eiséxe 877, 7.

elon 23 Da.

eistpdtTw Ww. two ace, 553.

elow Ww. gen. 589.

eira T0c. 795 a.

etre.861. 831. 110.

elwSa 322. 334d; pf. 712.

elws 248 D. fa. 103 b.

éx 624.470. 74, 80¢. 87 :

éxds 229 D. éxaoraKis 259. éxacros 259; coll. 514b;

w. art. 588.a; applied

from ovdels 881 ny

Ss J Se ee ee

a

| Eeagrov 498f; &eaords 6 ms 683d.

Es sonahe 259; w. art. 538 a.

—-«€karépwdxev W. gen. 589.

€xarovrds 258 d,

xe Balvw w. ace. 544d.

éxddw w. two ace. 553.

€xet, exeivev, 249.

éxeivos 240. 678-9; w. art. 538 a; verb om. 508 b;

_ éxelyn 608; exewost 242.

exetoe 249.

exexeipla 65 d.

éentt 23 D. ~

éxkanolg dat. 613.

exkaAnoidw 315,

éxAavddvouat 487, 5 a,

exTAhoow 397 a.

éxrés w. gen. 589.

éxupds 23 D.

éxév 23D. 158f; w. gen. abs. 791b; éxdy eivas 775 a,

eA baer 432.D, 22.

EA (afpéw, eirov) 450, 1.

eAdaoowy 223, 4; wt. # 660.

éAavyw 435, 2. 311 D. 321. 375. 892. D; sense 684.

eadxe 218 D.

€Adxuoros 228, 4.

ende 435, 2. [D.

ereyxées,. €Aeyxioros, 222

éddeyxw 284, 321. 391 b.

edevd (€pxoua) 450, 2.

€Acvdépios 468 a.

ércddepos w. gen. 584f.

éAceuSepdw w. gen. 580.

éAlogw 312.

Zaw 419, 19. 312.

ZAAaBe 40 D.

*EAAds 1.

éAAclrw w. part. 798.

“EAAnves 1. 4-2. 500 a.

EAAnvi@w 4 f.

‘EAAnuoths 4f. ©

édAuwvs 51 b. 74d.

éamifw 424 D, 32. [D.

Zamw 424D, 32. 23D, 322

edusd (Epxouat) 450 D, 2.

- €awp 153 D. ———- Guavrod 235. 670. 676. - &uBdarw intr. 685. [238.

— -ueSev, eueto, endo, eucd,

GREEK INDEX.

éuéw 419, 11.

€uewurod 235 D.

éuly for éuol 233 D.

Eu(myev, Eu(m)evau, 406 D, 1.

euvhuvna (judw) 321 D.

duds 238. 675-7. [B75.

éutimaAnu 403, 7; w. gen.

éumorew w. dat. 605.

gumpoosxey w. gen. 589.

-e(v) 8 sing. 79a.

-ev 3 pl. aor. pass. 855 De.

év 627. 52. 103b; in comp. 605; w. dat. time 613; adv. 615; w. inf. 782.

évalpw 432 D, 23. 815.

évavtidouce 413. 315.

évaytios 622; w. gen. 587 f; w. dat. 595¢; w. 860b; 7rd évayrioy 502 b; && evayrias 509 a.

evapl(w 328 D.

evdlde@ur intrans. 685.

évdiw w. two ace. 5538.

eveyk, ever (pépw) 450, 6.

eve, vt 102. 615. [781.

eveka, -Kev, 626; w. inf.

évérw 450 D, 8.

evepde(v) 79 D. 224D.

evepot, évéprepos, 224 D.

evivove 321 D. [5.

%ySa 248. 250. Slla. 879,

evadde 248.

évSadra 66D. [gen. 589.

évSev 248. 250. 879,55 w.

evdévde 248.

evSedrev 66 D. [544¢.

évSupéoua 413; w. case

évt for év 627.

Zt 102. 615 a.

éviot, éviore, 812.

évirtw 427 D, 20.

éuamoy 450 D, 8.

évicow 429 D, 3.

évveds 258 d.

evvedxiAot 253 D.

év(v)émw 450 D, 8.

évvjrovra 253 D.

évvoéopar 413.

evvums 440, 1.

évoxaAéw 314; case 544 ¢.

%voxos w. gen. 584 d.

évradda, -eddev 248. 66 D.

évrt 406, 1.

339

évrés W. gen. 589. évTpémouan w. gen. 576. évrvyxdvw w. dat. 602. évvbpis 15a. [w. inf. 781. e 624. 47a. 80c. 108b; eéapvos w. acc. 544 e. etdpxw w. ace. 544.

éids 258 d.

ebeAdyxw w. part. 797.

éeort impers. 494 a. 768 ; étdy 792 a.

efixvéoma w. gen. 574 ¢.

gw compar. 229; w. gen. 589; w. inf. 781.

eo to ov 32; to ev 82Df, 176 D. 363 D. 870Db,e.

€o 23 D. 283 D.

eot to o« 34,

éot 233 D.

Zoxa 409, 7. 23 D. 322; w. dat. 603; pf. 712; pers. const. 777; w. par. 797.

éoprd(w 312 b.

-eos adj. 470. 208. 145 ¢.

éds 238D; see ds.

cov to ov 34; to ev 82Df. 370 Db, e.

erawvéw w. two ace. 555; w. gen. 577 a.

émdy 877, 5.

mavaoracis W. dat. 595 d.

macovTepos 224 D.

maupioKowat 447, 5.

éwedy 877, 5.

émel 877, 5. 869, 2. 69; w. aorist 706; w. evdsews, tdxiora, 821.

éreidh, ereddy, 877, 6.

frevra, W. part. 795 a.

érevivove 321 D.

éméxw w. part. 798.

émhxoos W. gen. 584¢.

éemhy 877, 5.

éml 640-42; w. inf. 780. 782; in comp. 544¢. 605; adv. 615.

émt for @reott 615 a.

émBalyw w. gen. 5838.

emiBdorw 444 D, 11.

émidetxvups mid, 688.

érid{S@ur intrans. 685.

émlSotos pers. constr. 777

émidovoa 451 h.

w Me Ne Me

~

3 40

exisuuew W. gen. 576. émidpowos w. gen. 587 f. emixeywor W. dat. 605. émixivduvos w. dat. 595. émixoupéw w. gen. 578 b. emAauBdvoua Ww. gen. 574, emAavddvouat 437, 5a; w. gen. 576; w. part. 799. émiAcirw w. part. 798. emaAhouov 217. emimeAns W. gen. 584¢. émiéAoua 413. 422,11; w. gen. 576. émloraua 404,6. 401k. 413; w. part. 799. emorhuwy w. ace. 544e. emioTparedw Ww. case 544 ¢. érioxes 368 a. éemirdocopa: W. ace. 595 a, émirhdeios pers. constr.777. emitindw Ww. dat. 605. ° emitpémouc W. ace. 595 a. émlxapis compar. 221 ¢g. Emouce 424, 8, 312. 384; w. dat. 602. ; : @ros 23D. 450, 8 a. 772. Smw 424 D, 8. ep syncop. stems in, 173. ep (elroy, ép@) 450, 8; (t- pw) 312 D. gpage 203 D. épauor 404, 7. épdw 419, 3; w. gen. 576. epydCouc 312. Epyov 23D; dat. 608. Epyw (cipyw) 442, 4. 23D. 318 D. 411 D. Zpdw (epy) 428,14. 23D. - 822D.

épecivw 424 D, 9.

épeldw 392 D.

épelew 425 D, 19.

épelrw 425, 6. 321 D. épeuvds from epeBos 46 b. épete 43 D. 428, 14. épéoocw 430, 4. épevyoucn 425, 12. épevdw 425 D, 20. épéw, -ouat, 424 D, 9, éolySoumes 448 D, 12. épidatye, -walyw, 486 D, 15. éplfw w. dat, 602.

épinpos, -es, 219 D.

GREEK INDEX.

gps 169, 171 D.

‘Epuclas 186 Db.

‘Epps 188.

%otas 442, 4. [5. Epona 424, 9. 367 Da. 422, épos 169 D.

eprw, Ep@iw, 312. [b.

eppw 422, 6. 23D; om. 508

éppomuevos 221 d.

Epoa 345 D.

Epon 125 d.

éponv 217 D.

épuyydve 425,12.

epudatvoua 425 D, 20.

épundyw, -avaw, 424 D, 10.

eptico 424, 10. 384D.

épvoua 405 Db.

épvodpuares 476 b.

Zpbw 420D, 12. 23D. 312 D:378D. [409D, 13.

Zpxouat 450, 2. 826. 366 b.

épws 169 D. - [558.

épwrdw 424, 9; w. two ace.

es stems in, 152¢. 176 ff.

-es nom. pl. 154. 196 b.

es, € (eiut) 406, 1.

és 620. 103 b; see eis.

éodhs 23 D. 1531; coll. 514.

eadiw, od, 450, 8. 378.

\éomépa wt. art. 530d.

eomepos 23 D. 200 D.

éomere 450 D, 8.

éomdunv (€roua) 424, 8.

-ecoa fem. adj. 214. [D.

éooa, €orat, 440 D, 1. 318

éooa (i(w) 431 D, 6.

-eroi(y) dat. pl. 154.D. 178 D. 176 D.

éoot 406 D, 1. 105 D.

Ecowy 223 D, 2.

gore 877, 7.

-€orepos, -€oraros, 221 d.

gory of 812.

éoridw 312; w. ace. 547 b.

éoras 216.

eoxapdgt 206 Da.

éoxaros 2244; w. art. 536.

rw compar. 229; ef. fou.

érepos 68c¢. 247; w. art. 528 a. 5388 e; appos. 538 e; w. gen. 584¢5 w. 7 860 b.

érys 23 D.

érnota 187. 201 a.

ért T0.c. 80b. 848 b. [613.

éros 23D; gen. 591; dat,

ev 11; interch. w. ov 25 D.

ev from v 30; from eo, eov, See €0, cov.

ev to € 189. 326. 426.

ev stems in, 152j. 189 ff

ed 227; eb 227 D.

e 233 D.

jevadoy (avddvw) 437 D, 1.

eddauovifw w. gen. 577 a

evdatuwy 217. 221d.

edi0s. 221 c.

edw 422, 7.

eVeATis 217 c.

evepyeréw 316.

edSd 80D; w. gen. 589.

cvsvs 80D; w. part.795b.,

evxaens 178 D.

évetiwevos 408 D, 26.

evAaBéoua 418,

étvyntos 40 D.

ebvoew Ww. dat. 595d.

e¥voos 221d.

edmarépea, 218 D.

evmAotn 125 D.

evmropéw W. gen. 575.

edplokw 447, 6. 8366b; w. part. 799.

leBpoos 43.

edpos ace. 549 bd.

edptora 136 Da.

evpds 212.

-evs masc. 189 ff. 458. 467. -evs gen. sg. 176 D. 189 D. éds 227 D.

evte 877, 2.

edppatyw 414,

edpuhs 178.

edxapis 217 ¢.

exouce w. dat. 595 b. -eiw denom. verbs 472d, evdvupoy wt. art. 580d. eboxéw 574 d. épeaxvorrucdy (v) 78 ¢. épérArw mid. 689.

aekis W. dat, 602a. E~Ihuepos 72.

épixvéouae W. gen. 5740, epopdw 450D, 4. 451h. éxSpdés compar, 222, ExSw, -ouar, 436, 6. 367 D.

eeuts:

0 o 424, 11, 65e. 312. 384. voc, sing. masc. 185;

08, 11. 411-D; w. ace. ~ specif. 549a; w. gen. * 580; mid. w. gen. 574 b; impers. 494; intrans, 6845 ie 691; aor. 708; 97s —

exer with 7 88 i pAveapels |

Exav 788 ; ‘obras éxov- ros 792b.

Wo 422, 8. [ao, aw

ew interch. W. 0, aw, See

ew from verbs in aw 370 Dd; in Att. 2 decl. 147/97 ff; to w 82."

-ew gen. sing. 136 Db; verbs 370. 472¢; fut. 373-7.

Ewe. 322 D.

Ewer (Ewnev) 408 D, 18.

-éwy g. pl. 1 dec. 128 Db.

~ews gen. sing. 186. 190 a, f.

€#s noun 65 D. 148. 182; wt. art. 530 b.

€ws conj. 877, 7. 248 D.

éwutov 11 Db. 235 D.

s (Stigma) 5b. 254.

Z, 21-2; from o8 56; from dt, yt; 61; in pres. 328 b.

(dw 871¢; w. ace. 547 b.

-Ce local 204. 56.

Cedyvups 442, 5.

Zetds 202, 6; om. 504c¢.

(éw 419, 12.

Znvds, etc., 202 D, 6.

-(w verbs in, 328 b. 428-9. 431. 472; fut. 875-6; Aecol. -cdw 56 D.

Cévyus 441, 1.

(és 210 D.

~H, vow. 7 ff; interch. w. w 25; w.t 27.

m after ¢€, 1, p, 29.

n for @ 24Da. 29D. 125 D, 2. 134 D. 870 Dg. 871 ¢. 335 D. 382b,

7 from e, see e.

7 syll. augm. 808 a; pass,

. sign 843. 395,

118; in subj. 8470 |

34]

july, hua, Huy, 232.

uous W. art. 536. jos 248 D. 877, 4,

in dual 178. 186; ace. sing. 178; in plup. 351a.

-n 2 sing. 85b. 363.

h or 860. 69. 112. 512; interrog. 7338. 830 ff.

% than 860; w. compar. 586. 660; 4 Kard 660¢; H () ads, d éore) w. inf. 660 c. 768.

./h truly 852, 10. 112,

interrog. 828 ff. 69. 112.

i said 404, 1,

§ 248. 608. 876, 6. 879, 4; W. superl, 664.

ha (eiui) 406 D, 1.

nat to » 84, [Da.

nBdore, ABdw, 444, 3. 870

fyyéouae Ww. gen, 581 a.

AYEPESovTaL 411 D.

ndé 855.

#5n 68 D. 851d.

;\jdouct 413; w. dat. 6lla;

w. part. 800; ABouerep

oo 601 a.

dos 201 Db.

novérera 219 D.

dvs 23 D, 212, 222.

Hé 830-81; je 881 a.

net to n 34.

jeldn 409 D,.6.

Hew 405, 1.

HéAtos 65 D.

nepeSovrat 411 D,

hépos 202 D, 21.

iidy 153 m.

hora 223, 2. [698.

fj1ceo 27; om. 508b; as pf.

naé or saed 201 D b.

faAuta w. inf. 767.

naAtkes 811, 816.

jawos 65 D.

jc (hs) 406, 2. 855 De; w. acc. 544 ¢,

huas, huas, 232.

huées etc. 233 D.

Hepa Ww. eyevero 494; om, 509b; wt. art. 530b; gen. (591; dat. 613.

.

jer epbvde 203 D,

Neer cpys 238. 675-6.

juteo 821 D. iiv for édy 744 ff. 872. fv 406, 1. 404, 1.

iqvsov 450 D, 2.

jvika 248, 877, 3.

hvtoxos 199 D.

jvopén 28 D.

ivmep 850,33; Hvre 861.

no to w 83; not to-@ 34, nov to w 34.

-os, -na, nas, 190 f.

snap 165.

hretpos 139,

‘ipa 201 Db.

‘HpaxaAéns 180 D.

gai 219 D.

jpos (€apos) 160 D,

hpws 181. 182 D. 184.

-js nom, pl. 190d.

-ns prop. names 198. [e, f.

-ns adj. 475; compar, 221

nov), nS, dat. pl. 129 D.

foowy 223,2; obx jhovop 842,

jhovxos 209, 221 ¢.

nt stems in, 1521.

rot 852, 12. 860.a. 110.

firop 153 D. 201 Db.

iitTdw pass, w. case 581; w. part. 801.

nv diphth. 11.

nis 227 D.

nite 876, 7.

fixe 248 D. 879, 4.

nixed 193.

nos 65 D. 146 D. 182.

@, 17. 19. 22; to s 45-6. 76. 401 b.

& doubled 40b; dropped 47. 49, 386 a.

& stems in, 152f. 169 ff; formation in, 411 D.

Sdaacoa wt. art. 530d.

Sarddwy 432 D, 6.

SdAeia 218 D.

SdAAw 482, 6. 338 D.

Sauées, Saueal, 219 D,

Say (Svhokw) 444, 4.

©

hut 404, 1.

Sdvaros gen. 577 be

342

Sdarre 427, 5

Sappéw w. acc. 5444,

Sdppos 48 a.

Sdpoos 43 a. 57.176 D.

Sdoow w. ace. 544¢.

edocowy (raxvs) 66 b. 222.

Surepoy 68c. 72; appos.. 502 b.

Savua ll Db; w. inf. 767 a.

Sauudcw w. gen. 570. 577 a.

Savuacrds Boos, Savuac- Tas as, 817 b.

ve pass. sign 343, 395.

ae, der (rlSnus) 403, 2.

Sed 125 D.

vetos 221 D.

Selvw 432 D, 24.

‘SéAw 422, 9.

Seuss 202, 7.

“Sev, -e, local 208.

weds 387. 118. 141; om. 504¢; wt. art. 530; Se- Ope 206 Db.

Sépeuos 468.

Sepuatyw 433, 5.

Sépouc 424, 12. 345 D.

Séw (Sv, Sev) 426, 1,

Sesrepos 221 D.

o7 pass. sign 348, 395.

O7Bale 56.

Gnade 432 D, 6.

OjAvs 212 a. 221 D.

Shy 852, 9. 105 D.

ant (rap) 425 D, 17. 851 D.

SInpdw 286. 335.

& to oo 60.

-S local 208; imper. 858. 361. 400 b. 401 b. 65 b.

Siyydvw 437,2; w. gen. 574).

SAdw 419, 4.

SAlBw 424, 13,

Svhonw 444, 4, 8942. 409, 4, 488,43 w. acc. 544 e.

Soiudrioy 68.

Sdpvupou (Spdonw) 445, 5.

Sovpts, Sovpos, 219 D.

Spar (rpépw) 424, 26.

Spdoos 57,

Opiaca 60.

Spacow 428, 8.

Ret 421, 18,

Sper (rpéxe) 66 c. 450, 5.

GREEK INDEX.

Sper (rpépw) 66 c, 424, 26. Spnvéw 870 Db.

Spivus 153i.

Splt 66a. 163.

Spurrw 66 c. 427, 6. SpdaoKw 445, 5.

Suvydrnp 173.

Suuéouae w. dat, 595b. Stvw, -véw, 485 D, 10. Sum (rigw) 66 c. 424, 28. Sdpate 56. 204.

Sdpact 205.

Sbw 65 c. 420, 2. 435 D, 10. Sas 160 c. 182.

Swdua (XGua) 11 Db.

I, vow. 7 ff; quant. 86 ff: t to ex 80. 326. 425. [mn 27. tinterch. w. € 27. 186; w. a 39a, 828 e. 405, (328. t es prod. by, 58 ff. t subscript 11. 34. 68a; in dat. sing. 150.195 a.183. tof 4th cl. 328. 428 ff; as redupl. 332. 449D,7; mode-sign 348. t stems in, 152 d,i. 185 ff. t (eZut) 405, 1. [154.195 a. -- nom. pl. 150; dat. sing. -t loc. 205; demonst. 242, ta for to 466. -ia fem. 464 ¢. 125 ff. ta for ula 255 D.

jidouou 415.

iabw 449 D, 7.

idxw, -€w, 424 D, 33. 23 D.

-id@ denom. 472 j.

18 450, 4. 409, 6. 23 D.

idé 855.

-lSiov neut. 465 a.

Ys 23D; w. gen. 587 ¢; id{a 608.

WSuev 46 D.

Ypis 188. 217 ¢.

iSptw, ipivSnv, 396 D.

iSpés 169 D

ve mode-sign 348.

i€pat 65 D.

iepds 82 De; w. gen. 587 ¢.

-.(w verbs in, 472e; Att. fut. 376.

iw, i¢dvw, 431, 6.

in mode-sign 848, 1

tnt 403, 1. 812. 832. 400 Dd. 401n. 401 Dh,k. 402, (D.

idv(s) 80D; iStyrara 221

wu tot 186 D. 401 D1.

uc 23D; (Zora) 409, 7.

inavds w. dat. 595 ¢.

ixdvw 438, 2. 408 D, 45.

ixaves W. gen. 589.

YeeAos 23 D.

ixmevos 46 D. 408 D, 45.

ixvéouat 488, 2.

-ucds adj. 469; w. gen. 587,

te 438 D, 2. 349 D. 27.

rapa 404 D, 10.

fAaos 210 D. [D.

iAdoromar 444,53; iradouwas

fAews 209-10.

“TAvos 23D; *IAidd: 203 D; *TArdgt 206 Db.

TAAw 432 D, 22. —

iudoow 430 D, 9.

wy stems in, 156a.

-y acc. sing. 171; dual 150. 195 b. wy for of 233D. [508b

tva ‘739 ff. °879,6; war -vos adj. 470.

-1o gen. sing. 140 D. Yowev, twouev, 88 D. -tov neut. 465 a.

tos adj. 468. ioxéarpa 218 D. immoddcea 218 D. trmos coll, 514. inmdéra 136 Da. imrapot 424, 19. Ypné 65 D.

ipds 82 De.

ts 153 m.

toapt 409 D, 6.

toss 27.

*Iospor 205.

iodpds 46 a.

-lexos, -toxn, 465b. Yoxnw 447 D, 16,

-lioduoipos w. gen. 584a,

isos 28D. 221c; w. dat 603; 9 ton 509 a,

-torepos, -loraros, 221 e.

lornus 408, 5. 299. 803

305. 63. 847 D. 359D

Bla 400-01. 409, 1.

‘ x1 yD. 416, is mid. 688 MS

BA: _ perf. 7 12. —

— loxte aor. 708. tox 65e. 449, 2. 832,

ixdds 103i, 186 ff

ixép 199 D.

iwrh, idea, 199 D.

-lwy patron. 466 a. -lwv, -o'ros, 222 ff.

K, 16. 19 ff. 22; guaned 75. [46; bef. o 47.

« bef. r-mute 44; bef. x

k for 7, Ion. 247 D. [392 a.

« to x in pf. 341. 387 b.

k movable in od« 80 a.

« tense-sign 344 ff. 386.

-ka 1 aor, 402.

xd for Ké 878b.

kdry, Kad, ete. 73D.

_ nad 428 D, 18, 422 D, 20.

kadapevw w. gen. 580.

kasapés w. gen. 584 f.

Keas€ Copan 431, 6.

Katevdw 314.

nddnuar 406, 2.

Kadite 431, 6. 314.

kaStornus incomp. pred. 490 c. 540.

kat 855 ff. 68; w. num. 256; w. two subj. 511; w. part. 795f; ad 8s 525b; nad ds 250; kad véy, THY, 525 b; nad ydp 870 d; ei (2av) kal, Kad ei (edv) 874.

katvuuot 442 D, 17.

kalvw 432, 7.

katmep 795 f, 850, 3. 874, 3:

kouipds dat. 613.

katrot 864, 7. 110.

kalw 434, 1. 881 D.-

Kd (ard) 73D.

kaxés compar. 223, 2; w. acc, 548,

kakoupyos w. gen. 587 a.

kdkrave 73 D

Kardéw 420, B

inicomp. 490; perf, 712.

GREEK INDEX, kadruybyauce 218 D.

KaAAidvws 228.

kadés compar. 223, 6. «ddos 146 D.

KaAdAvBn 827 a

kadvmrw 42'7,7; mid. 688.

IxdAws 146,

kdupopos 73D.

kduwvos 139 b.

kdpyw 435, 8. 886¢; w. acc. 547 b; W. part. "800.

Kd umres 427, ’g.

Kay, Kiiy, 68 a.

Kdveov, Kkavouv, 144.

nda, dp (kard) 73D.

Kap (kelpw) 432, 8.

Kdpa, Kapn, xdp, 202 D, 24.

kdpdoros 139 b.

kdpnva 202 D, 24.

Kdpta 227 D.

kapTepéw W. part. 800.

kaptepds 57 D.

Kdptioros 57 D. 223 D, 1.

kdr (ard) 73D,

Kara 68a.

kard 631-2; w. num. 258 a; in comp. 588; w. inf. 780.

KarayeAdw w. gen. 583.

karayryveoke w. gen. 577 b. 583.

Kardryyupt w. gen. 574.

karadovAworts W. dat. 595 d.

s\xardKejas 405, 2.

karakAdrrw w. dat. 602.

Karadvw w. gen. 580.

Kkaranrdhoow 397 a.

karapphyvupe Ww. ace. 546.

kardpxw w. acc. 544e.

karappovéew W. gen. 583; pass. 694 a.

karaxpg 404 D, 3.

karapevdoua w. gen. 583.

karaynploua w. gen. 583.

karémnkro 408 D, 41.

karéxw intrans. 495.

Karnyopew W. gen. 583,

Kardavey 73

Kdrw 229. 631.

kav (Kalw) 434, 1.

kavdéoas 442 D, 1.

KavTh 68 a.

(mpo)Karigoua 420 D, 5.

kdw 434, 1.

343

Ke, KN, Ket (alw) 484, 1.

Ke, KEV, 878 b. 79 D. 105D

néarat, Kéerat, 405 D, 2.

keddvyvupt 439 D, 4.

Keist, KetWev, Keto, 249 D,

kequat 405, 2. 355 De. 378 D. 410 D; w. ace. 544 ¢.

keivos 240 D.

kelpw 432, 8, 345 D.

Keropuduevos 46 D.

Kedadéw 448 D, 13.

KéAevdos 189 c. 200 D.

KeAedw 421, 20.

KéAAw 845 D. 3738.

KéAouat 424 D; 34. 884 _D,

kevés W. gen. 584d,

Kev €oo 448 D, 14.

Kepdvvumse 439,13; w. dat. 602; xepdor, waded, 439 D.

Képas 165, 168.

wepdalvn 433, 6. 382 b.

kepdlwy, “toTos, 223 D, 9; epdaréos ib.

Keddor, -dyw, 425, 18.

Kepdaaioy 502 b.

wn (kalw) 434,1. — [os ib.

Khdiocros 223 D, 11; Knee

Kqdo 422 D, 20, B55 De.

xhp fem. 158 n.

KeApug 164,

Knptoow 428, 2.

kt to oo 60. 828 a.

xiBwrds 189 b.

Kldvnut 443 D, 8.

Kiwev 66 D,

Kucrhonw 444D, 12. ['764,

xuyduvevo aor. 7 08; w. inf,

kwvéw 440 D, 5.

klyupau (Zictoy) 440 D, 5; éxladoyv 411D.

"lielpvnps, -vdw, 443 D, 2.

Kixdyvw 436,7.404D d.

kixpnut 408, 9.

KA (éAoua) 424 D, 34,

rdteo 428, 12. 360 D.

kAats 171 D.

kKAalw, KAdw, 434, 2. 857 D.

KAdé 171 D. .

kAam (KAémrw) 427, 9.

KAavoidw 472j.

Kradw 419, 5.

KAe (ware) 420, 5.

-cnéns 178 D. 180. 198,

344

Kets 171.

KAelw 421, 15. 390.

KAcloo, wXtopias; 426 D, 8.

KAemrns 221 e.

KA€mrw 427, 9. 887 b.

KAnts 171 D.

Kanto 421D,15. ‘198.

-KAjjs prop. names in, 180.

kKAj@ 421, 16.

kAlvw 433, 1. 432, 9.

KkAoingt 206 Da.

KAop (kAérrw) 427, 9.

Kav 426 D, 8. 408 D, 28.

Kp (1eduve) 435, 8.

Kyateo 421, 12.

kvdw 421, 9. 371le.

Kvépas 182.

xvioon 125 D.

kowds Ww. gen. 587¢.; F Kowh 3e; Kow7 608.

Kowwvew W. gen. 574a; w. dat. 602.

Kowwvia W. dat. 602.

kowwyds 202, 8.

KéAmos om. 509 b.

koul(w 328 D. 376.

névis 186 D.

Kénma 254.

xémpos 139 a. [685.

xéwr@ 427,10; in comp.

dpa ; ie xbpaxas 508 b.

kopévvume 440, 2.

képn 125 d.

xdpon, K6pin, 125d. 43.2.

Koptoow 430 D, 10.

-Kds adj. 469. 587 b.

koads 247 D.

koré 247 D.

KéTe Epos 247 D.

koréw 420 D, 11.

KorvAndovbdu 206 De.

kod 247 D.

kodpos compar. 224 D.

Kéws 146 D.

pa. (Kepdvvuu) 489, 1.

Kpdf@ 428, 13. 338. 409, 8; pf. 712.

Kpat (Kdpa) 202 D, 24.

xpdrergt 206 De.

KpaTéw W. gen, 58a.

Kpatioros 222, 1.

Kparos 57 D.

kparvs 223 D, 1. 227D.

GREEK INDEX.

kpéas 181. 182 D. 183.

Kpeloowy 223, 1.

Kpeuaua 404, 8. 401 k,

Kpenavvuu 439, 2.

Kpéoowy 223 D, 1.

Kpqvxey 203 D.

Kphuvawot 443 D, 8.

Kpijooa 60.

Kp? for kpidh 201 D b.

Kpt(w 428 D, 20. [a. 555 a.

xplyeo 433,2; w. ace. 547

Kpoviey 466 a.

Kpovoo 421, 23.

Kpvrre 4917, 11. 410 D; w. two ace. B53.

Kpipa w. gen. 589.

Kra, Kray, («relvw) 433, 4.

nrdoua 319 b. 393 a; mid. 692; pf. 712.

kredrecot 201 Db.

kreivw 433, 4. 364 D. 401 n. 408, 4. 482, 10.

Krels 156 c.

Krépas 182 D.

nTi@m 408 D, 26.

(Gmro)erivyupe 442, 6.

Ktuméw 448 D, 15.

kvdidveipa 218 D.

xvdpds compar, 222 D.

kus (xevSw) 425 D, 13.

kuloKw, ener kvéw, 446, 2.

kuxedy 175 D

KuKAddev 203.

kvAlw, kvAtvdw, -5éw, 421, 6.

kuvéw 438, 3.

kbytepos 224 D,

KvTrTw 427, 12.

kupéw, KUpw, 448, 5. 845 D. 878; w. gen. 574¢; w. part. 801.

boy 202, 9.

nx for xx 40b.

r@as 182 D.

Kos 148.

A, 18. 22; Aad after augm. 308D. See Liquids,

Aaas 202,10.

AaB (AauBdvw) 437, 4.

Aayéds 146 D.

Aayxavw 437, 3. 319 e. 387 a; w. gen. 574¢,

Aayds 148,

AdCouat, aioe 429 D, 5.

Aad (Aavddyw) 487, 5.

Aak (Adon) 447, 11.

AdAos compar. 291 e,

AauBdvw 437, 4. 319 e. 366 b; w. gen. 574, e; mid. 690; w. part. 7 99.

Adume, 424, 14.

Aavddvw 437, 5; Ww. ace. 544a; w. part. 801.

Aads 147,

Rais 202, 10.

Adorw 447, 11.

Aax (rcryxdveo) 487, 3.

Ades 218 D. [319 e.

Aێyo to gather 424,15,

Aéyw to speak 424, i5 a. 450, 8 a. 408 D, 37; om. 508 b; impers. 4 68; pers. 777; Aéyovot 504 C; Td Acyduevoy 496.

Aelmw 292. 276-7. 334b. 412 b. 425,7; gen. 581

Aetw 421, 21.

Aex 408 D, 38.

Aex@ 194 b.

Aeds 146.

AnB (AapBdvw) 487, 4

Afryw w. part. 798.

Ada 126 a. 130 ¢.

Ady 455 d. [5.

Ajso, -dvw, 425, 1. 487 D,

Ankéw 447 D, 11.

Anvés 189 b.

Andés 146 D.

Anx (Aayxevw) 437, 3.

At to AA 59. 828 e.

Afya 227D; Avyds ib.

Auumdvw 425, 7.

Aum (Aclarw) 425, 7.

Als = Aé€wy 202 D, 25.

Alooopat, Atroum, 480D 11. 308D

ven Auri, 202 D, 26.

x ceer 448 D, 23.

Wy ante) si1e. Sie

Adyos dat. 608; eis Adyous

royx (Acey dv) 437, 3.

Aouw (Acirw) 425, 7.

Aourds 455 ¢. 457 d, Cc; acc, 552a; gen. 591.

rcteSos, -los, ~hios, 224D

-ros adj. 471.

. ai

Aotw 871; mid. 688.

éw w. ace. 547 ¢.

— Adxvos 200 D. [29. 420, 8.

Atw 268-75. 393 D. 408 D,

Awtwy, -irepos, 223 D, 1.

Awrebyra 214 D. Awpdw w. gen. 580. Agwyv, Agaros, 223, 1.

M, 18. 22; bef. p 53; bef. A 53D; mutes bef. pw 46; py after augm. 308

See Liquids.

spa neut. 461 a. 166.

pd 852, 14. 546.

Bad (uavSdvw) 437, 6.

“wat 1 sing. 355 ff. Mala 12a. - pode 434 D, 5. 472k.

. paivowor 432, 11.

patouat 434 D, 5. 409 D, 9. por (unndoua) 448 D, 24. pedraspa, 219 D.

pdrap 220.

paxpés 222D; waxpe 610; (és) panpdy 509 a.

paxpdxetp 218. 481.

pddAa 70 c. 227. 222a; w. comp., sup. 665 b. 666.

pdan 201 b.

pay for phy 852, 18.

pavsdvw 437, 6. 308 D. 412 a; w. gen. 582; w. part. (inf.) 799. 802; ri paddy 789 ¢.

pam (udprrw) 427 D, 21.

Mapadave 612.

pdpvapyou 443 D, 4. 401 Dh.

pdpwre 427 D, 21. papTupew, -pouat, 448, 6. Riciege 202 D, 11. pdprus 152 p. 202, 11. pdoow (uay) 428, 3. pdoowy 222 D. udorié 163. 199 D. pdxomor 422,10; w. ace. 547a; w. dat. 602. pé 105 a. 230. peydAws 226.

péyas 219. 222; péya, me-

ydra, 226. 552a; ent péya 493 f; wéyaw. gen.

.

BéyeSos dat. 609. Medouae 422 D, 21, eeCov 222 D. [1 du. 356 b. “mesa 1 pl. 355 ff; -wedor

pedinue 408 D, 1. [575. bedtonw 446,83; w. gen.| pedtw 446, 8.

melCay 222. [319 D. pelpoucs 432D, 25. 319 e. pels = why 202 D, 27. petwy 223,35; pwetoy 660d. BéAas 156 c. 212-13. 220. med€ 201 Db. wert 1537. 166. MeAirn 612. finf. 711. pdddw 422,12. 308a; w. MéAw 422, 11; w. gen. 576. pméeuBrerar 422 D, 11. peueripévos 403 D, 1. Méeupouas w. gen. S77 a. -wev 1 pl. 355. mev 862. a; after art. 525. 534a; after prep. 616; for why 852,13; per ody, pey df, 852,13. [De. ~mevat, -wev, inf. 359 D. 400 MevéAews 149 a. : evowdw 370 Da, Mevrty 68¢c. [aAAd 848 e. bévroa, 864,6; od pevro péevw 422,13; w. ace. 544. septs om. 509 b. Mepunpl(w 328 D. MecauBplyn 24 Da, Béo(c)aros 224.D. peo(a)nyi(s) 80 D. peonuBpla 53. 482. mécos 221c. 224D. 648; w. art. 586; wt. art. 5380b; év péow 496. Meordés w. gen. 584b. meré 648-5; adv. 615; péra 615 a. petaBdAAw intrans. 685. peradlowms w. gen. 5744, meTadauBdve w. gen. 74a, meropeAc W. gen. 576; w. part. 800. [800. merapéeAouat 413; w. part. peratd w. gen. 626r; w. part. 795 ¢. peraméumw mid. 689.

559; 7d wéeyiorrov 502b, 15*

petamAacuds 199.

345

Meramroréouct W. gen. 577 ¢ core W. gen. 571.

meréexw W. gen. 5740.

merewpl(w 315.

meTéwpos 26.

MéToXos W. gen. 584a,

éTpov 887.

ued 233 D,

néexpe 70b. 80D; w. gen.

#626; conj. 877,8; w.

ov, gov, 818 a.

ph 832 ff. 68D. 69. 80b;

w. ind. 761; w. subj.

720 b, d; w. impr. 723;

w. part. 789e; final 739

ff; interrog. 829; pA

wot 508b; ph od 720d.

743. 846-7; ob wh 845;

Ste wh 868; ei wh, ef

uh et 872. 75405

MndauA, -o0, -@s, 252.

HSE 858-9; unde eis 255; pn® &s 250,

pndeis 255; neut. 848 a,

Endérepos 252,

endoua 422 D, 21.

unkdouc 448 D, 24, 851 D,

unkert 80 b. 848 b.

Ehkorros 222 D.

“jos 461 b.

phkov 153m.

und (wéAw) 422 D, 11.

mao 17.

env (ualvoua) 432, 11.

hv month 172; w. app. 500a;. gen. 591; doa bijves 816 b.

phy in truth 852,13. 864,

5; ov why GAA 848 e;

h why (h wév) 852, 10.

bhmw 848 b.

pare 858-9. 110.

unrnp 173; wt. art. 530¢.

pntiaw, -lowat, 448 D, 25.

enttera 136 Da.

phris 252; ware 848 a,

pAtpws 182. [399 ff.

“ut 1 sing, 35548 361. 267,

pla (eis) 255. ~° [D, 89.

mlryvupe 442, 7. 395 D. 408

puxpds 223,38; gen. 575 a.

‘|MiAgowos 468 b.

irpeeomat 415.

346

uyviorw 444, 6. 319 b. 863 D. 398a; w. gen. 576; pf. 712; w. part. (inf.) 799. 802.

bluvo, pd w, 449, 3.

uly 233 D. 105 D.

Mivws 148.182 D. 197 D.

ploryw 447, 12. 442, 7.

pucSdéw mid. 689 b.

py in div. of syll. 83a.

pve 132; pvéa 132D.

pve. (utuvhonw) 444, 6,

prdoua 870 Da.

pyhwov 217.

nol 230.70 D. 105 a.

potpa om. 509 b.

Moica 24D d.

MOA (BAdonw) 445, 2.

prov (walouar) 409 D, 9.

poovds 258 d.

povaxh 258 c.

peovos 258 ¢3 udvos Tay HA- Awy 586 ¢; udvoy od 848 d; od udvoy—GrAA& (Kal) 857

povopdryos 221 .e.

hoo (Bpords) 53D; (wetpo- foot) 8319 D.

~wos masc. 460b; adj. 471.

ov 230. 105 a.

povvos 24D c.

ut @, -€w, -dw, 431, 7.

pudréoua 870 Db,

purdoua 448 D, 26.

feupias 258 d.

pdprot (uvpior) 258. 257.

pis 153i, 186.

puxolraros 224 D,

pow 420, 6.

poépmevos 484 D, 5.

pay (uh ody) 84. 829.

Méoa 24D d.

N, 18. 22; bef. other cons, 48 ff; bef. 1 58. 328 d.

_v doubled after augm. 308 D; dropped in. pf. 386 c; inserted in 1 aor. pass. 396 D.

y 5th class 329, 407. 485 ff.

y movable 78-9.

vy stems in, 152m.

-y neuter 188; acc. sing.

~

GREEK INDEX.

150, 154, 157. 195, 1; 1 sing. 855 ff. 864D; 3 pl. 855 ff.400 Dd; in- fin, 359. ve 5th class 448 D, -vat inf. 359. 367 c. 400 e. vat 852,14. 545. [410D. vaietéw 434 D,6. 870 Da.

vatx. 110 a.

vatw 434 D, 6.

vads 26. 147.

vicow 481, 3.

vavs 189-90,

vavolmopos 478 b.

vad. 206 De.

vd dropped bef. « 49.

ve 5th class 329 ¢. 488.

véaros 224 a.

veixéw 419 D, 21. 870 Db.

véxvs 158i.

véuw 422, 14,

véowat 430 D, 12.

vépsev 224 D,

véprepot 224 D.

veupyge 206 Da.

véw (ve) 421, 5.

véw (vv) 426, 2. 808 D.

vews 26. 146.

vedsoixos 473 b.

vh 852, 14. 545.

vnds 146 D.

vioos 138.

ynds 11 Db. 189D.

vhxw 426 D, 2. [51.

vs dropped bef. « 49. ef.

viCw 429, 2.

vindw Ww. acc. 544a; w. gen., dat. 581; w. part. 801; pr. for pf. 698.

viv 233 D. 105 D.

vintw 429, 2.

vicoouc 430 D, 12.

viods 199 D.

viper wt. subj. 504 ¢.

vouttw incomp. pred. 490. 556; w. part. 799.

vdos, vows, 144.

-vos adj. 471. [708.

vooéw w. acc. 547 a; aor.

vécos 139 e.

voepi(v) 79 D.

véros dat. 6138.

-(v)oa fem. part. 360. 362.

-(v)or 8 pl. 855. 362,

vr dropped bef. o 49. 505 stems in, 152k,

-v7i 3 pl. 355 Da. 400 Da,

-vrwy 3 pl. impr. 358.

vy (vyv) 5th class 329d, 407. 439 ff.

viudoa 125 D. [867, 3.

vo(v) 79 D. 105 D. 112.

vov 112. 867, 3.

vvé 1538r; gen. 591; dat. 613; wt. art. 580b.

veduvos 33.

v@i, viv, 233 D.

vetrepos 238 D.

By 17a. 21-2. 47. 74d.

-§ masc., fem, 1520. 163. teivos 24D ec.

Ew 419, 13.

tdy = ovy 628,

Evpouat, Evpéw, 448, 7. Eo 421, 10.

O, vow. 7 ff; interch. w a, €, See a; W.u 27. .

o for a 203, 349D. 478 a; for w 347 D.

o from e, see e.

oto127; too 24De,

o to ov 24De. 81.

o to w 28. 156, 2214. 809. 335-6. 400 m, n.

o dropped after as 221 b.

o conn. vow. 208. 352. 401 Dh. 473 a.

o stems in, 152 h. 198-4.

-o gen. sing. 186¢.140; 2 sing. for.-co 363.

6, #, 76, 119. 239, 248 D, 108a; demonstr. 525; 6 pév, 6 84, 525.4; 4 Se, 6 ydp, 525-3 7H for v4 521; éy rots w. sup. 627; rod w. inf. 592b. 81a.

é neut. of ds 243. 68; for és 248.D; for 671 868h,

ow to w 82. cf, 36.

-oas to -ovs 86 b.

dBpinomdrpyn 218 D.

oydods 258 d.

éyidaros 253 D.

a |

656s 1389 ¢; om. 509b; © gen. 590; dat. 612.

—s- ovs 156.c; ddd D. - — odus 821 D.

*Odva(c)evs 40 D. 189 D. oe to ov 82. [35 c¢. oe to ov 34. 871a; tom -ocidhs adj. 481 a.

Bw (08) 431, 8.

on tO w 32; to y 36a.

on to 0 85¢; to » 401i.

dSev 248. 250. 879, 2; at-

- traction 811 a.

891 248 D. 879, 1.

bSotvera 869, 3. 72.

o 11 ff; foro 24De; to » 310; interch. w. e 25.

-o. elided 70D; short for acc. 95a. 365.

-ot Voc. sing. 194 a,

ot (pépw) 450, 6.

of pron. 230. 105 a.

of adv. 248. 250. 879,38; w. gen. 589.

-o1w fem. 130. [795 d.

oia conj. 876,5; w. part.

otyw, ofyvumt, 424 D, 16.

oida 409,6. 23D. 318D. 851D. 364D; pf. 712; w. part. (inf.) 799. 802; ed 018 or: 868a; ofc 6 Spacoy 755.

oiddyvw, oidéw, 436, 8.

Oidimovs 191.

-o1n for -o% 125 D, 2.

diGupérepos 221D. [Da.

-ouv for -ow 140Da. 154

otxade 203. 110.

oiketos 468; w. gen. 587 ¢c.

oikéw 355 De.

oixodouew 443 D, 1.

otkosey 208, :

otros 203 D.

— otxat 95 b. 205.

ofkovde 203 D,

olxos 23D; om. 509 B.

oinrelpw w. gen. 577 a.

- |8verpos 199.

GREEK INDEX.

olerpds compar. 222 D. oie w 87 en

-ow dual 154. 195 b. olvos 23D; om. 509b.

joivoxoéw 312 D.

-o1o gen. sing. 140 D.

ofouat, oluat, 422,15. 368 a. 4138; w. gen. 570; mid. 692; hyperb. 885. 6163; as eye oiuat 667.

otos 247. 86D. 681a. 811. 814 ff; w. sup. 664; ofop, ofa, w. part. 795 d.

oidsre 814. 856 a. 110.

ois 23 D. 154 D b. 192.

-o.oe for -ovca 362 D.

-oi(v) dat. pl. 140 Db.

oixvéew 422D,16. [698.

ofxopar 422,16; pr. for pf.

otw, dtw, 422, 15.

bxn 247 D.

dxvos w. inf. 767.

dxotos 247 D.

oA (etAw) 432 D, 22.

ddAvydKis 259. [dat. 610.

dAlyos 223,4; gen. 575 a;

dArywpéw W. gen. 576.

darlCwy 223 D, 4.

dAtcddyw 436, 9.

bAAvmt 442, 8. 417; pf. 712.

dAos w. art. 587,

oAm (€Amw) 424 D, 32.

"OAvumos dat. pl. 6138.

butAéw w. dat. 602.

duvups 442, 9.331.401 Db; w. ace. 544 a. 545.

Suotos, buoidw, W. dat. 603.

duokadw 370 Da.

bmoroyéew w. dat. 602; w. part. 797; w. inf. 777.

dudpyvupe 442, 10.

duov 590 a; w. dat. 602 b.

éudévumos w. gen. 587d; w. dat. 608.

dpads 864, 8.

duws 853 b. 864, 8. 874b; w. part. 795 f.

ov compar. stems in, 174,

bvap 201 b.

Svde Sduovde 203 D. rk ,n.

évivnut 403, 6. 27, 332.401

dvowa ace. 649b; dat. 608,

347 Jévoudgw w. pred. 640, 556 Bvouct 405 Da. dtivw 391 a. déds 90.

oo tO ov 82; oot to o 84,

-oos adj. in, 208.

oov tO ov 34; dov 243 D.

om (dpdw) 450, 4.

dap 248. 876, 6, 879, 4.

éanAlkos 247.

érnvika 248, 877, 3.

dmiode(v) 79D. 224D; w. gen. 589.

éria(c)w 40 D.

énloraros 224 D.

dmAdTepos, -raros, 224 D.

, |omddev 248, 811 a. 879, 2.

6mda 879, 1.

dot 248. 879, 8. [ff

émotos 247. 251. 681 b. 825

éméoos 247. 681 b. 825 ff.

éréoros 257.

éréray 877, 1.

érére 248. 877, 1.

éwérepes 247.

drov 248. 879, 1. [D.

éwrotos, Swmws, 247 D. 40

émmdéae 248 D.

érviw 434 D, 7.

Snows 248. 876,38; fin. 739 ff; interrog. 825 ff; w. fut. 756; dmws ph 743; ovx (uh) Srws 848 ¢.

bpdw 450, 4. 812. 822. 363 D. 866. b. 870 Da. 871 D c; Ww. wy 743; w. part. 799.

opy (pdm) 428, 14.

dpyaivw 882 b.

dpyiouar w. dat. 595b; w. part. 800.

dpeyvupt, dpeyw, 442 D, 18; w. gen. 574 ¢.

Upeios, dporepos, 221 D.

|dpSpos wt. art. 530 b.

dptvw 442 D, 11.

dpkdéw w. two acc. 555. dpyisoahpas 136 D.

Sours 153 f. 169. 202, 12.

Spvuus 442,11. 811D. 821

D. 345 D. 349 D. 884 D, 408 D, 40.

dpotw 442 D, 11,

548

dovoow 428, 4. 321. éppavds w. gen, 584 f. bpxus 153i, os stems in, 181 ff.

-os neut, 176 ff. 461 b.

-os gen. sing. 154. 196a; acc. pl. 140 De.

ds possess. 23 D. 288. 672 a. 675 a.

és demonst. 248 a. 525b, B.

ds rel. 243. 247. 681 a. 808 ff; pl. for sing. 514d; neut. for masc. fem, 522.

boduis 259,

donuéepar 816 b.

dcos 247, 681 a. S11. 8144; accus. 552a; dat. 610; bcov ob 848. d.

Scostep 251.

éstrep 850, 3.

édoodx. 259 D.

édocdrios 247 D.

dove 201 Da.

docouat 429 D, 4.

Sacos 40 D. 247 D.

dsre 856 a.

éoréoy, darody, 144.

dstis 246, 247. 251. 681 b. 811 ff. 825 ff. 110.

doppatvouat 436, 10; with gen. 576,

éray 877, 1.

Bre 248, 118 a. 869, 2. 877, 1; w. aor. 7 065 w. Td- xuoTa 821; eis bre ke 877, 7.

Sr(z)ev, breo, Srewy, bTéo1- ot, 246 D.

ort 70. 70D. 113a; decl. 868, 1. 733 ff; caus. 869, 1; w. superl. 664; ex- pressed by pron. 813. 822-3 ; obx dri 848 c.

ris, Sta, Stwas, 246 D.

Sri 40 D. 246 D.

ov 5b. 11 ff; for o 24Dc; interch. with ev 25 D; from o, see o.

av gen. sing. 136 c. 140. -ov 2 sing. 363. ov, OVK, Ox, odvxX!, 103. 80a.

74¢. 832 ff; interrog. 829; w. superl. 665a;

GREEK INDEX.

wt. ped. 545; ob ph 845; BN ov 846-T. [67 1-3.

ob, of, 2, 280. 105 a. 668.

oo adv. 248. 250. 879, 1.

ovaros (ods) 202 D, 13.

obdauf, -00, -@s, 252,

ovdé 858-9; ovdé cis 255; ovd Ss 250.

ovdels 255; w. pl. 514b; ovdels Sstis ov 817a; obdéy 848 a. 683.0; obde- vés 578); foll. by exac- Tos or Ths 881.

obdérepos 252.

ovK, See ov; obdk 68).

overt 848 b. 80 b.

ovxt 65 D.

ovKovy, ovxour, 866 a. 112.

ovAduevos 28 D.

OdAduroto 28 D.

-ovy ace, sing. 193 D.

ovv 866; w. rel. 251. 816 a; after prep. 616.

ee 68b. 626. 868, 2. 869, 3.

obyoua 24De.

ovml 68 b.

ovmw 848 b.

lovpayddey 203 D.

obpéw 312.

ovpeos 28D; odpos 65D.

-ous adj. 470. 208.

ods 160 c. 202, 13.

ovrdw, -d(w, 423 D, 5. 401 Dn. 408 D, 21.

ovre 858-9. 512.

odris 252; ott: 848.0.

ovros 239. 247. 678-80; fem, dual 521; w. art. 5388a; w. nom. for voc. 541. cf. 545 ;—rotro (radra) appos. 502b; w. verb om. 508 a,b; pl. for sing. 518b; neut. for masc. fem, 522; as adv. 552a; w. gen. 559 c; w. mév, dé, 525 a.

odtoat 242. 550 c.

odrw(s) 289a. 248. 80c; w. part. 795 a.

ovxX, ovxl, See ov.

dpelAw 432,12. 828e; in

wish 721 b.

dperAAW 828 ¢. 345 D. bperos 201 bd.

dpSarurceo 472}.

ddus 158i. [577 b. dprtondyes 436,11; w. gen. dppa 248 D. 739 ff. 877, 7. ox (€xw) 424 D, 11. [D C, dxos 201 Da; Bxeogr 206 ope w. hv 494: w. gen. 589. ;|\Oymmadhs w. gen. 587 a. dyios compar. 221 ¢, dpopdyos compar. 221 e. ow to w 82; for w 870Da -ow verbs 370. 472 a.

TI, 19 ff; ww 247 D. 40.D.

mw bef. r-mute 44; bef. u 46; bef.c 47. [392a.

m to > in perf. 341. 887b.

wa (wémapar) 335 D.

mary (whyvumt) 442, 12.

Tas (wdoxw) 447, 13.

malCw 431, 4.

mats 153. 158a,d. 160¢; wt. art. 530.

malw 421, 13.

madaids compar. 221 b.

markalw 421, 14.

méAw in comp. 52. [42,

nédrw 432D, 26. 408 D,

TdT pwrTos 224 D,

raudatyov, pavdwy, 472k. 432 D, 19.

way in comp. 52.

nayvrdmaci(v) 79 6.

mavTaxh 258 c.

mdvroxey 203.

mdyrws 225.

wap (mwelpw) 432, 13.

map 73 D, 646.

aed 646-8. 618; incomp. 605; w. compar. 661; w. inf, 780.

adpa 102a. 102 D. 615 a.

mapaBalvw w. acc. 544d.

mapat 24 De. 646.

mapavouew 315, [ 603,

mapamAhotos 221 c;.w. date

mapacKkevdt@ 3892 D; im pers. 494.

apart isnt mid. 689 b.

Twapux wpéw w. gen. 580,

mapd (wépdw) 424, 18,

. OLLce w. dat. 605.

ahaa 49D; wapotre-\r

pos 224 D.

Tapowvea | 315.

s w. inf. 769.

mas 158 f. 160 b. 161. 259; w. art. 537; was tis 514 b. 683b; way w. gen. 559 c; wravel 610.

mdoow 430, 5

ndoooy 222 D.

adoxw 447, 13. 409 D, 14; Tl waiév 789 c.

mardoow 427,19 a. 428, 5a.

maréouct 448, 8.

math 173; wt. art. 530 c¢.

Tidrpoxhos ‘Loo D.

mavw 421,19; mid. 688 ; w. part. 7 98.

maxvs compar. 222 D.

medioy wt. art. 580 b.

meidw 295. 284. 384 D. 409 D, 15. 417. 425, 8; pf. 712; mid. 688; w. ace. 5470; w. dat. 595b; meoréoy 806 b.

meikw 448, 9.

srewde 871 ¢; w. gen. 576. Tleipareds 190 e.

meipdouce w. gen. 576.

meipap 168 D.

telpw 432, 13.

mextéw 448, 9.

mead(w 428 D, 21. 408 D, 22. 849 D; w. dat. 544 b.

. m(€)Ad Sen, werden, 428 D,21.

médexus 153i. 185. [384.D.

méAowot, TéAwW, 424 D, 35.

meumds 258 d.

méume 253 D.

méumw 424,17. 391b; w. ace. 547 a. [584.

mwévns 218. 220; w. gen.

mevd> (mdoxo) 44/7, 18.

mevdéwo 371 Dc.

mevia, dat. 611.

mémooxe 409 D, 14.

7 509 ’b.

werr@ (wécow) 429, 1.

+ GREE : K IN DE x e

némov 217 ; compar. 221 d.|

-/mép 105 d. 110. 850, 85 w.

ge

. 195 F.

compar. 229.

168.

dw 424, 18, 422, 17.

népsw 424D, 36, 383 D. 408 D, 48.

Piven 649-51. 70b. 102b. 616; w. num. 493 f; w. inf, 781; ; in comp. 605 ; tarép for rept 633 b.

mépt 615, 112.

meprylyvouc w. gen. 581.

mepiopdw w. part. 799.

wepimliara w. dat. 605.

mwepiom@@uevos 90.

mwépynut 443 D, 5.

mépvot(v) 79 5.

Tes, TET, (rlrrw) 449, 4.

wécow 429, 1.

s|\werdyvupu 439, 3.

Tlereds 146 D.

mérouat, wérapat, 424, 19, 384. 408, 5. 422, 18.-

mevsoua 425, 14.

épvoyv 433 D, 7.

mepu(dres 425 D, 16.

mh, 7h, 248. 608. 105 b.

417. wnddw w. ace. 544 ¢. TInAnidins 466. awnAlicos 247. anvina 248; w. gen. 589. mixus 153i. 185. mito oo 429. mleipa 219 D. mis (welSw) 425 D, 8. mtAvnut, -vdw, 443 D, 6.

B75.

mriumpnus 403, 8.

mivtorw 426 D, 4.

mivw 435,4. 378. 408, 15. 416,7; w. gen. 574e.

muntoKe 446, 1.

mumpaoKe 444, so

mlarroo 449, 4, 409 D, 17.

morevo with dat. 595 b; pass. 694 a.

aloris 460 a.

miovpes 255 D,

mhyyvupt 442, 12. 408 D, 41.

tiumranu 403,73; w. gen.

345

|mirvéw 488, 4. 384.¢.

mbrynut, poss Ree 443 D, q,

tipavonw 446 D, 4.

mlwy 219 D, 221 ‘d.

TA (wéAowat) 424 D, 35.

wha. (wlumrnur) 408, ce (we-

Ad(w) 428 D, 21.401D 2,

TAay (TAhoow) 428, 5.

rdw 328 d.

trax (wrAéxw) 424, 20.

-rrdotos mult. 258 b. 585i i,

madcow 430, 6.

TlAaraats 612; -Got 205.

mAé€es, -as, 223 D, 5.

tAciv (Aor) 223, 5. 660d,

mwaeios 210 D.

mwAcioTdnis 259.

TAclwy, TA€wy,; 223, 5.

mwAéKw 424, 20.

mAcoventéw W. gen. 581.

mwAéos 210 D.

mAedy, mrebdves, 223 D, 5.

m)eupd 199 D.

mréw (wav, wAev) 426,35 377. 871 b; w. ace. b44a,

mwAéws 210.

TARxos ace. 549b; dat. 609; w. pl. 514a.

rrnsts 202 D, 28.

TANS 403,73 w. gen. 575.

mAhy w. gen. 589. 626.

mAnpdw w. gen. 575.

mrancd¢w w. dat. 602.

mAnotoy compar, 221 ¢; Ww. gen. 589.

trAhcow 428, 5. 397 a.

mwAlySos 139 a; coll. 514.

-rhoos, -tAovs, multipl. 258 b. 585i. [584 b.

mAotcws 468; with gen.

mwrouTéw W. gen, 575.

TwA0x (wAéKw) 424, 20.

mAv (mA€w) 426, 3.

wrtyw 433, 3.

ibeo 426 D, 8. 408 D, 25.

mvéw (mvv, " rvev) 426, 4, 377. 869 D. 408D, 30 w. ace. 547 d.

muty@o 424, 21.

Tide 202, 14,

70 (arbveo). 435, 4. [825,

TOSEVs money, 248. 105 b

u

moxéw 420, 8. 871 De

350

md%, Todt, 248 D. 105 b.

mot, Ta, 248, 105 b.

moréw incomp. pred. 490 ¢; om. 508b; w. two acc. 555; w. part. 797;— mid. 690; mid. w. two acc. 556 ;—ed (Kards) moi 788; w. acc. 5444; w. part. 801.

mows (reldw) 295.

motos 247. 825 ff; woids 247.

noimviw 472k. 426 D, 4.

modeuew, -lCw, -dw, 472i; modeul(w 328 D.

médis 185. 186 D; wt. art. 5380b; dat. 607; wéAras 37D; wéAwde 208 D,

modrevo mid. 690 a; pass. 694 b.

morAd«(s) 80D, 259. [b.

woAAamAdoLos, -TAODS, 258

woAAax} 258 c.

@oAAogrds 257.

mwoAviorwp 15 a.

WoAvs 219; compar. 2238, 5; w. article 528a; w. gen. 559e3; od . moAds 842;—(7rd) oad, (ra) moaAd, 552a. cf. 528 a. 610 ; woAAod 575 a; moa- A@ 610; em) word 498 f. 496 ;—mAclwy, wAEwY, W. art. 528 a; wt. # 660d; of wAciorot 528 a.

moumwh 455 ¢. 457 ¢.

mwoup (wéumw) 424, 17.

movew 420, 9.

moves (mdoxw) 447, 13.

mop (€mopoyv) 424 D, 37.

mopd (mépdw) 424, 18.

mopséw 424 D, 36.

mopt(w mid. 689.

méppw w. gen, 589.

Twoppupw 472k.

méoe 248 D,

Tloveidav (-dwy, -éwy, -cv) 26 D. 32 Dh.172b.175¢.

mécos 247. 825 ff; gen. 578 b; dat. 610.

woods 247.

nooot 47D. 154Db.

wdéoros 257,

nér for mpds 78 D,

imorray 73 D.

|rpovogomat 413.

GREEK INDEX.

mworauds attrib. app. 500 a.

mordouat 424,19, [ ff.

wére, woré, 248. 105 b. 825

Noreday 32 Dh.

wérepos 247 ; mérepoy (wé- Tepa) 831. 733.

wort for mpés 73 D. 652.

wérTva, TéT vid, 218 D.

mov 248. 105b. 590a. 825 ff; w. gen. 589; mov 248. 105 b.

movaAuBéreipa 218 D.

movats 212 D, 219 D.

movs 153 f. 161. 170. 191.

apa. (rlumpnur) 403, 8; (are- mpdcKkw) 444, 7.

mpas (répdw) 424 D, 36.

mpaos 219 a.

mpdoow (rpary) 428, 6. 887 b; w. acc. 547d; two ace. 553; w. ed, Kakds, 684; mid. 553. 578 ¢.

mpéemo 595 b. 763.

mpéoBa, mpéoBeipa, 219 D.

mpeaBeuThs, mpeaBeis, 202, 15. [mid. 690 a.

mpeoBedw w. acc. 546;

mpéaBus 202, 15. 219 D.

mperBorns 202, 15.

mphrxw 403 D, 8.

mpia 408, 8. 401 k. 450, 7.

mply 878; w. inf. 769; w. fin. verb 771; 7d amply 524,

mplw 421, 17.

mpo (wémrpwrat) 424 D, 37.

mpd 625. 652. 68; w. com- par. 661; w. inf. 781; apo Tod 525d.

mpoBalyw w. acc. 544.¢.

mpdéxeots 614.

mpodupéouat 413.

mpotka 552.

mpokartCoua 420 D, 5.

mpdkemor W. gen. 583.

mpoxdérrw intrans. 685.

mpdanyis 726.

mods 652-4. 76. 73D; in comp. 605; w. compar. 661; w. inf. 780. 782;

mposavdde 371 Dc,

mpdsetus W. dat. 605,

mposhke. W. gen. 5713 w. inf. 595b. 763; mposije kov 793. 797.

npdove(v) T9D; w. gen, 589; w. mply 769.

mposkuvéw 438, 3 a.

mpostaxsév ace. abs. 792 a.

mpdow W. Tov 590 a,

mpdswmoy 199 D,

mpérepos 224; w. art. 582; mpotepoy 552a; mpdre- pov mply 769.

mport '76. 652.

mporov 525 d. [c.

mpovpyouv 68; compar. 221

mpdpacis dat. 608.

mpopépw w. gen. 581. [D.

mpdppacca, mpddpwv, 219

mpoxwpet impers. 504 d.

mpvravs wt. art. 580 a.

mpoios compar. 221 c¢.

mporioros 224 D.

mp@ros 224. 488¢; (7d) mpa@rov 552a; Thy mpa- Thy 509 a.

wra (mwerdyyym) 439, 3; (wérouot) 424,19 ; (rrho- ow) 428 D, 7.

Tralpw, mrdpyupat, 442, 13,

mrepovoca 214 D,

wrhoow 428, 7.408 D, 23.

aticow 430, 7.

wro (wirrw) 449, 4.

atTvxh 202 D, 29.

mrvw 419, 20.

mracow 428, 7.

mwrwxds compar. 221 e.

Tus (ruvddvoua) 487, 7.

Tivsot 205.

Tivxvds (Tyvé) 202, 14.

miparos 224 D.

muvSdvowa 487,73 w. gen. 576. 582; w. part. 799; as éya m. 667.

wip 153n. 161. 199.

ap for pp 40 b.

m@ 105 b; w. ov (uh) 848 b.

mos 248. 105b. 825 ff; w. gen. 589; mas ov méAA@

adv. 615; hyperb. 885.

"11; més 248. 105 b.

ps B6, 15.48. _ pstems in, 152n, [828c. pd 865. 70D. 105D; F pa

— pdBdos 189e.

pay (phyvups) 442, 14.

pad (palveo) vi D.

pd¢dios cpmpar. 228, 7.

patyw 392 D,

patw 421 D, 24.

pdarw 427, 13.

pdwr, paoros, 228, 7.

pe (elpnea) 450, 8.

péa, peta, 223 D, 7.

béCo (pey) 428, 14.

péw (fv, fev) 426,5; w.

gen. 575. Dh

prryvups 442, 14. 334 d. 400

putd.os, pyirepos, 223 D, 7.

pryéw 448 D, 16.

prylwv (pryndds) 223 D, 10.

ppd 371 d.

_ pilédsev 203.

_ purée 448, 10. [14. plrrw 293. 284. 410 D. 427,

pls 153 m.

-pos adj. 471.

bududs 46 a. 460 b. 887.

pu (pew) 426, 5.

pvoua 405 Db.

purdm 319 D.

pory (paryvupr) 442, 14.

povvume 441, 2.

3 (a, s) 5a. 16. 18. 22.

g@ after mutes 47. 372a; ‘after vy 48-52.

o bef. cons. 54-6. ~

o from 7, see rt. [8 a.

o to h 63..312a, 382. 424,

o omitted 54. 55. 64. 178. 183; in -om, -co, 363. 401 ¢; in tense-sign 345. 374-6. 378. 381-2.

o added to vowel-stems 842. 390. 421. 455d. 476 b. [D. 308 D.

o doubled 40 D. 247 D. 344

o tense-sign 344 ff. 372 ff. 881 ff. 394. 395.

.|-s nom. sing, 123. 136a.

150. 154. 156. 195f. 400 f.

-s dat. pl. 129. 148. 150. -s ace. pl. 150. 195 h, -s 2 sing. 355ff. . [467¢. -s patronym. 466; gentile -oa fem, adj. (part.) 214. -cat 2 sing. 355. 368. 400¢. caipw 432, 14, Borauive 612. [504 ¢. gadmi(w 828b; subj. om. count 254. -cov 3 pl. 355 ff. 400 d. oadw 431 D, 5. cam (chmw) 425, 2. Sampe 40 b. 83 b. Zaprnddy 197 D.

.jodrrowae w. gen. 575.

gavTov 235.

cdoa 227 D.

caphs 176. 220. 227 D.

gaérepos 210D. [416, 5.

oBévvumt 440, 3. 408, 9.

od for ¢ 56.

-ce local 204.

oé 230. 105 a.

geavrod 235. 670. 676.

céBoua 46 b. 418.

oeio, vésev, 233 D.

-celw desider. 472).

oelw 421, 17. 308 D. 426 D, 9; subj. om. 504 c¢.

eéAas 182 D.

ceuvds 46 b. 471. 547 ¢.

oéo, ved, 233 D.

vedo 426 D, 9. 308D. 319 D. 367 Db. 381 D. 408 D, 31.

gewvTov 235 D.

onmeioy appos. 502 b, c.

ohuepov 62a.

onmw 425, 2.417.

ons 160 ¢.

o® after cons. 54.

-c9a 2 sing. 856 a. 357 D. 400 g; in-weoda355 Dd.

-oe, -cVov, -onv, 355 ff.

-09w, -TIWV, -oSwoay, 358.

-o1 2 sing. 855-6. 406 a.

-oilv) dat. pl. 798. 129. 148. 150. 154. 159. 195d.

s movable 80c. 80 D.

-oi(v) locative 205.79 y.

351 -o() 8 sing. pl. 79a. 856 ff. 361-2. 400 a, h. -o1a, -ois, fem. 460 a. ovydw aor. 708, ovyh dat. 608. -cos adj. 471, : gtros 200. ciwmdw 379. or 6th class 330. 444 ff. ox iterative 410 D. ondmrw 42'7, 15. oxards (oxdp) 167. oxeddvvuue 439, 4. [416, 6, oérAw 432,15. 408, 10, oKemrouc 42'7, 16. onharw 427,17. oxidynut 443 D, 8. oKAe (oxéAAw) 408, 10. oKxotréw 427,16; mid. 690; w. wh 143; w. Srws 756. oxéros 197. SKvVAAn 125 D. okomrw 427, 18. oxép 167. opdw, ouhxw, 871¢. [e. -co 2 sing. 355 ff. 363. 400 adns, obn, chwot, 431 D, 5. gol, cod, 230. 105 a. odos 210 D. gopés 139 b. abs 238. 675-7. [450D, 8. om (€mroua) 424, 8; (elroy) omavifw w. gen. 575. omdw 419,6; mid. 689. omelpw 432, 16. orévdw 49. 381. 391 ¢. oméos, ometos, 178 D. omodds 139 a. orovdd(w 379. orovd) 25D; dat. 608. oo 41-2. 60. 828a; seeg doubled. -cow verbs 328 a. 428 ff, or abbrev. 5b. ora (fornut) 408, 5. orddiov 200. oradpds 200. ordos 62. ordxus 153i. orelBw (oTtB) 425, 9 orelxw (ortx) 425, 10. orésAw 290. 278, 284, 482,

17.

352

orevwmds 139 ¢.

orépyw 424, 22.

oreplokw, oTepéw, orépo- pat, 447, 7.

oredTat, -ro, 405 De.

orlypa 5b. 254.

orixos 202 D, 30. 898 a.

orod, 125 d.

oToAh, orddros, 457 a.

oropy (orépyw) 424, 22. [4.

oTopevvuut, ovépruni; 440,

oroxd(ouo: w. gen. 574¢.

' orpdérevua coll. 514a.

orparedw w. ace. 547b; pass. 694 b.

orparnyéw W. gen. 581 a.

orpardmedoy wt. art. 530b.

oTpepe 424, 23. 389. 414,

or peyyu pe 441, 3.

orvyéw 448 D, 1.

oruperl(w 828 D,

ov (cebw) 426 D, 9.

ov 230. 485 a.

ovyyevis w. gen. 587 d.

ovyyryyéone w. gen. 577 a3 W. dat. 605.

obyKAnros 139 d.

ovyxaipe w. gen. 577 a.

ovAdw w. two ace. 553.

SvAAas, SVAAa, 186 d.

ouuBaive pers. constr. 777.

obtpras w. art. 537.

cbulnpos w. gen. 587a; w. dat, 603. [adv. 615.

aby 628. 52; incomp. 605;

ovvaipew ; (és) ouvendyrt eirety 601 a. 772.

cvvayrdw 371 De.

cbydv0 258 a.

-otvn fem. 464d.

ovvoida w. part. 799.

UV TELYO ; tva ovvréuw 739.

odyrpets 258 a.

ruyrpiBoua W. gen. BT4b.

ovs 185. 161. 158i. 63.

opdw (opay) 428, 15.

opdrrAw 432, 18.

opdrre 428, 15. [ 230. opé 105D. 233D; opéa

opéas, opetas, ete. 233 D.

opérepos 238. 675-6.

spt(v) 79 D. 108 D. 233 D.

splot 108 a. 230.

GREEK INDEX.

cods 238 D. [D.

ocowirepos 238 D.

ox, oxe (Exw) 424, 11.

oXOAatos compar. 221 b.

b(@ (ow, owd) 431, 5.

Swxpdrns 179. 198.

ooua wt. art. 5380¢; acc. 549a; dat. 609.

o@0s, o@s, 210.

cwothp 172b.

ceppwy compar. 221 d.

T, 16. 19 ff; to S$ 66; tog 45-6, 62. 76.

7 dropped 47. 49ff 75. 155. 165 ff. 855. 386 a.

7 3d class 327. 427.

-ra for -rns 186 Da; voce. sing. 135.

Ta (relyw) 483, 5.

‘lrary (reraryéy) 384D; ; (rdo-

ow) 428, 9. rat 3 sing. 355 ff; rat is Ta (thew) 425, 3. rédas 218. 156 ¢. Tara (érdraroa) 408 D, 6. TaAAG 99, Tduvw 485 D, 9. tdy (riv) 202, 16, Tavdpds 68 c.

\ravdw 438 D, 5.

rdéts dat. 609.

tapdoow 428, 8,

TOpT (répreo) 424 D, 24.

Tappées, Tapperal, 219 D.

Ttaccw 428, 9. 338. 392.

-TATOS superl. 220 ff. [284.

Tair, Tavrd, ravTdy, 68 c.

TAvTY 248. 608.

rap (Sdwrw) 427, 5. 66.

Tdppos 139 b.

tapay 425 D, 17.

Taxa TOC. 2917,

Taxvs compar. 222. 66b; Thy raxlorny 552. 509 a.

rdwy 239D. ~

Taws 199.

-re 2 pl. 355 ff.

re for Se (riSyut) 403, 2.

vé 855 ff. 70a. 105 d. 511; after art. 534a; after

prep. 616.

ood, cbwe, etc. 230, 233)

ré for o€ 233 D, Téespimmos 72a. ° tely 233 D,

Telvw 438, 5.

-reipa fem. 459.

retxos wt. art. 580 b.

telws, Telos, 248 D.

rex (rherw) 449, 5. [D bh.

Téxpap, TEKmwp, 153 D. 201

TeKph ploy appos. 502 b, ¢.

TéAcios W. gen. 587 e.

TeAevTa@v 788. ©

TeAéw 288. 284, s70Db. 374, 419, 14.

TEAOS ace. 552,

Téuvw 435, 9. 3945 w. ace. 546; w. gen. B74.

Tew 435 D, 9.

Téo, Téotot, 244 D.

-réov (-réa) 804 ff; subj. om. 494; éorf om. 508 a; plur. 518 a.

D. |-réos verb. adj. 261 ¢. 398. 804 ff; w. dat. 600. *

reds for ods 238 D.

irépas 168.

Tépnv 213. [247. -Tepos compar. 220 ff. 238. Tépm@w 424, 24. 384.D. 397 D; w. part. 800. [88. TEpT oat, Teporalve, 424 D, Téacapes 255; réovepes, TETCE pecciveds 255 D. TET MOY teu) 884 D. Tétopes 255 D. Terpalye 449, 6. 882 b. TeTpamAs) 258 D. Tetpds 258 d. Térpact 255D; rérparos 253D; rerpaxid 258 D. TED 244 D. Ted, TEovs, revs, 233 D. TEUX (ruyxdvw) 437, 8. TEevXW (ux) 425,15. '392D 437 D,8 Téxvn OM. B09 b. Tew, Tewv, 244 D, Téws 248 D. 7H 433 D, Be THe 248. «| hucco 425, 8. 417. THAE 229 D. Tnreddwy 432 D, 6.

4 2 rt oe 19 425D, 18.

La Po lesion 40%

~Tnptoy nent, 463 a. -Tns masc. 459. 467 b. 135. «86 Da,

_ “TNS re re a. ef. 152 e.

t) 239 D.

oe os 40b.

gw. to oo 60. 828 a; to ao 62; inserted 469.

“Tt 3 sing. 355. 400Da. 406 a,

tie (revi) 386 D.

Tidnur 403, 2. 297. 801. 65 c. 347 D. 355 De. 400- 402; mid. 689; Tidhpe- vos 28 D.

rlkrw 449, 5. 882. 887 a; 6 wexdv'186'.

Tindw 279. 285. 3385; w. gen. 578 a.

Tyas (hes) 214 D.

Tiwwpéew mid, 691.

tty for col 238 D.

rive, Tivym, 435, 5.

tim(o)re 38 D.

Tipuys 51b. 74d.

ris fem. 459. 460 a.

vis interrog. 244, 247. 105 b. 682. 825 ff; vi 5524; vo th 588d; wa rl 508 b; ct rotro 508a; ci TovTo Towels 556.

mis indef. 244. 247. 251. 105 b. 683; coll. 514b; after article 534a; om. bef. gen. 571; supplied from oddels 881; eyyis gmt BS2a; 6 Sé tis, Ta

pe tt, etc. 525.

- trratyw 433 D, 5.

_ wirpdw 449, 6. 835 a.

_ wirpdonw 445,6. [D,15.

-tirborKopat 447 D, 17. 425

lw 435 D, 5. [10.

c “apnea 408, 6. 409 D,

ame (zéuve) 435, 9.

?

-ro 3 sing. ‘305

Tésev, TéS1, 248D. — [d.

.(rol 852, LY 68 ¢. 40D. 105 Tot for. of 239D; for got!

gg [ro 867, 5. Tolyap, Toryapody, Tor é tolyuy 867, 4 i RB Pe 4 T0108, Sieee

241. 247. 679. toisdeo(c)t, roicide, 239 D. toK (tTherw) 449, 5.

TOLOUTOS,

‘|réApa 125 d.

-rov 2,3 du. 355 ff.

révos 90. [ 666.

-T6s verb, adj. 261¢. 398.

TogauTdKts 259,

tég0s, Tocdsde, TocodTas, 241. 247. 679; rocodro 552a; rocotrw 610.

Tore 248; w. part. 795a; évy tT TéTe 6138.

rod from Tis, tls, 244b.

rovvayriov 68.

rovtepov 68 De, 72D.

Toppa 248 D.

tpa for rep dat. pl. 178.

~rpa fem. 462 a.

Tpa (TiTpdw) 449, 6.

Tpary (Tpoyw) 495, 4,

Tpayydds 12a.

Tpamelowey (répmw) 397 D.

Tpdame, -€w, 424 D, 25.

Tpdgpw 424 D, 26.

tpdxw 450 D, 5.

Tpets, Tpla, 253. 255.

Tpémw 424, 25. 389. 3897 b; mid. 688. 689 a.

Tpédw 424, 26. 66. ¢. 334a. 389 ; w. two acc. 555.

TPEXw 450, 5. 66 ¢.

Tpew 419, 15,

TPNX (Spdoow) 428, 8.

-rpla fem. 459 ; quant, 130.

Tpids 258 d.

ple 424, 27,

TpiCw (rpey) 428, 16.

tprhpns 177.

rpitds 258 D.

Tpimrdaros, TpeTrovs, 258.

Tpimdy 258 D,

irplrous 191.

3585 ; s

-rpis fem. 459,

tpioods 258 b,

Tpitaios 488 c.

tpltaros 253 D.

Tpix (Splé) 66 ae

Tpixh 258C; Tplxa, rpe

8 EE is a

Tpola 12a,

“Tpov neut. 462.

Tpoméw 424 D, 25,

Tpdmos acc. 552; dat. 608 ; mpos Tpdmov 653 a.

Tpop cpree)s 424, 25 ; (rpé- gw) 424

Tpup (Spirrru) 66¢.

Tpdyw 425, 4. 334d.

Tpas 160 c¢. :

Tpéw (TitpdoKw) 445 D, 6.

Tr 413 see oo, -oow.

Tu for su (dw) 420, 2.

Tv for ov 233 D.

tvyxdvw 437,83; w. gen. 574¢. 582; W. ‘part. 801. tux dv 552a.

tux (redxw) 425 D, 15.

tivn 233 D.

tumTw 427,19; w. cogn. ace. 547 b. 555 a.

Tupavvew W. gen. 581a,

TUpAds w. gen. 584 ¢.

Tipe 424, 28. 66.¢.

dep 199.

Tux (Tedxw) 425,15; (rvy- xdvw) 437, 8.

Tux gen. 592 a; dat. 608.

-Tw, -ToY, -Twoav, 358.

7@ from tis, tls, 244.

ToAndés 68 Dc.

-Twp mase, 459.

Tos 250 D. [De.

twitd LL Db; twirod 68

Y, vow. 7ff. 12c; 5- 15; v- 15D.

v to ev 80. 826. 425 ff.

v interch. with 0, w, or & 27. 186. [86 ff

v not elided 70d; quant,

vom, 39. 190. 328 e. 426.

v stems in, 152d, i. 186m

bBBdAAEw 73 D.

iBpiorhs compar, 221 f

byihs 178.

354

-vdpioy neut. 465 a,

Bdwp 167.

ve to v 187b.

vt diphth. 11 ff. [D.

vi to v 401D1; to wu 186

-via fem. part. 216 b.

vids 202,17; om. 5098.

bud, dues, etc. 233 D.

ducrepos 238. 675-6.

Buy, Suv, duly, 232.

tume, etc. 283 D. 15D,

tupi(v) 79 D,

buds 238 D.

-vy acc. sing. 171.

-bvw denom. verbs 472 h.

ta for rd 73 D.

brat 655.

Brap 201b. — [part. 797.

imdpxw WwW. dat. 598; w.

braros (bwrép) 2240. ['781.

bwrép (breip) 633-4; w. inf.

brepdixéw w. gen. 583.

drepSe(v) 79 D.

bréprepos, -Taros, 224a.

breppalyouat w. gen. 583.

breppua@s ws 817 b.

brevsuvos w. gen. 584 d.

imhKoos W. gen, 584¢.

brnpecia w. dat. 595 d.

bmoxveoua 438,6. 332; mid. 692.

brvdw 370 Dc.

bird 655-7; w. pass. 600. 693; in comp. 605.

brddikos w. gen. 584 d.

tménemmar w. gen. 578 a; w. dat. 605.

bromretw 315; w. uh 748.

imdoreyos Ww. gen. 587 e.

bmwoTreAns W. gen. 584d.

Baroxos w. dat. 595 c¢.

bs 153i. 63.

toptyn 199 D.

bordarios 224 D, [613.

torepata w. gen. 585; dat.

borepéw 691.

borepi(w w. gen. 581.

Uerepos (-raros) 224. 488 Cc; w. gen. 585.

bWiwv, toros 223 D, 12.

tyuméernros 28 D.

fiw 421,11; te 504¢; tovros 791 a.

GREEK INDEX.

6, 17.19 ff; doubled 40b.

bef. r-mute 44; bef. uw 46; bef. o 47.

pa (patyw) 482 D, 19; (n- eet 2; mépapar 433

athe pay (eodtw) 450, 8. pacwds, badyraros, 221 D. paclyw, padvSny, 482 D,19.| gpalvw 291, 282-3. 284, 343} D. 386¢. 887a. 896 D. 414. 417, 482,19; aor. pass. 708; mid. 688; w. part. (inf.) 797. 802. gpavepds w. part. 797. dos 166 D. odor 444, 8. 404, 2. (d:a)patonw 446 D, 4. elSouar 425, 11. [D. pev (répvov) 483 D, 7. 884 péprepos, -raros, pépio'ros,

pépw 450, 6. 349D. 884. 406 D,4; om. 508b; w. part.800; depduevos 788.

ged w. gen, 592 a.

gpedyo 425,16. 877; w. acc. 544a; w. gen. 577 b; pr. for pf. 698,

pnyds 189.

pnpl 404, 2. 105 ¢. 400-01. 450, 8a; pact 504¢;3 of ont 842, ;

ons 105 ¢. [part. 801.

podvo 435,38. 408,75 w.

prelpw 432, 20. 886 c.

pswise 411D. — [D, 27.

oSlvw 435, 6. 401 D1. 408

pxovew w. dat. 544 b. 595 b; w. gen. 577 a.

padvos w. inf. 767.

Sop (PSelpw) 432 D, 20.

-p(v) 206 D. 79 D.

pid (pelSouen) 425 D, 11.

piravarerns W. gen. 587 a.

pirdw 280. 287. 335. 448 D,18; w. two ace. 555.

piroumerdhs 40 D,

pirdmoris 217 ¢.

glaos compar. 221¢. 222 D; w. dat. 595.

pirorinéouat 413.

préyw, -€Xw, 411 D.

pase 454.

pv (wépvov) 483 D, 7.

poBepds 471.

poBéw w. wh 748.

dBos dat, 611; w. uh 1483 odBovde 203 D.

port 164.

govdw 472 j.

opéw 371 De.

dws 166 D.

ppdyvumt 442, 15. [D.

ppdcw (ppad) 428,17. 384

dpdcow (ppary) 442, 15.

ppéap (ppnrds) 167.

phy 153m.

dplacw (ppc) 428, 10. 360

gpdvnois dat. 609.

ppovrifw w. wh 743; w. baws 756.

ppovtiorhs W. ace, 544 ¢e,

ppoddos 72a.

poupds 72a.

pvyade 203 D.

guyds 218.

guyydvw (pedyw) 425, 16.

-pufs adj. 178. [202 D, 11.

gvaakh 457a,c; pvaAakos

ptaak 163. 454D.

gvadcow 428,11; w. ace. 544a; w. wh 7433; ov- Aaxréoy 806 b.

pvéimmos 471; w. ace. 544e

pipw 345 D.

pics acc. 549b; dat. 608.

be 423, 4. 386 D. 408, 17, 416, 8; pf. 712.

pwpdoua w. part. 799.

ges 160c.

és 1531. 160. 166.

(Sia) pdorw 446 D, 4.

X, 17. 19 ff; bef. +v-mute 44; bef. uw 46; bef. o 47; doubled 40 b.

xad (xavddvw) 437 D, 9.

xd(w 428, 18.

xaipw 432,21. 331; w. ace. 544c. 547¢; w. dat. 61la; w. part. 800.

xardw 419, 7. [611la.

xorerralyw W. dat. 595).

pardw 419, 4.

xarerds W. dat. 595 c¢.

Ss es

xv (xéw) ae 6.

pis 153r. i. 221 ¢; ace. B52. 677.

a wditicns 444, 05 wr aty Be xé{o 428,19. ALS

oP x — -BOOD; eis xelpas 602 a. oe siaahee: 228, 2. oud 437 D, 9. ie 426 D, 6. [2. str pt xcept, etc, 223 D, (xu, xev) 426, 6. 378. 881. 408 D, 32. xnrds 139d. bd xSév 153 m. x: to oo 60. 828 a. Xruds 258 d. xray, nuddv, 66D. xiéy 153m, xAad (xexAadés) 360 D. x08 (xé(w) 428, 19. Xopevo W. ace. 544. Xopnryéc w. ace. 546, xovs 202, 19. xdbw 421, ‘ t Xpa (iefxpnut) 408, 9. 335 a. Xpacpew 448 D, 19. Xpdoua 335 a. 871. 370 Da; w. dat. 607a; in part. 788. _xpdeo 421, 3. 335 a. xpéos 17 8; Koews 202, 20. Xpedv 404, 3 404, 3; w. case 544. ¢; w. inf. 764 b ; impf. 703. xpRua dat. pl. 609. xphowos 471.

gen. 591. 158 n. 202, : 18; om,

|xdoun w. gen. 577 a.

Xa, x@, 68 a. nl 2. xovivus 421, 9.

xeépa om. 509 b. xopls w. gen. 589. 6261.

YW, 17a. 21-9. 47. 74D.

-y masc., fem. 152 0. 1638.

Wdupmos 139 a,

Wdp 153.

Wate w. gen. 574b.

Wdw 421, 4. 871¢.

Wé for opé 233 D.

Weddoua w. acc. 547 ¢; w. gen. 580,

Wigos 139 a.

Whxw 421, 4. [609.

wuxh wt. art. 5380c¢; dat.

Wixw (Wy) 424, 29.

2, vow. 7 ff; from o, see o.

w for o 860D; for ov 24 Dd. 871d.

w, n, interch. 25; , o, 27.

win Att. decl. 146 ff. [d. @ diphth. 11 ff; for o: 371

-w fem. 193-4; gen. sing.

1386Db; adv. 229; 1

sing. 267. 352.

@ 68; w. voc. 119b. 548

a; w.acc. 545; w. gen.

592a.

ayase 68.

@de 239 a. 248.

dh 12a. 32 De.

-édns adj. 481 a.

@dts 153 m.

@Séw 448, 11. 312. 410 D.

|@«a 227 D.

dit poos 48D. ats 212 D. 222D, his -év mase. 4638¢. [195¢

j-ov gen. pl. 128. 142, 154, év part. 406, 1.

av 24D d. 866.

avéouce 450,7. 812; we gen. 578 a.

evn, évepwros, 68 Dc.

ant ds w. gen, 584e,

épa dat, 613; w. inf. 767.

epala w. gen. 587 e,

dpact 205.

apioros 68 De.

ws stems in, 181 ff.

-ws Att. 2 decl. 146; 8 decl. 182; gen. sing. 186. 190a; adj. 210; pf. part. 216; adv. 225 ff.

@s 108c. 112. 248; uses 875a-g; w. pred. 489e; w. gen. 589; after pos. 659; w. superl. 664; w. aor. 706; in wish 721; indirect 733 ff. 868, 2; final 739 ff; w. part. 793. "95e; in exclam. 815 a; ws TaxloTa 821; w. prince. verb 823.

as prep. 621. 614. 108 ¢

és 112. 104 a. 248, 250.

és for ots 202 D, 13.

step 876, 2. 850,38. 110. 251; w. acc. abs. 793; dsmep ef ‘154; dsrepody 251.

ésre 876, 4. 867, 6. 856a. 110; after pos. 659; w. verb. 770-71; subord. 853 b; expressed by pronoun 813. 822.

wr stems in, 1521.

wv diphth. 11.

wiros, witds, 11D b, 68D,

xphorns 137; xpnords ib.

axpidw 472).

856

ENGLISH INDEX.

ENGLISH INDEX.

Abbreviations 5b.

Ability, adj. 469 a.

Ablative in Lat. = Gr. gen. 557. 579 ff. 589. 590 b. 791; = dat. 594. 627. Absolute, gen. 7 90 ff. 593. 582; acc.

792 ff; compar. 662.

Abstract words 117; nouns of number 258d; verbals 457; in comp. 474; in plural 518¢; w. ‘art. 526. 529 ff: participle 786 b.

Abundance, adj. 470.

Acatalectic verse 891.

Accent 89ff; in decl. 120ff; 1 decl. 128. 135. 187; 2 decl. 145. 149; 3 decl. 160. 172 b. 173. 175. 179. 186% adj. 207b; pron. 232. 233 D, 239 D. 244; verbs 365 ff. 370 Day; wi-forms 400k. 401k; eiuf 406b,¢; in forma- tion 456 ff; in comp. 479 ;—rhythmic accent 894,

Accompaniment, dat. 604.

Accusative 115¢; in decl. 127. 148. 150, 154, 155. 157. 171. 195. 198; contr. 36b; with Se 203; adv. 226. 228 ;—Synt. 544 ff; app. w. sent. 501 ff; w. gen. 574b; w. dat. 595a; w. comp. vbs. 605; w. prep. 617 ff; w. inf. 773 ff; acc. abs. 792 ff; inf. as ace. 780; rel. sent. as ace. 810.

Action, suffixes 460. 469 a. 476b; ex- pressed by tenses 262. 695 ff.

Active voice 260; fut. pf. 264. 394a. 713; no voice-sign 343; conn, vow. 849 ff; endings 354 ff; trans. and in- trans. in diff. tenses 416 ff;—Synt. 684 ff; act. for pass. 767 a.

Acute accent 89 ff. [680 a.

Address, voc. 548; nom. 541; w. obtos

Adjectives 207 ff, 114. 132. 144, 158 e, f. 174 ff. 177 ff. 187-8; formation 468 ff. 457b; comp. 473 ff;—Synt. 658 ff; equiv. 492; adj. pron. 492b; w. subst, 487 ff; agr’t 498; fem, wt. subj. 509; of place w. art. 536; w. ace. 548 ff; w. gen. 584 ff. 559¢, e;

w. dat. 595. 596 ff; w. poss. pron.

675 b; w. rls 683; w. inf. 767; We a) 840 ;—Verbal. adj. 261 c. 898. see Té0s (réov, véa) in Greek Ind. See Neuter, Attributive, Predicate-Noun.

Adjuncts ‘of participle 795.

Adonie verse 917 a, b.

Advantage, dat. 596 ff.

Adverbial ace, 552. 1 72; part. 788.

Adverbs, elision 70¢; enclit. 105; for- mation 225ff; compar. 228 ff: ; de- monst. 239a; correl. 248ff; neg. 252; numeral 253; of div. 258¢; in dkis 259; in comp., w. aug. 316; pred. adj. for adv. 488¢; w. art. 492 f,h; w. acc. 545; w. gen. 588 ff. 781; w. dat. 602b; w. ‘7) 6838; w. 27 840; prep. as adv. 615; rel. adv. 81a. 817. 819. 875 ff

Adversative conjunctions 862 ff,

Aegean islands, Ionic of, 2.

Aeolic, dialect 2. 383 digamma 93D; aor. opt. 349b; poetry (basis) 916; dactyls 918.

Aeschines, Attic of, 3 d.

Aeschylus, Attic of, 3d.

Affection of body, verbs of, 472j.

Age, demonst. 241 ; correl. 247;

Agent, suff. 458-9. 457¢; gen. 582a; dat. 596. 600. 805; w. pass. 698. 624 c. 653 b. 656 b.

Agreement, gen. rules 497 ff; pecul. of number and gender 511 ff. [917 s.

Aleaeus, Aeolic of, 3a; Alcaic verse

Alpha priv., see @ in Greek Ind.

Alphabet 5 if.

Amphibrach 888.

Anaclasis 925 a.

Anacoluthon 886.

Anacreontic verses 925 a.

Anacrusis 896.

Anapaest 888; anapaestic rhythms 912 ff; logaoedic anap. 916. 919.

Anastrophe 102.

Anceps, syllaba anc. .897.

Antecedent 491; agr’t 503; om. 510 504¢;-in rel. sent. 807 ff. 4

i! ot Toriet pers 266 ff augm. 807! iter. % -sl0D—Synt. 696. 705 ff:716 fF 704; e in wish ‘721b; subj. w. wh 723; in v3); RS per. 146; subj. for fut. pf. 747 o 60a; part. act. VOL ¢.~

_ Aorist, First, stem-vowel 337; tense- sign 844 ff; mode-sign 347D; conn. “vow. 349; endings 364; accent 367 ; formation 380 ff; in xa 402; transi- tive sense 416.

Aorist, Second, stem-vow. 334 a; conn. Yow. 352d; ‘accent 366 ff; formation 383 ff; ju-form 267. 336 b. 353 b. 399 ff. 408: formation in 8 411D; in- transitive sense 416.

Aorist, Passive, pass. sign 843 D ; mode- sign 848; conn. vow. 353; endings 854 ff; formation 895 ff; in depon. verbs 413. 415.

Apocope 73D.

Apodosis 732. 744, 851. 862 b.

Aposiopesis 883.

Apostrophe 70 ff.

Apposition, kinds of, 500ff. 547d; in- finitive in, 766.

Appositive 489 ; agr’t 499 ff. 512c¢; subj. om. 506; subj. implied 523 b, c. 675b; attrib. as app. 5383; pron. 588 e; rel. sent. 823 b.

Aristophanes, Attic of, 3d.

Aristotle, dialect of, 3 e.

Arsis 894. 28 D. 86 D. 88 D.

Article 119. 239; crasis 68; proclitic 108a; w. adrds 234; for rel. 248D;

—Synt. 524 ff; agr’t 498; attrib. 492 a,d; w. indet. subj. 496a; w. gen. part. 559b,d; w. avrds airod 674; w. oios 816; w. yé 850, 1; of incorp. antec. 809.a. See Neuter.

Asclepiadean verse 920 f, g. Aspiration, rej. or transf. 65 ff; of lab.

or pal. 341. 387 b. 392 a.

Association, dat. 594. 602.

Asyndeton 854. .

Atona 103.

- Attic, dial. 3d; 2 deel. 146 ff 184. 210; ending 186; redup. 321. 332. 387; future 376.

357

| Attributive 488 ff, 492 d-h. 498. 512b.

523; appos. 500a; subj. om. 509;- w. article 526. 581 ff; w. cogn. ace. 547; w. ace. of specif. 549; part, 785 ff. 788 e; rel. sent. 807. 810.

Augment 307 ff. 355. 368 b.

Auxiliary, eiul 385. 392-3.

Bacchius 888; bacchic rhythms 928 ff.

Barytone 91 ff; stems 171. 179.

Basis 916. 923 a.

Boeotia, Aeolie of, 2.

Brachylogy 881.

Breathings 14 ff. 89.

Bucolic, poetry 3b, d; caesura 910,

Caesura 893. 67 Dd; masce., fem. 910.

Cardinal numbers 258. 255 ff.

Cases 115c¢; def, 201 ff;—Synt. 539 ff; of infin, 77 9ff; in rel. sent. 807 ff.

Case-endings 114. 154.

Catalectic verse 891.

Causal conjunctions 869 ff.

Causative, verbs 554; use of act. 686; use of mid. 689 b.

Cause, gen. 558. 566. 572 g. 577. 578 c. 592; dat. 594. 611. 782; circumst. part. 789c. 795 d,e; gen. abs. 790 ¢.

Characteristic, gen. 568.

Choliambus 904).

Choriambus 888; choriambic rhythms 924. [D. 128 D.

Chorus, as indiv. 519a; song 898 e. 86

Cirecumflex accent 89 ff. 88 e.

Circumstantial part. 787 ff. 800 a.

Classes of verbs 825 ff; 1st. 325. 331. 404 ff. 419 ff; 2d. 326. 872c¢. 386b. 887 a. 425 ff; 3d. 327. 427; 4th. 328. 428 ff; 5th. 329. 326. 331. 407. 435 ff; 6th. 330, 331. 332 a. 444 ff; 7th. 331. 448; 8th. 332. 408. 449; 9th. 333, 450.

Close vowels 10. 11. 27. 80. 82. 33. 67 Db. 171; stems in, 151. 185 ff. 4011,

Cognate, mutes 19; accus. 547 ff,

Collective subject 514.

Common, dialect 8¢e; quantity 87;

gender 118. Comparative, adj. 220ff. 174 ff; adv. 228 ff; = pos. 221D; from subst.

224D; pron. 247; ending 238a. 257. 259 ;—Synt. 659 ff; w. gen. 585. 581; w. # 586. 860b; w. dat. 610; w. inf, 768; conjunc. 875 ff,

Attraction 807 ff.

Completed action 262. $18. 695 ff, 715.

358

Composition of words 478 ff; -v in, 52; elision 71 ff; div. of syll. 84; reff. pron. 235; recipr. 237; indef. rel. 246. 251; prep. in comp. 614 ff. 620 ff. 544d. 685.

Compound words 452. 473 ff;—Subst. 130¢. 135. 172b. 180. 191;—Adj. 209. 217 c; w. gen. 584b, ¢;—Verbs, aug. 313 ff; redup. 823; accent 868; w. gen. 583; w. dat. 605 ;—Sentences 724 ff. 826 b. 856 b -—Negatives 832 ff. 843.

Concession, part. 789 f. 790 e. 795 f.

Concessive conjunctions 874.

Conclusion 744 ff. 874.

Concrete words, pl. for sing. 518 c.

Condition 744 ff. 783. 874; w. uh 885. 839; indet. 722a; infin. 770; part. 789e. 790d; part. w. dative 601a; part. w. & 803 a.

Conditional, sentences 744 ff. 728 ff. 835. 862b. 863.a; conjunctions 872 ff. 830.

Conjunctions 853 ff; crasis 68; syniz. 69; elision 70 b. 100; proclit. 103 ¢; wAhv 626r; in fin. sent. 739 ff; con- dit. sent. 744 ff; w. part. 794; rel. pron. for conj. 822.

Connecting vowels, acecus. 195i; loc. endings 203; verbs 346 ff. 267. 355 De; 6thel. 330; acc. 366 ff; pr. inf. 3871a; me-forms 400 h. 401 h, 1. 407 a. 409; iter. form. 410 D;—patronym. 466; compounds 478 a. [587 d.

Connection, gen. 558. 563, 572d. 576.

Consonants 16 ff; euphony 40ff; div. of syll. 82 ff; position 86 ff; stems in, 151. 157. 195 i. 324. 332. 334. 338.

Consonant-deciension 122. 151 ff. 195 ff. 211 ff. 36 b.

Contingent, &y 744. 710 b. 741. 878.

Continued action 262. 695 ff. 714.

Contraction 82 ff; crasis 68; quant. 88 f; accent 98 ;—in subst. 132. 144 ff. 147. 168. 174 ff. 176 ff. 180. 181 ff. 185 ff. 189 ff. 193 ;—in adj. 208. 214 D. 215. 221d;—in adv. 225;—in verbs 370 ff; aug. 312. 318; redup. 322; pass. sign 343; fut. 345. 373. 374 ff; opt. 848; plup. act. 351a; w. (c)at, (o)o, 363; mi-forms 400h, i, k. 401 ¢, k, 1; iter. 410 D ;—in forma- tion 455 a;—in verse 899.

*

ENGLISH INDEX.

Co-ordinate, mutes 20. 44;—sentences 724a. 751. 818 ¢. 853 a.

Copula 490a; omitted 508 a.

Copulative, forms wt. art. 530¢}; con- junc. 855 ff

Coronis 68.

Correlative, pron. 247; adv, 248.

Crasis 68 ff. 72; accent 99.

Crete, Doric of, 2.

Cretic 888. 900b; rhythms 922 ff,

Dactyl 888; dactylic rhythms 908 ff.

Dative 115 ¢; euph. 50. 70f. 79; accent 121. 149b. 160; in decl. 126. 129. 148. 150. 154. 159. 1955 gz for, 206 D; Synt. 594 ff; w. prep. 617 ff; w. inf. 77 63; W. Téos, Téov, 805; inf. as dat. 782: rel. sent, as dat. 810.

Declarative conjunctions 868.

Declension 114. 122; Ist. 123 ff; 2d. 138 ff; 3d. 151 ff; irreg. 197 ff.

Defectives 153Dn. 201ff; adj. 218. 223 D, 2, 5. 227 D; compar. 224; perf. 321D; perf. part. 318 D; aor. 345 D. 384 D.

Definitive apposition 500 d. 547 d.

Degree, of comparison 220 ff; of differ. ence, dat. 610.

Deliberation, subjunc. of, 720¢. 728 ff. 735 b. 737. 755.

Demonstratives (pron. and ady.) 239 ff. 247 ff ;—Synt. 678 ff. 669 c; as antec. 810a; w. art. 588a; w. interrog. 826a; w. 84 851; of ref. 491; agr’t 508 ;.art. as dem. 524 ff; rel. as dem. 525 B. 243.

Demosthenes, Attic of, 3 d.

Denominatives 453 ff; denomin. verbs 265. 315. 472.

Dependent, Sentences 724 ff. 853; ap- pos. 502; w. gen. 570. 582; subj. of part. 7 92 b; w. interrogatives 826 ; w. negatives 833. 835 ff; -—Questions 682. 825 ff. 830 ff. 836 :—Verbs w indir. refl. 670 a.

Deponent verbs 260; of w:-forms 401 k. 404; w. aor. pass. 413; w. passive meaning 415. 694; use 'of mid. 692.

Derivative verbs 265.

Descriptive apposition 500.

Desiderative verbs 472].

Designation, gen. 558. 561.

Determinative compounds 482,

‘|Diaeresis 18, 89.

ialect: ae dialectic formations, in verb 410ff.

_ Diastole 113a.

23D. 39. 67 Da. 86D. 87D. 54. 312 a. 473 a. 483 b.

- Diiambus 888. _ Dimeter 890; troch. 902b; iamb. 907

b; anap. 914.

Diminutives, suff. 465; neut. 117 ¢.

Diphthongs 11 ff. 14. 89; contraction

84; before p43; crasis 68a; syniz.

69; elision 70 D. 455 D; : quant? 86 ff;

stems 158 a. 189 ff; augm. 310.

Dipody 889.

Direct, compounds 477. 480; middle

688 : object 486. 544. 595. 684. 687;

question 682. 828 ff; sentence 734 ff

Disadvantage, dat. 596 ff,

Disjunctive, questions 831; tions 860 ff,

Dispondee 888.

Distich 898b; elegiac 911.

Distinction, gen. 581. 584 g.

Distributives 258 a.

Ditrochee 888.

Division, adverbs of, 258 ec.

conjunc-

A Dochmius, dochmiac rhythms, 928 ff. _ Doric, dialect 2.3b; future 377.

Double consonants 21. 22. 40. 86. 319 a; double object 553. oubling of cons. 40ff. 247 D. 308 D. * $19 D. 344D.

Doubtful vowels 7 ff. » Drama, Doric in, 3b. + Dual 115 b;—Synt. 511 b. 517. 521.

Duplication of contract vowel 870 Da,

Duration, gen. 567. 572 h.

Effect, acc. 546.

Elegiac (pentam.) 909i;

Elements of verb 306 ff.

Elision 70 ff; in div. of syll. 84b; ac- cent 100. 111 ¢; in formation 455 b.

Ellipsis 880. See Omission.

Emphatic ; enclit. 111 b. 232; pronouns 241. 242. 251.504 a. 667 ff. 673 ff. 680; negatives 845. 848 a. 858 ff; particles 850 ff. 860a; subj. of inf. 775 b; om. of art. 530c¢; prolepsis 726; place of ty 783 ¢.

distich 911.

_ _Enclitics 105 ff. _ Endings 114; 8 decl. 154; accented

160. 173; local 203 ff; adj. of two,

ENGLISH INDEX.

359

comp., sup. 220ff; 2388. 257. 259; verbs 354 ff. 400-01 ; suffixes 454 ff Epic dialect 3c. Epicoene 118.

Epitrite 888.

Epode 898 e.

Sipellenselias 331. 448.

Equivalents of subst. and adj. 492 ff.

Ethical dative 596. 599.

Euphony of vowels 24ff; consonants 40 ff; final sounds 67 ff.

Eupolidean verse 920i.

Euripides, Attic of, 3 d.

Exclamation, nom. 541; ace. 545; gen. 59205 rel, 815 2. 875 a.

Expectation, modes for, 720 ff. 128 ff. 747 ff. 760c¢; of answer 829.

Extent, acc. 550; gen. 567. 572 h.

Fearing, fin. sent. 748; w. ui od 846.

Feet, in verse, 888.

Feminine 115 a. 117b; 2 decl. 1389; 3 decl. 152 ff; adj. 207a,b. 211; wt. masc. 218D; irreg. 219; 2 pf. part. 338 D;—fem. caesura 910.

Figures of syntax 880 ff.

Final, sounds, euph. of, 67 ff;—cons, 74.ff;—vow., in compar. 222 ;—sen- tence 739ff. 728 ff. 835 ;—conjunc. 871 ;—syll. of verse 897.

Finite modes 261 a. 354; Synt. 719 ff; pred. 485; agr’t 497. 539 ff. 511 ff; subj. om. 504; w. amply, dsre, 771.

First tenses 266 a.

Fitness, adj. 469 a.

Formation of words 452 ff.

e.|Formative lengthening 28,

Fulness, adj. 470. See Plenty.

Future 262 ff. 266; tense-sign 344 ff; conn. vowel 3520, d; formation 372 ff; trans. 416 ;—Syntax 696. 710 ff. 12a. 718; univ. truth 697; pres. for, 699; subj. for, 720e; in rel. sent. 756; w. od uf 845 ;—Fut. mid. as act. or pass. 379. 412 ;—Fut. pass., endings 354 ff; formation 395 ff.

Future Perfect 262 ff. 266; redup. 318; tense-sign 344; formation 394; Synt, 696. 713. 712a. 718 a ; aor. subj. for, 747 a: 7600.

Galliambic verse 926 i, j.

Gender 115a. 117 ff. 139. 152 ff; het -erog. 200; adj. of one, 218 a. 221 £;

209 ff. 217; adj. of one, 218. 221le;

pecul. of synt. 511 ff.

360

Generic article 526. 529 ff.

Genitive 115 ¢; accent 121. 149b. 160; in decl. 126. 128. 136-7. 140. 142. 150. 154. 195; Sev for, 203 D; gx for, 206 D;—Synt. 557 ff; as attrib. or pred. noun 492e,h. 5098. 581; w. xdpy, dtienv, 552; w. caus. verb 554; w. dat. 595d; w. prep. 617 ff; w. compar. 660; w. poss. pron. 67 5b; w. inf. 776; w. part. 786 a; gen. abs. 790 ff; inf. as gen. 781; rel. sent. as gen. 810.

Gentiles, suff. 467; adj. 468 b.

Glyconic verse 917. 920-21.

Gnomic aorist 707.

Grave accent 89 ff.

Groups 889.

Hellas, Hellenes, 1.

Hellenistic dialect 4 f.

Hephthemimeris 889.

Herodotus, Ionic of, 3c.

Heroic hexameter 910.

Hesiod, Epic of, 3c.

Heteroclites 197. ,

Heterogeneous 200.

Hexameter 890; heroic 910.

Hexapody 889.

Hiatus 67; at end of verse 897.

Hippocrates, Ionic of, 3 ¢.

Hipponactean verse 900 m. 904j.

Historical tenses 263; endings 355 ff; present 699.

Homer, Epic of, 3c.

Hyperbaton 885.

Hypercatalectic verse 891 b.

Hypodiastole 113 a,

Hypothetical, indic. 746 b. 736 a. 755. 783 b. 803b; period 744 ff; rel. sent. 757 ff. 730. 835. 8389. ~

Tambus 888; iambic rhythms 908 ff.

Imperative 261 ; 3: of, 65 b; conn. vow. 849. 352; endings 358; accent 366; perf. act. 385; ju-form 400-01; fut. for, 710a; in simp. sent. 719. 723; in hyp. per. 745. 747. 751; in rel. sent. 755; inf. for, 784; w. ph 833; w. df 851.

Imperfect 262 ff. 266; aug. 307; 3 pl. mid. 355 De; formation 324 ff. 369 ff; pi-form 336 a. 399 ff; iter. 410 D; form. in & 411 D;—Synt. 696. 701 ff. 712a; in wish 721 b; for pres. 735a;

ENGLISH INDEX.

Impersonal verbs 494a. 504¢, d. 518 a, 575 a. 764b; part. 792; v. a. in réoy (réa) 804 ff; pers. for impers. 777.

Improper, diphthongs 11. 11b. 14, 89; hiatus 67 De; prepos. 614. 626,

Inceptive, class 330. 444 ff; aorist —

Incorporation 807 ff.

Indeclinable 245. 255. 853 b.

Indefinites (pron. and adv.) 247 ff, 244 ff. 236; enclit. 105;—Synt. 683 ;— indef. action 262. 695 ff; frequency 729b. 749 a. 760.¢; subj. of inf.-7'74.

Indefinite Relatives (pron. and ady.) 246 ff. 251. cf. 257 ;—Synt. 681 ff; as indefin. 816a; as interrog. 826 ff; Smws 876, 3.

Independent, nom. 542; sentence w, od, wh, 833 ff.

Indeterminate, condition 722a; subj. or obj. 494 ff. 504 d. 505 d. 509 c. 510 c. 513 ¢. 518 a. 563 b. 791 a. 792 b.

Indicative 261ff; conn. vow. 847b. 349 ff; endings 355 ff; tenses 696 ff; in simp. sent. 719. 721b; dep. sent. 727.'731a; indir. sent. 735 ; fin. sent. 742 ff; hyp. per. 745 ff; rel. sent. 755 ff. 1613 w. neg. 834 ff. B45,

Indirect, ‘compounds 478. 480; middle 689 ; object 486. 594 ff 765. 806 a3 4 questions 682. 733. 830ff; reflexiver 670 ff; sentences 733 ff. 730.

Inferential conjunctions 865 ff.

400-01 ;—Synt. 762 ff; w. subj. 485 c; w. obj. 486b; w. pred. noun 490 d; equiv. of subst. 493¢; as subj. 494a. 518a,b. 792a; om. 508¢; antec. of rel. 513.¢; w. nad réy 5250; w. Tod, of purpose 592b; w. pos. for - compar. 659; w. compar. 660¢; w. wéAdw 711; of aor. and fut. 717b. 718; w. thenov 721b; w. dep. sent. 425; in or. obl. 734¢, 788 ; for supp. part. 802; w. Téos 8040; w. rel. 818. 814; w. neg. 837 ff. 847.

Inflection 114 ff.

Influence, dat. 594 ff.

itial o 63. Insertion of mute 53. 392 D.

in hyp. per. 746.

Instrument, suff. 462; dat. 594. 60.

Infinitive 261; conn. vow. 349, 352d; endings 359; accent 367; mi-form —

Initial vowels 14, 15; crasis 68; syniz, . 69; elision 70; aug. 307. 312 ;—in- 1

_ quanti ‘90!

{nterest, dat. 594, 596 ff 689.

Interjection 543. 592 a.

Interrogatives (pron. and adv.) 244. 247 ff. cf. 257; Synt. 682. 825 ff; w. art. 538d; as pred. ace. 556; obxoty 866 a;—interrog. sentences 824 ff,

Intransitive verbs 486. 684 ff. 777 b; w. ace. 544 ff; w. dat. 595b; w. gen.

. as subj. 571; w. inf. as subj. 763 ;

mid. 690 a; pass. 694b; mixed sense, trans. and intr, 416 ff

Inverse attraction 817. [925 ff.

Tonic, dialect 2. 3c; feet 888; rhythms

Iota subscript, see « in Greek Ind.

Tota-class 328. 428 ff.

Irregular, decl. 197 ff; adj. 219; mean- ing in verb-forms 412 ff.

Ischiorrhogic, iambic 907 c.

Isocrates, Attic of, 3d.

Italy, Doric of, 2.

Iterative formation 410 D.

Ithyphalli¢ verse 900 c. 902 b.

Kindred, names in eds 145¢; accus, 547 a, b

Koppa 254,

Labials 19. 22. 48; aspirated 341. 387 b. 392a; labial stems 1520. 163 ff. 327. 828 a, b. 427. 429.

Lengthening of vowels 28 ff. 48 ff (362). 57. 156. 161. 214. 221; augm. 307; redup. 820; after Att. redup. 321; verb-stem 326. 425. 835 ff. 345. 372 b, 382; pass. sign 343. 347 D; perf. part. 360D; dw to ew 370Db; m- forms 400 m,n. 400 Di. 401b,n; in formation 455 d.

Lesbos, Aeolic of, 3a. [bers 258 ff.

Letters 5; names neut. 117 ¢; for num-

Likeness, dat. 594. 603.

Line, verses used by the, 898 a.

Linguals 19. 22; ling. stems 165 ff. 328 a, b. 386 a. 4805. ling. verbs 345.

Liquids 18. 22. 46. 48. 57 (340). 83a;

_ maute and liq. 87. 221 a. 227 D. 319b; —liq. stems 158b. 172 ff. 324. 328 ¢, d. 334a. 337; 1 perf. 386c; 1 pass. 396a; 4th class 432-3 ;—liq. verbs

. 16

ENGLISH INDEX.

361

824, 845. 394; fut. 373; 1 aor. 882;

1 pf. 886.4; pf. mid. 391.

Litotes 665 a.

Local, endings 208 ff; conjunc. 879.

See Place.

Locative case 205. 594.

Logaoedic rhythms 916 ff.

Long vowels 7 ff; contraction 82. 88;

syniz. 69; quant. 86 ff; accent 93 ff;

augment 309.

Lyric poetry 3a, b, d.

Lysias, Attic of, 8d.

Manner, adv. 248. 875 ff; dat. 594. 608 ff. 782; aor. part. q14 a; hyp. rel. sent. 7! 58 ff; supp. part. 801; gorw dws 812; quest. 824 ff.

Masculine 115 a. 117 a. 152ff; for fem. 209. 212a. 217 ff. 518d; dual 521; for neut. 513 ¢c. 559e; for person in gen. 520;—caesura 910. [b. 575.

Material, adj. 470; gen. 558. 560. 572

Means, suff. 462; dat. 594. 607. 782; part. 717 a. 789 b. 790 b.

Measure, gen. 558. 567. 572h.

Mental action, gen. 576. 584c.

Metaplastic 199.

Metathesis 57. 173. 840. 883 D. 886c. 894. 397 D. 398 D.

Metre 887.

Mi-forms 267. 858. 886; aor. subj. 347 D; opt. 348; endings 355 De. 356 ¢; inflection 399 ff; iter. 410 D.

Middle mutes 20, 22. 40. 87 b.

Middle voice 260. 343; conn. vow. 349 ff; endings 354 ff; fut. 379. 412;— Synt. 687 ff. 694. 806 b.

Mixed, class 333. 450; senses, trans. and intrans. 416 ff; forms of supposi- tion 750. [714 ff.

Modes 261. 719ff; tenses in, 697 ff

Mode-signs 346 ff. 357 a. 400i. 401i, 1

Modern Greek 4¢.

Molossus 888.

Monometer 890; monopody 889.

Motion, obj. 551; w. prep. 617 ff; w. adv. 879.

Movable letters 78 ff. ef. 70 g.

Multiplicatives 258b; w. gen. 5851.

Mutes 19. 20. 22. 44-5. 46, 47; and li- quid 87. 221 a. 227 D. 319b -—stems 158 ¢. 824. 326. 396b -—verbs 824 ; fut. 8720, 3875 ff; 1 perf. sire pf.

mid, 391.

362 . - ENGLISH INDEX.

Nasals 18. 22. 83a. 347, 852a, ¢ ;—na- sal class 329. 435 ff.

Nature, long by, 86.

| Negatives 80a, b. 252. 255; w. ud 545;

WwW. apxhy 5523 Ww. super. 665.a; w.

fut. for imper. 710a; w. imper. 723:

86; antec. 510. 810 ff; article 530, obj. after ud 545; vhs, vl, 571; Sei biba; % 660d. 769; av 746b. 748; subj. w. inf. 774 ff; part. w. ruyxdve 80la; before drws 756; in fin. sent. 739; hyp. per. 752 ff; rel. sent. 759. _

fearing 743; ef 8 ich after, 754b;| 819. 820; gen. abs. 791;—omission

purpose 781 a;—Neg. sentences 832 of thesis 895.

ff. 858 ff; foll. by aA” # 863¢; by|Open vowels 10. 11. 25. 27. 82.

drt wh 868 c. Opposition, dat. 602.

Neuter 115a. 117. 152 ff. 218; pl. w./Optative 261; mode-sign 846. 348; sing. verb 497 b. 515. 5111; in app.| conn. vow. 848. 349. 352b; endings w. sent, 502; attrib. 509¢c; for mase.| 357; accent 865. 95b; pf. act. 385; or fem. 522 ff; pronoun w. gen. 570.| pf. mid. 893; prform 400ff; aor. 582; verbal in réos 804b; relative} and fut. 717b. 718; in simp. sent. 813. 823 ;—neut. art. w. gen. 563b;|) ‘719. 721ff; dep. sent. 729 ff; indir.

w. inf. 778 ff. 837. 847; w. part. 786 b;—neut. adj., as adv. 226. 228; as cogn. acc. 547 ¢. 548; as adv. acc.

sent. 735ff; fin. sent. 739 ff; hyp. per. 748 ff; rel. sent. 755.757 ff; w. neg. 834 ff.

552a; w. gen. part. 559; -as degree |Oratio recta, obliqua, 734 ff. 749. 778 b.

of diff. 610. 836. 837 b. Nominative 115c. 70f. 128. 125. 186./Ordinals 253. 256. 257; w. acc. 550 c¢,;

141. 150. 154. 195. 197. 199;—Synt.| w. adrds 669 a.

589 ff; as subj. 485; agr’t 497; in|Orthography 5 ff.

app. w. sent. 501; w. inf. 775. 784 ;|Orthotone 105 b. 111.

w. Téos 804a; inf. as nom. 779; rel.|Oxytone 91 ff; stems 158b, e. 198.

sent. as nom. 810. Paeon 888. 922. d Notation of numbers 254. Palatals 19. 22. 48; aspir. 341. 387 b. Nouns 114 ff; of number 258d. 392a; pal. stems 152 0. 163 ff. 8328.a,b. Number 115b; heterog. 200; defective|Paroemiac Spas 913 e. 914. 915; loga-

201; in verbs 261a; pecul. of syntax! oedic 917 g, h.

511 ff;—words of, 247. 258d. 259;/Paroxytone 91 ff.

w. art. 528a; w. gen. 559. Participle 261. 156 b. 158 f. 160a, 214 Numerals 253 ff; w. prep. 493f; w.art.| ff; 2 pf. 8838D; conn. vow. 349. 352

5283 w. of wdvres 587. {f: endings 360. 862; accent 367; Object 486, 493 d; indet.495; om.505;| pf. w. efuf 385. 392 ff. 7133, w-form

accus. 544; of motion 551; double 553; w. cogn. ace. 555; w. pred. ace. 556; gen. 573 ff; w. inf. or part. 762b; as subj. of inf. 776; w. supp. part. 796; w. réos, Téov, 804. 806; inf. as obj. 764 ff; quest. 824 ff. See Direct, Indirect.

400 ff;—Synt. 785 ff. 762; w. obj. 486b; w. pred. noun 490d; equiv. of adj. 492c,d; agrt 498; om. 508 c; attrib, 531 ff; w. dat. of interest 601a; compar. 666; neut. pass. 694 b; aor. and’ fut. H14. 718; w. dep. sent, 725; in or. obl. 734¢; w. réos

Objective, compounds 480. 479; gen. 558. 565. 572 f. 677.

Obliqua, see Oratio.

Oblique cases 116; as obj. 486.

804a; w. interrog. 826; w. neg. 839. 841; w. wép 850, 3. Particles 849 ff; accent 112.105d; w. indef. rel. 251; of wishing 721a,b; — Odes of Pindar 898 e. adjuncts of part. 795; interrog. 828 Omission, of diaer. 13a; vowels 38ff;| ff; neg. 832 ff. aug. 307 D. 309 D. 311: a; redup. 318 Partitive, appos. 500b; gen. 558 ff, D; cons. of redup. 319; tense-sign| 571. 572a. 574. 337 . 845; stem-vowel 339; endings|Passive voice 260. 264; w. o 342; pass 361 ff;—of subj., pred., obj. 504ff.| sign 348; aor. opt. 848; conn. vow

e

ed

‘ 3; endings 354 ff; formation 395

ff; in dep. verbs 413. 415; as mid. 414;—Synt. 693ff; w. indet. subj.

494; w. acc. 553.555. 595 a; w. nom. for acc. 556; w. dat. of agent 600;

ww. prep. 624¢. 653 b. 656b; w. inf.

as subj. 763.

Past time 268. 307. 696. 698 ff.

Patronymics, suff. 466.

Pause, caesural 893; at end of verse

- 897; in sense 86 D.

Pentameter 890; elegiac 911.

Pentapody 889.

Penthemimeris 889.

Penult 85 b.

Perfect 262 ff. 266 ff; redup. 318 ff; ac- cent 367; formation 385 ff;—Synt. 696, 712. 715; univ. truth 697; pres. for, 698; aor. for, 706.

Perfect Active; part. 216. 353. 791c¢; stem-vow. 334. 338 ; cons. aspir. 341 ; tense-sign 344ff; mode-sign 348; conn. vow. 350; w. pres. form 350 D. 859 D. 8360 D; pi-form 267. 3538 b. 399 ff. 409; intrans. 416 ff.

Perfect, Middle; euph. 51; w. o 342; 2 sing. 363; 3 pl. 355 D e ;—Passive, w. indeterm. subj. 494; w. dat. of agent 600.

_ Periphrastic fut. w. wéAAw 711. Perispomenon 91 ff.

Person 230 ff. 261 a. 354 ff; subj. 485 a. 504; rel. subj. 508a; two or more subj. 511; 1 pl. for sing. 518d; 3d for 1st, 2d, 672; person in gen. 504 ¢. 505 c. 520.

Personal, pron. 230 ff. 667 ff. 671. 675; for rel. 818 d; equiv. of subst. 493b; gen. w. art. 538 a; as eth. dat. 599; —endings 354 ff;—constr. for impers. "77; constr. w. réos 804 ff.

Phalaecean verse 917 q.

Pherecratean verse 917. 920-21.

Phoenician alphabet 6c.

Pindar, Dor. 3b; odes 898 e.

Place, adj. 224 D. 536. 587 f;—adv. 56. 79 y. 248 ff. 589. 590. 879 ;—endings 203 ff; names 214D; suff. 463; de- sign. wt. art. 530b; gen. 590. 559; dat. 594. 612; w. prep. 620 ff; dem. pron. 678 a; in rel, expr. 812. 813 a; hyp. rel. sent. 758 ff; quest. 824 ff

Plato, Attic of, 3d, cf. Rem.

INDEX. . 863

Plenty, gen. 575. 584 b.

Pleonasm 884,

Pluperfect 262 ff. 266; aug. 307. 811; redup. 318; conn. vow. 351. 853; 2 sing. 863; 3 pl. 355 De. 356 c; for- mation 385 ff; us-form 399 ff ;—Synt. 696. 706. 712a; in wish 721b; in. hyp. per. 746 ;—plup. pass. 494. 600.

Plural 115 b; w. sing. vb. 497 b. 515 ff; pl. and sing. 514 ff; pl. and dual 517 ; pl. for sing. 518.

Polyschematist rhythms 921 a. 926 m.

Position, long by, 86. 221 a. 227 D. 319.

Positive 220 ff. 659. [598 a.

Possession, gen. 558. 562. 572¢. 587 ¢.

Possessive pron. 238. 675 ff; w. art. 5388c; art. as, 527d;—poss. com- pounds 481.

Possessor, dat. 596. 598.

Possibility, w. superl. 664b ; modes 719 ff. 728 ff. 747 ff. 760 d. 771.

Postpositive 849.

Potential opt. 722. 730. 785 ¢. 748. 752. 755. 783 a. 808 a.

Praepositive 849.

Praxillean verse 918 g.

Predicate 485; w. acc. of specif. 549; om. 508;—pred. noun 488 ff; agr’t 498-9, 511 ff. 518. 522 ff; om. 507; subj. om. 506; w. attrib. part. 5324; w. art. 585 ff; in nom. 540; in ace. 556; in gen. 572. 568; in dat. 607; w. inf. 773 ff. 784; inf. as pred. 763; interrog. 826a; v. a. in réos 804 ff; pred. part. 787 ff.

Predication, incomplete 490. 572.

Prepositions, crasis 68; elis.70b; apoc. 73D; accent 100. 102. 103b; w. pron, 232. 243D; tmesis 255; aug. 313 ff; in comp. 474. 477. 482. 544d. 583. 605. 685 ;—Synt. 614 ff; w. obj. 486 a; w. case, for adj. or subst. 492 g, h. 498 f. cf. 488c; bef. 6 wév, 6 54, 525 a; bef. words wt. art. 530 b; w. adrds abrod 674; w. inf. 780 ff; om. in rel. sent. 820; w. yé 850, 1.

Present 262 ff. 266 ff; formation 324 ff. 869 ff; conn. vow. 352; endings 355 De; pi-form 267. 336 a. 358 b. 399 ff; —Synt. 696 ff. 714. 702. 707. 712; imper. w. wh 723.

Priapean verse 920 h.

Primitive verbs 265 ff.

364

Principal, dialects 2; tenses 263. 355 ff; sentences 724 ff. 823 b; verbs, w. inf. or part. 768 ff. 787 ff.

Probability 747.771.

Proceleusmatic 888.

Proclitics 108 ff.

Prolepsis 726. 777 a, b.

Pronoun 230 ff. 667 ff; enclit. 105; di- astole 113a; of ref. 491; adj. pron. 492b; subst. pron. 493b; w. indet. subj. 496 a; app. w. sent. 502 a; om. 504 a, b. 505 b; w. art. 538; w. vé 850,1; w. 54 851. See Neuter, Ref- erence, ” Personal, ete.

Pronunciation 9. 11 a, b. 12b, c. 18. 14. 16. 17. 21. 86a.

Proparoxytone 91 ff.

Proper names 126a. 136 d. 146 D. 172 b. 180. 189 D. 198; attrib. app. 500a; nation as sing. 519b; with or with- out art. 530 a.

Properispomenon 91 ff.

Prosodiac verse 913 c; logaoedic 917i,j.

Protasis 732. 744.

Protracted class 326. 425 ff.

Protraction of vowels 28 ff. 335 ff.

Punctuation 113. 67 De.

Pure vowels and syllables 85a; a pure 126. 180d. 168 D;—pure verbs 324. 845a. 872 b. 374. 886. 393 a, 8396D; w. added o 342. 390. 896 a, 421. See Vowel-stems.

Purpose 710c. 739 ff. 756; inf. 592b. 781a. 765.770; fut. part. 789d; w. ph 835.

Pyrrhic 888.

Quality, pronouns of, 241. 247 ; suffixes 461 b. 464.

Quantity, of vow. 86 ff. 130 ff. 161. 190 f, 207 a. 8392 D ;—pron. of, 241, 247.

Radical verbs 265.

Reality 719 ff. 727. 742 ff. 745 ff. 771.

Recessive accent 97. 179. 365.456.

Reciprocal pron. 237. 672 b.

Reduplicating class 332. 349.

Reduplication 318 ff. 65a. 311. 368b; in 2 aor. 384; in 8th class 382. 449; in 6th class 444. _

Reference, pron. of, 491; agr’t 503. 512 ff. 522 ff; antec. implied 523 b, c. See Demonstrative, Relative.

Reflexive pron. 235. 233 D (288 a) ;—

SNGLISH INDEX.

493b; w. art. 5388 a3; w. compar 660a; w. mid. 688 a,

Relatives (pron. and adv.) 248. 247 ff, 250. 68; Synt. 681. 491. 755 ff. 807 ff; agr’t 503. 513b; antec. om. 510; af ter art. 525¢; as demonst. 243. 525 B; as interrog. 825b; as conj. 853 b; w. particles 866. 251; w. wep 850, 8; w. 64 851; art. as rel. 243 D;— rel. sentences 755 ff. 807 ff. 728 ff. 710 c. 504.¢, d. 862b. See Indefinite Rel- atives, and Reference.

Resolution in verse 892.

Respect, dat. 609. 767 a.

Restrictive article 526 ff.

Result, suffixes 461; infin. 770

Rhythm 887.

Romaic language 4 ¢.

Roman letters, for Greek, 5. 12. 15. 16.

Root 265, 222.

Rough, breathing 14 ff. 80 a. 310 a. 332; mutes 17. 20. 22. 40. 65a. 319. 338, Sampi 254. [917 r. Sappho, Aeolic of, 3a; Sapphic verse

Scazon 900 m. 902 a. 904j. 906 a,

Second tenses 266 a. 423-4, 428, 432.

Secondary dialects 2.

Semivowels 18. 22. 40.

Sensation, gen. 576. 584 c.

Sentence 485 ff. 724 ff; equiv. of subst. 493 d; as subj. 494 a. 504c¢, d. 518b; in appos. 501 ff; connected by conj. 853 ff. See Simple, Compound, De- pendent, etc.

Separation, gen. 580. 584 f.

Sharing, gen. 574. 584 a.

Short vowels 7 ff; interchange 25; con-

traction 32; elision 70. 242; quant.

86ff; accent 93 ff; retained in verb- inflection 419 ff.

Sibilant 18. 22.

Sicily, Doric of, 2.

Simple, vowels 34. 43; correl. 247;

words 452ff; sentence 485. 719ff;

suppos. 745.

Singular 115b; vb. w. pl. subj. 497 b.

515 ff; sing. and pl. 514 ff; sing. for

pl. 519. 683 b.

Size, correl. 247. [40. 72.

Smooth, breathing 14 ff; mutes 20. 22,

Sonant letters 20a,.22a, -

Sophocles, Attic of, 3d.

Synt. 670 ff 668; equiv. of subst.

Source, gen. 5682,

ee ee

"Stem 114. ‘116. 265. 324 ff; stem-class

‘Strophe 898 d, e. Subject 485. 489; indet. 494. 496; agr’t

Subjective, gen. 558. 564. 572e; mid.

‘Syllabic augment 307 ff.

iy 8 ondaic hexam. 909 k.

825.419 ff. Stigma 5b. 254.

A497. 539; omitted 504, 506. 509. 786. 791 a; two or more 511 ff; collect- ive B14; of pass. 6933 w. inf, 773 £6 784; w. supp. part. 196; sentence as subj. 493d. 494a; gen. as subj. 571; ‘inf. as subj. 763; questions 824 ff _ See Indeterminate, Sentence, Verb, Attributive, etc. [ 690.

Subjunctive 261; mode-sign 346 ff; endings 357. 361D; perf. act. 385; pf. mid. 393; u:-form 400 ff; in simp. sentences 719 ff. 723; depend. sent. 728 ff; indir. sent. 735 ff; final sent. 739 ff; hypoth. per. 747 ff; rel. sent. 755. 757 ff; indir. questions 830; w. neg. 833. 845.

Subordinate sentence 724 ff. 818 b. 853. See Dependent.

Subscript, see? in Greek Ind.

Substantives 114ff; compar. 224D; formation 457ff; compos. 4738 ff; qualified 487 ff; equiv. 493; subst. pron. 493b; in agr’t 498-9; qualify- ing, in ace. 547d; w. gen. 558 ff. 587e; w. two gen. 569; w. dat. 595 d. 596ff; w. inf. 767; w. uh 840; inf. as subst. 762. 778 ff.

Suffixes 265. 454 ff.

Superlative 220 ff. 228 ff (cf. 257. 259); —Synt. 663 ff; w. gen. 559. 586c¢; w. dat. of diff. 610; w. év rots 627; w. 64 851.

Supplementary participle 787. 796 ff.

Supposition, varieties 745 ff.

Surd letters 20a. 22 a.

Swearing, particles 852, 10,14; w. acc. 545; gen. w. mpds 653 a.

Syllables 81 ff; quant. 86 ff; acc. 89 ff. Syncope 388. 173. 884; of ‘thesis 895.

901. 905. 920. [D b. Synizesis 87. 69. 128Db. 136Db. 870

Syntax 485 ff.

365

Systems. of tenses 266. 869 ff; in verse 897 b. 898 ¢.

Tau-class 327. 427.

Temporal, aug. 807 ff; conjunc. S77 ff. 706. See Time.

Tenses 262 ff. 695 ff.735 a. See First, Second, Principal, Historical, Pres-

"ent, ete.

Tense-siens 344 ff. 837. 878.

Tense-stem 345 ff.

Tense-systems, see Systems.

Tetrameter 890; troch. catal. 902a; jamb. cat. 907 a; anap. cat. 915.

Tetrapody 889.

Theocritus, Doric of, 3b.

Theophrastus, dial. of, 3 e.

Thesis 894. ff.

Thessaly, Aeolic of, 2.

Thucydides, Attic of, 3d, cf. Rem.

Time, adj. 470; adv. 248. 877 ff. 879; design. wt. art. 530b; ace. 550; gen. 591; dat. 594. 613; w. prep. 620 ff; tenses 695 ff; hyp. rel. sent. 758 ff; part. 788. 795 a, b,c; gen. abs. 790a; rel. expr. 812. 8138a; questions 824 ff; Sco od 848 d.

Tmesis 255. 477. 616.

Tragedy, Attic of, 3 d, cf. Rem.

Transitive verbs 486. 684 ff. 777b; w. acc. 544 ff; w. two acc. 553 ff; w. dat. 595a; adj. w. gen. 587 a; mixed senses 416 ff.

Transposition, see Metathesis.

Tribrach 888.

Triemimeris 889. [907 b.

Trimeter 890; iambic 906; iamb. cat.

Tripody 889.

Trochee 888; trochaic rhythms 899 ff. 916 d. 925 a.

Ultima 85 b; accented in decl. 121. 160.

Unlikeness, dat. 603.

Value, gen. 567. 572 h. 578. 577 b. 584e.

Variation of vowels 334. 383. 386 c. 387 a. 397 a.

Vau 23 D, see Digamma.

Verbals 453 ff; noun, w. acc. 544e3 adj., see rés, véos, in Greek Ind,

Verbs 260ff; denom. 265. 472. 478; comp. a7 ff: omittede508. 754. 819; subj. om. 504; obj. om. 505; w. gen. 570 ff; w. dat. 595 ff; w. rel. 818, See Fi nite, Impersonal, Transitive, Intrans., Pure, Liquid, ete.

366

Verses 890. Versification 887 ff.

Vicarious lengthening 31.

Vocative 115c. 119b. 127. 185. 141. 154. 155, 158.172 b; Synt. 548. 541.

Voices 260. 412 ff, 684 ff.

Vowels 7 ff; euphony 24 ff; metath. 57. 340; w. o 63 ff; pure 85a; quant. 86 ff; accent 89ff; variation 334; lengthening 335 ff; omission 338. See Long, Short, Clow, Open, Con- necting, etc.

ENGLISH INDEX.

Vowel-decl. 86a. 122. 150. 195 ff. 207 ff; —Vowel-stems 154.D b. 157. 195i, 824, 335 ff; 4th class 328 e. 484; w. added o 342. 421; made by transp. 386 c. 394.

Want, gen. 575. 584b.

Way, adv. 248,

Whole, gen. 558 ff.

Wishing 721. 7538. 884. 870¢.

Xenophon, Attic of, 3d.

Zeugma 882.

‘D. APPLETON 4 00. g oi agpaadategileee

ay

de om ~ Amold’s (rose ae

Revised, Corrected, and Improved, by the Rev. J. A, SPENCER, D.D., late Professor of Latin and Oriental Languages in Burlington Col- lege, N. J.

FIRST GREEK BOOK, on the Plan of the First Latin Book. 12mo, 254 pages.

PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 12mo, 2837 pages.

SECOND PART TO THE ABOVE. 12mo, 248 pages.

GREEK READING BOOK. Containing the substance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Construing, and a Treatise on the Greek Particles; also, copious selec- tions from Greek Authors, with Critical and cinemas English Notes, and a Lexicon. 12mo, 618 pages.

a A complete, thorough, practical and easy Greek course is here presented. The beginner commences with the “ First Book,” in which the elementary principles of the language are unfolded, not in abstract language, difficult both to comprehend and to remember, but as practically applied in sentences: Throughout the whole, the pupil sees just where he stands, and is taught to use and apply what he learns. His progress is, therefore, as rapid as it is intelligent and pleasant. There is no unneces- sary verbiage, nor is the pupil’s attention diverted from what is really important by a mass of minor details. It is the experience of teachers who use this book, that with it a given amount of Greek Grammar can be imparted to a pupil in a shorter time and with far less trouble than with any other text-book.

The “First Book” may with advantage be followed by the “Introduction to Greek Prose Composition.” The object of this work is to enable the student, as soon as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable facility, to translate simple sentences after given examples and with given words; the principles employed being those of imitation and very frequent repetition. Itis at once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise book. The “Second Part” carries the subject further, unfolding the most complicated constructions, and the nicest points of Latin Syntax. <A Key is provided for the teacher’s use.

The “ Reader,” besides extracts judiciously selected from the Greek classics, contains

+ yaluable instructions to guide the learner in translating and construing, and a complete exposition of the particles, their signification and government. It is a fitting sequel to the earlier parts of the course, everywhere showing the hand of an acute critic, an accomplished scholar, and an experienced teacher.

From the Rrvy. Dr. Coteman, Professor of Greek and. Latin, Princeton, N. J.

“TJ can, from the most satisfactory experience, bear testimony to the excellence of your series of Text-Books for Schools. Iam in the daily use of Arnold’s Latin and Greek Exercises, and consider them decidedly superior to any other Elementary Works in those Languages.”

D. APPLETON & C028 PUBLICATIONS.

Short and Comprehensive Greek Grammar.

By J. T. CHAMPLIN, Professor of Greek and Latin in Waterville College. 12mo, 208 pages.

In compiling this Grammar, Professor Champlin has drawn upon the best critics and grammarians, and with the results of his research has interwoven much original mat- ter suggested during several years’ experience in teaching, and editing Greek authors, His design is to exhibit the essential facts and principles of the language in the clear- est, briefest, and most practicable form possible. With this view, all theories and complications belonging to general grammar have been avoided, and only their results used, The amplification and illustration of principles have been carried only so far as is necessary to their comprehension. In this way all the real wants of the Greek student are met, while his attention is not distracted by unnecessary and embarrassing details, Materials for oral exercises are supplied, and a sketch of Greek versification fis given in an appendix.

From the Rry. Mr. Anprrson, Vew Orleans.

“T believe the’author has fully atcomplished what he proposes in his preface, To those wishing to study Greek, I am satisfied he has presented a book which will much tend to simplify the study to beginners; and at the same time, without being too voluminous, presents as lucid and full an exposition of the principles of the language as can be containeé within so small a compass.”

Kihner’s Greek Grammar:

Translated by Professors EDWARDS and TAYLOR. Large 12mo, 620 pages.

Kiihner’s is universally acknowledged to be the most accurate, comprehensive, clear, and practical grammar of the Greek language now extant. It is the work of one who devoted his life to Greek philology, and spent years of patient labor in perfecting this work. Too full and learned for the beginner, it is just what is needed for the college curriculum, containing all that a book of reference should contain. The student

will never appeal to its pages in vain. In fulness of illustration, copiousness of ~

reference, and philosophical analysis of the various forms of language, it is unsurpassed, we might say unequalled.

The present translation is made by two distinguished American scholars, who haye revised the whole, verified th. references, and appended an original treatise of their own on Greek yersification. As now presented to the public, it is believed to be as perfect a grammar of the Greck language as enlightened research and profound scholarship can produce,

1 7 4 i

D. APPLETON & €0’S PUBLICA TIONS.

= Greg Ollendorff; -

Being a Progressive AS of the Principles of the Greek Grammar, By ASAHEL C. KENDRICK, Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in the University of Rochester. 12mo, 371 pages.

The present work is what its title indicates, strictly an Ollendorff, and aims to apply the methods which have proved so successful in the acquisition of the modern languages to the study of Ancient Greek, with such differences as the different genius of the Greek, and the different purposes for which it is studied, suggest. It differs from the modern Ollendorfts in containing Exercises for reciprocal translation, in confining them within a smaller compass, and in a more methodical exposition of the principles of language.

The leading object of the author was to furnish a book which should serve as an introduction to the study of Greek, and precede the use of any grammar. It will therefore be found, although not claiming to embrace all the principles of the Gram- mar, yet complete in itself, and will lead the pupil, by insensible gradations, from the simpler constructions to those which are more complicated and difficult. The excep- tions, and the more idiomatic forms, it studiously avoids, aiming only to exhibit the regular and ordinary usages of the language as the proper starting-point for the student's further researches.

In presenting these, the author has aimed to combine the strictest accuracy with the utmost simplicity of statement. His work is therefore adapted to a younger class of pupils than have usually engaged in the study of Greek, and will, itis hoped, win to the acquisition of that noble tongue many in our academies and primary schools who have been repelled by the less simple character of our ordinary text-books.

‘Exercises in Greek Composition. Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon’s Anabasis. By JAMES R. BOISE, Professor of Greek in the neste of Michigan. 12mo, 185 pages.

These Exercises consist of easy sentences, similar to those in the Anabasis, having the same words and constructions, and are designed by frequent repitition to make the learner familiar with the language of Xenophon. Accordingly, the chapters and sec- tions in both are made to correspond. No exercises can be more improving than those in this volume; obliging the student as they do, by analysis and synthesis, to master the constructions employed by one of the purest of Greek writers, and imbuing him with the spirit of one of the greatest historians of all antiquity

D. APPLETON & CO/8S PUBLICATIONS.

Xenophon’s Anabasis : ‘

With Explanatory Notes for the use of Schools and Colleges in the United States. By JAMES R. BOISE, Professor of Greek in the University of Michigan, 12mo, 393 pages.

A handsome and convenient edition of this great classic, really adapted to the wants of schools, has long been needed; the want is here met by Professor Boise in a manner that leaves nothing to be desired. Decidedly the best German editions, whether text or commentary be considered, have appeared within the last few years; and of these Mr. Boise has made free use; while, at the same time, he has not lost sight of the fact that the classical schools of this country are behind those of Germany, and that simpler and more elementary explanations are therefore often necessary in a work prepared’ for American schools, Nothing has been put in the notes for the sake of a mere display of learning—pedantry is out of place in a school-book; and nothing has been introduced by way of comment except what can be turned to practical use by the reader.

An historical Introduction, which will enable the pupil to enter on his task intel- ligently, is prefixed. An abundance of geographical information, embodying the latest discoveries of travellers, is supplied; and the whole is illustrated with Kiepert’s excel- lent map, showing the entire route of the ten thousand on their retreat.

The First Three Books of Anabasis ;

With Explanatory Notes and References to Hadley and Kiihner’s Greek Grammars, and to Goodwin’s Greek Moods and Tenses. A copious Greek-English Vocabulary, and Kiepert’s Map of the Route of the Ten Thousand. 12mo, 268 pages. ;

Xenophon’s Memorabilia of Socrates :

With Notes and an Introduction. By R. D. C. ROBBINS, Professor of Languages in Middlesex College, Vermont. 12mo, 421 pages.

This will be found an exccedingly useful book for College classes. The text is large and distinct, the typography accurate, ani the notes judicious and scholarly. Instead ‘ of referring the student to a variety of books, few of which are within his reach, the editor has wisely supplied whatever is necessary. An admirably treatise on the Life of Socrates introduces the work, and English and Greek Indexes render it easy to refer to the text and notes,

pology and Crito ; tes, By W.S. TYLER, Graves Professor of Greek in Amherst ye. 12mo, 180 pages.

lt want among students of the Dialogues of Plato, now mostly in Academic Courses. It is in the main an exact reprint of um’s Third Edition—though the author has had before him, and _ used, whenever it seemed best, the editions of Bekker, Forster, Ast, Schleier- macher, and others. The Notes are particularly full and clear; and errors ae text have been guarded against with the very greatest care.

"From J. B. Garrirr, Professor of Greek, Hanover (Ind.) College.

“J can most heartily say that I am much pleased with the book. Prof. Tyler seems to have hit the happy medium between too profuse and too scanty notes; and also to have known the kind of notes needed in our American institutions, better than the great majority of those who have given us editions of the ancient classics. I have adopted the work this year, in place of the Georgias, and anticipate much pleasure in refding it in connection with the class.”

From Jacos Coorprr, Pu.D., Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in Centre College, Danville, Ky.

“T have examined Prof. Tyler’s edition of the ‘ Apology and Crito,’ and am highly pleased with its execution. It bears the marks of the editor’s well-known scholarship, and is an acceptable addition to our college text-books. The typography is also accu- rate and very beautiful. I purpose to introduce it into Centre College.”

From Atrrevs 8, Packarn, Professor of the Greek Language, Bowdoin College. “T received, a short time since, Plato’s Apology and Crito, edited by Prof. Tyler. Iam much pleased with the edition, and shall introduce it into my classes as soon as I have opportunity. Ihave no doubt it will prove a most acceptable addition to the . classics read in our colleges.”

From W. H. Youre, Dept. Anct. Languages, Ohio University, Athens, “Tt will meet a pressing want with us, and shall be introduced at once. The type is beautiful indeed, and the earnest teacher of the classics needs no better recommend- ation of a text-book than the name of Prof. Tyler.”

From the New York Observer.

_ “A valuable service to classical learning and letters in general has been rendered by Prof. Tyler, in giving to the American student this edition of Plato’s Apology and Crito. Hitherto, the scholars of our country have had no access to this work of Plato, except in foreign editions, or as in fragmentary form they found it in the old and now obsolete Greca Majora. It is now placed within their reach, in a form both convenient and beautiful, and accompanied by such notes and illustrations as to remove all serious difficulties in ascertaining the meaning of the text. One of the most valuable features

this edition is the introduction, which occupies some forty pages, and contains a and scholarly analysis of the Defence of the great philosopher before his judges, who had already determined on his death.”

D. APPLETON & C0O/S PUBLICATIONS.

Selections from Herodotus ;

Comprising mainly such portions as give a Connected History of the

_ East to the Fall of Babylon and the Death of Cyrus the Great.

By HERMAN M. JOHNSON, D.D., Professor of Philosophy and English Literature in Dickinson College. 12mo, 185 pages,

The present selection embraces such parts of Herodotus as give a connected his: tory of Asiatic nations. These portions are not only particularly interesting in them- selves, but open to the student a new field, inasmuch as the other Greek and Roman authors commonly put into his hands leave this period of history untouched.

Herodotus is peculiarly adapted to academical reading. It has charms for the student which no other text-book possesses, on account of the simple elegance of the style and the liveliness of the narrative. In preparing his notes, the editor has borne in mind that they are intended for learners in the earlier part of their classical course; he has therefore made the explanations in the former part of the work quite full, with frequent references to such grammars as are in the hands of most students.

The notes proper are purely explanatory and grammatical. Other remarks, in the way of criticism or investigation, are appended to the several chapters, for the sake of awakening reflection and inciting to further inquiry.

A condensed treatise on the Ionic Dialect, and the peculiar forms of declension and conjugation used by Herodotus, removes one of the most serious difficulties that has heretofore embarrassed the student in reading this author. If this chapter is learned in advance, the dialectic forms, otherwise so troublesome, will be recognized without the slightest difficulty.

The text is printed in large, bold type, and accompanied with a Map of the regions described.

Sophocles’ Gidipus Tyrannus.

With English Notes, for the use of Students in Schools and Colleges. By HOWARD CROSBY, A.M., Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in the New York University. 12mo, 138 pages.

The object had in view in this publication is to furnish to college-students the masterpiece of the greatest of Greek tragic poets in a convenient form. No learned criticism on text was needed or has been attempted. The Tauchnitz edition has been chiefly followed, and such aid is rendered, in the way of notes, as may assist, not render needless, the efforts of the student. Too much help begets indolence; too little, despair; the author has striven to present the happy mean.

The inviting appearance of the text and the merit of the commentary have made this volume a favorite wherever it has been used.

D. APPLETON & CO/S PUBLICATIONS.

“STANDARD WORKS,

Gesenius’ Hebrew Grammar.

Seventeenth Edition, with Corrections and Additions py Dr. E. Réprazr. “Translated by T. J. CONANT, Professor of Hebrew in Rochester Theological Seminary, New York. 8vo, 361 pages.

The present edition of Gesenius’ standard Hebrew Grammar has been

carefully translated from the seventeenth German edition, recently published,

after a careful revision by the learned Rédiger. In its present improved

_ State, it embodies all that is known of Hebrew philology.

A course of grammatical exercises, to aid the learner in acquiring and applying a knowledge of the elementary principles of reading and inflec. tion, and in the analysis of forms, has been appended by Professor Conant. To these is added a Chrestomathy, consisting of grammatical and exegetica. notes on numerous reading-lessons selected from Scripture, suited to the wants of the student. Great pains have been taken to insure correctness in the text; and, throughout the whole volume, nothing calculated to facilitate the learner’s progress has been overlooked or omitted.

Uhlemann’s Syriac Grammar. Translated from the German, by ENOCH HUTCHINSON. With «a

Course of Exercises in Syriac Grammar, and a Chrestomathy and

Brief Lexicon prepared by the Translator. 8vo, 367 pages.

Uhlemann’s Grammar holds the same rank in relation to the Syriac language that Gesenius’ does to Hebrew. It is not only the most accurate and comprehensive Syriac Grammar yet compiled, but the clearest in its arrangement and explanations, and the best adapted to the student’s wants. The translator has enhanced its value by the addition of copious exercises and an admirable Chrestomathy.

D. APPLETON & COlVS PUBLICATIONS.

Ollendorft ’s Italian Grammars:

Primary Lessons in Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Ital- ian Language. Introductory to the Larger Grammar. By G. W. GREENE. 18mo, 238 pages. ;

Ollendorff’s New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Italian Language. With Additions and Corrections. By E. FELIX FORESTI, LL.D. 12mo, 588 pages.

Key. Separate Volume.

?

In Ollendorff’s grammars is for the first time presented a system by which the student can acquire a conversational knowledge of Italian. This will recommend them to practical students; while at the same time there is no lack of rules and principles for those who would pursue a systematic grammatical course with the view of translating and writing the language.

Prof. Greene’s Introduction should be taken up by youthful classes, for whom it is specially designed, the more difficult parts of the course being left for the larger volume.

The advanced work has been carefully revised by Prof. Foresti, who has made such emendations and additions as the wants of the country required. In many sections the services of an Italian teacher cannot be obtained; the Ollendorff Course and Key will there supply the want of a master in the most satisfactory manner.

Italian Reader.

A Collection of Pieces in Italian Prose, designed as a Reading-Book for Students of the Italian Language. By E. FELIX FORESTI, LL.D. 12mo, 298 pages.

In making selections for this volume, Prof. Foresti has had re- course to the modern writers of Italy rather than to the old school of novelists, historians, and poets; his object being to present a picture of the Italian language as it is written and spoken at the present day. The literary taste of the compiler, and his judgment as an instructor, have been brought to bear with the happieg results in this valuable Reader.

a

oe

D. APPLETON & 00.8 PUBLICATIONS.

‘Virgil's 1 23) 0 le aa | ‘ With Explanatory Notes. By HENRY S. FRIEZE, Professor of Latin in the State University of Michigan. (Illustrated. 12mo, 598 The appearance of this edition of Virgil’s Aineid will, it is be- lieved, be hailed with delight by all classical teachers. Neither expense nor pains have been spared to clothe the great Latin epic in a fitting dress. The type is unusually large and distinct, and errors in the text, so annoying to the learner, have been carefully avoided. The work contains eighty-five engravings, which de- lineate the usages, costumes, weapons, arts, and mythology of the ancients with a vividnesss that can be attained only by pictorial illustrations. The great feature of this edition is the scholarly and judicious commentary furnished in the appended Notes. The au- thor has here endeavored not to show his learning, but to supply such practical aid as will enable the pupil to understand and appre- ciate what he reads. The notes are just full enough, thoroughly explaining the most difficult passages, while they are not so ex- tended as to take all labor off the pupil’s Hands. Properly used, they cannot fail to impart an intelligent acquaintance with the syntax of the language. In a word, this work is commended to teachers as the most elegant, accurate, interesting, and practically useful edition of the Aineid that has yet been published.

From Joux H. Brunner, President of Hiwasse College. “The typography, paper, and binding of Virgil’s Aineid, by Prof. Freize, are all that need be desired; while the learned and judicious notes appended, are very valuable indeed.”

From Principal of Predrmont ( Va.) Academy.

“TJ have to thank you for a copy of Prof, Frieze’s edition of the Aineid. I have been exceedingly pleased in my examination of it. The size of the type from which the text is printed, and the faultless execution, leave nothing to be desired in these respects, The adherence to a standard text throughout, increases the value of this edition.”

From D. G. Moor, Principal U. High School, Rutland. “The copy of Frieze’s ‘ Virgil’ forwarded to me was duly received. It it so eyi dently superior to any of the other editions, that I shall mpneatingly, adopt it in my classes.”

“ “j be ,

D. APPLETON & COlS PUBLICATIONS.

Seoane, Neuman, and Baretti’s Spanish and English, and English and Spanish Pronouncing Dictionary.

By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, Professor of *he Spanish Language and Literature in Columbia College, N. Y., and Corresponding Member of the National Institute, Washington. Large 8vo, 1,300 pages. Neat type, fine paper, and strong binding.

The pronunciation of the Castilian language is so clearly set forth in this Dictionary, as to render it well-nigh impossible for any person who can read English readily, to fail of obtaining the true sounds of the Spanish words at sight.

In’ the revision of the ake’ more than eight thousand words, idioms, - and familiar phrases have been added.

It gives in both languages the exact equivalents of the words in general use, both in their literal and metaphorical acceptations,

Also, the technical terms most frequently used in the arts, in chemistry, botany, medicine, and natural history, as well as nautical and mercantile terms and phrases—most of which are not found in other Dictionaries.

Also many Spanish words used only in American countries which were formerly dependencies of Spain.

The names of many important articles of commerce, gleaned from the price currents of Spanish and South American cities, are inserted for the benefit of the merchant, who will here find all that he needs for carrying on a business correspondence.

The parts of the irregular verbs in Spanish and English are here, for the first time, given in full, in their alphabetical order.

The work likewise contains a grammatical synopsis of both languages, arranged for ready and convenient reference.

The new and improved orthography sanctioned by the latest edition of the Dictionary of the Academy—now universally adopted by the press—is here given for the first time in a Spanish and English Dictionary.

An Abridgment of Velazquez’s Large Dictionary, INTENDED FoR ScHooLs, COLLEGES, AND TRAVELLERS. In Two Parts :—I. Spanish-English: II. English-Spanish.. By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 12mo, 888 pages.”

Hadley, James, 1821-1872. A Greek grammar, for schools

and colleges. —-

Se

:

7 ! *% ise Sale nit RY - . tk HE made ARELRL ler@me de” poner Ric. wate DAR dy pe S]

Lppiivets| + have eee ur) e unite Ae i i rnd + ag

Lay), apntut

nine

4

me Asha atria

pe hete mele fied

My Jilted}! het f sy he

heim aly neti) y bo :

vere OR i; 214 4 vapor ee bp)e ~" YY pe i

Sites EF e TAOS epee bine, said nied. ce eA ah

ari ell boe

aa oie lata 2 pon Sm OE TF i, | {e eS

ot a itt

me bey is Hite) be Oe Papeley Tee hme Te ee One te $208 Metis teps

ies Spebiameutt ce atakh i ch,

4 t fie are Trike \ tA

bas ele ¢ Me WBS ate eh t bd Bb iene he) by Ml ipdisiess veal tiee " ad Wake aie | Wry lett nate em Thowhepebeitne) pe! tele» ie” be ae

iy ACA ws ne TV OY aang vir Pets Seite phe oye e TRS

‘an eer Wn ee rt eae pelt pete Made tye fein

.

wre* it Fyale 5 iihe tere Fie " ane